Femap: Commands

FEMAP
Commands
Version 9.3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Proprietary and Restricted Rights Notice
2007 UGS Corp. All Rights Reserved. This software and related documentation are proprietary to UGS Corp.
All trademarks belong to their respective holders.
UGS
Web: http://www.femap.com
Customer Support
Phone: (714) 952-5444, (800) 955-0000 (In US & Canada)
Web: http://support.ugs.com
Conventions
This manual uses different fonts to highlight command names or input that you must type.
Throughout this manual, you will see references to Windows. Windows refers to Microsoft
Windows 2000, Win-

dows Me, or Windows XP. You will need one of these operating environments to run FEMAP for the PC. This
manual assumes that you are familiar with the general use of the operating environment. If you are not, you can
refer to the Windows Users Guide for additional assistance.
Similarly, throughout the manual all references to FEMAP, refer to the latest version of our software.
Special note about customers using Windows Vista:
FEMAP 9.3 is being released close to the same time as the initial release of Windows Vista. Although we have
tested FEMAP on Windows Vista with much success, there are issues with many graphics cards and drivers not
being available for Vista at this time, which may cause issues in FEMAP. Currently, Windows Vista is an unsup-
ported platform.
a:setup Shows text that you should type.
OK, Cancel Shows a command name or text that you will see in a
dialog box.

1Table of Contents
Proprietary and Restricted Rights Notice
1 Table of Contents
1. Introduction
2. File Manipulation
2.1 Opening a Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 File, New... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 File, Open... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.3 File, Close... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.4 File, Close All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Saving the Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.1 File, Save... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.2 File, Save As... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.3 File, Save All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.4 File, Timed Save... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Importing/Exporting Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.1 File, Import Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.2 File, Export Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3.3 File, Analyze... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4 Using Notes and References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4.1 File, Notes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4.2 File, References... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.5 Using Print, Copy, and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
2.5.1 File, Page Setup... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
2.5.2 File, Print... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
2.5.3 File, Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
2.5.4 File, Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5.5 File, Messages Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
2.6 Using Rebuild and Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
2.6.1 File, Rebuild... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
2.6.2 File, Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
2.7 Using File, Recent Models - 1,2,3,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
2.8 Exiting FEMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
3. Geometry
3.1 Creating Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Geometry, Point... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Creating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.2.3 Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
3.2.4 Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
3.2.5 Curves from Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
3.3 Creating Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
3.3.1 Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
3.3.2 Boundary Surfaces... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
3.3.3 Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
3.3.4 Midsurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
3.4 Creating Solids/Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.4.1 Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.4.2 Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
3.5 Copying Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
3.5.1 Geometry, Copy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
3.5.2 Geometry, Radial Copy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
3.5.3 Geometry, Scale Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
3.5.4 Geometry, Rotate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
3.5.5 Geometry, Reflect Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
TOC-2 Table of Contents
3.6 Modifying Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.6.1 Curve Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.6.2 Moving Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.6.3 Edit/Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.6.4 Advanced Updates - Modify, Update Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3.7 Deleting Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
4. Finite Element Modeling
4.1 Creating Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Model, Coord Sys... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Creating Finite Element Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Model, Node... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Model, Element... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.3 Model, Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.4 Model, Property... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.2.5 Model, Layup... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.3 Creating Loads And Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.3.1 Create/Activate Load Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.3.2 Load Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.3.3 Finite Element Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.3.4 Geometric Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.3.5 Load Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.3.6 Load Set Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.3.7 Activate/Create Constraint Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.3.8 Constraint Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4.3.9 Finite Element (Nodal) Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.3.10 Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.3.11 Constraint Set Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.4 Creating Connections and Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.4.1 Connect, Automatic... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.4.2 Connect, Surfaces... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.4.3 Connect, Connection Property... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.4.4 Connect, Connection Region... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4.4.5 Connect, Connector... (Contact Pair) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.4.6 Connect, Fluid Region... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.4.7 Connect, Bolt Region... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
4.4.8 Connect, Rotor Region... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
4.5 Using Optimization Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.5.1 Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.5.2 Vary - Design Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.5.3 Limit - Design Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.6 Working with Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4.7 Modifying FEA Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4.7.1 Moving FEA Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4.7.2 Edit/Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
4.7.3 Advanced Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
4.8 Deleting FEA Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.9 Preparing for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.9.1 Defining a Analysis Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4.9.2 Running the Analysis with an Analysis Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
5. Meshing
5.1 Meshing on Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 Mesh, Mesh Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Mesh, Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2 Non-Geometry Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.2.1 Mesh, Between... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.2.2 Mesh, Region... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.2.3 Mesh, Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.2.4 Mesh, Transition... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.3 Modifying a Mesh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.3.1 Mesh, Editing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.3.2 Mesh, Remesh Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.3.3 Mesh, Edge Members... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.3.4 Mesh, Smooth... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.4 Copying a Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Table of Contents TOC-3
5.4.1 Mesh, Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
5.4.2 Mesh, Radial Copy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56
5.4.3 Mesh, Scale Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56
5.4.4 Mesh, Rotate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57
5.5 Meshing by Extruding, Revolving, and Sweeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58
5.5.1 Mesh, Extrude Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59
5.5.2 Mesh, Revolve Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
5.5.3 Mesh, Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
6. Viewing Your Model
6.1 View Activation, Management, and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 View, Set... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 View, All Views... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.3 View, Background... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.4 View, Layers... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.5 View, Select and View, Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.6 View, Advanced Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
6.2 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
6.2.1 View, Rotate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
6.2.2 View, Align By Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
6.2.3 View, Autoscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
6.2.4 View, Magnify... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
6.2.5 View, Zoom... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
6.2.6 View, UnZoom... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
6.2.7 View, Center... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
6.2.8 View, Pan... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
6.2.9 Deleting Views (Delete, View command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
6.3 Window Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
6.3.1 Manipulating Multiple View Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
6.3.2 Redrawing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
6.4 Groups and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
6.4.1 Differences Between Groups and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
6.4.2 Layer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
6.4.3 Group Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44
6.4.4 Deleting Groups (Delete, Group command). . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-62
6.4.5 Renumbering Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
7. Modeling Tools
7.1 Undo and Workplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Undo and Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.2 Tools, Workplane... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Dockable Panes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.1 Tools, Model Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.2 Tools, Entity Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
7.2.3 Tools, Data Surface Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
7.2.4 Tools, Entity Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39
7.2.5 Tools, Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
7.2.6 Tools, Programming, API Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
7.2.7 Tools, Programming, Program File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
7.2.8 Tools, Other Windows, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63
7.2.9 Tools, Other Windows, Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-65
7.3 Tools, Toolbars... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-65
7.3.1 Standard toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-65
7.4 Other FEMAP Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-89
7.4.1 Tools, Parameters... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-89
7.4.2 Tools, Convert Units... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-90
7.4.3 Entity Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-92
7.4.4 Measuring Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-94
7.4.5 Checking Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-98
7.4.6 Tools, Stress Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-109
7.5 List Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-112
7.5.1 List, Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-112
7.5.2 List, Geometry Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-113
7.5.3 List, Surface... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-115
7.5.4 List, Connection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-118
7.5.5 List, Model Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-119
7.5.6 List, Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-127
7.5.7 List, Group... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-128
7.5.8 List, View... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-128
7.5.9 List, Model Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-130
7.5.10 List, Destination... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-130
7.6 Model Style (View, Select command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-131
7.6.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-131
7.6.2 Hidden Line Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-131
7.6.3 Free Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-131
7.6.4 Free Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-131
8. Post-Processing
8.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Reading Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.2 Selecting Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.3 Changing Options (View Options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.4 Manipulating/Listing Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Types of Views - View Select... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.1 Selecting Data for a Model Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.2 Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.3 Choosing an XY Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.3 View Options - PostProcessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.3.1 Post Titles... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.3.2 Deformed Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.3.3 Vector Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.3.4 Animated Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.3.5 Deformed Model... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.3.6 Undeformed Model... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.3.7 Trace Style... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.3.8 Contour Type... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.3.9 Contour/Criteria Style... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.3.10 Contour/Criteria Levels... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.3.11 Contour/Criteria Legend... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8.3.12 Criteria Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.3.13 Criteria - Elements that Pass/Fail... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.3.14 Beam Diagram... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.3.15 IsoSurface... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.3.16 IsoLine... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.3.17 Streamline... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.3.18 Contour Vector Style... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.3.19 XY Titles... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.3.20 XY Legend... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.3.21 XY Axes Style... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.3.22 XY X Range/Grid... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.3.23 XY Y Range/Grid... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.3.24 XY Curve 1 through XY Curve 9... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.4 Specialized Post-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.4.1 View, Advanced Post, Animation... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.4.2 View, Advanced Post, Dynamic Cutting Plane... . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8.4.3 View, Advanced Post, Dynamic IsoSurface... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8.4.4 View, Advanced Post, Dynamic Streamline... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.5 Output Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.5.1 Model, Output, Set... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8.5.2 Model, Output, Vector... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8.5.3 Model, Output, Define... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8.5.4 Model, Output, Fill... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8.5.5 Model, Output, Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8.5.6 Model, Output, Calculate... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.5.7 Model, Output, From Load... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.5.8 Model, Output, Transform... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
8.5.9 Model, Output, Extrapolate... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.5.10 Model, Output, Convert Complex... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.5.11 Model, Output, Expand Complex... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.6 Listing Output (List, Output Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8.6.1 List, Output, Query... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8.6.2 List, Output, Compare... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Table of Contents TOC-5
8.6.3 List, Output, Summary to Data Table.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
8.6.4 List, Output, Results to Data Table... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-53
8.6.5 List, Output, Nodal Changes to Data Table... . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
8.6.6 List, Output, Unformatted... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-55
8.6.7 List, Output, Standard... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-56
8.6.8 List, Output, Use Format... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57
8.6.9 List, Output, Force Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-59
8.6.10 List, Output, XY Plot... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-60
8.6.11 List, Output, Format... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-60
8.7 Deleting Output (Delete, Output Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-60
8.7.1 Delete, Output Set... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-60
8.7.2 Delete, Output Vector... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61
8.7.3 Delete, Output, Entry... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61
8.7.4 Delete, Output, Format... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61
9. Help and Non-Menu
9.1 Help Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.1 Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.2 Help, Toolbars... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.3 Help, Dockable Panes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.4 Help, Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.5 Help, Whats New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.6 Help, Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.7 Help, Using Help... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.8 Help, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.9 Help, Basic Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.10 Help, Tip of the Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.11 Help, FEMAP on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.12 Help, Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.13 Help, About... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2 Non-Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.1 Previous Command... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 View, Quick Options... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.3 Dialog Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
1. Introduction
FEMAP is finite element modeling and post-processing software that allows you to perform engineering analyses
both quickly and confidently. FEMAP provides the capability to develop sophisticated analyses of stress, tempera-
ture, and dynamic performance directly on the desktop. With easy access to CAD and office automation tools, pro-
ductivity is dramatically improved compared to traditional approaches.
FEMAP automatically provides the integration that is necessary to link all aspects of your analysis. FEMAP can be
used to create geometry, or you can import CAD geometry. FEMAP provides powerful tools for meshing geometry,
as well as applying loads and boundary conditions. You may then use FEMAP to export an input file to over 20
finite element codes. FEMAP can also read the results from the solver program. Once results are obtained in
FEMAP, a wide variety of tools are available for visualizing and reporting on your results.
Geometry
FEMAP can directly import geometry from your CAD or design system. In fact, FEMAP can directly import a
solid model from any ACIS-based or Parasolid-based modeling package. If your modeling package does not use
either of these geometry engines, you can use the FEMAP IGES or STEP reader. If you are using I-DEAS, you can
bring a single part into FEMAP by exporting a Viewer XML (IDI) file from I-DEAS. These files can be read and
then stitched together to form a solid. This typically requires using one command.
If you do not have CAD geometry, you can create geometry directly in FEMAP using powerful wireframe and
solid modeling tools. Solid modeling directly in FEMAP uses the robust Parasolid modeling engine. You can build
or modify solid models using the Parasolid engine, and then export the geometry out of FEMAP. This is very con-
venient if you need to export geometry to CAD packages that are Parasolid-based.
Finite Element Modeling
Regardless of the origin of your geometry, you can use FEMAP to create a complete finite element model. Meshes
can be created by many methods ranging from manual creation, to mapped meshing between keypoints, to fully
automatic meshing of curves, surfaces and solids. FEMAP can even work with your existing analysis models. You
can import and manipulate these models using the interfaces to any of the supported analysis programs.
Appropriate materials and section properties can be created or assigned from FEMAP libraries. Many types of con-
straint and loading conditions can be applied to represent the design environment. You can apply loads/constraints
directly on finite element entities (nodes and elements), or you can apply them to geometry. FEMAP will automat-
ically convert geometric conditions to nodal/elemental values upon translation to your solver program. You may
even convert these loads before translation to convince yourself that the loading conditions are appropriate for your
model.
Checking Your Model
At every step of the modeling process, you receive graphical verification of your progress. You need not worry
about making a mistake because FEMAP contains a multi-level undo and redo capability.
FEMAP also provides extensive tools for checking your model before you analyze it to give you the confidence
that you have properly modeled your part. It constantly examines input to prevent errors in the model, and provides
immediate visual feedback. FEMAP also provides a comprehensive set of tools to evaluate your finite element
model and identify errors that are often not obvious. For example, FEMAP can check for coincident geometry, find
improper connections, estimate mass and inertia, evaluate your constraint conditions, and sum your loading condi-
tions. Each of these methods can be used to identify and eliminate potential errors, saving you considerable time
and money.
Analyzing Your Model
When your model is complete, FEMAP provides interface to over 20 popular programs to perform finite element
analysis. You can even import a model from one analysis program and automatically convert it to the format for a
different analysis program.
1-2 Introduction
The NX Nastran for FEMAP solver is a general finite element analysis program for structural and thermal analysis
that is integrated with FEMAP.
Post-processing
After your analysis, FEMAP provides both powerful visualization tools that enable you to quickly interpret results,
and numerical tools to search, report, and perform further calculations using these results. Deformation plots, con-
tour plots, animations, and XY plots are just some of the post-processing tools available to the FEMAP user.
FEMAP supports OpenGL, which provides even more capability for post-processing, including dynamic visualiza-
tion of contours through solid parts. You can dynamically rotate solid contoured models with one push of your
mouse button. Section cuts and isosurfaces can be viewed dynamically by simply moving your cursor.
Documenting Results
Documentation is also a very important factor with any analysis. FEMAP obviously provides direct, high quality
printing and plotting of both graphics and text. Frequently, however, graphics or text must be incorporated into a
larger report or presentation. FEMAP can export both graphics and text to non-engineering programs with a simple
Windows Cut command. You can easily export pictures to popular programs such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft
Power Point, and Adobe Framemaker. You can export to spreadsheets, databases, word processors, desktop pub-
lishing software, and paint and illustration programs. These links enable you to create and publish a complete
report or presentation, all electronically, right on your desktop.
With support for AVI files, you can even include an animation directly in your Power Point Presentation or Word
document. FEMAP also supports VRML and JPEG format so anyone can easily view results with standard view-
ers.
FEMAP Documentation
FEMAP comes with a set of three printed manuals: FEMAP Examples, the FEMAP User Guide, and the FEMAP
Commands reference manual.
The FEMAP online help includes the contents of these manuals, as well as several additional books. The complete
set includes:
FEMAP Examples: Step-by-step examples for new users.
FEMAP User Guide: General information on how to use FEMAP, including an overview of the finite element
modeling process. Also contains reference information for the FEMAP analysis program and geometry inter-
faces.
FEMAP Commands: Detailed information on how to use FEMAP commands.
FEMAP API Reference: Information on how to write your own applications that work with FEMAP.
Whats New: New features for this release.
When NX Nastran for FEMAP is installed, online help includes all of the above, as well as a full set of current NX
Nastran documentation, to assist you during the solving portion of the analysis process.
2. File Manipulation
This topic describes the File menu commands. These commands work with new or existing FEMAP models. They
can produce printed or plotted hard copy, and transfer both text and graphics to other Windows and analysis pro-
grams.
The commands on the File menu are described in the following sections:
Section 2.1, "Opening a Model File"
Section 2.2, "Saving the Model File"
Section 2.3, "Importing/Exporting Files"
Section 2.4, "Using Notes and References"
Section 2.5, "Using Print, Copy, and Paste"
Section 2.6, "Using Rebuild and Preferences"
Section 2.7, "Using File, Recent Models - 1,2,3,4"
Section 2.8, "Exiting FEMAP"
2.1 Opening a Model File
This section contains three commands, File, New, which opens a new FEMAP model file, File, Open, which allows
you to access an existing FEMAP model file, and File, Close, which allows you to close any active model. The
FEMAP model file is a binary database of everything contained in the FEMAP file. You can have multiple model
files open in a given FEMAP session. All three commands are discussed further below.
2.1.1 File, New...
... starts a new, empty model. All new models are named Untitled. When you save a model, FEMAP will prompt
you give the model a name. (For information on how to save your current model, see Section 2.2, "Saving the
Model File".) The FEMAP main window title bar will change to show the model name once saved.
When you start FEMAP without specifying a model file name on the command line or the ? command line
option, you begin with a new, empty model. This is just like using the File, New command.
2.1.2 File, Open...
... accesses an existing FEMAP model. File, Open uses the standard file access dialog box to request the file name
of the model you wish to use. The default file name extension is *.MOD. Multiple FEMAP models can be open in
the same FEMAP session. Click the title tabs at the top of the graphics window to switch between open models and
views.
The title bar for the FEMAP main window shows the file name of your active model. When you open a model, it
returns to the screen with the same graphics windows active (and in the same position) as when you saved the file.
When multiple views are open in one model, the view names will appear on title tabs above the FEMAP graphics
window. When multiple models are open, the title tabs will show the file name of the model and the view name in
the following format, File Name.mod : View Name.
Note: If you are having a problem opening a file, check to confirm that the file has only one extension. Files
with two extensions may have difficulty being opened due to the Windows file structures and default
parameters. Also, you may want to remove any spaces in the file name. Spaces are typically not a prob-
lem, but may cause difficulty on certain file systems.
Shift+F4
2-2 Finite Element Modeling
If you start FEMAP and specify a model file name on the command line, FEMAP will open that model just as if
you opened the file using this command. You can also start FEMAP using the ? command line option. This will
display the standard file access dialog box just like File, Open.
You can also open an existing FEMAP model by dragging and dropping a FEMAP model file (*.MOD file) from
an existing directory window onto an open FEMAP interface. If the model is from the current FEMAP version, it
will simply open the model. If the model is from an older version of FEMAP (8.3 and below), FEMAP will alert
you and ask if it OK to import a FEMAP neutral file. (See Section 2.3.1.4, "File, Import, FEMAP Neutral..." for
more details on the FEMAP neutral file).
2.1.3 File, Close...
... allows you to close the model file that is currently active in FEMAP. If only one model is open, File, Close will
close the model, but FEMAP will remain running without a model until a new model is started using File, New, an
existing model is opened using File, Open, or FEMAP is shut down using File, Exit. When multiple models are
open, this command will only close the active model and the associated views, leaving the other open models run-
ning for continued use. FEMAP will always prompt you to save your model when the last open view is being
closed.
2.1.4 File, Close All
... closes all currently open models in your FEMAP session with one command. Only available when multiple
models are open in the same FEMAP session. FEMAP will prompt you to save each model individually when this
command is used.
2.2 Saving the Model File
FEMAP also has four commands which allow you to save the FEMAP binary database (model file). They are:
File, Save, which saves the file under the existing name,
File, Save As, which allows you to change the model filename,
File, Save All, which saves all the open files under their existing names,
File, Timed Save, which allows periodic saving of the model file automatically.
2.2.1 File, Save...
... writes a copy of your active model to the permanent file you specify. If your active model is Untitled, this
command asks for a filename by calling File, Save As. You must specify a file name, or you cannot save an Unti-
tled model. Whenever you are working on an active named model, File, Save simply writes to the same model file
- without prompting for a file name. Your model will be named if you open an existing model file, or if you had
previously saved the model. If you want to write to a different file, use File, Save As.
When to Save
When you work on a FEMAP model, all changes are retained in memory, and in a temporary disk file. Your origi-
nal model will not be updated until you save the data. This can be a mixed blessing. If you make a mistake, you can
simply use File, Open to revert to your original model file. You will be right back to where you did your last save.
On the other hand, if you accidentally turn your computer off, or forget to save your changes, they WILL be lost.
In general, you should save whenever you make a significant change to your model and you are certain the change
is correct. It usually does not take long to save the model, and the benefits can be well worth the time. Alterna-
tively, you can use the File, Timed Save command to save your model automatically, at a time interval that you
specify.
F4
File, Save As... 2-3
2.2.2 File, Save As...
... is identical to File, Save, except that it always displays the standard file access dialog box to ask for the name of
the file to write. File, Save automatically calls File, Save As if you are working on an Untitled model. You should
only use this command when you want to save your model with a different file name.
2.2.3 File, Save All
... saves all currently open models in your FEMAP session with one command. Only available when multiple mod-
els are open in the same FEMAP session. FEMAP saves the models in the order in which they were open, so the
first model opened will be the first model saved and so on.
2.2.4 File, Timed Save...
... instructs FEMAP to save all open models automatically either at a specified time interval or after a number of
commands have been performed. It allows you to turn timed save on or off and set the time between automatic
saves. The default settings for this option can be set in File, Preferences, Database.
You also can request FEMAP to notify you prior to automatically
saving your open models. If you choose this option, you can skip a
timed save by canceling FEMAP's notification. Even if you cancel,
however, timed save is still active and will notify you again when
the interval expires. To disable timed save, you must turn it off with
File, Timed Save.
If you are working with an 'Untitled' model, you must specify a file
name before the model can be saved. This follows the normal pro-
cess, just like the File, Save As command. If your open models are
not named, they will be saved to specified file names.
Unlike some other programs, FEMAP does not interrupt your com-
mands to save your open models. After the interval has expired,
FEMAP waits until the end of your next command to save your open
models. This means that FEMAP will never automatically save your
open models unless you are actively working on a specific model. If
you are not accessing any FEMAP commands, Timed Save will be inactive; however, the timer will continue to run.
In many cases, you will find that Timed Save will save your open models after the next command that you access.
2.3 Importing/Exporting Files
The next menu commands under the File command allow you to both import and export data. FEMAP works as a
general pre and post-processor for finite element analysis. You may also import and export geometry, as well as
analyze your model if you have loaded one for the many solver programs that can be automatically executed by
FEMAP. The commands under this area of the menu are explained more fully below.
2.3.1 File, Import Menu
The File, Import commands enable you to import information from CAD packages as well as other FEA codes.
There are four commands based upon the type of information to import. You can import geometry from CAD pack-
ages, the analysis model from other FEA codes, the results from FEA solver codes, or a FEMAP neutral file. Each
command is further explained below.
2.3.1.1 File, Import, Geometry...
... is the interface between FEMAP and other CAD programs. When you select this command, you will see the
standard Windows file section dialog box. There are many types of geometry files which FEMAP can import:
ACIS Solid Model Files - *.SAT files (up to version 15)
Parasolid Solid Model Files - *.X_T files (up to version 17)
IGES Files - *.IGS files (4.0 to 5.3)
STEP Files - *.STP files (AP203 and AP214 geometry)
Stereolithography Files - *.STL files
Wireframe Files - *.DXF files.
CATIA V4 Models - *.MDL files (version 4.1.9 to 4.2.4)
CATIA V4 Express Files - *.EXP, *.DLV files
CATIA V5 Files - *.CATP files (up to CATIA V5 Version 15)
I-DEAS Files - *.IDI files
Pro/ENGINEER Models - *.PRT and *.ASM files (versions 16 to Wildfire 2.0)
Solid Edge Models - *.PAR, *.PSM, *PWD, and *ASM files (up to version 18)
Unigraphics Models - *.PRT files (versions 11 to 18 and NX 1 - NX 4)
In each of these cases, simply select the file to import. Normally FEMAP will display all of the files that it knows
how to read, using the most common file name extensions for these formats. If your file uses a different extension,
you may rename it, or simply drop down the file type list, choose the appropriate format, then specify the file name.
If you do not use the standard extensions for each of the formats, and you are use the default All Geometry type,
FEMAP may choose the wrong format to read the file, which will result in errors. Depending upon the type of file
you choose, FEMAP may display information in the Messages window and then prompt you with one or more
additional dialog boxes where you can set various options. For more information on the options contained in the
dialog boxes, see Section 9, "Geometry Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.
You can also import some types of geometry into FEMAP by dragging and dropping a geometry file of a cur-
rently supported format (*.X_T; *.SAT; *.IGES or *.IGS; and *.STEP or *.STP only) from an existing directory
window onto an open FEMAP interface.
FEMAP will bring up a dialog box asking you if it is OK to Start New Model with dragged and dropped geom-
etry or if you would like to Add the geometry to Current Model. Click Yes to create a new model or No to add
it to the current model.
File, Import, Analysis Model... 2-5
2.3.1.2 File, Import, Analysis Model...
This command allows you to import an analysis model from many
popular FEA codes. FEMAP has support for over 20 finite element
solvers. By default, FEMAP will only show certain interfaces for
solvers whose translators are currently being maintained. Once you
select this command, you will see the Import From dialog box.
Simply select the appropriate code, and FEMAP will then prompt
you for the name of the input file. You may be asked other questions
based upon the format you have chosen. For a more details, see Sec-
tion 7, "Translation Tables for Analysis Programs" and Section 8,
"Analysis Program Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.
You can also import analysis models from some solvers into FEMAP by dragging and dropping an analysis file
of a currently supported format from an existing directory window onto an open FEMAP interface.
Currently supported analysis input files drag and drop include *.DAT and *.NAS for NASTRAN programs;
*.INP for ABAQUS; and *.ANS for ANSYS. All of these file types can be read in for the version of the solver cur-
rently supported by the FEMAP translators. (For a more details, see Section 7, "Translation Tables for Analysis
Programs" and Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.)
FEMAP will bring up a dialog box asking you if it is OK to Start New Model with dragged and dropped anal-
ysis input file or if you would like to Add the input file to Current Model. Click Yes to create a new model or
No to add it to the current model.
2.3.1.3 File, Import, Analysis Results...
... allows you to read results from an analysis you have performed, so you can then use FEMAPs powerful post-
processing capability. When you choose this command, you will see the same dialog box as the File, Import, Anal-
ysis Model. Simply select the appropriate format and then enter the file name. For more information on the individ-
ual solver codes supported, see Section 7, "Translation Tables for Analysis Programs" and Section 8, "Analysis
Program Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.
You can also import analysis results from some solvers into FEMAP by dragging and dropping an results file of
a currently supported format from an existing directory window onto an open FEMAP interface.
Currently supported analysis results files for drag and drop include *.OP2, *.F06, and *.XDB for NASTRAN
programs; *.FIL for ABAQUS; and *.RST for ANSYS. All of these file types can be read in for the version of the
solver currently supported by the FEMAP translators. (For a more details, see Section 7, "Translation Tables for
Analysis Programs" and Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.)
After the file is dropped onto the FEMAP interface, FEMAP will bring up all dialog boxes which would nor-
mally appear when importing analysis results from a certain solver with the exception of the Import Results From
Note: All import options can be made visible by going to
File, Preferences..., choosing the Interfaces tab and
turning on the Enable Old Analysis Interfaces option.
This is not recommended as the translators for the
solvers not listed by default are no longer maintained
and the FEMAP may no longer read some required
entities.
Note: As with File, Import, Analysis Model, all import options can be made visible by going to File, Pref-
erences..., choosing the Interfaces tab and turning on the Enable Old Analysis Interfaces option.
This is not recommended as the translators for the solvers not listed by default are no longer main-
tained and the FEMAP may no longer read some required entities.
Ctrl+Shift+T
dialog box. FEMAP is able to skip the Import Results From dialog box because it has recognized which solver the
results file has come from already
2.3.1.4 File, Import, FEMAP Neutral...
... translates a FEMAP neutral file into a binary FEMAP database file. Once the FEMAP neutral file is read, you
can save this file as a FEMAP *.mod file. Because the FEMAP neutral file is compatible across all platforms, it is
the recommended format for long term storage. For more information on the FEMAP neutral file, see Section 8.1.2,
"Reading a FEMAP Neutral File" in the FEMAP User Guide.
You can also import a FEMAP neutral file into FEMAP by dragging and dropping a neutral file (*.NEU) from an
existing directory window onto an open FEMAP interface. The FEMAP neutral file MUST have been created with
either the current release or a previous release of FEMAP for import to be successful.
FEMAP will bring up a dialog box asking you if it is OK to Start
New Model with dragged and dropped neutral file or if you
would like to Add the geometry to Current Model. Click Yes
to create a new model or No to add it to the current model.
2.3.2 File, Export Menu
The File, Export menu allows you to export geometry, analysis model, or a FEMAP neutral file. Each of these areas
are described below.
2.3.2.1 File, Export, Geometry...
...provides export capability for FEMAP solid models. FEMAP cur-
rently supports various types of geometry export.
ACIS Solid Model Files - *.SAT files
Parasolid Solid Model Files - *.X_T files
STEP Files - *.STP
IGES Files - *.IGS
Stereolithography Files - *.STL files
VRML Files
The ACIS SAT interface will take geometry inside FEMAP and
generate a .SAT file using an Parasolid to ACIS converter. The STEP interface will allow you to export a Parasolid
entity to a STEP AP203 solid via a conversion from the Parasolid modeling kernel into the STEP standard. Simi-
larly, the IGES interface will allow you to export Parasolid geometry to an IGES file. The stereolithography file is
only applicable for a meshed model. FEMAP will export a faceted representation of your model using the FEA
mesh as the basis of this file. The final option, VRML, allows easy viewing of solid or meshed models in many
standard viewing programs. You can even save a deformed, contour plot in VRML format.
Note: You should always import analysis results into an existing model containing those nodes and elements.
If you read information for entities that do not exist in your model, FEMAP will provide a warning.
This could mean that you have read the results into the wrong (or modified) model.
File, Export, Analysis Model... 2-7
2.3.2.2 File, Export, Analysis Model...
This command is used to start the translation to a analysis
input file for a selected solver. FEMAP will display the
Export Method dialog box which allows the user to trans-
late using a Analysis Set or translate using the manual
method, specifying the analysis parameters each time the
active model is translated.
Activate Analysis Set: The list box will contain any
previously created Analysis Sets. If a Analysis Set has
already been activated then that set will automatically
be selected. Once you choose the Analysis Set you
wish to translate from, press the OK button to create
the input file.
Create/Edit Set: If you have not previously created a Analysis Set, pressing this button will bring you to the
Model, Analysis command so that you can create or edit a existing Analysis Set. See Section 4.9, "Preparing for
Analysis" and Section 4.9.1, "Defining a Analysis Set"
Other Interfaces: Pressing this button will bring up the Export To
dialog box. When you select this command, you will see the
available analysis programs for export include the FEMAP Neu-
tral file, SINDA/G, CAEFEM, PATRAN, I-DEAS, and Comma-
Separated file. Simply select the appropriate format. Unlike File,
Import, Analysis Model, however, you will need to select the
appropriate analysis type (Static, Normal Modes/Eigenvalue,
etc.), when required. These are the only programs FEMAP can
export a file to unless the Enable Old Analysis Interfaces
option is checked on the Interfaces tab of the Preferences dialog
box.
For a more complete description of the options available for each analysis program, see Section 8, "Analysis Pro-
gram Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.
2.3.2.3 File, Export, FEMAP Neutral...
... allows you to store the FEMAP model file as a neutral file. Because the FEMAP neutral file is compatible across
all platforms, it is the recommended format for long term storage. For more information on the FEMAP neutral file,
see Section 8.1.1, "Writing a FEMAP Neutral File" in the FEMAP User Guide.
Note: The preferred method of exporting an analysis model is to use the Analysis Set Manager. Support for
new features or expanded solver support will only be added to the Analysis Set Manager. For solvers
supported by the Analysis Manager see: Section 4.9, "Preparing for Analysis"
When you create an Analysis Set all the options necessary for solving are defined once and saved with
the model or in a library. This enables the user to reuse the Analysis Sets and for FEMAP to create the
input file without user interaction
Note: To translate using the old method of specifying the analysis parameters by prompting you to
fill in the necessary options (for ALL supported solvers) you must use File, Preferences...,
choose the Interfaces tab and turn on the Enable Old Analysis Interfaces option. With this
option turned on, the Export To dialog box from FEMAP versions 9.1 and before will appear.
This is not recommended as the translators for ALL solvers (including Nastran, ANSYS, and
ABAQUS) using the old method are no longer maintained and any option added to or fixed in
a translator after FEMAP version 8.0 will likely not be included in the input file generated.
Ctrl+T
2.3.3 File, Analyze...
File, Analyze works similarly to File, Export, Analysis Model except if a Analysis Set is active then femap will sim-
ply write the model and try to launch the solver without user input. If an Analysis Set is not Active then the Export
Model dialog box will be displayed so that the user can create an Analysis Set or translate using the Manual method
by pressing the Manually Create Analysis Model button. If Manual creation of the input file is used then FEMAP
will determine the analysis program and analysis type from the settings that you chose in File, Preferences, Inter-
faces.
In the cases where FEMAP can run the analysis program, this command will also optionally begin the analysis.
2.4 Using Notes and References
2.4.1 File, Notes...
The File, Notes command pro-
vides a method of attaching notes
to your model as well as translate
lines to your model input file.
When you select this command,
the Model Notes and Text for
Translation dialog box will
appear.
This command is most often used
to provide identifying characteris-
tics to your model, such as date,
program, creator etc.
You may also provide information
for translation by selecting the
Translation Text option. You can
choose to include the translation
text in an output file by selecting
the Include During Write Transla-
tion option. When these com-
mands are selected, FEMAP will
automatically write this informa-
tion to the heading area (i.e. where
FEMAP automatically writes its
own date/time information) of
your active model.
2.4.2 File, References...
The File, References command allows you to insure that you are using the most current version of certain entities in
a given model. A single model can contain references for any number of imported files (Geometry, analysis mod-
els, and analysis results sets). References can be added or removed manually or FEMAP can be set up to create
them automatically based on settings in the File Reference Options in the Interface Preferences dialog box (See
Section 2.6.2.7, "Interfaces").
Note: Be careful when using the Translation Text option. The information included in the Notes area must
have the appropriate syntax for the type of translation you are performing. FEMAP will not perform
any checks on this syntax. It will simply write the information as you input it; therefore, improper syn-
tax could cause a fatal error in your analysis run.
File, References... 2-9
If FEMAP is generating references automatically, they will appear after the geometry, analysis model, or analysis
results have been imported and reference a path to a particular file. FEMAP uses the time stamp on the file to
determine if the reference is up to date or not.
A check mark in a green circle will appear if the date of a reference file has not changed.
When the date of a file that is being referenced has been changed, a x in a red circle will appear next to the refer-
ence.
There are a few methods to bring a reference up to date:
Read File - Allows you to read in the updated file from the location currently specified in the reference.
Update Reference - Allows you to manually bring a reference up to the current date. This allows to continue to use
the model without being alerted that the reference is not up to date, even though you did not read the new file in to
FEMAP. A check mark in a yellow circle will appear next to the reference after the date has been updated.
If the file is changed again after the Update Reference command has been used, FEMAP will again alert you that
the reference is no longer valid. You can then make the decision to use the Read File command or simply update
the reference once again.
Locate File - If the reference file has moved to a different directory, this command allows you to browse and spec-
ify the path to the moved file in order to update the reference.
Remove Reference - Allows you to remove a reference from the list and FEMAP will no longer check to make
sure that this reference is up to date.
Add Reference - Allows you to manually add a reference to the FEMAP model for geometry, analysis models, and
analysis results sets.
Note: Depending on the type of geometry file that was referenced (.x_t, .sat, .igs, .stp, etc.) and the extent the
geometry was changed can have a substantial effect on the usability of the mesh and any geometry-
based loads and boundary conditions that are currently in the model. Be sure to verify all loads and
boundary conditions in the model are correctly applied after new geometry file has been read into
FEMAP.
The same can be said about analysis models and results files as node and element numbering, loads and
boundary conditions can also change and cause continuity issues.
2.5 Using Print, Copy, and Paste
The commands under this section of the menu involve exporting information to a printer, or to documentation pro-
grams for reporting. FEMAP is a true Windows program, which greatly simplifies the transfer of data from
FEMAP to other Windows programs such as Microsoft PowerPoint or Word. The commands in this section involve
different methods of transferring this data to programs such as Microsoft Word, or to a printer. Each of the five
commands available in this section are explained more fully below.
2.5.1 File, Page Setup...
... specifies headers, footers, margins, position and other parameters. These items will be used when printing/plot-
ting either text or graphics using the File, Print command. The sections of the Page Setup dialog box include:
Page Header and Footer
The Header and Footer text are printed in the top and bottom margin of every page. This text uses the Default
Fixed Pitch Font for the selected printer/plotter. You can specify any other font by selecting Other Font, and then
specifying the typeface and point size that you want to use.
Other Printed Text
FEMAP uses these options when you print listings (with the List, Destination command). They are never used for
printing/plotting graphics nor for printing the Messages and other text windows. Just like headers and footers, this
text uses the Default Fixed Pitch Font. Again, you can select any other available font.
Note: If you are using True Type, or other scalable fonts, you will often see only one size in the Point Size list,
and it will usually be a very large: 50 point or larger. Since the font is scalable, you can choose any size
that you want; you just have to type it manually.
Hint: If the display looks fine on the screen, but characters are improperly printed, it is likely that your Win-
dows printer driver does not support the selected font. Simply change the font both in this dialog box as
well as under View Options, Label, Entities, and Colors, Label Parameters to a supported font.
Hint: FEMAP listings will not be as easy to read if you select a proportionally spaced font. Selecting a fixed
pitch font will properly align all columns in the listing.
Shift+F3
File, Page Setup... 2-11
Page Margins
These margins identify the distance from the four edges of the page where you want printing to occur. When you
are printing listings, printing will start at the top-left margin. The bottom and right margins will be used to compute
the line length and number of lines on the page. For graphics printing, FEMAP combines the margins with the
options in Plot Position and Size to compute the actual size and position of the graphics image.
Often printers and plotters cannot print closer than some minimum distance from the edge of the paper. Check your
printer documentation for information on these minimum values. Setting a margin smaller than those minimums
can result in FEMAP trying to print to an inaccessible region of the paper. This should not cause any unrecoverable
problems, but you will not see the portion of the print that is in the inaccessible regions.
Plot and Metafile Style
The three options in this group allow you to control some specific details regarding the appearance of a graphics
plot. FEMAP uses these options when you print a graphic image using File Print, or place an image in a Metafile
using either the File, Picture, Save or File, Picture, Copy commands. When Draw Border is active, a single line
border will be drawn around the image. The location of this border is equivalent to the on-screen window border.
In FEMAP's default configuration, graphic windows have black or shaded backgrounds, with white or colored
images. In many cases, you may want to retain the white background of the paper and print with black lines - even
though it does not match the image on the screen. In Render Mode, FEMAP will swap the black or shaded back-
ground to white and change any white entities to black, when a window is printed. When in Non-Render mode, set-
ting Swap Black and White will automatically reverse the black and white colors during your print, resulting in the
print style described. This option has no effect on other colors, which will always be printed as shown on the
screen. This option also controls color swapping for Metafiles that you transfer to the Clipboard using File, Picture,
Copy or save to disk using File, Picture, Save.
If you are printing to a black and white printer like a laser printer, you may find that certain colors that are dis-
played on the screen do not show up very well (or at all) when you print them. This is caused by the method Win-
dows uses to shade colors on the monochrome printer. To overcome this problem, you can change all your model
colors to black and white so they can print well, or just turn on the Monochrome switch. In this case, colors will still
be displayed on the screen, but all colors (except color 0, which is black) will be converted to white when they are
printed. You can combine Monochrome with the Swap Black and White setting to print all black lines on a white
background.
While the Monochrome option can quickly make a print look much better, it must be used with caution. Since it sets
all colors but background to a single color, it can result in a picture which is totally illegible. For example, you
should never use it if you are using a color other than color 0 for the background. If you try, nothing will be visible.
Similarly, any plot with filled areas is not usually a good candidate for Monochrome. Contour plots, which rely
heavily on color shading, will not work well.
Setting Transparent Background will simply skip plotting the background. For printing on white paper, you will
still want to use Swap Black and White. Otherwise, you will get white lines on your white paper! Transparent Back-
ground is most often used when creating a Metafile to be transferred into another application. Here, you may want
just the graphic image, and rely on the other application to supply the background. This creates an image that can
be overlaid on top of other text/graphics without erasing them.
Reset Clipping
When this option is turned on, FEMAP will reset the clipping region at the end of each drawing operation or win-
dow. This is not be required for most printers, so you may be able to turn it off. Certain printers, like DeskJets,
however have trouble printing multiple view layouts, headers and footers if this option is off. We therefore recom-
mend leaving this option on (which should work for all printers), unless you are experiencing some incorrect clip-
ping of graphics on printed images.
Pen Width Factor
This factor is used for Metafiles and plotting directly to a printer. In FEMAP, graphics are normally drawn as sin-
gle-pixel-width lines - that is they are only one dot wide. For high resolution printers, like typesetters, this type of
line may appear very faint due to the small size of each pixel on these devices. By increasing the Pen Width Factor,
the width of each line is multiplied by this factor to obtain a print with fatter lines. This option has no effect on
screen display
Render Res Factor
When you are printing graphics from Render mode, FEMAP can not print a Metafile to obtain printer resolution.
To provide printed output at higher than screen resolution, FEMAP instead creates an off-screen bitmap, renders
your image to that bitmap, and prints it just like a screen resolution print. While this is not printer resolution, it
does provide substantially improved resolution as compared to choosing to print at screen resolution. The factor
that you specify in this option is simply multiplied by the screen resolution to compute the size of the off-screen bit-
map. Therefore, if you specify 2, you get a print that is twice the screen resolution. Be careful not to specify a num-
ber that is too large. It will take quite a large amount of memory, and could take a very long time to print.
Plot Position and Size
These options control the shape, size and position of a graphics image that you print. Choosing Maintain Window
Aspect Ratio will force the height-to-width ratio of a printed image to match the shape of the screen or window that
you print. If you choose this option, the resulting print will be the largest possible rectangle, with the specified
height-to-width ratio that fits inside the margins and size options that you specify. Choosing this option will gener-
ally result in a smaller printed image, but one that more closely resembles what you see on the screen.
Integer Scaling is a further limitation to the mapping of the screen image to the printed page. When this option is
on, the pixels in the on-screen window are scaled by the largest integer (whole number) scale factor that fits inside
the margins and size specifications. Scaling occurs both horizontally and vertically. If the option is off, the scale
factor used is a real number (whole + fractional number) that exactly fits the margin and size specifications. Setting
this option usually results in a smaller printed image. When printing using bitmap formats however, you should
always specify this option for the best quality print. If you do not, FEMAP stretches the bitmap (by the fractional
portion of the real scale factor) to fit the margins. The stretching operation results in distortions that degrade the
appearance of the image.
Fill Printer Margins and Custom Size control the size of a printed graphic image. Choosing Fill Printer Margins
simply calculates the printable area by subtracting the margins from the size of the paper. Custom Size allows you
to specify the height and width that you want. Always make sure that you specify a size that is smaller than the
margins that you choose. No matter which size option you pick, the print may still be reduced from that size if you
selected either Maintain Window Aspect Ratio or Integer Scaling.
The final option sets (Top, T/B Center, Bottom, Left, L/R Center or Right) control the position of the printed image
within the margins. If you choose to fill the margins (and none of the other options reduce the image size) your
choice here will not matter: FEMAP fills the margins. Whenever the image does not fill the margins however, these
options control the alignment. For example, choosing Top and Left will result in an image that has its top and left
borders aligned with the top and left margins. By combining these alignment options with the margins, you can
position an image anywhere on the page.
Reset and Permanent
Permanent allows you to save your Page Setup options, so that they will be the defaults for all future models and
sessions. Reset deletes the saved options, and returns you to the normal FEMAP defaults.
2.5.2 File, Print...
This command produces a printed or plotted hardcopy of your model.
The Print dialog box allows you to choose what will be printed and in what format. You will see two command but-
tons, Page Setup and Printer Setup, which provide you with further control of printing parameters. These buttons
simply invoke the File, Page Setup and File, Printer Setup commands, respectively.
Print to File
This button allows you to print directly to a file rather than to your printer. It can be used to create files in a native
printer format (for example, Postscript). When you press OK, an additional dialog box will ask you for the name of
the file that you want to create.
Header and Footer
These options provide a quick way to set the headers and footers that will be placed at the top and bottom of the
page. They can also be set via the File, Page Setup command. In fact, you must use Page, Setup if you want to
change fonts or other options.
F3
File, Print... 2-13
Page Preview
This section of the dialog box shows a
symbolic graphical representation of your
printed page. It quickly lets you know if
your page and printer setup options are cor-
rect. You do not need to waste a piece of
paper, or the time required to make a print.
The outer black border represents the paper
on which you will print. FEMAP calculates
the size and orientation of this boundary
(and the paper) from your Windows printer
configuration. You can change these set-
tings using Printer Setup.
Inside this border you will see four lines
(Top, Bottom, Right and Left) that represent
relative margin positions. You also may see
shorter horizontal lines located inside the
top and bottom margins. These lines repre-
sent the locations where the page headers
and footers (specified in Page Setup) will
be printed. They are only visible if the
header and/or footer is not blank. Finally, located inside the margin lines, is a filled rectangle. This rectangle repre-
sents the size and position of your printed image. If the printed image is smaller than you expected, FEMAP may
have automatically reduced the size due to your Page Setup choices. Maintain Window Aspect Ratio and Integer
Scaling are especially important.
What to Print
These options specify what will be printed or plotted.
Selecting Active View will print a picture of your model as it currently appears in your graphics window. If you
currently have multiple graphics windows open (from one or multiple models), only the top-most (the one
that you last selected in the active model) window will be printed.
If you do have multiple windows, and want to print them all as they are positioned on your screen, choose the
Layout option. Layout is only available when you are printing at printer/plotter resolution with multiple active
windows.
Choosing Desktop will print an image of the FEMAP Desktop - the gray area underneath the Graphics win-
dow. This includes all windows: the Graphics window, dialog boxes, even non-FEMAP windows. This option
is only available if you choose the Screen Resolution option.
The next graphics printing choice allows you to print a graphic image stored in a file. You can choose Resolu-
tion, Screen to print a saved bitmap. If you choose Resolution, Printer/Plotter, FEMAP will print a saved Meta-
file or placeable Metafile. For the best results, you should always save and print placeable Metafiles. They
contain additional information that allows FEMAP to properly choose font sizes and scale the picture. If you
use standard Windows Metafiles, FEMAP will be able to print them, but the font sizes will vary somewhat
depending on the resolution of your printer and the resolution of the graphics adapter you used to create the
Metafile.
Other print options allow you to print text/messages that are in the Messages, Program File, Entity Info, or API
Program Dockable Panes. If you do not want to print all of the text in one of these Panes, you can select the
lines that will be printed. For instructions, see Section 2.5.5, "File, Messages Menu". When you are printing
Hint: FEMAP can only print a multi-window layout as it is arranged on the screen with the Layout or
Desktop options. Best results are usually obtained with Layout if you turn off the graphics window
title bars. Otherwise, you will see gaps between the printed windows that represent the areas occu-
pied by the title bars. In Layout mode, the Page Preview diagram shows one overall rectangle that
surrounds all of your windows. Individual windows are not shown. For even more printing flexibil-
ity, you can transfer FEMAP graphics to other Windows programs which will allow you to print
other page layouts.
Printed Image
Header Footer
Image Orientation
messages, the Resolution setting and the shape of the active graphics window do not matter. When you choose
this option, you will see the printed image disappear from the Page Preview area. Dont worry; this is normal
behavior, because the position of the printed messages is just based on the margin settings.
Using the Data Table option will print out all of the rows that currently appear in the Data Table. When the
Data Table is printed out, all of the columns for the rows will also be printed out. Since the columns in the Data
Table will often be wider than the screen (or a sheet of paper), FEMAP will print out as many columns as it can
for the current rows, then continue with the next set of columns for those rows directly below the first set of col-
umns. This will continue until all of the columns for all of the current rows have been printed. To make the
printed tables easier to read, the ID of the entities will appear as the first column in the printed table.
The print out will look like this:
Resolution
You have two choices for the print/plot resolution mode: screen and printer/plotter.
Screen resolution directs FEMAP to use the on-screen bitmap and copy it to paper. The bitmap will be scaled
and stretched, as required, to fill the desired margins and print size. However, the resolution of the screen image
determines the ultimate print quality. This option is not available for some printers and for most plotters that
cannot print a bitmap.
When you select Printer/Plotter resolution, FEMAP recomputes the image at the resolution of the printer. The
resulting printed image is almost always of much higher quality, but can take significantly longer for complex
images.
Orientation
You have two choices for the orientation of the printed image: portrait and landscape.
Portrait positions the selected images or text in the center of a piece of paper with the longer length going from
top to bottom.
Landscape positions the selected images or text in the center of a piece of paper with the longer length going
from left to right.
Options
Copies - If your printer/plotter supports making multiple copies, you can use this option to request the number
of copies you need. If you choose multiple copies, and your printer does not support this option, you will
receive a warning. Then, you will only get one copy of your print. For many printers, you can set this feature
permanently using the Setup option under Printer Setup.
Print to File - Creates a print file (.prt file) which can then be used later and sent to a local printer.
Hint: You can also print messages by using the File, Messages, Copy command and copying them to
another Windows application, or by setting the List, Destination to your printer and then using any
of the list commands.
ID Prop ID Type Topology Orientation Node Orientation Vector
1 1..Angle Stiffener BEAM Line2 0 0., 1., 0.
97 2..Upper Wing Skin PLATE Quad4
ID Color Layer Formulation C1 C2 C3 C4
1 124 1 0 6 322
97 124 1 0 6 322 197 7
Note: FEMAP can only print a bitmap in render mode. FEMAP performs operations to provide more detail
than the standard bitmap export, but it still may not be as clear and sharp as a Windows Metafile. You
may want to switch to Windows GDI mode (Render Options under View, Options) when you are print-
ing.
File, Printer Setup 2-15
Printing Tips
Review the following items for some additional hints on printing:
Use the Page Setup and Printer Setup options on this dialog box instead of the commands on the File menu.
They graphically show the results of your settings in the Page Preview diagram.
If you want a quick draft hardcopy, print using Screen resolution. For final, high-quality output, always use
Printer/Plotter resolution.
When you are printing the active view using Screen resolution, you will get a better quality (higher resolution)
print if you enlarge the window. Choose the Maximize button in the Window title bar to enlarge it to full-screen
size prior to choosing File, Print.
Printing high-resolution images (especially color images) takes a lot of memory and/or disk space. You will
need to make sure that your TEMP environment variable specifies a disk with plenty of room if you are going
to print large models. Windows writes temporary files to this disk as it is printing. These files can often require
several megabytes or more.
Some older Windows printer drivers have problems handling complex pictures (especially if you choose
printer/plotter resolution). If you are having any problems printing, and you have a fairly old version of Win-
dows or an older printer driver, you should check with either Microsoft or your printer manufacturer to see if
there is a newer printer driver available. These drivers are frequently updated to correct errors and add new
capabilities. If a new printer driver does not solve your problems, you may be able to reduce the complexity of
the picture by selecting a group or modifying your view options. For example, if you are doing a contour plot,
reducing the number of contour levels can dramatically reduce the complexity of the image that you are print-
ing.
You cannot print when the active window is animating.
If you want to print a contour plot on a monochrome printer, you may want to adjust the contour palette before
printing. In particular, choose the View Options command. Then select the Post-processing category and the
Contour/Criteria Levels option. Press Set Levels..., then press Reset Gray. Choose OK twice to accept the gray-
scale contour palette. With the grayscale palette loaded, your prints should come out much cleaner. If you are
having trouble distinguishing contour levels on the print, you can adjust the individual colors in the palette. One
good approach is to change every other color so that it uses a cross-hatched color instead of a solid color. This
will result in contours that alternate between solid and the various hatch patterns.
Some printers (like DeskJet printers) have trouble clipping multiple regions, such as a multi-window layout, or
even a window with headers or footers. If you are experiencing this type of problem you can go to Page Setup
and turn on Reset Clipping. This option resets the clipping region in a way that is compatible with these print-
ers.
2.5.3 File, Printer Setup
This command directly sets and modifies
printer-related options. It also displays a
list of the active printers.
Printers that you installed, but did not acti-
vate, will not be shown. To choose a
printer for use in FEMAP, select it from
the list. To change the setup for the printer
you have selected, press Setup. Depending
on the printer, you will see one or more
additional dialog boxes. These let you
establish options like the active printing
mode (i.e., 75, 150 or 300 dots/inch), por-
trait or landscape paper orientation, fonts,
colors and many more.
The dialog boxes that you see when you
choose Setup are not really part of
FEMAP. They are part of the printer driver
that you loaded when you installed the printer for Windows. You also can modify all of the same settings using the
Windows Control Panel. Refer to the Windows documentation and the documentation for your printer for further
advice on setting options for particular printers.
Using Control Panel, you can also install or activate additional printers. You can even make changes while FEMAP
is still running. The next time you choose the Print or Printer Setup command, it will recognize any control panel
changes that you have made.
When you change certain printer settings, like the paper orientation (landscape vs. portrait) or paper size, it is usu-
ally good to review the Page Setup options. This will give you the opportunity to make any changes to margins,
plot sizes or positions that are appropriate for your new printer settings.
2.5.4 File, Picture
The commands on this submenu let you transfer a copy of your graphics to the Windows clipboard and then to
other applications, or to a file. You can also redisplay graphics files.
2.5.4.1 File, Picture, Copy...
... transfers a copy of the image in the active graphics window to the Windows clipboard. No additional input is
required. By default, FEMAP transfers the image in Palette, Windows Device Dependent Bitmap (DDB), and Win-
dows Metafile or Picture formats. Windows Device Independent Bitmaps (DIB) can also be transferred, but must
be enabled using the File, Preferences, Views command. By producing these formats, you have great flexibility
when you transfer the image to many other software packages.
You can disable one or more of the formats for all future transfers by using File, Preferences, Views. You should
only do this after verifying the format is not useful in the software where you will paste the image. If supported,
transferring the Metafile/Picture format is usually your best choice since these images can be scaled and stretched
and they retain the best quality image.
When you transfer a Metafile or device independent bitmap to the clipboard, the black and white colors can be
swapped. This is useful for changing a picture with white lines on a black background into black lines on a white
background. The Swap Black and White Metafile option, in the File, Page Setup command, controls color swap-
ping. If this option is on, FEMAP will swap the colors. The File, Page Setup, Monochrome option can also be used
to convert to a monochrome image. These options have no effect on regular device dependent bitmaps which are
copied to the clipboard. Additional Page Setup options control the background and border for Metafiles.
The File, Picture, Copy command will be disabled if the current window is animating. You cannot transfer anima-
tions to the clipboard.
Transferring Graphics to Other Applications
After you use File, Picture, Copy to load your graphics to the clipboard, simply switch to the application that you
want to receive the image. For most Windows applications that accept graphics input from the clipboard, you will
find a Paste command somewhere in the menu (often under Edit). Pressing Ctrl+V (or Shift+Ins) will usually
invoke that command, or you can simply choose it from the menu. The Paste command should immediately load
the image into the other application.
Some applications (like Windows Paint) sometimes require you to choose Paste twice. Other applications require
you to define a region or area where the graphics will be placed prior to pasting. Refer to the documentation for the
receiving application for more information.
Note: Just like the File, Print command, FEMAP can only export a bitmap when in Render mode. You may
want to change to Windows GDI (Render Options under View, Options) mode to export a Windows
Metafile.
Note: Ctrl+C can be used as a general copy command in FEMAP. FEMAP takes into account which window
or dockable pane is currently active. When the main graphics window is active, Ctrl+C will perform the
File, Picture, Copy command.
Note: Remember that the clipboard only holds one image, so every time you choose this command, you auto-
matically overwrite the previous contents of the clipboard.
Ctrl+Shift+C
File, Picture, Save... 2-17
2.5.4.2 File, Picture, Save...
... transfers a copy of the image in the active graphics window to a file. The standard file access dialog box allows
you to specify the name of the file to create.
In addition to the normal fields in the file access dialog, there are more options that specify the picture format:
Bitmap
Metafile
Placeable MF (Metafile)
Bitmap Series
Video for Windows - AVI
JPEG
All formats are not available for all types of pictures.
Using Bitmaps
If you select Bitmap, which is available for all views, the default file extension is .BMP, and the file will be saved
as a Windows Device Independent Bitmap. Bitmap files contain only the array of pixels currently displayed in the
window and are therefore equivalent to the size of the window. When you choose this format, FEMAP will ask if
you want to compress the bitmap. Compressed bitmaps usually take up significantly less disk space, but are incom-
patible with some Windows programs. Check the documentation for your other applications, or try transferring a
compressed bitmap to see if your other applications can support it. If you only plan to replay your bitmaps using
FEMAP, you should always use the compressed format.
Using Metafiles
If you select either Metafile or Placeable MF, the default file extension is .WMF. Both options save the picture as a
Metafile. Metafile chooses the Windows Metafile format, while Placeable MF chooses the Placeable Metafile For-
mat that is used by many Windows applications. Most often you will want to use the placeable Metafile for more
reliable transfer to other programs.
Metafiles contain commands that draw graphics into the current window. For this reason, when you load a Metafile
into another application, you can scale and stretch it. The Metafile will redraw itself for the new shape. If you plan
to load your pictures into another Windows application, you should refer to the documentation for that application
to find advice on choosing the best format for that application. The Metafile and Placeable Metafile options are not
available in Render mode.
Just like for the File, Picture, Copy command, the colors black and white can be swapped when you save a Metafile
or device independent bitmap. You can control color swapping with the Swap Black and White option under the
File, Page Setup command. FEMAP will also convert all colors to a black and white image if the Monochrome
option is on.
Saving Animations
If your active graphics window is animating, FEMAP will let you choose either a bitmap, bitmap series, or AVI for-
mat. The single bitmap animation file format is very similar to the standard bitmap format, but will be incompatible
with most (if not all) Windows applications other than FEMAP. Likewise, you will not be asked to choose com-
pression. FEMAP uses the .BMP default file extension for animation files just like for standard bitmaps. Depend-
ing on the number of animation frames, the size of your animating window and the number of colors supported by
your graphics board, these files can be very large. Unlike standard bitmaps or Metafiles, the various Page Setup
options do not change animations. They are always saved just as they appear on the screen.
You can also save animations as a Bitmap Series: a series of static bitmaps, one per animation frame with sequen-
tially numbered file names. This format can be used with other tools to create video (AVI) files. You can also sim-
ply save the picture as a Video for Windows (AVI) file. AVI files can be imported directly into most Windows
applications.
If you choose Bitmap Series, FEMAP will save each frame in the animation as a series of bitmaps, under the names
*n.bmp, where n ranges from 0 to n-1 frames. If you want to save an animation to replay in FEMAP, you should
Ctrl+F3
save the entire animation as one bitmap, not a series of bitmaps. This format is strictly for programs which can play
a series of bitmaps.
2.5.4.3 File, Picture, Save Desktop...
... is the same as File, Picture, Save, except that instead of simply saving the active graphics window, this command
saves the entire screen to the file you specify. As always, FEMAP uses the standard file access dialog. Unlike File,
Picture, Save however, the desktop can only be saved in bitmap for JPEG format. This command does not show the
Metafile options.
2.5.4.4 File, Picture, Save JT...
... saves the FEMAP Graphics window as a *.JT file (Teamcenter
Visualization file). Only entities visible in the active graphics win-
dow will be saved in the JT file. As always, FEMAP uses the stan-
dard file access dialog. After JT file has been named, there are a few
JT Options which can be selected for the file.
A Hierarchal tree control will be created in Teamcenter Visualiza-
tion depending on which options are checked. The hierarchy can
also be changed by using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
Each category selected will add a level of hierarchy in the tree. You
can choose how many branches will be in your tree structure by
selecting different categories. There will also be several options for
each category type depending on the category type that is chosen.
For example, Model will have options for deformed and undeformed
as well as others. Entity Type will separate Geometry into Surfaces, Curves, and Points and Finite Element Data
into Nodes and Elements. Entity Subtype will add different element types to the tree such as line elements, plates,
solid elements, and other element types as well as individual section cuts and isosurfaces. Layer, Property, and
Material will add branches for different Layers, Properties, and Materials currently visible. Curve & Surface ID
will create branches under Curve and Surface respectively for each Curve and Surface currently shown on the
screen.
2.5.4.5 File, Picture, Replay...
... displays graphics that you have saved in files. Just like File, Picture, Save, you will use the standard file access
dialog box to select the graphics format and file that you want to display. FEMAP will create a new window to dis-
play the bitmap image, Metafile or animation. For bitmaps, animations, and placeable Metafiles, the initial size of
the replay window will be the same size as the window that you saved. If that size is too large to fit on the screen,
the size will be automatically reduced.
The replay window does not have a command menu, but does have a system menu. You can use the system menu,
or the window borders to move and resize the window. If you resize the window, FEMAP will stretch a bitmap or
scale a Metafile to fit in the new window.
FEMAP adds an additional command, Original Size, to the system menu. This command will automatically return
the window to its default size and position.
FEMAP also adds an Animation command to the system menu. This command is identical to the View, Animation
command in FEMAP. It is used to control the replayed animations. You can also stop and start replayed animations
simply by clicking in the window. To stop the animation, press the left mouse button while the cursor is anywhere
inside the replay window. To restart the animation, press the right mouse button. You will find that animations work
Hint: When saving an AVI file, you must have a color resolution > 256 colors. if you have 256 colors or less,
you will not be able to successfully import the AVI files into other applications.
Note: Loads and Constraints will NOT appear in a JT file even if they are on screen when the JT file is cre-
ated. They may be available in future versions of FEMAP.
Note: Line elements which have a symbol associated with them, such as springs and gaps will be shown as a
line between two positions with a dot on the line. Mass elements will be shown as a single dot and
any offsets will be designated with a red line representing the offset.
Alt+F3
File, Messages Menu 2-19
best if you leave the window at the original size. If you change the size, the animation will slow down dramatically
since FEMAP must do many more calculations for each animation frame. If you do change the size, you can
always use the Original Size command to restore the window.
Replaying Pictures Outside of FEMAP
When you choose the File, Picture, Replay command, FEMAP actually runs a separate Windows program
(REPLAY.EXE). At any time you want to view a picture, you can run that program yourself without running
FEMAP. When you run REPLAY by itself, you will see a dialog box that asks you for the picture file name. This is
not the standard file access dialog box, and it does not list the available files. You must already know the complete
file name of the file that you want to view, and type it in the dialog box. You must also include the file name exten-
sion (.BMP or .WMF, for example). Alternatively, you can specify the full file name on the command line, for
example:
REPLAY PICTURE.BMP
You can also run REPLAY directly from DOS with:
WIN REPLAY PICTURE.BMP
REPLAY automatically determines the type of file that you are specifying from the data in the file. It does not rely
on the file name extension, so you can specify any name.
The commands shown above assume that both Windows and REPLAY are in directories along your PATH. If they
are not, you must add the names of the appropriate directories to these commands.
2.5.5 File, Messages Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to transfer text from the Messages window. You can copy the text to a
file or to the Windows clipboard and then to other applications.
By default, these commands transfer all lines of text from the Messages window to the selected file, or to the clip-
board. This includes all lines of text that are visible in the window, and the lines of text that can be retrieved by
scrolling. You cannot copy text that has scrolled out of FEMAP's buffer. You can set the number of lines saved in
the buffer using File, Preferences, Database.
Selecting Messages
If you do not want all of the text, you must select the lines that FEMAP will copy prior to invoking these com-
mands. To select messages, point to the line that you want to select with the cursor. Press the left mouse button and
drag the cursor to the last (or first) line that you want to select. As you do this, the color of the selected lines will
change. Now release the button. Don't worry if some lines appear to be missed as you drag the cursor. When you
release the mouse button, FEMAP will select all lines between the two points. Simply clicking on a line with the
left mouse button selects just that line. Clicking anywhere in the Messages window with the right mouse button
cancels any lines that you have selected. If you want to change your selection, just repeat the process. You do not
have to cancel your previous selection.
Note: FEMAP will never close the replay window. You must do that manually, by double clicking the system
menu with your left mouse button, or by choosing Close from the system menu. By leaving the window
open, you can continue to work in FEMAP and display many simultaneous pictures just by replaying
different files. The only limitation is the amount of memory available for Windows. You must be care-
ful if you are running FEMAP or any other application maximized to the full screen. When you choose
the next FEMAP command, your replay window or windows will disappear behind the maximized
FEMAP window. It is very easy to forget about these extra windows. While they do no harm, they are
using system resources (especially if they are animating!) that may be better applied to FEMAP or
some other ongoing process. Therefore, you should always close the window as soon as you are fin-
ished looking at it.
2.5.5.1 File, Messages, Copy...
... copies the selected (or all) lines of text from the Messages window to the Windows clipboard. No additional
input is required.
2.5.5.2 File, Messages, Save...
... transfers a copy of the selected (or all) lines of text from the Messages window to a file. The standard file access
dialog box allows you to specify the name of the file to create. If you select an existing file, you will be given an
option to overwrite, or append to, that file. The default filename extension is *.LST.
2.6 Using Rebuild and Preferences
This section of the File menu pertains to rebuilding your model file and setting default parameters (preferences) for
your model files. Each of these menu commands are described further below.
2.6.1 File, Rebuild...
... verifies the integrity of your current active model and can be used to reduce the size of a model where you have
deleted entities. You will be asked to choose between two levels of rebuilding. The quickest method simply checks
whether all entities that are referenced by other entities exist. For example, all nodes and properties that are refer-
enced by elements must exist. You will receive messages informing you of any missing entities. This level of
rebuilding is called automatically every time you use one of the read translators to input a model. It verifies the
completeness of the model that you read.
The more thorough level of rebuilding (fully rebuild) does everything that the quick method does and also recon-
structs many internal database details. If you experience a power failure while a database is being written or run out
of disk space, your model file may become corrupted. This level of rebuild will recover any data that is still present.
Whenever you delete entities from a FEMAP model, the space that they occupied is marked as empty. The space is
still retained in the model file. When you create new entities, FEMAP will reuse this empty space before allocating
any new space. Therefore, as long as you plan to add to your model, the space will not be wasted - it will be reused.
If you have a shortage of disk space, or if you have done a large amount of deleting, such as deleting sets of output
data, you may want to choose the full rebuild option and allow it to compress your model. This will remove all of
the empty space and reduce the size of your model file.
Rebuilding is not usually required, but it is non-destructive so you can use it any time you have a question about the
integrity of your model. Instead of using Rebuild, you can also use the FEMAP neutral file translator to export a
neutral file, and then and import it to a new FEMAP database. The new database will also be free of empty space.
2.6.2 File, Preferences
This command allows you to customize the operation of FEMAP. These options control how certain commands
will operate, set defaults, and define disks or files to be used. This command bring up a tabbed dialog box with 9
tabs, each tab representing the type of entity you want to modify. FEMAP will remember the tab used most recently
and the Preferences dialog box will open with that tab active. Each of these tabs are discussed in more detail below.
You can use the arrows in the upper right hand corner of the dialog box to be able to be able to view all the tabs.
or dockable pane is currently active. When the Messages pane is active, Ctrl+C will perform the File,
Messages, Copy command.
Note: Remember that the Windows clipboard only holds one image or one set of text. Every time you choose
this command, you automatically overwrite the previous contents of the clipboard.
Hint: Be careful when changing preferences labeled startup preferences. These preferences cannot be mod-
ified for the active session, and will be saved when OK is clicked. For these settings to have any impact
on how FEMAP is operating, you must close your current session of FEMAP completely. The next time
you initialize FEMAP the options will be set as you selected them.
Ctrl+Alt+Insert
Ctrl+Shift+P
Messages 2-21
2.6.2.1 Messages
These options control text dis-
played in the Messages Win-
dow and the overall size of that
window. When you select the
Messages tab, the Preferences
dialog box will display the
options for messages. These
options are partitioned into
two types: Max Text Lines and
Fonts and Colors.
Max Text Lines
This option controls the maxi-
mum number of lines of text
that can be retained in the
Messages window. The default
value is 100,000. There is no
set maximum number of lines
that can be set, but the higher
the number of max lines, the
more memory will be used and
this could effect the perfor-
mance of FEMAP.
Message Font, Listing
Font and Size
Message Font chooses the font
for display of messages and
feedback from FEMAP.
Listing Font chooses the font for display of text written to the Messages Window from any listing command in
FEMAP.
You can choose any Message Font, Listing Font, or size that you like for text display. In general, you should always
choose a fixed-pitch font. If you choose a proportionally spaced font, none of the FEMAP reports or listings will be
properly aligned and they will be harder to read.
Program Font and Size
Program Font chooses the font for display of text which has been recorded or written in the Program File window.
You can choose a size specifically for the Program Font which is independent of the Message Font and Listing Font
size.
Colors
These options let you choose the colors of text to be displayed. You can enter a numeric color value, or choose the
Palette button to select the color from the standard color palette. For these options, you must select solid colors
(Colors 0 to 149). You cannot select any cross-hatching or patterned lines. You should also make sure that you do
not choose a color for the background which matches any of the text colors, or you won't be able to see the text.
Furthermore, you can choose to make the font Bold Face by clicking the Bold check box next to the Palette button.
For best results, you should always pick a background color that results in filled areas and lines being the same
color. If you do not, the background may be a different color behind the text than it is to the right of the text.
2.6.2.2 Views
When you select the Views tab, the Preferences dialog box will display the options for views. The Views tab of the
Preferences dialog box is partitioned into five areas:
Startup View (from View Library)
Background Bitmaps (Render Only)
Options
View and Dynamic Rotation
Startup View (from View
Library)
The Startup View area
includes:
The View Number option lets
you change the view that
FEMAP uses when you start a
new model, or when you cre-
ate a new view. When this
value is set to 0, FEMAP uses
its normal defaults. If you
want a different view, use the
View Quick Options dialog box
to store a view in the library,
then set View Number to the ID
of that view as it is stored in
the library. The first view in
the library has an ID of 1, the
second is 2, and so on. You can
also use the Browse button (...)
to select a view from the View
library. When you start a new
model, that view will be used
as the default.
Background Bitmaps
(Render Only)
The Background Bitmaps area
includes two different paths which can be to specified to use bitmap images in the background of the main FEMAP
graphics window (Render Mode Only):
Background - Allows you to specify a directory path or browse directories to designate a bitmap to be used as
the background of the main FEMAP graphics window. The bitmap will only be shown when either option
7..Bitmap or 8..Stretched Bitmap is chosen in the Window Background portion of the Window Background dia-
log box (see Section 6.1.3, "View, Background...").
Logo - Allows you to specify a directory path or browse directories to designate a bitmap to shown in a partic-
ular location in the FEMAP graphics window. The bitmap will only be shown when Show Bitmap is checked in
the Logo section of Window Background dialog box (see Section 6.1.3, "View, Background...").
There are two options for resolution which will be applied to any bitmaps which have been assigned, Screen or
Printer. Screen will show the bitmap on the screen the actual size of the bitmap, while Printer will show the bitmap
at a size that is determined by the actual size of the bitmap multiplied by the Render Res Factor, which can be
found in the Plot and Metafile Style section of the Page Setup dialog box (see Section 2.5.1, "File, Page Setup...").
Options
These options control various operational features of FEMAP views.
Views 2-23
Autoplot Created/Modified Geometry
If this option is on, all geometry which is created or modified by a command will be drawn at the end of the com-
mand. FEMAP operates fully interactively in this mode, which means you do not have to request a new display. If
you turn this option off, you will have to choose the View, Redraw command to display the new or updated geome-
try. Turning off this option will also disable Group, Operations, Automatic Add.
Alternate Fill Mode
FEMAP fills polygons whenever you turn on element fill or do a hidden line plot, a contour plot, or a criteria plot.
Windows provides two different techniques for drawing a filled polygon, both of which should be equivalent for all
cases in FEMAP. Unfortunately, some graphics adapters and their drivers have trouble filling polygons with one
method or the other. Notably, some of the more advanced Windows accelerator boards like the Number Nine,
Matrox, and other S3-based boards will often forget to draw a polygon when using the standard filling method. If
you see missing spots/polygons when you draw a model (especially a contour plot), try switching the fill method. If
that solves the problem, save this option when you exit Preferences so it will be used for all models.
Workplane Never Visible in New View
This option allows you to turn the workplane off when starting a new model. If this option is not checked, FEMAP
will use the setting for the startup view to determine whether the workplane is visible in a new model. If this option
is on, FEMAP will automatically turn the workplane off, even if the settings in the startup view call for it to be on.
Alternate Color Palette
Use this option to select the alternate color palette, which uses blue to represent the lowest values in a post-process-
ing display. The standard color palette uses magenta for the lowest values.
Open Views of Existing Models
By default, when you open an existing model, the view of that model automatically opens. Sometimes, however,
opening graphics in a corrupt model file can cause a crash. To open a model file without the graphic view of the
model, turn off the Open Views of Existing Models option. Once the file is open, you can work on solving the prob-
lem, perhaps by writing out a neutral file. You can manually open the view by using View, Activate or View, New.
Aspect Ratio for New Views
When a new view is created, the aspect ratio is normally set to 1.0. The geometry is not stretched either horizon-
tally or vertically for display in that window. An aspect ratio of 2.0 would cause a square to be displayed two times
as high as it is wide. Changing this value only sets the default for new views. You can use View, Options to update
the aspect ratio for any existing window, and turn off the AutoAspect feature.
View and Dynamic Rotation
These options control the rotation of views in your model when using the View Toolbar commands as well as when
you access the View, Rotate command.
Delta
This is the default angle of rotation when you click in the scroll bars in the View, Rotate command or when you use
the Rotate buttons on the toolbar. It must be specified in degrees.
Dynamic
This option chooses the method that will be used for displaying your model during the Dynamic Rotate/Pan/Zoom
command from the toolbar. If you experience flashing when you perform a dynamic rotation, set this option to a
different mode to remove the problem. This option has no impact on Render mode dynamic rotation.
Dynamic Speed
Allows you to increase the speed a model will rotate in the graphics window based on the distance the mouse is
moved across the screen. The number must be between 1 and 10 and the higher the number, the greater number of
full rotations will occur as the mouse is dragged from side of the graphics window to another.
Rotation Angles
These options allow you to define three view orientations which can be accessed using the View, Rotate command
buttons. The default views are Isometric, Dimetric and Trimetric. In addition to the rotation angles you can also set
the button text. Place an ampersand (&) in front of the letter that you want to be able to access using the Alt+Letter
keyboard combination.
2.6.2.3 Render
Render mode is a high-speed graphics mode that uses the OpenGL graphics language (It is the default graphics
mode in FEMAP). The Render tab lets you control Render graphics options and the level of functionality that you
have while in Render mode.
The dialog box has four areas:
Render Options
Include in Dynamic Rotation
Textures
Advanced/Debug Options
Render Options
These options control how Ren-
der will be implemented.
Hardware Accel (startup
only)
This option controls whether
you use hardware acceleration
while in the Render mode or if
the rendering is to be done by
software in Windows. This will
be defaulted to on, but will only
work when a hardware accelera-
tion board has been installed in
your computer. If a board has
been installed and you do not
wish to use hardware accelera-
tion, you can uncheck this
option. You must save this pref-
erence and restart FEMAP for
this option to take effect.
Use Midside Nodes
If this option is selected,
FEMAP will use the midside
nodes when drawing rendered
plots. This increases the com-
plexity of the graphics,
decreases the speed of drawing the graphics window, and increases memory usage.
Memory Optimization
When this option is selected, FEMAP doesnt use as much memory when drawing. This may or may not be helpful,
depending on the size of your model:
In very large models that require memory swapping, turning on this option will improve display performance.
In small/medium-size models that dont require memory swapping, turning on this option may slow down dis-
play performance.
Note: FEMAP often performs better when using the default settings for OpenGL graphics cards. Issues may
sometimes occur when using settings optimized for other applications, especially with animations.
Hint: For small models, you may find this option helpful in viewing arrowheads that represent boundary con-
ditions. If the option is on, the arrowhead will display flat on the screen as the model is rotated. If the
option is off, the orientation of the arrowhead will rotate with the model.
Render 2-25
Beam Facet Edges
This option controls how a cross section is displayed on a beam
element. When on, the cross section extends along the length of
the element. When off, the cross section is drawn only at the
ends of the beam element.
Smooth Lines
When this option is on, FEMAP uses OpenGL anti-aliasing to
draw smooth lines. This can enhance wireframe displays but
can be computationally expensive.
Auto Regenerate
If this option is chosen, a graphics regenerate automatically occurs after virtually every command. The graphics
will always reflect the current model status. For large models, this can be expensive and the option should be
switched off. By default, this option is off.
Fast Render Picking
When selected, picking uses in memory data to pick nodes, elements, points, and surfaces. This results in much
faster picking with large models. If you switch this option off, or use Pick Query or Pick Front, the standard pick-
ing algorithms are used. You should leave this option on.
Edges Using Lines
Some graphics cards currently have poor quality support for the standard OpenGL method FEMAP uses to draw
element and surface edges. Selecting this option forces all edges to be drawn as simple lines. This is not as efficient
and may cause the edges to have a stitched appearance. You should use this option if element edges are not drawn
correctly.
Vertex Arrays
If your graphics card has good support of vertex arrays, you can get significant performance improvement by
selecting vertex arrays. FEMAP provides three levels of support (No, Partial and Full) to account for different
graphics cards:
Full Vertex Arrays uses vertex arrays for all graphics. We have seen problems with this level of support on some
graphics cards including severe system crashes.
Partial Vertex Arrays uses vertex arrays for all filled entities such as elements and surfaces, but does not use
vertex arrays for element and surface borders.
No Vertex Arrays does not use vertex arrays at all.
You should use the level that gives the best performance without any problems.
Search Depth
To optimize memory usage, FEMAP internally groups entities which are exactly the same (same element type,
property, material, layer, AND color) together. These like entities are stored in collectors in the FEMAP graph-
ics data structures. Every time a new entity is created, FEMAP will search all of the existing collectors to see if the
new entity can be placed into one of them.
The Search Depth value refers to how many collectors FEMAP should search when a new entity is created before
creating a new collector. By default, the value is 0, which means that FEMAP will search through all the existing
collectors and only create a new one if a collector does not exist with the entitys same element type, property,
material, layer, AND color. This value can be set to another number if you would like FEMAP to only search the
last n number of collectors to determine if a new one should be created.
Hint: If you switch it on in Render Options, you can switch it off in Include In Dynamic Rotation to improve
dynamic rotation performance.
On Off
In general, searching all the collectors in a model is not an issue, but if you have a model with many different entity
types, properties, materials, layers, and colors, this can slow down the graphics quite a bit as FEMAP looks for an
existing collector in which to place the new entity.
Include in Dynamic Rotation
These options let you select the entities that will be included in dynamic rotation. By deselecting some of these
entities, you can improve display performance. In large models, you may see dramatic performance improvements
when you turn off options such as Fill, Shading, Filled Edges, and Undeformed.
If you turn Workplane off, some additional entities will also not appear during dynamic rotation. These entities
include the Axisymmetric Axis, View Legend, View Axis, Origin, Workplane and Rulers, and Workplane Grid from
the Tools and View Style category of View, Options as well as the Post Titles, Trace Locations (Trace Style), and
Contour/Criteria Legend from the PostProcessing category of View, Options.
If you select Elements as Free Edge, elements will be drawn as free edge only during dynamic rotation. This will
greatly improve graphics performance for large models.
Connections will turn off Connection Regions and Connectors
If you deselect Element Symbols, elements that are drawn as symbols will not be drawn during dynamic rotation.
This will greatly improve graphics performance for models that contain a large number of mass, mass matrix, link,
gap or DOF Spring elements.
Textures
These options enable you to control the texture maps used by Enhanced mode for post processing displays.
2D mapping
If you select this option, 2 dimensional texture maps will be used; otherwise, 1 dimensional texture maps will be
used. Different graphics cards have different levels of support of 1 and 2 dimensional texture maps.
Smooth Textures
This option is available for 1 or 2-Dimensional texture maps. It can provide better quality smooth contours.
Force All Triangles
Some graphics cards split quadrilateral graphics primitives differently when they intersect the edge of the window.
This can cause the contours on a model to move on an element face when the model is dynamically rotated while
intersecting the edge of the window. If you select this option, all quadrilaterals are split into triangles and this gives
consistent contours. The vertex colours are always correct: it is only the internal color pattern of an element face
that is impacted.
Max Number
FEMAP tries to use the largest texture map possible. However, some graphics cards do not enable the maximum
size to be determined. If you have problems with contour display colors, set this number lower and try again.
Advanced/Debug Options
These options apply to the Enhanced method only. They help you work with FEMAP Support to resolve Render
graphics display problems that may be unique to your graphics card driver.
Note: An example of when you might want to change the Search Depth is:
A NASTRAN input deck has been imported into FEMAP with a large number of CELAS2 elements
(spring elements which also contain spring property data on each connection entry). Since these ele-
ments are not associated with a property using a property ID, FEMAP is forced to create a property
for each CELAS2 element. Each spring element is now a different property, causing FEMAP to place
each one into its own collector. If there where 28000 springs in the model, FEMAP would have to
search through 28000 collectors each time a new entity is created and this is not efficient for the
FEMAP graphics data structures. Changing the value of Search Depth to a lower number can increase
graphics performance by searching the collectors far less often and creating a new one only if no match-
ing collectors can be found.
Hint: Remember that you can also use View, Options to control which entities are displayed.
User Interface 2-27
Print Debug Messages
If you turn this option on, FEMAP will write print debug messages to the Messages window. FEMAP Support may
request this information to help you resolve a graphics display problem.
Bitmap Alignment
This option controls the way that bitmaps are stored. The default setting is 4. Changing this setting may cause
severe display problems. Do not change this setting unless FEMAP Support instructs you to.
Pixel Format
This option controls graphics descriptors. The default setting of 0 instructs FEMAP to use the optimal pixel format
for your graphics board. Changing this setting may cause severe display problems. Do not change this setting
unless FEMAP Support instructs you to.
BitBlt Delay
If you are seeing split images in your FEMAP graphics window, you may need to enter a value for BitBlt Delay.
In some low-end graphics cards, GDI and OpenGL graphics are not synchronized correctly, which can result in
split images to appear inside the FEMAP graphics window. This is due to the picture capture of the screen occur-
ring while the graphics are still in the swap buffer. In order to correct this problem, a value for the BitBlt Delay
can be placed into FEMAP to allow extra time (in milliseconds) for the graphics to come out of the swap buffer and
the screen image to be captured properly.
2.6.2.4 User Interface
When you choose the User
Interface tab, the Preferences
dialog box will display options
for the how the different facets
of the FEMAP User Interface
(menus, toolbars, dockable
panes, tooltips, etc.) will func-
tion. This User Interface tab is
partitioned into six categories:
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Graphical Selection
Mouse Interface
Dockable Panes
Model Info
Show Entities Defaults
Toolbars
Any options in the Menus and
Dialog Boxes, Graphical
Selection, or Mouse interface
sections can be changed for a
given session.
Menus and Dialog Boxes
Alternate Color Scheme
If this option is on, the menus, toolbars, and dockable pane borders will appear as a gray color instead of a shaded
color regardless of which color is set for dialog box appearance in Windows. FEMAP appears more like pre-Ver-
sion 9 releases when the Alternate Color Scheme is turned on.
Note: Usually, a delay of 10 ms or 20 ms, will correct the issue. If these values do not help, we suggest start-
ing with 100 ms and moving back towards 0 ms by increments of 10 ms until the problem reappears.
Autorepeat Create Commands
If this option is on, all entity create commands will automatically repeat until you choose Cancel. This allows you
to continue creating entities without repeatedly choosing the same command.
Remember Dialog Positions
When this option is on, FEMAP will remember the last screen location for each dialog box. If you move a dialog
box then pick the command again later, FEMAP will place the dialog box in the position you chose rather than in
the default position. FEMAP will remember the dialog box locations only for the current FEMAP session. To
restore dialog boxes to their original positions, use the Reset Dialog Positions button.
Alternate Accelerator Keys for Views
When on, changes the way several Accelerator Keys (hard-coded shortcut keys) function in FEMAP to give quick
access to orient the view. Ctrl+B becomes View, Rotate, Bottom; Ctrl+T becomes View, Rotate, Top; Ctrl+F
becomes View, Rotate, Front; Ctrl+L becomes View, Rotate, Left; and Ctrl+I becomes View, Rotate, Isometric.
These accelerators mimic Solid Edge and FEMAP must be restarted in order for this preference to take effect.
Ask for Confirmation Before Delete
For version 9.2, an option, Dont confirm delete again, was added to all Confirm Delete dialog boxes which
appear when you delete any entity in FEMAP. If you check the Dont confirm delete again box, the Confirm
Delete dialog boxes will no longer appear when you delete an entity and this option will now be unchecked. If you
would like to turn the Confirm Delete dialog boxes back on, simply check this option.
Recently Used Files
This option sets the number of recently used files that will be listed at the bottom of the File menu.
Graphical Selection
Track Mouse Picking
This option activates dynamic selection tracking. When you move the cursor through the graphics window to select
nodes, elements or other geometry, FEMAP dynamically highlights the entity that will be selected if you click the
mouse button. This makes accurate selection much easier in complex models.
Pick All Inside
This option controls selection of entities when screen area (using box or circle) picking is used to select entities
whose position is defined by other multiple entities (i.e. elements by their nodes, curves by their points). If this
option is on, all entities which comprise the selected entity must be inside the selected area (i.e. for an element, all
of its nodes must be in the selected area for it to be picked). If it is off, only one entity must be selected (i.e. for an
element, only one node must be in the selected region when this option is off).
Tooltip Delay
Allows you to set the amount of time before a tooltip will appear after an entity has been highlighted by the cur-
sor. The number is in tenths of a second and can be from 1 to 1000. For example, the default value is 10 tenths of
a second (i.e., 10 x 0.1 seconds = 1 second after an entity has been selected, a tooltip will appear).
Tooltip Duration
Allows you to set the amount of time a tooltip will be visible after it appears. The number is in tenths of a second
(For example, the default is 100 tenths of a second, therefore, 100 x 0.1 seconds = 10 seconds that the Tooltip
will be visible). If you want to set the Tooltip to remain visible until the cursor is no longer selecting that entity, you
can set the value to 0 (zero).
Mouse Interface
Reverse Mouse Wheel Direction
By default, when the mouse wheel is used to zoom in and out inside the main FEMAP graphics window, spinning
the mouse wheel up (away from the user) will zoom in, while spinning the mouse wheel down (towards the user)
will zoom out on the model. When this option is checked, the direction of the mouse wheel will be reversed for the
FEMAP graphics window only (the mouse wheel will work normally in any other Dockable Pane), therefore spin-
ning the mouse wheel up (away from the user) will zoom out, while spinning the mouse wheel down (towards the
user) will zoom in on the model
User Interface 2-29
Shift for Pan, Control for Zoom
By default, when the Shift key is held down along with the left mouse button (or mouse wheel is pressed when a
dialog box is open) moving the mouse up or down will allow you to dynamically zoom in and out of the model.
Also, when the Control key is held down along with the left mouse button (or mouse wheel is pressed when a dia-
log box is open) moving the mouse up, down, left or right will allow you to dynamically translate the model around
the screen in the corresponding direction. When this option is checked, the functionality of holding Shift or Control
down along with the left mouse button and moving the mouse around will be swapped (i.e. Shift for Pan, Control
for Zoom).
Dockable Panes
Animate Fly-out
This option is used when a Dockable Pane is in the retracted state (Retracted means that the pane is only visible
as a tab and will fly-out when the curser is placed on the tab). This preference, when on, will animate the fly-out
from the tab to full extension of the pane. The Retraction (when the pane goes from being fully extended back to
tab only) will also be animated. When this preference is off, the pane will just pop-up to full size and then mini-
mize to tab only instead of you viewing it extend and retract. This is a start-up only preference, therefore it the
preference must be saved and FEMAP reopened in order for it to take effect.
Model Info
Max Entities
Limits the number of items of each category which will be shown in the Model Info tree. This can significantly
improve performance if you have thousands of entities of one type. Options are added to the tree to show the next
or previous group, whenever less than the full number of entities are displayed. The default value is 2000.
Show Entities Defaults
These options are the same options for highlighting entities that are found in the Window, Show Entities... com-
mand. For more information, see Section 6.3.2.3, "Window, Show Entities...".
FEMAP will use these default settings for all new models and until the any of the options are changed by the user
manually. The options can be changed using the Window, Show Entities... command, the Show When Selected icon
in the Model Info tree, or the Show When Selected icon in the Data Table.
Toolbars
Save Layout
When the Save Layout button is pushed, FEMAP will prompt you to save your toolbar layout to a *.TBR file in a
directory of your choice. The *.TBR file can be used to bring a specific toolbar layout to a different installation of
FEMAP.
Load Layout
When the Load Layout button is pushed, FEMAP will prompt you to select a *.TBR file from a directory of your
choice in order to load a toolbar layout from an existing installation of FEMAP. This allows one layout to be used
by multiple users.
Reset User Interface
Resets the FEMAP User Interface to the original configuration when the product was installed, by deleting all of
the registry settings associated with FEMAP toolbars, dockable panes, menus, shortcut keys, and user-defined
commands. When this command is used, the following message will appear
If you click Yes, all toolbars or menus that have been changed (icons and commands added, moved, removed); all
altered icons; all toolbar positions, all custom toolbars; all dockable pane positions, pinnings, and stackings; all
user-defined shortcut keys; all custom commands that have been created; and all toolbar options which were cho-
sen will be changed back to the defaults and can not be recovered unless you have saved them in a Toolbar layout
(*.TBR file). You must exit and restart FEMAP for this command to take effect.
Reset Dialog Positions
Resets the FEMAP dialog box positions to the original positions when the product was installed. This command
only has an effect if you have the Remember Dialog Positions option checked in the Menus and Dialog Boxes por-
tion of this dialog box.
2.6.2.5 Database
The options on the Database tab control certain database options, including memory management and location of
scratch files. All of these options, with the exception of those labeled immediate, are only used at startup. You
must therefore restart FEMAP after changing any of these option to have them take effect.
The Database tab of the Preferences dialog box is partitioned into four areas:
Database Options
Meshing
Timed Save
Scratch Disks
Each area is discussed more fully below.
Hint: Saving the toolbar layout to a*.TBR file is a good idea before using the Reset User Interface command,
as it will allow you to return to custom commands and shortcut keys if you need them in the future. You
can always load them for use and then use the Reset User Interface command to get the defaults back
again.
Database 2-31
Database Options
These options control how FEMAP interacts with the FEMAP model file (binary database).
Backup before Save
When this option is on and your model has been saved previously, FEMAP will keep a backup copy of your model
in the file modelname.BAK (where modelname.MOD is the name of your model). Only one backup copy is saved,
so the .BAK file will be updated and overwritten every time you save. By default this option is disabled, and no
backup copies are saved.
Unlike the other options in this dialog box, changes to the backup option are effective immediately. You do not
have to save them permanently. The backup option is ignored whenever Use Model Scratch File is off. In this state,
you directly update the model file during every command, not just when you choose Save. Therefore, FEMAP does
not attempt to make a backup when you save.
Delete Model Scratch File
When this option is on, FEMAP will automatically delete your scratch file whenever you begin a new model or exit
FEMAP. The option is selected as a default.
Preserve Next ID during Rebuild
By default, FEMAP will reset the Next ID for all entities to the lowest available ID after the File, Rebuild com-
mand has been used. When this option is on, FEMAP will maintain the Next ID defined for all entities prior to
the Rebuild operation. This will prevent FEMAP from back-filling empty IDs that may exist in a model that
has been somehow partitioned using entity IDs.
Low Disk Warning
When this option is on, FEMAP will issue a warning when free space on the scratch files disk drops below the
amount specified.
Undo Levels
Controls how many commands (0-99) that you will be able to undo. Setting this to a larger number gives you
greater flexibility in being able to backup your commands, but can take a significant amount of disk space. All files
are placed in the specified Scratch Directory.
Cache Pages, Blocks/Page, Max Cached Label
These options control how FEMAP accesses your database file and handles internal caching of database informa-
tion. A database block is 4096 bytes. When FEMAP needs to read from disk, rather than simply reading one block
it reads a page consisting of a number of contiguous blocks. Since most commands access groups of entities, this
minimizes the number of disk accesses, and speeds up FEMAP.
The Blocks/Page number sets this page size. The optimum setting of this number depends on the speed of
your disk and controller.
The Cache Pages numbers indicates how many of these pages FEMAP will retain in memory simultaneously.
When FEMAP starts with a new model, it allocates the number of pages specified in Cache Pages. If your
model is even larger than that, any additional data will be written to disk (in the model scratch file).
Max Cached Label sets the largest label that FEMAP will reserve memory for. This option must be set to a ID
higher than any entity in the model.
The following figures Cache Pages and Block/Page provided as a starting point to improve performance.
Operating System Installed RAM (Mb) Cache Pages Blocks/Page
Windows XP, 2000,
Me
128 8000 2
256 12000 3
512 15000 5
1000 15000 11
Note: When multiple models are open, each model has an individual database open as well. Therefore, you
may want to set these values somewhat lower (~25% lower) if you plan to have multiple models open
in the same FEMAP session to avoid disk swapping when going back and forth between models and
using memory intensive commands such as meshing
For more information, see Section 3.4.2, "Improving Performance (RAM Management)" in the FEMAP User
Guide.
Timed Save
On and Notify
The selected option specifies if FEMAP should notify you when it hits a preset limit or if it should just automati-
cally save the model.
Interval and Commands
The Interval sets the time in minutes between automatic saves, while the number of Commands set the number of
commands performed before FEMAP notifies you that it has performed an automatic save.
Scratch Directory
This option determines where temporary files will be placed. Both the Model Scratch file and the Undo Files will
always be saved in the same directory.
The Model Scratch file is always turned on. The scratch file is a duplicate of your model file and therefore is the
same size.
The size of the Undo Files depends upon how many levels of undo you choose and the FEMAP commands that
you execute. They can be large.
The model scratch file is not deleted (unless you request deletion using the Delete Model Scratch File option,
which is the default), when you exit FEMAP, but all other files are deleted.
For Windows XP, 2000, and ME the directory path to the Scratch Directory should be complete path names. If the
path is not specified these files are stored, by default, in the directory specified by the TEMP environment variable.
Recover Scratch Directory
As FEMAP models, it creates temporary files in the Scratch Directory. These files are necessary so FEMAP can
keep track of changes to the FEMAP database during the modeling process, but in general can not be used for any-
thing on their own. When you the File, Save command is used in FEMAP, the model information is first dumped
to the scratch directory, then the model file is opened in its saved location and the updated information is trans-
ferred to that location. If for some reason (usually running out of disk space), FEMAP crashes during the File, Save
command and the information has been dumped to the scratch directory and the model file has been corrupted or
disappeared, then the model can be recovered by clicking this button.
2.6.2.6 Geometry/Model
The Geometry/Model tab contains geometry options, as well as options for Load Expansion, Meshing, and Property
calculation in the Preferences dialog box.
You can specify the default geometry engine for solid modeling, as well as the midside node load expansion. Each
of these sections are described below.
Geometry Engine (startup only)
FEMAP can perform solid modeling with the Parasolid Solid Modeling engine. This option controls the default
geometry engine upon entering FEMAP. If you do not plan to export a solid model, you may use the FEMAP stan-
dard geometry engine to create wireframe and volume geometry.
When importing solid geometry, FEMAP will automatically switch to the Parasolid geometry engine. In particular,
when ACIS solid geometry is read into FEMAP, it will automatically invoke the ACIS-to-Parasolid converter and
all geometry modification and creation inside of FEMAP will be done using the Parasolid engine.
Note: The Recover Scratch Directory command is not designed to recover the model from any crashes that
occur during the modeling process. It is strictly for use when the model has been corrupted during the
File, Save command. As always, it is recommended that you save your model as often as possible.
Geometry/Model 2-33
Solid Geometry Scale
Factor
The Internal Scale Factor is
used to reduce the size of the
part in the FEMAP database.
The internal engine of Para-
solid requires all positions be
in a box of +/- 500. If you have
entities outside of this box,
Parasolid cannot perform oper-
ations on them. By using an
internal scale factor, FEMAP
can scale the part internally to
prevent the part from extend-
ing beyond this box. You will
not see changes in the dimen-
sions of the part since FEMAP
will do all scaling internally.
This option allows the input of
very large dimensions for the
model, without exceeding the
limits of the Parasolid geome-
try engine.
By default the Solid Geometry
Scale Factor is set to
0..Inches, which automati-
cally sets a value of 39.37 (i.e.,
inches to meters conversion) and this factor is applied internally in FEMAP so that a part of 1.0 on the desktop will
be stored as 0.0254 in the database. The default factor of 39.37 will allow you to import and model parts that are +/
- 19,685 units. Without the scale factor the geometry would be outside of the Parasolid modeling limits and would
become corrupt. The default of 39.37 is chosen since it allows you to import a part that was modeled in inches in
CAD software, and continue to work in inches without manually having to scale the part. You can also choose to
set the Scale Factor to 1..Meters (value of 1.0), 2..Millimeters (value of 1000.0), or 3..Other, which allows
you to specify a value of your choice.
This is a startup preference; therefore, you must save the preference and exit FEMAP for it to take effect.
Load Expansion on Midside Nodes
This section sets the defaults for modification of the distribution of nodal loads (such as force and moment) on par-
abolic elements. To obtain an even distribution of force across a parabolic element, most programs require a larger
portion of the force be assigned to the midside nodes. You can set the factors Along Edges, On Tri-Face, or On
Quad-Face to represent the amount of the total load on the element which will be applied to the midside node.
You will typically want to use the default values above, as well as use the Midside Node Adjustment Default. If you
have further questions on the distribution required for your solver program, please consult the reference documen-
tation for your analysis program.
Meshing and Properties
Surface Meshing in Memory
This preference determines whether additional memory will be allocated by the FEMAP boundary mesher. If this
option is selected, FEMAP will allocate new memory to create the mesh. If it is not selected, FEMAP will utilize
the memory allocated in the database to perform the mesh. By allocating new memory, the FEMAP mesher can run
significantly faster than if it is limited to the database memory. Therefore, this option should almost always be
turned on. The only reason to turn this option off is if the available memory on the current machine is low enough
that allocation of new memory is extremely limited.
Use Fast Tri Mesher
The fast tri-mesher option uses a method to create triangles that generally produces fewer triangles with better
aspect ratios. When this option is on, the FEMAP surface mesher will use the fast tri-mesher by default. You can
also control the tri-mesher from the Automesh Surfaces dialog box (see Section 5.1.2.3, "Mesh, Geometry, Sur-
face...").
Use Length Based Mesh Sizing
When this option is on, FEMAP will use Length Based Sizing to set up mesh sizing on all curves in the model.
By default, FEMAP mesh sizing along curves is done in the parametric space of curves. In many cases this is desir-
able resulting in finer mesh in areas of high curvature. In some cases however (such as unstitched geometry or
geometry that has curves with unusual parameterization), length based spacing will yield much better results. Espe-
cially when dealing with unstitched geometry, length based sizing will produce meshes with matching nodal loca-
tions far more reliably than parametric spacing.
Alternate Section Property Calculation
Uses an alternate Alternate Section Property Calculator to determine the section properties for a Beam element
property.
For more information about the Alternate Section Property Calculator see Special Note about the Alternate Sec-
tion Property Calculator in Section 4.2.2.1, "Line Elements"
2.6.2.7 Interfaces
This section controls defaults for interfaces to other programs. When you select the Interfaces option, the Interface
Preferences dialog box will appear.
Note: Using Length Based Sizing can be very helpful for setting up mesh sizing if your geometry has come
from Catia. The parameterization coming from Catia is often much different than what other CAD
packages produce, therefore our parameter based mesh sizing is not as effective with this geometry.
Interfaces 2-35
It includes the following options:
Interface
This option simply chooses the default analysis program that FEMAP will display for the File, Import (or Export)
Analysis Model, and File, Import, Analysis Results commands. You should set this option to the interface that you
use most often.
Analysis Type
This option chooses the default type of analysis that will be performed. Set this to the type of analysis you perform
most often.
Non-FEMAP Neutral Version
To export a FEMAP model to some external analysis programs (CAEFEM, CDA/Spring, CFDesign, SINDA/G),
you use a neutral file. If your external program requires a previous version as input, use this option to set the neutral
file version. For example, an older version of CAEFEM may require a FEMAP version 6 neutral file rather than the
current version.
Neutral Digits
Use this command to set the number of significant digits for real numbers in the neutral file.
Interface Style
These options mask commands for users of some analysis programs. The two thermal options will configure
FEMAP in a thermal mode only, changing many dialog boxes. Many structural options will be hidden, and you will
no longer have access to them. The thermal options are is only recommended when performing modeling specific
to thermal analysis and exporting to a thermal specific program.
Structural makes all commands visible. Most users should use this option.
Thermal displays only thermal properties in material dialog boxes. This option can be used by structural analy-
sis program (such as Nastran) users who are performing thermal analyses.
Advanced Thermal displays only thermal properties in material dialog boxes, and limits the element types avail-
able. This option is for SINDA/G users only.
Enable Old Analysis Interfaces
When this option is on, interfaces to ALL solvers supported in FEMAP will be shown when importing or exporting
analysis files.
Analysis Monitor Options
Automatically Load Results: This option will set FEMAP to automatically read results when using the Analysis
Monitor.
Max Lines to Monitor: Sets the default for the number of lines that are monitored from the Analysis Monitor.
File Reference Options
Check References on Open: Toggles on and off checking the selected references (found in File, References)
when a model is opened
Create Geometry References: When this option is on, a geometry reference will be created automatically for
each piece of geometry when it is imported.
Create Analysis Model References: When this option is on, an analysis model reference will be created auto-
matically for each analysis model when it is imported.
Create Analysis Results References: When this option is on, an analysis results reference will be created auto-
matically for each analysis result set when it is imported.
For more information on references, see Section 2.4.2, "File, References..."
Note: The Enable Old Analysis Interfaces should not be used as these interfaces are no longer maintained
and have not been updated since FEMAP version 8.0. Please see Section 2.3, "Importing/Exporting
Files" for more information on using the Analysis Set Manager.
General Solver Options
Run Analysis using VisQ
Turn on this option to use VisQ, the Visual Queue Manager for FEMAP, to run an analysis. This option will check
the Run Analysis using VisQ option by default in the Analysis Set Manager.
Skip Comments when Exporting
When this option is on, FEMAP will not write any comments into the input file. Comments include FEMAP names
and IDs for corresponding groups and sets. Header information indicating the version of FEMAP used and the date
the file was written will also not be written.
Compute Principal Stress/Strain
When this option is on and you read analysis results, FEMAP will automatically compute principal, Von Mises,
max shear and mean stresses and strains if they have not been read, and if all required XYZ components of stress/
strain have been read. You can turn this option off if you do not want to post-process these output quantities. Turn-
ing this option off can result in substantial speed improvements during the final phases of reading results.
You may also want to turn this option off if your analysis program already computes these values. FEMAP does not
compute new values if results exist already, but the checking procedure for these vectors will take some time, espe-
cially in extremely large models.
Assume Engineering Shear Strain
Turn on this option to assume that the shear strain read from the solver results is engineering shear strain rather than
actual shear strain. Since shear strain is used to calculate the principal stress/strain values, its important to specify
the shear strain method.
Nastran Solver Options
Output Set Titles
When this option is set FEMAP will use the specified type of Nastran title when reading output from the .op2
results file. Options available are TITLE, SUBTITLE, and LABEL.
Solver Memory (Mb 0=Auto)
Allows you to allocate the amount of memory for Nastran to use when solving. If you leave this field blank, Nas-
tran will use the value currently set in your Nastran Resource file (Nast*.rcf located in the conf directory for NX
Nastran 4.0, 4.1, or 5.0), which by default is often set to memory = estimate (NX Nastran will try to determine
how much memory the job requires). This is usually recommended.
The mechanism FEMAP uses to set this option is to add a command line option (memory = VALUE mb) when the
job is submitted. This will override the value currently set in your Nastran Resource file.
Direct Output To
Allows you to select the directory to direct all Nastran output:
Current Directory (default): Last used directory by FEMAP. If a model has been saved to a directory, the output
will be directed to that directory when this option is on. If you have opened a model, imported geometry, or
imported a FEMAP neutral file from a directory, then that is now the current directory.
Model File Directory: The directory where the model file currently being used in located. All output will go
into this directory until the model is saved somewhere else. Importing geometry or neutral files from other
directories has no effect on where the output will be sent. If you are working on a model that has not been
saved, the output will be directed to a temporary directory until the model is saved.
Note: Please refer to NX Nastran documentation for more information on setting the correct memory value
for the solver. Allocating more memory than your machine has can cause the solver to fail and setting
this value too low can cause the solver to be less efficient.
Note: If you are using the Model File Directory option, and you have a model that has never been saved (i.e.,
open FEMAP, create a model, then run in NX Nastran without saving), then the output files will be
directed to the FEMAP Scratch directory specified on the Database tab of the Preferences dialog
box. This is only the case for completely unsaved models.
Library/Startup 2-37
Specified Directory: This option allows you to send all NX Nastran output to a directory that you have speci-
fied. You can us the ... browse button to select a directory. This can helpful because your output will always
be in the same place if you need to view the files or clean-up leftover output files from old analysis runs.
Read Comments as Titles
When you write out a Nastran file from FEMAP, you can write out titles (such as property or material names) as
comments. Turn on this option to read in these comments when you import the Nastran results back into FEMAP.
This option works best reading in comments as material and property titles. It may not read in comments as func-
tion, load set, or constraint set titles.
Read DirCos for Solid Stress/Strain
This option can be used when you wish to retrieve the direction cosines for solid stress/strain post-processing infor-
mation from your analysis program. Previous versions of FEMAP would ask you if you wanted to read this data
during the results import process. This is off by default since the direction cosine information can be quite large and
most users do not use this information.
Always Read Nonlinear Stress/Strain
When a nonlinear analysis is run using Nastran, both Nonlinear stresses/strains and regular stresses/strains are
available in the output file. An Output Set in FEMAP can only contain the Nonlinear OR the Regular stresses/
strains, not both. Checking this option will always read in the Nonlinear stresses/strains from the output file of a
nonlinear analysis, and this is the default for FEMAP. If this option is not checked, FEMAP will bring up a dialog
box during the import of results which allows you to choose which stresses/strains to read (Yes = Nonlinear, No =
Regular).
Using MSC/MD Nastran 2004 or later
Must be turned on when using MSC Nastran 2004, MSC Nastran 2005, or any MD Nastran version in order to
make sure that Nastran creates a compatible binary results file (.op2) that can be read into FEMAP correctly. It is a
good idea to select this option if you are always using MSC Nastran 2004 or above for analysis.
32-bit NX Nastran on 64-bit Windows (not available on 32-bit Windows operating systems)
When checked, tells FEMAP to run the 32-bit version of NX Nastran on a 64-bit Windows operating system. Both
the 32-bit and 64-bit versions of NX Nastran are installed on all operating systems.
Scratch Directory
Allows you to select the Scratch Directory for NX Nastran to use:
Nastran Default: Directory chosen during installation to use for creating NX Nastran scratch files.
Femap Scratch: Directory specified in the Database tab of the Preferences dialog box, where the FEMAP has
been directed to place the FEMAP scratch file.
Output Directory: Directory specified by the Direct Output To option on this tab of the Preferences dialog box.
2.6.2.8 Library/Startup
This section allows you to define the default libraries to be used for several different types of entities in FEMAP
and define a startup preference.
For any of the libraries, you do not have to specify a complete path as long as the file is in a directory which is
along your DOS PATH. FEMAP first searches your current directory and then along your path until it finds the file.
You can also use the Browse button to search for a specific directory where a FEMAP library file might be found.
By using Browse (...), a number of users can share one common set of FEMAP library files, as long as those users
have appropriate access and permissions to the directories where the shared library files are located.
Note: If you are using the Specified Directory option, it is a good idea to create a directory specifically for this
purpose only, such as C:\Output.
Note: If you are using multiple versions of MSC/MD Nastran (Any MD, 2005, 2004, 2001, 70.7, 70.5, etc.)
you may want to use the options available in the MSC/MD NASTRAN Version section of the NASTRAN
Executive and Solution Options dialog box found in the Analysis Set Manager to choose the specific
MSC/MD Nastran version on a case-by-case basis
The View Library contains views that can be loaded into your model. This file must exist if you are going to use
the Load View or Save View buttons in the View Quick Options dialog box (Ctrl+Q).
The Material, Property, Layup, Connection Property, Function, Analysis, and Format libraries are files which
contain data that can be accessed via the Save and Load buttons on the creation (or list) commands. You must
specify the name of an existing file if you plan to use the Load option; however, Save will create a new file if
one does not currently exist.
The Material Type Definition file contains the dialog box titles as well as the record formats for Other Types of
materials. This file can be modified to include additional material types, but modifications are only suggested
when accessing FEMAP information from a FEMAP neutral file since dedicated translators such as ABAQUS
or LS-DYNA3D will not recognize these user materials. Materials contained in the mat_scr.esp file installed
with FEMAP are supported by the specific dedicated translators.
Deleting Individual Entries and Views from Libraries
Any individual entry saved in a Material, Property, Connection Property, Function, Analysis, or Format library in
FEMAP can be deleted using the Delete, Library ... commands. These commands allow you to delete entries one at
a time from the library currently set in the Library/Startup tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Also, any individual view can be deleted from the View library specified in the Library/Startup tab of the Prefer-
ences dialog box using the Delete, Library, View command.
Startup Program File/Basic Script/Executable and Custom Tools
Custom Tools Path
The Custom Tools Path allows you to specify a custom commands and tools directory to be used every time
FEMAP is initialized. You can select the directory by using the Browse button (...).
Versions FEMAP 9.3 and above contain a toolbar called Custom Tools. This toolbar allows you to choose a direc-
tory on your machine where you can store all custom commands and tools. Custom tools can be recorded Pro-
gram Files (.PRO or .PRG files), FEMAP Basic scripts (usually .BAS files), or other executable (for instance, a
Visual Basic script compiled into a .EXE file). The Custom Tools toolbar will take any of those file types it locates
Color 2-39
in the specified directory and automatically places them into a menu structure which drops-down from the Custom
Tools toolbar.
Program
Allows you to choose a Program File, FEMAP Basic Script, or other executable (for instance, a Visual Basic
script compiled into a .EXE file) to run every time FEMAP is initialized or every time the File, New... command is
used to create a new FEMAP model. You can select the appropriate file by using the Browse button (...) to locate
the file in a particular directory.
Run for Every New Model
When the Run for Every New Model option is checked, FEMAP will run the Startup Program every time a new
model is created. If unchecked (default), it will only run the Startup Program when FEMAP is initialized.
2.6.2.9 Color
This section outlines the
options located on the Color
tab of the Preferences dialog
box.
You can control the default
colors for all entities.
The Reset Colors button on
this dialog box changes all col-
ors back to the FEMAP
defaults.
You can choose the Color Pal-
ette to use for these colors.
These colors will be used
whenever you start a new
model. You must save these
changes if you want them to
have any effect
You can also choose the User
Contour Palette which con-
tains the user-defined contour
palette colors. This file must
exist if you are going to choose
the user-defined palette in the
View Options command.
Note: If you are using more than 1 or 2 custom commands or tools, this saves a great deal of time because
in versions of FEMAP prior to 9.3, each command would have to be added to the user commands one at
a time and then placed into menus and/or toolbars.
Note: The Color Palette is stored with the model in FEMAP versions 9.3 and above. This means if you have
loaded or altered a Color Palette in a model, that Color Palette will be available when the model is
opened and also if the model is transferred into a newer version of FEMAP via a FEMAP Neutral File.
You can alter the current Color Palette or load a different Color Palette in any command in FEMAP
that brings up the Color Palette dialog box (i.e., Modify, Color, Node).
Note: The User Contour Palette can be specified for each view in a model. This can be done using the View,
Options command, PostProcessing Category, Contour/Criteria Levels Option. Clicking the Set Levels...
button and then the User Palette... button will allow you to specify the User Contour Palette. See Sec-
tion 8.3.10.4, "User-Defined Contour Palette" for more information about the User Contour Palette
2.6.2.10 Reset All
This option permanently resets all changes that you have made back to the FEMAP default configuration. You will
be asked to confirm this command before FEMAP resets all options. The only preferences which will not be
changed are any shortcut keys you have defined.
2.7 Using File, Recent Models - 1,2,3,4
The four most recently edited model files are listed on the File menu to enable you to more rapidly select them. If
you choose one of these files, FEMAP will automatically open this model file, but only after asking you if you
would like to save the current model file.
2.8 Exiting FEMAP
The File, Exit command allows you to leave FEMAP. You will be given a chance to save all current models that are
open in this FEMAP session if you have made any changes since your last save. If you have just started a new Unti-
tled model, you will always be asked whether you want to save the model even though it might be empty. If your
model is untitled, the standard file access dialog box will be displayed so you can specify a file name for the model.
You can also exit FEMAP by double-clicking the main window system menu, or by using the Close command on
that menu.
Alt+F4
3. Geometry
Geometry provides the framework for most finite element meshes. Therefore, it is necessary to have robust tools
for creating geometry. FEMAP has the capability to build geometry from simple points to complex 3-D solids.
Generally, you can create, copy, or modify geometry. The geometry section of this manual is separated into six
main sections, which are listed below.
Section 3.1, "Creating Points" (on the Geometry menu)
Section 3.2, "Creating Curves"(on the Geometry menu)
Section 3.3, "Creating Surfaces"(on the Geometry menu)
Section 3.4, "Creating Solids/Volumes"(on the Geometry menu)
Section 3.5, "Copying Geometry"(on the Geometry menu)
Section 3.6, "Modifying Geometry" (on the Modify menu)
Section 3.7, "Deleting Geometry" (on the Delete menu)
3.1 Creating Points
Points are used for constructing other geometry or finite element data. You may also apply loads and constraints to
points, and FEMAP will automatically apply them to nodes attached to the points. Points are similar to nodes in
that they are simply located at a specific location. Unlike nodes, however, they are not a finite element entity and
are not translated to analysis programs. Instead, they are used for defining geometry. Just as elements reference
nodes, curves reference points.
3.1.1 Geometry, Point...
... uses the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes (described in the FEMAP User Guide) to create points.
Choosing the Parameters button will display the Geometry Parameters dialog box, where you can set the active
layer or point color.
3.2 Creating Curves
Curves form the basis from which you can create surfaces, and they can also be generated from surfaces. They ref-
erence points to define their location. You can apply loads and constraints directly to curves, and FEMAP will auto-
matically convert them to nodal/elemental values on the attached FEA entities.
The Curve section of the Geometry menu has five submenus:
Curve -Line
Curve - Arc
Curve - Circle
Curve - Spline
Curve - From Surface
3.2.1 Lines
Lines are simply straight lines connecting two points. The Geometry, Curve-Line menu is partitioned into three sec-
tions:
The top portion creates lines in the workplane. Any locations that are specified in 3-D space will be automati-
cally projected onto the workplane.
3-2 Geometry
The second section consists of the Rectangle command. This command creates a rectangle in the workplane. It
is separated from the commands above because it creates four lines at once.
The bottom portion of the menu contains commands that are used to create lines in 3-D space. These commands
do not project the inputs onto the workplane.
3.2.1.1 Geometry, Curve-Line, Project Points...
. . . creates a line between two locations, which you specify using the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes.
Before creating the line, this command projects
the coordinates that you specify onto the work-
plane. Therefore, the line that is created always
lies in the workplane. The coordinates are pro-
jected along a vector that is perpendicular to the
workplane. If you want to create a line between
coordinates in 3D space (i.e. not in the work-
plane), use the Curve - Line, Coordinates com-
mand.
3.2.1.2 Geometry, Curve-Line, Horizontal...
. . . creates a line, centered around one location. The line is oriented along the X axis of the workplane. The name of
this command comes from the fact that in the default XY view, before you reorient the workplane, the workplane X
axis is horizontal on the screen.
This command uses the standard coordinate definition
dialog boxes to specify the coordinates of the required
location. The location is automatically projected onto the
workplane, along a vector which is perpendicular to the
workplane. The projected location is used as the center of
the line.
The length of the horizontal line in either direction from
the center is controlled by the Horizontal/Vertical Line
Length parameter. You can adjust this length by pressing
the Parameter button on the standard coordinate dialog,
and entering a new value prior to defining the center location.
3.2.1.3 Geometry, Curve-Line, Vertical...
... works just like Curve - Line, Horizontal, except the line will lie along the workplane Y axis. In the default XY
view with the original workplane orientation, this will be vertical on your screen.
Hint: You can use this command to create a 2D projected image of 3D geometry. Just set up the workplane so
the workplane normal is along the direction that you want to project, and pick the end points of the
existing lines (using Snap To Point). New lines will be created in the workplane.
Hint: Since control of the line length is somewhat difficult using this method, but positioning the line is very
quick, this method is often used for creating initial construction geometry which you then plan to mod-
ify with trim, join or break commands.
Workplane
Original
Coordinates
Projected
Coordinates
Workplane
Original
Projected
Xw
Yw
Coordinates
Coordinates
Geometry, Curve-Line, Perpendicular... 3-3
3.2.1.4 Geometry, Curve-Line, Perpendicular...
... creates a line in the workplane that is perpendicular to another curve. Three inputs are required for this method,
the origin of the new line, the original curve, and a location to specify direction. The origin projected along the
workplane normal vector, onto the workplane.
The total length of the line to be created is
based on the Horizontal/Vertical Line Length
parameter. You can change the length by press-
ing the Parameter button to change the length
in the Geometry Parameters dialog box. The
line to be created will start at the base location
(projected onto the workplane), will be ori-
ented perpendicular to the selected curve, and
will move in the direction of the location spec-
ified as the last input to this command.
3.2.1.5 Geometry, Curve-Line, Parallel...
... creates a line in the workplane that is parallel to another line. The required input for this command is the original
line and an offset distance. The line that you choose does not have to lie in the workplane. If it does not, it will be
projected onto the workplane (along the workplane normal) and the new line will be parallel to the projection. The
Offset distance is measured in the workplane, perpendicular to the original line.
When you press OK, you will see the standard
coordinate definition dialog box, asking for a
location on the side of the original line where
you want the offset curve to lie. Although you
can specify the coordinates in any manner, typ-
ically the best way is to point at the appropri-
ate side of the line, and click with the mouse.
The actual coordinates do not matter, just their
relationship to the original curve. The new line
will be offset toward the side of the line that
you specify.
The length of the new line is identical to the length of the original line that you choose
Note: If you choose a curve that does not lie in the current workplane, the selected curve will first be projected
into the workplane, then the perpendicular to the projection will be determined. The projection method
will work fine for lines, but if you choose an arc or circle that is not oriented parallel to the workplane,
the resulting line will not be perpendicular to the projection. Rather, it will go through the projection of
the original arc/circle center point.
Workplane
Original
Projected Base
Coordinates
Coordinates
Original Curve
Original Curve
Offset Distance
Coordinates
chosen on this
side
measured in the
workplane
Workplane
3-4 Geometry
3.2.1.6 Geometry, Curve-Line, Midline...
... creates a line in the workplane that is the center
line between two existing lines. To create a mid-
line, choose two other lines. If they do not lie in
the workplane, they will be automatically pro-
jected along the workplane normal.
The resulting line will lie halfway between the
respective end points of the two lines that you
choose.
The length of the midline is determined by the rel-
ative positions of the lines you choose.
3.2.1.7 Geometry, Curve-Line, At Angle...
... creates a line in the workplane at a specified angle from the workplane X axis. Initially, you must specify the
base coordinates of the line using the standard coordinate entry dialog boxes. The coordinates that you specify are
projected onto the workplane, along a vector which is normal to the workplane.
Finally you specify the angle from the workplane X
axis to the line. Positive angles are measured from
the positive workplane X axis toward the positive
workplane Y axis. Negative angles are measured
toward the negative workplane Y axis.
The total length of the line to be created is based on
the Horizontal/Vertical Line Length parameter. You
can change the length by pressing the Parameter
button to change the length in the Geometry Param-
eters dialog box.
3.2.1.8 Geometry, Curve-Line, Angle to Curve...
... is similar to the Geometry, Curve-Line, At Angle command, except that instead of specifying the angle from the
workplane X axis, you select a curve, and specify the angle measured from the curve direction.
Just like the At Angle command, the first data required is the base location, specified with the standard coordinate
entry dialog boxes. The location that you specify is again projected onto the workplane along the workplane normal
vector.
Next, you choose both the curve to measure from, and the angle from that curve. You can choose any location for
this command. It is not necessary for the base location to lie along the curve that you measure.
Workplane
Original Curve
Original Curve
Workplane
Original
Projected
Xw
Yw
Coordinates
Coordinates
Positive Angle
Workplane
Original
Projected
Coordinates
Coordinates
Positive Angle
Original Curve
Geometry, Curve-Line, Point and Tangent... 3-5
If the curve that you select is not a line however, the base location will be projected (in the workplane) onto the
curve and the base direction (zero angle) will be along the positive tangent to the curve.
3.2.1.9 Geometry, Curve-Line, Point and Tangent...
.... creates a line in the workplane through a point and tangent to a selected arc or circle. The first input for this
command is the curve.
After selecting the curve, you will see the standard coordinate dialog box. Here you must specify the location of the
end point of the line. This defines the end of the line opposite the end that will be tangent to the curve. You can
specify any location, but if you specify a location that is not on the workplane, those coordinates will be projected
along the workplane normal, to a location which is on the workplane.
The only restriction on the end point location is that it must lie outside of the arc/circle that you chose. No tangent
can be formed which passes through an interior point to the curve.
Finally, the standard coordinate dialog is displayed again. This time you must specify a location on the side closest
to the tangent that you want to use. Since there are two tangents that can be formed through any exterior point, this
allows you to choose the one that you want. There is no need for precise coordinates in this dialog. You must sim-
ply choose a location which is closer to one tangent point than the other; typically, a location on the appropriate
side of the circle.
For this command FEMAP considers arcs to be the same as circles. That is, you can still form a tangent to a portion
of the arc that lies outside of the arc end points. FEMAP ignores the end points, just as if the arc were a full circle.
For this reason, you must still choose the near location for an arc, even though there may only be one tangent
possible that falls within the end points.
3.2.1.10 Geometry, Curve-Line, Tangent...
... creates a line in the workplane which is tangent to two arcs or circles. First, you must choose the two curves that
you want to use.
Note: If you choose an arc or circle that does not lie in the workplane, FEMAP will project the key points of
that curve onto the workplane, and use the arc/circle defined by those projected locations to calculate
the tangent. If the curve was parallel to the workplane, this will not cause any problems. However, if the
curve normal is not parallel to the workplane normal, the resulting tangent will be calculated based on a
circle with a projected radius. Use this option carefully.
Projected
Coordinates
Tangent to Curve
Original
Curve
Projected End Point
Coordinates
Selected Curve
Use Point of
Tangency on
this side of Curve
All in Workplane
3-6 Geometry
You can choose any arcs or circles, but neither curve can lie completely inside the other. If it did, no tangents could
be computed.
When you have selected the curves, FEMAP will ask for a location using the standard coordinate dialog boxes.
This location does not have to be specified precisely, but is used to select which tangency points will be used.
Typically, as shown above, when you select two circles, there could be four possible tangents - one above, one
below and two crossing tangents. You must choose a location near the end point on the first curve (the From
curve) of the tangent that you want to create. The location is not used to compute the tangent. It is just used to select
from the four choices.
3.2.1.11 Geometry, Curve-Line, Rectangle...
. . . automatically creates four lines in the workplane that form a rectangle. The only input required are the coordi-
nates of two diagonally opposite corners of the rectangle. You will specify these locations using the standard coor-
dinate definition dialog boxes
FEMAP takes the locations that you specify and projects them, along the workplane normal, to equivalent locations
which lie on the workplane. The rectangle is formed from these projected locations. The sides of the rectangle are
always oriented along the workplane X and Y axes. Therefore, by changing the orientation of the workplane, you
can use this command to create rectangles in various orientations.
3.2.1.12 Geometry, Curve-Line, Continuous...
... creates a series of connected line segments between locations specified in three-dimensional space. The specified
locations are not projected onto the workplane, however, coordinates that you pick graphically will still always be
located in the workplane. This is usually the best command to use whenever you must create a boundary, since it
requires very little input.
Selected
All in Workplane
Pick near here
to create tangent
or, Pick near here
to create crossing tangent
as shown
Selected
From Curve
To Curve
Workplane
Projected
Coordinates
Xw
Yw
Projected
Coordinates
Original
Corner Locations
Geometry, Curve-Line, Points... 3-7
The standard coordinate definition dialog boxes are
used to specify the line segment end points. The first
line will be created after you specify the second end
point. Then, another line will be created after each
additional location that you specify. These lines will
connect the previous location to the one that you just
specified. As each line is created, it will appear in
your graphics windows.
You can continue to specify coordinates and create
lines for as long as you like. There is no limit on the
number of lines you can create in a single command. When you are done, press Cancel to stop creating lines. If you
press Cancel after having created two or more lines, you will be asked whether you want to close the lines. If you
choose Yes, a final line will be created joining the last location that you specified to the first location - thus creating
a closed polygon.
3.2.1.13 Geometry, Curve-Line, Points...
. . . creates a single line between two existing points. Unlike the other line creation commands, this command can
only be used when you already have point entities that you want to connect. The primary use for this command is to
connect end points of other curves.
To request the points that you want to connect, you can enter
the point IDs or choose them with your mouse, but the points
must already exist. Since the new line simply connects these
existing points, it does not lie in the workplane, unless both
points you select happen to be located in the workplane.
3.2.1.14 Geometry, Curve-Line, Coordinates...
... creates a single line in three dimensional space between two coordinate locations that you specify using the stan-
dard coordinate definition dialog box. This command is very similar to the Geometry, Curve-Line, Continuous
command, except that it requires two end points for each line that is created. You should use this command when
you have a series of lines to create, but the lines are not connected at their end points.
3.2.1.15 Geometry, Curve-Line, Offset...
... creates a line offset, in three dimensional space from another line. You first select the line from which you want
to offset. You may only choose lines for this command.
When you have selected the existing curve,
you will see the standard vector definition
dialog box. The vector that you specify will
be used to compute the offset location of the
new line. You do not have to specify the base
of the vector at either end point, nor at any
other specific location. The vector compo-
nents are simply used to offset the end points
of the original line. The length of the vector
that you specify will be the offset distance.
Hint: If the lines that you need to create are not coincident at their end points, use the Geometry, Curve-Line,
Coordinates command instead of this command.
End point Locations
Optionally
create line
to close
Point
Point
F9
Original Curve
Offset along
this vector
3-8 Geometry
3.2.1.16 Geometry, Curve-Line, Vectored...
... creates a three dimensional line using the standard vector definition dialog boxes. This command gives you
access to the many special vector definition methods (along axis, components, normal, bisect, . . .) when creating
lines. The line that is created will go from the base to the tip of the vector that you specify.
Even if you just use the basic vector definition methods, like locate, when you choose the base and tip of the line
graphically, you have the benefit of seeing the line/vector dynamically drawn with the cursor before you choose the
end points.
3.2.2 Arcs
You may also define circular arcs with FEMAP by using the commands under the Geometry, Curve-Arc menu. This
submenu is broken into two sections. The commands at the top of the menu (above the separator line) all create arcs
which lie in the current workplane. The other commands can create arcs anywhere, including in the workplane.
All of the methods can be used to create equivalent arcs. The various commands are merely for convenience in
specifying the input.
3.2.2.1 Geometry, Curve-Arc, Center-Start-End...
... creates an arc in the workplane by specifying the location of the center and two end points of the arc. The stan-
dard coordinate definition dialog boxes are used to define all three locations.
The locations that you specify are first projected onto the workplane along the workplane normal, and are then used
to define the arc. As shown in the figure, the center location and start point are used to define the radius of the arc.
The end point does not have to lie on the perimeter, but the arc will terminate along the line that goes from the cen-
ter to the end point.
The arc will always be created in a counter-
clockwise direction in the workplane. That is,
the arc will go from the start point, in the direc-
tion from the workplane X axis toward the
workplane Y axis. As shown in the figure, if
you reverse the workplane normal, the same
start and end points create complimentary arcs.
Similarly, just swapping the start and end points
produces the same results.
3.2.2.2 Geometry, Curve-Arc, Radius-Start-End...
... creates an arc in the workplane by specifying two end points and the desired radius. To use this command you
must first specify the starting and ending locations of the arc using the standard coordinate entry dialog boxes. You
can specify any three-dimensional locations, but they will be projected onto the workplane, along the workplane
normal.
Hint: If you need to offset multiple curves along the same vector, including curves that are not lines, use the
Geometry, Copy, Curve command instead.
Start point
All in Workplane
Center of Arc
End point
Xw
Yw
radius
Start point
All in Workplane
Center of Arc
End point
Xw
Yw
Geometry, Curve-Arc, Angle-Start-End... 3-9
After specifying the end points, you will be asked for the radius. If you specify a positive radius, the resulting arc
will always have an included angle less than 180 degrees. A negative radius will choose the complimentary or
major arc (always greater than 180 degrees).
This command creates arcs that go in a counter-clockwise direction (relative to the workplane axes) from starting to
ending points. The figure shows several possibilities:
Reversing the direction of the workplane normal has the same effect as swapping the end points, as shown in the
figure.
3.2.2.3 Geometry, Curve-Arc, Angle-Start-End...
... creates an arc in the workplane by specifying two end points and the included angle of the arc that connects
them. This command works just like the Geometry, Curve-Arc, Radius-Start-End command, except that you spec-
ify the included angle instead of the radius.
The shape and orientation of the arc to be created follows the convention shown for the Radius-Start-End method.
If you specify a positive angle, the arc will go in a counterclockwise direction (relative to the workplane X and Y
axes) from the start to the end point. A negative angle goes in a clockwise direction. This agrees with the normal
conventions for two-dimensional polar coordinates.
Start point End point
Xw
Yw
Positive Radius
Negative Radius
All in Workplane
Positive Radius
Start point
End point
Negative Radius
Xw
Yw Positive Angle
Positive Angle
All in Workplane
Start point
End point
Negative Angle
Start point
End point Negative Angle
3-10 Geometry
3.2.2.4 Geometry, Curve-Arc, Angle-Center-Start...
. . . creates an arc in the workplane by defining the location of the center, the starting location and the included
angle. If the locations that you specify do not lie in the workplane, they will be projected along the workplane nor-
mal to new locations that are in the workplane.
This command is very similar to the Geometry, Curve-Arc, Angle-Start-End command. Instead of specifying an
ending location, however, you specify the center. The arc radius is automatically determined from the distance
between the center and starting locations. The end point is determined by rotating the start point through the speci-
fied angle.
If you specify a positive angle, the arc will be drawn in a counter-clockwise direction relative to the workplane
axes. A negative angle will create a clockwise arc. For an example of this convention, refer to the figure for
"Geometry, Curve-Arc, Angle-Start-End...".
3.2.2.5 Geometry, Curve-Arc, Chord-Center-Start...
... creates an arc in the workplane by defining the location of the center, a starting location and the length of the arc
chord. The standard coordinate definition dialog boxes are used to define both the center and starting locations.
Both of these locations will be projected onto the workplane, if required. The relative positions of these projected
locations determines the arc radius.
All arcs created by this command are drawn in a counter-clockwise direction (relative to the workplane XY axes).
If you specify a positive chord length, the arc will always have an included angle less than 180 degrees. Specifying
a negative angle creates a complimentary arc with an included angle that is larger than 180 degrees. By definition,
the chord length must always be shorter than twice the radius (the distance from the center to starting point).
3.2.2.6 Geometry, Curve-Arc, Points...
... creates an arc which passes through three locations on the perimeter. This arc does not have to be in the work-
plane. It will be drawn through any three locations that you define.
The standard coordinate dialog boxes will be displayed three
times during this command. The first coordinate is used for
the start of the arc, the second for any point along the arc, and
the third for the ending location. Since the arc is drawn from
the start, to the middle, to the ending locations, there are no
clockwise/counter-clockwise conventions. The direction is
simply based on the relative positions of the three locations.
3.2.2.7 Geometry, Curve-Arc, Center and Points...
. . . creates an arc which is defined by its center, start and ending locations. The arc created by this command does
not have to lie in the workplane. It is oriented by the locations that you define.
The standard coordinate dialog boxes will be displayed four times during this command. The first three coordinates
are used to define the center, starting and ending locations. The arc radius is defined by the distance from the center
to the start location. The ending location is used to determine the included angle. The end of the arc will always lie
Start point
Center
Xw
Yw
Positive Chord
Start point
Center
Negative Chord
All in Workplane
Chord Length
Chord Length
Ctrl+F9
Start
Other Location
End
Geometry, Curve-Arc, Start-End-Direction... 3-11
along the line connecting the center and the ending location that you specify. Since the arc radius is constant how-
ever, the arc will not necessarily end at the location you specify. The only time it will end exactly at that location is
if the distance from the center to the end is identical to the distance from the center to the start.
After you specify the first three locations, the standard coordinate dialog box will be displayed a fourth time. The
fourth location can be specified anywhere, but it is used to determine which of the two possible arcs will be created.
Since there is no clockwise/counter-clockwise convention for this three dimensional arc, the arc will be drawn in
the direction from the start to the end that causes it to pass nearest to this fourth position.
3.2.2.8 Geometry, Curve-Arc, Start-End-Direction...
. . . creates an arc that is defined by two end points and the tangent vector at the starting location. This arc does not
have to lie in the workplane. It is oriented by the locations of the end points and the direction of the tangent.
The two end points are defined first, using
the standard coordinate dialog boxes. There
is no restriction on the positions of these
coordinates, but they must not be coinci-
dent. Finally, the standard vector definition
dialog boxes are used to define the starting
tangent. The tangent vector can be defined
relative to any convenient location. It does
not have to be based at the starting location
of the arc. Only the direction of the vector is used to define the initial tangent direction of the resulting arc.
3.2.3 Circles
There are several methods of creating circles in FEMAP. The Geometry, Curve-Circle submenu is partitioned into
two sections. The commands at the top of the menu (above the separator line) all create circles which lie in the cur-
rent workplane. The other commands can create circles anywhere, including in the workplane.
All of the methods can be used to create equivalent circles, the various commands are merely for convenience in
specifying the input.
Points on a Circle
No matter which command is used, five points will be created for each circle - one at the center, one at the starting
location on the perimeter, and three more every 90 degrees around the perimeter from the starting location. The
radius of the circle is determined by the distance from the center to the starting location. The other points are
merely for your convenience in defining other geometry. For example, you can easily snap a cursor selection to any
of these locations by choosing the Snap To Point method.
If you are modifying (moving, rotating...) points, you must be careful. If you do not move all of the points for each
curve, the circle radius may change, and the other points will no longer lie on the perimeter. In general you should
always use the curve modification commands, rather than the point modifications if you wish to preserve the origi-
nal geometry.
Note: The only restriction on the vector direction is that it must not be parallel to the line connecting the start-
ing and ending locations. If it were, it could not be an arc tangent. Similarly, it is relatively unusual to
choose vectors that are very close to being parallel. They will result in arcs with very large radii.
Start
End
End
Center
Other Location
Other Location
Start
Center
Start
End
End Start
Tangent Vector
can be located
anywhere
Tangent
3-12 Geometry
3.2.3.1 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Radius...
. . . creates a circle by specifying the two end points of a
radius. That is, a location at the center and one on the
perimeter. This circle will always lie in the workplane.
If you specify coordinates that are not in the workplane,
they will be projected onto the workplane prior to defin-
ing the circle.
The standard coordinate definition dialog boxes will be
displayed twice. First for the center, then for the starting
point. As shown in the figure, the points on the perime-
ter are oriented relative to the line between the center
and starting locations. They are not based on the work-
plane X or Y axes.
3.2.3.2 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Diameter...
... creates a circle in the workplane, by specify-
ing two locations at opposite ends of a diameter.
This command is similar to Geometry Curve-
Circle Radius, but instead of defining the cen-
ter, you specify a point on the opposite side of
the perimeter. Again, this command projects the
locations that you specify onto the workplane
before creating the circle.
3.2.3.3 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Center...
. . . creates a circle in the workplane by specifying a location at the center, and the length of the radius. The center
location is defined using the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes. The location that you define is first pro-
jected onto the workplane before being used as the center of the circle.
Unlike the Curve-Circle Radius and Diameter
commands, this command does depend on the
orientation of the workplane X and Y axes to
orient the circle. The starting location is always
positioned in the direction of the positive work-
plane X axis relative to the center. If you spec-
ify a positive radius, the first point (at 90
degrees along the circle) is located in the direc-
tion of the positive workplane Y axis. If you
specify a negative radius, it is located in the
direction of the negative workplane Y axis.
3.2.3.4 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Two Points...
... creates a circle in the workplane which
passes through two locations and has a
specified radius. This command is similar
to the Geometry, Curve-Circle, Diameter
command in that you first specify two
points on the perimeter of the circle using
the standard coordinate dialog boxes. In
this case, however, the locations are not at
opposite ends of a diameter. The first point
is still used as the start of the perimeter.
Center
Start
radius
Other points
Xw
Yw
Start
diameter
Other point
Xw
Yw
End
Other point
of diameter
of diameter
Center
Start
radius
Xw
Yw
Positive Radius
Negative Radius
Starting location
Other location
radius
Starting location
Other location
radius
Xw
Yw
Negative Radius Positive Radius
Geometry, Curve-Circle, Point-Tangent... 3-13
The second point is used to orient the circle, but does not determine the radius/diameter. Rather, an additional dia-
log box is displayed which asks for the length of the radius.
As shown, if you specify a positive radius, the center of the circle will be chosen so that the circle will be drawn in
a counter-clockwise direction relative to the workplane X and Y axes. A negative radius chooses the center so that
the circle is drawn in a clockwise direction.
3.2.3.5 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Point-Tangent...
... creates a circle by specifying a center location and choosing a tangent arc, circle or line. This command always
creates circles in the workplane. You specify the center coordinates using the standard coordinate dialog boxes, but
they will be projected onto the workplane before being used to define the circle.
Next, you will be prompted for the curve
ID. This allows you to choose the curve
that will be tangent to the new circle. You
can choose any line, arc or circle. You can-
not choose a spline. No matter what curve
you choose, it will be considered to be
infinite when computing the tangency.
That is, lines will extend to infinity, and
arcs will be considered to be full circles.
If you choose an arc or circle, there would
be two possible points of tangency. This
command will always choose the one that is closest to the center of the new circle. You cannot use this command to
create a circle which envelops another circle. You can, however, create circles which are tangent to either the inte-
rior or exterior of another arc or circle.
The starting point of the new circle will always be located at the point of tangency.
3.2.3.6 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Tangent to Curves...
... creates a circle, of a specified radius, in the workplane which is tangent to two other curves.
Only the dialog box show here is required for this command.
The circle to be created will be tangent to the two curves that you select. If you are choosing two lines, make cer-
tain they are not parallel. The radius can be any value, but must be large enough to make the double tangency pos-
sible. For example, if you are choosing two circles that are separated by 10 inches, a 1 inch radius cannot possibly
be tangent to both.
Center
Start automatically
Xw
Yw
positioned at point
Original Curve
of tangency
Curve 2
Curve 1
Xw
Yw
Pick Curve 2 graphically
in this quadrant to create
Other possible tangent
circles. Center Near
chooses which one will
be created
this circle
3-14 Geometry
The coordinates that you specify for With Center Near are simply used to choose from among the several possible
tangent circles that could be created. Only the circle which has its center closest to the location that you specify will
be created. For convenience, you can change the coordinate system in which this location is specified.
If you are using your mouse to select the curves graphically, the With Center Near coordinates will automatically
be set to the location where you choose the second curve. If you are careful, when you select this curve, you will
not have to respecify any additional center coordinates.
3.2.3.7 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Concentric...
... creates a circle in the workplane which has the same
center as another circle or arc. You can specify any
radius for the new circle. This is a very quick method for
creating a series of circles which have the same center.
Simply select the curve and input the radius. The curve
must be an arc or circle. The starting location of the new
circle will be in the same direction from the center as it is
for the original curve that you select.
3.2.3.8 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Points on Arc...
... creates a circle which passes through three specified
locations. This command is just like the Geometry,
Curve-Arc, Points command, except that it creates a full
circle rather than an arc. The resulting circle does not
have to lie in the workplane, it is completely oriented by
the three locations that you specify.
3.2.3.9 Geometry, Curve-Circle, Center and Points...
... creates a circle specified by its center, a starting location on
the perimeter and one other location. This command is just
like the Geometry Curve-Arc Center and Points command,
except that it creates a full circle rather than an arc. In addi-
tion, one less location is required since there is no end point
for a circle.
The Other Location does not have to lie on the perimeter of
the circle. It is only used to determine the positive direction
around the circle from the starting location. The radius of the
circle is determined from the distance between the center and
starting locations.
Note: You can choose any type of original curves for this command, however, they should lie in the current
workplane. If they do not, they will be projected onto the workplane prior to computing the tangency
and you may not get the results that you expected. Similarly, because of inaccuracies in computing off-
set splines (which are used in the tangency calculations), you may find that if you choose one or more
splines, the resulting circle does not actually touch the spline. For this reason, this command is not rec-
ommended when you are working with splines.
Original
Xw
Yw
radius
Circle
Start
Other
Final Location
Location
Start
Other
Center
Location
Splines 3-15
3.2.4 Splines
FEMAP has the capability to produce splines containing from between four to 110 points. Splines created in
FEMAP with four points will be stored as cubic Bezier curves. Splines created through the Ellipse, Parabola,
Hyperbola, Equation, Tangents, and Blend suboptions will automatically contain four points and be stored as cubic
Bezier splines. Splines created with the remaining commands with more than four points will be stored as B-
Splines. In addition, Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) can be imported through the IGES translator.
Splines are created from their control points. The actual curve passes through the first and last control point, but
does not pass through the intermediate points. FEMAP does have methods which allow you to input a spline based
upon points on the spline, however, FEMAP will use these points to calculate the control points, and then store the
spline with its control points.
The control points of a spline determine the direction of the spline.
In addition to direction, distance between control points influences curvature of the spline. The further the control
point is pulled from the previous control point, the more the spline is pulled toward the intermediate point, and
the curvature is increased.
Displaying Splines
Splines are computed internally with full double precision accuracy. For display purposes however, splines are dis-
played as a series of line segments. If you want to change the accuracy of the display, either to make it more accu-
rate (but slower), or less accurate (but faster), use the View Options command. Choose the Tools and View Style list,
and the Curve and Surface Accuracy option. Then set the Max% Error value. A smaller number makes the display
more accurate.
The Geometry, Curve-Spline submenu is partitioned into three sections: splines in a workplane, splines from ana-
lytics (also in the workplane), and splines in 3-D space. Each of the commands on these menus are discussed below
3.2.4.1 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Project Control Points...
...creates a spline in the workplane specifying the location of the control points. The standard coordinate definition
dialog boxes will be displayed as many times as required (up to 110 times) to allow you to define the control points.
If you create a spline with four points, it will be a Bezier spline. More points will force the curve to be a B-spline.
If the locations you choose are not in the current workplane, they will be projected onto the workplane before the
spline is created.
Note: The Cancel button on the dialog box is utilized to both cancel the creation of the spline, as well as cre-
ate it. If less than four points have been chosen, the Cancel button will enable you to terminate the pro-
cess without creating a spline. Once four points have been defined, however, the Cancel button is used
to terminate input of more points and a spline is created. If you make an input error after four points
have been defined, you cannot cancel the procedure without creating the spline. Simply use the Tools,
Undo command to remove the spline if it is inaccurate. This is true for all procedures that enable you to
create B-splines.
Final Control
Intermediate
Point
Control Points
Final Tangent
Starting Tangent
Final Tangent
Starting
First Control
Point
Tangent
3-16 Geometry
3.2.4.2 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Project Points...
... is similar to the Geometry, Curve-Spline, Project Control Points command, except that instead of defining the
control points, you specify four or more points on the spline. The control points are computed automatically so that
the spline passes through the points that you specified.
The standard coordinate dialog boxes are used to define the points, and the locations are, as usual, projected onto
the workplane. The spline will go through the points in the order that you define them - from first to last.
This command is typically used to create two-dimensional splines to fit a curve through known locations. It lets
you precisely control points to lie along the spline. Some care should be taken, however, when choosing those
points. If you choose points that are extremely close together, it can result in control points at great distances from
the spline.
3.2.4.3 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Ellipse...
... creates four splines, in the workplane, that together form an ellipse. Each spline represents one quadrant of the
full ellipse. When you choose this command you will be asked for the center location using the standard coordinate
dialog boxes. The center will be projected onto the workplane whenever necessary. Next, the standard vector defi-
nition dialog boxes are used to specify the orientation of the principal axis from the center, as shown in the figure
The base location and length of the axis vector are unimportant, only the orientation is used. You must be careful to
specify a vector that is not perpendicular to the workplane, since the vector must be projected onto the workplane.
It is the projection that orients the ellipse.
Finally, you will specify the two radii. The first, or Vector Radius, is the radius of the ellipse along the vector that
you just specified. The other radius is the radius along the other principal axis of the ellipse. If you specify equal
radii, the splines will approximate a circle.
3.2.4.4 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Parabola...
... creates a spline in the workplane that is one side of a parabola. This command requires three sets of coordinates.
Each location is defined using the standard coordinate dialog boxes, and is projected onto the workplane before
being used to create the spline.
Note: Since the underlying mathematics of the spline are based on a parametric cubic equation, the resulting
splines cannot precisely represent a circle or ellipse. For most FEA analyses, however, the approxima-
tion is close enough. Given the four spline layout created by this command, with equal radii, the maxi-
mum deviation from a true circle would be 0.027% of the radius. If this is not close enough, use arc/
circle commands to create precise geometry.
First Point
Fourth
Second Point
Third Point
Computed
Computed
All in Workplane
Control Point
Point
Control Point
Principal Axis Vector
Vector Radius
Other Radius
can be major or minor
axis.
All in Workplane
Geometry, Curve-Spline, Hyperbola... 3-17
The first location is the vertex of the parabola. The
spline will start from this location. The next location
is the focus of the parabola. These coordinates
(along with the vertex) are used to determine the
focal length and focal direction of the parabola. Nei-
ther the spline nor its control points are actually
located at the focus. For reference, however, an extra
point is created at this location. The final location is
an approximate end for the spline. These coordinates
do not have to be specified precisely. They do not
have any impact on the shape or orientation of the parabola, they simply define where you want the parabola to
end.
3.2.4.5 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Hyperbola...
... creates a spline in the workplane that is one side of a hyperbola.
The first input required is the location of the ver-
tex of the hyperbola. The standard coordinate dia-
log boxes are used to specify this location. The
spline will start from this location. The standard
vector dialog boxes are then used to define a vec-
tor toward the focus. The origin and magnitude of
this vector are not important, only the direction is
used to orient the hyperbola. Next, you must
specify the vertex height and asymptote angle, as
shown in the figure. These values determine the
shape of the hyperbola. Finally, an approximate
end for the spline/hyperbola is required. These
coordinates do not have to be specified precisely.
They do not have any impact on the shape or orientation of the hyperbola, they simply define where you want the
curve to end.
3.2.4.6 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Control Points...
... creates a spline by specifying its control points. This command is exactly like the Geometry, Curve-Spline,
Project Control Points command, except that the locations that you define are not projected onto the workplane.
Therefore, the spline created by this command does not necessarily lie in the workplane, and in fact may be nonpla-
nar.
Hint: This command always creates a parabola which extends completely to the vertex. If you need some
other segment of a parabola, you can still use this command to create a basic curve, then use the Modify,
Trim command to cut away the portions that you do not need.
Note: Even though the spline is defined by a parametric cubic equation, the representation of a parabola is
precise. Unlike ellipses and hyperbolas, there is no deviation from a true parabola.
Hint: This command always creates a hyperbola that extends completely to the vertex. If you need some other
segment of a hyperbola, you can still use this command to create a basic curve, then use the Modify,
Trim command to cut away the portions that you do not need.
Note: Since the underlying mathematics of the spline that this command creates is a parametric cubic equa-
tion, it cannot precisely represent a hyperbola. For most finite element applications, however, the devi-
ations are acceptable. The exact deviations are dependent on the geometry specified, but even extreme
cases will be very accurate.
Vertex
Focus
Specified
End Point
Focal Direction
All in Workplane
Specified
End Point
V
e
r
t
e
x
Asymptote Angle
Asymptote
Vertex
Vector toward Focus
All in Workplane

H
e
i
g
h
t
3-18 Geometry
3.2.4.7 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Points...
... creates a spline by specifying four points along the spline. This command is exactly like the Geometry, Curve-
Spline, Project Points command, except that the locations that you define are not projected onto the workplane.
Therefore, the spline created by this command does not necessarily lie in the workplane, and in fact may be nonpla-
nar.
3.2.4.8 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Equation...
... creates a spline by specifying the coefficients of its parametric cubic equations. This is a rather cumbersome way
to create a spline, but provides complete control over the resulting curve.
The parametric equations are shown in the dialog box with blanks for the coefficients. Leaving a coefficient blank
effectively eliminates that term from the equation. If you leave all coefficients for one of the x, y or z equations
blank, the spline will be planar in the corresponding global plane.
3.2.4.9 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Tangents...
... creates a cubic Bezier spline by specifying starting and ending tangent vectors. The standard vector creation dia-
log box is displayed twice so you can define the two vectors.
For this command it is important to define the vector direction, location, and magnitude. The base location of each
vector is used as the starting and ending locations of the spline. The direction and magnitude are used to position
the intermediate control points.
This method can be very powerful when you use the advanced vector definition (tangent, bisect, normal. . .) meth-
ods.
3.2.4.10 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Blend...
... creates a spline that connects and blends the ends of two existing curves. The resulting spline will be tangent to
the respective ends of the two curves. This command offers only limited control of the interior of the spline but
enforces both connectivity and tangency at the end points.
Here you select the two curves, and two coordinate locations. The coordinate locations are only used to determine
which end of each curve that you want to select. You do not have to specify precise coordinates. In fact, if you
choose the curve graphically the coordinates will be automatically specified to the location you were pointing to
when you picked the curve. Therefore, be sure to point near the end of the curve that you want to use when you
make the selections.
Final Tangent
Starting Tangent
Base of vector
Magnitude and direction
of vector defines
intermediate control
is end point of
spline
points
Geometry, Curve-Spline, Midspline... 3-19
The other required input is the Blend Factor.
This factor is the only control over the interior
shape of the spline. By specifying a larger num-
ber, the spline will closely follow the ending tan-
gents for a larger distance, typically causing
more curvature near the center of the spline.
Smaller numbers make the tangency weaker,
therefore, most of the curvature will be near the
ends of the spline. The figure shows some possi-
bilities.
If you specify a blend factor which is too large,
or too small, you can create splines that have
loops, or extreme curvature.
3.2.4.11 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Midspline...
... creates a spline which is midway between two curves. Any two curves can be used for this command. The only
input required is the two curves. FEMAP will automatically create a spline which is midway between the two
curves.
3.2.4.12 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Offset...
... creates a spline that is offset from another spline along a
direction parallel to the workplane. This does not necessarily
create splines in the workplane - it just offsets them in a direc-
tion which is parallel to the workplane. The offset is however a
planar offset. Three dimensional (nonplanar) splines cannot be
offset in multiple directions along their length.
The first input required for this command is the ID of the origi-
nal curve (which must be a spline), and the offset distance.
Then, using the standard coordinate dialog box, you will specify
a location on the side of the original curve (relative to the current
workplane) where you want the offset curve to be created. The
coordinates are not important, just which side of the original curve you want.
3.2.4.13 Geometry, Curve-Spline, Multiple Curves...
...creates a single spline along multiple, connected curves. The spline points and control
points will be created automatically. The only input for this command is a list of curves. The
curves must be continuously connected in a single branch loop. The loop does not have to be
closed. If possible FEMAP will use exact replicas of the selected curves, and simply create a
new continuous curve. If the curves are from mixed geometry engines, or cannot be dupli-
cated, FEMAP will create a FEMAP engine spline that closely approximates the selected
curves.
3.2.5 Curves from Surfaces
FEMAP can create curves directly from surfaces. This capability is most often used to create a curve at a specific
location on a surface, or at the intersection of two surfaces. You can imprint curves onto a surface to provide addi-
tional controls on your meshing procedures. You can define the mesh size on these curves, as well as load or con-
strain them, just like any other curve in FEMAP. This can be very useful to obtain nodes at specific locations.
Note: Cubic Bezier splines (ones with only four points) cannot be offset precisely, due to the underlying math-
ematics. You will find that the offset curve is not a constant distance from the original - sometimes by a
significant deviation. This is especially true when the spline is nonplanar. Offset B-splines are modified
by adding control points to improve how well the offset spline tracks the original curve. If you need pre-
cise offsets, you cannot use splines. Instead, use a series of arcs, since arcs can be offset precisely.
Note: Take care to avoid sharp corners, as the resulting spline will not be able to match the geometry cor-
rectly.
Blend Factor = 1.0 Blend Factor = 1.5 Blend Factor = 0.5
Offset
Original Curve
Offset to this
side of original
3-20 Geometry
This menu is partitioned into two segments. The first portion of the menu contains one command, Geometry,
Curves - from Surface, Update Surfaces. This command does not perform any calculations. It simply applies the
curve operations in the second segment of the menu to the surfaces, and therefore allows imprinting of these curves
onto the surfaces. The second portion of the menu contains the actual commands.
This entire menu of commands is not available in the standard geometry engine.
3.2.5.1 Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Update Surfaces...
... toggles the update surfaces between on and off. As mentioned above, this command does not perform any oper-
ations directly. It simply controls how the remaining Geometry, Curves - from Surface commands are implemented.
If this option is on, a check mark will be visible next to the command. When any of the other commands on this
menu are then performed, FEMAP will automatically update the surfaces with these curves. This is a very easy
method of imprinting curves onto surfaces to customize the meshing procedure. If this option is off, (no check
mark), curves are created/manipulated using the surface, but the surface itself is not updated.
3.2.5.2 Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Intersect...
... creates a curve at the intersections of surfaces. The only inputs required for this command are the two solids.
FEMAP will create curves at all intersections of these bodies, and update the surfaces at the intersections if this
option is on (see Section 3.2.5.1, "Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Update Surfaces...").
3.2.5.3 Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Project...
... projects curves onto selected surfaces. You must first select the surfaces, and then select the curve(s) which you
want project. FEMAP will automatically project the curves onto the selected surfaces. This command will automat-
ically project normal to the surface.
This command is very useful for imprinting one surface, composed of its bounding curves, onto the surface of a
solid. You must have the Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Update Surface on to imprint the curves onto a surface
of the solid (see Section 3.2.5.1, "Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Update Surfaces...").
Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Project Along Vector... 3-21
3.2.5.4 Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Project Along Vector...
... is identical to Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Project, except you define a vector, using the standard vector
definition dialog box, to project along.
3.2.5.5 Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Parametric Curve...
... creates a curve along a surface in either the u or v direction. After selecting this command, you must input a loca-
tion for the curve, using the standard coordinate definition dialog box. FEMAP will then prompt you to choose
between the u direction or the v direction. FEMAP will create the curve along the surface, through the point you
input, in the surface direction you chose.
When Update Surfaces is on (see Section 3.2.5.1, "Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Update Surfaces..."), you can
quickly partition a surface into several segments, which is often useful for loading and meshing purposes.
3.2.5.6 Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Slice...
... requires you to define a plane, using the standard plane definition dialog box, and the solid to slice. FEMAP will
create curves which will form the slice through the solid. If Update Surfaces is on (see Section 3.2.5.1, "Geometry,
Curves - from Surface, Update Surfaces..."), the affected surfaces will also be partitioned by the slice.
3-22 Geometry
3.2.5.7 Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Split at Points...
... requires you to choose a face to split and then choose points to split the selected face with a parametric curve. If
Update Surfaces is on (see Section 3.2.5.1, "Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Update Surfaces..."), the affected
surface will also be partitioned by this command.
Creating Surfaces 3-23
3.3 Creating Surfaces
There are several types of surfaces in FEMAP. The following table summarizes those types, and the commands
that create them.
You do not have to worry about which type of surface is being created. All surfaces can be used equally well for
meshing or other purposes. This information is just provided so you can understand the various methods that are
being used.
Surface Parameters
When you are creating surfaces, you will see numerous dialog boxes with a Parameter button. Choosing this but-
ton lets you set various options which control the surfaces that you will create. You will see the Geometry Parame-
ters dialog box
All of the parameters of interest are in the Surface section. You can choose the ID of the next surface to be created,
although it is usually not of great concern. You can also choose a color for the surface - either by typing its number
or by pressing the Palette button and choosing from the standard palette. If you do not set a color, you can always
change the color later with the Modify, Color, Surface command
Surface
Type
Commands Characteristics
Boundary Sketch, Boundary Sur-
face
Bounded by curves on all edges and can contain
voids (holes). Typically used for planar meshes and
as basic framework for solid model generation.
Bilinear Corners, Edge Curves,
Plane
Bounded by lines on all edges. Surface is defined by
bidirectional linear interpolation between the edges.
Ruled Edge Curves, Ruled,
Extrude, Sweep, Cylin-
der
Bounded by any curves on two opposing edges, with
lines joining the end points. Surface is defined by
linear interpolation between the two edge curves.
Revolution Revolve, Sweep, Cylin-
der, Sphere
Surface is defined by revolving a curve through
some angle. Original defining curve can be of any
type.
Coons Edge Curves Surface bounded by three or four curves of any type.
Interior is defined as a bidirectional cubic interpola-
tion.
Bezier Aligned Curves Surface defined by 16 control points (arranged in a
four by four array). The surface only passes through
the control points at the corners.
Face all of the above Complex trimmed surfaces obtained from solid
model Boolean operations or imported from IGES
files.
Note: When you use these commands in the FEMAP standard geometry engine to create surfaces, you cannot
perform Boolean operations on these surfaces. They can be used for meshing as well as creating vol-
umes, but not for intersection or Boolean solid operations.
3-24 Geometry
Surface Divisions
The final surface parameters are the number of divisions. When sur-
faces are displayed, intermediate curves are drawn to show you the
shape of the interior of the surfaces. They have no impact on the
actual shape of the surface or on the position of any location on the
surface, they are purely for display purposes. By changing the num-
ber of divisions, you will control how many curves will be drawn for
each surface. Typically, very curved surfaces will need more divi-
sions, planar surfaces need fewer.
You can independently control the divisions along the two paramet-
ric surface directions (shown as s and t). By setting the parameters to
different values in the two directions, you can very quickly see (by
counting the number of curves) the orientation of the surface direc-
tions. This can be of assistance when setting mesh sizes on surfaces.
You can modify the number of divisions on surfaces that you have
already created using the Modify, Update Other, Surface Divisions
command.
Commands
There are three commands/menus in the surface area of the Geome-
try menu. The first two, Sketch and Boundary Surface, create a
boundary surface, while the third listing, surfaces, is actually a sub-
menu of several commands for creating surfaces. Each of these
commands will be discussed in more detail below. The major differ-
ence between a boundary surface and a surface is that a boundary surface is typically planar, while a surface is typ-
ically 3-dimensional. Also, surfaces can be readily mapped mesh, while boundary surfaces require a free-mesher.
3.3.1 Sketch
The Sketch command provides a quick method to create boundary surfaces. This command essentially combines
the capability of the individual geometry creation commands under the Geometry menu with the Geometry, Bound-
ary Surface command. When you first select this command, the following window will appear, and the right hand
toolbar will be switched to one of the geometry toolbars.
You can then use the toolbars, as well as the menu commands to create geometry. Once you
create the geometry for your boundary surface, simply press Finish Sketch on the above
Window, and FEMAP will automatically create a boundary surface from the geometry you
just created. Until you select Finish Sketch, the individual geometry which you just created
contains no association between the geometric entities. If you press Cancel, the geometry
you just created will remain, but a boundary surface will not be created.
If you have accessed this command through the Solids toolbar, you will also have the option to Extrude or Revolve.
When you select one of these options, FEMAP will automatically create the boundary surface and then move to the
Solids Extrude/Revolve menu.
3.3.2 Boundary Surfaces...
There are two basic ways to create boundary surfaces - by selecting the boundary curves, or by combining existing
solid faces. The following section describe these methods.
3.3.2.1 Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Curves...
is used to create boundaries that will be used with the Mesh, Geometry, Surface command. A boundary is a series of
connected curves that enclose an area that you want to mesh. A boundary is most often used to define planar areas
for meshing that have more than four sides, and which are easier to define as curves than as faces of solids.
Alt+F11
Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Curves... 3-25
Choosing Curves for a Boundary
To define a boundary you simply select the curves that you want using the standard entity selection dialog box. The
curves that you pick must form one or more closed loops, that are connected end-to-end. There cannot be any gaps,
or multiple connections (branches) in the loops. In addition, the curves should never cross or intersect. If you are
selecting multiple loops, one of the loops must completely contain all of the others. That is, the other loops are
actually representing holes in the outer loop.
The curves do not have to be connected to the
same end points, but the end points must be coin-
cident. If they are coincident, the end points will
be merged when you create the boundary.
You can select the curves that form your bound-
ary in any order, and you can even box or cir-
cle pick to select all the curves with one
selection. FEMAP will automatically order your
selections to put them in boundary order. This
feature makes it extremely easy to use the area
cursor picking methods to choose all of the
curves in an area as part of your boundary. You may only select up to 750 curves to define a boundary (including
holes).
Adding Holes to Boundaries
Holes are areas inside the boundary that you do not want this boundary to mesh. They may or may not represent
physical holes in your structure. The procedure for defining a hole is identical to that for defining the outer bound-
ary. Simply pick all curves around the boundary of the hole at the same time you are selecting the outside boundary.
FEMAP will automatically sort the curves and determine which ones are associated with the hole(s), and which
curves form the outer boundary.
The same restrictions (single, closed loop...) apply to curves that represent holes. In addition, as you might expect
holes cannot overlap (or touch) each other, and they must be totally inside the outer boundary but outside all other
holes.
You can define as many holes as you like in the boundary, but the total count of all curves that define the boundary
and the holes cannot exceed the 750 curve limit.
Note: You may also map a boundary onto a surface to obtain a non-planar mesh. For
details, see Section 3.6.4.6, "Modify Update Other, Boundary on Surface...".
Good - Single Closed Loops Bad - Not Closed Bad - Crossing
Bad - Branching, Multiple Loops
Good, multiple holes Bad, holes overlap Bad, holes inside
each other
3-26 Geometry
Improving Meshing Speed
While you can define and mesh very large, complicated boundaries, it is often more productive to break them into
multiple smaller pieces. Typically, the boundary mesh command will be able to mesh two smaller boundaries faster
than one large one. In addition, you have some extra control over the mesh. The figure shows a typical example.
Obviously there is a trade-off between the time you might save when making the mesh, and the time it takes to split
the boundaries. In general, it is probably worthwhile if you can make the splits by just adding a line or two, like the
figure. Otherwise, it is probably faster to mesh the entire boundary. On the other hand, you may still want to add the
extra splits to get the extra control of the mesh. With the extra curves, you can specify exactly the number of
nodes along those splits.
Another area of concern is meshing boundaries that are set to Map onto Surface. They can take substantially longer
than meshing boundaries that just use the boundary curves. This delay is caused by the extra mapping required to
insure that the mesh lies on the surface.
3.3.2.2 Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Surfaces on Solid...
Unlike the method of creating boundary surfaces by picking the boundary curves, this command lets you pick adja-
cent faces of a solid using the entity selection dialog box. You will want to create this type of boundary surface
when the surface geometry that you have does not lend itself to creating a good mesh.
For example, if you have a number of surfaces that are somewhat skewed, it can result in a mesh that is also
skewed, if the surfaces are meshed individually. By combining these surfaces into a single boundary, the mesh can
often be improved.
Original Boundary Two, Simpler Boundaries
Original geometry showing multi-surface
Meshed as Multi-surface Boundary Meshed as four individual surfaces
boundary covering four surfaces
Geometry, Boundary Surface, Update Surfaces 3-27
When building multi-surface boundaries, it is important to understand how FEMAP will use them in meshing, and
the limitations of this method. FEMAP simply takes the surfaces that you select, and uses the enclosing outer
curves to form a regular boundary surface. This means that the surfaces that you select must be stitched into a solid.
When you select stitched surfaces, the outer boundary curves will form the closed loop that is necessary to create a
boundary, and the interior curves can be properly identified. Although the order of your selection is not important,
you must select surfaces that create a single region. You cannot select surfaces that are disconnected, or that only
join at a single point. If you want to create multiple regions, you must do this in multiple commands. Just as bound-
aries can have holes, you can select surfaces that surround holes (or simply surround other surfaces that you do not
select).
When you mesh a multi-surface boundary, FEMAP will mesh it as a planar boundary. It is therefore very important
that you do not combine surfaces that contain too much curvature. Best results will be obtained if you combine sur-
faces that are nearly planar, or have moderate curvature from the average plane. There is no checking to prevent
you from combining surfaces that have a very large curvature (even greater than 180 degrees), but the resulting
mesh quality will surely suffer if you do this. Taken to the extreme, the resulting boundary surface will not be
meshable.
Although the surface is meshed as a planar boundary, the resulting mesh is projected and smoothed back to the
original surfaces. This is much like the Modify, Project Mesh onto Solid command. This is very different than what
happens when you use the Modify, Update Other, Boundary on Surface command to attach a boundary to a surface.
In that case, the mesh is created in the parametric coordinates of the surface.
Any features (curves or surfaces) in the interior of the boundary will simply be meshed over. Interior does not, in
this case refer to holes which are still on the inside of the boundary. It refers to curves and surfaces that are com-
pletely surrounded by surfaces that have been combined. Therefore, if you combine things like fillet surfaces into
other adjacent surfaces, they will be meshed over. Some nodes may still lie on the fillet, but there is nothing to
retain the basic shape of the fillet. Similarly, if you combine two surfaces that are not tangent at their intersection,
the mesh will simply blend over this intersection. There will not be any distinctive break between the surfaces.
When you create multi-surface boundaries, FEMAP does several things automatically to help you in later meshing
of your surfaces. First, the underlying surfaces that you select are moved to the no-pick layer, and they are feature
suppressed. This means that when you later select surfaces or solids for meshing, the underlying surfaces will not
be meshed, nor will they even be pickable.
If you are creating many multi-surface boundaries, it can sometimes be difficult to tell which surfaces have been
selected, and which boundary contains the surfaces. If you go to the Modify, Color, Surface command and choose
the boundary surfaces, you will be asked if you want to randomize the colors. Doing this will update the color of
the surfaces, in each selected boundary, to be a distinct, but different color.
Working with Unstitched Geometry
This command only works with stitched surfaces. If you are unable to stitch the surfaces that you want into a single
solid, you will not be able to use this command. You may, however, still be able to accomplish the same meshing
result. The first step is to create a boundary using curves around the outside of the region of interest. You may need
to make additional curves, if the curves that you have are not joined at their end points. Then, mesh the boundary
surface as normal, and go to the Modify, Project Mesh onto Solid command to project the mesh back onto the orig-
inal unstitched surfaces.
3.3.2.3 Geometry, Boundary Surface, Update Surfaces
This command is used when the underlying surfaces that you used to create a multi-surface boundary change due to
later modeling operations. When you create a multi-surface boundary, you select the surfaces that you want to rep-
resent. At that time, the boundary curves are extracted, and the boundary is created. If you then update the underly-
ing surfaces (slice them, cut a hole in them...) the already defined boundary will not reflect those changes. If you
simply select this command, and choose the boundary surfaces to update, the boundaries will be recreated from the
current definition of the underlying surfaces, any changes to this point will then be included.
3.3.2.4 Geometry, Boundary Surface, Edit Surfaces
...is used to modify the underlying surface definition of a multi-surface boundary. Choose this command if you
want to add or remove surfaces from a boundary that you have already defined via the From Surfaces on Solid
command. If you are adding surfaces, the rules for which surfaces can be added follow the same guidelines as if
you were defining the surface originally.
3-28 Geometry
3.3.3 Surfaces
These commands enable you to create surfaces in the standard geometry engine or the Parasolid geometry engine.
3.3.3.1 Geometry, Surface, Corners...
... creates a surface by defining the location of three or four corners. This command also creates lines along the
edge of the surface which connect the corners.
The standard coordinate definition dialog boxes are
used to specify the corner locations. The locations
you specify are not projected in any way, they are
simply used to define the surface.
To create a triangular surface, choose Cancel for
the fourth corner (specify a fourth location and
choose OK to create a quadrilateral surface). You
will then be asked whether you want to make a tri-
angle. Choose Yes to make the surface, No to abort.
You can create quadrilateral surfaces with coinci-
dent corners to form triangular surfaces, but it is not
advisable. When you mesh these surfaces, you will
get quadrilateral elements with coincident nodes. If
you create proper triangular surfaces, they will
automatically mesh with triangular elements at the
tip.
3.3.3.2 Geometry, Surface, Edge Curves...
... creates a surface by choosing three or four existing curves which define its boundaries or edges. The edge curves
must be coincident at their respective end points so that they form a continuous, closed boundary. They do not have
to physically connect the same points, but if not, they must connect coincident points (which will be merged auto-
matically by this command). The dialog box will be used to choose the edges:
Corner 1
Corner 2
Corner 3
Surface s Direction
Direction
Corner 4
Surface t
Corner 1
The third corner is
Corner 2
Corner 3
Surface s Direction
Surface t Direction
the tip of the triangle
Shift+F9
Geometry, Surface, Aligned Curves... 3-29
First, you should choose the desired surface shape - 3 or 4 sided. Then choose the curves that you want to use either
graphically or by specifying their IDs. You must choose the curves in order, going around the boundary. You cannot
choose the curves in a random order.
You can choose any type of curve as an edge. In addition, the curves can be in any orientation, so long as they are
all coincident at the end points. The curves do not have to form a planar surface. However, you should not create
surfaces with extreme warping, or extreme corner angles. These will be fine as surfaces, but when you apply the
finite element mesh you may create very distorted elements. If you do have these extreme types of surfaces, they
should be meshed with triangular elements to minimize element distortions.
3.3.3.3 Geometry, Surface, Aligned Curves...
... has two different capabilities based upon the geometry engine in use. You can use this command to create a
FEMAP standard geometry engine surface or a Parasolid surface.
Standard Geometry Engine
The FEMAP standard geometry engine creates a quadrilateral surface defined by four control curves which are
aligned in the same parametric direction. This type of surface gives you control over the shape and curvature of the
interior of the surface. It is somewhat more difficult to use however, since the control curves do not actually lie on
the surface, they are simply used to control its shape. The only places that the surface touches the control curves are
at the corners.
You must select the curves in sequential order, along the increasing parametric (surface t) direction. In general, you
will want to select splines for this surface, but you can pick any type of curve. If you are going to use other types of
curves however, it is often simpler to use one of the other surface commands.
As shown, this command creates two additional edge curves that connect the ends of the four control curves. These
edge curves do not really define the surface, but are helpful in visualizing the control net for the surface. Be careful,
however, if you move one or more of the end points of the control curves, they will no longer lie along the edge
curves. This does not hurt anything, but can be confusing visually.
In the figure above, you can see how the surface follows the shape of the control curves, but the curves do not lie on
the surface. This is especially true for curves which have significant changes in curvature in comparison to the
adjacent curves - like Curve 4 above. The actual surface will be blended between the control curves which causes
larger deviations in areas of rapidly changing curvature.
Note: Since this surface does not coincide with the curves along its edges, it can be difficult to join it with sur-
faces of other types. It will join properly with another aligned surface that uses the same edge. As
shown in the figure, if you have a linear edge (the bottom edge), the surface will coincide with the con-
trol curve, so you can join the surface to other surface types.
Surface s Direction
Surface t Direction
Curve 2
Curve 1
Curve 3
Curve 4
Curve 1
Curve 2
Curve 3
Curve 4
Surface s Direction
Surface t Direction
Automatically creates
two edge curves
3-30 Geometry
Parasolid Geometry Engine
The advanced geometry engine allows you to fit a lofted surface between a series of curves. It differs from the stan-
dard aligned surface in that you can use any numbers of curves to define the surface, and the curves will be on the
surface that is constructed. This is a very powerful method to create surfaces with varying curvature simply by
defining curves at critical locations.
3.3.3.4 Geometry, Surface, Ruled...
... creates a quadrilateral surface between two curves. The surface is formed by linear interpolation between corre-
sponding parametric locations along the selected curves. The only inputs for this command are the two curves.
After you select the curves, two additional lines are created which join the end points of the original curves. These
new lines do not control the surface, but do help to show its boundaries.
Ruled surfaces are very easy to create. You can choose any type of curves, in any orientation. They do not have to
lie in the same plane. In addition, the resulting surface is usually fairly uniform parametrically and yields very good
finite element meshes.
3.3.3.5 Geometry, Surface, Extrude...
... creates surfaces by extruding one or more curves along a vector. Each curve that you choose creates a separate
ruled surface. This command allows you to quickly convert a two dimensional profile of curves into three dimen-
sional surfaces.
All input for this command uses standard dialog boxes. You select the curves to extrude using the standard entity
selection dialog box. You can choose these curves in any order, but it is usually best to choose them in the order of
a continuous profile or boundary.
When you have selected all of the curves, you will define the vector that you want to extrude them along, using the
standard vector definition dialog box. You can choose any vector, but most extrusions should be relatively perpen-
dicular to the original curves. If it is not, some surfaces may be badly shaped for meshing. The same vector is used
for all curves that were selected, so if you need to extrude in different directions, you must repeat this command.
The vector that you define can be based at any location. Only the vector components and magnitude are used. The
components define the direction of the extrusion. The magnitude defines the length of the extrusion.
Note: The curves used for this command with the Parasolid engine must always be in the same direction.
FEMAP will not automatically reverse the direction. Therefore, if you are having difficulty defining the
surface, you should check the direction of the curves by using the View Options, Tools and View Style,
Curve and Surface Accuracy option to turn Directions on. This will enable you to confirm that all
curves are formed in the same direction. If the directions are not aligned, FEMAP will ask you if you
want to try and create a surface through the interpolated points of the curves. You can try this or change
the direction of the curves.
Surface s Direction
Surface t Direction
Automatically creates
edge lines
Curve 1
Curve 2
Geometry, Surface, Revolve... 3-31
As an example, the picture shows a boundary that was extruded.
More curves were created (but not shown) at the opposite side of the surfaces. Other curves were created to connect
the end points of the original curves to the new curves.
3.3.3.6 Geometry, Surface, Revolve...
... is similar to Geometry, Surface, Extrude, except that instead of extruding curves along a vector, this command
revolves them through an angle around a vector - the axis of revolution.
Just like the Extrude command, you select the curves to revolve using the standard entity selection dialog box.
Next, specify the vector along the axis of revolution using the vector definition dialog boxes. The location and
direction of this vector are important; the magnitude is not. Finally, enter the rotation angle: specify the angle
through which the curves will be revolved.
Some Special Cases
Typically, this command creates four-sided surfaces; however, there are a few special cases. If a curve has one end
point that lies on the axis of revolution, a triangular (three-sided) surface will be automatically created. Since all
surfaces must have either three or four sides, you cannot revolve any curve that has both end points on the axis of
revolution. This limitation includes arcs and splines where intermediate points along the curve do not lie on the axis
of revolution. If you want to revolve this type of curve, use the Modify, Break command to split it into two curves,
then revolve both of those curves.
Another special case arises if the axis of revolution intersects the curve that you are revolving. In this case, the
resulting surface will be twisted and effectively unusable for meshing. Although you can create these surfaces, you
should avoid this situation.
3.3.3.7 Geometry, Surface, Sweep...
... allows you to create surfaces by moving or sweeping one or more curves along a path defined by other curves.
The required input for this command is minimal. You simply select the curves that define the cross section that you
want to sweep, using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then with a second entity selection dialog box, you
select the curves that make up the path along which you will sweep the cross section.
Selecting the Path
Even though you choose it after the cross section, it is important to understand the implications of choosing a path
before you define the cross section. The curves that you select for the path must form a single continuous loop -
either closed (the end is also connected to the start) or open. They must not branch, or have any gaps. They do not
have to be connected to the same points, but must have coincident end points.
Extrusion direction
Selected Curves
and magnitude
Selected Curves
Surface s Direction
Surface t Direction
Selected Curves Selected Curves
Axis of Revolution
Surface t Direction
Surface s Direction
3-32 Geometry
If, in addition to being coincident, all curves along the path are also tangent at their end points, the sweeping oper-
ation will maintain a constant cross section as it traverses the path. On the other hand, if you include nontangent
curves, the corners will be automatically mitred to the half angle between the tangents of the curves. This, however,
will result in a nonuniform cross section, and in some cases a cross section that is somewhat distorted.
Choosing Splines in the Path
You can use any type of curves in the path; however, if you are using the standard FEMAP geometry engine, this
command cannot create a single swept surface along a spline. If you choose splines in the path, they will be broken
into multiple line segments, and the cross section will be swept along these segments rather than the true spline.
This will result in multiple surfaces. You can control the number of line segments by setting the mesh size along the
spline prior to sweeping using the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size Along Curve command.
Selecting the Cross Section
Just as for the path, you can choose any curves that you want for the cross section. You do have to be aware, how-
ever, of the relationship between the path and the cross section.
Here are some general rules to follow:
1. The curves in the cross section must be positioned in space at the appropriate location relative to the path. This
command simply extrudes and revolves the cross section along vectors which are defined by the curves you
select as the path. It is up to you to properly locate the starting position of the cross section. The surfaces created
by this command will be located wherever you start the cross section. All offsets from the path to the cross sec-
tion will act as rigid links as the cross section is swept around a curve.
2. If your path contains arcs, make sure that your cross section does not protrude further than the arc radius to the
inside of the path. If it does, the resulting surfaces will be twisted as they are swept around the arc.
3. Typically you will want to create the curves for the cross section in a plane that is normal to the ending tangent
of the path. If you do not, the cross section that you sweep will be a projection of the true cross section.
4. If the cross section that you choose contains arcs or circles, and your path contains curves that are not tangent to
one another, the arcs and circles will be converted to equivalent splines before they are swept. This is not a pre-
cise representation, but it is fairly accurate. It is required because of the automatic mitred corners that will be
generated between the nontangent curves. The cross section at those corners will no longer be circular, it will be
elliptical (which must be represented by a spline).
Selected Curves Selected Curves
Axis of Revolution
Surface t Direction
Surface s Direction
Geometry, Surface, Plane... 3-33
3.3.3.8 Geometry, Surface, Plane...
... automatically creates a rectangular, planar surface using the standard plane definition dialog boxes. The base of
the plane is used for the first corner of the surface. After choosing the appropriate plane, you will be prompted for
the width (along plane X) and height (along plane Y) of the plane.
The width and height of the plane are combined with the orientation of the plane to determine the other three cor-
ners. While limited to rectangular surfaces, this command offers great flexibility in positioning of planar surfaces.
3.3.3.9 Geometry, Surface, Cylinder...
... makes surfaces which represent the curved lateral faces of
a cylinder, cone or tube and optionally the planar endcaps.
The first input required is the orientation of the object that
you will create. You will use the standard vector definition
dialog box to define the location and orientation of the cen-
terline of the object. The magnitude of the vector that you
specify is also used as the object length. By choosing the
various vector definition methods, you can either explicitly
specify the length, or automatically determine it from the
end points of the vector.
After you have defined the centerline vector, the standard
vector dialog box will appear again. This time you must specify a vector which points toward the circumferential
location where you want the lateral curved surfaces to begin. Just as the centerline positioned and oriented the sur-
faces in space, this vector orients the surfaces by rotating them around the centerline. This is fairly obvious when
you are going to generate a partial cylinder (< 360 degrees), but is also necessary for full cylinders. If you really
dont care where the surfaces start, you can choose any nonzero vector that is not parallel to the centerline.
Finally, the following dialog box is used to specify the remaining parameters:
Cross Section Curve
Path Curves
Front View - Before Isometric View - Before
Front View - After Isometric View - After
Mitred corner where
path was not tangent
Path Curves
Centerline vector
Start vector
Bottom radius
3-34 Geometry
The shape controls the type of object that will be created. Cones and cylinders only have one lateral (curved) sur-
face, but tubes have two, an inner and outer surface. The various radii must be specified to define the object size.
Unnecessary radii for each shape will be grayed and disabled. The inner radii are only available for tubes. They
must always be greater than zero, but less than the respective outer radius. The bottom radii are applied at the base
of the centerline vector. The top radii are used at the tip of the centerline vector.
The default angle (360 degrees) creates a full cylinder/cone/tube. If you only want to create a partial object, specify
a smaller angle. The resulting surface(s) will subtend the selected number of degrees of arc around the centerline.
By default, the Make cap surfaces box is not checked. In this case, only the lateral or curved surface is created. If
you check the box, however, this command will also automatically make planar capping surfaces at the top and bot-
tom of the cylinder/cone/tube. Planar lateral surfaces will also be made. When you do not specify an angle of 360
degrees, these surfaces are required to close the sides of the object. With a 360 degree angle, these surfaces are
actually inside the object, but will be needed if you later want to use the Geometry, Volume, Surfaces command.
They are also useful if you want to make elements in a cross section that you can revolve into a mesh.
3.3.3.10 Geometry, Surface, Sphere...
... creates quadrilateral or triangular spherical surfaces. You can choose to create surfaces which represent any seg-
ment of a sphere up to and including a full sphere. This command will create more than one surface, if necessary, to
represent the portion of the sphere that you select.
The first dialog box that you see will be the standard
vector definition dialog box. Here you must define
the vector which goes from the center of the sphere
to the upper (north) pole of the sphere. The base is
used as the center of the sphere, and the vector com-
ponents orient the sphere in space. The magnitude
of the vector is also used as the default radius, how-
ever you will have an opportunity to change this
radius later.
Next, another vector is required, which is used to
position the origin of the spherical surfaces. Just as
the first vector oriented the sphere in space, this vector controls the rotation of the surfaces around the polar vector.
If you do not care how the surfaces are rotated, just choose any nonzero vector that is not parallel to the polar vec-
tor.
Finally, you will see this dialog box:
Note: If you are creating a Parasolid surface, you can only choose from a cylinder or a cone. Make cap sur-
faces will not be available.
End Cap
Partial Cylinder
with capping surfaces
Cylinder
Partial Cone
Tube with
capping surfaces
Lateral Cap
Pole Vector
Start Vector
-90 degrees longitude
0 degrees longitude
0 degrees latitude
Longitude angles
Latitude angles
Geometry, Surface, Offset... 3-35
It lets you choose the portion of the sphere that the surfaces will represent. The longitude angles must range from -
90 to +90 degrees. Zero degrees is at the equatorial plane, -90 degrees is the north pole (along the first vector that
you defined) and +90 degrees is the south pole. Latitude angles go around the circumference of the sphere. The
zero angle is defined by the second vector that you specified. Increasing angles are measured in a counterclockwise
sense when looking at the equatorial plane from the north pole of the sphere. That is, they follow the normal right-
hand rule convention around the pole vector. The default angles, as shown in the dialog box, will define a full
sphere.
This command will create a single spherical sur-
face, unless you include both poles (-90 and +90
longitude). In that case, two surfaces, split at the
equator will be created.
Additional planar surfaces will be created if you
choose Make cap surfaces. Top and bottom cap-
ping surfaces will be created if you do not choose
the corresponding pole. These surfaces are defined
parallel to the equatorial plane. Lateral capping
surfaces are always created. If you specify latitude
angles less than 360 degrees, they close the sides
of the spherical segment. Otherwise, they are created internally, just like the lateral caps for cylindrical volumes
created by the Geometry, Surface, Cylinder command.
3.3.3.11 Geometry, Surface, Offset...
....create a new surface by offsetting an existing surface. This command requires you
to select the surfaces to offset, and enter a distance to offset. The normals of the sur-
face are used as the offset direction. The offset surface may expand or contract
depending on the curvature of the surface and the offset direction.
3.3.3.12 Geometry, Surface, Convert...
This command converts a surface generated with the standard FEMAP geometry engine to a Parasolid surface.
Generally, you will use Convert to update FEMAP legacy geometry so that you can use it with a newer version of
FEMAP.
3.3.3.13 Geometry, Surface, Remove Hole...
This command removes interior holes from surfaces by selecting a curve or curves related to that hole. This com-
mand works for Surfaces (Sheet Solids) as well as Solids.
Remove Hole is looking for loops to remove from the geometry. You select which loops to remove by selecting
the a single curve of an interior hole. FEMAP then tries to walk around a loop (starting with the selected curve)
and if the loop or chain of curves are continuous, the hole will be removed from the surface.
If this command is used on a component surface of a solid, not only will the hole be removed from that surface, but
the feature associated with that loop and any associated geometry more interior than the loop will be
removed. Very similar to the way Mesh, Mesh Control, Feature Suppression operates. (For more on how that com-
mand works, see Section 5.1.1.16, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Feature Suppression...")
Note: If you are creating a Parasolid surface/sphere, you will only be able to create a complete sphere. The
Longitude Angles and Latitude Angles will be grayed, and Make cap surfaces will not be visible.
Hint: You can use the On Surface selection method (Entity Selection dialog box for curves) to remove all of
the internal holes from a surface. FEMAP will ignore the curves making up the outline of the surface
and send a message to the Messages pane. A similar technique can be used on for solids by using the On
Solid selection method
Partial Sphere
with capping surfaces
Partial Sphere
Full Sphere
3-36 Geometry
Examples
3.3.4 Midsurface
The midsurfacing commands are available when using the Parasolid geometry engine. They are useful for generat-
ing surfaces from thin-walled solid geometry. The midsurfaces can then be used as the basis of plate meshes. Care
must be taken to make certain that the resulting plate mesh adequately represents the model.
3.3.4.1 Single in Solid...
...creates a single midsurface between two surfaces of a solid. The surface is trimmed by the solid so that it is com-
pletely contained within the solid. This command requires you to select the two surfaces. Not all surface pairs can
be midsurfaced. The command will simply return if the midsurface operation fails.
Note: Any Nonmergeable Curves will be ignored in the command. If you would like to designate curves as
nonmergeable, use the Modify, Update Other, Nonmergeable Curve command.
Surface with several interior holes
Choose one curve on each
interior hole and all of the
curves making up the loop
will be found and removed
from the surface
All internal holes have been
removed from the surface
Original Solid Part with stepped hole Curve chosen for loop in Remove Face
Resulting Solid Geometry
Original Solid Part with stepped hole Curve chosen for loop in Remove Face
Resulting Solid Geometry
Single... 3-37
3.3.4.2 Single...
...creates a single sheet surface between two surfaces. The resulting surface will be larger than both of the selected
surfaces. Not all surface pairs can be midsurfaced. The command will simply return if the midsurface operation
fails.
3.3.4.3 Trim to Solid...
...trims a surface with a solid. It deletes any parts of the surface which lie outside the volume of the solid. This com-
mand requires you to first select the surface to trim, and then the solid to use for trimming.
3.3.4.4 Trim with Curve...
....trims/breaks a surface using a curve. First pick the surface to be trimmed/broken and then pick the curve(s) to
trim with. The curves are extended in both directions past the ends of the surface if necessary.
3.3.4.5 Extend...
....extends a surface by using one of a surfaces edge curves and extending the surface using a specified Extend
Shape method (Linear, Continuous Curvature, or Reflective) to a target Solid (or Sheet Solid), location in space,
or simply by a distance.
Whether or not the curves will be imprinted onto the target solid or sheet solid is determined by the Geometry,
Curve - From Surface, Update Surfaces flag setting. If the flag is on, they will be imprinted (burned) into the tar-
get surface.
3.3.4.6 Automatic...
...runs the three steps of semi-automatic midsurfacing (Generate, Intersect, and Cleanup below) at once. The com-
mand requires you to select the surfaces and specify a midsurface tolerance. Any surfaces with a distance between
them of less than the midsurface tolerance will have a midsurface generated. The command then intersects all cre-
ated midsurfaces with one another and lastly, deletes all small free floating surfaces.
3.3.4.7 Generate...
...automatically creates all possible midsurfaces from selected surfaces. This command requires you to select the
surfaces for generation and enter a midsurface tolerance. Any surfaces with a distance between them of less than
the midsurface tolerance will have a midsurface generated.
3.3.4.8 Intersect...
...automatically intersects/splits all selected surfaces with one another. The only input to this command is the sur-
faces to intersect.
3.3.4.9 Cleanup...
...automatically determines which surfaces can be deleted by checking for small free floating surfaces. You enter
the surfaces to check. It does not delete these surfaces, but rather places them on a separate layer so they can be
reviewed before they are deleted.
Note: If Parasolid cannot extend a surface properly, FEMAP will return an error and let you know that surface
cannot be extended using the current parameters. You may want to try a different Extend Shape
method or Extend To option.
=
Pick this curve
two surfaces
3-38 Geometry
3.3.4.10 Assign Mesh Attributes...
...automatically creates and assigns properties to midsurfaces based on the thickness of the solid from which they
were created. The original top and bottom surfaces must be separated by a constant thickness. This command
will not create properties which vary in thickness along a surface. The only input for this command are the selected
surfaces to assign these attributes.
3.4 Creating Solids/Volumes
The last commands for geometry creation in the Geometry menu involve creation of 3-D solids and volumes. In
FEMAP, there is a distinct difference between volumes and solids.
Solids are formed by using the Parasolid modeling engine to form complex 3-D shapes. Boolean operations can be
performed with these solids, and they can have voids, or holes in them. The number of faces (or surfaces) to a solid
is not limited. Solids provide an excellent method to form complex 3-D shapes, and can be automatically meshed
with tetrahedrals, or if care is taken, semi-automatically meshed with hexahedrals.
Volumes are formed from analytics as well as joining selected surfaces. Volumes generated from surfaces require 4-
6 surfaces which form a complete enclosed volume. Voids (or holes) are not permitted in volumes. The restrictions
on number of surfaces and no voids limits the usefulness of volumes. They are typically only created when you
must model a very regular pattern volume (with no holes), and brick or wedge meshes are essential.
3.4.1 Volumes
The Geometry, Volume menu allows you to create volumes which can be used for meshing of solid elements. All
volumes in FEMAP are essentially the same, although you can create volumes with several different shapes. In
this case, shapes refers to the number of surfaces that are used to bound the volume. The following table summa-
rizes those shapes.
Shape Characteristics
Brick
Six quadrilateral surfaces
Wedge
Five surfaces, top and bottom are triangular,
others are quadrilateral
Pyramid
Five surfaces, bottom is rectangular, others are
triangular
Tetra
Four triangular surfaces
Geometry, Volume, Corners... 3-39
You can choose any of these volume shapes that you need to fill the portion of your model that you want. In fact,
the shapes shown are just the basic outlines if you used regular, planar surfaces. In fact, any surfaces can be used
and the shapes really refer more to the overall topology than the actual shape of the volume.
Volume Parameters
When you are creating volumes, you will see numerous dialog boxes with a Parameter button. Choosing this but-
ton lets you set the ID and color of the volume. The ID is not usually of great concern. You can choose a color for
the volume either by typing its number or by pressing the Palette button and choosing from the standard palette. If
you do not set a color, you can always change the color later with the Modify, Color, Volume command.
Displaying Volumes
The display of volumes is largely based on displaying the surfaces that are used to define the volume. The only
thing actually drawn for the volume is an outline around the surface boundaries. You can control the overall display
by adjusting the surface divisions and surface display options.
Geometry, Volume Menu
The Geometry, Volume menu is partitioned into three sections based upon the method of creation. The first section
of commands (Corners, Surfaces, Between), create volumes from framework geometry of points, surfaces, or both.
The second section (Extrude, Revolve) perform operations on a surface to create a volume. The final section (Cylin-
der, Sphere) involve analytical volumes. Each command on the Volume menu is discussed further below
3.4.1.1 Geometry, Volume, Corners...
... creates volumes simply by specifying the coordinates of the corners. You do not need any existing geometry to
use this command - it creates all of the required points, lines and surfaces.
All of the input for this command uses the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes. Each corner is defined using
a separate dialog box. To create volumes having different shapes, simply choose Cancel when all of the required
corners have been defined. You will be asked whether you want to cancel, backup, or create a volume with that
number of corners. If you press Cancel at a point when a volume cannot be created, you will be given a chance to
backup or abort. This is an ideal way to update incorrectly specified coordinates before you finish the command.
The following table shows the number of corners that are allowable when creating volumes:
The convention for defining corner locations
is shown in the figure.
It is always best to follow the conventions
shown for specifying the order of the corner
locations; however, FEMAP does check the
locations that you specify to see if they match
the correct shape. If they do not, FEMAP will
automatically change the selection order and
attempt to create a valid volume. This fix-
up will often create the correct volume even
if you specify the corners in a different order,
but there is no guarantee.
The same volume will be created no matter
what coordinate system or systems you use to
define the corner locations. Straight lines will
be used to connect all of the corners, and all
surfaces will be bilinear.
Shape Corners Press Cancel when Defining
Brick 8 Never
Wedge 6 Corner 7
Pyramid 5 Corner 6
Tetra 4 Corner 5
Brick Wedge
Pyramid Tetra
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
1
2 3
4
5 6
1
2
3
4
1
2
3 4
5
3-40 Geometry
3.4.1.2 Geometry, Volume, Surfaces...
... allows you to select and combine existing surfaces to form a volume. The only dialog box required is the follow-
ing one:
Here you select the shape of the volume that you want to create (brick, wedge, pyramid or tetra) and the surfaces
that will define the volume. You can select any type of surface, but you must follow these guidelines:
The surfaces that you choose must have the appropriate shape (triangular or quadrilateral) to define the shape of
volume that you choose. The required shapes are listed in the table at the beginning of this section for the
Geometry, Volume menu.
All surfaces must have coincident edges. The surfaces do not have to use the same edge curves, but they must
use exactly coincident curves, so that there are no gaps between the edges. If the surfaces do not use the same
edges, the curves will be automatically merged by this command. This insures that the surfaces that you choose
form a complete closed volume.
You do not have to choose surfaces that have their parametric directions aligned, nor do you have to choose the
sides in any particular order. The volume parametric directions are based on the parametric directions of the first
surface that you select. The first and second (s and t) volume directions are aligned with the parametric directions
of the bottom surface. The third parametric volume direction (u) goes from the bottom to the top surface. If these
directions do not form a right-handed coordinate system, then the s and t directions are reversed (negated, but still
along the same direction).
Note: You can choose any type of surface for a volume, but you will probably not want to choose any Bezier
surface that was created by the Geometry, Surface, Aligned Curves command. Since this type of surface
does not typically follow its edge curves exactly, any volume that you create may have gaps along its
edges and you will not be able to use it for meshing.
Alt+F9
Side
Bottom
Top
Side
s direction
t direction
u direction
Geometry, Volume, Between... 3-41
3.4.1.3 Geometry, Volume, Between...
... creates a volume between two surfaces, or
between a surface and a point. When you choose
the 2 Surfaces option, both surfaces must have the
same shape - either triangular or quadrilateral.
Quad surfaces form a brick volume, while tri sur-
faces create a wedge.
The Surface and Point option is used to create the
other volume shapes. With this option, choose a
quadrilateral surface to create a pyramid, or a trian-
gular surface to form a tetra.
.If you are using the 2 Surfaces option, you simply
choose the two surfaces which form the top and
bottom of the brick or wedge. All of the side sur-
faces are automatically created between the respec-
tive edges of these surfaces. The same approach is
followed for the Surface and Point option, but
instead of specifying a top surface (To Surface),
you will specify a top point. The point must
already exist, you cannot specify coordinates.
Again the required side surfaces and curves are
automatically created.
3.4.1.4 Geometry, Volume, Extrude...
... creates volumes by moving or extruding one or more surfaces along a vector. You simply select the surfaces to
extrude using the standard entity selection dialog boxes, and the vector to extrude along, using the vector definition
dialog boxes. One volume will be created for each surface that you select.
The vector that you choose can be located anywhere, but
the direction and magnitude are used to define the direc-
tion and length of the extruded volumes.
All quadrilateral surfaces will extrude into brick vol-
umes. Triangular surfaces extrude into wedge volumes.
Other volume shapes cannot be created with this com-
mand.
3.4.1.5 Geometry, Volume, Revolve...
... is similar to the Geometry, Volume, Extrude command
described above. In this case the volumes are created by
revolving the original surfaces around a vector (the axis
of revolution), instead of extruding them along the vec-
tor.
In addition to selecting the surfaces to revolve with the standard entity selection dialog box, and specifying the axis
of revolution with the vector definition dialog boxes, you must also define the angle of revolution. This is the angle
through which the surfaces will be rotated around the axis of revolution vector to form the volumes. As the surfaces
are revolved, all of the additional curves and surfaces which define the volume will be created automatically.
2 Surfaces Surface and Point
From Surface
To Surface
From Surface
To Point
Selected
Extrusion Vector
Surfaces
3-42 Geometry
When you are specifying the axis of revolution vector, the location and direction are important, the magnitude is
not. The location and direction are needed to define the rotation.
You should never specify an axis of revolution that crosses any of the surfaces that you are revolving. If you do, the
resulting surfaces and volumes will be twisted, and will be useless for meshing.
In addition, there are several special cases that can arise when you revolve surfaces that have one or more points or
edge curves that lie on the axis of revolution. For example, if you revolve a triangular surface that has one point on
the axis, you will create a pyramid-shaped volume. If you revolve a triangular surface with one edge on the axis,
you will create a tetra. There are similar cases with quadrilateral faces.
3.4.1.6 Geometry, Volume, Cylinder...
... is identical to the Geometry, Surface, Cylinder command except that it creates the volume, in addition to the sur-
faces. Since you will be creating a volume, capping surfaces will always be created. Otherwise, the volume would
not be closed.
For more information, see Section 3.3.3.9, "Geometry, Surface, Cylinder...".
3.4.1.7 Geometry, Volume, Sphere...
... is identical to the Geometry, Surface, Sphere command except that it creates the volume, in addition to the sur-
faces. Since you will be creating a volume, capping surfaces will always be created. Otherwise, the volume would
not be closed.
For more information, see Section 3.3.3.10, "Geometry, Surface, Sphere...".
3.4.2 Solids
These commands provide tools for building solid models in FEMAP. They are available when the Parasolid geom-
etry engine is active.
The Solid menu is partitioned into six major segments:
Activate - select and or name the active solid
creating/editing- Add/Remove Material, Extrude, Revolve, Primitives, Stitch, Explode
modifying - Fillet, Chamfer, Shell
Boolean operations - Add, Remove, Common, Embed, Intersect
slicing/face operations - Slice, Slice Match, Slice Along Face, Embed Face
Cleanup - cleanup the active solid
The functionality of these commands are explained in more detail below.
3.4.2.1 Geometry, Solid, Activate...
... is used to change between active solids, or to reset to make no solid active. When you select this command, the
Activate Solid dialog box appears.
Axis of
Angle of
Selected
Surfaces
Revolution
Revolution
Geometry, Solid, Add/Remove Material... 3-43
ID
You can select the ID by inputting its ID or simply select it from the
list.
Title
You may rename a solid by typing in a different Title.
Reset
Choose this option to deactivate all solids.
3.4.2.2 Geometry, Solid, Add/Remove Material...
... does not perform any functions; however, it does set the defaults for the commands below. If this option does not
have a check mark next to it, the default will be Add. If there is a check mark, the default will be Remove.
This is a convenient method to toggle between defaults if you are performing many additions, then removals. How-
ever, you can still toggle between Remove and Add once you get into the command itself. Therefore, you are not
required to change this option.
3.4.2.3 Geometry, Solid, Extrude...
... allows you to move a boundary or surface through a vector, and either create a new solid from the extrusion,
remove material or add material. When you invoke this command, you will see the following dialog box:
The dialog box is separated into four major sections: Material, Direction, Length, and option buttons.
Material
This section controls the type of action to perform. The default will be based upon the Add/Extrude Material option
(see Section 3.4.2.2, "Geometry, Solid, Add/Remove Material..."), or the last previous operation. You can create a
new solid, add to the current solid (Protrusion), or remove from the current solid (hole). The Add and Remove com-
mands are similar to the Geometry, Solid, Add and Remove commands, except you do not have to form an addi-
tional solid to add or remove. You simply move a boundary or surface along a vector to add or remove material.
Direction
This option controls whether you extrude in the negative, positive, or both directions. You will see a small white
arrow along the surface or boundary denoting the current direction. If you switch from positive to negative, the
direction of the arrow will switch.
FEMAP can extrude both planar and non-planar surfaces, but it can only extrude planar boundaries. For all planar
entities, FEMAP will automatically choose the normal to the entity as the vector along which to extrude. If you
Note: Unlike other similar Activate commands, such as Model, Load, Set and Model, Constraint, Set, you
cannot create a new solid by inputting an unused ID. You must create a new solid by using one of the
commands under the Solid menu which actually forms the solid and select New Solid. FEMAP will
then automatically create a new solid with the title you input.
Note: You cannot extrude a FEMAP base (standard) surface, or a nonplanar boundary surface.
3-44 Geometry
want to extrude a non-planar surface, or want to extrude along a vector other than the normal, you must select the
extrusion vector by pushing the Along Vector... button.
Length
You can extrude to a particular depth along the vector, to a specific location, or through all of the solid(s) along the
vector direction. If you select the location option, you must input the location using the standard coordinate defini-
tion dialog box after pressing OK on the Extrusion Options dialog box.
Options Buttons
These buttons allow you to change the defaults for the extrusion.
Active Solid...
...allows you to change the active solid which will be used in the extrude operation. When you select this option, a
list of the available solids will be provided (the same dialog box that is used in the Geometry, Solid, Activate com-
mand). Simply select the appropriate solid.
Along Vector...
... uses the standard vector definition dialog box to define the vector along which to extrude. If you do not select
this option, FEMAP will automatically extrude along the normal vector for all planar surfaces. If you attempt to
extrude a nonplanar surface, you must use this option to define the extrusion vector. You cannot use this option to
extrude boundary surfaces. Boundary surfaces area always extruded normal to their definition plane.
Pattern...
... allows you to create multiple extrusions from a single surface or boundary extrusion. This is an extremely useful
option when multiple holes, in a symmetrical pattern are required through a solid. You can simply define one
boundary/surface, and then choose Pattern. When you choose this command, the Patterns dialog box will appear.
None
The default option is None. A single extrusion will be performed with
this option.
Rectangular
This option allows you to identify the number and spacing in Y. If you
are planning to use this option, the workplane must be aligned with the
pattern. Also, the original surface/boundary you create should be at the
most negative position on the workplane. FEMAP will automatically
move in the positive X and Y workplane directions (unless you specify a
negative distance) to create additional entities in the pattern. The spacing
values input must be the distance form center to center of the boundary/
surface you are extruding.
Radial
This option is very similar to Rectangular, except it defines a radial pat-
tern. You input the center, the number, and the total angle, and FEMAP will create these extrusions into or through
the solid.
Examples
Below you will find two examples of a pattern definition.
Rectangular Pattern
The first example uses a rectangular pattern of 3 in X and 3 in Y with the same spacing for both. The origin is spec-
ified as the center of the circle in the workplane in the bottom left corner. FEMAP then uses the X spacing and Y
spacing to form the 9 holes in the solid.
Geometry, Solid, Revolve... 3-45
Radial Pattern
The Radial Pattern is similar, except a number of 6 and a total angle of 360 degrees was specified.
Surface
This option lets you to select the surface to extrude.
3.4.2.4 Geometry, Solid, Revolve...
... is very similar to Geometry, Solid, Extrude except it revolves around an axis of revolution instead of extruding
along a vector. When you select this command, you must input the axis of revolution using the standard vector def-
inition dialog box. The Revolve Options dialog box then appears. This dialog box is almost identical to the Extrude
Options dialog box above (Geometry, Solid, Extrude), except for a few modifications (see Section 3.4.2.3, "Geom-
etry, Solid, Extrude...")
The Material (New Solid, Add, or Remove) and Directions (Positive, Negative, or Both) sections are identical, and
the Length section has options for Angle, To Location, and Full 360 degrees instead of Depth, To Location, and Full
360. The only other difference is you can choose to change your axis of revolution (instead of the Extrusion Vector)
by selecting the axis of revolution option.
3.4.2.5 Geometry, Solid, Primitives...
... can be used for such
geometry primitives as cyl-
inders, blocks, and cones.
This command can be used
to form a new solid or to
add/remove material from
an existing solid. When you
select this command, the
Solid Primitives dialog box
appears.
This dialog box is very
similar to the Extrude
Options and Revolve Options dialog boxes. Each of these areas are discussed below.
Material
You can create a new solid, add to, or remove from an existing solid just as in the Extrude/Revolve commands
above. For this particular command, however, you also have the option to form a new solid from common areas of
the primitive you are about to create and the current active solid.
Note: When you perform this command, the construction geometry (surface) will remain, but it will be auto-
matically moved to the Construction Geometry Layer (Layer 9999). This layer by default is chosen as
the No Pick Layer on the View, Layers command. If you need to graphically select it later, you can sim-
ply change the No Pick Layer on the View, Layers command.
Note: When you perform this command, the construction geometry (boundary or surface) remains, but it is
automatically moved to the Construction Geometry Layer (Layer 9999). This layer defaults to the No
Pick Layer on the View, Layers command. If you need to graphically select it later, you can simply
change the No Pick Layer on the View, Layers command.
Rectangular Pattern Radial Pattern
3-46 Geometry
Direction
You may also choose to move in a positive or a negative direction, just like the commands above.
Origin
You simply specify a location for the origin of the primitive. If you plan on using a rectangular pattern, you should
use the origin of the primitive which is in the most negative position in the workplane, since FEMAP will always
move in the positive direction to create the pattern.
Primitive
This section defines the actual primitive to be created. You can create a block, cylinder, cone, or sphere. For the
block, you can input the origin at the center or corner of the block. You must then specify the distances in the X, Y
and Z directions. These directions are all relative to the workplane. For a cylinder you simply input a height and
radius. A cone requires a top and bottom radius as well as a height. There are two options for sphere, Sphere
requires only a radius for input and creates a sphere with 8 three-sided surfaces, while Sphere - Alt requires only
a radius and creates a sphere from 6 four-sided surfaces.
Options
You may also change the active solid (Active Solid) or choose to create a Pattern (see Section 3.4.2.3, "Geometry,
Solid, Extrude...").
3.4.2.6 Geometry, Solid, Stitch...
... creates a solid from a series of surfaces. The only inputs required for this command are the surfaces themselves
and a stitching tolerance. The tolerance can be adjusted to facilitate the closing of gaps between surface edges. This
is a very useful command when reading trimmed surfaces from an IGES file. You can read an IGES file, and then
use this command to generate a Parasolid solid from the IGES surfaces. You can then manipulate this solid just like
any other solid you would have created in FEMAP.
3.4.2.7 Geometry, Solid, Explode...
...creates independent surfaces from a solid. The underlying solid no longer exists. The only input for this com-
mand is a solid. This command is quite useful because it allows you to modify surfaces on solids and then stitch
them back into a solid.
3.4.2.8 Geometry, Solid, Fillet...
... allows you to create fillets on a solid model. When using this command, you must be careful to select the appro-
priate curve for filleting. This command works slightly different than the Modify, Fillet command in that you are
modifying a solid, not individual curves. Therefore, you must select an edge of the solid, and that edge will become
rounded based upon the radius you input.
The input for this command is simply the curve(s)/edge(s) to fillet, and the radius of the fillet. Below are a few
examples of filleting a solid.
Sphere
Sphere - Alt
Geometry, Solid, Chamfer... 3-47
Examples
3.4.2.9 Geometry, Solid, Chamfer...
... operates identically to Geometry, Solid, Fillet except it produces a chamfer instead of a fillet. Input for this com-
mand is simply the solid edge (curve) and the chamfer length. Examples of this command are shown below.
Examples
3.4.2.10 Geometry, Solid, Shell...
... allows you to hollow out a solid. Simply select the surfaces to pierce (the surfaces on the solid to be hollowed
out), and the thickness of the solid shell. FEMAP will automatically remove the interior portion of the surface and
leave an outer thickness equal to the input of the thickness and then move through the solid, normal to the surface,
and remove material until it reaches within a thickness value of the opposing surface. To shell a solid completely
and remove all material in the interior, simply choose two opposing surfaces.
Examples
Fillet Top Curve
Fillet Top + Side Curves
Chamfer Top Curve
Chamfer Top + Side
Pierce One Surface
Pierce Two Surfaces
3-48 Geometry
3.4.2.11 Geometry, Solid, Thicken...
... allows you to thicken or thin out (depending on the selected options) an existing solid using a component
surface or surfaces or thicken a surface (sheet solid) into a solid by extruding in one specified normal direction or
both.
Offset
The In and Out Offset directions are determined by the normal direction of the surface, with the Out direction
being in the normal direction. For solids, the Out direction will always face away from enclosed volume.
When using thicken on a surface (sheet solid) not associated with any solid, you simply choose the surface(s) to
thicken, choose an offset direction (In and/or Out), and enter a value.
Example
Options
These options are used to control the way the thicken command behaves. Some are only available in certain situ-
ations.
Auto Cleanup - Runs a portion of the Solid, Cleanup command to make sure any new solids that have been created
are valid solids and also tries to remove any extraneous material (slivers, hanging edges) from the thicken pro-
cess. This option is on by default and is a recommended every time this command is used.
Note: You can turn on the Surface normals using the View, Options command. Once in the View Options
dialog box, choose the Tools and View Style category, then choose Curve and Surface Accuracy from
the Options list. Change the option in Parametric Directions to either 1..Show All Arrows of
3..Show Surface Arrows.
Note: You can reverse the normal direction of a surface (sheet solid) using the Modify, Update Other, Surface
Normal command.
Two Surfaces with opposite Normals
Surfaces showing Normals
Solids created using Out and
a value of 3 units
Geometry, Solid, Thicken... 3-49
Thick Individually - Creates an individual solid for each surface that was selected to thicken. Doing this allows
you to pick and choose which newly created solids to boolean (add, embed, etc.) or use in other operations.
Delete Original Surfaces - Simply deletes the Original Surface that was used to thicken. Is on by default, but
may be turned off if you would like to use the surface for additional geometry operations (extrude, revolve, etc.)
Auto Boolean
When using thicken to alter a solid by choosing surfaces associated with the solid, you will have some additional
options. These options allow you to combine the thicken operation with FEMAP Boolean operations.
Essentially, the geometry will be thickened and then the selected Boolean operation will occur. Only thickened
surfaces from a particular solid can be booleaned with that solid (i.e., you can NOT take a surface from a solid,
thicken it, and then boolean it into a different solid).
None - The new geometry will be created with no effect to existing geometry in the model, even if the new solid
created with thicken overlaps the original surfaces associated solid.
Add - The new geometry will be added to the solid after the thicken operation. This option is good to use when
you want to thicken a portion of your model.
Subtract - The new geometry will be subtracted from the solid after the thicken operation. This option is good
to use when you want to thin out a portion of your model as natatorial will be removed.
Embed - The new geometry will be embedded into the solid after the thicken operation. This Boolean is a
good option to select when you need multiple elements through the thickness and can be used in conjunction
with adjacent surface matching to create a continuous mesh of this type.
See the examples below for how the thicken command can be used with Boolean operations.
Examples
Hint: You can reduce the diameter of a hole by choosing all the surfaces of the hole, selecting the Out offset
direction, and the Add Auto Boolean Option.
Hint: You can increase the diameter of a hole by choosing all the surfaces of the hole, selecting the In offset
direction, and the Subtract Auto Boolean Option.
Hint: You can create a cylindrical region for meshing around a hole by choosing all the surfaces of the hole,
selecting the In offset direction, and the Embed Auto Boolean Option.
Reduce Radius using a
combination of Out
Offset and Add Boolean
Increase Radius using
a combination of In
Offset and Subtract
Choose a single surface
and use the Out Offset and
Add Boolean to thicken
a portion of your solid
Choose a single surface and
use the In Offset and
Subtract Boolean to thin
out a portion of your
solid
Boolean
3-50 Geometry
3.4.2.12 Geometry, Solid, Remove Face...
... allows you to Remove a face from a solid. Simply select the surfaces to remove (surfaces that create fillets,
chamfers, holes, bosses, tabs, cut-outs, etc.), and the faces will be removed from the solid. FEMAP will automati-
cally fill-in or remove the portion of the solid that was represented by the chosen face. For example, a hole can
be removed (material will be added to fill-in the hole) by choosing to remove the interior faces that make up the
sides of the hole or a boss can be removed (material is taken away) by choosing to remove a surface that makes
the side of a boss.
Examples
3.4.2.13 Geometry, Solid, Add...
... forms one solid from multiple, connected solids. The only input required for these commands are the solids
which are selected through the standard entity selection dialog box. FEMAP intersects all selected solids to form
one solid composed of the volumes of all selected solids.
Note: If a solid is not connected to any of the other chosen solids, it will not be added and will remain as a
separate entity.
Create Mesh Region
using combination of
In Offset and Embed
Boolean
Choose all of the outside
surfaces, the In Offset,
and the Embed Boolean
for two elements
through the
thickness mesh
to partition the solid
Remove the two inner faces of a hole
The hole has been removed and the block is solid again
Remove the faces that are fillets
The fillets has been removed from the geometry
Geometry, Solid, Remove... 3-51
Example
3.4.2.14 Geometry, Solid, Remove...
... modifies one solid by subtracting other solids from it. First select the base solid (the one to be modified), and
then select the solids to subtract. FEMAP removes material common to the solids from the first solid (the base
solid). The subtracted solids are removed from the model.
Example
3.4.2.15 Geometry, Solid, Common...
... is very similar to Geometry, Solid, Add except it creates a solid from the shared volumes between two solids
instead of the total volumes of both.
Example
3.4.2.16 Geometry, Solid, Embed...
...similar to the common command except that it forms two solids: one from the shared volumes and one from the
remaining volume of the base solid. You are first asked to pick the base solid, then the solid to embed.
+
=
=
-
=
Common
3-52 Geometry
Example
3.4.2.17 Geometry, Solid, Intersect...
...automatically breaks surfaces on selected solids at their intersections.
The figure shows the surfaces of two solids before and after intersection.
3.4.2.18 Geometry, Solid, Slice...
... forms two solids by using a cutting plane to slice through a solid. This command simply requires you to select
the solid, and define the cutting plane using the standard plane definition dialog box. FEMAP will then slice the
solid and form two individual solids from the first solid.
Hint: This command is extremely useful when importing CAD files of symmetrical parts. Most solid mod-
els in CAD systems will be of the entire model to generate drawings. You can use this command to
slice the part through its plane(s) of symmetry and produce a much smaller and efficient model for
meshing and analyzing. If you need to mesh the entire model due to nonsymmetric loading condi-
tions, simply mesh the sliced portion and then reflect the mesh. You will be able to produce a much
better mesh in less time, than if you attempt to mesh the entire part. You will also be guaranteed to
obtain a symmetrical mesh
=
Embed
Pick this solid first
Surfaces Before Intersect Surfaces After Intersect
Geometry, Solid, Slice Match... 3-53
3.4.2.19 Geometry, Solid, Slice Match...
...similar to the solid slice command, but it will leave matching faces on both solids. The faces can then be matched
for meshing using the mesh size commands. This command is useful for making multiple solid meshes (tetrahe-
drons or hexahedrons) that can be sewn together using the coincident nodes command.
3.4.2.20 Geometry, Solid, Slice Along Face...
...similar to the slice match command but a face of the solid is selected instead of a plane. The face can be planar or
curved.
3.4.2.21 Geometry, Solid, Embed Face...
...extrudes a face into a new solid and embeds it into the solid that
contained the face. You must first select a face, then you will have
several optional methods that you can use to embed the face. Usu-
ally you will simply want to use the defaults, by pressing OK.
Embedding Direction and Distance
The direction that the face will be embedded can be determined or
specified in a number of ways. If you are embedding a planar face,
the direction can be automatically determined from the plane nor-
mal. If you choose Automatic, the surface normal will be used as the embedding direction, and the face will be
embedded through your entire solid. If you choose Specify Direction, you will be asked for a vector to use for both
+
=
+
=
Pick this face
3-54 Geometry
the direction and the distance to embed. If you choose Specify Offset, you will simply be asked for an offset dis-
tance. The surface will be offset through that distance and embedded. If you use this method with non-planar sur-
faces, the resulting embedded solid will not be a simple extrusion. The sides of the solid are projected normal to the
original surface.
Curves
In most cases, you will want to embed the entire face. That means choosing the Outline Only mode, where only the
outline of the face is used - holes are ignored. If you choose All Curves, curves on holes will also be used, so any
geometry that is inside the holes will be sliced out of the embedded solid.
If a planar face is selected FEMAP uses the face normals as the extrusion direction. If you select a curved surface,
FEMAP will ask you for a direction vector to use for the extrusion.
3.4.2.22 Geometry, Solid, Cleanup...
... is used to cleanup a solid. This command will check the solid, and
remove any extraneous features which are not part of the actual solid, but
may have developed during export from a CAD package or from Boolean
operations on it. If a portion of your solid appears inaccurate, or drawn
incorrectly, use this command to see if you can remove it.
Remove Redundant Geometry
Redundant geometry is geometry that is not required to define the volume
of the solid. Examples of this could be curves that have been imprinted in a
face to split it into regions, points used to split curves, or multiple surfaces
that are all really part of the same underlying geometric surface. If you
check this option, this geometry will be removed, resulting in a simplified
solid.
Remove Sliver Surfaces
Slivers are small faces that are created because of numerical inaccuracies in Boolean or other solid modeling
operations. Typically these faces are much smaller than the other faces that define your solid. While they are small,
they can cause great difficulties in meshing. They will often completely prevent a part from being hex meshed. This
option removes these surfaces and attempts to restitch your solid without them. This option is only available with
Parasolid geometry.
Check Geometry
Once you have cleaned geometry, especially if you removed sliver surfaces, it is often good to check it to be confi-
dent that it is still a good, usable solid. You may even want to do this without any of the other options just to check
the validity of a solid that you are creating.
Match Model Scale Factor
If you have a model containing geometry in more than one scale factor, this command will take all selected geome-
try and adjust the geometrys internal scale factor to the Solid Geometry Scale Factor that is currently set in File,
Preferences under the Geometry preference.
Note: Do not use this option if you have imprinted curves or performed some of the matching commands
since imprinted curves are considered extraneous and will be removed.
=
two solids
pick circular face
Geometry, Solid, Cleanup... 3-55
Advanced Cleanup
If you press the Advanced Cleanup button, you will see a list of alternate ways that you can attempt to repair your
geometry. These options give you more control over repairing specific problems. In most cases in the dialog box,
you will see a check box to turn a specific cleanup option on or off, along with an associated tolerance (if appropri-
ate), to specify the characteristic size where you want cleaning to take place.
Cleaning Options
Repair Edges allows you to specify a toler-
ance which will be used to repair the edges of
your solid. If Smooth or Split Discontinuities
is checked, then surface or curve G1 discontinu-
ities will be removed. If the discontinuity has a
change in tangent of less than the tolerance that
you specify then the discontinuity will be
smoothed. If the change in tangent is greater
than the tolerance then the face or edge will be
split at the surfaces or curves discontinuity. If
a surface contains self-intersections, which lie
outside its face boundaries then this portion of
the surface will be removed by splitting the sur-
face, if you check Remove Surface Self Inter-
sections. This may result in the surface being
split into several surfaces. If you are concerned
that surface geometry be preserved at all costs,
and repairs should be confined to getting face
boundaries repaired as far as possible, then turn
off Allow Surface Modifications - this will
leave surface geometry unchanged.
Small Feature Options
Remove Spikes attempts to heal surface trim-
ming curves that have spikes as shown. Remove Small Edges removes
very short edges which are below the length that you specify. Similarly,
Remove Small Faces removes small faces. A small face is defined as any
face, no matter what shape, that fits completely within a sphere of the radius
that you specify in this option. Remove Sliver Faces also removes insig-
nificant faces, however in the case of slivers, they may only be small in one direction and long in the other. These
are faces with high aspect ratios, and small area.
Geometry Simplification Options
If Convert to Analytic Geometry is on, B-Spline curves and surfaces are converted, whenever possible, to simpli-
fied analytic geometry. Curves can be simplified to lines, circles or ellipses. A surfaces can be simplified to a plane,
cylinder, cone, sphere or torus. The original B-Spline geometry must match the analytical representation within the
specified tolerance or it will not be converted.
Edge Healing Options
These options attempt to heal inaccuracies in the edges of a solid or sur-
face. They repair edge and vertex geometry by recalculating geometry that
does not meet precisely. The tolerance you specify is the tolerance to
which the edges will be recomputed to meet the other constraints imposed
by the model - for example, surface tangency. This option will also repair
misalignment between the axes of analytical surfaces - for example, two
very nearly coplanar surfaces are made planar. Likewise, very small mismatches between the radii of cones, cylin-
ders, spheres and torii are corrected. If Merge Edges is on, then after healing the inaccurate edges, any redundant
edges in the model will be removed.
spike
tangential
surfaces
repaired
surfaces
3-56 Geometry
Surface Heal and Stitch Options
These options allow you to stitch surfaces into a solid, or automatically explode and restitch an existing solid. In
addition to simply stitching, if you turn on Heal Surfaces, then additional cleaning options are performed before
stitching - self intersections of curves will be removed, and self-intersections in sharp corners of 3-sided surfaces
will be removed. If Smooth or Split Discontinuities is checked, G1-discontinuities in curves and surfaces will be
removed, and closed geometry is made periodic. If Replace Missing Geometry is on, then an attempt will be
made to fit surfaces in any remaining holes in the model to close it into a solid.
Copying Geometry 3-57
3.5 Copying Geometry
FEMAP provides robust tools to make duplicates of existing geometry. There are five commands which can be
used to make duplicates of existing geometry:
Copy
Radial Copy
Scale
Rotate
Reflect
These operations can be performed with any geometry, including points, curves, surfaces, volumes, and solids.
When you copy geometry that is comprised of other geometry (such as surfaces which are comprised of curves),
FEMAP will automatically copy these framework entities, and then connect them properly to form the new cop-
ies. Each of these capabilities is described in more detail below.
3.5.1 Geometry, Copy Commands
You can use the copy commands to duplicate existing points, curves, surfaces, volumes, or solids. All Geometry,
Copy commands require the exact same input, independent of the geometry you are copying. After selecting the
appropriate command for the type of entity you want to select, the standard entity selection dialog box will appear.
Simply choose the desired entities, and FEMAP will display the following dialog box.
After you set the Generation Options and press OK,
you will see the standard vector definition dialog box.
This vector defines both the direction and distance
from the selected entities to the first copy. If you spec-
ify multiple repetitions, each additional copy will be
located along the same vector, at the same distance
from the previous copy. Optionally, you can specify a
new vector for each repetition by selecting the Update
Every Repetition option.
Specifying Generation Options
The generation options control how many copies FEMAP will make, and choose parameters for the resulting enti-
ties. You have the following choices:
Parameters:
These two choices select the parameters that will be assigned to the entities you create (such as color and layer). If
you select Use Current Settings, the entity parameters will match the active parameters. This is the same as if you
had created new entities using the geometry creation commands (for example, Geometry, Point or Geometry,
Curve-Line, Project Points) If instead, you choose Match Original Entities, each new entity will exactly match the
parameters of the entity that was copied to create it.
Repetitions:
By default this option is one. One repetition will create one copy of each selected entity. If you want multiple cop-
ies, set this option to the number desired.
Update Every Repetition:
When this option is off, FEMAP will only ask you for one vector that will be used to position the copies. In this
mode, FEMAP will always offset the position of the current repetition from the position of the previous repetition,
based on the direction and length of the vector that you define.
3-58 Geometry
If you select the Update Every Repetition option however,
FEMAP will ask you for a new vector before every repeti-
tion. This new vector will be used to offset from the origi-
nal entities you selected, not from the previous repetition.
You will want to check this option whenever you want to
create multiple copies that do not lie along a single vector.
Match Mesh Sizes, Loads, Constraints...:
When this option is on, you will have FEMAP create a
copy of a geometric entity with identical mesh sizing,
geometry-based loads, and geometry-based constraints.
FEMAP will automatically create local coordinate systems
to define the loads and boundary conditions properly, if
necessary.
Copying in Non Rectangular Coordinates
FEMAP always creates copies along the vector that you specify, that is along a straight line. You can specify the
vector in any convenient coordinate system. You cannot however, use it to create a copy in a rotated location by
choosing the angular direction in a cylindrical coordinate system. You must use the rotation commands to create
rotated copies.
3.5.2 Geometry, Radial Copy Commands
The commands on this menu provide an alternative to the Geometry, Copy commands. Instead of copying all enti-
ties along a constant vector, as those commands did, the Geometry, Copy commands use a different, radial vector
for each entity to be copied.
When you choose one of these commands, you will be asked to select the entities to be copied, and to define the
generation options. This portion of the process is identical to the normal copy commands. Instead of defining a vec-
tor however, you will next choose a location which defines the center of the radial pattern. Finally, you must spec-
ify the radial offset length. That is, the radial distance between each original and the associated copy.
FEMAP will compute a direction vector for each entity which runs from the
center that you chose, to the entity, as shown here.
In a three dimensional case, these commands are actually a spherical copy,
since the copy vector is computed from the center of the sphere.
For more information regarding the specifics of using the various genera-
tion options refer back to the Geometry, Copy command.
3.5.3 Geometry, Scale Commands
The Geometry, Scale commands are very similar to the Geometry, Radial, Copy commands. They create one or
more copies of selected entities, offset from a center location. In this case however, instead of specifying a constant
offset from the original, the new copy is formed by scaling the distance from the center to the original.
These commands start by selecting the entities to be copied, and defining the generation options. This portion of
the process is identical to the normal copy commands. Just as in the Geometry, Radial, Copy commands, you next
choose a location which defines the center of the pattern. Finally, you must specify the scale factors. Scaling can be
done in one or more directions. By specifying the same scale factor in all three directions, a spherical copy can be
made. A cylindrical copy can be accomplished by specifying the same factor in two directions, and a unit (1.0)
scale factor in the third direction - along the axis of the cylinder. For this type of operation, a coordinate system can
also be chosen if the axes of the desired cylinder do not coincide with the global axes.
Note: This command is not available for solids. It is used most often to copy arcs and other basic geometry.
You must also be careful when using this command with arcs. You should typically use the center of the
arc as the center of the radial pattern, otherwise the arc formed by the copy may be significantly differ-
ent than you would expect.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Original Points
Make 3 copies
along this vector
Center
Radial Vectors
Offset
Original
Copy
Geometry, Rotate Commands 3-59
FEMAP will compute a direction vector for each entity which runs from
the center that you chose, to the entity, as shown here.
In these commands, both the direction and magnitude of these vectors is
used. The direction is used to determine the original copy vector compo-
nents. These components are multiplied by the scale factors to calculate
the final offsets from the center location of the copy. If you use different
scale factors in different component directions, the copy will not lie along
the vector from the center to the original.
For more information on using various generation options, see Section
3.5.1, "Geometry, Copy Commands". For information on specifying scal-
ing factors, see Section 3.6.2.7, "Modify, Scale Menu".
3.5.4 Geometry, Rotate Commands
Like the Geometry, Copy commands, these commands create duplicate copies of model entities. Instead of copying
along a vector, these commands rotate the duplicate copies around a vector.
FEMAP displays the standard entity selection dialog box to allow you to select the nodes you want to copy. This is
followed by the same Generation Options dialog box. All of the options in this box are used just as in the Geome-
try, Copy command.
Following the Generation Options dialog box, you will see the standard vector definition dialog box. This vector is
used to specify the axis that you want to rotate around to generate the copies. Unlike the copy command, you do not
have to specify a length for this axis. Instead, after you choose the vector, FEMAP displays one additional dialog
box that asks for the Change per Repetition.
You can specify both a Rotation Angle and a Translation Distance. Each copy is rotated around the axis of rotation
vector by the specified angle (following right-hand rule conventions), and is translated along the axis vector by
specified distance. If you specify a nonzero translation distance, you will be creating a spiral.
3.5.5 Geometry, Reflect Commands
The commands on this menu allow you to generate a portion of your model by reflecting or flipping existing points,
curves, surfaces, volumes, and solids across a plane.
Note: If you use a scale factor of 1.0, the resulting copy will be located at the same location as the original in
that coordinate direction. Scale factors of (1.0, 1.0, 1.0) will result in a completely coincident copy of
the originals.
Center
Original
Copy
Scale=2.0
Scale=2.0
Axis of Revolution
One original node
Spiral created by rotating
with a nonzero translation
distance.
Circle created by rotating
with translation distance
set to zero.
3-60 Geometry
As always, you will use the standard entity selection dia-
log box to choose the entities to be reflected. Then
FEMAP will display the Generation Options dialog box.
(See Section 3.5.1, "Geometry, Copy Commands"). All
options work just like they do for Geometry, Copy com-
mands, except that you cannot choose multiple repeti-
tions.
In addition, you can specify a Trap Width. FEMAP will
not make a copy of any selected node if it is closer to the
reflection plane than the trap width that you specify. If
you set the trap width to zero, all of the nodes that you
select will be reflected. This option is used most often when reflecting elements, and will usually be zero when
reflecting geometry.
Next, FEMAP will display the standard plane selection dialog box, so you can define the reflection plane. You can
choose any plane that you want. It does not matter how your selected entities are oriented with respect to the plane.
They can be on one side, or they can be on both sides of the plane. Just remember that the reflected entities will be
located on the opposite side of the plane from the original.
3.6 Modifying Geometry
The last major sections of commands involve the modification of geometry. Geometry commands explained above,
under the Geometry menu, were used to create new geometric entities, either from scratch or as some type of
duplicate from existing geometry. This section deals with the actual modification of geometry, not its creation. It is
often easier to modify geometry by using commands to trim or fillet curves, than it is to create the curves from
scratch in every model.
All these commands are contained under the Modify menu. These commands can be separated into four specific
areas for the purpose. They are:
curve operations (Trim, Extend, etc.)
move geometry operations
edit/parameters
advanced updates
These commands are all contained on the Modify menu. The curve operation commands are contained on the top
section of the Modify menu, while the move geometry commands are contained in the middle section. The bottom
section of the Modify menu contains the edit/parameters commands (Edit, Color, Layer), and the advanced updates
(top portion of the Modify, Update Other menu). Each of these areas and their commands are discussed more thor-
oughly in the sections below.
3.6.1 Curve Operations
The top portion of the Modify menu contains commands that will modify existing curves. These commands essen-
tially perform Boolean operations on curves. Other Boolean operations are performed directly on the solids menu.
The commands on the first section of the Modify menu are specifically designed to manipulate only curves.
Several commands also require input of a Near location. When trimming or joining curves, several possible solu-
tions may be obtained. By inputting a Near location, you specify which option to select. The easiest method to
use this option is to position the cursor so it will select the appropriate curve, but also so it is near the proper loca-
tion. When you press the mouse button to select the curve, FEMAP will automatically select the curve, and input
the coordinate location in the Near inputs. If you make a mistake, you can always set the input back to the center
location and pick new coordinates.
These curve operations cannot be performed on curves that define a surface or solid. The available commands are:
Modify
Trim
Extend
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10
11 12 13
14 15 16
17 18 19
20
Reflection Plane
Original Points Reflected Points
Modify, Trim... 3-61
Break
Join
Fillet
Chamfer
Each of these commands are explained below.
3.6.1.1 Modify, Trim...
... cuts curves at the locations where they intersect other curves. The curves you want to trim must actually inter-
sect. This command does not project curves onto a plane before intersecting - it uses the three dimensional curve
definition.
To trim, you must select the curves that will be used as the cutting edges using the standard entity selection dialog
box. You can choose as many cutting curves as you like.
Choosing the Curve to Trim
After you choose the cutting curves, you will see the following dialog box:
You must select the curve you want to trim and define a location (Remove Near) near the portion of the curve that
you want to eliminate. Assuming they intersect, the cutting curves always divide the curve that you are trimming
into at least two sections, and possibly more. The portion of the curve closest to the Remove Near location you
specify will be removed. This could be one of the ends of the curve, or a segment on the interior. The location must
be specified relative to the coordinate system shown, but other than this, the coordinate system has no impact on
this command.
When you have selected the curve and location you want to trim, you can press OK or More. Choose OK if this is
the only curve that you want to trim with the selected cutting curves. Press More if you want to trim more curves
without selecting new cutting curves.
By far, the easiest way to use this command is to use your mouse to graphically select the curve. While input is set
to the ID field, point at the portion of the curve that you want to remove and click the left mouse button. This will
select both the ID and the Remove Near location. If you double-click the mouse instead, it will also automatically
press the OK button and trim the curve.
The extended trim option controls how the cutting curves are used. With extended trim on, cutting curves extend
past their end points toward infinity. Trimming intersections can be found anywhere along these extended curves. If
extended trim is off, the cutting curves stop at their end points and intersections can only be found between the end
points.
Note: These curve operations cannot be performed on curves that define a surface or a solid. You must delete
any entities that reference these curves before you can perform any of these curve operations.
Ctrl+i
3-62 Geometry
Examples
3.6.1.2 Modify, Extend...
... moves the end points of one or more curves to a specified location. This command can either lengthen or shorten
the curves depending upon the chosen location. If the location does not lie along the curve, the curve is extended
along its length to the location that is closest to the coordinates you specified.
This command only uses standard dialog boxes. You choose the curves to extend using the standard entity selection
dialog. You then specify the location using the standard coordinate dialog boxes. As described above, any curves
and any location can be chosen. The location is simply projected onto each curve at the point of closest proximity.
This command always modifies the end of the curve that is already closest to the specified location.
You can also use this command to extend or shrink B-Spline curves.
3.6.1.3 Modify, Break...
... splits one or more curves into two pieces at a location that you specify. If the location is not along the length of a
curve, it is projected to the closest location on the curve, and the curve is split at that location.
The location that you choose, or its projection, must fall within the current end points of the curve that you are try-
ing to break. You cannot use this command to extend the existing curve beyond its end points.
Only standard dialog boxes are used for this command. You select the curves to break using the standard entity
selection dialog box. Then, you choose the location with the standard coordinate dialog boxes.
Normally, breaking a curve does not change its type. You just end up with two new curves of the same type, that
together, make up the original curve. The only exception is when you break a circle. In this case, you end up with
two arcs (a different type of curve) that represent the original circle.
Curve to Trim
if Remove Near is
at this end
if Remove Near is
at this end
if Remove Near is
in the middle
Curve to Trim
Remove Near
Curve to Trim
Remove Near
Cutting Curve
Ctrl+K
Modify, Join... 3-63
Examples
3.6.1.4 Modify, Join...
...combines the capabilities found in the trim
and extend commands to allow you to
quickly connect two intersecting curves. If
an intersection is found the selected curves
are either extended or shortened to that com-
mon location. This command cannot be used
to create a third curve from the two selected
curves. It simply extends or shrinks the
curves so they will intersect.
Only one dialog box is required for this command. Here you select the two curves, and a location near the intersec-
tion where you want to join the curves. If you are joining lines, you can specify any location that you want since
there will only be a single intersection. For other curve types, where multiple intersections are possible, the curves
are joined at the intersection that is closest to the location you specify. The coordinate system can be used for con-
venience in specifying the location, but is not used otherwise.
The Update 1 and Update 2 options control whether the respective curves will be extended (or shortened) to the
join location. If you turn one of these off, that curve will not be updated, but the other curve will still be extended to
the join location. Do not turn both off - nothing will be updated.
This command cannot work, if the curves, or the extensions of the curves past their end points, do not intersect. If
the selected curves intersect within their original length, the Near location is used to determine which portion of the
Extend to here
Extended Curves
Closest to
specified location
Original
Extend (shrink) to here
Extend to here
Curves
Break here
Original Curves
Original Circle
Break here
Starting location
of circle
Two arcs
Ctrl+J
3-64 Geometry
curves will be kept after they are updated. Just like Modify, Fillet, the portion of the curve closest to the Near loca-
tion is kept.
Examples
3.6.1.5 Modify, Fillet...
... connects two curves with an arc of a specified radius. The lengths of the original curves can be adjusted so that
they just meet the ends of the fillet arc. The arc is positioned so that it is tangent to both original curves at its end
points.
Just like the Modify, Join command, only one dialog box is required for this command. You must choose the two
curves to fillet, and a location that is near the center of the desired fillet. Since even at a line-to-line intersection
there are four possible quadrants for the fillet, this location is always important. It must lie in the quadrant where
you want the fillet arc. For other curve types, it also chooses between the many possible intersection locations. The
examples below will show you how to specify this location.
If you are filleting intersecting curves, like lines, you can choose any fillet radius that you want. If you are filleting
non-intersecting curves, like two arcs or circles, the fillet radius must be large enough to span the gap between the
curves.
As long as the Trim Curve options are on, the end points of the respective curve will be adjusted to be coincident
with the ends of the fillet arc. If you just want to add an arc, but not trim the curves, turn one or more of these
options off.
If you are having trouble creating the arc that you want, check the location and alignment of your workplane. The
coordinates that you pick are typically in the workplane and if it is skewed relative to the curves that you are fillet-
ing, the point you choose may not be in the quadrant that you expected. It is always best to do filleting in a view
where the curves and the workplane are normal to the screen.
Join these curves
These portions
have been removed
Join these curves
Only update
this curve
Only one curve
extended to join location
Join these curves
These portions
have been removed
Near
Near
Ctrl+F
Modify, Chamfer... 3-65
Examples
Limitations
You may encounter the following limitations when you are attempting to fillet curves:
If you are going to fillet an arc, circle or spline, the other curve should lie in the same plane. If it does not, the
fillet that is created will probably not be tangent to both curves, or no fillet will be created. Fillet expects the
geometry to be planar.
If you attempt to fillet splines, the fillet arc will probably not be tangent to the spline. Since splines cannot be
precisely offset, the center location of the fillet arc is not calculated precisely. You will have to adjust the posi-
tion manually or use another technique.
3.6.1.6 Modify, Chamfer...
... trims two intersecting lines at a specified distance from their end points and connects the trimmed ends with a
new line. This command is very similar to the Modify, Fillet command, but you must choose lines (not arcs, circles
or splines).
Just like the Modify, Fillet command, only one dialog box is required. You must choose the two lines to chamfer,
and a location that is near the center of the desired chamfer. Since even at a line-line intersection there are four pos-
sible quadrants for the chamfer, this location is always important. It must lie in the quadrant where you want the
chamfer line. The figure shows you how to specify this location.
You can choose any chamfer lengths that you want, and
you can independently control the chamfer length along
each curve. The lengths that you specify are the distances
along the curves as shown here.
As long as the Trim Curve options are on, the end points of
the respective line will be adjusted to be coincident with
the ends of the chamfer line. If you just want to add a line,
but not trim the original lines, turn one or more of these
options off.
Original Curves
Fillet Arc
Both curves trimmed
or extended to the
fillet locations.
Center Near here
Pick the center
location in the
quadrant where
you want the fillet.
Original Curves
Original Curves Original Curves
Fillet added
without trimming
original circles
Pick here
for this fillet
Curve 1
Curve 2
Chamfer Length 1
Chamfer Length 2
Chamfer Line
Choose location
near here
3-66 Geometry
If you are having trouble creating the chamfer that you want, check the location and alignment of your workplane.
The coordinates that you pick are typically in the workplane and if it is skewed relative to the lines that you are
chamfering, the point you choose may not be in the quadrant that you expected. It is always best to do chamfering
in a view where the lines and the workplane are normal to the screen.
3.6.2 Moving Geometry
FEMAP also has robust tolls for moving geometry. When you move geometry, any geometry that reference that
geometry is also moved. Therefore, if you move a point that is referenced by a curve on a surface, you are actually
modifying that surface. These move commands, therefore, give you the power to make large scale changes to the
model with only a few changes to the geometry. These commands are also very useful when assembling parts from
different models into one large model.
The move commands can be separated into five major categories:
Project
Translate (Move)
Rotate
Alignment
Scale
Both the Translate and Rotate categories have two capabilities based upon whether you move/rotate to a given
position (Move To and Rotate To) or move along or rotate around (Move By and Rotate By) a vector. Each of the
individual commands is described in more detail below.
3.6.2.1 Modify, Project Menu
The Project commands update the locations of points by moving them onto a selected curve or surface. These com-
mands are only used for points (or nodes with finite element data).
In all of these commands, the projection direction will typically be normal to the curve or surface that you are pro-
jecting onto. Actually however, these commands move the entities to the closest location on the curve or surface.
For the purposes of these commands, curves extend past their end points toward infinity, or in the case of an arc,
they extend a full 360 degrees. Likewise, surfaces extend past their edge curves, but not to infinity. Even though
possible, you should avoid projecting onto a surface outside of its defined boundaries. Depending on the surface
type, this may or may not result in the coordinates that you expected.
Modify, Project, Point onto Curve...
... moves one or more points onto a curve. The standard entity selection dialog box is used to choose the points that
you want to project. You then select the curve for the projection.
You can choose any curve, and all of the selected points will be projected onto it. For more information on how the
projection will be done, see Section 3.6.2.1, "Modify, Project Menu".
Note: These commands cannot be used to move entities of solids. You must use the commands under the
Geometry, Solids menu to perform manipulations on solid entities. You can move an entire solid, how-
ever.
Modify, Project Menu 3-67
Modify, Project, Point onto Surface...
... moves one or more points onto a surface. The standard entity selection dialog box is used to choose the points
that you want to project, and then you must select the appropriate surface.
You can choose any surface, and all of the selected points will be projected onto it. For more information on how
the projection will be done, see Section 3.6.2.1, "Modify, Project Menu".
Modify, Project, Point along Vector...
...similar to Modify, Project, Point onto Surface except it allows you to use a vector to specify a projection direction
instead of always using the surface normal direction. This can be helpful if you are projecting points in a plane onto
a surface with a high level or curvature and want to keep the spatial relationship between the points intact.
Modify, Project, Point onto Vector...
... similar to Modify, Project, Point onto Curve except it allows you to specify a vector (using any method in
FEMAP) representing a straight line between two coordinates to project to instead of an existing curve.
Modify, Project, Point onto Plane...
... similar to Modify, Project, Point onto Surface except it allows you to specify a 2-D plane (using any method in
FEMAP) to project to instead of an existing planar surface.
Original Locations
Projected Locations
Points projected onto
extended curve
Projected Locations
Point projected onto
extended arc
Original
Locations
Original Points
Surface
Projected Points
3-68 Geometry
3.6.2.2 Modify, Move To Menu
The Move To commands update the location of some portion of your model. Although there are only commands to
move coordinate systems, points, and nodes, you can use these commands to move your entire model. For example,
when you move a point, the geometry entities (curves, surfaces, etc.) that reference the point, are also updated.
The basic philosophy behind each of these commands is to specify a new coordinate to which selected entities will
be moved. Since it is relatively useless to move multiple entities to a single location (they would all be coincident),
each command allows you to limit the movement to any subset of the three coordinates. For example, you can just
update the X coordinates, leaving all Y and Z coordinates in their original locations. By specifying a non-rectangu-
lar coordinate system, you can also move to a selected radius or angle.
Each command on this menu displays the standard
entity selection dialog box so you can choose the
entities to move. When you press OK, the standard
coordinate definition dialog box appears to specify
the location to Move To. Finally, after you choose a
location, you will see the Move To dialog box to
select which coordinate (in a specific coordinate
system) to update. Only those coordinates that are
checked will be updated. In most cases, you will not
want to check all three coordinates unless you are updating a single point.
For example, you could use the Move To, Point command to move all nodes to be in a specific plane (i.e. same
value of X).
Modify, Move To, Coord Sys...
... is the most powerful Move To command. Not only does it update the location of the coordinate systems that you
select, but it can also move all points, nodes and other coordinate systems that are defined relative to those coordi-
nate systems.
If you just want to move the coordinate systems that
you selected, do not choose Move CSys, Nodes and
Points... If you did select that option, FEMAP would
move the coordinate systems you selected plus the
dependent entities.
All of the coordinate systems that you select are
updated as you requested. Other dependent entities
are moved as a rigid body based on the transforma-
tion of the definition coordinate systems. If a coordi-
Before After
Select all points and
change X coordinates
to this location.
Modify, Move By Menu 3-69
nate system is both selected and dependent on other selected coordinate systems, it is updated based on your
request, since you selected it. For more information, see Section 3.6.2.2, "Modify, Move To Menu".
If your model was built in a hierarchical manner, using multiple coordinate systems, this command can quickly
move large, related portions of your model. If you want to update the location of a coordinate system but leave the
entities that reference it in their original positions, you can also use the Modify, Update, Coord Sys command.
Modify, Move To, Point...
... moves selected points to a specified coordinate. Curves and any other geometry that reference the selected points
will also be moved. For more information, see Section 3.6.2.2, "Modify, Move To Menu".
3.6.2.3 Modify, Move By Menu
These commands are similar to those found on the Move To submenu. The significant difference is that for these
commands you specify a vector instead of coordinates. All of the entities that you select for modification are
moved along (or by) that vector.
This command only uses two dialog boxes. First, the standard entity selection dialog box is displayed. You should
select the entities to be updated. Then, the standard vector definition dialog box will be displayed. The vector you
specify must contain both a direction and magnitude. All of the selected entities, and the entities that reference
them will be moved by that vector. This essentially means that the location of the selected entity is updated by add-
ing the components of the vector.
Move By in Non-Rectangular Coordinate Systems
The Move By commands always move along a vector (i.e. along a straight line). You can define the vector in any
convenient coordinate system, but it will always represent a straight line. You can not use the Move By commands
to rotate your model by specifying a vector in the angular direction of a cylindrical coordinate system. Use the
Rotate commands to rotate your model.
Modify, Move By, Coord Sys...
... just like the Modify, Move To, Coord Sys command, will move all of the selected coordinate systems, and any
points, nodes, or other coordinate systems that reference a selected system. This can be very powerful if your
model is constructed with multi-level coordinate systems. Again, dependent entities are moved as a rigid body.
Selected coordinate systems are all moved by the vector that you define. For more information, see Section 3.6.2.3,
"Modify, Move By Menu".
x
y
z
3
x
y
z
4
x
y
z
3
x
y
z
4 These nodes
relative to CSys 3
CSys 3 moves
and so do nodes
defined
Move By vector
Select these nodes
3-70 Geometry
Modify, Move By Point, Curve, Surface, Volume, Solid...
... moves the selected points, curves, or surfaces and all geometry that references them, by the specified vector. For
more information, see Section 3.6.2.3, "Modify, Move By Menu".
When you move points that are connected to curves, those curves will be moved also. If you only move some of the
points which are attached to a curve, the shape and size of the curve will probably change. Be especially careful
when moving points that define arcs or circles. Small movements can sometimes lead to large changes in the curve
definition.
Modify, Move By, Point; Modify, Move By, Surface; Modify, Move By, Solid
3.6.2.4 Modify, Rotate To Menu
The commands on this menu rotate selected entities. Unlike the Modify, Move To commands, these commands treat
the selected entities as a rigid body. All of them are rotated by the same angle.
The Modify, Rotate To commands require four dialog boxes. First, the standard entity selection dialog box is dis-
played. You can select all of the entities that you want to rotate. Then, the standard vector definition dialog box
defines the axis of rotation. Only the location of the base and the direction of this vector are important. The length
is not used. Finally, the standard coordinate definition dialog box is displayed twice. The first time, you must define
the coordinates of the starting point of the rotation. The second time, you must define the ending point of the rota-
tion. Using these coordinates, and the axis of rotation, FEMAP will determine the rotation angle.
Modify, Rotate To, Coord Sys...
... just like the Modify, Move commands, will rotate all selected coordinate systems. Points and other coordinate
systems that reference a selected system are also moved as a rigid body. Their movement is based on the motion of
their definition coordinate systems. This can be very powerful if your model is constructed with multi-level coordi-
nate systems. For more information, see Section 3.6.2.4, "Modify, Rotate To Menu".
Modify, Rotate To Point, Curve, Surface, Volume, Solid...
... rotates selected geometry, and all other geometry that references them, around the specified vector. For more
information, see Section 3.6.2.4, "Modify, Rotate To Menu".
Modify, Rotate To, Point; Modify, Rotate To, Surface; Modify, Rotate To, Solid
3.6.2.5 Modify, Rotate By Menu
These commands are similar to the commands on the Modify, Rotate To menu but you must specify a rotation angle
instead of locations. You can also specify an optional Translation Distance with these commands. By combining
both rotation about, and translation along the axis of rotation, you can move entities along a screw-thread or helix
shaped path.
Axis of rotation
Rotate from here
Rotate to here
Modify, Align Menu 3-71
Simply select the entities, chose a vector, and define the Rotation Angle and the Translation Distance.
The selected entities will be rotated (following right-hand rule conventions) around the axis of rotation by the spec-
ified angle. Simultaneously, they will be translated, along the same vector, by the specified distance. The actual
length of the vector is not used. If you specify a zero rotation angle, these commands will simply translate along the
vector - much like the Modify, Move By commands.
Modify, Rotate By, Coord Sys...
... just like the Modify, Rotate To commands, will rotate all of the selected coordinate systems. Points or other coor-
dinate systems that reference a selected system are also moved as a rigid body. Their movement is based on the
transformation of the selected coordinate systems. This can be very powerful if your model is constructed with
multi-level coordinate systems. For more information, see Section 3.6.2.5, "Modify, Rotate By Menu".
Modify, Rotate By Point, Curve, Surface, Volume, Solid...
... rotates the selected points, and all geometry that references them, around the specified vector. For more informa-
tion, see Section 3.6.2.5, "Modify, Rotate By Menu"
When you rotate points that are connected to curves, those curves will rotate also. If you only select some of the
points which are attached to a curve, the shape and size of the curve will probably change. Be especially careful
when rotating points that define arcs or circles. Small movements can often lead to large changes in the curve defi-
nition.
Modify, Rotate By, Point; Modify, Rotate By, Surface; Modify, Rotate By, Solid
3.6.2.6 Modify, Align Menu
These commands combine the capabilities of the Modify, Move and Rotate commands to provide a simple way of
aligning portions of your model. Only three dialog boxes are necessary.
First, you select the entities that you want to align using the standard entity selection dialog box. Next you need to
specify two vectors using the vector definition dialog boxes. The first vector defines the original position and orien-
tation that will be aligned. The second vector defines new or desired position and orientation. FEMAP will first
move the entities that you selected from the origin of the first vector to the origin of the second vector. Then,
FEMAP will rotate the entities to the new orientation. This is accomplished by a rotation based on the angle
between the vectors.
Axis of rotation
Align these elements From this vector
To this vector,
along these other
elements
Aligned elements
3-72 Geometry
If you simply want to use this command as an alternate method of rotation, make sure both vectors have the same
origin. If you do not, the entities will be translated before they are rotated
Modify, Align by CSys...
... is just like the Move and Rotate commands. It will align all of the coordinate systems that you select, plus the
entities that are defined relative to those systems. No option is available to skip alignment of the referencing enti-
ties.
Modify, Align Point, Curve, Surface, Volume, Solid...
... aligns the selected geometry, and all geometry that references them, using the two vectors. For more information,
see Section 3.6.2.6, "Modify, Align Menu".
3.6.2.7 Modify, Scale Menu
These commands are used to change the size of your model. You specify a relative scaling factor and a point to
scale around. FEMAP will adjust the selected coordinates appropriately. Like other modification commands, enti-
ties which reference the selected entities which you have selected to scale will also be scaled. Coordinate systems
cannot be scaled.
The first dialog box used by these commands is the standard entity selection dialog. You must select all of the enti-
ties that you wish to scale. After you press OK, FEMAP will display the standard coordinate definition dialog box.
FEMAP will scale your model relative to these base coordinates. The equation used for the scaling is:
Finally, FEMAP displays the Scale dialog box which requires input of a coordinate system as well as scale factors.
You can specify three different scale factors, one for each coordinate direction. For any coordinate direction that
you do not want to scale, you must use a scale factor of 1.0. Scale factors that are larger than 1.0 increase the phys-
ical size of your model. Scale factors smaller than 1.0 decrease its size. You can use a negative scale factor to
reflect the entities about the base location. Similarly, a scale factor of 0.0, will move all entities to the base coordi-
nate, just like the Modify, Move To commands
All scaling is done in the coordinate system that you select. The coordinate directions are along the axes of this sys-
tem. If you select a non-rectangular system, you can scale your model radially or tangentially.
3.6.3 Edit/Parameters
The first three commands in the third section of the Modify menu (Edit, Color, and Layer) enable you to change
specific items in the geometry. Each of these commands are described below.
3.6.3.1 Modify, Edit Commands
The commands on the Modify, Edit menu are used to edit or recreate entities in your model. These commands are
typically used when you need to perform modifications to a single or a few entities. You will be prompted for input
for each entity selected. Therefore, to use this command to modify hundreds of entities, can be quite time consum-
ing. For these type of gross changes to the model, please see the other Modify commands in this section of the Mod-
ify menu (Color, Layer, Update Elements and Update Other commands). For geometry, this command can only be
used to modify points and surface boundaries (and coordinate systems).
Each command first asks you to select the entities you wish to edit. As always, the standard entity selection dialog
box is used. Following your selections, FEMAP simply displays the same dialog box (or boxes) used by the related
command in the Geometry menu which you used to originally create the entities. In this case however, all of the
X { }
New
X { }
Old
X { }
Base
X { }
Old
( ) X { }
Scal eFact or
( ) + =
Original Model
After Scale Factor of 2.0
in Horizontal Direction Only
Modify, Color Commands 3-73
data fields default to the current values for the selected entities. For example, if you choose Edit Point and then
select points 1, 3 and 5, three additional dialog boxes will be displayed, one at a time. The first dialog box will dis-
play the coordinates of point 1. You can change them, or just press OK to accept the current values. Then dialog
boxes for points 3 and 5 will be displayed. If you press Cancel at any time, you will immediately return to the
FEMAP menu. Any entities that you had previously changed (and pressed OK) will still be changed.
3.6.3.2 Modify, Color Commands
The commands on this submenu are used to modify the color of one or more selected entities of a specific type. All
of these commands work in a similar fashion. Each of these commands uses the standard entity selection dialog box
to select the entities to be modified. Then the standard Color Palette dialog box is displayed. You can pick a color,
which will be applied to all of the entities that you selected. The default color, will be the current color of the
selected entity with the minimum ID.
For more information on the Color Palette, see Section 4.3.5, "Color Palette" of the FEMAP User Guide.
You can also use the Modify, Edit commands to change colors, but these commands will be much quicker if you are
changing multiple entities to the same color.
Modify, Color, Point; Modify, Color, Curve; Modify, Color, Surface
Modify, Color, Solid; Modify, Color, Coord Sys
3.6.3.3 Modify, Layer Commands
The commands on this submenu are used to modify the layer of one or more selected entities of a specific type.
These commands are very much like those on the Modify, Color menu. First, you select the entities you want to
modify using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then, instead of selecting from the Color Palette, FEMAP
will prompt you to choose a new layer number from the list of available layers. All of the selected entities will be
modified to the specified layer.
Again, Modify, Edit can be used to change layers, but this command is faster for multiple entities.
Modify, Layer, Point; Modify, Layer, Curve; Modify, Layer, Surface
Modify, Layer, Solid; Modify, Layer, Coord Sys
3.6.3.4 Modify, Renumber Menu
The commands on this submenu are used to renumber
the IDs of one or more selected geometry (points, curves,
surfaces, volumes and solids).
Each of these commands uses the standard entity selec-
tion dialog box to select the entities to be renumbered.
After you press OK, the Renumber To dialog box is dis-
played. You select a new Starting ID and Increment. The
first entity to be renumbered is changed to the starting
ID. The increment is then added to the starting ID before
each subsequent entity is renumbered. Refer to Section
4.7.2.5, "Modify, Renumber Menu" for more informa-
tion.
3-74 Geometry
Modify, Renumber, Point; Modify, Renumber, Curve; Modify, Renumber, Surface
Modify, Renumber, Solid; Modify, Renumber, Coord Sys
3.6.4 Advanced Updates - Modify, Update Other Commands
The commands on this menu are used to update parameters which are referenced by one or more selected entities.
Unlike the commands on the Modify, Color and Modify, Layer menus, the parameters that are updated by these
commands are only applicable to one entity type.
All of these commands work in a similar fashion, but since the parameters that they update vary, each command is
documented in its own section.
3.6.4.1 Modify, Update Other, Point Definition CSys...
... works just like Modify, Update CSys, Definition CSys, except that you select points to update instead of coordi-
nate Systems. If you want to create a new coordinate system while using this command, simply click the Coordi-
nate System Icon Button in the Select Coordinate System... dialog box.
3.6.4.2 Modify, Update Other, BSpline Order...
... is used to change the order of B-Spline curves. B-Spline curves created in FEMAP will automatically default to
an order of 3. Higher order splines can provide some shape smoothing, but may also cause sharp fluctuations for
splines that have been driven through particular points. This command should be used with some care in these cir-
cumstances. The maximum order for any B-Spline is either the number of points (a mathematical limit) or ten (a
FEMAP limit), whichever is smaller.
3.6.4.3 Modify, Update Other, BSpline Knots...
... is used to insert control points on the selected B-Splines. This command provides you with a powerful tool to
modify the curvature and smoothness of a particular curve by inserting control points at precise locations. You sim-
ply select the curve(s) to update and then enter the location of the Knot (control point).
3.6.4.4 Modify, Update Other, Reverse Curve...
... enables you to reverse the direction of a curve. This command cannot be used on any curves that are referenced
by surfaces, therefore no solid curves can be reversed. This option can be useful when creating curves to model
entities that require a certain direction of the curves (for example, curves for an ABAQUS rigid surface). The only
input to this command is the curves to reverse.
3.6.4.5 Modify, Update Other, Nonmergeable Curve...
... allows you to designate curves as non-mergeable, meaning the curves will not be merged into a surface or
solid and deleted during a clean-up operation. Clean-up operations will often occur as a part of stitching a solid,
performing certain solid boolean operations, or using the Geometry, Solid, Cleanup command. This command can
also be used to move split-points on fully circular curves to more desirable positions. In order for this to be effec-
tive, manipulate the curves until the break points are positioned, designate the curves as non-mergeable, then use
the stitch, boolean, or clean-up commands to have the new positions be used for split lines in a feature (i.e. a hole).
3.6.4.6 Modify Update Other, Boundary on Surface...
... is used to map a boundary surface, which is typically planar, onto a surface. This command enables you to pro-
vide curvature to any boundary surface. When you select this command, you will be asked if it is OK to map onto a
surface. If you say Yes, you must then select the surface and the boundary will be mapped to it. If you say No, any
connections to a surface which the boundary had previously are removed. Therefore, you can use this command to
either attach a boundary surface to a surface, or remove a connection.
3.6.4.7 Modify, Update Other, Surface Divisions...
... is used to update the number of surface divisions that will be displayed for selected surfaces. To begin, you sim-
ply select the surfaces that you want to update, using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then you simply
enter the number of divisions that you want to display in each parametric direction. The defaults will be the existing
Modify, Update Other, Surface Normal... 3-75
values for the surface that you selected with the minimum ID. For more information about surface divisions, see
Section 3.3, "Creating Surfaces".
3.6.4.8 Modify, Update Other, Surface Normal...
... is used to reverse the normal of sheet solids. To begin, you simply select the sheet solid where you want to
reverse the normal, using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then FEMAP will reverse the surface normal
without further user input. This command works on solid surfaces only.
3.7 Deleting Geometry
The commands on the Delete, Geometry menu are all used to delete entities. All commands will delete entities
from your model. Since most of the commands on this menu work in a very similar fashion, the documentation for
the entire menu is given in this section.
Deleting From Your Model
If you want to delete any type of entity in your model, all you need to do is select the appropriate command (based
on the entity type) from this menu. The standard entity selection dialog box will then be displayed to let you select
the entities you wish to delete. When you complete your selection, and press OK, you will be asked to confirm that
you really want to delete the entities. This final question will also let you know how many entities have been
selected. Answering Ye, will delete the entities. Choosing No will simply cancel the command.
You may also use the Delete, All or Delete, Geometry All command to remove all geometry from the model. When
you choose this command, FEMAP will ask you to confirm that you really want to delete all geometry (and analy-
sis model if you select Delete All). If you answer Yes, all geometry will be removed from the model. If you answer
No, the command is canceled. The Delete, Geometry All command is useful for removing geometry from a meshed
model when it is no longer of use (assuming you do not want to constrain or load geometry). No checking is per-
formed to see if any entities are considered non-deletable since all geometry is removed.
Non-Deletable Entities
Sometimes when you try to delete, you will receive a message that a number of non-deletable entities have been
skipped. These entities are skipped because FEMAP protects you from deleting entities which are needed by other
entities in your model. For example, a point is non-deletable if it is connected to one or more curves. Similarly a
curve is non-deletable if it has a load attached to it. To delete these non-deletable entities, you must first delete all
of the entities which reference them.The following table lists the entities that can cause an entity to be non-dele-
table:
Deleting Geometry Icons
Delete, Geometry, Point...; Delete, Geometry, Curve...; Delete, Geometry, Surface...
Delete, Geometry, Solid...; Delete, Model, Coord Sys...
When you are
trying to delete. . .
Could be referenced by. . .
Point Curves, loads, (solids)
Curve Surfaces, loads, (solids)
Surface Solids, volumes, surfaces, curves, loads
Hint: You can use this feature to great advantage in cleaning up a model. For example, if you want to get rid
of all of the unused points, simply choose Delete, Point, and select all points. This may seem danger-
ous, but in fact only those points which are not referenced by any other geometry or loads will be
deleted. If you attempt to delete an entity, and FEMAP says it is non-deletable, and you believe that
there are no connections to it, perform a File, Rebuild. This will check all connections in the model, and
verify whether there are connections to this entity.
3-76 Geometry
After You Delete
When you delete entities from a FEMAP model, the space that they occupied is simply marked as empty and avail-
able for reuse. The model file does not decrease in size. Normally, as long as you are going to create additional
data, this is not a problem since the space will be reused. In some cases however, when you delete a lot of data you
may want to immediately remove that empty space from your model and reduce the size of your model file.
The File, Rebuild command can do just that. Choose the File, Rebuild command, and press Yes to perform a full
rebuild. Then press Yes again to allow FEMAP to compact the model. If you had blocks of empty space, they will
be removed and your model will decrease in size. You should only use this option after you delete large blocks of
data. FEMAP cannot usually compact space if you have only deleted one or two scattered entities, and the savings
will not be worth the time it takes to perform the command.
4. Finite Element Modeling
The Model menu provides the basic commands for creating finite element information in your model. It also lets
you set up an analysis case for certain solvers.
This topic describes how to use the sub-menus and commands under the Model menu. It includes these sections:
Section 4.1, "Creating Coordinate Systems" (Coordinate systems are separated from the finite element informa-
tion in this structure because they are applicable for both geometry and finite element information.)
Section 4.2, "Creating Finite Element Entities"
Section 4.3, "Creating Loads And Constraints"
Section 4.4, "Creating Connections and Regions"
Section 4.5, "Using Optimization Analysis"
Section 4.6, "Working with Functions"
Section 4.7, "Modifying FEA Entities"
Section 4.8, "Deleting FEA Entities"
Section 4.9, "Preparing for Analysis"
For information on the Model, Output sub-menu, see Section 8.5, "Output Manipulation".
4.1 Creating Coordinate Systems
Coordinate systems are applicable for both finite element information and geometry. In general, coordinate systems
can greatly simplify input to your model. They are also a convenient way to update the position of geometry and
finite elements. If you use the Modify, Move commands to move coordinate systems, all geometry defined in that
coordinate system will move with it - even other coordinate systems. In this manner, you can create a hierarchy of
coordinate systems which greatly simplify movement of geometry. The methods of creating coordinate systems are
explained below.
4.1.1 Model, Coord Sys...
... allows you to define coordinate systems for coordinate, vector or plane entry or to align nodal degrees of free-
dom or material axes. Coordinate Systems 0 (Global Rectangular), 1 (Global Cylindrical), and 2 (Global Spherical)
are always defined. You can create any additional coordinate systems that you need for your model with this com-
mand.
When you choose this command you will see the Define Coordinate System dialog box, which allows you to define
numerous parameters which determine the type of coordinate system to be created.
ID, Title, Color/Palette and Layer
These options set parameters for the coordinate system to be created. Titles can be up to 79 characters long.
Ref CSys
The coordinate system you create will be defined in this coordinate system. This will also be the default coordinate
system for coordinate or vector definition - although you can change that system when those dialog boxes are dis-
played. The reference coordinate system is utilized to create a hierarchy of coordinate systems which can be used in
later Modify, Move commands.
Type
Determines the type of coordinate system that will be created. Coordinate specification for each of the types is
shown in Section 4.3.2, Coordinate Definition in the FEMAP User Guide.
4.1.1.1 Angles Method of Creating Coordinate Systems...
... allows you to specify coordinates using the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes to define the coordinate
system origin.
The orientation of the coordinate system is then specified by three rotation angles, around the reference coordinate
system directions. All angles are entered in degrees. Rotations about multiple axes are interpreted as a rotation
about the reference coordinate system X-axis, then the rotated Y-axis and finally the rotated Z-axis, as shown here.
4.1.1.2 Workplane Method of Creating a Coordinate System
This method of creating a coordinate system simply creates a coordinate system by placing the X-Y axes at the X-
Y axes of the current workplane. The Z axis is created as the positive normal to the workplane. Since this command
uses the current workplane, no additional input is required.
4.1.1.3 Coordinates Method of Creating a Coordinate System
There are three methods to create a coordinate system using coordi-
nate locations. Each of these methods requires you to define three
sets of coordinates using the standard coordinate definition dialog
boxes. The first set of coordinates defines the coordinate system ori-
gin. The final two sets orient the coordinate system axes. The meth-
ods are titled XY Locate, YZ Locate, and ZX Locate. These names
correspond to the orientation axes that you define. For example, for
XY Locate, you specify coordinates on the X axis and coordinates in
the XY plane. The final axes are calculated from the three locations
that you define.
4.1.1.4 Axes Methods of Creating Coordinate Systems
Just like the Locate methods, the Axes methods require three inputs.
Again you specify coordinates for the origin. Then instead of loca-
tions on the axes, you specify vectors in the direction of the axes,
using the standard vector definition dialog boxes. The methods are
titled XY Axes, YZ Axes, and ZX Axes, which correspond to the ori-
entation axes that you define. Again, just like for XY Locate, for XY
Axes, you specify a vector along the X axis and a vector in the XY
plane.
Hint: Always specify meaningful titles. They are shown
along with the ID in the drop-down list boxes used for
selection throughout FEMAP.
Z
Y
X
y
z
x
x
Z
Y
X
y
z
x
y
Z
Y
X
y
z
x
z
rotate around x then around rotated y
then around doubly rotated z
Z
Y
X
y
z
x
Origin
X Axis
XY Plane
Z
Y
X
y
z
x
X Vector
XY Plane
Creating Finite Element Entities 4-3
4.2 Creating Finite Element Entities
These commands allow creation of finite element entities for your model. There are five commands contained
under this section: Node, Element, Material, Property, and Layup. These commands are grouped together because
four of these entities (all except Layups) are normally required to create a finite element in FEMAP. The relation-
ship between these five entities is described below:
Node - define physical position of element in space (See Section 4.2.1, "Model, Node...")
Element - references nodes and property. (See Section 4.2.2, "Model, Element...")
Material - contains physical parameters of material. (See Section 4.2.3, "Model, Material")
Property - contains physical characteristics and references a material. (See Section 4.2.4, "Model, Property...")
Layup - contains physical characteristics of plies for laminate properties. (See Section 4.2.5, "Model, Layup...")
These commands allow you to create these entities one at a time. Many times it is much easier to use the automatic
meshing tools available under the Mesh menu to generate nodes and elements for the model. In this case, you can
generate your individual properties, materials, and layups with these commands, then use the automatic meshing
tools to create the finite element mesh.
4.2.1 Model, Node...
... allows you to define nodes by entering their coordinates using the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes.
Just like all other coordinate locations, you may use any of the available methods and/or snap modes, along with
keyboard or mouse input to define the location of a node. Even so, this command creates nodes one at a time. Much
more powerful methods are available through the various Generate commands.
Specifying Node Parameters
When you are creating a node, choosing the Parameters command button will display the Node Parameters dialog
box. The use of output coordinate systems and permanent constraints varies substantially between various analysis
programs.
For more information on how these features are supported for your program, see Section 8, "Analysis Program
Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.
Output Coordinate System
Here you can set the output coordinate system for the node. This is the coordinate system in which displacements,
degrees of freedom, offset connections for line elements and constraints are defined.
Increment, Color, Palette, Layer
The Increment is added to the Node ID, which you create to determine the default ID for the next node to be cre-
ated. The Color and Layer options define these parameters for the node to be created.
Superelement ID
The Superelement ID can be set for each node using this field. The Superelement ID is the only method available to
define Superelements for Nastran in FEMAP.
Type
This option is almost always set to Node. You can change this option to Scalar Point or Extra Point for other node
types, but this is not used for most analysis programs.
Permanent Constraints
Permanent constraints, like other constraints are defined relative to the output coordinate system. Unlike con-
straints that can be defined in multiple sets, there is only one group of permanent constraints per node. The six
degrees of freedom which can be constrained are the X, Y and Z translations (TX, TY, TZ) and the X, Y and Z rota-
tions (RX, RY, RZ). The permanent constraints are combined with the constraint sets that you request for analysis.
Note: In general, you can use any convenient method of entering the coordinates or vectors to define coordi-
nate systems. However, you can not enter colinear or coincident coordinates or vectors, since they
would not fully specify the coordinate system orientation.
Ctrl+N
4.2.2 Model, Element...
....displays one of the element creation dialog boxes based on the
active element type. You can set the active element type from any of
the element creation dialog boxes (or any of the property creation
dialog boxes) by choosing the Type button. This will display the Ele-
ment/Property Type dialog box, where you can choose the type of
elements to create.
There are four main element types which often have to do with the
shape or topology of elements
Line Elements (See Section 4.2.2.1, "Line Elements")
Plane Elements (See Section 4.2.2.2, "Plane Elements")
Volume Elements (See Section 4.2.2.3, "Volume Elements")
Other Elements (See Section 4.2.2.4, "Other Elements")
For any of the plane or volume elements, other than Plot Only, you
can choose the Parabolic Elements option to create elements with
nodes at the middle of each edge. For other element types, you can
only create linear elements - nodes at the corners only. For details on
the full FEMAP element library, see Section 6, "Element Reference"
in the FEMAP User Guide.
For further information on how each element type is translated to the
various analysis programs, see Section 7, "Translation Tables for
Analysis Programs" in the FEMAP User Guide. You should review
those sections prior to creating elements. This will ensure that you
choose the correct element types to represent your structure, and ele-
ment types that are supported by your analysis program.
Element Material Orientation
For planar and axisymmetric elements, you can also define an ele-
ment material orientation. Pressing this button will display an
additional dialog box that lets you set the material orientation
direction or angle for all elements that are created until you
change to a different orientation.
This includes elements that are created using the various genera-
tion techniques. For more information, see Section 4.7.3.13,
"Modify, Update Elements, Material Angle...". Proper specifica-
tion of material angles is extremely important if you are using
nonisotropic materials.
.
.
Ctrl+E
Model, Element... 4-5
Formulation
If you are exporting to NASTRAN, ABAQUS, LS-DYNA3D, or
MARC, you should also select the element formulation. These pro-
grams have several different subtypes, or formulations, for the same
basic element. When you select Formulation..., the Element Formu-
lation dialog box will appear. You will be able to set options for
NASTRAN,LS-DYNA3D, ABAQUS, and MARC.
The inputs to the dialog box will be slightly different based upon the
current element type, but all element types will have separate inputs
for NASTRAN, DYNA and ABAQUS/MARC. The element formu-
lation for LS-DYNA3D is exported on the *SECTION cards as part
of the property definition, while most options for ABAQUS/MARC
change the name/number of the element.
Each element type has a different formulation which is stored as a
global variable. Once the formulation is set, all elements of that type
created from that point on will have that formulation. To change to a
different formulation for future meshes, simply enter the element
formulation dialog box with the appropriate element type active, and
select from the available options
.
.
.
.
Common Features of All Element Dialog Boxes
There are quite a few different dialog boxes used for creating the various element types in FEMAP. The major dif-
ference between them is the changing number of nodes required to define the various element types. Most other
features are identical. Near the top of each dialog box, you will notice a group of controls which are used to set var-
ious parameters for the element to be created. The Type button, used to choose a new element type can be found
here also.
ID, Color/Palette and Layer:
These options set parameters for the element to be created. Every time you create an element, the default ID will be
automatically incremented.
Property:
This drop-down list allows you to choose the property to be referenced by the element. A few element types (plot,
rigid, etc.) do not require a property, but most do. For your reference, all properties that are defined in your model
will be shown in the list. You must choose one which is of the same type as the element that you are creating. You
can make your choice by typing an ID, choosing from the list, or by graphically selecting an existing element
which references the property that you want. If you do not specify a property (leave the option blank or 0), when
you press OK, you will be given a chance to automatically create a new property. You can also create a new prop-
Note: If you do not set the formulation before meshing, or would like to change the formulation, you can
use the Modify, Update Elements, Formulation command to change the formulation of a few ele-
ments, or an entire mesh. To determine which formulation is best for your analysis, consult your
analysis program documentation. For instance, the hybrid option in ABAQUS and MARC is typi-
cally used for large elastic (hyperelastic) materials. For more information on the different available
formulations, see Section 6, "Element Reference" in the FEMAP User Guide. Each element has a
section on their formulations.
erty by click the Property icon button next to the Property drop-down list. This is the same as using the Model,
Property command, except that the Define Element dialog box is still visible and the resulting property ID will
automatically be entered into the list.
Selecting Nodes for your Elements
No matter what element type you use, you will see text boxes which allow you to select the nodes to define the ele-
ment. The number of these boxes corresponds to the number of nodes required for the type of element which you
are creating. You can choose nodes either by typing an ID or by selecting a node from any graphics window with
the cursor. Alternatively, you can leave one or more of the node IDs blank (or 0). When you press OK, you will be
given a chance to automatically create new nodes for each of the blank entries. Using this technique, you can effec-
tively create elements using specific coordinates, without having to first create nodes.
The order of the text boxes in the dialog box matches the order of nodes shown for the various FEMAP element
types. You should try to specify the nodes in their proper sequence. For example, for plane elements, the required
nodes proceed either clockwise or counter-clockwise around the corners of the element (followed by the midside
nodes for parabolic elements). You should enter the nodes in this order. Every time you create an element however,
FEMAP checks its shape. If you do specify the nodes in a different order, FEMAP will attempt to reorder them so
that they result in the shape you were trying to create. This technique can untwist planar elements, and switch faces
on solid elements. You will receive a warning if FEMAP had to change the order.
Some element types require you to specify a shape, in addition to the nodes. For plane elements, you must choose
either a triangular or quadrilateral shape. For volume elements, your choices are a brick, wedge or tetrahedron. As
you change the shape, you will see the number of required nodes change also. Because of the automatic node cre-
ation feature described above, you can not define a triangle with the shape set to quadrilateral and then only enter-
ing three nodes. If you try this, FEMAP will ask you to create the fourth node.
Parabolic plate and solid elements allow you to pick nodes at the midsides of each element edge in addition to the
corner nodes. You can however skip the midside nodes by leaving them as blank or 0. For this reason, the automatic
node creation feature can only be used with the corner nodes of parabolic elements, not with the midside nodes.
4.2.2.1 Line Elements
All line element types (Rod, Bar, Tube, Link, Beam, Spring, DOF Spring, Curved Beam, Gap, and Plot) connect
two node points. Proper choice of the type depends upon the structural behavior that you want to represent. For all
of these elements, however, you will see one of two possible dialog boxes. The first, and simplest, creates all ele-
ments except the bar, beam, and curved beam. In addition to the standard parameters, it just requires two nodes to
define the element.
For the bar, beam, and curved beam however, you will see a more complex dialog box. This dialog also requires
two nodes, but lets you define element offsets, orientation and releases.
Note: The number of inputs in the Define SPRING/DAMPER Element dialog box changes depending on
the Formulation currently set for spring/damper elements. When the Formulation is set to
0..Default, the dialog box simply asks for two nodes. When the Formulation is set to 1..CBUSH,
there are additional inputs for Orientation and Offsets.
Plane Elements 4-7
Offsets:
Offsets are used to move the end of the element a specified distance
from the node. The End A and End B command buttons will display
the standard vector definition dialog boxes to let you define the off-
set at each end of the element. Both the magnitude and direction of
this vector are used to define the offset. If the element has a constant
offset at both ends, you can simply define the offset at End A, then
press End B=End A to copy the offset to End B. If you have already
defined offsets, and want to delete them, press No Offsets. When off-
sets have been defined, the titles of the End A and End B buttons will
change to End A... (On) and End B... (On) to reflect the status. By
default, after you define an element with offsets, the next element
will use the same offsets. You can turn them off with No Offsets.
Checking the Use Reference Point box will offset the nodes at both
ends of the element to the location of the specified Reference Point
selected in the Beam Property - Cross Section Definition dialog box.
Orientation:
Each of these element types requires that you orient the cross section of the element. The element X axis is always
along the length of the element (between the nodes). The orientation defines the Y and Z axes. FEMAP provides
two methods of orientation. You can either specify another node or a vector. If you specify an Orientation Node, the
element XY plane will be defined by the element X axis and the vector from the first element node to this orienta-
tion (or third) node. If you specify a vector orientation, that vector, along with the element X axis will define the
XY plane. You can enter the orientation node directly into the dialog box, or choose the Vector Orient command
button to orient using a vector. The standard vector definition dialog boxes are used. If you attempt to specify both
a vector and an orientation node, only the orientation node will be recognized.
When you define a vector, FEMAP will update the button title to Vector Orient... (On) to reflect the status. The
default orientation is the same as the orientation that you specified on the last element that you created.
Releases:
In some cases you do not want an element to be structurally connected to all six degrees of freedom at each node.
You can choose the Releases command button to specify the degrees of freedom that you do not want to connect.
By default, all degrees of freedom are connected. The Element Releases dialog box lets you choose the transla-
tional (TX,TY,TZ) and rotational (RX,RY,RZ) degrees of freedom to release at each end of the element. When you
specify releases, FEMAP changes the button title to Releases... (123456/123456), or some variation of those num-
bers. The numbers one through six correspond to the six elemental degrees of freedom (TX, TY,..., RZ). The num-
bers before the slash represent the releases on the first end of the element. The numbers after the slash represent the
second end. Just like offsets and orientations, FEMAP remembers the releases that you define and uses them as the
defaults for your next element.
4.2.2.2 Plane Elements
Standard Plane elements are created using one of two dialog boxes depending on whether you are creating linear or
parabolic elements. The only difference between these two boxes is the addition of midside nodes for the parabolic
elements.
For either of these dialog boxes you must choose either a triangular or quadrilateral shape. As you choose the
shape, the number of required nodes will also change. For parabolic plate elements, midside nodes can be speci-
fied, but they can also be blank. This feature allows elimination of some elemental degrees of freedom and can be
used to join linear and parabolic elements, or for transitioning between varying mesh densities. Since midside
nodes are not required and the automatic node creation feature only works for required nodes, you must specify an
existing node or it will be left blank.
B
A
2
Offset B
Plane 1 (XY)
Cz
Third Node, or
Cy
1
Offset A
Ye
Xe
Plane 2 (XZ)
Ze
Bar / Beam Elements
Orientation Vector
If the plane element you are creating is a Axisymmetric Shell then the dialog boxes will be more like the line ele-
ment.
Axisymmetric Shells are defined as lines with two nodes for linear and a third midside node for a parabolic type.
Offsets can also be defined for the shells.
4.2.2.3 Volume Elements
Just like plane elements, volume elements use one of two dialog boxes depending on whether you are creating lin-
ear or parabolic elements.
Also, just like plane elements, you must specify a shape (Brick, Wedge, Tetra) and parabolic midside nodes can be
skipped.
4.2.2.4 Other Elements
Masses
The mass and mass matrix element types require no input other than a single node to locate the element.
Stiffness Matrix
Stiffness matrix elements connect two nodes and use the same dialog box described above for the simpler line ele-
ments.
Rigid and Interpolation
Rigid elements are different than the other types. They connect one independent node to a variable number of
dependent nodes. You must always specify at least the independent node and one dependent node, but all other
dependent nodes are optional. In addition, rigid elements can be used as interpolation elements (for those programs
that support interpolation elements) by specifying an optional interpolation factor and dependent degrees of free-
dom.
Other Elements 4-9
In addition to the nodes, you must specify one or more degrees of freedom to be rigidly connected between the
independent and dependent nodes. You may specify different degrees of freedom for each dependent node, as well
as different factors. You simply select the interpolation degrees of freedom (and factor if applicable) you want for a
node or nodes, press the Nodes... button, and select the appropriate nodes. You may do this as often as required to
define the connections to the dependent nodes.
Use the Delete button to remove an entry in the list, or the Reset button to remove the entire list. When you high-
light a node in the list, it will highlight in the graphics window, based on the current settings of the Window, Show
Entities command. If you need to connect dependent nodes to different degrees of freedom on the reference node
however, you must use multiple elements.
A coefficient of thermal expansion for any Rigid element can either be entered directly into the Coefficient field
or copied from a defined material using the Material... button in this dialog box. Currently, a CTE on the Rigid ele-
ment is only supported for NX Nastran and MSC/MD Nastran.
When defining Rigid elements for NASTRAN you have a two formulations available. Using the RSPLINE formu-
lation for NASTRAN will display the following dialog box which allows you to pick multiple dependent and inde-
pendent nodes.
Note: If you select the interpolation factor check box, you will be creating an interpolation element (RBE3 for
Nastran and ANSYS), otherwise you are creating a rigid element (RBE2 for Nastran, CERIG or CP for
ANSYS). You can only change the status of this option when no dependent nodes are selected.
Note: In FEMAP, the use of the CTE for rigid elements is OFF by default in all Analysis Types. In order for
the CTE to be used during an analysis, you must turn on (check) the Rigid Element Thermal Expan-
sion option in the Plate, Beam, and Rigid Options section of the NASTRAN Bulk Data Options dia-
log box. This dialog box can be reached by creating an Analysis Set for NX Nastran or MSC Nastran
using the Model, Analysis command. See Section 8.7.1.3, "Bulk Data Options" for more information.
First term is Independent
Last term is Independent
Dependent terms
The RSPLINE is defined by selecting the nodes in the order they appear along the interface of the two regions
being connected. A term of the RSPLINE is created by first selecting the type of term to be added (Dependent or
Independent) then if a dependent term is being created then select the degrees of freedom which you would like to
include.
A term can be added dynamically to the list by placing the cursor in the Node field then simply picking the appro-
priate node.
Multiple terms of the same type and dof can be defined by first selecting the appropriate options and pressing the
Multiple button.
The First and Last term in the list must be independent and FEMAP will present a error until this requirement is
satisfied.
Independent terms are graphically shown as a filled in square and dependant terms are shown as open squares.
Slide Lines
Slide elements are used to define contact and sliding conditions between nodes on surfaces. The master and slave
nodes are selected by choosing the appropriate button. The Standard Entity Selection box will appear to choose
nodes. Once nodes have been chosen, the button for the chosen nodes will contain (on). Otherwise, only the head-
ings Master Nodes... and Slave Nodes... appear. A node may not be chosen as both a master and a slave.
You may select as many master and slave nodes as you need, but the order that you select them defines the order
that they will be included into the element. Slide lines should have their master and slave nodes selected in reverse
order compared to each other. If you select them in the same order, you will be asked whether you want to automat-
ically reverse the order of the slave selection.
Weld
This element allows you to specify a weld connector element (CWELD) for use with NX Nastran and MSC Nas-
tran and is defined using the WELD Element dialog box.
Weld Types
There are several different Weld Types to choose from:
Elem to Elem (ELEMID) - Weld is defined from shell element to shell element and a Weld Location must be
defined manually using either the Projection or Axis Define methods (see Weld Location Definition Methods
later in this section for more information)
Elem to Elem Vertex (ELEMID) - Weld is defined from shell element to a single vertex of another shell ele-
ment (node on the element) and a Weld Location will be normal to the selected element vertex (node).
Other Elements 4-11
Elem Vertex to Elem Vertex (ALIGN) - Weld is defined from a single vertex of a shell element (node on an
element) to the single vertex of another shell element and the Weld Location will be between the two selected
element vertices (nodes).
Patch to Patch (ELPAT - MSC Nastran Only) - Weld is defined in the same manner as Element to Element
(from shell element to shell element and a Weld Location must be defined manually using either the Projection
or Axis Define methods). The difference is MSC Nastran will determine if the diameter of the weld overlaps
onto additional elements, based on the welds location, then automatically connect the nodes on those additional
elements to the weld.
Prop to Prop (PARTPAT - MSC Nastran Only) - Weld is defined from all elements of one shell property to all
elements of another shell property and a Weld Location must be defined manually using either the Projection or
Axis Define methods.
Nodes to Nodes (GRIDID) - Weld is defined from a number of nodes (8 Maximum) on shell elements to a
number of nodes (8 Maximum) on shell elements and the Weld Location must be defined manually using either
the Projection or Axis Define methods
Nodes to Elem Vertex (GRIDID) - Weld is defined from a number of nodes (8 Maximum) on shell elements to
a node on shell element and the Weld Location will be normal to the selected element vertex (node).
Weld Location Definition Methods
Note: Take care when selecting the nodes when using Weld Types 5..Nodes to Nodes and 6..Nodes to
Elem Vertex. The nodes must be chosen as you would choose nodes when creating a shell element (i.e.
clockwise or counter-clockwise from the first node to the 3rd or 4th node). If you are using 6 (triangle)
or 8 nodes (quad) to define your patch, you must first select the 3 or 4 corner nodes then select the
mid-side nodes starting with the node between the first selected corner node and the second selected
corner node and so on. Not ordering the nodes properly will likely cause an error in NX Nastran.
Using the Projection Method
Using the Axis Method
Weld Location Methods
A Weld Location must be defined manually for Elem to Elem, Patch to Patch, and Nodes to Nodes. There are two
different Weld location Definition Methods to choose from:
Projection - Weld Location is defined by a single node and sometimes a defined vector direction. The vector
from the node along the vector direction must pass through both element or nodal patches in order for the weld
to function properly.
Axis - Weld Location is defined using 2 nodes to represent the positions and direction. Both nodes must fall
within the boundaries of the element or nodal patches for the weld to function properly.
4.2.3 Model, Material
FEMAP supports eight types of materials:
Isotropic (See Section 4.2.3.1, "Isotropic Materials...")
2-D and 3-D Orthotropic (See Section 4.2.3.2, "Orthotropic Material Formu-
lation"
2-D and 3-D Anisotropic (See Section 4.2.3.3, "2D and 3D Anisotropic Mate-
rials...")
Hyperelastic - Mooney-Rivlin/Polynomial form (See Section 4.2.3.4, "Hyper-
elastic Materials...")
Fluid (See Section 4.2.3.5, "Fluid Materials...")
Other Types (See Section 4.2.3.6, "Other Types...")
These material formulations allow you to simulate different material character-
istics. FEMAP allows any element/property type to reference any of the avail-
able material types. However, if you plan to use any type but Isotropic, see
Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide. This topic describes how each type is trans-
lated to your analysis program.
In general, the 2D material types should only be used by plane (and axisymmetric) elements and the 3D formula-
tions should only be used by solid elements. For some analysis programs, however, the 3D formulations are used to
add transverse properties to plate elements. If you do reference a material type that is not supported by the transla-
tor, FEMAP will convert it to a supported type (after giving you a warning) but the converted type might not cor-
rectly represent the material characteristics that you intended.
Common Features of All Material Dialog Boxes.
Even though the material definition dialog boxes are quite different from each other, there are numerous features
that appear in all of them. Near the top of each box you will see controls which allow you to define the ID, Title,
Color and Layer for the material. The ID will automatically increment after each material you create. The ID can
not match the ID of any other existing material. You should always specify a meaningful title (up to 79 characters)
because it will help you to identify the material later in drop-down lists throughout FEMAP. The Type button is
also found near the top of dialog box and lets you choose the material type that you want to create. There is also a
Function icon button at the bottom of the dialog which can be used to conveniently create a new Function.
Copying Materials
If you need to create a material that is similar to another in your model, you do not have to enter all of the material
values manually. Pressing the Copy button will display a list of all existing materials. When you choose a material
from the list, the material values will be copied from that material and displayed in the current material creation
dialog box. You can then modify those values in any way you want, or even change your mind and copy a different
material, before pressing OK to create the new material.
If you copy a material of one type into a material of a different type, FEMAP automatically converts the material to
the new type. The material constants are converted to a form which represents the material which you copied. For
example, copying an isotropic material to a 3D orthotropic material will result in stiffness values which are identi-
cal in all three directions, that is isotropic. If you copy the other direction, 3D orthotropic to isotropic, there is no
way to represent the orthotropic nature of the material and that information will be lost. You should review care-
fully any materials which you copy between different types.
Isotropic Materials... 4-13
Working with Material Libraries
Material libraries allow you to create standard materials that you can use over and over again in many different
models. When you press Save, the current material is added to the material library file. Pressing Load will display a
list of the materials in the library and let you choose one to be loaded into the material creation dialog box. Just like
Copy, you can then modify the values before pressing OK to create the material. Also, just like Copy, when you
load a material of a different type it is automatically converted. The material ID, Color, Layer and Coordinate Sys-
tem are not saved in the library, nor updated when a material is loaded from the library.
4.2.3.1 Isotropic Materials...
... are the simplest and
most widely used
material type. They
can be used for any
element type. Materi-
als of this type exhibit
constant properties in
all directions. There-
fore all properties
(stiffness, thermal,
stress limits...) are
specified with a single
value, which is direc-
tionless.
Properties that are not
required for your anal-
ysis may be left blank
(or 0.) For example,
there is no need to
specify any of the ther-
mal properties if you
do not plan to do a
thermal analysis. Typi-
cally, you can always
leave one of the three
stiffness parameters
(E, G, nu) blank also.
FEMAP will maintain
its value as zero, but most analysis programs recognize this situation and automatically calculate the third parame-
ter from an isotropic formulation:
4.2.3.2 Orthotropic Material Formulation
Care must be taken when specifying structural properties for orthotropic materials. Various analysis programs use
different conventions regarding how they refer to the properties, and which properties they require. FEMAP uses
the following stress-strain relationship:
G
E
2 1 + ( )
-------------------------- - =
where the bold constants in the shaded area are the ones that you enter. During translation, these terms are con-
verted to the other ones, if required by the analysis program.
2D and 3D Orthotropic Materials...
... define different, in-plane, material characteristics in 2 or 3 primary directions, respectively. These materials are
typically used by planar or axisymmetric elements.
The Limit Stress/Strain section allows you to specify limits for tension and compression as well as a shear limit
value. Either Stress Limits or Strain Limits may be input (for 2-D only). These values are typically used in conjunc-
tion with the laminate property for failure calculations.
12
23
13
)

`

1
E
1
------
21
E
2
-----------
31
E
3
----------- 0 0 0
12
E
1
-----------
1
E
2
------
32
E
3
----------- 0 0 0
13
E
1
-----------
23
E
2
-----------
1
E
3
------ 0 0 0
0 0 0
1
G
12
--------- 0 0
0 0 0 0
1
G
23
--------- 0
0 0 0 0 0
1
G
13
---------
12
23
13
)

`

=
2D and 3D Anisotropic Materials... 4-15
4.2.3.3 2D and 3D Anisotropic Materials...
...are a more general form of the 2-D and 3-D orthotropic materials. In this case, material parameters are specified
as a general 3 x 3 matrix (2-D), or 6 x 6 (3-D) matrix.
4.2.3.4 Hyperelastic Materials...
...define properties for materials subject to large displacement, both translational and rotational, such as rubber.
You can input both the Distortional and Volumetric Deformation Constants and the Strain Energy Polynomial
Order, or input stress/strain test data in the Experimental Data Functions area to allow the analysis program to cal-
culate these constants. These data functions must be defined as vs. stress type FEMAP functions with stress as the
X value and strain as the dependent Y value.
4.2.3.5 Fluid Materials...
... defines material properties for fluids, including liquids and gases. This material type is not normally used in a
structural analysis, but is used in heat transfer and flow analyses.
The properties on the fluid material type are similar to the heat transfer properties on other material types, however
additional fluid specific properties are also available.
4.2.3.6 Other Types...
... defines material properties that do not fall directly under the previous categories. These materials are unique in
that the dialog box wording can be modified. When you select this option, you will see the above dialog box. The
inputs to the dialog box will change based upon the material type that you choose. The values are then stored with
that material type in the FEMAP database. The actual dialog box contents are read from a library file which con-
tains the appropriate information for each material, including type of input, storage area, limits (if any), and dialog
box text. This library file can be set in File, Preferences, Libraries. A default library file with the supported materi-
als is shipped with FEMAP.
Input can include real numbers, integers, and functions. They may also have input limits associated with them.
Function values are designated by the 0..None value when first entering a new material. You will need to input an
existing function ID for these fields (or leave it at None). Simply press Ctrl+F to see a list of available functions
when in the field.
Note: Many solvers do not support hyperelastic materials and those that do have restrictions. Please investi-
gate the applicability/rules of hyperelastic materials in the analysis program that they plan to utilize.
Note: When entering the hyperelastic material constants, Di, be careful. They are translated directly for Nas-
tran and ANSYS, but for ABAQUS the values written are 1 / Di.
Other Types... 4-17
The hyperelastic materials for NX Nastran Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (SOL 601 and 701) can be specified
using this material type. The hyperelastic materials supported for SOL 601/701 are the Mooney-Rivlin, Hyper-
foam, Ogden, and Arruda-Boyce and each material has a distinct set of parameters which can be entered. These
materials are then written to the MATHE entry for NX Nastran.
This dialog box is also used to specify the Gasket Material (MATG) for NX Nastran Advanced Nonlinear Analy-
sis (SOL 601 only). The MATG can only be used with 6-Noded (Wedge) and/or 8-noded (Hex) Solid elements.
There should only be one layer of elements in the direction of gasket thickness. This material requires a loading
curve and at least one unloading curve (up to 10 can be specified) to properly define the Pressure-Closure
Relationship for the gasket (Closure is defined as the change in gasket thickness/ original gasket thickness).
These curves should be defined using functions in FEMAP.
A Fluid Material can be created for use with Solid Elements only to represent a fluid volume in Nastran
(MAT10). The Bulk Modulus must equal the Speed of Sound (squared) multiplied by the Mass Density.
This material type is also often used to define LS-DYNA3D materials instead of using the isotropic, orthotropic,
and anisotropic defaults, but FEMAP also supports special Hyperelastic materials for MSC/MD Nastran,
ABAQUS and MARC. The default library file shipped with FEMAP contains these material types. If you are only
using NX Nastran, MSC/MD Nastran, ABAQUS or MARC materials, you can edit the library file to remove other
materials for easy reference, but do not to modify any numbers of materials you want to use. You can modify the
text in quotes, but all other data must remain the same.
You can also create your own materials by adding to the current list. FEMAP will store the information in the
appropriate data fields. For information on how to create your own materials, refer to the MS Word file, neu-
tral.doc, installed with the FEMAP executable. Creating materials in this manner, however, is only useful for pro-
grams that access FEMAP through a neutral file since our dedicated translators will not recognize them.
Note: The Membrane Material ID, Yield Pressure, Tensile Modulus, and Transverse Shear Modu-
lus MUST be defined for NX Nastran to be able to process the material. Also, the Yield Pressure
MUST match a point on the loading curve.
Note: In order to review Gasket Results in FEMAP, you must request results in the .op2 file from NX
Nastran. To do this in FEMAP, you must set your Results Destination to 2..PostProcess Only or
3..Print and PostProcess in the Nastran Output Results dialog box of the FEMAP Analysis Set Man-
ager. (See Section 8.7.1.8, "Output Requests" for more information on Nastran Results)
Next and Prev
FEMAP supports over 200 inputs on the material card, but only 24 at a time can be displayed in the dialog box.
When you press Next or Prev, the dialog box will scroll to show the other entities that can be input for the specific
material model
4.2.3.7 Function Dependent Materials
You will notice that many of the material dialog boxes have a tab marked Function References. This tab allows you
to assign function references to the various material properties.
The Function References tab contains all of the same properties as the General tab of the particular material type.
Instead of entering a material constant, here you may select from a list of already defined functions from a drop-
down list.
You do not have to choose a function for each property, however, any items that you leave blank will simply be
considered as a constant value (not varying with any function).
Although they are not shown here, the Function References tabs for the other material types also contain the same
fields found on the General tab of each material type.
A new function can be conveniently created while defining a material using the Function icon button located in
the lower left hand corner of the Define Material dialog box. This is the same as using the Model, Function com-
mand, except that the Define Material dialog box is still visible and the resulting function ID will automatically be
entered into the list.
Hint: All functions that you select for a material must be of the same type. For example, you can not choose a
time function for one value and a temperature function for another.
Nonlinear Materials 4-19
4.2.3.8 Nonlinear Materials
All materials but Hyperelastic, Fluid, and Other Types have a Nonlinear tab. This allows you to add material con-
stants which are normally required for nonlinear analysis. To begin, you must select the type of nonlinearity that
you are trying to model.
Nonlinear elastic and plastic materials are defined by a stress-strain curve, which is defined by a vs. stress function
and selected in the Function Dependence property. The function for nonlinear elastic materials should be defined in
the first and third quadrants to accommodate different uniaxial tension and compression properties. Nonlinear elas-
tic properties can only be defined for isotropic materials. Nonlinear elastic materials can be made temperature
dependent by referencing a 5..function vs. temp function instead of a vs. stress function, where the Y value is the
ID of the Stress vs Strain curve and the X value is the corresponding temperature at which that curve is valid.
Elasto-plastic materials use the linear constants coupled with the plasticity modulus, H. This is the work hardening
slope, and is related to the tangential modulus, E
T
(the slope of stress vs. plastic strain) by the following:
If you have already defined Youngs Modulus (E), you may press Compute from Tangent Modulus. By selecting
this feature, you can simply input the tangential modulus, E
T
, and FEMAP will use E to calculate the plasticity
modulus, H.
The Yield Criterion option contains information on the yield types to be used. This box is only relevant for elasto-
plastic and plastic nonlinearity types. Four yield criterion are available (von Mises, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb, and
Drucker-Prager). Von Mises and Tresca require input of the initial yield stress, while Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-
Prager require input of 2*cohesion and angle of internal friction.
Nonlinear Materials - Extended Material Model
The Extended Material Model button enables you to define further information for the nonlinear material model.
This is currently only available for the von Mises and Drucker-Prager yield criterion.
H E
T
1 E
T
E ( ) =
Von Mises
When you select Extended Material Model, and Von Mises is
specified, the following dialog box will appear.
Drucker-Prager
When you select Extended Material Model, and Drucker-Prager is specified, the following dialog box will appear.
You can input both the dilitancy angle and stress ratio for the
Drucker-Prager model and specify the type of stress-strain data
that you are providing in the Nonlinear Function Dependence.
Furthermore, you can provide the initial yield stress and can
make this yield stress a function of temperature or strain rate.
The function dependence must be of a consistent type with the
type of function supplied in the Function Dependence under
Nonlinear Properties. By proper selection of these functions,
you can generate yield and plastic region information as a func-
tion of temperature, strain rate, or both.
If the yield criterion is von Mises, all the required information
can be input in the Nonlinear Properties dialog box except for
yield function dependence on temperature and/or strain rate.
You may make the yield stress function dependent by selecting
the Extended Material Model, and a selection box will appear
which will enable you to choose the appropriate function.

Note: The Initial Yield Stress in the Define Nonlinear
Material dialog box must be set to 1.0 for this to
work properly when using this to define tempera-
ture dependent materials with a 5..Function vs.
Temp function.
Note: Support of the extended material model by analysis programs is limited. You should verify that both the
FEMAP translator and the code itself supports the extended material model.
Function Dependence Yield Function
Resulting Stress - Strain
Curve(s)
vs. Stress Not Used Single Curve
Function vs. Temperature vs. Temp Temperature Dependent
Function vs. Strain Rate
1. vs. Stress
vs. Strain Rate Strain Rate Dependent
Function vs. Strain Rate
2. Function vs. Temperature
vs. Strain Rate
TempFunction vs.
Strain Rate
Strain Rate and Tempera-
ture Dependent
Defining Creep Material Properties 4-21
4.2.3.9 Defining Creep Material Properties
You will note that many of the material types have a Creep tab. This enables you to define properties for creep anal-
ysis. Creep properties can be defined even if no other nonlinear/plasticity properties have been defined.
Two creep formulations are available: Empirical Model, and Tabular Model. For the Empirical Model, the Thresh-
old Strain, Reference Temp, and Temp Dependent Rate must be defined as well as the Empirical Creep Law and
Coefficients. Two classes of empirical creep law are available. They are:
The appropriate law and coefficients are defined by their equations in the dialog box. All inappropriate information
will be grayed.
The second creep formulation is tabular model which requires only function inputs under the Tabular Creep Law
section. You must define FEMAP function types vs. stress for the three coefficients Kp, Cp (primary creep) and Cs
(secondary creep) of the uniaxial rheological model.
Note: Similar to hyperelastic materials, support of nonlinear and creep material properties by analysis pro-
grams is limited. You should verify that both the FEMAP translator for your analysis code and the code
itself supports creep material properties.
c
t , ( ) a
b
t
d
=
c
t , ( ) A ( ) 1 e
R ( )t
[ ] K ( )t + =
Creep Law Class 1:
A ( ) a
b
or ae
b
R ( ) ce
d
or c
d
K ( ) e f ( ) sinh [ ]
g
or ee
f
where
Creep Law Class 2:
4.2.3.10 Defining Thermo-Optical Material Properties
Isotropic and ortho-
tropic materials have
the ability to also
specify thermo-opti-
cal properties of the
material. These prop-
erties are used for
heat transfer analyses
in programs like
TMG. They are not
used by Nastran,
ANSYS, ABAQUS
or any of the other
structural programs
where FEMAP sup-
ports heat transfer
analyses.
All of the fields are
function dependent.
You should specify
the constant value in
the field to the left,
which is applied as a
multiplier to any
function you select
from the lists. If you
do not select a func-
tion, the values are
simply constants. The Front Side and Reverse Side for InfraRed and Solar properties refer to planar elements,
where the Front is the face in the direction of the element normal.
4.2.3.11 Defining Phase Change Material Properties
All materials but Fluid and Other Types have a Phase Change tab. This allows you to add material constants which
are normally required for heat transfer and thermal analysis that involve a phase change (i.e. solid-to liquid, liquid-
to-gas).
The phase change material model is primarily available for Nastran and ABAQUS. It can also be used for custom
programs or programs that access the FEMAP neutral file. Reference enthalpy need not be specified when using
ABAQUS.
Model, Property... 4-23
4.2.4 Model, Property...
...creates a new property. Properties are used to define additional analysis information for one or more elements.
Most property data is geometric (thicknesses, areas, radii, etc.), but properties also specify mass and inertia and
select the materials to be used. The available property types match the available element types. For an element to
reference a property, both the property and the element must be the same type. The only exception is that there is no
distinction between linear and parabolic properties. In fact both linear and parabolic elements can reference the
same property.
Line Elements Properties (See Section 4.2.4.1, "Line Element Properties")
Plane Element Properties (See Section 4.2.4.2, "Plane Element Properties")
Volume Element Properties (See Section 4.2.4.3, "Volume Element Properties")
Other Element Properties (See Section 4.2.4.4, "Other Element Properties")
Common Features of All Property Dialog Boxes
There are many different dialog boxes used for creating the various property types since different values are
required for nearly every element type. Near the top of each dialog box however, you will notice a group of con-
trols which are used to set various parameters for the property to be created. The Elem/Property Type button, used
to choose a different property type, can be found here also. This button will display the same dialog box as
described in the Model, Element command.
ID, Color/Palette and Layer:
These options set parameters for the property to be created. Every time you create a property, the default ID will be
automatically incremented.
Title:
This option allows you to provide a title of up to 79 characters for the property. You should always specify descrip-
tive titles because they will appear in the drop-down selection lists and will help you identify the property. If you do
not specify a title, FEMAP will create a title automatically based on the type of Property created (format is Prop-
erty ID.. Property Type property). For example, if you create a Plate Property without a title, FEMAP will sim-
ply title it 1..PLATE property.
Material:
This drop-down list allows you to choose the material to be referenced by the property. A few property types (mass,
stiffness matrix...) do not require a material, but most do. For your reference, all materials which are defined in
your model will be shown in the list. For details on how various material types translate to your analysis program,
see Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.
In general, for plane element/property types you should pick either an isotropic, orthotropic 2D, or anisotropic 2D
material. Similarly isotropic, orthotropic 3D or anisotropic 3D materials should be used with solid elements. Some
analysis programs however, support 3D orthotropic materials for plate elements to add transverse properties. You
can make your choice by typing an ID, choosing from the list, or by graphically selecting an existing element
which references the material that you want. If you do not specify a material (leave the option blank or 0), when
you press OK, you will be given a chance to automatically create a new material. You can also click the Material
icon button next to the Material drop-down list to create a new material. This is the same as using the Model,
Material command, except that the Define Property dialog box is still visible and the resulting material ID will
automatically be entered into the list.
Copying Properties
If you need to create a property that is similar to another in your model, you do not have to enter all of the property
values manually. Pressing the Copy button will display a list of all existing properties. When you choose a property
from the list, the property values will be copied from that material and displayed in the current property creation
dialog box. You can then modify any of these values, or even change your mind and copy a different property,
before pressing OK to create the new property.
Copying is only useful when you copy properties of the same or similar type. When you copy properties of the
same type, all values are directly transferred to the new property. If you copy a property of one type into a property
of a different type, FEMAP converts the property to the new type, but many of the property constants may be
meaningless. If the property types are similar, like a bar and beam, the similar properties will be copied. If you
attempt to copy a plate property to a beam, or vice versa, you will get meaningless constants. You should review
carefully any properties which you copy between different types.
Working with Property Libraries
Property libraries allow you to create standard properties that you can use over and over again in many different
models. When you press Save, the current property is added to the property library file. Pressing Load will display
a list of the properties in the library and let you choose one to be loaded into the property creation dialog box. Just
like Copy, you can then modify the values before pressing OK to create the property. Also, just like Copy, when you
load a property of a different type it is automatically converted. The property ID, Color, Layer and Material are not
saved in the library, nor updated when a property is loaded from the library. For more information on libraries, see
Section 2.6.2.8, "Library/Startup".
4.2.4.1 Line Element Properties
Rod Element Properties
Rod elements require cross-sectional properties - area and the torsional stiffness. Distributed, nonstructural mass
(per unit length) can also be specified. The coefficient for torsional stress is used in the calculation for torsional
stress as follows:
Tube Element Properties
The tube element cross section is circular. It is defined by the outer and inner tube diameters. Distributed, nonstruc-
tural mass (per unit length) can also be specified. In addition, for certain analysis programs, you can use the Tube
element to model pipe behavior, specifying an internal pressure and whether or not the ends of the element are
closed.
Curved Tube Element Properties
Curved tube element properties are the same as the tube, with the addition of a bend radius.
Bar Element Properties
In addition to the cross
sectional area, numer-
ous inertia properties
must also be defined for
the bar element. These
properties are identical
to those required for
beam properties except
that beam elements
contain additional
inputs. For more infor-
mation, see "Beam Ele-
ment Properties".
where
is the torsional stress
C is the coefficient of torsional stress,
J is the torsional stiffness, and
M
is the torsional moment.
C M
J
------------------ =
Line Element Properties 4-25
Beam Element Properties
Beam properties are identical to bar properties except that you can specify different properties at each end of the
beam, and you can define a neutral axis offset from the shear center. You must turn on the Tapered Beam option if
you want to enter different properties at the second end of the beam. If this option is off, the properties at the second
end will be equal to the first end.
Care must be taken in properly specifying these properties with respect to the element axes. For FEMAP, I1 is the
moment of inertia about the elemental Z axis, which will resist bending in the outer fiber in the elemental Y direc-
tion. Some people look at this as the moment of inertia in Plane 1, the plane formed by the elemental X and Y axes.
For more information on the element directions, see Section 6, "Element Reference" in the FEMAP User Guide.
The figure will give some examples of cross sections, their orientations and relative inertias.
Distributed, nonstructural mass (per unit length) can also be specified.
You can specify up to four stress recovery locations in the plane of the element cross section. If you just specify the
first location, and leave the remaining ones blank or zero, FEMAP will automatically assign the remaining three
locations with positive and negative combinations of the location that you specified. This feature automates stress
recovery for the four corners of a rectangular cross section.
The neutral axis offsets should be specified in the local beam coordinate system, based upon the orientation node or
vector for the particular elements. This offset is only used to offset the neutral axis from the shear center. The offset
of the shear center (and neutral axis) from the vector between the two nodes defining the beam is input on the beam
Element command, not the beam Property command.
Shape - Section Property Generator
A graphical cross section property generator is available for this property type (as well as bar and curved beam).
FEMAP can automatically compute the cross section properties and stress recovery locations for common or arbi-
trary shapes. The common shapes include rectangular, trapezoidal, circular, and hexagonal bars and tubes, and
structural shapes such as I, C, L, T, Z and hats. Required input for these standard shapes is shown in the following
figure.
Vectors show the elemental
Small I1, Large I2 Large I1, Small I2 Large I1, Small I2
Y axis, which is the
orientation direction.
Rectangular Bar
Width
Height
Rectangular Tube
Width
Height
Thickness
Trapezoidal Bar
Width, Bot
Height Width, Top
Trapezoidal
Width, Bot
Height
Thickness
Width, Top
An arbitrary shape requires creating a surface before entering Model, Property, and then selecting General Section,
pushing the Surface button, and selecting the surface. Whether you select a common or arbitrary shape, you can
Circular Bar
Radius
Circular Tube
Radius
Thickness
Hexagonal Bar
Radius
Hexagonal Tube
Radius
Thickness
I-Beam or Wide
Flange (W)
Height
Width, Bot
Width, Top
Thickness
Thick, Bot
Thick, Top
Channel (C)
Section
Width, Bot
Height
Thickness
Thick, Top
Width, Top
Thick, Bot
Angle (L)
Section
Width
Height
Thick, Bot
Thickness
T Section
Width, Top
Height
Thick, Top
Thickness
Z Section
Width, Top
Width, Bot
Thick,
Height
Thick,
Thickness
Bot
Top
Hat Section
Height
Width, Bot
Width
Thickness
have FEMAP draw the cross section by pressing Draw. An error in the input will prevent drawing of the cross
section. This dialog box can also be used to define the stress recovery locations and orientation vector direction.
Stress Recovery and Reference Point
The Stress Recovery section of this dialog box allows the selection of stress recovery locations at standard points on
the cross section. By pressing the Forward Arrow button, FEMAP will move the location to the next standard
point, while pressing the Back Arrow button will move the location to the previous standard point. Whether you
specify stress recovery locations here or not, you still have the option to input values directly in the Define Property
- BEAM Element Type (previous) dialog box.
The Reference Point is only used when mesh attributes are assigned to a curve (Mesh, Mesh Control, Attributes
Along Curve). The reference point provides an easy method to automatically define the shear center/neutral axis
offset for beams that are automatically meshed onto a curve.
Any of the Stress Recovery or Reference Point locations can be turned on and off using the check boxes. FEMAP
will remember the positions of the Stress Recovery and Reference Point locations even if they have been altered
from the defaults (version 9.0.1 and above).
When a curve is meshed containing mesh attributes, and the offsets method has been set to Location, FEMAP will
place the reference point on the line joining the two nodes, and then calculate the offset of the shear center from this
point. The result is stored on the element record as the shear center/neutral axis offset.
The Attributes Along Curve command also has the capability to place the reference point at a distance from the line
joining the two nodes of the beam by setting y and z values. For more information, see "Mesh, Mesh Control,
Attributes Along Curve".
Orientation Direction
This section simply allows you to specify the direction of the orientation vector. This is very important since an
inappropriate direction of the vector with respect to the beam mesh will result in erroneous results. The Cross Sec-
Note: The offset stored on the element record calculated from the reference point moves both the neutral axis
and shear center from the line joining the two nodes of the beam. The offset stored on the property
record and calculated when Compute Shear Center offset is checked offsets the Neutral Axis from the
Shear Center.
tion Definition dialog box provides a visual representation of the required direction of the orientation vector for the
beams.
Change Shape
This option is only available when editing a cross section for which properties have already been calculated. This
option must be turned on before any properties can be changed. Once this option is selected, FEMAP will use the
cross section generator to calculate new properties when exiting this dialog box via the OK button. If you simply
want to edit stress recovery locations or orientation, FEMAP will use stored values to calculate any change in prop-
erties instead of creating an entire new set. This can save some time when making these simple changes.
If you wish to convert beam sections to have no shape (but retain the property values), you can use the Modify,
Update Elements, Shape... command.
Compute Shear Center Offset, Compute Warping Constant
These options are only available for beam properties. They are not available for bar or curved beam properties
since they are not supported by most analysis codes for these types of elements.
If Compute Shear Center Offset is on, FEMAP will use its cross section generator to compute the offset of the neu-
tral axis from the shear center and store the result on the property record. This is on by default since this offset can
be important with certain cross sections and such programs as Nastran, ABAQUS, and ANSYS provide support for
these offsets.
If Compute Warping Constant is on, FEMAP will calculate the warping constant for the cross section. This is off by
default since warping is often not important in beam analysis and there is limited support among the analysis pro-
grams for warping.
Poissons Ratio, Nu
Allows the user to enter a value for Poissons ratio to be used with the Alternate Section Property Calculator
(FEMAP Version 9 and above).
Special Note about the Alternate Section Property Calculator.
The alternative method is selected by going to File, Preferences..., Choosing the Database... button and checking
Alternate Section Property Calculation. If the alternative method is selected, a poissons ratio keyin is available on
the Cross Section Definition dialog box.
In FEMAP version 9 and above, changes have been made to the Beam Section Property Evaluation. The original
algorithm has been found to generate negative shear area values for some thin walled beam sections. For example,
I beams with the following dimensions have a negative shear area:
Height >4.023
Width, Top 1.0
Width, Bottom 1.0
Thick, Top 0.1
Thick, Bottom 0.1
Thickness 0.1
Apart from the one negative shear area, all other properties for the above dimensioned I beams are correct. Cur-
rently no problem can be found with the algorithm and it gives excellent values for all solid sections and low aspect
ratio thin-walled sections.
Note: The following section contains information about the Alternate Section Property Calculator. This
portion of the documentation is intended for any user who would like to know how FEMAP is calculat-
ing Beam Section Property values and why FEMAP now has two separate methods for performing this
calculation. Users who model with thin-walled beams may find the information in this section very use-
ful in creating more accurate finite element models.
For more information on the theory used to develop the Alternate Section Property Calculator, please
consult the references listed at the end of this section. Thank You.
To overcome this issue, the original algorithm has been adapted and an alternative algorithm added. The original
algorithm is still the default algorithm to ensure compatibility with files from previous versions of FEMAP.
The original algorithm assumes an internal poissons ratio value of 0.3. Changing the internal value of poissons
ratio value to zero prevents negative shear areas. However, this would not provide section property values consis-
tent with previous versions of FEMAP. In order to provide the best compatibility and to prevent bad shear area, in
FEMAP 9 the algorithm runs with an initial poissons ratio of 0.3 and if that results in a negative shear area or a
shear area greater than the area, an error is issued and the algorithm is rerun with a poissons ratio of zero.
While investigating this problem, an alternative and newer method of evaluating shear area was found (1,2).
Instead of using deflection curvature to determine shear area via Timoshenkos equation (3); the new method
equates internal to external shear energy. The resulting shear areas are always positive and well behaved, but they
do not exactly match classical values (4) when the poissons ratio is not zero. For example, consider a high aspect
ratio rectangular beam. The original algorithm calculates a shear area in both directions that matches the equation
for a rectangular section (4) with a poissons ratio of 0.3:
The alternative algorithm satisfies the above equation when poissons ratio is zero, but unlike the original algo-
rithm, it calculates different shear areas in the two directions when poissons ratio is not zero. This does not agree
with the classical equation above where aspect ratio in not included. However, applying shear load to a tall, thin
beam is likely to be less effected by poissons ratio than applying the same load to a wide, shallow beam. It is there-
fore almost intuitive that the two shear areas for a high aspect ratio rectangle should be different.
The choice between original and alternative is subjective. The original method calculates one bad shear area for
high aspect ratio thin-walled beam sections but matches classical values for solid sections and gets good properties
for low aspect ratio thin-walled sections. The alternative method gets good shear area values for all aspect ratios,
but does not match classical values for solid sections with non-zero poissons ratio.
1) Analysis and Design of Elastic Beams
By Walter D. Pilkey
Published by Wiley
2) Shear Correction factors in Timoshenkos beam theory for arbitrary shaped cross-sections
By F. Gruttmann and W. Wagner
Computational Mechanics 27 (2001) Springer-Verlag
3) Elastic Shear Analysis Of General Prismatic Beams
By William E. Mason Jr. and Leonard R. Herrmann
Journal of the Engineering Mechanics Division
Proceedings of the American Society of Civil Engineers
August 1968
4) Formulas For Natural Frequency And Mode Shape
By Robert D. Blevins
Published by Robert E. Krieger
Nastran PBEAML (and PBARL) Sections
FEMAP also enables you to create Nastran PBEAML (and PBARL) sections. Although FEMAP evaluates the sec-
tion properties and stress locations for these sections, if the translator writes PBEAML (or PBARL) Nastran cards:
these properties are ignored and only the dimensions are written. In this situation, Nastran evaluates the section
properties and stress locations and generates replacement PBEAM (or PBAR) cards.
A
10 1 + ( )
12 11 +
-----------------------
\ .
| |
where A = Area and Poissons Ratio =
You can suppress the writing of PBEAML (and PBARL) cards when writing a Nastran deck using options on the
Bulk Data and Bulk Data Options dialogs. If you do this, FEMAP evaluated properties will be written to the
PBEAM and PBAR cards.
Required input for the Nastran sections is shown in the following figure.
Note: The property values evaluated by Nastran can differ from those evaluated be FEMAP. FEMAP uses a
general section property evaluation tool. Nastran may be using different assumptions suchas thin wall
theory. Some values for some sections, especially warping values, differ considerably.
Note: The definition axes for the Nastran sections is different to the standard FEMAP sections. For the stan-
dard FEMAP sections, y is to the right and z is up on the dialog box. For the Nastran sections, y is up
and z is to the right - this is to be consistent with Nastran documentation.
ROD
Dim1
TUBE
Dim1
Dim2
L
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
I
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
Dim5
Dim6
CHAN
Dim1
Dim2 Dim3
Dim4
T
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
BOX
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
BAR
Dim1
Dim2
CROSS
Dim1/2
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
H
Dim1
Dim2/2
Dim3
Dim4
T1
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
I1
Dim1/2
Dim2 Dim3
Dim4
Link Element Properties
Link element properties consist of just the stiffness values, in all six degrees of freedom, at each end of the element.
The link element is rigid between the ends.
Curved Beam Element Properties
The curved beam element properties are just like those for the bar element (see previous paragraphs), and similar to
the beam property (except neutral axis offsets from the shear center and warping are not supported) except that you
must also specify a bend radius. All elements which reference this property will use this constant radius.
Spring/Damper Element Properties
The FEMAP spring element is a combined linear spring and damper, which connects either translational (axial) or
rotational (torsional) degrees of freedom.
You can specify both stiffness and damping values for the same elements, however, some analysis programs do not
support the damping values.
Nastran BUSH Property Values
These properties are used to define the options for the Nastran PBUSH property. The PBUSH property allows you
to define stiffness or damping for each individual dof.
Nominal Structural damping and Stress recovery coefficients in the translational and rotational dof can be defined.
The Spring/Damp Loc option defines where the Spring/Damper is located along the line between the nodes defin-
ing the element. If the option is off Femap will write a blank in Nastran to use the default. The Orientation Csys
Note: For Nastran, stiffness and damping cannot both be specified on the same property.
Entering a Stiffness value for Axial or Torsional will create an equivalent PROD/CROD property/ele-
ment combination to represent the appropriate spring stiffness.
Entering a Damping value for Axial or Torsional will create a PVISC property.
CHAN1
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
Z
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
CHAN2
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
T2
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
BOX1
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
Dim6 Dim5
HEXA
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
HAT
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3 Dim4
HAT1
Dim1
Dim2
Dim3
Dim4
Dim5
option defines the BUSH element csys for the element referencing this property. If the Orientation Csys option is
off then Nastran will determine the element csys from the Orientation defined on the element.
Nonlinear/Freq Resp
This button allows you to define the frequency dependent or stress dependant properties for the BUSH element.
For a Frequency Response analysis you can define Stiffness vs. Frequency, Force per Velocity vs. Frequency in
each dof, and Structural Damping vs. Frequency. For a Nonlinear analysis you can define the Force vs. Displace-
ment also for each dof.
Note: The values in the NASTRAN BUSH Property Values are only used to create a PBUSH property when the
element formulation for the spring/damper element has been set to 1..CBUSH in the NASTRAN sec-
tion of the SPRING/DAMPER Formulation dialog box. When the formulation is set to 0..Default,
these values are ignored and FEMAP will only use the values specified in the Property Values section.
DOF Spring Element Properties
Unlike the spring element which acts along the line between the elemental end points, the DOF Spring connects
two nodal degrees of freedom - independent of their orientation relative to each other. You choose the degrees of
freedom via the buttons at the left of the dialog box. Like the spring however, you can specify both stiffness and
damping.
In addition, you can add both nonlinear behavior and frequency dependence to the spring by defining and choosing
one or more functions. The Force vs Displacement function allows you to specify a nonlinear behavior for the
spring as it extends. The Force vs Frequency and Damping vs Frequency functions allow you to control the
behavior of the spring in a frequency analysis.
Gap Element Properties
For gap elements you can specify an initial gap distance, tension, compression and transverse stiffness and friction
constants. You should carefully review which of these options are supported by your analysis program before using
gap elements.
For zero length gaps (coincident node gaps), you can specify a coordinate system for orientation. Additional Nas-
tran options include limits on Penetration, and Adjustment, as well as an Adaptive option.
For ABAQUS, gap properties are also used to define properties of interface elements, and you can specify the
interface normal and width/area.
4.2.4.2 Plane Element Properties
Shear Element Properties
Shear panel properties are limited to element thickness and distributed nonstructural mass. For some analysis pro-
grams, you can also specify effectiveness factors which provide for treatment of the effective extensional area of
the shear panel. Effectiveness Factors F3 and F4 are for use with NEi Nastran only.
Membrane, Bending, Plane Strain and Plate Element Properties
These property types are all variations of plate element properties. They all require the thickness property, but the
plate type allows you to vary the thickness at each element corner. Be careful, though, these corner thicknesses will
be applied to each element that references this property. The stress recovery locations are measured from the neu-
tral axis of the plate toward the top fiber. These are not offsets, they are simply the location where stresses are
recovered.
NASTRAN Options
The Bending Stiffness (12I/T**3) and Transverse Shear Thickness/Element Thickness (Ts/T) properties are used by
Nastran to simulate non-isotropic or sandwich material behavior. In addition to these options, FEMAP now sup-
ports choosing different materials for the bending, transverse shear, and membrane-bending coupling behavior. By
Plane Element Properties 4-35
default, the plate will use the material that you select at the top of the dialog box, however, you can disable any of
these properties, or select a different material simply by choosing the options in the lists.
NEi Nastran Tension Only...
This button is used to define options for
the NE/Nastran tension only shell.
Specify the Component Direction to
define which element stress Component
Direction will be used to determine ele-
ment failure and the appropriate max
Compression Allowable.
The Shell Type After Reversion drop-
down allows you to choose which type
of element you are creating, whether it is
a Tension Only Shell or a Shear Panel.
For the Tension Only Shell, X and Y
Compression Factors are used to deter-
mine the stiffness when the element fails.
For the Shear Panel, Effectiveness Factors F1 through F4 can be defined to specify treatment of the effective exten-
sional area of the shear panel.
Laminate Element Properties
Properties of this type are different than those for any other type of element. In this case, the normal material refer-
ence (at the top of the dialog box), is not used. It is unavailable in this dialog box. Rather, you must choose a pre-
described Layup for your laminate property.
Laminate Definition
Layup
A Layup has information containing the material, physical thickness, and orientation angle for each ply in the
laminate, as well as any Global Ply information. If a Layup does not exist in your model, you can create a new
Layup by clicking the Layup icon button next to the Layup drop down menu.
Bottom Surface
Specifies a distance from the reference plane to the bottom surface of the laminate. If this field is left blank, the
default value will be -0.5 * the overall thickness of the laminate property.
Options
Symmetric
In general, you must list all plys in your laminate in your Layup. If you are using Nastran or ANSYS, and your lam-
inate is symmetric, you can choose the Symmetric option and only enter one half of the layers.
Membrane Only (Nastran)
This Nastran option on the PCOMP entry simulates a derived PSHELL entry with only membrane terms being
computed. (MID1 on the derived PSHELL).
Bending Only (Nastran)
This Nastran option on the PCOMP entry simulates a derived PSHELL entry with only bending terms being
computed. (MID2 on the derived PSHELL)
Smear (Nastran)
This Nastran option on the PCOMP entry ignores the stacking sequence, sets MID1=MID2 on the derived
PSHELL entry, and the MID3, MID4, Ts/T, and 12I/T**3 terms are all set to zero. Also, when this option is used,
your stress and strain output will be returned in Top and Bottom shell format instead of Ply by Ply.
Smear - Core (Nastran)
This Nastran option can be used when creating a laminate which has Face Sheets and a Core. The last ply of
the Layup will be used to represent the Core. Half the overall thickness of the other plies that make up the Face
Sheets will be placed above the Core and the other half below the Core. The stacking sequence of the Face
Sheet plies is ignored. Also, when this option is used, your stress and strain output will be returned in Top and
Bottom shell format instead of Ply by Ply.
Laminate Properties and Failure Theory
Many programs support the failure theories listed. You must specify the bond shear allowable, along with strength
allowables on the materials if you want to use the failure theory calculations.
Axisymmetric Shell Properties
The axisymmetric shell property contains only 1 property value for the thickness.
4.2.4.3 Volume Element Properties
Axisymmetric Element Properties
Actually, axisymmetric elements do not have any property values. The FEMAP property for these types is simply
used to reference the desired material.
Solid Element Properties
Unlike the plane elements, which orient their material axes with using an angle on each element, solid element
properties can reference a coordinate system to align the material axes. This difference is due to the fact that solid
elements require orientation of all three principal directions. Plane elements always have their Z direction normal
to the plane and can therefore be oriented with a single rotation angle. You can also choose to orient solid elements
based on the directions defined by the element's corner nodes.
4.2.4.4 Other Element Properties
Mass Element Properties
FEMAP mass elements support differing mass and inertia properties in three principal directions. Many analysis
programs do not support differing X, Y and Z masses. In this case FEMAP just uses the X mass that you defined.
As an input convenience, if you leave My and/or Mz blank (or zero) they will be automatically set equal to the Mx
value. If you really want almost no mass value in one of these directions, you must set the value to a small nonzero
number like 1E-10. FEMAP can also align the principal mass directions to any coordinate system and offset the
mass from a node. Check to see if your analysis program supports these options before using them.
Use the Effective Diameter field for mass elements that are part of a model to be solved with FEMAP Thermal. The
solver will use the implied area of a sphere with the specified diameter to calculate the relevant conductances.
Mass and Stiffness Matrix Element Properties
Properties for mass matrix and stiffness matrix elements are input as a symmetric 6x6 matrix. Since mass matrix
elements are only connected to one node, this fully defines all six mass degrees of freedom for that node.
Stiffness matrix elements connect two nodes, and hence 12 degrees of freedom. The 6x6 stiffness matrix is simply
replicated to form a 12x12 matrix in this case.
Model, Layup... 4-37
The following form is used (A is the 6x6 matrix you specify):
Slide Line Element Properties
You must define the interaction property values for the slide line element which include the slide line plane, width
of surfaces, and stiffness and frictional conditions. Both symmetrical penetration and unsymmetrical penetration
(for the slave nodes only) are available. No material reference is required for slide line element properties.
Weld Element Properties
Weld connector elements are only available for NX Nastran and MSC Nastran. Only isotropic materials (MAT1
entries in NASTRAN) can be used as the material for a weld element.
There are a few options to choose in the Define Property - WELD Element Type dialog box.
Diameter - This value represents the diameter of the weld. The diameter, length, and material are used to calculate
the stiffness of the connector in 6 directions.
Spot Weld - When this option is on, SPOT is written to the TYPE field on the PWELD entry. This causes the
actual length of the weld element to be ignored and instead the stiffness is calculated using an effective length (L
e
).
L
e
= 1/2 (t
a
+ t
b
), where t
a
and t
b
are the thicknesses of the shell elements A and B which are being connected with
the weld.
Eliminate M-Set DOF - When this option is checked, it writes out OFF for the MSET field on the PWELD entry
in the Nastran Bulk Data File. With MSET = OFF, the 2x6 constraint equations are built into the stiffness matrix of
the CWELD element thereby condensing the 2x6 degrees of freedom of the nodes used to create the weld connec-
tion. This option is available for 0..Elem to Elem, 1..Elem to Elem Vertex, 5..Nodes to Nodes, and 6..Nodes to Elem
Vertex weld types (ELEMID and GRIDID) only.
Plot Only and Rigid Element Properties
There are no properties required for these element types, so they are not normally defined. You can however create
properties of these types if you want to use them in any of the other generation / meshing commands.
4.2.5 Model, Layup...
...creates a new layup. Layups are used to define the make-up of a laminate property, ply by ply. You can choose a
material ID, physical thickness, and orientation angle for each ply in the laminate. There is also an optional Glo-
bal Ply which can be defined.
Note: This formulation does not take into account any geometric transformations required to connect non-
coincident nodes, so care should be taken when using this element type.
A A
symmetric A
ID and Title:
These options set the ID and Title for the layup to be created. Every time you create a layup, the default ID will be
automatically incremented. Title allows you to provide a title of up to 79 characters for each layup.
Global Ply ID (optional):
This option is currently only used to save a particular ply of one layup for use in other layups in your model. Future
versions of FEMAP will expand the capabilities of the Global Ply.
You can create a new Global Ply by clicking the Global Ply Icon Button next to the drop down list. In the Global
Ply Definition dialog box, you can choose an ID, Title (up to 79 characters), Material, and Thickness. Once the Glo-
bal Ply has been defined, you can use it in any layup of your model by simply choosing it from the Global Ply ID
drop-down list and the Material and Thickness values will be entered.
Material, Thickness and Angle:
The Material drop-down list allows you to choose the material to be referenced for each ply. If you want to create a
new material, simply click the Material Icon Button next to the Material drop-down list.
Thickness allows you to enter the physical thickness of each ply.
Angle is used to enter the orientation angle of each ply. The angles are specified relative to the material axes which
were defined for the element. If you did not specify a material orientation angle, these angles are measured from
the first side of the element (the edge from the first to the second node). They are measured from the rotated mate-
rial axes otherwise.
Layup Editor Buttons
There are several buttons in the Layup Editor that allow you to perform different functions. Some buttons are avail-
able all the time, while other require that certain fields be filled, one row highlighted, or multiple rows highlighted.
Each button or group of button is explained in greater detail below.
New Ply
Once you have a Material, Thickness, and Angle specified, click this button to add the ply to the layup. By default,
it will add this ply to the Top of the List (Designated in the dialog box above the list of plies with Top of Layup).
Note: A Global Ply can only be referenced in a Layup one time. If you use a Global Ply more than once in a
Layup, the most recently entered instance of the Global Ply will have the Global Ply designation.
If you have a ply highlighted in the list, the new ply will be added UNDER the highlighted ply (i.e., closer to the
Bottom of Layup). If you have multiple plies highlighted, this button is not available
Update buttons
Once a ply has been added the list, the definition of that ply can be updated using the Update Global Ply, Update
Material, Update Thickness, or Update Angle buttons. These commands are available when one or more plies are
highlighted in the list of plies (except Global Ply, which can only be used for one ply at a time). Once the desired
plies are highlighted, enter the new value for Material, Thickness, and/or Angle, then click the appropriate button to
update all highlighted plies with the new value.
Duplicate
Available when one ply or multiple plies are highlighted. Simply highlight the plies you would like duplicated in
the list of plies, click the Duplicate button, and the duplicated plies will be added to the top of the list of plies.
Delete
Available when one ply or multiple plies are highlighted. Simply highlight the plies you would like delete in the list
of plies, click the Delete button, and the plies will be deleted from the list of plies
Symmetry
Available only when multiple plies are highlighted. Simply highlight the plies you would like to mirror in the list
of plies, click the Symmetry button, and the mirrored plies will be added to the top of the list of plies in reverse
order as the were originally in the list.
Reverse
Available only when multiple plies are highlighted. Simply highlight the plies you would like to reverse in the
list of plies, click the Reverse button, and the order of the selected plies will be reversed in the list based on the
original position (i.e., the selected ply which was closest to the Bottom of Layup will now be closest to the Top
of Layup in the list).
Move Up and Move Down
Available when one ply or multiple plies are highlighted. Simply highlight the plies you would like moved up or
down in the list of plies, click the Move Up or Move Down button, and the selected plies will be moved closer to the
Top of Layup (Move Up) or Bottom of Layup (Move Down) one ply at a time.
Rotate
Available when one ply or multiple plies are highlighted. Simply highlight the plies you would like to rotate (alter
angle) in the list of plies, click the Rotate button, and the Angle of the selected plies will updated by adding or
subtracting the number entered in the Rotate Ply By dialog box. Enter a negative number to subtract from the cur-
rent angle.
Compute
Always available once a single ply has been added to the layup. This command will calculate the equivalent
mechanical properties for the layup. These values will be sent to the Messages dockable pane.
The calculated equivalent laminate property values include:
Total Thickness
In-Plane Properties (2-D orthotropic)
Modulus of elasticity (X and Y directions)
Shear Modulus (XY)
Poissons Ratio
Coefficient of thermal expansion (X,Y, and
XY)
Bending/Flexural Properties (2-D orthotro-
pic)
Modulus of elasticity (X and Y bending)
Shear Modulus (XY bending)
Poissons Ratio
Coefficient of thermal expansion (X,Y, and
XY bending)
Compliance Matrices - These are provided
for advanced users working with compos-
ites. The inverse are also provided for your
convenience.
A Matrix (extensional stiffness)
B Matrix (coupling stiffness)
D Matrix (bending stiffness)
A-Inv Matrix
B-Inv Matrix
D-Inv Matrix
.
Copy and Paste
Available when one ply or multiple plies are highlighted. Simply highlight the plies you would like copied in the
list of plies, click the Copy button, and the selected plies will be place on the clipboard.
Clicking Paste will Paste the plies into the current layup at the top of the list of plies. You can now reposition the
plies using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
Note: If you have the Entity Info window open while creating or modifying a Layup, the equivalent properties
will be calculated live every time a ply is added or modified. This is a great way to create a layup
which will behave as expected in your model.
Note: The copied plies will remain on the clipboard until over-written by another copy operation from a
windows program. If you desire, you can copy from a layup, then open another layup (new or exist-
ing) and paste those plies into that layup.
Working with Layup Libraries (Save and Load buttons)
The layup library allows you to create standard layups that you can use over and over again in many different mod-
els. When you press Save, the current layup is added to the Layup library file. Pressing Load will display a list of
the layups in the library and let you choose one to be loaded into the layup editor dialog box. You can then modify
the values before pressing OK to create the layup. The layup ID is not saved in the library, nor updated when a
layup is loaded from the library. For more information on libraries, see Section 2.6.2.8, "Library/Startup".
4.3 Creating Loads And Constraints
This section describes methods to load and constrain your model. Loads and constraints are applied in a similar
manner. Both are input as part of sets. Therefore, you can define multiple load and constraints for your analysis.
You can apply loads and constraints to geometry and/or FEA entities. You can even copy or combine sets for either
loads or constraints. The sections that follow will first explain the application of loads, and then move on to con-
straints.
4.3.1 Create/Activate Load Set
4.3.1.1 Model, Load, Set...
... makes a new load set or activates an existing set. This menu command is also available on the tray at the bottom
right portion of the graphics window, as well as through the Load toolbar.
To create a new load set, enter an ID that does not appear in the list of available sets. Then enter a title and press
OK. As always, you should choose a descriptive title. The titles are displayed, along with the IDs, whenever you
are asked to select a load set. To activate a load set that already exists, simply choose it from the list, or enter its ID,
and press OK. To deactivate all load sets, press Reset.
For each load set, a combination of Load Definitions, Body Loads, and Other Loads may be used to define the load-
ing conditions for that load set.
4.3.2 Load Definitions
Every time a load is created on finite element entities (i.e., Model, Load, Nodal; Model, Load, Nodal on Face; and
Model, Load, Elemental) or geometry (Model, Load, On Point; Model, Load, On Curve; Model, Load, on Surface)
a Load Definition will also be created in FEMAP. A Bolt Preload will also create a Load Definition. These Load
Definitions will appear in the Loads branch of the Model Info tree and can be given a title.
Each Load Definition will contain all of the individual loads which were created at the same time using a Model,
Load... command. Load Definitions can then be edited, listed, and deleted and all individual loads contained in that
Load Definition will be edited, listed, or deleted.
For example, if you chose to put a Force load of 1 unit on 5 selected nodes, a single Load Definition would
appear in the Model Info tree. In this case, if the Load Definition were to be edited, 5 individual loads would be
modified using one command.
Note: All of the commands for listing, deleting, and modifying individual loads are still available in FEMAP.
Ctrl+F2
Enter Set ID to
activate here
OR, choose an
existing set
from this list
Click here to
deactivate all
sets.
Finite Element Loads 4-43
Load Definitions can be removed at any time using the Remove Definition command on the context sensitive menu
in the Model Info tree and the individual loads from that Load Definition will be moved under the appropriate head-
ing in the Other Loads branch. The Other Loads branch contains headings for On Geometry, On Mesh, Bolt Pre-
Load, Nodal Temperatures, and Elemental Temperatures.
Also, a Load Definition can be created from any number of loads of the same type (i.e., any number of Nodal
Forces, Elemental Pressures, or Displacements on Curves, etc) by highlighting them in the Model Info tree and
using the Create Definition command from the context sensitive menu.
If you choose loads of various types and then use the Create Definition command, FEMAP will create a Load Def-
inition for each separate type of load that was highlighted.
For more information about the Remove Definition and Create Definition commands, along with the process of
combining Load Definitions, please see Section 7.2.1, "Tools, Model Info" under Loads and Constraints in the
Model Info Tree
4.3.3 Finite Element Loads
FEMAP allows you to create loads directly on finite element entities. These types of loads will be exported directly
to the solver on translation, assuming that the translator supports the type of loading input. Loads can be applied to
the entire finite element model (Model, Load, Body command), to individual or groups of nodes (the Model, Load,
Nodal, the Model, Load, Nodal, and the Model, Node, Nonlinear Force commands), and to individual or groups of
elements (the Model, Load, Element command). Each type of load and its command is discussed in more detail
below.
4.3.3.1 Model, Load, Body
Body loads act on all elements of your model and represent global motions, accelerations or temperatures. You
must activate the body loads that you want prior to defining load values, by checking the various active options.
Body loads can be separated into acceleration, velocity, and thermal.
Time and Frequency Dependence can be specified for Translational and Rotational Accelerations, as well as, Rota-
tional Velocity by selecting an existing FEMAP function from the drop-down list. You can also create a new func-
tion by clicking any of the Function icon buttons next to the Time/Freq Dependence drop-down list boxes.
Translational Accel/Gravity and Rotational Acceleration
These body loads represent translational and/or rotational acceleration. Input must always be in the global direc-
tions. Translational accelerations are often used to represent gravity loads. Watch the units however, these are not
specified in gs.
Rotational Velocity
This type of body load represents a rotational velocity and the resulting loads which are caused by centripetal
acceleration.
Center of Rotations
This specifies the location of the center of rotation for the rotational body loads (rotational velocity and rotational
acceleration). You can graphically select the Center of Rotations graphically by highlighting one of the fields in this
portion of the dialog and then clicking in the graphics window. To select a precise position, you may want to use the
Snap to Grid, Snap to Point, or Snap to Node mode.
Thermal
The Default Temperature is the temperature of all nodes/elements which are not given a specific temperature in this
load set by nodal or elemental temperature loads. This option can be used to quickly assign a temperature for the
entire model.
Rotating Around Vector... button
This utility allows you to specify a Rotation Vector (using any vector
method in FEMAP) for all rotational body loads in a particular load
set. Once you select the vector, FEMAP allows you to enter a value for
Velocity and Acceleration around this specified vector. Clicking OK will
return you to the main Body Loads dialog box and the transformed
values for the entered Velocity and Acceleration will now appear in the
appropriate X, Y, and Z components.
Model, Load, Nodal 4-45
4.3.3.2 Model, Load, Nodal
Creating nodal loads is a two step process. First, you must select the nodes where the load will be applied. As
always, this is done using the standard entity selection dialog box. After you select the nodes, you will see another
dialog box which defines the load.
The first selection you should make is the type of load you wish to create. FEMAP supports eleven (11) types of
nodal loads for various types of thermal and structural analysis - forces, moments, displacements, enforced rota-
tions, velocities, rotational velocities, accelerations, rotational accelerations, nodal temperatures, nodal heat gener-
ation and nodal heat fluxes.
The last 10 load types available are Fluid specific and are only accessible through the FEMAP neutral file.
As you choose a load type, FEMAP will disable or hide any controls in the load definition dialog box which are not
required. After choosing a load type you can proceed to define the other load parameters and values.
Title:
Allows you to enter a title for the Load Definition being created. If you do not enter a title, a default title will be
created based on the type of load which was created.
For example, if you create a Force on a selected node or nodes, the default title will be Force on Nodes.
Color/Palette and Layer:
These controls define parameters for the load to be created.
Coordinate System:
This option is only available if you select the Components method for direction for non-thermal load types. The
components are defined relative to the selected coordinate system. If you select a cylindrical or spherical system,
the true direction of the loads also depends on the location of the node where it is applied. For example, a positive
radial force goes in a different direction if the node is at 0 degrees, than if it is at 180 degrees.
Direction:
All non-thermal load types are vector quantities which require a direction. FEMAP provides five methods to define
the direction of a load: Components, Vector, Along Curve, Normal to Plane, and Normal to Surface. The Compo-
nents method simply requires input of components in the three directions. For all methods except Components, you
must check the Specify button to either define the vector (FEMAP standard vector definition dialog box will
appear), select the curve, define the plane (FEMAP standard plane definition dialog box will appear), or select the
surface. These methods provide great flexibility for defining the direction of the loads.
Choosing a Load Creation Method
There are three methods available to create loads on the nodes that you selected. The simplest, and default method,
is to assign a constant load value to each of the nodes. As an alternative, you can define an equation which defines
the value at each node. If you choose this method, you must select a variable (default is i - must select Advanced
under Variable to change it) which will be updated to contain the ID of the node where loads are being defined.
Then, instead of entering a numeric value for the loads, enter an equation in Value which uses the variable. You will
find the XND(), YND() and ZND() functions very useful in defining loads in terms of the locations of the nodes
that you are loading.
If instead of entering an equation, you enter a numeric value, that value will be assigned to every node, just as if
you had specified a constant. Conversely, if you enter an equation, but also set Constant, the equation will be eval-
uated prior to load definition and the constant result will be assigned to all selected nodes.
For example, if you choose to enter an equation in Value such as:
10*(xnd(!i)-xnd(1))+50
each node will receive a load which is equal to fifty, plus ten times the length in the X direction between that node
and node 1.
A third method is available in FEMAP 9.3 and above, and this method is to use a Data Surface. There are several
different types of Data Surfaces which can be created and in most cases, a Data Surface allows you to vary a value
based on specific parameters of an entity (i.e., XYZ coordinates; Node or Element ID; spatial locations - 1-D, 2-D,
or 3-D; mapped results from different mesh; parametric locations on geometry). These Data Surfaces can be cre-
ated prior to load creation using the Data Surface Editor (For more information on the Data Surface Editor, see
Section 7.2.3, "Tools, Data Surface Editor"). You can also click the Data Surface Icon button in the Create Loads
dialog box and choose from the list of available Data Surfaces to create a new one.
Time, Temperature or Frequency Dependent Loads
If the loads that you are creating are constant, simply set this option to 0..None. However, if your loads vary with
either time, temperature or frequency, you can choose the appropriate function to define that dependence. Prior to
creating your loads, you must use the Model, Function command to create the functions, so that they can be
selected from the list. The Y values of the function are used to multiply the constant values that you specify in this
dialog box. Do not confuse frequency dependence of the load value (specified here) with frequency dependence of
the phase (specified at the bottom of the dialog box for frequency analyses).
Note: Since these loads are created on the nodes themselves, the actual method of computing the direction is
not stored. FEMAP calculates the direction from the method, and then stores the result in component
form. This enables you to modify or remove any geometry that was created to specify the direction
without changing the load direction. If you attempt to edit or list the load, the values listed will be in
component form. Only loads attached directly to geometry store any information regarding the direction
method.
Hint: When choosing the Along Curve or Normal to Surface options, be careful that the nodes fall within the
length of the curve or the area bounded by the surface. If the curve is anything but a line, FEMAP will
attempt to project the position of the nodes onto the curve to determine the direction of the curve at that
location. A similar projection is also required for the Normal to Surface method. If the projection falls
well outside the curve or surface actual bounds, unexpected values for the direction may result.
Note: The XND(), YND(), and ZND() functions will use a loads definition coordinate system. For example,
in a cylindrical coordinate system, XND() would be the radial coordinate of the node, YND() would be
theta coordinate of the node, and ZND() would be the coordinate in the Z-axis of the node.
Note: The equation is evaluated at each node, and the actual calculated value of the load is stored as a nodal
load. The equation, itself is not stored. Equations are only stored for geometric loads.
Model, Load, Nodal On Face... 4-47
Creating Component Loads (Forces, Moments, etc.)
For component of non-thermal loads (forces, moments, displacements, enforced displacements, velocities, rota-
tional velocities, accelerations, and rotational accelerations) you must activate the various load components, using
the option boxes, prior to setting the load value. There is no load applied to any component which is not activated.
For forces, moments, velocities, rotational velocities, accelerations, and rotational accelerations, this is equivalent
to activating the component and then applying a zero (or blank) load. For displacements and enforced rotations,
however, these two alternatives are not equivalent. With the component deactivated, that component is free to
move (displace) freely. Activating the component and then specifying a zero displacement (or a blank), prevents all
movement of that component. This is similar to a constraint.
As just described, FEMAP will allow you to activate load components which have a zero (or blank) load value.
You may not however, have all load values equal to zero. If you want to use displacement loads as pseudo-con-
straints, you must specify at least one small nonzero value, like 1E-10 or smaller. You should never have to create a
zero force or acceleration, since it will have no effect.
Phase:
Non-thermal loads also allow you to specify a phase. This value is only used for frequency analyses. In addition,
for frequency response analyses, you can make the phase frequency dependent by selecting an additional function.
4.3.3.3 Model, Load, Nodal On Face...
... is the same as Model, Load, Nodal, except that instead of directly selecting the nodes where the loads will be
applied, here you select the faces of elements. You will first use the standard entity selection dialog box to select
the elements which reference the nodes where you want to place loads. Then, the face selection dialog box (as
described later in Model, Load, Elemental) is used to limit the nodal selection to specific element faces. When you
have selected the element faces, FEMAP will automatically determine the nodes where loads will be defined, and
this command will continue, just like the normal Model, Load, Nodal command.
4.3.3.4 Model, Load, Elemental...
...is used to create elemental loads. The process is very similar to Model, Load, Nodal. You must first select the ele-
ments where the load will be applied using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then, another dialog box
allows you to define the load type and values similar to the Create Loads on Nodes dialog box. The one major dif-
ference is that you will not be able to specify a direction. All elemental loads have a certain prescribed direction
(typically normal to face of application).
There are seven types of elemental loads in FEMAP: distributed loads on line elements, pressure, temperature, and
four types of heat transfer loads - heat generation, heat flux, convection and radiation. Again, just like nodal loads,
you should select the load type first. This choice will disable or hide all controls which are not necessary for the
type of load you are defining. Finally, specify the other load parameters and values.
You can also make elemental loads function dependent, just like nodal loads, as well as input a constant or variable
load. You will find the XEL( ), YEL( ), ZEL( ), XEF( ), YEF( ) and ZEF( ) functions very useful in defining loads
in terms of the locations of the elements and element faces that you are loading. If instead of entering an equation,
you enter a numeric value, that value will be assigned to every element, just as if you had specified a constant. Con-
versely, if you enter an equation, but also set Constant, the equation will be evaluated prior to load definition and
the constant result will be assigned to all selected elements.
Creating Distributed Loads
Distributed loads are forces applied along the length of line elements (bars, beams...). Their load values are speci-
fied as a force per unit length.
You can specify a different value at each end of the element. If you want a constant load along the length, you must
specify the same End A and End B values. If you leave End B blank, zero load will be applied at that end.
In this case the same function dependence will apply to the loads at both ends of the element.
Note: This command can be a convenient method of specifying nodal loads on complex models, especially on
solid models where you can use the adjacent faces approach (see Section 4.3.3.2, "Model, Load,
Nodal"). This is an alternative to creating geometric loads and can be very useful to create loads on a
portion of a surface.
Distributed Load Direction
After you specify the load magnitude and phase, press OK. You
will be prompted for the load direction, which can be along any of
the elemental or global axes. You can not specify an arbitrary
direction or the axis of any other coordinate system. The elemen-
tal axes are determined by the element orientation. For elements
that do not require an orientation (rods, axisymmetric shells...)
you should always use the global directions.
Creating Pressure Loads
Elemental pressure loads always act normal to an element face or edge. For this reason, you can only apply pres-
sure to plane or solid elements. You may not apply pressure to line, or other element types.
Just like distributed loads, you first define the load magnitude and phase, then any function dependence. You have
the option to input the pressure at corners. This will require input of four values and enables you to specify a vary-
ing pressure load across an element. This capability is most useful when defining a variable pressure load across a
surface.
You also have the option to specify the direction of the pres-
sure. When this option is selected FEMAP will prompt you
for the direction of the pressure using coordinates or a vector.
Specifying a direction for pressures is only supported for
Nastran. If pressures are defined in this manner for other
solvers FEMAP will simply create pressures normal to the
selected element face.
Specifying Face IDs
For pressures, when you press OK, you will be presented with the following dialog box to choose the face or faces
where the pressure will be applied:
This provides four ways to select
the faces. The most obvious is to
simply choose Face ID and
select the ID of a face. For
details on how face numbers for
plane and solid elements are
defined, see Section 6, "Element
Reference" in the FEMAP User
Guide. Alternatively, you can
simply choose the face graphi-
cally by moving the cursor near
the center of the face and clicking the left mouse button. The selected face will be highlighted. If you chose an
unexpected face, simply move the mouse and click again until you get the face you want. Also, you have the option
to select the Front Face or the Back Face when choosing the face of a plate element. This is strictly a way to
choose a particular face without having to rotate the model.
While this method is easy to understand, it has the disadvantage of applying the loads to the same face number on
all selected elements. If the elements where you need to apply loads are oriented randomly, this method is not very
effective. You will either need to use one of the other methods, or in some cases you can reorient the elements (see
Section 4.7.3.12, "Modify, Update Elements, Reverse/Orient First Edge..."
Note: Not all analysis programs support pressures at the corners of elements. If you translate to a
program that does not support corner pressures, FEMAP will automatically average the
corner pressures and output a centroidal value.
Model, Load, Elemental... 4-49
In most cases, loads on plane elements will be applied
to face 1. In this case positive pressure acts in the
same direction as the face normal (as determined by
the right-hand rule). Conversely, if loads are applied
to face 2, their positive direction will be opposite to
the face normal. Therefore a positive pressure on face
2 is equivalent to a negative pressure on face 1. If you
need to apply edge loads, they can be applied to faces
3 through 6 as shown. Their positive direction is
inward, toward the element center.
Choosing Faces Near a Surface
If you have used geometry to define your elements, or if you just have surfaces in your model, you can apply loads
to element faces which are close to a selected surface. When you choose Near Surface, you must also choose a sur-
face and specify a tolerance. Loads will be applied to the faces of the selected elements that are closer than your
specified tolerance from the surface. This method can only be used to apply pressure to Face 1 of planar elements
(not to the edges).
Choosing Faces Near a Plane
The Near Coordinates method is very similar to Near Surface. Instead of specifying a surface, however, you
choose a coordinate system, direction and position. This defines a planar surface, which is used along with the tol-
erance to find the closest faces.
Choosing Adjacent Faces
The final and most powerful method for choosing faces, especially for complex solid and planar element models, is
Adjacent Faces. You choose just one initial face (and the associated element ID). This can be done very easily by
graphically selecting the face. You then specify a tolerance angle. FEMAP will search all selected elements for
faces that are connected to the face that you chose and that are within the specified tolerance from being coplanar
(colinear for planar elements) with an already selected face. This can be used to find all faces on an outer surface
(or edge) of a solid (or planar) - regardless of the shape. By selecting the option Matching Normals Only you can
further limit the faces selected by allowing only elements with matching normals to be selected.
In the picture above, loads could have been applied to all exterior faces, including those inside the hole, by choos-
ing a tolerance greater than 90 degrees. Loads could have been applied just in the hole by selecting a face inside the
hole and specifying a fairly low tolerance.
As with Face ID, you have the option to select the Front Face or the Back Face when choosing the face of a
plate element. This is strictly a way to choose a particular face without having to rotate the model.
Choosing Faces Model Free Faces
The Model Free Faces method simply applies the load to every free element face in your model.
For more information about determining Free Faces see Section 7.6.4, "Free Face".
1 2
3
4
F3
F4
F5
F2
Triangular elements do
not have a face 6.
F6
Element
Normal
F1
Selected
Loads on
Adjacent Faces
Face
Pressures on Axisymmetric shells
Axisymmetric shell elements only have a top and bottom surface.
With the top defined as the positive normal direction from node 1
to 2. You have the choice of loading either the top or bottom sur-
face.
NOTE:
Since these elements do not have a orientation the direction of the
pressure is not known. or viewing purposes use the Axisymmetric
Axis view option to set the orientation required by the analysis package.
Creating Elemental Temperatures
For temperature loads, you can only specify a single temperature value. This value is assigned to all selected ele-
ments. If you need to represent temperatures which vary within an element, you must use nodal temperature loads.
No face specification is required for temperatures, they apply to the entire element.
Creating Loads for Heat Transfer
All of the loads for heat transfer analysis are created similarly to pressure and temperature loads, the only differ-
ence is the parameters that need to be specified.
Heat Generation
For heat generation, only a single constant is required - the generation rate.
Heat Flux
Elemental heat flux is applied normal to an element face. You must specify the rate of flux, and, just like pressure,
apply the flux to a specific face.
Alternatively, you can define a directional heat flux. In this case, you must also specify a surface absorptivity and
temperature for the selected face.
And, after pressing OK, you must specify a flux direction. The direction is defined either as a constant by giving the
components of a vector in the direction of the flux, or as a time varying vector, by choosing three functions which
contain the components defined as a function of time. In either case the components must be specified in global
rectangular coordinates.
Finally, after defining the direction, you will choose the face(s) where the fluxes will be applied. For more informa-
tion about choosing faces, see "Creating Pressure Loads".
Convection
Free convection loads require the convection coefficient and the film temperature, along with the face where the
convection is acting. As always, the face is chosen after you press OK, in the standard fashion. For more informa-
tion about choosing faces, see "Creating Pressure Loads".
Forced convection loading is also supported, although only for a 1-D type analogy. In this case you must specify
the flow rate and diameter along with the temperature, so the proper coefficients can be calculated. For this type of
analysis, you will also have to specify numerous fluid properties in the Model, Loads, Body command described
earlier.
Special Case - Forced Convection Over a Plate or Surface
For Nastran, forced convection loads can also be used to model one or more flows over a plate. This is a very spe-
cialized capability and requires a thorough understanding of Nastrans thermal capability before you attempt to per-
form this type of analysis.
To model this condition you must follow these steps:
1. Model the plate. You can use any general mesh, however a rectangular mapped mesh will be much easier to
understand, and will more accurately represent the flow.
2. Model flow tubes. Since Nastran only has forced convection along line elements, i.e. a 1-D case, you must
define a series of tube elements that represent the flow location and direction. These are typically placed at some
location above/below the plate.
If you are going to have more than one discreet flow, place all tube elements from each flow on a separate layer.
Use the Create Layer command to create a layer, then choose that layer when creating the elements, or use the www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
Model, Load, Elemental... 4-51
Modify, Layer command to change it later.
Unlike most general modeling techniques in FEMAP, tube elements are required for this special capability. In
most cases, where these tubes are simply a modeling convenience and do not represent a physical tube with ther-
mal properties, you will not want them to be written to your Nastran model. In that case, just define both the
inner and outer diameters of the tube property as 0.0 - this indicates that you want the tube to be skipped during
translation. If you do want the tube to be translated, just specify nonzero diameters.
If you need to use tube elements in your model that are not being used to represent flow tubes, you MUST place
them on a layer that is not used by any of the forced convections that you will later apply to the plate elements. If
you do not, FEMAP may create improper links that do not represent the situation that you are attempting to rep-
resent.
3. Model the mass flow. The mass flow is modeled by applying forced convections to each of the flow tube ele-
ments. For all of these loads you must check the Disable Convection option. This will result in a load that simply
models the mass/energy transfer down the flow stream, and not the convection effects. You must specify a flow
diameter on these loads. Even though it is not required for the mass transfer equations, it is necessary to properly
connect the convections from the plate. Typically you will want to specify a value that is near (or at least the
same order of magnitude) the flow diameter for the plate convections.
4. Model the convection on the plate. Next, apply forced convections to the plate elements where the flow is occur-
ring. All forced convections on plate elements are placed on Face 1, flowing from the middle of the first edge of
the plate to the middle of the third edge (to the opposite node for triangular plates). If you created your elements
in a manner where this does not really represent the direction of your flow you should use the Modify, Update,
Reverse command, and the Align First Edge to Vector option to realign your plates so that the flow is properly
represented. This is the step that can become very difficult if you have an arbitrary (non-rectangular or non-
mapped) mesh. It is very important that as they are displayed, all of these convections on the plate point along
the general flow direction.
On all of these plate convections you should check the Disable Advection option. This will effectively eliminate
the mass transfer, and indicate that you are trying to associate this load with a flow tube. You must also specify
the flow diameter (hydraulic diameter). This diameter will be used in the calculation of the Reynolds number. In
addition, when you check this option you will see an additional option displayed that is titled Area Factor. If you
do not specify anything here, FEMAP uses the plate areas to compute coefficients in the heat transfer equation.
By specifying a value you can scale that computation to allow for fins or any other area correction that you wish
to apply.
If you are working with multiple discreet flows, once again you must use the FEMAP layer capability to assign
these convections to a flow number. Set the convection load layer to the same ID as that of the associated flow
tubes.
Specify additional fluid/heat transfer options. Go to the Model, Load, Body command and choose the Heat
Transfer button. This will display a dialog box where you can specify the fluid properties and other flow param-
eters. Currently only one fluid and set of parameters can be specified.
5. Translate to Nastran. When you translate these loads to Nastran, the translator creates Plot-Only elements to rep-
Flow Tube
with Advection
Links Created
by Nastran
Translator
Convection
on Plate
resent the CHBDY elements that are required, and also create the links shown above. These links represent how
each of the convection only plates are linked to the advection only flow tubes. Also, during the translation
you will be asked to specify a factor that is used to disable the convection and advection. Since Nastran really
has no way to disable these portions of the problem, we simulate this effect by scaling the appropriate compo-
nents downward by the scale factor that you specify. Make sure that you always specify a small number (<< 1),
otherwise advection and convection will not be properly disabled.
Radiation
Two forms of radiation can be defined: radiation to space, and enclosure radiation. For radiation to space, you must
specify the surface emissivity, absorptivity and temperature, as well as a view factor from the surface (element
face) to space.
For enclosure radiation only an emissivity is required. The absorptivity is assumed to be equal to the emissivity,
and the view factor will be automatically calculated by the analysis program (currently only supported for NX Nas-
tran or MSC.Nastran). Optionally, you can speed up the view factor calculations by limiting calculations to sur-
faces which can shade or can be shaded by other surfaces.
If you are working on a single enclosure problem, make sure that you set the same layer on all of the radiation
loads.
4.3.3.5 Model, Load, Nonlinear Force...
... is used to define nonlinear transient loads that apply forces to a node based upon displacement and/or velocity at
one or two other nodes. You must define the type of relationship, the node and degree of freedom for the applied
force, and the node(s), degree of freedom, and value (displacement / velocity) that the force will be based upon..
Relationship defines the type of nonlinear transient loads to be created. As shown in the table, four types are avail-
able.
Note: Enclosure radiation problems also require a cavity/enclosure number - even if you are using only a sin-
gle cavity. Surfaces in each cavity are totally independent of other cavities. They neither shade nor radi-
ate to any surfaces other than the ones in their own cavity. To provide maximum flexibility in viewing
and verifying cavity definition, FEMAP uses the layer number that is defined with each radiation load
(not the layer for the element), as the specification of the cavity number. In this way, you can turn on/off
as many cavities/layers as you want to visually verify the loading that you have defined.
Relationship Definition (F=Force, X=Disp/Vel)
Tabular Function
Product of Two
Variables
Positive Variable
to Power
Negative Variable
to Power
F
i
t ( ) Scale Table X t ( ) ( ) =
F
i
t ( ) Scale X
j
t ( ) X
k
t ( ) =
F
i
t ( )
Scale X
j
t ( ) [ ]
A
where X
j
t ( ) 0 >
0 where X
j
t ( ) 0
=
F
i
t ( )
Scale X
j
t ( ) [ ]
A
where X
j
t ( ) 0 <
0 where X
j
t ( ) 0
=
Geometric Loads 4-53
The other options simply
define the arguments to
these equations. In all
cases, you must specify a
scale factor. The X(t) argu-
ments represent the dis-
placement or velocity at
node/DOF j (the first node)
or k (the second).
For Tabular Function
loads, you must define and
select a force vs. displace-
ment/velocity function
which will be used by the
analysis program to calcu-
late the force. Since
FEMAP does not currently
contain a vs. Force func-
tion, any function type can be used, but it should contain the appropriate force values. The nodal degrees of free-
dom must be specified as 1 through 6. For the Positive and Negative Power relationships, power is the exponent, A,
of the equation shown.
4.3.4 Geometric Loads
As an alternative, and/or supplement to finite element loads, FEMAP allows you to create loads on geometry. Since
analysis programs require loads directly on nodes and elements, FEMAP will convert these loads to nodal and ele-
mental upon translation. Defining loads by geometry can greatly simplify load input, especially in complex solid
models. It also provides a convenient method of load distribution, since a many times you will know the total load
on a surface. FEMAP will automatically distribute that load over the surface based upon the area of the elements.
Geometric loads also offer the advantage of storing equations and methods of direction. When you create a variable
geometric load, FEMAP will store the equation and only evaluate it upon translation, or when expansion to a nodal
or elemental load is requested.
The geometric load section contains four commands, based upon the type of load to create. They are On Point, On
Curve, On Surface, and Expand. The first three commands enable you to create a load on the selected geometric
entity, while the fourth command allows you to convert between FEA (nodal/elemental) and geometric (point/
curve/surface) loads. Each of these commands are discussed in more detail below.
4.3.4.1 Model, Load, On Point...
... allows creation of loads directly on points. The type of loads available are identical to those that are available
through the Model, Load, Nodal command. All loads are converted directly to nodal loads upon translation or
expansion. Most often you may want to simply use Model, Load, Nodal to create nodal loads directly.
There are two major advantages of using this method over the Model, Load, Nodal command. The first is the ease
of picking the correct entities. Points will typically be one of the first entities created in your model, even before
any FEA entities are created, which will make selecting the points relatively simple. Also, you will generally have
fewer points than nodes in your model, which again simplifies the selection process. The second advantage is that
you can create a variable load which stores the equation and can then be easily modified.
4.3.4.2 Model, Load, On Curve...
...creates loads on curves, which are then converted to nodal or elemental loads (based upon the type of load) upon
translation or expansion. This section documents unique features of loads on the curves. It does not go into detailed
explanation of the input values for each type of load. For more detailed information on the specific inputs for each
load type, see Section 4.3.3.2, "Model, Load, Nodal" or Section 4.3.3.4, "Model, Load, Elemental...".
FEA Attachment
All loads on curves must be eventually expanded to nodal or elemental loads when translated to a finite element
analysis program. When FEMAP expands the loads on curves into elemental or nodal loads, it creates loads for
nodes or elements that were originally from that curve during a meshing procedure (or manually attached). This
procedure is relatively simple for nodal loads. FEMAP determines which nodes are attached to the curve and cre-
ates the loads on these nodes. The only item which may alter this calculation is if you have turned on Midside Node
Adjustment (see "Midside Node Adjustment").
For loads converted to elemental loads, only 2-D elements can be attached to the curve. For an element to be
attached to the curve, all nodes on a face of an element must be attached to that curve. If a parabolic element is
along a curve, but the midside node has been detached from that curve for some reason, the element is not consid-
ered to be on the curve.
Load Types
There are 33 loads available for loads on curves. Many of the load types, such as force, force per length, and force
per node are just different input methods for the same nodal load type (force). These different input methods enable
FEMAP to distribute loads along the curve.
The listing in the dialog box of the load type are separated into four sections:
structural loads, temperature, heat transfer loads, and fluid loads.
All structural loads except pressure are converted to nodal loads.
Temperature is converted to a nodal temperature while elemental temperature
obviously is an elemental load.
The heat transfer loads include loads which will be converted to nodal loads (heat
flux, heat flux per length, heat flux at node, and heat generation) or elemental
nodes (element heat flux, convection, radiation, and element heat generation).
There are 10 fluid loads that are scalar quantities and can only be accessed
through the neutral file for use in analysis.
Load Input Values
There are also three basic types of load input values: Total, Per Length, and Per
Node. The total loads include force, moment, and heat flux. Input is a total load
that is then automatically distributed along the nodes attached to the curve. The
distribution will be based upon the total length associated with each node. Total loads must be input as constant.
They cannot be variable.
Loads input as per length loads (force per length. moment per length, and heat flux per length) are very similar to
total loads. The load is distributed identically to a total load, except the values are then multiplied by the length
along the curve associated with each node. The sum of all these loads is simply the input value multiplied by the
total length of the curve. These types of loads must also be input as constant.
All other loads are input on an per node basis. These include force per node, moment per node, heat flux per
node, and translational and rotational displacements, velocities, and accelerations. These values are applied directly
to the node with no distribution.This load type is most commonly used for displacements, as well as variable load-
ing conditions for forces. If you have a load which varies along the length of the curve, this type of load input will
allow you to describe an equation or function to simulate that loading condition.
Direction
Structural loads (i.e. force, force/length, etc.) which are converted to nodal loads upon expansion require input of
the direction. The direction is identified identically to the specification of nodal load direction (see Section 4.3.3.2,
"Model, Load, Nodal") with two small differences. The first is that the Direction method is saved. FEMAP does not
convert the loads into components until you expand or translate. Therefore, if you list or modify these loads, you
will see the same direction method you originally specified. Secondly, if you choose the Along Curve method, you
cannot specify the curve. FEMAP will automatically use the curve(s) to which the loads are applied.
Model, Load, On Curve... 4-55
Method
The Method allows you to choose
between a constant or variable load. If
constant loading is required, simply
choose Constant and input the values.
If Variable loading is required (not
available for total and per length
loads), you must select Advanced,
which allows you to define the type of
definition for your variable load:
Equation, Function, or Interpolation.
Equation
Equation allows you to specify a variable loading in terms of the x, y, and z positions of the nodes or elements.
Each of these values may be used in the equation definition, preceded by an !. For example
4.35*!x - 2*!y
would multiply the x coordinate of each node (or element) and then subtract the product of 2 and the y coordinate.
The x, y, and z coordinates are in the coordinate system defined in the main load dialog box. For instance, if you
were working in a cylindrical coordinate system, x would be the radial coordinate, y the theta coordinate, and z the
coordinate in the Z-axis. FEMAP will store the equation, and evaluate it only upon translation or expansion. The
variable i is not used for loading on geometry, therefore all functions such as XND, and XEL are not applicable and
should not be used.
Function
The second type, Function, allows you to define a function to describe the loading. This function must be created
before defining the load by using the Model, Load, Function command. Two types of functions are acceptable for
variable loads on curves: vs. curve length, and vs. curve parameterization. Simply create this type of function with
the load value as Y, and the X value as either the length along the curve, or the parameter value.
By creating a function, you can model any irregular load pattern over the curve. FEMAP will use the position of the
node, element face centroid, or element centroid and linearly interpolate a value at that position from the function.
FEMAP does not perform any extrapolation of these values. Therefore, if a load occurs over the entire length of the
curve, you should take care to define the values of the curve at the beginning and end points.
Interpolation
The third type, Interpolation, is really a shortcut version of Function. When you select Interpolation, the Locate 1
and Locate 2 areas become accessible. You can then select Locate for 1 and 2 and the standard coordinate definition
dialog box will appear. You simply define the two locations and then define the load values associated with them.
FEMAP will interpolate between these values to obtain loads on the nodes or elements attached to the curve. Once
again, FEMAP will perform no extrapolation. This is a useful method for defining loads on a segment of a curve.
Note: A variable load is only available for elemental loads and nodal loads that are per node. Nodal loads
that are total (i.e. force, moment, etc.) and per length (force per length, etc.) must be constant.
Note: The node locations are used to evaluate the equation for all loads converted to nodal loads. The position
of the centroid of the elemental face attached to the loaded curve is used for all elemental face loads
while the centroid of the element is used for non-face loads such as elemental temperature and elemen-
tal heat generation. The only exception is FEMAP will use the node locations to calculate pressure if
the At Corner option for pressures is selected.
FEA Attachment
All loads on curves must be eventually expanded to nodal or elemental loads when translated to a finite element
analysis program. When FEMAP expands these loads, it creates loads for nodes or elements that were originally
generated from that curve during a meshing procedure (or manually attached). This procedure is relatively simple
for nodal loads. FEMAP determines which nodes are attached to the curve and creates the loads on these nodes.
The only item which may alter this calculation is if you have turned on Midside Node Adjustment (see "Midside
Node Adjustment").
For loads converted to elemental loads, both 2-D and 3-D elements can be attached to the Surface. IF FEMAP finds
faces of 2-D and 3-D elements that are identical, FEMAP will expand the load on the 2-D element, and issue a
warning message. The only exception to this procedure is if the 2-D elements are plot-only planes.
For an element to be attached to the surface, all nodes on a face of an element must be attached to that surface. If a
parabolic element was created on a surface, but midside nodes have been detached from that surface for some rea-
son, the element is not considered to be on the curve.
Midside Node Adjustment
Some methods such as force/length and force distribute the loads over the entire length. For many parabolic ele-
ments, you cannot simply distribute the force evenly and obtain an even displacement result. You must apply a
larger value to the midside nodes than the corner nodes, and this value is in excess of 1/2 the value of the total load
on the element.
You can specify the factor you want on the midside nodes under File Preferences, Geometry, on the Edge Factor.
This value defaults to 2/3, which is standard for many programs. This means that 2/3 of the load will be applied to
the midside node, and 1/6 to each corner node. If your results are inappropriate for your analysis program, please
consult the documentation for your program. You can also remove the option to adjust for midside nodes by click-
ing this option off.
4.3.4.3 Model, Load, On Surface...
...creates loads on surfaces, which are then converted to nodal or elemental loads (based upon the type of load)
upon translation or expansion. This section documents unique features of loads on surfaces. It does not go into
detailed explanation of the input values for each type of load. For more detailed information on the specific inputs
for each load type, see Section 4.3.3.2, "Model, Load, Nodal" and Section 4.3.3.4, "Model, Load, Elemental...".
FEA Attachment
All loads on surfaces must be eventually expanded to nodal or elemental loads when translated to a finite element
analysis program. When FEMAP expands these loads, it creates loads for nodes or elements that were originally
generated from that surface during a meshing procedure (or manually attached). This procedure is relatively simple
for nodal loads. FEMAP determines which nodes are attached to the curve and creates the loads on these nodes.
The only item which may alter this calculation is if you have turned on Midside Node Adjustment (see "Midside
Node Adjustment").
For loads converted to elemental loads, both 2-D and 3-D elements can be attached to the surface. If FEMAP finds
faces of 2-D and 3-D elements that are identical, FEMAP will expand the load on the 2-D element and issue a
warning message. The only exception to this procedure is if the 2-D elements are plot-only planes. Since plot only
elements are not translated as structural elements, loads cannot be applied to these elements.
For an element to be attached to the surface, all nodes on a face of an element must be attached to that surface. If a
parabolic element was created on a surface, but midside nodes have been detached from that surface for some rea-
son, the element is not considered to be on the curve.
Load Types
There are 33 loads available for loads on surfaces. Many of the load types, such as force, force per area, and force
at node are just different input methods for the same nodal load type (Force). These different input methods enable
FEMAP to distribute loads along the surface.
Note: Loads are not expanded on plot-only planar elements since these elements are not translated as struc-
tural elements. Loads cannot be applied to these elements.
Model, Load, On Surface... 4-57
The listing in the dialog box of the load type are separated into four sections:
structural loads, temperature, heat transfer loads, and fluid loads. All structural
loads except pressure are converted to nodal loads. Temperature is converted to a
nodal temperature, while elemental temperature obviously is an elemental load.
The heat transfer loads include both nodal (heat flux, heat flux per length, heat
flux at node, and heat generation) and elemental nodes (element heat flux, con-
vection, radiation, and element heat generation). There are 10 fluid loads that are
scalar quantities and can only be accessed through the neutral file for use in anal-
ysis.
Load Input Values
There are also three basic types of load input values: Total, Per Area, and Per
Node. The total loads include force, moment, and heat flux. Input the total load
value, and FEMAP will automatically distribute it over the surface. The distribution will be based upon the total
area associated with each node. Total loads must be input as constant. They cannot be variable.
Loads input as per area loads (force per area, moment per area, and heat flux per area) are very similar to total
loads. The load is distributed identically to a total load, except the values are then multiplied by the area associ-
ated with each node. The sum of all these loads is simply the input value multiplied by the total area of the ele-
ments. These types of loads must also be input as constant.
All other loads are input on a per node basis. These include any per node loads as well as translational and rota-
tional displacements, velocities, and accelerations. These values are applied directly to the node with no distribu-
tion.These are most commonly used for displacements and variable loading conditions. If you have a load which
varies over a surface, this type of load input will allow you to input an equation to simulate the loading condition.
Direction
Structural loads (i.e. force, force/length, etc.) which are converted to nodal loads upon expansion require input of
the direction. The direction is identified identically to the specification of nodal load direction (see Section 4.3.3.2,
"Model, Load, Nodal") with two differences. The first is that the Direction method is stored. FEMAP does not con-
vert loads into components until you expand or translate. Therefore, if you list or modify these loads, the same
direction method is shown. Second, if you choose the Normal to Surface method, you cannot specify the surface.
FEMAP will automatically use the surface(s) to which the loads are applied.
Method
The Method allows you to choose between a constant
load or a variable load. If a constant load is required,
simply choose Constant and input the values. If a vari-
able load is required (not available for total and per
length loads), you must select Advanced and select the
Equation method. The Function and Interpolation meth-
ods are not available for loads on surfaces.
Equation
Equation allows you to specify a variable loading in terms of the x, y, and z positions of the nodes or elements.
Each of these values may be used in the equation definition, preceded by an !. For example
4.35*!x - 2*!y
would multiply the x coordinate of each node (or element) and then subtract the product of 2 and the y coordinate.
The x, y, and z coordinates are in the coordinate system defined in the main load dialog box. FEMAP will store the
equation, and evaluate it only upon translation or expansion. For instance, if you were working in a cylindrical
coordinate system, x would be the radial coordinate, y the theta coordinate, and z the coordinate in the Z-axis. The
Note: A variable load is only available for elemental loads and nodal loads that are per node. Nodal loads
that are total (i.e. force, moment, etc.) and per area (i.e. force per area, etc.) must be constant.
variable i is not used for loading on geometry, therefore all functions such as XND, and XEL are not applicable and
should not be used. FEMAP stores the equation and only evaluates it when the load is expanded upon translation or
when the Model, Load, Expand command is used.
Midside Node Adjustment
Some loads such as force/area and force distribute the loads on the nodes over the entire area. For many parabolic
elements, you cannot simply distribute the force evenly and obtain an even displacement result. You must apply a
larger value to the midside nodes than the Corner nodes, and this value is in excess of 1/2 the value of the total load
on the element.
You can specify the factor you want on the midside nodes under File, Preferences, Geometry. There are two factors
available for Midside Node Adjustment, Tri-Face and Quad-Face factors. These value represent the percentage of
the load on each midside node. The values default to 1/3. which means for tri-faces, no loads are applied to the cor-
ner nodes, and a -1/12 factor is applied to quad-face corner nodes. These values are standard for many programs. If
your results are inappropriate for your analysis program, please consult the documentation for your program. You
can also remove the option to adjust for midside nodes by clicking this option off.
4.3.4.4 Model, Load, Expand...
...enables you to visualize the nodal and elemental loads which will be created from geometric loads. This com-
mand operates only on the current active load set. When this command is selected, you will see the following dia-
log box.
The Model, Load, Expand command can be used to either expand or
compress the geometric loads. When using it to expand loads, you
have the option to specify which loads to expand (On Point, On
Curve, On Surface) or to expand the entire set (All in Set). If you
select an option other than All in Set, the standard entity selection
box will appear. When compressing loads, individual types of loads
cannot be selected. Compression is always performed on the entire
set.
If a load has already been expanded, and you select to expand it
again, or expand the entire set, an error message will be supplied and
the load will not be expanded a second time. This procedure pre-
vents duplication of loads. When translating to an FEA model, to
prevent duplication, and to evaluate all loads with their current
equation, all loads used in the translation will be compressed, then expanded through the translator, and finally
compressed again after translation. Therefore, any expanded geometric loads which appear as elemental or nodal
loads before expansion, will be converted back to geometric loads.
Convert To Node/Elem
This option allows you to permanently convert the selected loads to nodal/elemental loads. Be careful when using
this option, because you cannot convert back to the original geometric loads. This option can be useful when a load
is mostly constant (or easily described as an equation) over a surface, except at a few nodes (or elements). You can
permanently expand the load, and then use the Modify, Update Other, Scale Load command to change individual
loads.
Combined Nodal Loads
When FEMAP expands multiple geometric loads, it will attempt to combine all similar nodal loads into one load
for each DOF. Many analysis programs require only one load on a DOF. With loads such as forces and moments,
FEMAP will add the components. The only exception is if the loads contain either different vs. time/temp/freq ref-
Note: The location of the nodes are used to evaluate the equation for all loads converted to nodal loads. The
position of the centroid of the elemental face is attached to the loaded curve is used for all elemental
face loads. The position of the centroid of the element is used for non-face loads such as elemental tem-
perature and elemental heat generation. The only exception to the above is FEMAP will use the position
of the nodes to calculate pressure loads if you select the At Corner option for pressures.
Model, Load, Bolt Preload... 4-59
erence functions, different phases, or different freq reference functions for the phase. In these cases, the loads will
remain separate and a warning message will be written.
For loads such as displacement or acceleration, FEMAP will not add values for the same DOF. It will keep these
values separate and provide a warning message that two different values were found for the same DOF. You will
need to modify the input to obtain the desired values at the nodes. The option to permanently convert to nodal loads
could be used in this to expand and then modify the displacements on the nodes.
4.3.4.5 Model, Load, Bolt Preload...
...creates a load representing a Bolt Preload for NX Nas-
tran. The Bolt Preload is available for use in Linear Static
Analysis, Modal Analysis, Buckling, and Advanced Nonlin-
ear Analysis (Solution 601).
The Create Bolt Preload dialog box allows you to enter a
title which will used as the Load Definition title and assign a
color and layer for each Bolt Preload.
Each Bolt Preload must be associated with a Bolt Region.
The Bolt Region can be created prior to creating the Bolt Pre-
load, or elements can be chosen in this dialog box and the
Bolt Regions will then be created automatically.
You must choose the entity type (Bolt Region(s) or Ele-
ment(s)) and specify the Preload value before you can actually choose the entities to apply the load.
Currently, Bolt Preloads can only be applied to Beam and Bar elements. If you choose multiple elements to apply
Bolt Preloads, FEMAP will combine any selected elements which are connected into a single bolt region. This is
actually very useful when creating Bolt Preloads as you can choose all of the Beam or Bar elements in a model oth-
erwise consisting of solid or shell elements. In this case, each connected set of beam/bar elements will become
and individual Bolt Region with appropriate Bolt Preload.
4.3.5 Load Analysis Options
These three commands enable you to set options for different analysis types. Three commands are available, based
upon the type of analysis required: heat transfer analysis, dynamic analysis, and nonlinear analysis. These com-
mands are not used to put loads onto the model. Rather, they simply define certain parameters which are required
for the analysis type. The options contained in each of these commands are discussed below. These commands are
not used if you are performing simple static or modal analysis.
4.3.5.1 Model, Load, Nonlinear Analysis...
...defines the information that is typically required to perform a nonlinear analysis. While this information does not
typically represent a load, it is included in the load menu because it does relate to the other loading conditions and
how they will be applied. Each load set to be used in a nonlinear analysis must have the appropriate solution type
activated.
Note: FEMAP will allow you to choose ANY type of element when selecting elements for applying a Bolt
Preload. If any of those elements are not the right type of element (Bar and Beam elements ONLY
for FEMAP 9.3 and NX Nastran 5), they will not be added to the list and an error message stating
Skipped # of Elements which have invalid types for this command will be sent to the Messages
window.
Solution Type
The solution type determines the type
of solution that will be performed for
the particular load set. Available
options are Static, Creep, and Tran-
sient. Only appropriate control infor-
mation in the remainder of the window
will be available based upon the type
of solution you choose.
Basic
These values provide the time and iter-
ation control information for the non-
linear analysis steps. They control the
Number of Increments and the Time
Increment to be used, as well as the
Maximum Iterations for each step. No
time increment is used for static analy-
sis.
Stiffness Updates
This specifies the number of iterations
to be performed before the stiffness
matrix is updated, as well as the update Method. Five different update methods are available, but not all are appro-
priate for all each solution type. If an inappropriate method is selected, the translator will provide an error message
and automatically choose the default method.
Output Control
Output Control information allows you to request or eliminate output at intermediate steps (static and creep) or
request Output Every Nth Step (transient).
Convergence Tolerances
The type of Convergence Tolerances (Load, Displacement, and/or Work) as well as the tolerance values themselves
are defined in these boxes.
Solution Strategy Overrides
This area provides you with the capability to further control the strategy that will be employed to converge toward
a solution.
Defaults
When you first choose this command, all values will be zero. By pushing this button, nonzero default values will be
entered for all properties. You can then modify these defaults as appropriate.
Copy
Copy allows you to duplicate the nonlinear analysis information from any other load set in the current model.
Advanced
This button enables you to access additional nonlinear analysis options as well as damping inputs for nonlinear
transient analysis. For most problems, the nonlinear options are not required, but they are available for experienced
analysts to modify the default solution controls. The damping values for nonlinear transient analyses can be input
here or under Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis.
Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis... 4-61
Using Advanced Options with
NASTRAN
The options in the Advanced Group,
when written to Nastran, are used to
define the parameters on the
NLPARM statement. In general,
FEMAP does not distinguish
between blanks and zeros when you
enter values into dialog boxes, there-
fore, when the values are written to
Nastran it is normally not possible to
control whether a blank or a zero
will be written. For some of these
fields however this distinction is
important, therefore several special
cases have been implemented. If you
specify a blank, or zero, in the dialog
box for any of these cases, you will
get a blank in your Nastran file. If
you specify a negative value for
Quasi-Newton Vectors, or for Max
Line Searches/Iter, you will get a
0. Similarly, if you specify a value
that is less than -10, for Max Bisec-
tions / Increment, you will get a zero. Values less than -10 were chosen because values down to this value are valid
for that field.
4.3.5.2 Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis...
...provides the solution type and control information for dynamic analyses. Each load set to be utilized in a dynamic
analysis must have the appropriate solution method activated. In addition, a dynamic analysis load is required for
nonlinear transient analysis to define structural damping.
Solution Method
The solution method chooses the type of dynamics solution to be performed. Four available options exist: Direct
Transient, Modal Transient, Direct Frequency, and Modal Frequency. The inappropriate boxes for each Solution
Method will be grayed automatically.
Equivalent Viscous Damping
This box provides damping information for the structure. The Overall Structural Damping Coefficient is input for
all four solution methods, while the Modal Damping Table is utilized for only the two modal methods. The Modal
Damping Table requires a function to define damping information as a function of frequency. Three types of
FEMAP functions can be chosen: Viscous Damping vs. Frequency, Critical Damping vs. Frequency, and Amplifica-
tion vs. Frequency. You can create a Function directly from this dialog box by clicking the Function Icon Button.
Equivalent Viscous Damping Conversion
Information for both system damping and element damping is provided in this box. These values are only input in
direct and modal transient Analysis. These values provide the conversion from the frequency domain, in which
damping is usually defined, into the time domain. The Frequency for System Damping (W3 - Hz) is divided into the
overall damping coefficient (for Nastran and ANSYS), or the material damping values for each material (for
ABAQUS and LS-DYNA3D) and then multiplied by the stiffness to obtain element (or stiffness) damping. The
Frequency for Element Damping (W4 - Hz) is used in combination with the material damping values to obtain
structural damping in Nastran, and mass damping in ABAQUS, ANSYS, and LS-DYNA3D.
Response Based On Modes
For the modal solution methods, these options allow you to choose the number and/or range of modes to include in
the frequency response or transient formulation.
Transient Time Step Interval
For transient analyses, these options control the number of steps, size of steps, and the output interval. If this load is
to be used in a nonlinear transient analysis, these options are overridden by the nonlinear transient time step input.
Frequency Response
The Solutions Frequencies table is chosen in this section. This table defines the frequencies to be analyzed for both
direct and modal frequency analysis. The frequency table is just a function with a list of frequencies in the X posi-
tion. The y position is irrelevant and will be ignored. A solution frequency table can be automatically created by
pressing the Modal Freq button. If you are using Nastran, you may also select the Advanced option to define the
range of solution frequencies. You can create a Function directly from this dialog box by clicking the Function Icon
Button.
Random Analysis Options
This option allows you to define a Power Spectral Density (PSD) function to be used for random analysis. You sim-
ply use the Model, Function command to define the PSD values as a function of frequency (a vs. frequency func-
tion type), and then select this function under Random Analysis Options. This option is used only for random
response analysis. You can create a Function directly from this dialog box by clicking the Function Icon Button.
Modal Freq
If you have previously performed a modal analysis on your
model, and have the solution information in the current
model, you can automatically create a solution frequencies
function/table from that output. Simply press Modal Freq,
and you will see the following:
The modal frequency in each output case will be selected for
the Solution Frequency table. Additionally, frequencies in a
band near each modal frequency can be chosen by using the
Additional Solution Frequency Points. The Number of Points
per Existing Mode defines the number of frequencies to be
included for each modal frequency, while the Frequency
Band Spread defines the placement of the additional frequen-
cies.
Choosing only one point per mode will select just the modal
frequencies. Choosing three points per mode will select the modal frequencies and two additional frequencies at the www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis... 4-63
modal frequency plus and minus the spread value. The number of points must always be odd so that the modal fre-
quencies are selected.
Enforced Motion
Pressing the Enforced Motion button enables you to define a base acceleration. This option creates a base mass,
links it to a set of base nodes in your model with rigid elements, and applies an equivalent base force.
To begin you specify coordinates for the base mass using the standard coordinate definition dialog box. A node will
be automatically created at this location. The next dialogue box is the standard entity selection box, which asks you
to choose the nodes on the base. A rigid element is then created with the newly generated node as the independent
node and the selected nodes as the dependent nodes. Next you define the base acceleration using the standard load
creation dialog box. The type of load to create will be limited to either acceleration or rotational acceleration. You
must choose a time or frequency dependent function to associate with the acceleration.
The final required input is the mass and the acceleration scale factor. They are utilized to generate a nodal force
(force = base mass * specified acceleration) at the independent node of the newly created rigid body. The values are
automatically computed based on your current model and the acceleration that you chose. The default for the mass
value is several orders of magnitude larger than the mass of the current model so the large mass will drive the rest
of the model.You can either simply press OK to accept them, change them here, or edit the force later with the Mod-
ify, Edit commands.
Advanced
As with nonlinear analysis, an Advanced button is provided to give experienced analysts more control over the
solution strategy. The following dialog box is provided to enable choices for Mass Formulation and Dynamic Data
Recovery.
You can also specify addition analysis inputs for Solution Frequencies and Random Response Analysis.
Solution Frequencies / Additional Frequencies
This option provides an alternative method to the Solution Frequencies function on the main Dynamic Analysis dia-
log box. The Solution Frequencies section defines the first set of frequencies defined on a FREQi card. A addi-
tional set of frequencies with all the same options as in the first frequency set can be defined in the Additional
Frequencies section. If additional frequencies are defined, then a second FREQi card will be used. This is currently
only supported for Nastran.
If you have selected a direct frequency analysis, only the Default List and the Frequency Range (Min, Max, No. of
Intervals) options will be available, although logarithmic interpolation can also be employed for the frequency
range. If you select Modal Frequency as the analysis type, additional types to determine the solution frequencies
from the natural modes will be available. These are Cluster around Modes, which corresponds to the Nastran
FREQ3 card, and Spread Around Modes (Nastran FREQ4 card). Cluster around Modes will also have a logarithmic
interpolation option.
Random Analysis
There are currently two options supported for random analysis. The first is the ANSYS PSD type: ANSYS has the
capability to input acceleration (in g2/Hz or acc units2/Hz, displacement, velocity, or force). By simply changing
this option, the type of input on the PSD Function in the main Dynamic Analysis dialog box is modified. The sec-
ond is Nastran PSD Interpolation: Nastran has the ability to define the PSD table in the following four formats...
(Log, Log), (Linear, Linear), (X Log, Y Lin), (X Lin, YLog). By simply changing this option, the type of Interpola-
tion used on the PSD table input (Nastran TABRND1) in the main Dynamic Analysis dialog box is modified.
Copy
This selection allows you to copy dynamic analysis options from any other load set in the current model.
4.3.5.3 Model, Load, Heat Transfer Analysis
This command enables you to define
heat transfer constants, thermal char-
acteristics for convection, and select
the type of formulation to use for
different types of heat transfer prob-
lems.
Radiation
If you are going to perform a radia-
tion analysis, you must specify the
temperature difference between
absolute zero and zero in the temper-
ature system that you are using, and
the Stefan-Boltzmann constant.
Free Convection
For free convection analysis, you
can choose between two alternative
forms of the free convection temper-
ature exponent. They are
The Convection Exponent is the value shown as EXPF in the above equations. These options are currently used for
NX Nastran and MSC.Nastran only.
Forced Convection
The forced convection values specify the properties and behavior of the fluid to be analyzed. These options corre-
spond directly to the options on the Nastran PCONVM and MAT4 commands. Refer to the Nastran documentation
for more information about the proper values for these options.
4.3.6 Load Set Manipulation
This section of the menu works to create either additional load sets or new loads from output. There are four com-
mands available: Copy, Combine, From Output, and From Freebody. Each command is briefly discussed below.
q h u
CTRLND
T T
AMB
( )
EXPF
T T
AMB
( ) =
q h u
CTRLND
T
EXPF
T
EXPF
AMB ( ) =
Standard
Alternate
Model, Load, Copy... 4-65
4.3.6.1 Model, Load, Copy...
... duplicates the active load set. All loads, including body, nodal elemental, and geometric loads are copied to the
new set. If you do not want to duplicate all of them, use the Delete, Model, Load commands to remove the ones that
you do not want from the new set.
Input for this command is minimal. Simply specify the ID of the load set that you want to create. This new set must
not exist. FEMAP will create a duplicate copy of the active set with the ID that you specify. After the copy has been
made, FEMAP will ask whether you want to activate the new set. Answer No if you want to continue working with
the original load set. Answer Yes to work with the new copy.
4.3.6.2 Model, Load, Combine...
... enables you to combine two or more load sets into one new load set based upon the following formula
Choose any number of load sets
from the From list (Hold the
CTRL key when you click to
choose multiple load sets one at a
time or the SHIFT key to choose a
range of Load Sets), then enter a
Scale factor (Default is 1), then
select an existing Load Set to
place the load combination when
finished (or use the default
0..New Set to create a new load
set). If you are creating a new load
set, you can give the new com-
bined Load Set a title.
Once the Load Set(s) are selected
from the From list, the scale factor
and To are set, click Add Combi-
nation to add the selected Load
Sets to the Combinations list.
You will notice that the scale factor will proceed the Load Set number and title when placed in the list. You can use
the Remove Combination button to remove any number of load combinations from the Combinations list.
Temperature loads will not be linearly combined. FEMAP will simply copy the nodal and elemental temperatures.
If conflicting temperatures exist for the same node or element in the individual load sets, FEMAP will use the last
temperature. Also, If loads exist on the same node or element in different sets that are combined, the resulting set
will simply obtain multiple loads on that node or element, which can then be combined with Tools, Check, Coinci-
dent Loads.
4.3.6.3 Model, Load, From Output...
... lets you convert output data from one or more output vectors into various load types.
The loads are always created in the active load set. When you choose this command, FEMAP displays a dialog box
to let you choose the type of load you want to create. After you make a selection, and press OK, the Create Loads
From Output dialog box will be displayed. If you are creating nodal or elemental temperatures, pressures or heat
transfer loads, you will be able to specify an output set and output vector which contains the temperature data. For
other types of loads, six vectors can be selected.
Hint: You may want to use the Model, Load, Set command to modify the title of the new copy. FEMAP will
always create it with the same title as the original set that was copied.
Load A
1
Load
1
A
2
Load
2
A
n
Load
n
+ + + =
Data from the six vectors will
be converted to the six loading
degrees of freedom. If you leave
any vectors blank (or zero), no
loads will be created in that
direction. You must always
specify at least one vector.
When creating elemental pres-
sures, or many of the elemental
heat transfer loads, you must
also specify a Face ID where
the load will act. You cannot
create output on different element faces at the same time with this command. Also, all loads are created in global
rectangular coordinates, therefore the output must also be in global rectangular. You can choose the Color and
Layer for all new loads.
Finally, after you complete these options and press OK, the standard entity selection dialog box will be displayed.
You must select the nodes or elements where loads will be created. You can either select your entire model, in
which case all output will be converted, or limit the conversion to some selected portion of your model. In either
case, loads will only be created if output exists for a particular node or element.
Why Create Loads from Output?
The primary reason to convert output data to load data is for use in future analyses. For example, you may want to
convert that data to temperature loads from a heat transfer run in a structural analysis. Similarly, you might want to
use displacement, force or acceleration output from one structural analysis as a loading condition for further analy-
ses.
Converting Between Nodal and Elemental Temperatures
Another reason to use this command is to convert nodal to elemental temperatures, or vice versa. If you have
defined temperatures and need to convert them to the opposite type, this command can be combined with several
others to accomplish that task. First, convert your current temperatures to output data using Model, Output, From
Load command. Then use Model, Output, Convert to create an additional output vector of the opposite type.
Finally, use Model, Load, From Output and select the vector created with Model, Output, Convert.
4.3.6.4 Model, Load, Map Output From Model...
... lets you map certain output data from 2-D elements on one model (Source) onto another (Target). The two
models can have completely different meshes and FEMAP gives you a few options for the method used to map
the output.
There are a few things required for this command to be used effectively:
1. You must have both the Source and the Target models open in the same instance of FEMAP
2. The Source model must have output which can be mapped onto the nodes of a Target model. Output
which can be mapped is restricted to displacements and temperatures on 2-D elements only (Quad and Triangular
elements)
3. The Source model must have a group containing all the elements which have output data to be mapped onto
the nodes or elements of the Target model.
Output to Map
All fields must have values for this command to function properly. You will know you have enough data in your
Source model if all the drop-down menus have selectable values.
Model, Load, Map Output From Model... 4-67
From Model
This menu allows you to choose a Model to use as
your Source model for the mapping process. If
you have more than 2 models open inside one
instance of FEMAP, all of the other models except
the current model will appear in the From Model
drop-down menu.
Results on Group
This menu allows you to choose a Group in the
Source model to use for the mapping process.
If you have multiple groups in your Source
model, all of the groups will appear in the Results
on Group drop-down menu. The group can only
contain 2-D elements (Quad and Triangular ele-
ments)
Output Set
This menu allows you to choose an Output Set in
the Source model to use for the mapping pro-
cess. If you have multiple output sets in your
Source model, all of the output sets will appear
in the Output Set drop-down menu.
Output Vector
This menu allows you to choose an Output Vector
in the Source model to use for the mapping process. Only available Output Vectors in the Source model will
appear in the Output Vector drop-down menu.
Values for Locations with No Map
This menu allows you to choose a mapping option for entities which do not have a one-to-one mapping from
the Source to the Target. When a node is not mapped it is because a Target nodes normal projection does
not fall within any Source Element. The options for nodes that are not mapped:
0..Set to Zero - Sets all entities without a direct map to the value of zero (0.0)
1..Set to Value - Sets all entities without a direct map to a specified value. The value can be specified as a
constant or in X, Y, and Z components.
2..Extend Closest - Extends the value to the closest Target Entity.
3..Interpolate - Does a linear interpolation using the source values. (Default)
4..No Output - Applies no output values to any entities which do not have a direct map. FEMAP will also
automatically create a group of Target nodes which have not been mapped.
Target
You can choose to Map Output to the target model using either the To Model Loads or To Data Surface method.
When the To Model Loads option is used, loads of the chosen type (Forces, Displacements, or Temperatures on
Nodes; Pressures or Temperatures on Elements) will be created directly on the target models nodes or elements in
the current load set.
When To Data Surface is used, FEMAP will create a new Data Surface to be used in any loading condition of the
current model or saved to the Data Surface library for use in other models. The only input additional input for the
To Data Surface method is Data Surface Name, which is optional, but recommended.
The following figure shows an example of a common use for this command:
4.3.6.5 Model, Load, From Freebody...
...creates loads directly from a freebody display. You must have a freebody display active and Show Load Summa-
tion under Freebody Display must be on. The only input to this command is the nodes to apply the loads. FEMAP
will automatically create loads from the freebody display for the nodes you selected. If you have requested a total
load calculation at a specific location in the freebody display, FEMAP will ask you if it is OK to create this load as
well as the individual loads. If you say Yes to the Total Load question, FEMAP will create a node at this location
and then create the appropriate load.
4.3.7 Activate/Create Constraint Set
All nodal constraints, constraint equations, and geometric constraints are created in the active constraint set. There-
fore, you must always activate a constraint set prior to creating either of them.
Course Thermal model with
Temperature output
Fine Structural model receives mapped
Nodal Temperatures as a Load from
Course Thermal model (temperature loads
not displayed in figure for clarity)
Temperature Loads converted to Output
for viewing of Mapping to closest node.
Nodal Temperature Loads could also be
used to perform Thermal Stress analysis
Fine Structural Model with
Nodal Temperatures displayed
as output
Model, Constraint, Set... 4-69
4.3.7.1 Model, Constraint, Set...
... makes a new constraint set or activates an existing set.
To create a new constraint set, enter an ID which does not appear in the list of available sets. Then enter a title and
press OK. As always, you should choose a descriptive title. The titles are displayed, along with the IDs, whenever
you are asked to select a constraint set. To activate a constraint set that already exists, simply choose it from the list,
or enter its ID, and press OK. To deactivate all constraint sets, press Reset.
4.3.8 Constraint Definitions
Every time a constraint is created on finite element entities (i.e., Model, Constraint, Nodal; Model, Constraint,
Nodal on Face; and Model, Constraint, Equation) or geometry (Model, Constraint, On Point; Model, Constraint,
On Curve; Model, Constraint, on Surface) a Constraint Definition will also be created in FEMAP. These Con-
straint Definitions will appear in the Constraints branch of the Model Info tree and can be given a title.
Each Constraint Definition will contain all of the individual constraints which were created at the same time using
a Model, Constraint... command. Constraint Definitions can then be edited, listed, and deleted and all individual
constraints contained in that Constraint Definition will be edited, listed, or deleted.
For example, if you chose to put a constraint for Degrees of Freedom TX, TY, and TZ on 5 selected nodes, a single
Constraint Definition would appear in the Model Info tree. In this case, if the Constraint Definition were to be
edited, 5 individual constraints would be modified using one command.
Constraint Definitions can be removed at any time using the Remove Definition command on the context sensitive
menu in the Model Info tree and the individual constraints from that Constraint Definition will be moved under the
appropriate heading in the Other Constraints branch. The Other Constraints branch contains headings for On
Geometry, On Mesh, and Equations.
Also, a Constraint Definition can be created from any number of constraints of the same type (i.e., any number of
Nodal Constraints, Constraints on Curves, or Constraint Equations, etc) by highlighting them in the Model Info tree
and using the Create Definition command from the context sensitive menu.
Note: Each Constraint Equation created will also create a new Constraint Definition. These Constraint Defini-
tions can then be combined.
Note: All of the commands for listing, deleting, and modifying individual constraints are still available in
FEMAP.
Note: If you combine multiple constraint equations into one constraint definition, you will be prompted to edit
each constraint equation one at a time.
Shift+F2
Enter Set ID to
activate here
or, choose an
existing set
from this list
Click here to
deactivate all
sets.
If you choose constraints of various types and then use the Create Definition command, FEMAP will create a Con-
straint Definition for each separate type of constraint that was highlighted.
For more information about the Remove Definition and Create Definition commands, along with the process of
combining Constraint Definitions, please see Section 7.2.1, "Tools, Model Info" under Loads and Constraints in
the Model Info Tree
4.3.9 Finite Element (Nodal) Constraints
FEMAP allows you to apply constraints directly to nodes or create constraint equations which provide a relation-
ship between DOFs of nodes. There are three commands which apply constraints directly to the nodes: Nodal,
Nodal on Face, and Equation. Each of these commands is discussed below.
4.3.9.1 Model, Constraint, Nodal...
Nodal constraints are used
to prevent movement in
one or more nodal direc-
tions (degrees of freedom).
Creating nodal constraints
is a two step process: (1)
select the nodes to be con-
strained using the standard
entity selection dialog box,
and (2) choose the degrees
of freedom, or component directions, at each of these nodes, which will be constrained. The same constraints will
be applied to all of the nodes that you select in a single command.
Color/Palette and Layer:
These controls define parameters for the nodal constraint to be created.
Coordinate System:
This list allows you to choose a coordinate system which will define the nodal degrees of freedom, and hence the
constraint directions, for all selected nodes. The coordinate system you select here replaces the coordinate system
that you selected as the nodal output coordinate system (see Section 4.2.1, "Model, Node..."). If the coordinate sys-
tem that you choose is different from your previous selection, you will be asked to confirm that you want to over-
write the previous selection for all nodes.
Specifying Degrees of Freedom
Any combination of the six nodal degrees of freedom (TX, TY, TZ, RX, RY and RZ) can be selected using the
check boxes. In many cases however, standard combinations of degrees of freedom will be needed. For these situa-
tions, you can quickly select the combination by pressing the appropriate command button.
The following table shows the combinations which are available. In the table, * indicates a constrained degree of
freedom.
Note: Be careful when you change the output coordinate system. If you have other constraints defined on the
same node, even in other constraint sets, you are implicitly changing their orientation every time you
change the output coordinate system. These changes can result in modeling errors which FEMAP can
not detect. Remember, you can only have one output coordinate system per node. All constraints, in all
sets, as well as everything else that references nodal degrees of freedom, are specified relative to that
coordinate system.
Command
Button
TX TY TZ RX RY RZ
Fixed * * * * * *
Free
Pinned * * *
No Rotation * * *
Model, Constraint, Nodal on Face... 4-71
Simply choose the command button you need, followed by OK, to create the constraint.
Other Uses for Nodal Constraints
In most cases, you will want to create nodal constraints to do exactly what their name implies - constrain your
model. For some types of analysis (usually modal analysis) other sets of degrees of freedom can be used. One typi-
cal example of this is the analysis set (Nastran ASET, ANSYS M set, STARDYNE GUYAN set) which is often
used for reduced modal analysis. FEMAP's translators support these additional, non-constraint sets. All you have to
do is create an additional set, just like you specified your constraints, which contains the nodal degrees of freedom
that you want. It is a good idea to specify a title that will help you to properly identify the set. Then when you trans-
late your model, simply choose this set for its intended purpose, instead of translating it as a constraint set.
Quick Constraint Icons
These icons create specific types of nodal constraint combinations on a selected set of nodes:
...Fixed - constrains all six degrees-of-freedom
...Pinned - constrains the three translational degrees-of-freedom
...No Rotation - constrains the three rotational degrees-of-freedom
4.3.9.2 Model, Constraint, Nodal on Face...
...works just like Model, Constraint, Nodal, but instead of directly selecting the nodes where constraints will be
applied, you select elements and element faces. FEMAP then automatically finds all of the nodes on those faces
and applies the specified constraints. For more information, see Section 4.3.3.3, "Model, Load, Nodal On Face...".
4.3.9.3 Model, Constraint, Equation...
...relates the motion or displacement of two or more (up to 70) nodal degrees of freedom. When you create a con-
straint equation, you must specify all of the terms in the following equation:
Equation coefficients are directly specified in the constraint equation definition dialog box:
X Symmetry * * *
Y Symmetry * * *
Z Symmetry * * *
X AntiSym * * *
Y AntiSym * * *
Z AntiSym * * *
Command
Button
TX TY TZ RX RY RZ
where
A
j
are the equation coefficients, and
u
j
are the nodal degrees of freedom
0 A
j
u
j
=
Add, Multiple Nodes, Replace, Delete:
Nodal degrees of freedom are identified by selecting a
node number and selecting the degree of freedoms
(see table below). To input one node at a time, define
the coefficient, select the degrees of freedom, and
then select/input the node and press Add. This will
add it to the constraint equation.
You can also add multiple nodes, if you have multiple
nodes in the constraint equation that have identical
degrees of freedoms and coefficient. Simply input the
coefficient, select the degrees of freedom, and then
press the Multiple Nodes button. You will then see the
standard entity selection dialog box. Select the appro-
priate nodes and press OK. This will add these nodes
with the selecting degrees of freedom and coefficient
to the constraint equation.
You can also modify your selections by highlighting a selection in the dialog box. When a selection is highlighted,
you can remove it by pressing Delete, or change it to your current pick by pressing Replace.
As always, the nodal degrees of freedom are in the X, Y and Z directions defined by the nodal output coordinate
systems.
ID, Color, Layer:
In addition to the equation terms, you must define an equation ID. This ID must be unique within each constraint
set, and is used only to identify the equation within FEMAP. The ID will automatically increment each time that
you create a new equation. You can also specify a Color and Layer for each equation.
4.3.10 Geometric Constraints
You may also create nodal constraints in FEMAP by constraining geometry. FEMAP will automatically transfer
these constraints to nodes attached to the constrained geometry upon translation or expansion. There are two types
of geometric constraints - standard and advanced. Standard geometric constraints only allow you to specify either
all translations (DOF 123 - Pinned), all translations + all rotations (DOF 123456 - Fixed), or all rotations (DOF 456
- No Rotation). These combinations do not require setting or changing the nodal output coordinate systems during
translation, and can therefore be defined in any number of constraint sets, in any combination. Advanced geometric
constraints give you full control of the degrees of freedom to constrain, but require more care when you are speci-
fying them. Since analysis programs only support one output coordinate system per node, it is possible to specify
combinations of advanced geometric constraints that can not be solved in a single analysis.
Geometric constraints are expanded to nodal constraints upon translation or expansion. If you have already defined
nodal constraints for nodes on the geometry, FEMAP will combine the constraints. In this manner, you could pin
nodes on a curve, and then create a no rotation condition on one of the nodes through Model, Constraint, Nodal,
and the combined result would be a pinned surface with one node as fixed.
Number DOF
1 TX, X Translation
2 TY, Y Translation
3 TZ, Z Translation
4 RX, X Rotation
5 RY, Y Rotation
6 RZ, Z Rotation
Geometric Constraints 4-73
The geometric constraints, similar to the geo-
metric loads, are divided into four com-
mands: On Point, On Curve, On Surface, and
Expand. Whether you are defining con-
straints on points, curves or surfaces, you
will see the same dialog box. The Standard
constraint types are available at the top of the
dialog box. The Advanced types are at the
bottom of the box.
Advanced Constraints
There are three available approaches to
defining advanced geometric constraints.
Arbitrary in CSys is available for points,
curves and surfaces. Surface is available
for all surface constraints. Cylinder/Hole is
only available if you select one or more
cylindrical surfaces.
The first, Arbitrary in CSys, gives you full
control over the six nodal degrees of freedom
in any coordinate system you specify. You
can either pick a coordinate system from the
list, or choose Use Nodal Output Sys. If
you pick a coordinate system, all nodes will
have their output coordinate systems
changed to that system, and the constraints will be applied. If you choose Use Nodal Output Sys, only the con-
straints will be applied - it is up to you to manually define the nodal output coordinate systems so that the degrees
of freedom are properly interpreted.
Surface constraints are intended to automatically select the degrees of freedom necessary to match certain physi-
cal conditions. In all of these cases, new coordinate systems will be created, as necessary, and assigned as nodal
output coordinate systems, to create the selected conditions. Sliding along Surface will constrain the direction
perpendicular to the surface, and if Include Rotational DOF is checked, the rotational degrees of freedom around
the two axes that result in rotations out of the surface. Move Normal to Surface does just the opposite, constrain-
ing the in-surface translations and optionally the in-surface rotations. If you choose Sliding in Specified Direc-
tion, degrees of freedom normal to that direction will be constrained. In this case, you will also be asked to specify
the sliding direction, which is used to align the resulting output coordinate systems.
Cylinder/Hole is very much like Surface, except that they can only be applied to cylindrical surfaces. In this
case the output coordinate system will be aligned with the axis of the cylinder/hole, and you can constrain any com-
bination of the three directions.
Expanding Advanced Constraints
Any time you expand advanced geometric constraints, the nodal output coordinate systems will be created and
assigned. This will happen whether you use the Expand command, or simply translate the model for analysis.
These output coordinate systems will not be removed if the expanded constraints are compressed. In the case of
translation for analysis, the output coordinate systems are needed for proper interpretation of the analysis results.
As stated before, some care must be taken when applying advanced geometric conditions. Because of the restric-
tion in analysis programs of a single output coordinate system per node, there are many conditions that can not be
represented in a single analysis. For example, lets assume that you wanted to analyze one condition that con-
strained some arbitrary set of DOF in a specified coordinate system (using Arbitrary in CSys), and you also
wanted to analyze another condition that specified Sliding in Surface. Even if you defined two constraint sets,
this will not in general be possible, since the output coordinate system specified for the first condition may not
match the one required for the second. If you attempt to do this, FEMAP will do attempt to match the second con-
dition as closely as possible to your request, but you should carefully check your model to see that it is what you
want. To investigate this a little further, it is good to understand the process FEMAP uses to expand these con-
straints. FEMAP will first attempt to define the output coordinate systems for each node. Starting with the first con-
straint set required/selected, the required coordinate directions at the nodes will be defined. The process will
continue until all coordinate directions at each node have been defined. This may allow proper matching of more
than one constraint request - for example constraining sliding in surface, really only requires one direction be spec-
ified - the normal to the surface - both of the in-surface directions will be constrained, and can therefore be arbi-
trarily specified, as long as they are in-surface. This allows FEMAP to also properly handle another constraint
request that might require a specific in-surface direction. Once the coordinate systems have been computed and
assigned, then FEMAP will start the process of actually assigning constraints. At this time, the desired constraint
directions are considered individually. If they match with the coordinate directions of the output coordinate system,
as all should if they meet the single output coordinate system restriction, they are simply applied to the nodes. If
multiple requests force the coordinate system to be improperly defined, then request will not precisely match the
coordinate system - in this case every degree of freedom that is partially constrained will be fully constrained.
4.3.10.1 Model, Constraint, On Point...
...allows you to apply constraints directly to points, which are then transformed to nodal constraints upon transla-
tion or expansion. This command can ease the entity selection process since you will typically have many more
nodes than points in your model, however, it is often just as easy to apply the constraints directly to the nodes with
the Model, Constraint, Nodal command.
4.3.10.2 Model, Constraint, On Curve...
...allows you to apply constraints directly to curves. You simply select the curves through the standard entity selec-
tion box, and then select the type of constraint. Nodes attached to that curve will then be constrained upon transla-
tion or expansion.
4.3.10.3 Model, Constraint, On Surface...
...allows you to apply constraints directly to surfaces. You simply select the surfaces through the standard entity
selection box, and then select the type of constraint. Nodes attached to that curve will then be constrained upon
translation or expansion.
4.3.10.4 Model, Constraint, Expand...
...is used to expand or compress geometric constraints. It operates
identically to Model, Load, Expand. You can select individual types
to expand, or an entire set. You can also compress an entire set.
If you choose Convert to Nodal, the geometric constraint will be
removed and be replaced by nodal constraints. Just like with the
Model, Load, Expand command, be careful when converting to
nodal. This conversion is permanent. You cannot go back to the
original geometric load.
.
.
4.3.11 Constraint Set Manipulation
This section contains command to copy or combine entire constraint sets.
4.3.11.1 Model, Constraint, Copy...
...duplicates the active constraint set. All nodal constraints and constraint equations are copied to the new set. If you
do not want to duplicate all of them, use the Delete, Model, Constraint - Definition or Delete, Model, Constraint -
Individual commands to remove unwanted constraints from the new set.
Model, Constraint, Combine... 4-75
Input for this command is minimal. Simply specify the ID of the constraint set that you want to create. This new set
must not already exist. FEMAP will create a duplicate copy of the active set with the ID that you specify.
After the copy has been made, FEMAP will ask whether you want to activate the new set. Answer no if you want to
continue working with the original constraint set. Answer yes to work with the new copy.
4.3.11.2 Model, Constraint, Combine...
... enables you to combine two or more constraint sets into one new constraint set. This option works much like
Model, Load, Combine, (See Section 4.3.6.2, "Model, Load, Combine...") except there is no scale factor input, and
you have the option to Combine or Overwrite constraints for each set that you add to the Combinations list. A +
in front of the Load Set name designates Combine, while an O designates Overwrite.
Hint: You may want to use the Model, Constraint, Set command to modify the title of the new copy. FEMAP
will always create it with the same title as the original set that was copied.
4.4 Creating Connections and Regions
The commands under the Connect menu are used to create connections usually by creating all of the different enti-
ties required to set up contact conditions. How these contact conditions are used depends on the selected options
and the Finite Element solver being used to perform the analysis.
There are basically three steps in creating contact for these programs. They involve three different entity creations:
Connection Property
Connection Region
Connectors
This type of contact is currently supported for NX Nastran, ABAQUS, ANSYS, MARC, LS-DYNA3D, and NE/
NASTRAN. In most cases, the solver you are using determines which Connection Property will need to be used to
create appropriate contact conditions.
The top portion of the Connect menu aids in the creation of connections based entirely on geometry. FEMAP has a
command to automatically determine which geometric bodies will come into contact with one another based on
some factors and automatically generate the Connection Regions, Connection Properties, and Connectors. There is
also a command which allows you to set-up contact conditions by choosing specific surfaces (or sets of surfaces) to
use as Connection Regions, then selecting a Connection Property which is used to create a Connector between the
Connection Regions.
The middle portion of the Connect menu allows you to create each separate type of entity required to set up contact
conditions. These commands allow you to use nodes, elements, or property information to generate Connection
Regions, as well as geometry. Also, depending on your solver, curves can sometimes be used to create analytical
rigid surfaces for use with axisymmetric models.
Connection regions are usually geometry, element, or node-based regions for contact, but the same concept can be
used to create regions for other types of analysis conditions.
The bottom portion of the Connect menu may be used to create three specialized types of regions useful for Nastran
users, Fluid Regions, Bolt Regions (used to apply a Bolt Pre-load in NX Nastran only), and Rotor Regions (used to
define rotors for Rotor Dynamics in NX Nastran only)
A Fluid Region allows you to create a region of elements to simulate either a finite volume internal fluid (i.e. a
fluid in a contained area) or an infinite volume external fluid (i.e., ship floating in a body of water). The regions
can be created in a similar manner to Connection Regions by using element IDs and face numbers OR elements
associated to the positive or negative side of a surface. Along with defining the physical regions that can be
affected by the fluid, there are additional options which can be set up for creating the MFUILD entry for the Nas-
tran solver.
A Bolt Region is used to create a region of elements where you would like to apply a bolt preload. The preload
is a specified torque which has been translated into an axial load, arising from components in an assembly being
bolted together. Each Bolt Region represents a bolt and there can be multiple bolts in a single model, all with
unique preloads. When analyzing preloaded bolts, you may be interested in obtaining the stresses due to the
preload condition alone or due to a combination of the bolt preload and additional loading conditions.
A Rotor Region is used to create a region of nodes which you would like to specify as a rotor for Rotor Dynamics
in NX Nastran. There are also options to set the rotation axis, damping values, and individual rotor load sets.
FEMAP gives you the ability to enable and disable Fluid, Bolt, and Rotor Regions which can be very useful
when trying different numbers of MFLUIDs, Bolt Preloads, and Rotors in different analysis runs.
4.4.1 Connect, Automatic...
...creates connections automatically based on the proximity of geometric entities selected in your model using a
number of parameters. These parameters include specific values for Tolerance (distance between bodies) and Angle
Tolerance, as well as choice of a Detection Strategy (Minimal to Aggressive) and options for the way multiple
Connection Regions will be combined on the same solid.
Connect, Automatic... 4-77
FEMAP will automatically create Connection Regions, a specific Connection Property (or use one that has already
been defined), and Connectors between bodies which are within the tolerance values and fit the Detection Strategy
criteria. If you would like to create these entities one at a time, please see Section 4.4.3, "Connect, Connection
Property...", Section 4.4.4, "Connect, Connection Region...", and Section 4.4.5, "Connect, Connector... (Contact
Pair)"
Coincident Surface Detection
Tolerance
Essentially, the Tolerance value is a distance between bodies that
FEMAP will use to determine if automatic connections should be
generated between surfaces. The default value for Tolerance is set
to be 5 times the default node merge tolerance in FEMAP.
In some cases, you may need to change this value to have FEMAP
detect more or less surfaces for auto-connection.
Angle Tolerance
The Angle Tolerance can be used to allow FEMAP to detect connections between surfaces on bodies which are not
planar to one another. By default, FEMAP will only create contact between surfaces which are within 1 degree of
being planar to one another.
Many times you will only want to create contact conditions between the surfaces of bodies which are somewhat
planar to one another. This is especially the case for setting up Glued/Bonded contact.
Detection Strategy
FEMAP gives you 5 different options for Detection Strategy. Depending on the Detection Strategy you choose
FEMAP will go from detecting a minimal amount of connections using a limited number of geometric entities to
actually swelling bodies (internally, the geometry will not actually be changed in the model) and attempting to
Boolean them together for the purpose of finding the maximum number of surfaces for use in creating connections.
As you move from left to right, you are adding methods of detection. For example, if you are on Detection Strategy
2, FEMAP will actually perform Detection Strategy 1 and then Detection Strategy 2. If you are on Detection Strat-
egy 5, Detection Strategies 1-4 will be attempted and then Detection Strategy 5.
Here is a little more information on each option going from Left (Minimal) to Right (Aggressive)
Analytical - Planes Only (Minimal) - FEMAP will only create connections between planar surfaces on bod-
ies within the Tolerance and Angle Tolerance detection criteria.
Analytical - Cylinders, Spheres, Cones, and Toroids (Default) - In addition to creating connections between
planar surfaces, FEMAP will also look for connections between sets of cylindrical, spherical, conical, and
toroidal surfaces. This is the default setting for FEMAP and will often find the most appropriate surfaces for
creating connections.
Boolean - FEMAP will create Connections using adjacent surfaces on bodies which could be Booleaned
together if you were using a command such as Geometry, Solid, Add... and are within the other criteria.
Swell, then Boolean - FEMAP will actually swell all of the selected solids by 1/2 the value specified in Tol-
erance and then attempt to Boolean the swelled solids together. If after swelling a Boolean can take place,
Connections will be created between the surfaces on those bodies which fulfill the detection criteria.
Intermittent Swelling, then Boolean (Aggressive) - FEMAP will actually swell all of the selected solids by
intermittent values based on the Tolerance value and then attempt to Boolean the swelled solids together after
each iteration. If after swelling a Boolean can take place, Connections will be created between the surfaces on
those bodies which fulfill the detection criteria.
Note: FEMAP determines the default node merge tolerance
based on overall model size. The number is 1/10000
of the model box diagonal (think of the model box
being an invisible box that completely encapsulates
every entity in the model).
You can override the default node merge tolerance by
specifying a value in Tools, Parameters.
Check for Connections in same Solid
When this option is on, FEMAP will search for surfaces on the same solid which fulfill the detection criteria and
then create a connection between those surfaces. This can be helpful if you are performing an analysis on a part
(often times a circular part) where the two ends will be clamped together or a rubber boot which may contact
itself in many places as it is displaced. This option is off by default.
Combine all Connections between Solids
When this option is on, FEMAP will combine all Connection Regions it has created automatically on a single solid
into a single Connection Region for that particular solid. This limits the number of Connection Regions which will
be created in an assembly model containing a number of solids. This option is on by default but if you turn it off
you will be able to see exactly which surfaces FEMAP is detecting to create Connection Regions and which sets of
Connection Regions are being connected with Connectors automatically.
Connection Property
This portion of the of the Auto Detection Option for Connections dialog box allows you to create a new default
Connection Property or choose an existing Connection Property to use when automatically creating connections.
Contact - Creates a new Connection Property using 0..Contact as the Type and will enter the same default
values which are entered when the Defaults button is used in the Define Connection Property dialog box
Glued - Creates a new Connection Property using 1..Glued as the Type and will enter the same default values
which are entered when the Defaults button is used in the Define Connection Property dialog box
Property - Allows you to choose any previously created Connection Property from a from a drop-down list.
4.4.2 Connect, Surfaces...
...allows simple creation of a connection between two single surfaces, a set of surfaces and a single surface, or
two sets of surfaces. Basically, it allows you to create 2 separate Connection Regions then a automatically creates a
Connector between those Connection Regions using a specified Connection Property.
Connect Surfaces
Master - Creates a new Connection Region using a selected surface or surfaces if Multiple has been chosen to
be used as the Master in a Connector.
Slave - Creates a new Connection Region using a selected surface or surfaces if Multiple has been chosen to be
used as the Slave in a Connector.
Note: If you dont know which settings to use for Automatic Detection, it is better to start with the default val-
ues for the Tolerance and Angle Tolerance and the Minimal Detection Strategy options. FEMAP will
not overwrite any Connections or create duplicate Connections which have been created, so you can use
larger Tolerance settings and more Agressive Detection Strategies to have FEMAP detect additional
connections.
Also, connections will not be created between surfaces linked with Adjacent Surface Matching.
Note: You may want to turn this option off when using the Check for Connection in same Solid option in order
for FEMAP to create Connectors between surfaces on the same solid, which some analysis codes will
require in order to create self-contact conditions on the same part.
Connect, Connection Property... 4-79
Connection Property
FEMAP allows you to choose an existing Connection Property to use when creating this connection. There is also
an option to create a new Connection Property.
Search for Related Surfaces
When this option is turned on, FEMAP will search for Related Surfaces to also put into the Master or Slave Con-
nection Region. A Related Surface is defined as a surface which was created from the same underlying geometry
to the selected surface(s). This option is on by default.
For example, if a cylindrical surface is split into two periodic faces by Parasolid (which is common), and one of the
faces is selected for the Slave Connection Region, the other face would also be included in the Slave Connection
Region when this option is turned on. Other examples include surfaces split using imprinted curve or surfaces sep-
arated by a Boolean operation such as Geometry, Solid, Remove.
4.4.3 Connect, Connection Property...
Connection Properties
You must define interface information for the Connector with a Connection Property. When you define a Connec-
tion Property, you will see the Define Connection Property dialog box for contact pairs.
The typical entity information contained in FEMAP: ID, Color, Layer and Title are available for the Connection
Property. It is important to give each Connection Property a descriptive title so you may easily select one from the
drop-down property list when defining a Connector.
The Connect Type is a specialized entry for the Connection Property and allows you to choose between 0..Contact
and 1..Glued. When Connect Type is 0..Contact, almost all contact options are available for all solvers. When Con-
nect Type is set to 1..Glued, only the options required to create Glued or Bonded contact are available.
Also common to the Define Connection Property dialog box regardless of what Tab is chosen are the Defaults,
Load, Save, and Copy buttons.
Clicking the Defaults button will bring up a different set of Default values which are recommended for each
solver and/or type of analysis and fill them in on all tabs at once.
Load and is used to load a saved Connection Property from the Connection Property Library (conprop.esp file, usu-
ally located in the FEMAP directory) and Save is used to store a new or modified Connection Property in that same
library. A Title is required in order to save the a Connection Property to the Connection Property Library and all
values on all tabs will be stored together.
Copy allows you to copy the values from an existing Connection Property in your model to a new Connection
Property. You must have a least one Connection Property in your model for copy to be able to work correctly.
Note: Connect Type has no effect on the MARC, DYNA, or NEiNastran tabs.
Extruded from boundary surface -
If either top surface is selected,
there are no related surfaces
Would NOT be Related
Primitive with Boolean cut-out -
If either top surface is selected,
there are related surfaces
Would be Related
The rest of the dialog box is separated into 8 tabs. Each tab has the required input for a particular solver and/or
analysis type.
The first 3 tabs are for creating contact conditions for different solution sequences in NX Nastran. NX Linear (SOL
101), NX Advanced Nonlinear (SOL 601), and NX Explicit (SOL 701) each have a tab containing different options
associated with a particular analysis type.
Each of the other 5 tabs contain options required to set up contact conditions for a particular solver. Each tab cre-
ates program specific input for one of the following solvers: ABAQUS, ANSYS, MARC, LS-DYNA, or NE/Nas-
tran. The options available for each solver are discussed in greater detail below
Note: FEMAP will use the information you have set on the Interfaces tab of the Preferences dialog box to set
which tab of the Define Connection Property dialog box should be active by default.
For example, if you have your Interface set to 16..ABAQUS, when you use the Connect, Connection
Property command, the ABAQUS tab will be active until you select a different tab. If you were to
then change your Interface to 45..NX Nastran and your Analysis Type to 22..Advanced Nonlinear
Static, the NX Adv Nonlin tab would be active until changed.
NX Nastran Linear and Glued Contact Properties (NX Linear tab) 4-81
4.4.3.1 NX Nastran Linear and Glued Contact Properties (NX Linear tab)
The linear contact property for NX Nastran contains options for linear contact which is available in Linear Statics
(SOL 101, NX Nastran version 4.0 and above), as well as Glued Contact, which is available in all NX Nastran
solution sequences (NX Nastran version 4.1 and above), except Advanced Nonlinear (SOL 601) and Explicit Tran-
sient Dynamics (SOL 701). These options can be reached by pressing the NX Linear tab in the Define Connection
Property dialog box.
Contact Pair (BCTSET)
The options in this portion of the dialog box can be set individually for each Connector (contact pair) that is created
in the model. These options will be written out to the BCTSET entry for each individual contact pair. Each contact
pair will be designated in the graphics window with a single line going from one Connection Region to another and
this line is a contact element.
Friction - Enters a value in the FRICi field on the BCTSET entry. Designates the Static Coefficient of friction for
contact pair i.
Min Contact Search Dist - Enters a value in the MINDi field on the BCTSET entry. Designates the Minimum
search distance for contact pair i.
Note: In general, if different friction values are NOT needed then the contact pairs should all reference the
same contact property.
Note: The minimum distance can be negative and use used to defined an interference fit condition modeled as
overlapping surfaces.
Max Contact Search Dist - Enters a value in the MAXDi field on the BCTSET entry. Designates the Maximum
search distance for contact pair i.
Contact Property (BCTPARM)
These options need to only be defined once for a contact analysis, regardless of how many contact pairs are defined
in the model. Each contact pair has an element number assigned to it and can have a separate contact property asso-
ciated with it. FEMAP will use the contact property referenced by the contact pair with the lowest element num-
ber to define the BCTPARM entry for the entire model. For example, if a model has 2 contact pairs with element
numbers 101 and 102, the Contact Property values defined in the property associated with contact pair 101 would
be used for the analysis.
Max Force Iterations - Creates the MAXF field on the BCTPARM entry. Designates the maximum number of
iterations for a force (inner) loop (Default = 10).
Max Status Iterations - Creates the MAXS field on the BCTPARM entry. Designates the maximum number of
iterations for a status (outer) loop (Default = 20).
Normal Penalty factor - Creates the PENN field on the BCTPARM entry. Designates the penalty factor for the
normal direction (Default = 10.0).
Tangential Penalty factor - Creates the PENT field on the BCTPARM entry. Designates the penalty factor for the
tangential direction (Default = 1.0).
Force Convergence Tol - Creates the CTOL field on the BCTPARM entry. Designates the Contact Force conver-
gence tolerance (Default = 0.01).
Num Allow Contact Changes - Creates the NCHG field on the BCTPARM entry. Designates the allowable num-
ber of contact changes for convergence (Default = 0).
Min Contact Percentage - Creates the MPER field on the BCTPARM entry. Designates the Minimum Contact Set
Percentage (Default = 100).
Initial Penetration - Creates the INIPENE field on the BCTPARM entry. Controls definition of initial gap or pen-
etration of the generated contact elements (Default = 0).
0..Calculated - Use the value calculated from the grid coordinates.
2..Calculated/Zero Penetrations - Same as 0..Calculated, but if penetration is detected, set the value to zero.
3..Zero Gap/Penetration - Sets the penetration/gap to zero for all contact elements.
Shell Offset - Creates the SHLTHK field on the BCTPARM entry. Shell Thickness Offset flag. (Default = 0)
0..Include shell thickness - Include half shell thickness as surface offset.
1..Do not include thickness - Does not include thickness offset.
Avg Methods - Creates the AVGSTS field on the BCTPARM entry. Determines the averaging method for contact
pressure/traction results (Default = 0).
0..Include All Elements - The averaging of Pressure/Traction values for a contact grid will include the results
from ALL contact elements attached to the grid regardless of whether they are active or inactive in the contact
problem
1..Include Active Elements - The averaging of the Pressure/Traction values for a contact grid will exclude those
contact elements which are not active in the contact solution and thus have a zero Pressure/Traction value.
Contact Status - Creates the RESET field on the BCTPARM entry. Flag to indicate if the contact status for a spe-
cific subcase is to start from the final status of the previous subcase. (Default =0)
0..Start from Prev Subcase - Starts from previous subcase.
1..Start from Init State- Starts from initial state.
Note: The max distance must be defined for all contact problems. This is the distance that NX Nastran will
search for contact from the element normal.
NX Nastran Linear and Glued Contact Properties (NX Linear tab) 4-83
Common Contact Parameters (BCTPARM and BGPARM)
These options are available for both linear contact and Glued contact.
Eval Order - Determines the number of Linear Contact or Glue Points for a single element on the source region.
Creates INTORD field in BCTPARM or BGPARM entry and gives you 4 choices:
0..Default - Does NOT write the INTORD field or corresponding value field to the BCTPARM or BGPARM
entry. Simply uses the default value for Linear or Glued contact built into the NX Nastran solver.
1..Low - Lowest order of points on source region.
2..Medium - Medium order of points on source region. This is the default.
3..High - Highest order of points on source region.
The higher the integration order, the longer the solve will take.
Refine Source - Determines if the source region is refined for the Linear or Glued Contact solution. Creates
REFINE field on the BCTPARM or BGPARM entry and gives you 2 choices for the corresponding Value field:
0..Do Not Refine - Does not refine the Linear Contact/Glue source region based on target surface definition.
1..Refine Source to Target (Default) - Refines the Linear Contact/Glue source region based on target surface
definition.
Glued Contact Property (BGSET and BGPARM)
The options in this portion of the dialog box are used to set-up Glued Contact in NX Nastran. Here is a brief
description of Glued Contact:
An option to Glue elements together during a solution is available in NX Nastran version 4.1 and above. Glue
definitions can be used in all solution sequences except for Advanced Nonlinear (SOL 601) and Explicit Transient
Dynamics (SOL 701). The Glue option creates stiff springs to connect pre-defined Connection Regions and pre-
vents relative motion in all directions (these springs are essentially glue elements). Glue elements are created
from the free face of one Connection Region to another if the regions are within the specified separation distance
(Search Distance) for gluing to occur. Many different glued connections can occur in the same model and all of the
connections will be placed in the same Glue Set (BGSET entry) in the NX Nastran input deck.
Search Distance - Enters a value in the SDISTi field on the BGSET entry. Designates the Search Distance for the
contact pair i. Essentially, this is telling NX Nastran that if the Connection Regions of the contact pair are within
this distance, which they should be, then Glued contact will be active for this contact pair.
Penalty Factor - Enters a value in the PEN field on the BGSET entry. Designates the Penalty Factor for ALL con-
tact pairs. Default value in FEMAP is 1.0E6 and is sufficient for most cases.
Note: The Defaults button will automatically fill in the dialog box with the default values suggested by NX
Nastran. It may be helpful to try and run the analysis with the defaults and then run it again if any mod-
ifications are needed to create more accurate results or achieve convergence.
Note: In Linear Statics (SOL 101), both Glued Contact AND Linear Contact can be defined in the same sub-
case. Also, the Glued Contact must be set up in the first subcase for all solutions sequences except in
SOL 101, when Linear Contact is defined. In this case, Glued Contact can be defined in any subcase.
Note: Glued contact is currently NOT available when using the Element Iterative solver in NX Nastran.
Note: By setting the value of search distance to a value larger than the largest distance between connection
regions using Glued Contact, only one Glued Contact property is needed per model. Even if you have
several different properties created for Glued Contact, FEMAP will automatically combine them all in
to one BGSET entry in NX Nastran.
Note: If separation of the Connection Regions is observed, raise the Penalty Factor value by an order of mag-
nitude until separation no longer occurs. If defined too large, numerical errors may occur.
Shell Z-Offset - Allows you to choose if the Z-Offset on shell elements should be included in determining Glued
Contact. Creates ZOFFSET field in BGPARM entry and gives you 2 choices for the corresponding Value field:
0..Include Z-Offset (Default) - Z offset of shells is included for determining glued surfaces.
1..No not Include Z-Offset - Z offset of shells is NOT included for determining glued surfaces. This is how
glued contact functioned in NX Nastran 4.1.
4.4.3.2 NX Nastran Contact Property Options - Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (NX Adv Nonlin tab)
General
For NX Nastran Solution 601, more than 1 contact pair can be defined and each pair can have a different contact
property. For each Connection Region, ALL of the values defined on the NX Adv Nonlin tab of the Define Connec-
tion Property dialog box are used for each respective contact pair.
Contact Type - Lets you choose the contact algorithm type and writes the TYPE field on the BCTPARA entry. You
get to choose between 0..Constraint Function, 1..Segment Method, or 2..Rigid Target. Depending on the contact
algorithm, some portion of the dialog box will be available, while other portions are grayed out.
Double Sided (check box) - This is a flag for single or double-sided contact. Creates NSIDE field on BCTPARA
entry. When not checked, it places a 1 (Single-sided contact) into the NSIDE field, when checked places a 2 (Dou-
ble-sided contact) into the NSIDE field.
Initial Penetration - Flags how initial penetrations are handled. Writes the Initial penetration option to the
INIPENE field on the BCTPARA entry. You can choose between:
Note: Advanced Nonlinear Analysis has a NXSTRAT solver parameter dialog in the Analysis Case Manager.
For more information, see Section 8.7.1.18, "Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (NX Nastran Only)".
NX Nastran Contact Property Options - Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (NX Adv Nonlin tab) 4-85
0..Eliminate - Initial penetrations are eliminated
1..Eliminate/Print - Initial penetrations are eliminated and the list of penetrating nodes is printed
2..Ignored - Initial penetrations are ignored. In successive steps, each contractor node is allowed to penetrate the
target up to its initial penetration
3..Specify with Gap Distance - Initial penetrations or gaps are overridden by specified Gap Distance. This
option is not available for rigid target algorithm
Gap Distance - Specifies a constant gap distance (GAPVAL) between the source region (contactor) and the target
region when The Initial Penetration option is set to 3..Specify with Gap Distance. A Negative Gap Distance
means initial penetrations which will be eliminated.
Penetration Depth - Penetration Depth for single-sided contact (NSIDE=1). Write PDEPTH field on BCTPARA
entry. If PDEPTH > 0.0, then Penetration is detected when penetration is less than or equal to PDEPTH, and if Pen-
etration > PDEPTH, penetration is deemed not to occur.
Segment Normal - Indicates whether a continuous (interpolated) contact segment normal is used for the contact
surfaces. Creates the SEGNORM field on the BCTPARA entry. You can choose:
0..Default - SEGNORM = 1 if NSIDE = 1, SEGNORM = -1 if NSIDE = 2
1..Used - Continuous segment is used
-1..Not Used - Continuous segment is not used
Offset Type - Type of offset for contact regions. Creates the OFFTYPE field on the BCTPARA entry. Choose
from:
0..Single Sided - Use specified offset of NSIDE=1, use offset value of 0.001 for NSIDE=2
1..Single/Double-Sided - Use specified offset for NSIDE=1 or NSIDE=2
2..Half Shell Thick - Half the shell thickness is used for contact regions on shell elements and no offset for is
used otherwise
Offset Distance - Default offset distance value for contact regions. Creates OFFSET field on BCTPARA entry.
Time Activation
Birth Time - Birth time for contact set. Creates TBIRTH field on BCTPARA entry (default = 0.0).
Death Time - Death time for contact set. Creates TDEATH field on BCTPARA entry (default = 0.0). If TDEATH
is less than or equal to TBIRTH, it is ignored.
Rigid Target Contact Algorithm (TYPE = 2 only)
Penetration Tolerance - Penetration Tolerance which gives the maximum penetration allowed into a rigid target
surface. Creates PENETOL field on the BCTPARA entry. (Default=1.0E-8)
Normal Modulus - Normal contact Modulus. Creates NCMOD field on BCTPARA entry (Default=1.0E11)
Tangential Modulus - Tangential contact Modulus. Creates TCMOD field on BCTPARA entry (Default=0.0)
Min Tensile Freeing Force - Minimum tensile contact force required to change the state of a contact node from
node in contact to free node. Creates RFORCE field on BCTPARA entry. For instance, if the normal tensile
force is greater than RFORCE, a node in contact becomes a free node. (Default=0.001)
Max Total Freeing Force - Limit (Maximum) for the sum of all contact forces for nodes changing from the stat of
node in contact to free node. Creates LFORCE field on BCTPARA entry. If the absolute value of the sum of
the forces is larger than LFORCE, then automatic time stepping (ATS) method will be activated to subdivide the
current time step into smaller time increments (Default = 1.0)
Note: OFFTYPE = 2 can only be used with rigid target algorithm (TYPE=2).
Note: For TYPE=0 or TYPE=1, individual offset distances can be specified for each contact region using the
BCRPARA entry to override the default offset distance specified here
Standard Contact Algorithm (TYPE = 0 or 1)
Disp Formulation - Selects the displacement formulation used for this contact set. Creates the DISP field on the
BCTPARA entry. Choose from:
0..Use NXSTRAT CTDISP - Use the formulation selected by CTDISP in NXSTRAT entry (Default)
1..Small Disp Formulation - Use small displacement formulation (contact conditions are not updated)
2..Large Disp Formulation - Use large displacement formulation (contact conditions are updated)
Consistent Stiffness (check box) - This is a flag to indicate whether consistent contact stiffness is used. Creates
CSTIFF field on BCTPARA entry (Default=0). When not checked, it places a 0 (Consistent contact stiffness is not
used) into the CSTIFF field, when checked places a 1 (Consistent contact stiffness is used) into the CSTIFF field.
Tied Tolerance (check box and field) - The check box is a flag to indicate whether contact regions in each contact
pair are tied together. Creates TIED field on BCTPARA entry (Default=0). When not checked, it places a 0 (Not
tied) into the TIED field, when checked, places a 1 (Tied) into the TIED field.
The field is the actual Tied Tolerance value used to determine whether contactor nodes are tied to the target region
when TIED=1 is specified. A contactor node is tied to its target region if the distance between them is less than or
equal to TIEDTOL. Creates the TIEDTOL field on the BCTPARA entry. (Default=0.0)
Init Penetration Duration - Time to eliminate initial penetrations (Must be greater than of equal to 0.0, default
=0). Creates TZPENE field on BCTPARA entry. If TZPENE=0.0, and INIPENE=0 or 1, then the initial penetra-
tions are eliminated in the first time step. This may cause convergence difficulties for certain problems. By using
TZPENE > 0.0, the initial penetrations are eliminated gradually over time TZPENE.
Surface Extension Factor - Factor for extending contact surfaces beyond their boundaries. The amount of exten-
sion is given by this factor multiplied by the length of the contact segments. Creates EXTFAC field on BCTPARA
entry. (Values must range from 1.0E-6 to 0.1; Default = 0.001)
Friction Model - Allows you to choose the type of friction model using a drop down menu. Creates an integer
from 0 to 13 (except 10 and 11) in the FRICMOD field on the BCTPARA entry to indicate which friction type is to
be used.
You can choose from the following friction types:
0..Default (Param 1) - Constant coefficient of friction specified for each contact pair (FRICi field(s) on BCT-
SET entry).
1..Constant (Param1) - Constant coefficient of friction specified by FPARA1 (FPARAi refer to Friction Param-
eter 1-5 below).
2..Model 1 (1,2) - Friction Model 1; uses FPARA1 and FPARA2.
3..Model 2 (1,2,3) - Friction Model 2; uses FPARA1, FPARA2, and FPARA3.
12..Modified Model 1(1,2) - Modified Friction Model 1; uses FPARA1 and FPARA2.
13..Modified Model 2(1,2,3) - Modified Friction Model 2; uses FPARA1, FPARA2, and FPARA3.
4..Static/Dynamic (1,2,3) - Use different static and dynamic friction coefficients; uses FPARA1, FPARA2, and
FPARA3.
5..vs Sliding Velocity (1,2,3) - Friction coefficient varies with sliding velocity; uses FPARA1, FPARA2, and
FPARA3.
6..Anisotropic (1-5) - Anisotropic friction model; uses FPARA1, FPARA2, FPARA3, FPARA4, and FPARA5.
7..vs Contact Force (1,2) - Friction coefficient varies with consistent contact force; uses FPARA1 and FPARA2.
8..vs Time (1,2,3) - Friction coefficient varies with time; uses FPARA1, FPARA2, and FPARA3.
9..vs Coordinate (1-5) - Friction coefficient varies with coordinate values; uses FPARA1, FPARA2, FPARA3,
FPARA4, and FPARA5.
Friction Param 1 - Friction parameter A1. Creates FPARA1 field on BCTPARA entry.
Note: Currently, the tied contact option assumes small rotations of the contact regions.
NX Nastran Contact Property Options - Explicit Transient Dynamics (NX Explicit tab) 4-87
Friction Param 2 - Friction parameter A2. Creates FPARA2 field on BCTPARA entry
Constraint Function Contact Algorithm (TYPE = 0 only)
Normal Constraint - Parameter for normal constraint function, w. Creates EPSN field on BCTPARA entry
(Default = 1.0E-12).
Frictional Constraint - Parameter for frictional constraint function, v. Creates EPST field on BCTPARA entry
(Default = 0.001, must be greater than 0).
Compliance Factor - Compliance Factor. Creates CFACTOR1 field on BCTPARA entry. (Default = 0.0).
For more information about using contact with NX Nastran Solution 601, see Nonlinear Analysis Theory and Mod-
eling Guide.
4.4.3.3 NX Nastran Contact Property Options - Explicit Transient Dynamics (NX Explicit tab)
General
For NX Nastran Solution 701, more than 1 contact pair can be defined and each pair can have a different contact
property. Like solution 601, ALL of the values defined on the NX Explicit tab of the Define Connection Property
dialog box are used for each respective contact pair.
Note: Advanced Nonlinear Explicit has a NXSTRAT solver parameter dialog in the Analysis Case Manager.
For more information, see Section 8.7.1.19, "Advanced Nonlinear Explicit (NX Nastran Only)".
Contact Type - Lets you choose the contact algorithm type and writes the XTYPE field on the BCTPARA entry.
You get to choose between 0..Constraint Function, 1..Penalty Method, or 3..Rigid Target. Depending on the contact
algorithm, some portion of the dialog box will be available, while other portions are grayed out
Double Sided (check box) - This is a flag for single or double-sided contact. Creates NSIDE field on BCTPARA
entry. When not checked, it places a 1 (Single-sided contact) into the NSIDE field, when checked places a 2 (Dou-
ble-sided contact) into the NSIDE field.
Initial Penetration - Flags how initial penetrations are handled. Writes the Initial penetration option to the
INIPENE field on the BCTPARA entry. You can choose between 0..Eliminate (Initial penetrations are eliminated),
1..Eliminate/Print (Initial penetrations are eliminated and the list of penetrating nodes is printed), or 2..Ignored (Ini-
tial penetrations are ignored. In successive steps, each contractor node is allowed to penetrate the target up to its
initial penetration).
Penetration Depth - Penetration Depth for single-sided contact (NSIDE=1). Write PDEPTH field on BCTPARA
entry. If PDEPTH > 0.0, then Penetration is detected when penetration is less than or equal to PDEPTH, and if Pen-
etration > PDEPTH, penetration is deemed not to occur.
Segment Normal - Indicates whether a continuous (interpolated) contact segment normal is used for the contact
surfaces. Creates the SEGNORM field on the BCTPARA entry. You can choose 0..Default (SEGNORM = 1 if
NSIDE = 1, SEGNORM = -1 if NSIDE = 2), 1..Used (Continuous segment is used), or -1..Not Used (Continuous
segment is not used)
Offset Type - Type of offset for contact regions. Creates the OFFTYPE field on the BCTPARA entry. Choose from
0..Single Sided (Use specified offset of NSIDE=1, use offset value of 0.001 for NSIDE=2), 1..Single/Double-Sided
(Use specified offset for NSIDE=1 or NSIDE=2), or 2..Half Shell Thick (Half the shell thickness is used for contact
regions on shell elements and no offset for is used otherwise).
Offset Distance - Default offset distance value for contact regions. Creates OFFSET field on BCTPARA entry.
Friction - Static coefficient of friction for contact pair i. Creates FRICi field on BCTSET entry.
Time Activation
Birth Time - Birth time for contact set. Creates TBIRTH field on BCTPARA entry (default = 0.0).
Death Time - Death time for contact set. Creates TDEATH field on BCTPARA entry (default = 0.0). If TDEATH
is less than or equal to TBIRTH, it is ignored.
Rigid Contact Algorithm (TYPE = 3 Only)
Penetration Tolerance - Penetration tolerance which gives the maximum penetration allowed into a rigid target
surface. Creates PENETOL field on BCTPARA entry (Default = 1.0E-8).
Tangential Modulus - Tangential contact modulus. Creates TCMOD field on BCTPARA entry (default = 0.0).
Standard Contact Algorithm (TYPE = 0 or 1)
Surface Extension Factor - Factor for extending contact surfaces beyond their boundaries. The amount of exten-
sion is given by this factor multiplied by the length of the contact segments. Creates EXTFAC field on BCTPARA
entry. (Values must range from 1.0E-6 to 0.1; Default = 0.001)
Init Penetration Duration - Time to eliminate initial penetrations. Creates TZPENE field on BCTPARA entry.
(Default = 0.0)
Penalty Contact Algorithm (TYPE = 1 only)
Note: OFFTYPE = 2 can only be used with rigid target algorithm (TYPE=2).
Note: For TYPE=0 or TYPE=1, individual offset distances can be specified for each contact region using the
BCRPARA entry to override the default offset distance specified here
Note: If there is no duration for initial penetration (TZPENE = 0.0) and Initial Penetration (INIPENE) is set to
0 or 1, then the initial penetrations are eliminated in the first time step. This may cause convergence dif-
ficulties for certain problems. By using TZPENE > 0.0, the initial penetrations are eliminated gradually
over time TZPENE.
NX Nastran Contact Property Options - Explicit Transient Dynamics (NX Explicit tab) 4-89
Penalty Stiffness Criteria - This drop-down menu selects the criterion for evaluation of normal penalty stiffness.
Creates the XKNCRIT field on BCTPARA entry. There are 2 choices:
0..Program Calculated - NX Nastran calculates the normal penalty stiffness.
1..User Defined - User specifies the normal penalty stiffness (XKN).
Normal Stiffness - Creates the XKN field on the BCTPARA entry. Specifies the normal penalty stiffness when
1..User Defined is specified for Penalty Stiffness Criteria (XKNCRIT = 1)
Tangential Stiff Criteria - This drop-down menu selects the criterion for evaluation of tangential penalty stiffness.
Creates the XKTCRIT field on BCTPARA entry. There are 2 choices:
0..Program Calculated - NX Nastran calculates the tangential penalty stiffness.
1..User Defined - User specifies the tangential penalty stiffness (XKT).
Tangential Stiffness - Creates the XKN field on the BCTPARA entry. Specifies the tangential penalty stiffness
when 1..User Defined is specified for Tangential Stiff Criteria (XKTCRIT = 1)
Damp Coefficient Method - This drop-down menu selects whether damping will be used and whether or not the
damping used will be a factor or critical damping. Creates the XDAMP field on the BCTPARA entry. There are 3
choices:
0..Not Used - Damping is not used. Damping Coefficient (XNDAMP) is ignored.
1..As Crit Damping Factor - Damping is used and is a factor of the critical damping (i.e., the damping coeffi-
cient, specified in XNDAMP, is multiplied by the critical damping). This is the recommended choice if damp-
ing is used.
2..Directly Defined - Damping is used and the Damping Coefficient (XNDAMP) is specified directly.
Damping Coefficient - Specifies the relative or absolute damping coefficient (for normal penalty stiffness) when
the penalty explicit contact algorithm is used and the Damp Coefficient Method is 1..As Crit Damping Factor or
2..Directly Defined (XDAMP = 1 or 2).
For more information about using contact with NX Nastran Solution 701, see Nonlinear Analysis Theory and Mod-
eling guide.
4.4.3.4 ABAQUS Contact Properties (ABAQUS tab)
The ABAQUS-specific section allows you to specify parameters found on the *CONTACT PAIR option and the
*FRICTION entry, as well as the thickness/area for input for 1 or 2-D contact.
This dialog box is broken into three separate segments, Friction Values, STEP Controls, and Other.
Friction Values
...are included on the
*FRICTION card in
ABAQUS. Some interest-
ing options include Fric-
tion Type, Slip Value
(dependent on Friction
Type), and Decay Exp
(parameter allows separate
static and dynamic (kinetic)
friction coefficients with a
smooth transition zone
defined by an exponential
curve).
STEP Controls
...Max Slide Distance and
Approach, are input to the
*CONTACT PAIR option.
Max Slide Distance limits
finite sliding in 3D deform-
able contact. Approach
activates automatic vis-
cous damping for a contact
pair.
On this dialog box, the
STEP Control options
apply to the load set. To
turn on these options in a
time step, you must specify
them on the ABAQUS
STEP Options dialog box.
For a detailed process, see Section 8.2.1.1, "Preparing the Model for Analysis" in the FEMAP User Guide.
Other
Typically, the most important input in this section is the Critical Penetration (HCRIT in ABAQUS). This value
defines the maximum allowable penetration of a slave node into a master surface. Penetration values above this
value will cause ABAQUS to abandon the current increment and start again with a smaller increment. This value
can greatly affect convergence and accuracy of the overall solution.
Surface to Surface Contact (TYPE=SURFACE TO SURFACE) must be specified for shell thicknesses to be
included during contact instead of using nodal locations (default). This option is only available when the Small
Sliding and/or Tied options are also turned on.
For a description of the other parameters, see the ABAQUS Standard and Explicit Users Manuals.
Note: If Connect Type is set to 1..Glued a good idea is to click the Defaults button at the bottom of the
Define Connection Property dialog box. This will turn on the Tied and Adjust options that are typically
used in conjunction when created Tied contact in ABAQUS.
ANSYS Contact Properties (ANSYS tab) 4-91
4.4.3.5 ANSYS Contact Properties (ANSYS tab)
The ANSYS-specific section allows you to specify the real constants on the TARGE169 (2-D), TARGE170 (3-D),
CONTA171 (2-D), CONTA172 (2-D with midside nodes), CONTA173 (3-D), and CONTA174 (3-D with midside
nodes). Contact surface elements are associated with target segment elements through a shared set of real constants,
and ANSYS only looks for contact between surfaces with the same real constant set. Only contact elements and tar-
get elements of the same dimension (2-D or 3-D) can be in contact with each other.
For complete definitions of these real constants, see the ANSYS Element Reference Guide as well as the ANSYS
Structural Analysis Guide.
This dialog can be used to specify additional contact parameters. All of these parameters correspond to KEYOPT
entries on the ANSYS contact and target elements. These are more advanced options used to create contact models
which require additional parameters.
The check boxes in the KEYOPT Overrides section of the dialog box allow you to toggle between two options for
KEYOPTs (2), (4), (5), (8), and (11). The pull-down boxes in the lower portion of the dialog box correspond to
KEYOPTs (7), (9), and (12), which offer additional options that can be chosen to create a more realistic contact
model.
Be sure to review the ANSYS Element Reference Guide as well as the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide before
beginning any type of nonlinear contact analysis.
Note: If Connect Type is set to 1..Glued a good idea is to click the Defaults button at the bottom of the
Define Connection Property dialog box. This will choose an appropriate setting for Surface Behavior
that will create Bonded contact in ANSYS.
4.4.3.6 MSC.MARC Contact Properties (MARC tab)
Pick the MARC tab to specify parameters found on the *CONTACT and *CONTACT TABLE options.
Contact Options
This section contains all property inputs for the *CONTACT TABLE option. They will also be used in the *CON-
TACT option if the property is chosen. For details, see Section 8.6, "Marc Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide.
You can specify the tolerance for contact (when two bodies are considered touching), the separation force to sepa-
rate a node from a body, and an interference closure amount. In addition, if you choose No Relative Contact Disp,
the glue option will be invoked.
Stick-Slip Model, Rigid Plasticity, Friction Values, Contact Checking, Separation Checking
The remaining contact parameters are only relevant if the contact property is chosen in translation to be output to
the *CONTACT option. In most cases, the defaults will be chosen if none of the options are selected for the contact
property.
Refer to your MARC Program Input Manual for descriptions of these options.
LS-DYNA Contact Properties (Dyna Tab) 4-93
4.4.3.7 LS-DYNA Contact Properties (Dyna Tab)
Usually, the most important option is the Type of contact you want to define. You can select many different types of
contact including automatic, eroding, constraint, tied, etc. If you select an option that requires additional informa-
tion beyond the standard inputs, you must determine the options needed and enter this information. If not, errors
may result, or at minimum your analysis will run with all defaults, which may or may not be appropriate.
The General portion of the dialog box also contains options to choose ONE_WAY contact for those types of con-
tact that support this (default is two-way contact between surfaces). An offset for TIED contact types can be tog-
gled on and off, as well as a toggle to use a penetration formulation, which can also be based on the shortest
diagonal.
This rest of the options found on the DYNA tab allow you to specify additional contact parameters for LS-
DYNA3D.
The left side of the dialog box contains information which is pertinent for all contact types. They include Scale
Factors, Thickness Overrides, Time Activation, and Output information. If no values are input or set, the defaults
will be used. The right side of the dialog box contains information specific to certain contact types. If you have
selected one of these types (Rigid, Tiebreak, or Eroding), you will want to select the appropriate information. Refer
to your LS-DYNA3D Users Manual for more information for each of these options.
4.4.3.8 NE/Nastran Contact Properties (NEiNastran tab)
Pick the NE/Nastran tab to specify fields found on the BSCONP entry for NE/Nastran. Please consult your NE/
Nastran documentation to determine the correct usage of Connection Region and contact property cards before
beginning contact analysis.
Static Friction Coefficient, Frictional Stiffness for Stick, Stiffness Scale Factor
These parameters need to be set for you to attain accurate results from contact analysis from NE/Nastran. These
factors will be entered on the BSCONP entry of your NE/Nastran input file.
Penetration Type
There are several options when choosing the penetration type for NE/Nastran. Please refer to NEiNastran docu-
mentation to determine which Penetration Type will work best for your analysis.
1..Unsymmetric
2..Symmetric
3..Unsymmetric weld
4..Symmetric weld
5..Unsymmetric bi-directional slide
6..Symmetric bi-directional slide
7..Unsymmetric rough contact
8..Symmetric rough contact
Connect, Connection Region... 4-95
Other Penetration Factors
These parameters need to be set for you to attain accurate results from contact analysis from NE/Nastran. These
factors will be entered on the BSCONP entry of your NE/Nastran input file.
4.4.4 Connect, Connection Region...
The Connect, Connection Region command creates the individual segments for contact. When you access this com-
mand, you will see the Connection Region dialog box.
This dialog box is partitioned into four major sections: standard entity information, Defined By, Type, and Output.
Each of these sections are described more fully below. In addition, Add includes one item, Multiple allows you to
select multiple entities, Delete removes one item, and Reset removes the entire list.
4.4.4.1 Entity Information
This section includes the typical entity information contained in FEMAP: ID, color, layer and title. It is important
to give each Connection Region a descriptive title so you may easily select them when defining a contact pair. You
will be able to graphically select them, but often these segments will be very close to one another, making it diffi-
cult to accurately pick them. By using the titles, you can simply select these from a list when creating the contact
pair.
4.4.4.2 Segment Definition
The Defined By group in the Connection Region dialog box creates the Connection Region. You can select sur-
faces, curves, elements, nodes, or properties for the contact. Although there are five entities shown, there are really
two methods available: Property/Part Contact, which allows selection of only FEMAP properties, or standard con-
tact, which allows selection of the other four entities, but not properties.
Property/Part Contact
This type of definition allows input of FEMAP properties only. The Output options of Nodes, Elements, or Curves
will also be disabled. FEMAP automatically exports all elements referencing that property as the contact body for
ABAQUS and MARC. For LS-DYNA3D, the actual Part ID (typically the FEMAP property ID) will be selected
for contact. NX Nastran, ANSYS and NE/NASTRAN do not support this option.
Since a larger number of elements could be associated with the property, FEMAP also provides the capability to
limit the number of elements with the contact box definition.
Note: An entity is not selected until it appears in the large window on the right of the dialog box. Thus, an
item contained in the entry area (shown as Surface above) will not be included if you enter the entity
and press OK. You must select <<Add before exiting for single entity input.
Note: Once an entity is selection window, clicking on the entity will highlight the entity in the graphics win-
dow. The default is to show the entity using transparent highlight, but if you have another option
selected in the Windows, Show Entities command or in the Show When Selected command in the Data
Table or Model Info tree, that option will be used instead.
When selecting the Property/Part Contact option, the dia-
log box changes to allow specification of a contact box. If
you pick the Contact Box... button, the standard coordinate
definition dialog box will appear. Simply specify two
points, which are the corners of a box. Only elements refer-
encing the chosen property that have centroidal values
inside the box will be considered in contact. This is a very
convenient method of limiting contact to certain regions,
thus potentially decreasing execution time dramatically. If
you create a contact box and then later want to remove all restrictions, simply push the Delete button.
The points on the contact box are exported directly to LS-DYNA3D as a *DEFINE_BOX, which is then referenced
on the *CONTACT option for the referenced segment. For ABAQUS and MARC, only elements with centroidal
values in the box will be exported.
Standard Contact
This contact method allows selection of both geometry (Surfaces and Curves) and finite element entities (Nodes
and Element Faces).
Select the type of entity, enter the ID, and press <<Add; press Multiple... to chose multiple entities. You can select
both geometric and FEA entities in the same Connection Region.
Geometry Selection
When selecting geometry for contact, simply select the appropriate entities. There will also be a check box for pos-
itive side. This is used to determine if the top or bottom face of plates is in contact when attached to a surface. It is
not currently implemented for curves.
The conversion from geometry to export of FEA entities is very similar to expanding geometric loads. When
exporting the model, FEMAP determines all nodes that are attached to the particular geometry.
With Output set to Nodes, the nodes will be exported. The only exception is for MARC, where pure node sets
are not supported. For NE/NASTRAN, output must be set to nodes.
With Output set to Elements, FEMAP determines which element faces are attached to the geometry. For an ele-
ment face to be selected, all of its nodes must be attached to the curve (for edges of planar elements) or surface
(for planar and solid elements). FEMAP exports element faces to ABAQUS, SEGMENTS (corresponding to
the element faces) to LS-DYNA3D, and elements to MARC. FEMAP will also export the CONTACT NODE
option to MARC to limit contact to the face nodes attached to the geometry. This option is not available for NE/
NASTRAN.
With Output set to Curves, the only option for geometric selection will be curves (for analytical rigid surface
definition).
FEA Selection
You can also select the FEA entities directly. Nodes are selected by the standard picking method. For elements, ele-
ment faces are actually chosen. You must pick both the element and its face number.
When you press the Multiple
command with Elements cho-
sen, a procedure identical to ele-
ment loading is followed.
First, pick the elements, and
then you will see the Face
Selection dialog box. Select the
method, then graphically select
an element and its face.
For more information on these methods, see Section 4.3.3.4, "Model, Load, Elemental...".
Note: You cannot limit contact in segments for ABAQUS and MARC to element faces or nodes when using
part contact. Only the elements will be exported. If you want to limit contact to certain faces, or nodes,
you must use standard contact.
Type of Segment 4-97
Region Options
Allows for an offset distance to be entered for use with NX Nastran Solutions 101, 601 and 701. Creates the OFF-
SET field on the BCRPARA entry for NX Nastran.
4.4.4.3 Type of Segment
FEMAP supports both deformable and rigid contact segments. Rigid contact segments are not currently supported
for NE/NASTRAN or MARC, and will be written as deformable. For deformable segments, no other input is
required in this section. For rigid segments, however, you must define the Ref Node (rigid body reference node).
FEMAP also supports the writing of an analytical rigid surface for ABAQUS. For this type of segment, you must
define a rigid body reference node and set the output selection to Curves.
Rigid Body Reference Node
The reference node is used to apply constraints and motions to the rigid segment. Constraints and motions (dis-
placements, velocities, etc.) assigned to the reference node will be assigned to the rigid segment.
For ABAQUS, the reference node is exported, with all the motions and constraints on the node itself. ABAQUS
will automatically assign these conditions to the rigid body or analytical rigid surface defined by curves.
In ANSYS, the FEMAP reference node is the pilot node in the TSHAP definition. You can apply nodes and con-
straints to this node as in ABAQUS.
LS-DYNA3D, does not contain a reference node, but references the rigid body directly on its
*PRESCRIBED_MOTION_ and *LOAD_ options for motions and loads, as well as constraints on the
*MAT_RIGID material. FEMAP will automatically assign all displacements and velocities on the reference node
to the rigid body exported to LS-DYNA3D. Constraints will be exported to the *MAT_RIGID material for this
rigid body.
4.4.4.4 Output
You must also specify the type of output for the segment.
If you select Elements, you will not be able to pick nodes for the definition. FEMAP will then export the appro-
priate elements to the contact entity when exporting. For ANSYS, you should always use Elements as output.
If you select Nodes, FEMAP will export nodal lists for contact to NX Nastran, ABAQUS, LS-DYNA3D, and
NE/NASTRAN. Contact segments defined by nodes are not supported for MARC and an error message will
occur on export. ANSYS does not support nodal output.
The option for Curve output is only available for ABAQUS. When this is selected, FEMAP will write out an
analytical rigid surface definition.
If you select Property/Part Contact under Define By, the Output option will be disabled and FEMAP will export
parts for LS-DYNA3D and elements for ABAQUS and MARC.
Note: You can use the OFFSET field to analyze an interference fit problem in SOL 101 if unconnected ele-
ments are modeled coincident. The offset value can represent the theoretical interference of these faces.
Note: A contact segment used for Linear Static Analysis for NX Nastran has the same definition as for
Advanced Nonlinear except the Rigid / Deformable option and the Rigid Reference node are not avail-
able.
Note: For motion, constraints, and loads of a reference node to be exported as rigid body values, two condi-
tions must be met: Property/Part Contact must be used, and the material referenced on the property
must be a *MAT_RIGID type (FEMAP Other Type No. 20).
Hint: It is usually best to use Property/Part Contact with LS-DYNA3D in combination with the Box Defini-
tion, and Element output for ABAQUS and MARC. These options will limit contact to certain areas,
decreasing analysis time. By selecting Elements as output for ABAQUS and MARC, you limit the num-
ber of nodes checked for contact to the appropriate faces. Also, when using rigid contact segments, it is
best to create a separate node that is not part of the structural model to be the reference node, and to
define the output as Elements for ABAQUS and Property/Part Contact for LS-DYNA3D.
4.4.5 Connect, Connector... (Contact Pair)
The Connect, Connector menu selection brings up the Define Contact Connector - Select Connection Regions dia-
log box
You can pick the master and slave Connection Regions graphically, or use the drop-down box to select from a list
of Connection Regions. You must specify both a Master and a Slave. If you want to specify self-contact (or single
surface contact in LS-DYNA3D), select the same segment for both the Master and the Slave. You must also specify
a Connection Property, where you can input values such as static and dynamic friction, as well as other properties
and limits on the contact.
In addition to selecting existing Connection Regions, you can also define a new segment or edit an existing seg-
ment for use in this connector. Define Region simply accesses the Connection Region option to create a new Con-
nection Region, while Edit Master or Edit Slave access the Modify, Edit, Connection Region command.
For NX Nastran, ABAQUS, ANSYS, LS/DYNA3D, or NE/NASTRAN, you will need to specify a Connector to
have contact occur in your model. Connection Regions are not placed into contact in these programs unless a Con-
nector (basically, a contact element) is created. In MARC, you only specify a Connector when you want to limit
contact to just certain Connection Region pairs. If no connectors exist in the model, all Connection Regions will be
able to contact one another.
4.4.6 Connect, Fluid Region...
The Connect, Fluid Region command is very similar to the Connect, Connection Region command. The difference
is that instead of creating regions for Contact purposes, this command creates individual segments representing
incompressible fluid volume regions used for the purpose of generating a virtual mass matrix (MFLUID entry in
Nastran input files). This capability is available in FEMAP supported Nastran Solution Sequences 103 (Modal
Analysis), 107 through 112 (Complex Modal Analysis and Dynamic Analyses), 129 (Nonlinear Transient Analy-
sis), and 200 (Optimization).
Although the methods used for selecting elements and surfaces are identical to Connect, Connection Region, (See
Section 4.4.4.2, "Segment Definition" for more details) there are additional parameters which may be entered in the
Fluid Options portion of the Fluid Region dialog box. These options are very important to creating the MFLUID
properly.
Plate elements which have 1 face wetted by the fluid will be placed into and ELIST with a unique ID in Nastran
and this ID is used in the ELIST1 field on the MFLUID. If Both faces of the element are wetted then these ele-
ments will be placed into an ELIST with a different ID in Nastran and this ID is used in the ELIST2 field.
Note: For both ABAQUS and DYNA, you will need to specify Connectors to have contact occur in your
model. Connection Regions are not placed into contact in these programs unless a Connector is created.
For MARC, you only specify a Connector when you want to limit contact to just certain Connection
Region pairs. If no Connectors exist in the model, all Connection Regions will be able to contact one
another.
Note: For NX Nastran, contact elements are only available for Advanced Nonlinear Analysis (SOL 601) and
Explicit Transient Dynamics (SOL 701). For Nonlinear Analysis (SOL 106) you must use gaps or slide-
line elements to create any type of nonlinear contact.
Connect, Fluid Region... 4-99
Entity Information
to give each Fluid Region a descriptive title so you may easily select them from the Model Info tree if they need to
be edited.
Fluid Options
These options fill out particular fields on the MFLUID entry in Nastran.
CSys
Coordinate System to be used to specify the orientation of the free surface of the fluid and any planes of symmetry.
This coordinate system MUST be a rectangular Coordinate System, as any other type will cause a Nastran fatal
error. Represents the CID field on the MFLUID entry in Nastran.
Choosing the coordinate system properly is very important. It can be useful to create a Local Rectangular coordi-
nate system for each Fluid Region. Make sure the Z axis of the user-defined coordinate system is facing in the nor-
mal direction of the plane you would like to represent the Free Fluid Surface, as any elements or surfaces that are
in the Fluid Region AND in the below the XY plane of the user-defined coordinate system will be filled with
fluid.
For example, in the figure below there are two fluid regions, the Shallow Section and the Deeper Section. The
Free Fluid Surface for the Shallow Section is defined by coordinate system 3, while the Free Fluid Surface for
the Deeper Section is defined by coordinate system 4. In this case, these Fluid Regions would be filled because
all of the entities that make up the Fluid Region lie below the XY plane of the coordinate systems used to set the
Free Fluid Surface.
Z Free Surface
Intercept of the free surface on the Z-axis of the Coordinate System specified in CSys. If the Z Free Surface is set to
Zero, then the free surface will be in-plane with the XY Plane of Fluid Region Coordinate System. Represents the
ZFS field on the MFLUID entry in Nastran.
Deeper Section
Shallow Section
Coordinate System 4
Coordinate System 3
For Example:
If the Fluid Region Coordinate System is at the Bottom of a the Fluid Region and Z Free Surface is set to 0.0,
then there is effectively no fluid acting on the structure.
If the Coordinate System is again at the Bottom of the Fluid Region, but the Z Free Surface is set to 2.0, then
the fluid will reach a height of 2.0 Units from the Bottom of the Fluid Region.
On the other hand, if the Fluid Region Coordinate System is at the Top of a the Fluid Region and Z Free Surface
is set to 0.0, then the fluid will reach the Top of the Fluid Region.
There is a Check box which enables you to turn the Z Free Surface OFF completely, so no value is written out to
Nastran for the ZFS field. When the Z Free Surface is completely OFF and the XY Plane and YZ Plane fields are
NOT set to Antisymmetry, Nastran will treat the MFLUID card as a special form of external fluid. In this special
case, the user should define a coordinate system with the origin located as close to the center of the enclosed vol-
ume as possible in order for this type of MFLUID to behave properly. This special case is only available for Nas-
tran Solution Sequence 103 (Modal Analysis), as well as, SOLs 107 through 112 (Complex Modal Analysis and
Dynamic Analyses).
Fluid Density
Density of the fluid. Value is written to the RHO field on MFLUID entry in Nastran.
XZ Plane and YZ Plane
Allows you to choose symmetry conditions for the fluid region using the XZ Plane and/or YZ Plane of the Fluid
Region Coordinate system. The three options are 0..None, 1..Symmetry, or 2..Antisymmetry. Based on what is
selected in the drop down list, FEMAP will place a N, S, or A in the PLANE1 (XZ Plane) and PLANE2 (YZ
Plane) fields in the MFLUID entry in Nastran.
If you are using these symmetry options, make sure to define the coordinate system to the appropriate plane of
symmetry with regard to the structure.
For example, the figure below shows the appropriate position for the Fluid Region Coordinate Systems for a model
which is using a YZ Plane Fluid Symmetry condition.
Region Options
Characteristic Length - Interactions between elements with separation
that is greater than this number are neglected. Value is written out to the
RMAX field of the MFLUID entry.
Exact Integration Factor - Exact integration is used if the distance
between two elements is less than this number multiplied by the square
root of the area of the larger element. Otherwise, center point integration
is used by default. Value is written out to the FMEXACT field on the
MFLUID entry.
Fluid reaches Top
CSys at Top of Region
Z Free Surface is 0.0
of Fluid Region
Fluid reaches Height of 2.0
CSys at Bottom of Region
Units from Bottom of Region
Fluid does not act on
CSys at Top of Region
Fluid Region
Shaded Elements represent Fluid Regions, while Thick, Dark Lines represents Fluid Level
Connect, Bolt Region... 4-101
Fluid-Structure Pressure Output
When a Fluid Region is present in your model, FEMAP provides an Output Request (Nastran only) called Fluid
Pressure which will return an elemental fluid-structure pressure along with any other requested results. This
fluid-structure pressure will only be retrieved from Nastran when using the 1..Print Only (.f06 file), 2..PostPro-
cess Only (.op2 file), 3..Print and PostProcess (.op2 and .f06 files), or 5..Punch and PostProcess (.op2 file) options
for Results Destination in the Nastran Output Requests dialog box.
4.4.7 Connect, Bolt Region...
The Connect, Bolt Region command creates individual regions of a single element or multiple elements where you
would like to apply a bolt preload. Bolt preload is only supported in FEMAP supported Nastran Solution
Sequences 101 (Linear Static Analysis), 103 (Modal Analysis), 105 (Buckling Analysis), 107 through 112 (Com-
plex Modal Analysis and Dynamic Analysis) and 601 (Advanced Nonlinear Analysis).
Each region represents a bolt and there can be multiple bolts in a single model, all with unique preloads. The
preload is a specified torque which has been translated into an axial load, arising from components in an assem-
bly being bolted together. In FEMAP, the preload is created using the Model, Load, Bolt Preload command.
When analyzing a model with preloaded bolts, you may be interested in obtaining the stresses due to the preload
condition alone or due to a combination of the bolt preload and additional loading conditions.
Entity Information
to give each Bolt Region a descriptive title so you may easily select them from the Model Info tree if they need to
be edited.
Defined By
Currently, only Beam and Bar elements can be used to define a Bolt Region. Bolt Regions can be defined using
either Curves (selects Beam and Bar elements associated with the selected curves) or Elements (element IDs). Both
curves and elements can be used at once to define a single Bolt Region. The IDs of the elements in the Bolt Region
will be written out to the EIDi field(s) of the Nastran BOLT entry.
Curves and Elements can be selected from the graphics window one at a time in the main Bolt Region dialog box.
In addition, their IDs can be typed into the appropriate field and added to the list using the <<Add button. If you
would like to choose multiple curves or elements at one time, clicking the Multiple... button will bring up the
appropriate Entity Selection dialog box for the selected entity type.
Curves and Elements can be deleted one at a time from the list in the Bolt Region dialog box by highlighting an
entity in the list and clicking the Delete button. If you would like to delete all of the Bolt Region entities at once,
you can simply click the Reset button.
Note: FEMAP will allow you to choose ANY type of element when selecting elements for a Bolt Region. If
any of those elements are not the right type of element, they will not be added to the list and an error
message stating Skipped # of Elements which have invalid types for this command will be sent to
the Messages window.
4.4.8 Connect, Rotor Region...
The Connect, Rotor Region command creates individual regions of nodes to be used as individual rotors in rotor
dynamic analysis in NX Nastran. Rotor Dynamics is only supported in FEMAP supported Nastran Solution
Sequences 110 (Complex Modal Analysis) and 111 (Modal Frequency Response Analysis).
Entity Information
to give each Rotor Region a descriptive title so you may easily select them from the Model Info tree if they need to
be edited. Also, if any Rotational Force has been applied to the rotor, you may want to include that information in
the title. The ID of each Rotor Region is written out as the RIDi field on the ROTORD entry.
Defined By
Only nodes can be used to define a Rotor Region. The IDs of the nodes in each Rotor Region will be written out to
the GRIDi field(s) of the Nastran ROTORG entry.
Rotor Options
These options fill out particular fields on the ROTORD entry in Nastran.
Rotation Axis (Z Axis)
Coordinate System to be used to specify the rotation axis for the current rotor. The Axis of rotation coincides
with the Z-Axis of the selected coordinate system. Writes out to the RCORDi field on the ROTORD entry for each
Rotor Region.
Freq for Overall Damping (W3)
Reference frequency for structural damping set by PARAM,G in NX Nastran for the current Rotor Region. Writes
out to the W3_i field on the ROTORD entry for each Rotor Region..
Freq for Material Damping (W4)
Reference frequency for structural damping set for each unique material in NX Nastran for the current Rotor
Region. Writes out to the W4_i field on the ROTORD entry for each Rotor Region.
Rotation Force Applied
Allows you to choose a Load Set with a prescribed Rotational Velocity only, which is then applied to the current
rotor. Different Load Sets can be used to apply different Rotational Velocities for each rotor in your model. Writes
the ID of the Load Set to the RFORCEi field of the ROTORD entry for each Rotor Region.
Note: For Complex Modal Analysis, the PARAM, G value can be set in the NASTRAN Modal Analysis dia-
log box of the Analysis Set Manager. For Modal Frequency Response Analysis, this value can be set
using the Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis command. Simply change the Solution Method to Modal
Frequency in the Load Set Options for Dynamic Analysis dialog box and enter a value for Overall
Structural Damping Coefficient (G).
Note: Material Damping can be set in the Define Material dialog box for each material in the model.
Using Optimization Analysis 4-103
4.5 Using Optimization Analysis
This command defines the goals, variations, and limits for Optimization analysis. This capability is currently only
supported for Nastran. The result of an optimization analysis is values for the design variables which enable the
structure to stay within the design limits. These results are stored as XY functions in FEMAP that demonstrate the
history of the design variables over the requested number of cycles.
When you select this com-
mand, the Design Optimiza-
tion dialog box will appear.
This dialog box has three
sections: Goal, Vary (design
variables) and Limit (design
constraints). The allowable
inputs will change based
upon your active selection.
Those items that are
selected for either Vary or
Limit will appear in the
large window on the left of
the dialog box when you
select that option. Each of
the these areas is discussed
more fully below.
At the bottom left of the
dialog box, the Add button
adds one entity, Multiple
allows you to select multi-
ple values, and Edit allows
you to change the selected
entity. Delete will remove a
single entity from the list, while Reset will delete the entire list.
4.5.1 Goal
When this option is selected, the Goal Design Objective portion of the dia-
log box is active. The only design objective currently supported is Mini-
mize Weight. You will not be able to change this selection. The only input
available input for this option is maximum number of design cycles.
4.5.2 Vary - Design Variables
This section defines design variables in the analysis. Currently, you can select Rod Area and Torsion, Bar Area,
Torsion, I1, and I2, and Plate Thickness.
You must specify the specific item to vary by selecting the Attribute and asso-
ciated Property. Maximum and Minimum inputs (Value or Percent of original
value) can then be specified, with a limit on the max allowable change per
iteration. Once the values are input, select the <<Add. The specific item is not
selected unless it appears in the window to the left of the dialog box. To select
multiple entities, enter the design variable information, select Multiple, then
select the properties.
4.5.3 Limit - Design Constraints
This section defines the constraints on the analysis. These values define limitations on the response of the structure.
They are typically displacements, stresses, and strains.
To select a specific limit, select the type of Response, and input the Maxi-
mum and Minimum values. Once this is complete, enter a Node or Element
ID. Press <<Add if you only want to add a single item, or press <<Multiple
to select multiple nodes or elements. The values will then appear in the
window of the left of the dialog box.
The analysis program will then cycle through the analysis attempting to
limit the response to the design constraints, while modifying the design
constraints to Minimum Weight.
4.6 Working with Functions
Functions can be created using the Model, Function menu command.
Functions allow you to
input tables of parameters
that are used to describe
loading, material, or prop-
erty behavior. Functions are
created using the Model,
Function command. Their
most common use is to
define time or frequency
dependent loading for tran-
sient/frequency response
analyses, as well as nonlin-
ear material properties
(including temperature
dependence). You must
always create the function
first before referencing it
when creating a load or
material property.
When you assign a function to a material property or a load, the Y function values are used to multiply the constant
values that are defined by those entities.
The Function Definition dialog box includes the following fields:
ID and Title
These options simply specify a unique ID and a Title by which the function can be identified.
Type
Currently, nineteen types of functions are available: Dimensionless (0), vs. Time (1), vs. Temperature (2), vs. Fre-
quency (3), vs. Stress (4), Function IDs vs. Temp (5), Structural Damping vs. Freq. (6), Critical Damping vs. Freq
(7), Q Damping vs. Freq (8), Strain Rate (9), Function IDs vs. Strain Rate (10), vs. Curve Length (11), vs. Curve
Parameterization (12), Stress vs. Strain (13), Stress vs. Plastic Strain (14), Function vs. Value (15), and Function vs.
Critical Damping (16), vs. Angle of Incidence (17), vs. Direction of Incidence (18). You define functions of each of
these types in an identical manner. The type simply determines how the X values will be interpreted.
For Types 5, 9, and 15, the Y values are the IDs of other functions (typically vs. Stress functions). The X values are
the temperatures or strain rates that will be assigned to each function.
Data Entry Options
These options are used to define the XY function.
You can specify single values in the table by choosing Single Value and filling in the X and Y values.
Hint: It is very important to identify the proper type for the function that you are trying to define; otherwise, it
will not be properly used when you try to analyze your model.
Working with Functions 4-105
If you want to define equally spaced points along a linear function, choose Linear Ramp. Then fill in the X, Y,
To X and To Y values, along with the Delta X value. All data points between X and To X will be linearly inter-
polated at every multiple of Delta X.
For more complex relationships choose Equation. In this case, just like the Linear Ramp, fill in the X, To X and
Delta X options. However, for Y, type in any equation (in terms of the X Variable - !x by default) that defines
the function that you want to represent. A typical example, might be setting Y to sin(!x). If you do not want to
use the !x variable, you can change it, but make sure that you use the new variable in your equations.
If you need to replicate a portion of a function, you can
choose periodic. In this case, the input options switch to those
shown. You specify X and To X as the range of the existing
function that you want to replicate. Specify Inc X as the value
that you want to add to the original X function values for each
copy that you are going to make. Specify Copies as the num-
ber of additional copies of the function range that you want to
create. The Y values are unchanged by this command. After
creating the copies, you can use the Edit Magnitude option to
update those values.
The XY table of values will always be shown (and used) in sorted order based on ascending values of X. You do
not, however, need to input the values in that order - they will be automatically sorted as they are defined.
If you want to define a step function, you can define multiple Y values with the same X value. In this case, they will
be added to the function in the order that you specify them, and will not be reordered by the sorting.
Editing Options
The Edit Phase and Edit Magnitude options allow you to modify the data that you have already defined. After
selecting either of these choices, specify the range of data points that you want to edit by entering the X and To X
values. Then enter Scale and Add values. All data between X and To X will be multiplied by Scale, and will then be
increased by the Add value. The Edit Phase option modifies the X values. The Edit Magnitude option modifies Y.
More, Delete and Reset
These options allow you to manage the list of data points in the function.
More will add the point or points that you are currently defining to the function.
Delete removes a selected point from the function. To use this option, first select the point from the list that you
want to remove, then press Delete.
Reset simply clears all data from the function.
Copying Functions
If you have another function in the current model that is similar to the one that you are trying to create, you can
press the Copy button. This will display a list of all functions in the model. When you choose a function from the
list, all data from that function will be loaded into the current function. You can then add or delete additional items
as you choose.
Working with Function Libraries
Function libraries allow you to create standard functions that you can use in many different models. When you
press Save, the current function is added to the function library. Pressing Load displays a list of the functions from
the library and lets you choose one to be loaded into the current function.
For more information, see Section 2.6.2.8, "Library/Startup".
Working with Other Programs
Since functions are just general XY data, they are easy to work with in other programs like spreadsheet and graph-
ing applications. To move functions between programs, you can use the Get and Put buttons. Put copies the current
function to the clipboard. Get retrieves clipboard data into the current function.
The clipboard format that is used is simply a free format, one XY data point per line table. The Put button places a
TAB character between the X and Y characters, but Get can interpret any space, comma or TAB separated values.
Modifying FEA Entities 4-107
4.7 Modifying FEA Entities
This section describes commands which are available to perform modifications to FEA entities. They can be sepa-
rated into three major areas:
moving entities: in the second partition of the Modify menu
edit/parameters: in the bottom partition of the Modify menu
advanced updates (Modify, Associativity and Modify, Update commands)
Each of these commands are discussed more fully below.
4.7.1 Moving FEA Entities
The following commands allow you to move the location of nodes. Certain commands also allow movement of
coordinate systems as well as elements. There are several commands under this section, but they all involve some
type of movement, whether it be projection, rotation, or translation. Each of these menu commands are described
below.
Many of these commands are also applicable to geometric entities. For more information, see Section 3.6, "Modi-
fying Geometry".
4.7.1.1 Modify, Project Menu
The Project commands update the locations of points or nodes by moving them onto a selected curve or surface.
When you project points or nodes, any geometry, elements or other entities that reference those points/nodes are
also moved.
In all of these commands, the projection direction will typically be normal to the curve or surface that you are pro-
jecting onto. Actually however, these commands move the entities to the closest location on the curve or surface.
For the purposes of these commands, curves extend past their endpoints toward infinity, or in the case of an arc,
they extend a full 360 degrees. Likewise, surfaces extend past their edge curves, but not to infinity. Even though
possible, you should avoid projecting onto a surface outside of its defined boundaries. Depending on the surface
type, this may or may not result in the coordinates that you expected.
Modify, Project, Node onto Curve...
... moves one or more nodes onto a curve. The standard entity selection dialog box is used to choose the points that
you want to project. You then must select the curve. You can choose any curve, and all of the selected nodes will be
projected onto it.
For more information on projection, see Section 4.7.1.1, "Modify, Project Menu".
Original Locations
Projected Locations
Points projected onto
extended curve
Point projected onto
extended arc
Original
Projected Locations Locations
Modify, Project, Node onto Surface...
... moves one or more points onto a surface. The standard entity selection dialog box is used to choose the points
that you want to project. Then, simply select the surface.
You can choose any surface, and all of the selected points will be projected onto it. For more information on projec-
tion, see Section 4.7.1.1, "Modify, Project Menu".
Modify, Project, Node along Vector...
... similar to Modify, Project, Node onto Surface except it allows you to use a vector to specify a projection direc-
tion instead of always using the surface normal direction. This can be helpful if you are projecting nodes in a plane
onto a surface with a high level or curvature and want to keep the spatial relationship between the nodes intact.
Modify, Project, Node onto Vector...
... similar to Modify, Project, Node onto Curve except it allows you to specify a vector (using any method in
FEMAP) representing a straight line between two coordinates to project to instead of an existing curve.
Modify, Project, Node onto Plane...
... similar to Modify, Project, Node onto Surface except it allows you to specify a 2-D plane (using any method in
FEMAP) to project to instead of an existing planar surface.
Modify, Project, Mesh onto Solid...
... moves a mesh onto a solid or group of surfaces. The standard entity selec-
tion dialog box is used to select the nodes (on the mesh) that you want to
project onto the solid, then the Project Onto dialog box is displayed.
With this dialog you can either directly pick a solid, or choose to project onto
surfaces. If you choose surfaces, you will be asked to choose the surfaces
after you press OK to close this dialog. Projecting onto a solid will simply use
all of the surfaces of that solid for the projection. If you want to limit the pro-
jection to a certain group of surfaces, then you must choose them explicitly.
Projected Nodes
Original Nodes
Surface
Modify, Move To Menu 4-109
The method used to project your mesh is to find the closest
point on the solid/surfaces to the initial node in the mesh. If
you select smoothing of the projected mesh, the mesh is
repeatedly smoothed and re-projected onto the surfaces. In
general, because of the closest location projection, it is usu-
ally best to start with your mesh somewhere close to the final
surfaces, especially if there is a large amount of curvature in
the surfaces. As you can see in the graphic, in areas of high
curvature, you will probably still have some cleanup to do
using this approach, but the closer you can start the mesh to the
final surface, the better your results will be.
4.7.1.2 Modify, Move To Menu
The Move To commands update the location of some portion of
your model. Although there are only commands to move coor-
dinate systems, points, and nodes, you can use these com-
mands to move your entire model. For example, when you
move a node, the elements, constraints and loads that reference the node are also updated.
The basic philosophy behind each of these commands is to specify a new coordinate to which selected entities will
be moved. Since it is relatively useless to move multiple entities to a single location (they would all be coincident),
each command allows you to limit the movement to any subset of the three coordinates. For example, you can just
update the X coordinates, leaving all Y and Z coordinates in their original locations. By specifying a non-rectangu-
lar coordinate system, you can also move to a selected radius or angle.
Each of the commands on this menu displays the standard entity selection dialog box, so you can choose the enti-
ties that you want to move. When you press OK, this will be followed by the standard coordinate definition dialog
box. The entities that you selected will be moved to the location that you specify. Finally, after you choose a loca-
tion, you will see the Move To dialog box. Here, you can choose the coordinates to update (X, Y and/or Z) and the
coordinate system to use for the modification. If you choose any coordinate system other than Global Rectangular,
the location you chose previously is transformed into that system, before the entities are moved. Only those coordi-
nates that are checked will be updated. In most cases, you will not want to check all of the coordinates, unless you
are updating a single entity.
Modify, Move To, Coord Sys...
... is the most powerful Move To command. Not only
does it update the location of the coordinate systems that
you select, but it can also move all points, nodes, and
other coordinate systems that are defined relative to
those coordinate systems.
If you just want to move the coordinate systems, do not
choose Move CSys, Nodes and Points.... If you did select
that option, FEMAP would move the coordinate systems
you selected plus the dependent entities.
Coordinate systems that you select are updated as you requested. Other dependent entities are moved as a rigid
body based on the transformation of the definition coordinate systems. If a coordinate system is both selected and
dependent on other selected coordinate systems, it is updated based on your request, since you selected it.
For more information on other options, see Section 4.7.1.2, "Modify, Move To Menu".
All of the coordinate systems that you select are updated as you requested. Other dependent entities are moved as a
rigid body based on the transformation of the definition coordinate systems. If a coordinate system is both selected
and dependent on other selected coordinate systems, it is updated based on your request, since you selected it.
If your model was built in a hierarchical manner using multiple coordinate systems, this command can quickly
move large, related portions of your model. If you want to update the location of a coordinate system but leave the
entities that reference it in their original positions, you can also use the Modify, Update Coord Sys command.
Modify, Move To, Node...
... moves selected nodes to a specified coordinate. Elements, loads, constraints and any other entities that reference
the selected nodes will also be moved.
For more information, see Section 4.7.1.2, "Modify, Move To Menu".
4.7.1.3 Modify, Move By Menu
These commands are similar to those found on the Move To submenu. The significant difference is that for these
commands you specify a vector instead of coordinates. All of the entities that you select for modification are
moved along (or by) that vector.
This command only uses two dialog boxes. First, the standard entity selection dialog box is displayed. You should
select the entities to be updated.
Next, the standard vector definition dialog box will be displayed. The vector you specify must contain both a direc-
tion and magnitude. All of the selected entities and the entities that reference them will be moved by that vector.
This essentially means that the location of the selected entity is updated by adding the components of the vector.
Move By in NonRectangular Coordinate Systems
The Move By commands always move along a vector, that is, along a straight line. You can define the vector in any
convenient coordinate system, but it will always represent a straight line. You can not use the Move By commands
to rotate your model by specifying a vector in the angular direction of a cylindrical coordinate system. Use the
Rotate commands to rotate your model.
Modify, Move By, Coord Sys...
...just like the Modify, Move To, Coord Sys command, this command will move all of the selected coordinate sys-
tems, and any points, nodes, or other coordinate systems that reference a selected system. This can be very power-
ful if your model is constructed with multi-level coordinate systems.
x
y
z
3
x
y
z
4
x
y
z
3
x
y
z
4
CSys 3 moves
and so do nodes These nodes
defined
relative to CSys 3
Move By vector
Select these nodes
Modify, Move By Menu 4-111
Again, dependent entities are moved as a rigid body. Selected coordinate systems are all moved by the vector that
you define. For more information, see Section 4.7.1.3, "Modify, Move By Menu".
Modify, Move By, Node...
... moves the selected nodes, and all parts of the model that reference them, by the specified vector. For more infor-
mation, see Section 4.7.1.3, "Modify, Move By Menu".
Modify, Move By, Element...
... is identical to Modify, Move By, Node, except that you choose elements. FEMAP will automatically move all
nodes which are connected to those elements. For more information, see Section 4.7.1.3, "Modify, Move By
Menu".
The Modify, Move By, Element command, unlike the other commands in this menu, will also update the orientation
nodes, orientation vectors and offsets of any line elements that you select. This allows you to move those elements
as a rigid body.
Modify, Move By, Radial Node...
Modify, Move By, Radial Node will move the selected nodes along a
vector directed from either a single point or from a specified vector.
After the nodes to move are selected, FEMAP will ask OK to Move
Around Point/Spherical (No=Around Vector/Cylindrical). Once the
question has been answered, FEMAP will prompt you for either a
Point (answer = Yes) or a Vector (answer = No).
When this command is used with the point method on a set of pla-
nar nodes, the nodes will be moved in the plane the r distance from the
point to move about.
.
Modify, Move By, Radial Element...
...is identical to Modify, Move By, Radial Node, except that you choose elements. FEMAP will automatically move
all nodes that are connected to those elements by the radial length. For more information, see "Modify, Move By,
Radial Node...".
Modify, Move By, Offset Element...
...is somewhat different than the other commands on this menu. In
fact, in function, it is very similar to the Mesh, Extrude, Element
command. It is intended for use with planar elements. You simply
select the elements that you want to offset, then choose the offset
method.
If you choose Vector, you will simply be prompted for a vector (just
like an extrusion vector), and the elements will be offset along that
vector. Using the command with this option is equivalent to using
the Modify, Move By, Element command. All elements are simply
moved by a constant amount.
Note: Moving radial around a vector is a great way to increase or decrease the radius of a hole in a solid mesh.
One thing to remember when increasing the radius of solid elements is to make sure you are not moving
the selected nodes past other nodes of the same element. This could lead to elements being inside out,
which will cause most solvers to not be able to use the elements properly.
r Point to move about
New Position
The other two options are more interesting. If you choose
the Normals or Normals with Thickness Correction
options, you will be asked for the offset distance. In this
case, however, each element will be offset along its nor-
mal direction. For most cases however, you will want to
choose the Normals with Thickness Correction option.
For more description of these two options and the effect
of using thickness correction, see "Mesh, Extrude, Ele-
ment...".
Using this command with this option can be a simple
way to create midsurface meshes in constant thickness
parts. You simply mesh one of the sides of the thin
walled solid. Whether it is the outer or inner surface
really does not matter. You then use this command to off-
set the element by half the thickness to the midsurface.
When doing this, you will normally need to use a nega-
tive offset value. Since all solid surfaces have normals
that point outward, the planar elements meshed on those
surfaces will also have elements that point outward. By
specifying a negative offset distance, you will move the
elements toward the interior of the solid. Parts with mul-
tiple constant thicknesses can be handled by using this
command several times and selectively moving the ele-
ments.
Modify, Rotate To Menu
The commands on this menu rotate selected entities. Unlike the Modify, Move To commands, these commands treat
the selected entities as a rigid body. All of them are rotated by the same angle.
The Modify, Rotate To commands require four dialog boxes. First, the standard entity selection dialog box is dis-
played. You can select all of the entities that you want to rotate. Then, the standard vector definition dialog box
defines the axis of rotation. Only the location of the base and the direction of this vector are important. The length
is not used. Finally, the standard coordinate definition dialog box is displayed twice. The first time, you must define
the coordinates of the starting point of the rotation. The second time, you must define the ending point of the rota-
tion. Using these coordinates, and the axis of rotation, FEMAP will determine the rotation angle.
Modify, Rotate To, Coord Sys...
...just like the Modify, Move commands, this command will rotate all of the selected coordinate systems. Points,
nodes, or other coordinate systems that reference a selected system are also moved as a rigid body. Their movement
is based on the motion of their definition coordinate systems. This can be very powerful if your model is con-
structed with multi-level coordinate systems.
For more information, see "Modify, Rotate To Menu".
Original elements on outer surface
Elements offset to half
of solid thickness
Axis of rotation
Rotate from here
Rotate to here
Modify, Rotate By Menu 4-113
Modify, Rotate To, Node...
... rotates the selected nodes, and all parts of the model that reference them, around the specified vector.
Modify, Rotate To, Element...
... is just like the Modify, Rotate, To Node command, except that you choose elements. FEMAP will automatically
rotate all nodes that are connected to those elements.
The Modify, Rotate To Element command, unlike the other commands in this menu, will also update the orientation
nodes, orientation vectors and offsets of any line elements that you select. This allows you to move those elements
as a rigid body, and retain their original characteristics.
4.7.1.4 Modify, Rotate By Menu
These commands are similar to the commands on the Modify, Rotate To menu. Instead of using a starting and end-
ing location, however, you must specify a rotation angle. You can also specify an optional translation distance with
these commands. By combining both rotation about, and translation along, the axis of rotation, you can move enti-
ties along a screw-thread or helix shaped path.
This time, only three dialog boxes are necessary. The first is the standard entity selection dialog box. As always,
you should select all of the entities that you want to rotate. Next, the standard vector definition dialog box will be
displayed. This defines the axis of rotation. As in the Modify, Rotate To commands, only the location and direction
of this axis are important. The length is not used. Finally, the Rotation and Translation dialog box will appear. You
must specify the Rotation Angle and the Translation Distance.
The selected entities will be rotated (following right-hand rule conventions) around the axis of rotation by the spec-
ified angle. Simultaneously, they will be translated along the same vector by the specified distance. If you specify a
zero rotation angle, these commands will simply translate along the vector - much like the Modify, Move By com-
mands.
Modify, Rotate By, Coord Sys...
...just like the Modify, Rotate To commands, this command will rotate all of the selected coordinate systems. Points,
nodes, or other coordinate systems that reference a selected system are also moved as a rigid body. Their movement
is based on the transformation of the selected coordinate systems. This can be very powerful if your model is con-
structed with multi-level coordinate systems.
For more information, see Section 4.7.1.4, "Modify, Rotate By Menu".
Modify, Rotate By, Node...
... rotates the selected nodes, and all parts of the model that reference them, around the specified vector.
Axis of rotation
Modify, Rotate By, Element...
... is just like the Modify, Rotate By, Node command, except that you choose elements. FEMAP will automatically
rotate all nodes which are connected to those elements.
The Modify, Rotate By, Element command, unlike the other commands in this menu, will also update the orienta-
tion nodes, orientation vectors and offsets of any line elements that you select. This allows you to move those ele-
ments as a rigid body, and retain their original characteristics.
4.7.1.5 Modify, Align Menu
These commands combine the capabilities of the Modify, Move and Rotate commands to provide a simple way of
aligning portions of your model. Only three dialog boxes are necessary. First, you select the entities that you want
to align using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then you need to specify two vectors using the vector defi-
nition dialog boxes. The first vector defines the original position and orientation that will be aligned. The second
vector defines new or desired position and orientation. FEMAP will first move the entities that you selected from
the origin of the first vector to the origin of the second vector. Then, FEMAP will rotate the entities to the new ori-
entation. This is accomplished by a rotation based on the angle between the vectors.
If you simply want to use this command as
an alternate method of rotation, make sure
both vectors have the same origin. If you do
not, the entities will be translated before they
are rotated.
Modify, Align, Coord Sys...
... is just like the Move and Rotate commands. It will align all of the coordinate systems that you select, plus the
entities that are defined relative to those systems. No option is available to skip alignment of the referencing enti-
ties.
Modify, Align, Node...
... aligns the selected nodes, and all parts of the model that reference them, using the two vectors.
For more information, see Section 4.7.1.5, "Modify, Align Menu".
Modify, Align, Element...
... is just like the Modify, Align, Node command, except that you choose elements. FEMAP will automatically align
all nodes which are connected to those elements.
The Modify, Rotate By, Element command, unlike the other commands in this menu, will also update the orienta-
tion nodes, orientation vectors and offsets of any line elements that you select. This allows you to move those ele-
ments as a rigid body, and retain their original characteristics.
For more information, see Section 4.7.1.5, "Modify, Align Menu".
4.7.1.6 Modify, Scale Menu
These commands are used to change the size of your model. You specify a relative scaling factor and a point to
scale around. FEMAP will adjust the selected coordinates appropriately. Only points and nodes can be scaled. You
Note: The Modify, Align Element command, unlike the other commands in this menu, will also update the ori-
entation nodes, orientation vectors and offsets of any line elements that you select. This allows you to
move those elements as a rigid body, and retain their original characteristics.
Align these elements
From this vector
To this vector,
along these other
elements
Aligned elements
Edit/Parameters 4-115
can also choose to scale curves or elements, but FEMAP will just automatically select the proper points or nodes
for you. Like other modification commands, entities which reference the selected points and nodes will also grow
or shrink with them. Coordinate systems cannot be scaled.
The first dialog box used by these commands is the standard entity selection dialog. You must select all of the enti-
ties that you wish to scale. After you press OK, FEMAP will display the standard coordinate definition dialog box.
FEMAP will scale your model relative to these base coordinates. The equation used for the scaling is:
You can specify three different scale factors,
one for each coordinate direction. For any
coordinate direction that you do not want to
scale, you must use a scale factor of 1.0. Scale
factors that are larger than 1.0 increase the
physical size of your model. Scale factors
smaller than 1.0 decrease its size. You can use
a negative scale factor to reflect the entities
about the base location. Similarly, a scale fac-
tor of 0.0 will move all entities to the base
coordinate, just like the Modify, Move To commands.
All scaling is done in the coordinate system that you select. The coordinate directions are along the axes of this sys-
tem. If you select a non-rectangular system, you can scale your model radially or tangentially.
Modify, Scale, Node...
... scales the selected nodes, and all parts of the model that reference them, along the specified directions.
For more information, see Section 4.7.1.6, "Modify, Scale Menu".
Modify, Scale, Element...
... is just like the Modify, Scale, Node command, except that you choose elements. FEMAP will automatically scale
all nodes which are connected to those elements.
For more information, see Section 4.7.1.6, "Modify, Scale Menu".
4.7.2 Edit/Parameters
Four commands in the third section of the Modify menu (Edit, Color, Layer, and Renumber) enable you to change
specific items for the FEA information. Each of these commands are described below.
4.7.2.1 Modify, Edit Menu
The commands on the Modify Edit menu are used to edit or recreate entities in your model. These commands are
typically used when you need to perform modifications to a single or a few entities. You will be prompted for input
for each entity selected. Therefore, to use this command to modify hundreds of entities can be quite time consum-
ing. For these type of gross changes to the model, see the other Modify commands in this section of the Modify
menu: Color, Layer, Update Elements, and Update Other.
Each command first asks you to select the entities you wish to edit. As always, the standard entity selection dialog
box is used. Following your selections, FEMAP simply displays the same dialog box (or boxes) used by the related
X { }
New
X { }
Base
X { }
Old
X { }
Base
( ) X { }
ScaleFactor
( ) + =
Original Model After Scale Factor of 2.0 in
Horizontal Direction Only
command in the Model menu which you used to originally create the entities. In this case however, all of the data
fields default to the current values for the selected entities.
For example, if you choose Edit, Node and then select nodes 1, 3 and 5, three additional dialog boxes will be dis-
played, one at a time. The first dialog box will display the coordinates of node 1. You can change these values or
just press OK to accept the current values. Then dialog boxes for nodes 3 and 5 will be displayed. If you press Can-
cel at any time, you will immediately return to the FEMAP menu. Any entities that you had previously changed
(and pressed OK) will still be changed.
4.7.2.2 Modify, Color Menu
The commands on this submenu are used to modify the color of one or more selected entities of a specific type. All
commands work in a similar fashion. Entities to be modified are selected with the standard entity selection dialog
box. The standard Color Palette dialog box is displayed. You can pick a color, which will be applied to all of the
entities that you selected. The default color, will be the current color of the selected entity with the minimum ID.
For more information on the Color Palette, see Section 4.3.5, "Color Palette" of the FEMAP User Guide.
Modify, Edit can be used to change the colors of entities, but this command is much faster for multiple entities.
Modify, Color, Region; Modify, Color, Coord Sys; Modify, Color, Node
Modify, Color, Element; Modify, Color, Material; Modify, Color, Property
4.7.2.3 Modify, Transparency Menu
The commands on this submenu are used to modify the transparency of one or more selected entities of a specific
type. All commands work in a similar fashion. Entities to be modified are selected with the standard entity selec-
tion dialog box. A Transparency dialog box is displayed. You can enter a number from 0 to 100, with 0 being
Opaque (Not Transparent) and 100 being Clear (Completely Transparent). The default transparency level is 0.
4.7.2.4 Modify, Layer Menu
The commands on this submenu are used to modify the layer of one or more selected entities of a specific type.
These commands are very much like those on the Modify, Color menu. First, you select the entities you want to
modify using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then, instead of selecting from the color palette, FEMAP
will prompt you to choose a new layer number from the list of available layers. All of the selected entities will be
modified to the specified layer.
Again, Modify, Edit can be used to change layers, but this command is faster for multiple entities.
Modify, Layer, Region; Modify, Layer, Coord Sys; Modify, Layer, Node
Modify, Layer, Element; Modify, Layer, Material; Modify, Layer, Property
Note: When modifying multiple Loads of the same type (nodal forces, elemental pressures, etc.) using the
Modify, Edit, Load... command, FEMAP will ask a question OK to Update All Selected Loads with
same values? after you have modified the first selected load. Clicking Yes will change all selected
loads to the value specified for the first load, while clicking No will allow you to modify each load indi-
vidually.
A similar question relating to constraints is asked when using the Modify, Edit, Constraint... command
and works in a similar manner.
Modify, Renumber Menu 4-117
4.7.2.5 Modify, Renumber Menu
The commands on this submenu are used to renumber the
IDs of one or more selected entities of a specific type, sets
(load, constraint, and output sets), or groups.
Each of these commands uses the standard entity selection
dialog box to select the entities to be renumbered. After
you press OK, the Renumber To dialog box is displayed.
You select a new Starting ID and Increment. The first entity
to be renumbered is changed to the starting ID. The incre-
ment is then added to the starting ID before each subse-
quent entity is renumbered.
If an entity which is not being renumbered has an ID which
conflicts with the renumbering, that ID will be skipped.
The increment will simply be added extra times until an
unused ID is found. If you choose Verify Renumbering, a
list of the existing and new IDs will be created in the Mes-
sages window, and you will be asked to confirm that you
wish to renumber the selected entities.
Your choice of sorting options determines the order that FEMAP will use to renumber the selected entities. These
sorting options are identical to those used by the corresponding list commands. The specific sort options which are
available for each command are shown in the following table.
Layups, Load Sets, Constraint Sets, Analysis Sets, Output Sets, and Groups can only be renumbered using the
Original ID and Selection Order sort options.
Original ID...
...keeps the original entity order. The IDs will change, but not the relative sequence of entities within your model.
This option is the default. It is most often used to do a simple renumbering from one ID range to another.
Selection Order...
... is the most flexible option, but the one which requires the most work from you. Entities are renumbered in the
sequence that you have chosen them in the original standard entity selection dialog. You can force FEMAP to
renumber into any sequence that you want, simply by choosing them in that order. This option is usually not appro-
priate for renumbering large numbers of entities, but can be very useful for making specific changes to a portion of
your model.
Color or Layer...
... both use the data on the entity records to sort the renumbered entities. These options will group entities with the
same color or layer in the same ID range.
Sorting
Options
Connect
Prop
Region Connector CSys Node Elem Matl Prop Function Layer
Original ID * * * * * * * * * *
Selection Order * * * * * * * * * *
Color * * * * * * * * *
Layer * * * * * * * x
Type * * * * *
Definition CSys * *
Property *
Material *
Min Node ID *
X * * *
Y * * *
Z * * *
Type...
... is only available for elements, properties and materials. Just like renumbering by color, this option uses the entity
type to renumber similar entities into the same ID range. You can use this option in models which use many differ-
ent element types. It will group each type into similar IDs.
Definition CSys...
... is only available when you renumber coordinate systems or nodes. It is just like renumbering by color or type,
except that it uses the entity definition coordinate system.
Property or Material...
... are also just like renumbering by color or type. These options sort based on the element property reference or the
property material reference.
Min Node ID...
... finds the minimum node ID on each element. The renumbered elements will be in the order of the minimum
node ID which the element references.
X, Y or Z...
... will renumber entities based on their coordinates in your model. If you are renumbering nodes, the X, Y, or Z
nodal coordinates are used to determine the renumbering sequence. Coordinate systems use the coordinate system
origin, and elements use the center of the element.
When you choose any one of these options, you must also choose a coordinate system. The entities coordinates are
transformed into the coordinate system that you choose prior to being sorted for renumbering. By defining and
choosing different coordinate systems, you can implement many different renumbering sequences. For example, if
you choose a cylindrical coordinate system, and renumber by X (or R) you can renumber entities based on their
radial distance from the origin of the coordinate system.
When renumbering by coordinates, you can also check Absolute Value if you want FEMAP to ignore the sign (pos-
itive or negative) of the coordinate value. If this option is not checked, negative values will be different, and numer-
ically less than positive values.
Ascending/Descending
You can choose to either renumber entities in Ascending or Descending order. Ascending order is the default, and
will sequence entities from the lowest to the highest value of the sort option that you select. Descending order will
reverse that sequence.
Constant Offset
If you select this option, all Sort Renumbered Order by options are grayed, and you can only choose the Starting ID
and the Verify Renumbering option. FEMAP will simply change the lowest ID value to the starting increment. It
will then add the constant difference between the original lowest ID and the new starting increment to all other IDs.
No sorting will take place, and no gaps will be filled. This is an easy method to maintain a numbering structure
while shifting it to another level (such as changing all IDs from 1-1000 to 10,000-11,000).
Renumbering Based on Multiple Options
Sometimes, you may want to renumber your model based on more than one of the options. FEMAP cannot do this
in one command, but it is very easy to do. If for example, you wanted all of your node IDs to be sorted based on
their X, then Y (for all identical X) then Z (for all identical X and Y) position, you should use Modify, Renumber,
Node three times, selecting the sort options in reverse order. The first time you would sort based on Z. The second
time based on Y, then finally based on X.
Multiple options can always be used, not just with X, Y, and Z. You must just remember to choose the sort options
in reverse order.
Modify, Renumber, Region; Modify, Renumber, Coord Sys; Modify, Renumber, Node
Modify, Renumber, Element; Modify, Renumber, Material; Modify, Renumber, Property
Advanced Updates 4-119
Modify, Renumber, Layup; Modify, Renumber, Load Set; Modify, Renumber, Constraint Set
Modify, Renumber, Analysis; Modify, Renumber, Group; Modify, Renumber, Layer
4.7.3 Advanced Updates
The commands on the Modify, Update menus are used to update parameters which are referenced by one or more
selected entities. Unlike the commands on the Modify, Color and Modify, Layer menus, the parameters which are
updated by these commands are only applicable to one entity type.
These commands are separated into three major areas: Associativity, Update Elements, and Update Others. All
Modify, Update commands work in a similar fashion, but since the parameters that they update vary, each com-
mand is documented in its own section
4.7.3.1 Modify, Associativity...
... allows you to attach or remove nodes and elements from geometry. This
can be a very useful command to eliminate some areas of a mesh from a
curve or surface to prevent geometric loading from applying to them. You
have the option to choose either nodes or elements.
When you select this command, you will see the Geometry Associativity
dialog box. You must choose between Detach From or Attach To. You must
also choose the type of geometry from which you wish to detach. If you
select Any, you can remove all attachments. If you select a specific type of geometry, you must also input (or graph-
ically select) the ID of the geometric entity.
Interior Nodes Only
The Interior Nodes Only option is available when you are removing geometry from curves, surfaces, or solid/vol-
umes. FEMAP uses a hierarchal system of attachment. Nodes on a surface, for example, include nodes attached
directly to the surface, nodes attached to the curves that define the surface, and nodes on the points that define the
curves. If you select the Interior Nodes Only option, the attachments directly to the surface will be removed, but the
curve and point attachments will remain. You will still be able to load or constrain the curves. If you do not select
Interior Nodes Only, all attachments will be removed.
4.7.3.2 Modify, Update Elements, Type...
... updates the type of one or more selected elements. You can never change elements to an incompatible type. For
example, you cannot change a beam to a plate, or vice versa. You can, however, use this command to change
between various line element types or between the plane element types.
Before you choose this command, you may use Model, Property, or any other available method, to make a property
of the type you want to use for the elements. When this command is used, you will be asked to select the elements
to be updated using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then you will be presented with a list of available
properties. If you want to create a new property while using this command, simply click the Property Icon Button
in the Select Property for New Element Type dialog box.
Hint: You will typically want to use this command with nodes only.
Attach/detach of elements will only affect certain picking
options. Expansion of geometric loads onto finite elements is
always performed on a nodal basis. An element is consider on a
surface for geometric loads if all nodes from an elements face
are attached to the surface. Therefore, you can effectively
remove an element from a surface by simply detaching one of
its nodes.
Note: When attaching nodes, they must not have any other attachments to geometry. You also will not be able
to develop the hierarchy that FEMAP creates automatically when meshing.
Choose a property of the type that you want for the selected elements. When you press OK, all of the element types
will be changed along with the properties that the elements reference. You will receive messages if any of the ele-
ments are incompatible with the property you selected.
If you are changing from a line element type that does not require an orientation to a type that does, FEMAP will
automatically call the Modify, Update Elements, Orientation command. This allows you to properly orient the ele-
ments that you just modified. You should always specify the orientation that you want. If you do not however,
FEMAP will automatically assign an orientation to each of the updated elements. Review any of these automatic
assignments very carefully.
4.7.3.3 Modify, Update Elements, Formulation...
...enables you to specify the element formulation for a selected set of elements. You must select the elements to
change, and then the Element Formulation dialog box will appear to set the formulation. All elements must be of
the same type. FEMAP will then reassign the chosen element formulation to the selected elements.
For more details, see:
Section 4.2.2, "Model, Element..."
Section 6, "Element Reference" in the FEMAP User Guide
4.7.3.4 Modify, Update Elements, Property ID...
... works just like Modify, Update Element, Type, except that you must choose a property of the same type as the
elements. You cannot change the element type using this command.
4.7.3.5 Modify, Update Elements, Material ID...
... updates the material that is referenced by one or more selected properties. You first select the properties to be
updated, and then choose a new material from a list of the available materials. If you want to create a new material
while using this command, simply click the Material Icon Button in the Select Material for Update dialog box.
Some property types, such as masses, do not require material definitions. If you attempt to update one of these, you
will receive a warning message. Similarly, the many materials referenced by laminate plate properties cannot be
updated using this command - use Modify, Edit, Property instead.
4.7.3.6 Modify, Update Elements, Line Element Orientation...
... updates the element orientation for various line (bar, beam, curved beam) elements. You must first select the ele-
ments to be updated using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then you can select whether to update the ele-
ments using an orientation Node ID or a Vector. If you choose Node ID, you must also specify the node to use. If
you choose Vector, the standard vector definition dialog box will be displayed after you press OK.
Your orientation will be applied to all elements you selected, and it must not be colinear with any of the elements.
Also, remember that you may be specifying different orientation directions for each element when you choose
Node ID, since the orientation direction is based on the location of the first node on the element.
A third option, Equivalent Vector Orientations, can also be selected. This option allows you to convert elements
which are oriented using third nodes to vector orientations. No additional input is required. An orientation vector,
in the direction of the third node, is simply computed for each element. This option has no effect if the element was
already oriented by a vector.
4.7.3.7 Modify, Update Elements, Line Element Offsets...
... updates the offsets for various line (bar, beam, curved beam) elements. You must first select the elements to be
updated using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then the Update Element Offsets dialog box is displayed.
You can choose to Update End A offsets and/or Update End B offsets. If you enable the Set EndB=EndA option, the
offset at the first end (A) of the elements is automatically applied to the second end (B) of all selected elements.
Modify, Update Elements, Line Element Reverse Direction... 4-121
After you press OK, the offsets are defined using the standard vector def-
inition dialog boxes. Updating the offsets at one end will require only
one vector definition. Updating both offsets requires two vectors. The
default vectors will be the current offsets from the selected element with
the minimum ID.
Radial Offsets
If you want to offset beams in a radial pattern, from the center of a
sphere, choose the Radial Offset option. You must then enter a distance
to offset the element endpoints from the node. When you press OK, you
will be asked for the coordinates of the center of a sphere. The offset
directions lie along the lines connecting this center location and the indi-
vidual nodes. All offsets, at both ends of the elements are set to the same
size, only the directions change.
Move to Reference Point
Instead of specifying offsets for the element, you can also use the Reference Points that can be defined in the Sec-
tion Property Generator (Section 4.2.4.1, "Line Element Properties") to automatically define the offsets. First,
define your element properties using a shape, and set the reference point to the location in that shape that you want
to be located at the nodes. Then, when you use this command, simply press Move to Reference Point (the other
settings are not used), and the appropriate offsets will be generated for each element to move the reference point to
the associated node.
4.7.3.8 Modify, Update Elements, Line Element Reverse Direction...
... swaps the first and second ends of line elements to reverse each elements direction. Use this carefully, since the
resulting element orientations may also need to be updated.
4.7.3.9 Modify, Update Elements, Beam/Bar Releases...
... updates the releases for various line (bar, beam, curved beam) elements. You must first select the elements to be
updated using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then, the Define Element Releases dialog box allows you to
choose any combination of the six degrees of freedom at each end of the element to release. You should make cer-
tain, however, that your element is still capable of supporting any load you may want to apply.
The default degrees of freedom will be the current releases from the selected element with the minimum ID.
4.7.3.10 Modify, Update Elements, Beam Warping...
... adds or updates the Nodes/SPOINTS that are defined for Warping on Nastran beam elements. You must first
select the elements to be updated using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then, the Define Beam Element
Warping dialog box allows you to choose how the points will be created.
None: Removes warping points from the ends of the selected beams.
Continuous: Creates Nodes/SPOINTS at ends of the beam so that the warping is continuous throughout the ele-
ments selected.
All Continuous: Creates Nodes/SPOINTS at the ends of the selected beams so that warping is continuous through-
out the elements selected as well as any other beam elements connected to the originally selected beams.
Discontinuous: Creates Nodes/SPOINTS at the ends of the selected beams so that the warping is discontinuous
across each of the selected elements.
Edit: Choose a single element to update to enable the editing of the warping points at the ends of that beam.
Note: In FEMAP versions before 9.3, this operation was done with the Modify, Update Elements, Reverse
command. That command has been broken into two separate Reverse commands, one for line ele-
ments, one for planar and solid elements, to eliminate confusion.
4.7.3.11 Modify, Update Elements, Remove Cross Section...
...updates the selected beam or bar properties to have no section shape defined. All the property values and stress
location values are retained but the section shape is set to None. One use for this command is to convert any
PBEAML or (PBARL) cards that were read from a Nastran Deck into standard PBEAM (or PBAR) data.
4.7.3.12 Modify, Update Elements, Reverse/Orient First Edge...
... switches the normal direction of selected planar and solid elements. After selecting the elements to reverse/ori-
ent, you will given be the option to reverse the normals, align normals either outward or inward, or if you want to
align planar elements to a vector.
For plane elements, the connections are swapped to reverse the direction of the element normal. For solid elements,
the top and bottom faces are swapped, turning the element inside-out. In either of these last two cases, the direc-
tion of any applied pressure loads will change. Choosing this option a second time for the same elements will effec-
tively undo the reversal.
If you choose to align the edges of planar elements to a vector, all planar elements are reconnected so that their first
edge is closest to the direction that you specify. The element normal is actually unchanged in this operation, only
the order in which the nodes are connected is changed. This can be used to rotate a group of elements so that their
first edge lies along a model boundary. Line and solid elements are unchanged by this operation.
The All Normals Outward and Inward options apply only to planar elements,
but provide a very easy way to make all normals consistent. If the elements
that you selected form one or more complete shell (like the outside of a solid
model), all normals can be automatically adjusted to the direction you chose.
If there are interior features/panels (like internal bulkheads), FEMAP will
make the directions consistent, but the concept of inward/outward may not be
maintained. You will also receive a warning if the elements you select do not
form a complete shell (i.e. they have free edges). FEMAP can still usually
align the normals.
4.7.3.13 Modify, Update Elements, Material Angle...
... updates the element material orientation angle for planar and axisymmetric elements. You set the default mate-
rial orientation angle in the Element/Property Type dialog, which can be accessed from any of the element or prop-
erty creation commands. This default is applied to all new elements that you create. If however, you want to change
the material angle for existing elements, use this update command.
Note: In FEMAP versions before 9.3, this command (simply called Modify, Update Elements, Reverse) also
reversed line elements. Reversing direction of line elements is now done with the Modify, Update
Elements, Line Element Reverse Direction command (See Section 4.7.3.8, "Modify, Update Ele-
ments, Line Element Reverse Direction...").
Reverse these elements
Before After
Modify, Update Elements, Split Quads... 4-123
You will choose the elements to update using the standard entity
selection dialog box. Then the Element Material Orientation dia-
log box will appear. This is the same dialog box used to define
the default orientations. Updating orientations using this com-
mand does not however change the default values that you have
currently defined.
You have four basic choices for setting the orientation. You can
choose None, which will turn off the material orientation. This
will typically result in material axes that are oriented along the
default elemental axes. If you choose Set Angle using Vector
Direction and press OK, FEMAP will display the standard vector
definition dialog box. You then assign a vector direction.
FEMAP will automatically calculate the material angle values
for each element which will align the primary (X) material direction with the vector you specified.
When you choose Set Angle using Coordinate Direction, the vector and resulting angle are simply defined along a
coordinate direction at the first node of each element. This method is especially useful if you want to align the
material axes to the radial or tangential direction in a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system. In most other
cases, Set Angle using Vector Direction is preferred. The final option, Angle Value, allows you to directly define the
orientation angle value. FEMAP does no further calculations with this angle value.
Before choosing any of these methods, be sure to refer to your analysis program documentation to see how material
orientation angles are used and to find any limitations.
When to Set a Material Angle
Most analysis programs have two basic uses for this type of orientation angle. The first is to align the principal
directions of a non-isotropic material. Whenever you are using orthotropic or anisotropic materials, you should
probably be defining a material angle for all of your planar elements. If you do not, the default orientation, along
the vector between the first two nodes of the element is used. This will typically produce a different alignment for
each element and can give meaningless analysis results.
The second use for material angles can be equally important. If you are going to recover and post-process elemental
normal stresses (i.e., X Stress, Y Stress, XY Shear, etc.), they are usually reported relative to the elemental coordi-
nate system. That coordinate system is aligned by the material angle. Again, if you do not align all of your elemen-
tal axes, the X Normal Stress for one element may not be in the same direction as the X Normal Stress for the
next element. Refer to your analysis program documentation to see how your stresses are reported. You may not
have to set angles if stress output is reported relative to some other coordinate reference.
Viewing Material Angles
You can see the material angles that you have defined for your planar elements by using the View Options com-
mand. Choose the Element - Orientation/Shape option, and turn on Show Orientation. This will display a small
vector at the center of each element where an angle has been defined. The orientation of the vector shows the angle
that you chose. Generally, you will want to see that all of the vectors are parallel - then your elements will be
aligned.
4.7.3.14 Modify, Update Elements, Split Quads...
... changes quadrilateral elements into triangles. This command asks for the elements to be split. You may choose
any element types or shapes - only quadrilateral elements (with or without midside nodes) will be changed. The
elements can have loads applied. Those loads will automatically be applied to one or both of the new triangular ele-
Note: Not all programs will report analysis results automatically in the material angle coordinate system. You
should check the documentation of your analysis program to determine whether you can force the anal-
ysis program to output results in the material angle coordinate system, and what commands are required
to do this.
Hint: You may define a material angle after you have analyzed a model to transform the normal stresses to a
different coordinate system. Set the material angle using Modify, Update Elements, Material Angle,
then use the Model, Output, Transform command to convert the stresses.
ments - whichever is appropriate. New nodes will be added at the element center if you are splitting elements with
midside nodes.
FEMAP will automatically split the quad elements to form the best triangles that it can. You cannot control the
direction of the split, other than by the initial shape of the quad elements.
4.7.3.15 Modify, Update Elements, Adjust Plate Thickness/Offset...
... enables you to adjust the thickness or the offsets of the selected plate elements. When you select this command,
you will be asked to select the elements to update, and you will then see the following dialog box.
Update
These options control whether FEMAP will update the thickness or the offsets for the selected plates. If you are
updating thickness, new plate properties will be written for each thickness value calculated. New properties are not
required when you vary offsets. Currently defined offsets and thicknesses have no bearing on this command.
Method
These options control the calculation of the thickness/offset values. You can choose to calculate variable values
based upon nodal position (Vary Between Nodes option), an equation, or constant value.
For the Vary Between Nodes option, you must input the first node, last node, and values at each of these nodes.
FEMAP will then compute values for all other nodes attached to the selected elements based upon their relative
distance between the From and To nodes. This option provides an easy way to gradually vary the thickness/offsets
of plates which are in a patterned series.
The other option, Equation or Constant, lets you input an equation or constant value for the thickness/offsets. If an
equation is chosen, the i variable will represent elements for offsets, and nodes for thickness values.
The final option in this area, Average for each Element, will average the nodal thickness for each plate, and assign
this constant thickness to all corner nodes on the plate. Otherwise, each corner of the plate will most likely have a
different value. This option has no effect when modifying plate offsets because these offsets are already calculated
on an elemental basis, not on a nodal basis.
Limits
This section enables you to define the Tolerance, Maximum, and Minimum values to be used in the update. You can
limit the number of significant digits to be retained as a unique thickness or offset by specifying a tolerance value.
This is especially convenient if you want to limit thicknesses or offsets to an increment of a specific value (like
0.001, for example) You may also limit the minimum and maximum allowable values, which is especially useful
when defining equations.
After - Quads Split Before
Modify, Update Elements, Linear/Parabolic Order... 4-125
4.7.3.16 Modify, Update Elements, Linear/Parabolic Order...
... changes linear elements to parabolic ele-
ments and vice versa. You will be asked to
choose the direction.
Pressing Yes will update linear elements to
parabolic ones. Pressing No will update para-
bolic elements to linear ones.
After making your selection, choose the ele-
ments to be updated using the standard entity
selection dialog box. You can choose any ele-
ments in your model, but this command only
recognizes plane and volume types. In addi-
tion, only elements which are currently of the selected order are updated. For example, if you are converting linear
to parabolic elements and choose a mixture of linear and parabolics, only the linear ones will be updated.
Converting from linear to parabolic elements creates new nodes automatically at all element midside locations.
Current nodal parameters (next ID, definition and output coordinate systems, permanent constraints, etc.) are used
for these nodes. This command always creates new nodes. It makes no attempt to find current nodes in your model
at the correct locations. You can use the Check Coincident Nodes command to remove any duplicates.
When you convert parabolic to linear elements, midside nodes are no longer needed for the converted elements, but
are not deleted. You can use Delete, Node to remove them.
4.7.3.17 Modify, Update Elements, Midside Nodes...
... moves nodes to the midpoint of element
edges.
Only parabolic elements are considered and
only the nodes which are referenced as mid-
side nodes are moved. If you select non-
parabolic elements, they will simply be
ignored.
Input for this command is minimal. You
just select the elements to be updated using
the standard entity selection dialog box.
When you press OK, the position of all midside nodes will be checked and moved to the midside of their respective
element edges.
4.7.3.18 Modify, Update Elements, Rigid Thermal Expansion...
... allows you to change the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (CTE) for existing rigid elements in your model.
First select the Rigid elements to update and then enter the CTE in the dialog box. You may also specify the CTE
by clicking the Material... button and choosing a material from the list. This will take the CTE defined for that
material and assign the same value to the selected rigid elements.
4.7.3.19 Modify, Update Other, CSys Definition CSys...
... chooses a new definition coordinate system for one or more coordinate systems. You must select the coordinate
systems to be updated using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then, another dialog box will be displayed
which will contain a list of all available coordinate systems. You can choose any coordinate system from the list. If
you want to create a new coordinate system while using this command, simply click the Coordinate System Icon
Button in the Select Coordinate System... dialog box. You will receive an error message, however, if you choose
one of the systems that is being updated, since a coordinate system cannot reference itself.
This command does not move the coordinate system location. Rather, it redefines the system so that it is in the
same location and orientation relative to the new definition coordinate system.
Note: Only REB2 rigid elements (non-interpolation) can have CTEs in Nastran, so if any chosen elements are
not RBE2s, they will be skipped.
Before - Linear Plates After - converted to Parabolic
with Midside Nodes
Before After - Midside nodes moved
4.7.3.20 Modify, Update Other, Node Definition CSys...
... also works just like Modify, Update Other, CSys Definition CSys, except that you select nodes to update instead
of coordinate systems. If you want to create a new coordinate system while using this command, simply click the
Coordinate System Icon Button in the Select Coordinate System... dialog box.
4.7.3.21 Modify, Update Other, Output CSys...
... works just like Modify, Update Other, Node Definition CSys. First, you select the nodes to be updated, and then
choose a coordinate system from a list of available systems. In this command, however, the nodal output coordinate
system is updated instead of the definition coordinate system. If you want to create a new coordinate system while
using this command, simply click the Coordinate System Icon Button in the Select Coordinate System... dialog
box.
4.7.3.22 Modify, Update Other, Perm Constraint...
... updates the permanent constraints on one or more selected nodes. You select the nodes to be updated using the
standard entity selection dialog box. You may then select the appropriate DOFs to constrain permanently through
the Update Nodal Permanent Constraints dialog box. You can choose any combination of the six permanent con-
straints to be applied to all selected nodes.
4.7.3.23 Modify, Update Other, Superelement ID...
... updates the Superelement ID of a set of nodes. First select the nodes and then enter an integer to specify a Super-
element ID. This is an easy way to create a number of Superelements in a model that has already exists. Each new
integer entered becomes a Superelement with a new ID for Nastran.
4.7.3.24 Modify, Update Other, Load Phase...
... updates the phase of loads. When you invoke this command, you will be asked whether you wish to update
nodal, elemental, point, curve, or surface loads. After you select the type of load, you must choose the entities
where the loads will be updated. The standard entity selection dialog box is used. When you press OK, you will see
another dialog box that will let you specify the new load phase.
Only loads from the active load set will be updated by this command. If there are multiple loads at a single entity in
the same load set, they will all be updated.
4.7.3.25 Modify, Update Other, Scale Load...
... allows you to modify the values of existing loads. When you invoke this command, FEMAP will ask you to
identify the type of loads that you want to update. Then, depending on the load type, you will identify the entities
where the loads will be updated.
When you have identified the entities to update, FEMAP will ask for two factors. The current load values are mul-
tiplied by the first factor, then following the multiplication, the second factor is added. The default factors do not
change the load values.
If you use this command to update temperatures, some care must be taken. This command will just scale the tem-
perature value. Since structural loads are determined by the difference between the specified and reference temper-
ature, you will also have to adjust the reference temperature appropriately to get the desired loads. FEMAP does
not change the reference temperature when you use this command.
Only loads from the active load let will be updated by this command. If there are multiple loads on an entity in the
active load let, they will all be updated.
Note: If you use this command to update heat transfer loads with multiple inputs (i.e. radiation with absorptiv-
ity, emissivity, view factor, and temperature), FEMAP will ask whether you want to update each input.
Say Yes to those you want to update.
Modify, Update Other, Load Function ID... 4-127
4.7.3.26 Modify, Update Other, Load Function ID...
... allows you to update the function referenced by loads. This is very convenient when you need to change the
function reference for a load condition on a large number of entities.
This works very similar to Modify, Update Other, Scale Load. FEMAP will ask you to identify the type of loads
that you want to update. You will then be prompted by several questions to determine which function references on
the loads to update (for instance, a force can have both a function for the magnitude and phase). You simply need to
select the function for each update. If you select Yes to update, FEMAP will provide a list of functions from which
to pick. Answer No to those functions you do not wish to update.
4.8 Deleting FEA Entities
The commands on the Delete menu are all used to delete entities. All commands will delete entities from your
model. Since most of the commands on this menu work in a very similar fashion, the documentation for the entire
menu is given in this section.
Deleting From Your Model
If you want to delete any type of entity in your model, simply select the appropriate command (based on the entity
type) from this menu. The standard entity selection dialog box will then be displayed to let you select the entities
you wish to delete. When you complete your selection, and press OK, you will be asked to confirm that you really
want to delete the entities. This final question will also let you know how many entities have been selected.
Answering Yes will delete the entities. Choosing No will simply cancel the command.
Using Delete Mesh allows you to delete any finite element entity by simply selecting it. This command will delete
the selected entity and any other entities that are associated with it, such as loads that are defined on elements.
You may also use the Delete, All or Delete, Model All commands to remove the entire model or all FEA model enti-
ties and output. When you select either of these commands, you will be prompted to confirm your request. Answer-
ing Yes will delete all appropriate entities, while answering No will cancel the command. Neither of these
commands perform any checking to see if any of these entities are nondeletable. They are simply deleted.
NonDeletable Entities
Sometimes when you delete entities, you will receive a message that a number of nondeletable entities have been
skipped. These entities are skipped because FEMAP protects you from deleting entities which are needed by other
entities in your model. For example, a point is nondeletable if it is connected to one or more curves. Similarly, a
curve is nondeletable if it has a load attached to it. To delete these nondeletable entities, first delete all entities
which reference them. The following table lists entities that can cause an entity to be nondeletable.
Deleting From a Set
The Delete, Model, Load -Individual and Delete, Model, Constraint - Individual commands delete entities out of
the active load or constraint set. When deleting nodal or elemental loads, the normal confirmation Ok to Delete
When you are trying
to delete...
Could be referenced by...
Node Elements, loads, constraints
Element Loads
Property Elements
Material Properties
Coordinate System Points, nodes, coordinate systems, loads, constraints,
properties, materials
Function Loads, materials
Connection Property Connector
Connection Region Connector
Hint: You can use this feature to great advantage in cleaning up a model. For example, if you want to get rid
of all of the unused nodes, choose Delete, Node, and select all nodes. This may seem a little scary, but in
fact only those nodes which are not referenced by any elements, loads or constraints will be deleted.
Loads only applies to the temperature loads. You will then also be asked to confirm whether to delete the temper-
atures. If you have multiple temperature loads defined on the same node or element in the same load set, they will
all be deleted.
Deleting body loads also works with the active load set. In this case there is nothing to select; you are just asked to
confirm the deletion.
Deleting Finite Element Entity Icons
Delete, Model, Mesh...; Delete, Model, Coord Sys...; Delete, Model, Node...
Delete, Model, Element...; Delete, Model, Material...; Delete, Model, Property...
Delete, Model, Layup...; Delete, Model, Load - Set...; Delete, Model, Load - Definition...;
Delete, Model, Load - Individual...; Delete, Model, Constraint - Set...;
Delete, Model, Constraint - Definition...; Delete, Model, Constraint - Individual...
Delete, Model, Analysis Set...; Delete, Function...
Deleting Connection Entity Icons
Delete, Connection, Connection Property...; Delete, Connection, Connection Region...
Delete, Connection, Connector...
After You Delete
When entities are deleted from a FEMAP model, the space that they occupied is marked as empty and available for
reuse. The model file does not decrease in size. Normally, this is not a problem because new entities will reuse this
space. In some cases, however, when you delete a lot of data (output, for example), you may want to immediately
remove empty space from your model and reduce model file size. The File, Rebuild command does just that.
Choose the File, Rebuild command, and press Yes to perform a full rebuild and Yes again to allow FEMAP to com-
pact the model. Blocks of empty space are removed, and your model decreases in size. You should only use this
option after you delete large blocks of data. FEMAP cannot usually compact space if you have only deleted one or
two scattered entities, and the savings will not be worth the time it takes to try the command.
Another way to compact your model is to export a neutral file using the File, Export command. Start a new model
and then use File, Import, FEMAP Neutral to read that file. The new model will contain all of the old data, but no
unnecessary space.
Preparing for Analysis 4-129
4.9 Preparing for Analysis
The Analysis Set Manager dialog box lets you create analysis sets that define the analysis parameters, boundary
conditions, and output for an analysis. Once you have defined an analysis set, you can use it as input to an analysis
program such as NX Nastran or ABAQUS. Analysis sets are saved in the model file, unlike the parameters that you
define when you use the File, Export or File, Analyze commands. You can also save analysis sets in FEMAP anal-
ysis libraries.
For more information, see Section 4.9.1, "Defining a Analysis Set" and Section 4.9.2, "Running the Analysis with
an Analysis Set".
Supported Solvers
NX Nastran (See Section 8.7, "Nastran Interfaces"of FEMAP User Guide)
MSC/MD Nastran (See Section 8.7, "Nastran Interfaces" of FEMAP User Guide)
NEi Nastran (See Section 8.7, "Nastran Interfaces" of FEMAP User Guide)
ABAQUS (See Section 8.2, "ABAQUS Interfaces" of FEMAP User Guide)
ANSYS (See Section 8.3, "ANSYS Interfaces" of FEMAP User Guide)
LS-DYNA (See Section 8.5, "LS-DYNA Interfaces" of FEMAP User Guide)
MSC MARC (See Section 8.6, "Marc Interfaces" of FEMAP User Guide)
FEMAP Structural
The Analysis Set Manager dialog box has two areas: the analysis set list and buttons that enable you to control data
stored for an analysis set.
Analysis Set List
The Analysis Set Manager list area lets you easily view the parameters for your analysis set: solver name, type of
solve, options, master output requests and boundary conditions, and cases. To work with the list:
Use the plus and minus buttons to collapse and expand the analysis set hierarchy.
Double-click on an item to bring up a dialog box that lets you define or modify the item. For example, if you
double-click on Solver, the Analysis Set dialog box opens. You can then modify the analysis program or analy-
sis type.
You can use a combination of list items and buttons to perform actions. For example, to copy an analysis set,
pick the analysis set and the Copy button.
Analyze
The Analyze button begins the analysis using the active analysis set. Once you enter a file name, the analysis will
start. Before this option will work properly, you may need to setup VisQ or one or more environment variables that
let FEMAP know how to find your solver. Refer to the User Guide documentation for your solver for more infor-
mation on preparing to run an analysis.
Export
Export will write the analysis input file without trying to run the analysis.
Active
The active analysis set is the set that will be sent to the analysis program or saved in the analysis library. The Anal-
ysis Set Manager dialog box displays the active analysis set in the title bar. Use the Active button to make a differ-
ent analysis set active.
Preview Input
This command is only available for previewing input files for Nastran. FEMAP uses the settings of the active Anal-
ysis Set for Nastran to create a preview of the input file. If there is no active Analysis Set for the Nastran solver
then this option will not be available.
Edit Preview: By selecting this option you enable editing in the preview window and subsequently when the
Analyze or Export commands are selected, FEMAP will write the input exactly as it appears in the preview
window (including any editing that has been done).
Analyze: This button runs the analysis if FEMAP has been set up to run a analysis automatically.
Export: Exports the input file without running the analysis.
MultiSet
Use MultiSet to automatically create cases for every combination of load set and constraint set that you have
defined for your model. You can then review the list of cases and delete those that you dont want to include in the
analysis.
Note: If the Edit Preview option is unchecked then FEMAP will use the options in the active Analysis
Set when writing the input file and any changes made to the preview window will be discarded.
Defining a Analysis Set 4-131
Copy
Use Copy if you need to create an analysis set or case that it similar to one that already exists. From the analysis set
list, pick the set or case to use, then pick Copy. You can copy cases from one analysis set to another.
Delete
Use Delete to remove analysis sets or cases from the analysis set list. Pick the set or case, then pick Delete.
...you can also delete Analysis Sets using Delete, Model, Analysis Set
Load/Save
Use Load and Save to work with analysis libraries. An analysis library is an external file that lets you store analysis
sets. Analysis libraries let you create standard analysis sets that you can use in many different models.
Pick Load to use an analysis set from a library. Pick Save to save the active analysis set to the library file.
The default analysis library file name is analysis.esp. To change the name, use File, Preferences.
New
Use New to create a new analysis set or case. Pick an existing set or case, then pick New.
Edit
Use Edit to modify analysis sets. Pick an item from the analysis set list, then pick Edit.
Done
When you are finished creating analysis sets, pick Done. The analysis sets are stored in the model file.
4.9.1 Defining a Analysis Set
The general process for defining an analysis set is:
1. Pick the first item on the list, then pick New. (You can also double-click the item.)
2. On the Analysis Set dialog box, enter the Title.
3. Choose the Analysis Program and Analysis Type. This information determines the remaining options and
parameters that youll define.
4. The best way to define an analysis set is to pick Next to work through the dialog boxes in order. Alternatively,
you can pick OK to close the dialog box. From the analysis set list, you can then double-click on a parameter to
bring up the dialog box. (You can also click the item and press Edit.)
For details on the dialog boxes, see the following topics:
Section 4.9.1.1, "Analysis Set"
Section 4.9.1.2, "Options"
Section 4.9.1.3, "Master Requests and Conditions"
Section 4.9.1.4, "Boundary Conditions"
Section 4.9.1.5, "Output Requests"
Section 4.9.1.6, "Cases"
4.9.1.1 Analysis Set
The Analysis Set dialog box lets you define the Title, Analysis
Program, and Analysis Type. Pick Next to continue setting up
the analysis. The options on the remaining dialog boxes are
dependent on analysis program and type.
Run Analysis Using VisQ
If this option is set Femap will launch the analysis using VisQ
when the user selects Analyze from the Analysis Manager or
from the File menu. If this option in not selected, Femap will
launch the analysis using the local settings. Before this option
will work properly, you may need to setup VisQ or one or
more environment variables that let FEMAP know how to
find your solver.
For more information setting up Femap to launch the solver, see: Section 4.9.2, "Running the Analysis with an
Analysis Set" in the FEMAP Command Guide
For more information on analysis program interfaces, see:
Section 8, "Analysis Program Interfaces" in the FEMAP User Guide
4.9.1.2 Options
Use the Options dialog boxes to define specific information required by your solver.
For example, the NX Nastran options include solution parameters (specific to analysis type), solver parameters,
and files.
For more information, see:
Section 4.9, "Preparing for Analysis" in the FEMAP User Guide
4.9.1.3 Master Requests and Conditions
In an analysis, the master requests and conditions are the default output requests and boundary conditions (loads
and constraints). The analysis will generate one output set for the master requests and conditions, unless you define
a case. (For more information, see Section 4.9.1.6, "Cases".)
On the Master Requests and Conditions dialog box, you can enter a Title and Manual Control options. Once you
have entered this data, pick Next to set up the boundary conditions.
The Manual Control options include:
Skip Standard: If this switch is on, the interface does not write text to the input file. If Start and End Text have
been defined, they will still be written to the input file.
Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the the input file.
End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the input file.
Boundary Conditions 4-133
4.9.1.4 Boundary Conditions
The Boundary Conditions dialog box lets you select the
loads and constraints to apply to your analysis.You can
apply boundary conditions as both master boundary condi-
tions or in cases. Once you have entered this data, pick
Next to continue setting up the analysis.
Primary Sets
Depending on your analysis type, you can select constraints
and loads.
Constraints: pick a constraint set for your model.
Loads: pick a load set for your model.
Initial conditions: for some solvers, you can pick a load
set to use for initial conditions.
Constraint equations: pick a constraint set to define con-
straint equations.
Other DOF Sets
You can select constraint sets to use as various types of DOF sets.
The Master/ASET field lets you use a constraint set to define a FEMAP Structural master DOF set or a Nastran
ASET.
The Kinematic/SUPORT field lets you use a constraint set to define a FEMAP Structural kinematic DOF set or
a Nastran SUPORT set.
The remaining DOF set names let you define other Nastran DOF sets.
For heat transfer analyses, you will notice that constraint sets are not used. Rather, loads and constraints are both
selected from a load set. FEMAP translates nodal temperatures, in the same set as the other thermal loads, as ther-
mal constraints (boundary conditions).
Note: If your analysis requires multiple load or constraint sets, you must create cases.
4.9.1.5 Output Requests
Use the Output Requests dialog box to identify the types of output that you want from the analysis. The type of out-
put that you can request will depend on the analysis program and analysis type.
You can define output requests as both master output requests or as part of a case.
4.9.1.6 Cases
Cases let you perform multiple analyses with different load and/
or constraint sets.You can also specify output requests for each
case. The analysis program will generate one output set for each
case.
Use the Analysis Case dialog box to enter a Case ID and Title
for a case. For Linear Static Analysis in Nastran, you have the
choice of creating a Standard Case or a SUBCOM, which is
a combination of other Subcases defined in your model. For
more information on the SUBCOM, see Section 8.7.1.6, "Mas-
ter Requests and Conditions" of the FEMAP User Guide
For some analysis programs, you can also enter manual control
text. Once you have entered this data, pick Next to continue set-
ting up the analysis. (The master requests and conditions pro-
vide the defaults for the cases.)
The Manual Control options include:
Skip Standard: If this switch is on, the interface does not write text to the input file. If Start and End Text have
been defined, they will still be written to the input file.
Start Text: Pick this option to add text to the beginning of the the input file.
End Text: Pick this option to add text to the end of the input file.
Hint: One easy way to create cases is to use the MultiSet button on the Analysis Set Manager. Multi-Set cre-
ates one case for each combination of loads and constraints.
Running the Analysis with an Analysis Set 4-135
4.9.2 Running the Analysis with an Analysis Set
When you are ready to solve your model:
1. Check the title bar for the active set. If the correct set isnt active, pick Active, then the analysis set to analyze.
2. Pick Analyze.
3. Depending on the solver youre using, you may need to enter a name for the file that will be written to the
solver.
Once the analysis is complete, the output sets will be loaded into FEMAP. You can examine the results using
FEMAPs post-processing capabilities.
4.9.2.1 Run Analysis Using VisQ / Local Settings
Analyze Using VisQ:
If the Analysis Set option Run Analysis Using VisQ is selected then Femap will use the VisQ to launch the anal-
ysis. VisQ provides the user with a graphical interface to submit a file for analysis on a remote machine and then
monitor the job, and retrieve the results when complete.
VisQ consists of two components. The first is the VisQ Server that is installed on the PC that contains the analysis
solver. The second is the VisQ Client program that is installed on the local users PC.
The VisQ Client must be installed in the FEMAP directory in order for Femap to launch the VisQ program. The
VisQ Client must be configured with the location of where on the network the VisQ Server is located.
VisQ Server must be initially setup with the location of the analysis solver and the command line required to
run that specific solver.
For more information setting up the VisQ Client and VisQ Server, see: Section 4.9.2, "Running the Analysis with
an Analysis Set" in the FEMAP Command Guide
Analyze Using Local Settings:
If the option Run Analysis Using VisQ is not selected then Femap will try to Analyze the model using local set-
tings defined below.
Before the Analyze option will work properly, you may need to setup one or more environment variables that let
FEMAP know how to find your solver. Refer to the User Guide documentation for your solver for more informa-
tion on preparing to run an analysis. For example, the following variables need to be defined to launch these solv-
ers. Each variable must point to the executable of their respective solver before this method will work.
Solver Environment Variable
NX Nastran NXNAST_EXE
MSC/MD Nastran MSCNAST_EXE
NE/NASTRAN NENAST_EXE
ABAQUS ABAQUS_EXE
MSC.Marc MARC_EXE
ANSYS ANSYS_EXE
4.9.2.2 Analysis Monitor
The Analysis Monitor is used to monitor a
analysis that has been launched using the
environment variable method defined above.
Much like the Entity Editor, Model Info tree,
Data Table, and the enhanced Messages Win-
dow, when the Analysis Monitor is open it
appears in a Dockable Pane. This dock-
able pane can be un-docked and placed any-
where on top of the active FEMAP interface.
It can also be undocked and then re-docked
into another predetermined dock position by
dragging a dockable pane onto one of the
docking indicators (blue arrows which
appear when dragging a dockable pane
around the active FEMAP interface) and
releasing the left mouse button. (Picture of
Analysis Monitor shown undocked)
Status: The Status section is automatically
updated to reflect the current status of the
analysis. When analyzing with NX Nas-
tran or MSC/MD Nastran you have the
option to view the .log, .f04 or .f06 files
by choosing the appropriate radio button.
If analyzing with MSC.Marc Femap will
monitor the .log file.
Update Monitor: When this option is
selected the Monitor will be updated
every few seconds. Turning off this option
will stop updating the Monitor with the
data from the monitored file, when the
Update switch is turned back on the Mon-
itor will be updated to include the latest entries from the monitored file.
Automatically Load Results: When this option is selected Femap will automatically load the results from the
appropriate file when the analysis completes and then close the Analysis Monitor. If you wish to keep the mon-
itor open after a analysis then turn this option off.
Kill Job: Allows you to kill the job process that is running.
Load Results: This option allows you to manually load the results from a complete analysis into Femap. This is
typically done when you have turned off the option to automatically load the results.
Max Lines: Is the number of lines of text from the monitored file that you want to be displayed. This number
can be set as a Femap Interface Preference
Note: The Analysis Monitor is only available for analyses performed by NX Nastran, MSC/MD Nastran,
or MSC Marc
5. Meshing
This topic describes the many automatic meshing tools available in FEMAP. The Model, Element command can be
used to generate one element at a time, but most often, you will be using the commands under the Mesh menu to
automatically generate a finite element mesh.
The commands on the Mesh menu are partitioned into five categories based upon the type of meshing. They are:
Section 5.1, "Meshing on Geometry" - commonly used tools for surface/solid meshing
Section 5.2, "Non-Geometry Meshing" - specific tools
Section 5.3, "Modifying a Mesh" - allows you to copy, rotate, reflect, or scale a mesh
Section 5.4, "Copying a Mesh" - copy commands
Section 5.5, "Meshing by Extruding, Revolving, and Sweeping" - used to convert a 2-D mesh that has a con-
stant third dimension into a 3-D mesh
Each of these areas and their associated commands will be discussed below.
5.1 Meshing on Geometry
This portion of the Mesh menu contains two major submenus: Mesh Control and Geometry. The Mesh Control
menu allows you to specify mesh size, as well as customize the meshing procedure. The Geometry command is
used to produce the actual mesh on the selected geometry.
5.1.1 Mesh, Mesh Control
This menu contains the commands to control your meshing. This menu is separated into seven sections:
default size
size on geometric entities (points, curves, surfaces, solids)
interactive sizing
customization
attributes
approaches
feature suppression
Each of these areas and their associated commands are explained below.
5.1.1.1 Mesh, Mesh Control, Default Size...
... is used to define the default element size. The default size is used for all
geometry where you did not define a specific size or number of elements. It
is always important to set the default size to a value that matches your
model. If you only need a uniform mesh, this will be the only value that
you need.
Only two inputs are required for this command: Size and Min Elem. The
size is specified in model units. In addition to the size, you can also specify
Note: The first four categories above all pertain to setting the size of mesh that you will generate. In all of
these commands, there are three basic ways that mesh sizing is specified: along a curve, at a point or
globally. If you set the size along a curve, the other two methods are ignored, even if you specify them.
If you do not set sizes along a curve, then point mesh sizes are used wherever they are defined. Global
mesh sizes are only used when neither curve nor point mesh sizes apply.
5-2 Meshing
a minimum number of elements along a curve. This number is only used along curves where no other curve or
point sizes have been defined. FEMAP first calculates the number of elements along these curves using the default
size, then increases the number if it is below the minimum. Use this option if you have some small features (short
curves) in your model compared to the default mesh size that you are using. This will allow you to add refinement
(more elements) along those curves without impacting your overall mesh size.
5.1.1.2 Mesh, Mesh Control, Size At Point...
...specifies the element size at a point. This size is used to define the mesh size along any curve that references that
point as an end point, and does not have a specific mesh definition along the curve. After choosing the points where
you want to set a mesh size, define the size in model units.
To turn off or delete a point mesh size that you have already defined, simply choose the point again and specify a
mesh size equal to zero.
5.1.1.3 Mesh, Mesh Control, Size Along Curve...
...defines the number and spacing of elements along selected curves. When you set the mesh size using this method,
it overrides all point and default sizes. After you select the curves, you will see the Mesh Size Along Curve dialog
box. This dialog box includes the following:
Mesh Size
This section of the dialog box contains the options to determine the mesh size along the curve. If you choose a
Number of Elements, then every curve that you selected will be meshed with that number of elements. If you spec-
ify an Element Size, that size is used, along with the curve length, to determine the number of elements that will be
on each curve. Since fractional elements are not allowed, the nominal size that you specify is adjusted to the closest
size that will fit evenly into each curve length. If you are using this method, there are several additional options that
will allow you to further control the mesh sizing.
You can set the Min Elem on Lines to ensure that each straight line in your model will have at least a specified num-
ber of elements. Similarly, Min Elem on Closed Edges sets the minimum number of elements that will be placed
along any closed edge, like an arc or circle. Min Elem on Other Edges applies to curves that are neither straight
lines or closed edges, like splines. These options are not typically used if you are setting the mesh size on a single
curve. What they allow you to do, however, is use a single command to select many curves (possibly your entire
model), specify a fairly large mesh size, and still obtain some mesh refinement around desired curves.
Node Spacing
The Node Spacing section of the dialog box allows you to bias the mesh along a curve. You can chose no biasing
(Equal), linear biasing (Biased), or logarithmic biasing (Geometric Bias). If you select a bias, you must also specify
the Bias Factor and where the small elements will be located (i.e. which location to bias towards). The Bias Factor
controls the spacing of nodes. Setting it to a value of 2.0 with linear bias will make the last element twice as big as
Note: This command does nothing when surfaces are part of solids or already have a mesh size assigned to
curves that end at a point. You must remove mesh sizes by using the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size Along
Curve, click Reset, and then this command will function properly. It also does NOT work on solid
edges, only curves and surface edges and will only function when end points of curves are selected.
Shift+F10
Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On Surface... 5-3
the first if you select Small Elements at Start. The first element refers to the element at the first end point of the
curve. The diagram shows a sample surface mesh using different biases on the curves. By using biases appropri-
ately, you can create a fine mesh in the regions of most interest, as well as provide a smooth transition to regions of
less importance.
Parametric vs. Length Spacing
In addition to the biasing methods, you can also choose whether mesh locations will be located in parametric or
length coordinates along the curve. For lines, arcs and circles, these options make no difference since the paramet-
ric and length coordinates are equivalent. For spline curves however, the parametric coordinates are typically much
different.
In most cases, choosing parametric spacing is the preferred method. It results in a finer mesh in areas of high curva-
ture, which is often desirable. However, if you have two spline curves side by side, which happen to have different
parametric coordinates, Equal Length spacing will allow you to match the meshes on those two curves (this can
also be accomplished using a matched custom mesh size on one of the curves - see (Section 5.1.1.7, "Mesh, Mesh
Control, Custom Size Along Curve...").
5.1.1.4 Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On Surface...
...is another way to set the mesh size
along all curves that are used to
define selected surfaces. This com-
mand can be used to override mesh
sizing on curves associated to that
surface, or to define a mesh on all
curves that do not currently have a
mesh size. After you select the sur-
faces, the Automatic Mesh Sizing
dialog box will appear. Just as if you
were specifying the size along
curves, specify a nominal Element
Size, which is adjusted to fit evenly
into each curve. You also have the
opportunity to further control the
mesh sizing using the other options.
Replace Mesh Sizes on All Curves
If you choose this options, all curves on the surfaces will be sized. If you do not, only curves that do not currently
have mesh sizing will be updated. Normally, this option should be checked, since if you do not size all curves
simultaneously, other options like Mapped Meshing Refinement may be less effective.
Min Elements on Edge
This option specifies the minimum number of elements along any curve on the selected surfaces. Normally, 1 is the
correct setting, and the number of elements are just determined by the sizing. You can set higher numbers if you
want to force some degree of refinement.
Note: Equal Length based spacing is slower for display and meshing than parametric spacing. Parametric
spacing should therefore be used whenever possible.
Edge 1 - 5 elements, no bias
Edge 2 - 6 elements, bias=2.0
Edge 3 - 4 elements set,
5 elements created, bias=2.0
6 elements created, bias = 2.0
Small Elements at Start
Small Elements at End
5-4 Meshing
Max Angle Tolerance
This is one of the most important options for controlling
mesh sizes. It allows specification of a fairly large mesh size,
while still accurately represent geometry that has high curva-
ture. With this option enabled, the software determines a
nominal size based on the input nominal size. The curve tan-
gent vector is then compared to the vector that connects adja-
cent mesh locations. If the angle between those vectors is
larger than the angle that you specified, the elements are
added to the curve until it meets the requirement that you specified.
Small Feature Adjustments
Instead of increasing the number of elements, these options limit the number of elements placed around small
features to the Max Elem on Small Feature input. It prevents a large concentration of elements along small features
that may not be needed in your model. By default, the size for a Small feature matches the specified Element
Size, but when checked it can be changed to a size you specify.
This number is not a curve length. It is compared to the length of the perimeter around any closed loop of curves
divided by PI (the effective diameter of the loop). If the effective diameter of the loop of curves is less than the size
you specified, then the number of elements around that loop will be limited to the maximum number you choose.
Vertex Aspect Ratio
Turn this option on to optimize mesh spacing on geometry that has both short and long curves that join at common
vertices. This is especially useful if you are specifying a mesh size that is large compared to the length of your
shorter curves. In this case, without this option you may find that at points where long curves join short curves, the
long curves will have a fairly large mesh size right beside a short mesh size on the short curve. By turning on this
option, the longer mesh sizes will be biased and shortened at the ends where they join small mesh sizes. The aspect
ratio that you specify controls the maximum variation between adjacent mesh sizes.
Length Based Sizing
When this option is off, all sizing along curves is done in the parametric space of the curves. In many cases this is
desirable resulting in a finer mesh in areas of high curvature. In some cases however - with unstitched geometry, or
geometry that has curves with unusual parameterization - length based spacing along the curves will yield much
better results. Especially when dealing with unstitched geometry, length based spacing will produce meshes with
matching nodal locations far more reliably than parametric spacing.
Mapped Meshing Refinement
This option provides final adjustments to be made to the mesh sizes that favor mapped meshing. It only applies to
surfaces that are 3 or 4 sided (mapped-meshable). If curves on opposite sides of these surfaces have different
lengths, they will often get different numbers of elements, preventing them from being mapped meshed. If you use
this option, the sizes on opposite sides will be adjusted so that they match, if the adjustment will not change the
mesh size too much (factor of 2 from nominal, unless you defined a mapped meshing approach, in which case the
sizes will be matched regardless of size).
Surface Interior Mesh Growth
The Mesh Growth factor is simply a factor that is multi-
plied by the average size of the elements around the
perimeter of the surface. This value is used as the target
size of all the elements in the interior of the surface. If
you wish to decrease the size of the elements in the inte-
rior of the surface, use a number between 0 and 1 and a
value above 1 to increase the size of the elements formed
in the interior of the surface
Note: When using the Surface Interior Mesh Growth option, the surface MUST be free meshed. Free mesh-
ing will be the default on any non regular surface (more than 4 edges). If the surface is mapped or 4
sided then you must specify a Parametric Free mesh using the Mesh-Mesh Control-Approach on Sur-
face command.
Tangent
Vector to next mesh location
Angle
Factor = 0 Factor = 5 Factor = 0.2
Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On Solid... 5-5
Curvature-Based Mesh Refinement
Curvature Based Mesh Refinement will reduce the size of
elements in areas of a surface with a high amount of curva-
ture. When Curvature Based Mesh Refinement is selected,
FEMAP first meshes the surface at the initial element size. It
then calculates the ratio of Chord Height to Chord Length for
each element. If this ratio is larger than the value specified,
then FEMAP will automatically reduce the element size and
remesh the surface with the new sizing. This will continue
until all the elements on that surface do not exceed the ratio.
Quad Mesh Layer Options
This option specifies the number of layers of quadrilateral elements that FEMAP will attempt to place around every
boundary curve on a surface. You can choose to have either 1, 2, or 3 layers of quads around each boundary curve
of a surface, including internal curves. If there is not enough room for the requested number of layers based on the
mesh size, FEMAP will try to put as many layers of quads in as possible. The process goes one layer at a time,
meaning that one layer of quads will be placed around all boundary curves (external curves first, internal curves
second) before a second layer of quads will be attempted. In many cases, more layers will produce a higher quality
mesh, but on some pieces of geometry using 1 or 2 layers may produce better overall results than using 3 layers.
5.1.1.5 Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On Solid...
.... provides the same basic options as Mesh, Mesh Control. Size on Surface. It has additional options that pertain
primarily to multi-solid and hexahedral meshing.
Chord Length
Chord Height
Original mesh locations
2 Layers 1 Layers 0 Layers 3 Layers
5-6 Meshing
See Section 5.1.1.4, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On Surface..." for information about the controls that you can spec-
ify in the Basic Curve Sizing, Surface Interior Mesh Growth, and Curvature Based Mesh Refinement sections.
Suppress Short Edges
In addition to the other options in Basic Curve Sizing, you can also access the a feature normally found in Section
5.1.1.16, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Feature Suppression..." to automatically suppress short edges in your mesh. Turn-
ing on this option, and eliminating short edges can significantly improve the reliability of meshing by automatically
skipping over small features whether they were created intentionally or unintentionally by small mismatches in
adjacent geometry. The percentage value that you specify is a percent of the specified element size. Curves that are
shorter than this length will be automatically suppressed and ignored during meshing.
Auto Boundary Small Surf
This option automatically identifies surfaces whose areas are under a user-defined percentage multiplied by the
area of a one mesh size by one mesh size rectangular surface for a given mesh size. Once these small sur-
faces have been identified, they will be combined with neighboring surfaces to create a meshable boundary sur-
face. FEMAP uses an algorithm which attempts to combine the small surface with a neighboring planer face, and
if a planer face is not available, the small surface will be combined with any surface tangent or nearly tangent
with it to create a meshable boundary surface.
For instance:
Mesh size, M=2 units; Percentage, P=5%; Area of one mesh size by one mesh size surface, A=(M*M)=4 unit
2
.
In this case, surfaces with an area smaller than 0.2 units
2
(P*A = 0.05 x 4 = 0.2) will be identified as small sur-
faces. These small surfaces will then be combined with neighboring surfaces to create a meshable boundary sur-
face using an algorithm which attempts to combine the small surface with a neighboring face or faces. The same
concept is used by the Boundary Surface, From Surfaces on Solid...command, except this option automatically
chooses the surfaces to be combined.
See Section 3.3.2.2, Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Surfaces on Solid... for more details on composite sur-
face meshing.
Tet vs. Hex Meshing
Choose the option that is appropriate to the type of meshing that you want to do. Depending on your choice how-
ever, the mesh sizing that is generated can be significantly different.
If you choose Tet meshing, the resulting sizes are similar to those created if you had simply set mesh sizes on the
individual surfaces. Tet meshing does not require any additional adjustments to the mesh sizing. www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On Solid... 5-7
Preparing for hex meshing however, requires very specific mesh sizing. Many surfaces must be mapped meshed so
that the hex mesh can be generated. In addition, surfaces across multiple solids must be consistently sized and
meshed so that the resulting hex mesh will be compatible. Due to this extra checking that must be done, hex mesh
sizing takes much more time than tet mesh sizing. For more information about hex mesh sizing, see Section 5.1.2.4,
"Mesh, Geometry, HexMesh Solids...".
Assembly / Multi-Solid Sizing
These options are used to automatically specify mesh approaches
(which can be defined manually using the Mesh, Mesh Control,
Approach On Surface command).
Adjacent Surface Matching
If you are specifying sizes on multiple solids at the same time,
this option will set a slaved mesh approach on surfaces that are
adjacent to each other and which are the same size. For example,
in the figure, the cylinder is contained in a box with a cylindrical
hole. The outer surface of the cylinder is adjacent to the similar
surface of the hole through the box. To mesh these parts, you
must ensure that the meshes on these two surfaces are identical.
Setting one of the surfaces as a slave to the other insures a consis-
tent mesh. This option automatically finds surfaces which are adjacent between multiple solids and slaves them to
each other.
Remove Previous Slaving
This option removes all slaving from surfaces in the solids that you are sizing before proceeding with the new sizes.
You will always want to leave this option on unless you have manually defined some slaved surfaces that you want
to keep slaved. Turning this option off however can interfere with the proper operation of hex mesh sizing.
Adjust Colors
This option simply changes colors of surfaces during the mesh sizing process to give more information about how
they were processed. It is often difficult to see all of the surfaces in a solid assembly; however, this is particularly
important when you are slicing a solid in preparation for hex meshing. If you enable this option, surface colors will
be adjusted as follows:
You must be displaying your model in solid, shaded Render mode for the best effect of these colors. After sizing,
you can graphically see which surfaces were detected and slaved as adjacent, to make sure that all of the surfaces
that you expected were found. You can also easily see which solids need to be further simplified to allow hex mesh-
ing.
Skip Sizing on Slaved Surfaces
Turning on this option allows surfaces that have been slaved to other surfaces to be skipped during mesh sizing.
You will want to turn this on when you are incrementally updating the mesh sizes of one solid in a group of adja-
cent solids. In this case, you may have slaved surfaces between the solids, that must maintain the same mesh sizing.
If you are just updating one of the solids, the slaved surfaces must not be updated or the slaved meshing will fail.
Hint: If you are preparing for hex meshing, you MUST select all solids that you plan to mesh in a single com-
mand. If you try to select them one at a time, there is no way to guarantee that the meshes will be com-
patible across different solids.
Color Description
Dark, Transparent Blue Free surfaces that were successfully sized.
Light Solid Blue Surfaces that were successfully sized and which
are adjacent to another surface.
Red Surfaces of solids that can not be hex meshed
Adjacent
Surfaces
5-8 Meshing
5.1.1.6 Mesh, Mesh Control, Interactive
... allows you to interactively modify existing mesh sizes along one or more curves.
This command can be used in three different modes, as follows:
Always choose the mode and numbers before beginning. Then, simply click on the curve you want to change, and
the mesh size is adjusted. As you keep clicking on curves they are changed appropriately. Switch modes at any time
to make a different type of modification.
5.1.1.7 Mesh, Mesh Control, Custom Size Along Curve...
... allows you to set custom sizes along the curve. This is extremely useful when you require nodes at specific loca-
tions along curves due to either stress concentrations, or connections to other parts in an assembly. When you select
this command, you will be asked to select the curve and then the Custom Mesh Spacing Along Curves dialog box
will appear.
In this dialog box, the Mesh
Definition window shows
the locations of the mesh
points. The options under
this window serve to mod-
ify or fill the entire win-
dow. The options under
Mesh Point Data, as well as
the buttons on the side,
work on editing, adding, or
deleting one entry at a time.
Mesh Definition
The Mesh Definition area
shows the location of nodes
and the number of elements
and the bias on the mesh.
You can set the mesh between specific locations to guarantee that certain locations will be present in the mesh. In
the example above, nodes will be placed at locations 0, 0.333, 0.667 and 1.0 (Nodes are always placed at the begin-
ning and end of curves). A total of three elements will be created in a uniform fashion (Bias of 1).
The four buttons at the bottom of the Mesh Definition section provide capability to make changes to the Mesh Def-
inition window (as compared to the options on the right side of the dialog box which work on one location at a
time).
Equal
This option asks for the number of elements that you want along the curve, then computes the mesh locations so
that there will be that number of equal length segments along the curve. It does not matter whether you specify
parametric or length spacing for this approach, you always get equal length divisions. Each division is created with
1 element and no bias.
Fill
Fill is used to fill between mesh points. You would typically select this option after defining one or more mesh
points. When you select this option you will be prompted for the mesh size. This mesh size will be used to fill inter-
Mode Result
Add The current curve mesh size is increased by the number of elements specified
Subtract The current curve mesh size is decreased by the number of elements specified. It is not reduced below 1.
Set To The curve mesh size is set to the number of elements specified
Mesh, Mesh Control, Custom Size Along Curve... 5-9
mittent points between the current mesh points. This command does not change the number of points in the win-
dow. It simply updates the number of elements between each point to as closely as possible match the size you
specify.
Expand
This command simply takes all locations that have more than one element assigned, and expands it to each individ-
ual location. This is again a quick method to set an overall mesh size (using Fill and/or Equal), expand to each indi-
vidual location, and edit certain points if they are not at the exact location you require.
Match
This option simply allows you to match the mesh locations of one or more other curves. This command is very use-
ful when you have similar curves, such as a symmetric configuration. You can define the mesh size on one curve,
and then use Match on each additional curve to copy the mesh locations. The only input required for this option is
to select the curves you wish to match. Each of the mesh locations on the original curves is projected onto the target
curve.
Match Mesh
This option allows you to create matching node locations of a mesh that already exists. This command is useful for
connecting a mesh where the surrounding mesh has already been defined. Select the curve you want to have match
the existing mesh locations then press the Match Mesh button. Then select the nodes of the adjacent mesh and
FEMAP will project each node to the curve and create a matching location.
Mesh Point Data
This section of the dialog box contains the definition of the actual location, as well as any biasing. The Bias and
Spacing portions of the dialog box are identical to those found in the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Curve dialog box
(see Section 5.1.1.4, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On Surface..."). The bias itself cannot be used with the automatic
methods (Fill and Equal).
Location, Num Elements
This option allows you to input the location along the curve (1e-08 to 1.0) at which you want a mesh location
(node). You must also specify the number of elements required between this location and the previous location on
the curve (if no previous location is specified, it is the beginning of the curve). These options must be used when
you need to specify a biased mesh. The automatic methods (Fill and Equal) are not available.
Locate, Move, Add/Edit, and Delete Options
These options control the transfer of data from input to individual mesh locations. The results will appear in the
Mesh Definition window.
Locate
Often you will not know the percentage distance along a curve for a mesh point, but you will know the coordinate
location. In this case, simply use the Locate button. The standard coordinate definition dialog box will appear, and
you can input the coordinates with any of the standard methods. Be careful when inputting the location, however. It
must be along the curve, or at least be able to be projected onto the curve.
Once you select the location, it will automatically be converted to the location on the curve, and the value will be
added to the mesh points in the Mesh Definition window.
Move
The Move option is identical to the Locate option, except it replaces the highlighted entity in the Mesh Definition
window instead of creating a new entity.
Add/Edit
This button simply adds the location and number of elements contained in the Location and Num Elements boxes to
the list of mesh locations. If the value under Location is already contained in the list, FEMAP will edit the list, oth-
erwise it will simply add it to the list.
Delete
This option removes the highlighted entry in the Mesh Definition window from the list.
When you have finished defining the mesh points, simply press OK to set the mesh size, or press Cancel to abort
the mesh sizing.
5-10 Meshing
5.1.1.8 Mesh, Mesh Control, Mapped Divisions on Surface...
... allows you to specify divisions for a mesh on 3 and 4-sided sur-
faces. When you select this command, you will be prompted to
select the surfaces. After surface selection, you will see the Mesh
Size on Surface dialog box.
This dialog box allows you to define the number of elements, as
well as a bias, for the s and t directions. The s direction is denoted
by an arrow that is drawn at one of the corners of the surface. This
command will allow you to define a mapped mesh grid for rectan-
gular and triangular surfaces.
5.1.1.9 Mesh, Mesh Control, Mesh Points on Surface...
... defines specific locations on a surface where nodes will be created when the surface is meshed. To begin, you
simply select the surface where you want to define mesh locations. You will then see the Custom Mesh dialog box.
Here you have several options. If you have already created points on the surface at
the locations that you want, choose Use Existing Points. When you press OK, you
will be asked to select the points that you want to use.
If there are already nodes on the surface at the desired locations, choose Use Exist-
ing Nodes and select the ones you want. This method is useful when you have an
existing mesh that intersects the middle of a surface and you want to match that
mesh. Note that even if you choose these nodes, it is not actually the nodes that are
attached to the surface. Instead, FEMAP automatically creates points at those
node locations and uses the points as mesh locations.
If you have neither points nor nodes, choose Create Points. You will be prompted to
specify the mesh locations and points will be automatically created and attached as mesh locations.
If you have already defined mesh locations on a surface, you use this same command to remove them. Simply
choose Remove All Points to delete all of the mesh locations for this surface. If you want to selectively remove one
or more points, choose Use Existing Points instead. You will see the standard selection dialog, but it will be filled
with the list of points that you already selected. To remove the points that you no longer need, you can use the
Delete button or the Remove/Exclude picking in the selection dialog box.
This command is used for placing mesh locations in the interior of a surface. It does not place locations along or
very near the bounding curves. To do that, use the Mesh, Mesh Control, Custom Size Along Curve command.
5.1.1.10 Mesh, Mesh Control, Attributes At Point
... is used to assign meshing attributes (properties) to one or more points. Before you begin this command, you must
have one or more properties defined that correspond to mass, or other point element types. You will be asked for
the points where you want to assign attributes, and the property to assign.
Once attributes have been defined, these points can be meshed with elements which will automatically use the
assigned properties.
Note: For most surface types, the points that you specify do not really need to be on the surface. FEMAP will
project the points onto the surface and use the projected location. For multi-surface boundaries, how-
ever, you must locate the points on the surface. They will not be projected.
Hint: When FEMAP meshes a surface, it creates the original mesh without the hard mesh points. It then
moves the node closest to each hard point to the hard point location. FEMAP then resmooths the mesh.
This technique works very well when there are a significant number of nodes in the mesh (and a reason-
ably fine mesh) in comparison to the number of hard points. If there are not many more nodes than hard
points, this technique will not produce good meshes. For this type of mesh, it is best to imprint a curve
or surface on the surface (see Section 3.2.5, "Curves from Surfaces"), and then define the mesh size on
it. This will use a different technique in the FEMAP surface mesher, and a better mesh will result.
Mesh, Mesh Control, Attributes Along Curve 5-11
5.1.1.11 Mesh, Mesh Control, Attributes Along Curve
... is used to assign meshing attributes along
one or more curves. Unlike Point Mesh
Attributes, Curve Mesh Attributes contains
more information than just a property. They
also specify the element orientation, releases
and offsets that will be used when the curve is
meshed.
Once attributes have been defined, curves are
easily meshed with elements, properties, off-
sets, orientations and releases all automati-
cally assigned. You can create, orient and
position all cross sections on the geometry
and then mesh all curves in one easy operation. If the resulting mesh needs to be changed, simply delete the mesh,
adjust the mesh sizes and remesh all of the attribute information is still retained. The Reverse Element Direction
option even allows you to flip the section if the curve is pointed in the opposite direction.
Property
You must select a property that corresponds to a line element such as a bar or beam. If you do not have the property
that you need, you can press New Prop to create a new property.
Orientation and Releases
These options are similar to the options in the Model, Element command. You simply define the orientation and
releases that you want applied. When you press OK in this dialog box, you will either be asked for a vector, or a
location (not a node) to define the orientation. This orientation will be used for all elements along the curve.
Releases are specified immediately, when you press the Releases button. Releases specified on attributes apply to
connections at the first end of the curve (End A Releases) and the last (End B Releases). Element connections to
internal nodes along the curve are not released.
Offsets
Like orientations and releases, offsets closely follow the Model, Element counterparts. The main differences here
are in the three methods used to define the offset.
The Vector method is identical to the Model, Element method. You define a vector at each end, and the offsets cor-
respond to those vectors. Just like releases, the ends here refer to the start and end of the curve (not the start and end
of each element). Using the vector method, offsets vary linearly along the curve from the End A vector to the End
B vector.
The Location method uses the Reference Point that you can choose when creating a property from a standard or
general shape. If you choose this method, offsets are defined in the YZ plane of the cross section, not in global
coordinates. In this case a zero offset locates the shape so that the reference point lies on the curve at every location.
Even if you want to specify a zero offset, you must still specify the End A and End B offsets or the reference point
will not be used.
The Radial method allows you to choose a center location and offset distance. All of the offsets will be created as
radial vectors pointing away from the center (assuming a positive offset distance) along the line connecting the cen-
ter to the nodal location.
If you are editing the attributes on a curve that already has offsets defined, you will not be able to change the defi-
nition method. You must first press No Offsets to delete the existing offsets, then redefine them using the new
method.
Note: To use any of these options, first choose the method, then you MUST press End A Offset (or one or
more of the other offset buttons) to define actual offsets. Simply choosing the method does not define
an offset. Similarly, if you define the End A Offset, but do not choose either End B Offset, or End B =
End A, then the End B offset is zero.
5-12 Meshing
5.1.1.12 Mesh, Mesh Control, Attributes On Surface
... is used to assign meshing attributes to one or more surfaces. In most
cases you will simply choose a surface element property to be assigned
to the surfaces. Press New Prop if you have not already created the prop-
erty that you need.
If you also want to assign offsets to the planar elements (typically plates
only), check the Offset box, and specify the value of the offset before
pressing OK.
Once attributes have been defined, surfaces can be easily meshed with
elements, properties (thicknesses, materials...) will be automatically assigned.
5.1.1.13 Mesh, Mesh Control, Attributes On Volume
... is used to assign meshing attributes to one or more volumes. In this case, you simply select the volumes where
you want to assign attributes, then select the property that you want. You must create the property before using this
command.
Once attributes have been defined, volumes can be meshed and properties (primarily material information) will be
automatically assigned.
5.1.1.14 Mesh, Mesh Control, Attributes On Solid
... is used to assign meshing attributes to one or more solids. This command is identical to Mesh, Mesh Control,
Attributes On Volume, described above, except that it applies to solids.
5.1.1.15 Mesh, Mesh Control, Approach On Surface
... is used to specify the type of mesh to be created on a surface. Normally, without specifying an approach,
FEMAP will decide whether to create a free/boundary mesh or a mapped mesh on each surface. This command
gives you control over that selection, and allows you to define additional information so that mapped meshes can
be created on surfaces that could otherwise not be mapped meshed.
After selecting surfaces where you want to specify
the approach, you will see the Surface Mesh
Approach dialog box. There are many different
approaches to choose from, in addition to Not
Specified. If you choose Not Specified, FEMAP
will decide which mesh is appropriate based on
geometry, mesh sizing and resulting mesh quality.
Free - Parametric
This approach tells FEMAP to always try a free
mesh on the surfaces. Even if mesh spacings allow
a mapped mesh, a free mesh is always created. In
some cases, the free mesh may look like a mapped
mesh, but it is created using the free meshing tech-
nique. Specifying this approach usually has little
effect since it uses the same approach that is most
commonly taken by FEMAP anyway. This is
called Free-Parametric because surfaces are meshed in their parametric coordinates.
Free - Planar Projection
This approach is similar to Free-Parametric, except the mesh is created on a plane and is projected onto the sur-
face. This approach is never used automatically, but can help to overcome problems with meshing surfaces that
have problems in their parametric representation. Most notably these would be cones or caps of spheres, where sur-
faces normally have an undefined pole in the parametric coordinates. This technique can only be used for sur-
faces that do not have too much curvature. If your surface is too curved, split it into several pieces and mesh them
using this approach.
Mesh, Mesh Control, Approach On Surface 5-13
Fast Tri - Parametric
This approach applies a free mesh to the surfaces using the FEMAP Fast Triangle mesher. The Fast Triangle
mesher uses a different method when creating surface triangles that is faster and produces triangles with better
aspect ratios. This is called Fast Tri-Parametric because surfaces are meshed in their parametric coordinates.
Fast Tri - Planar Projection
This approach is similar to Fast Tri-Parametric, except the mesh is created on a plane and is projected onto the sur-
face. This approach is never used automatically, but can help to overcome problems with meshing surfaces that
have problems in their parametric representation. Most notably these would be cones or caps of spheres, where sur-
faces normally have an undefined pole in the parametric coordinates. This technique can only be used for sur-
faces that do not have too much curvature. If your surface is too curved, split it into several pieces and mesh them
using this approach.
Mapped - Four Corner
This approach creates a mapped mesh on the surface, between four corners that you select. When you select this
approach, the right hand side of the dialog box allows you to select four points for the corners of the mesh. These
points can be specified in any arbitrary order, but you must choose four different points. The edges of the mesh
are all of the curves that lie between the points that you choose.
In this example, the corner points have been defined at the locations of the dots. In addition, the total number of ele-
ments specified on the three outside curves equals the number of elements on the arc. This is a requirement.
If you do not specify mesh sizes that are compati-
ble with the mapped meshing approach, you will
still get a free mesh, even if you specified Four
Corner.
When specifying the mesh corners, you do not
have to specify points on the surface where you
are setting the approach. FEMAP will automati-
cally find the closest points on the surface to the
ones you selected, and use those. This eliminates
problems in knowing which points to pick when
surfaces are adjacent (coincident) with each other.
It can also be used to your advantage if you need
to set approaches on a series of parallel or similar
surfaces. You may be able to define them at once
by picking the points on one surface and letting
FEMAP automatically select the others.
Mapped - Three Corner
This approach is similar to the Four Corner approach; it
simply defines three corner locations. The resulting mesh
can be an all quadrilateral mesh on the three cornered
surface. Depending on the geometry however, the result-
ing mesh can be severely warped.
Mapped - Three Corner Fan
This method is similar to Three Corner, but the resulting
mesh has triangles at the first corner location. This is the
only point that must be specified in a particular order.
Just as in the four corner methods, the points in these three corner methods do not need to lie on the selected sur-
faces.
Matched - Linked to Surface
This final approach does not directly define a new type of mesh. Rather, it simply instructs FEMAP to make the
mesh on the selected surface match the one on the surface that you link it to. This approach is primarily used to
insure compatible meshing in a single solid for hex meshing, and to insure compatible meshes between adjacent
surfaces of multiple solids. You can use it for certain other situations, but care must be taken:
1. Surfaces to be linked must either be on the same solid, or must be adjacent/coincident in space, or must at least
Free
Four Corner
Three Corner Three Corner Fan
5-14 Meshing
be closely aligned.
If surfaces are on the same solid, they can be anywhere in space. They do not have to be parallel or aligned in
any particular fashion, but they can only be linked if the other curves on the solid directly connect the two sur-
faces. In this mode, linking surfaces is intended to be used with hex-meshable solids only. That is, solids that are
essentially extrudable. If you have more complicated geometry, you will still be able to link the surfaces, but
meshing the linked surface will fail.
If surfaces are not on solids, or are on different solids, then they are meshed by matching the closest points on the
surfaces. For this reason, to mesh properly, the surfaces must be positioned and aligned so that the points on the
curves that are closest to each other result in the proper mapping between the surfaces. Surfaces that are rotated
arbitrarily in space relative to each other will usually not meet this criteria. Again, this mode is primarily
intended for matching adjacent surfaces between multiple solids.
2. Surfaces to linked must also have the same mesh sizing, or they will not mesh properly. In order for a linked sur-
face to be meshed, it must have the same mesh sizing as the master surface.
3. You cannot to define circular references. You can only slave surfaces in one direction, that is if A is linked to B,
then B must be independently meshable, it can not be linked to A.
5.1.1.16 Mesh, Mesh Control, Feature Suppression...
... enables you to remove features from the model when meshing. When a CAD part is imported into FEMAP, it
may contain many small features that are unimportant to the finite element model. With this tool you can suppress
these features so that FEMAP will mesh the part as if they did not exist. In many circumstances, the resulting mesh
will be much smoother.
When small single or connected edges are sup-
pressed, FEMAP will treat them as a single node
during meshing. One node is used for all vertices
attached to the suppressed edge. The end result
will be an excellent surface and subsequent solid
mesh.
The figure shows the geometry and the resulting
mesh when several of the short edges are sup-
pressed. Without suppressing the edges, the
mesher would have generated sharp sliver ele-
ments on those edges.
The Feature Suppression dialog box offers two
methods of feature suppression: Automatic and
Manual.
Automatic
The Automatic feature is a good
method for cleansing a part with a sig-
nificant number of small features.
Select the feature criteria and enter
their values. Features in your model
that are under this size will be
removed. The three options under
Automatic are explained below.
Smaller Than
This option removes loops from the
model that are smaller than the speci-
fied size. This command walks
along the entire loop. If the loop length
is smaller than the value entered, the entire loop will be removed from the part. In some cases, such as a very long
but small-radius cylinder, the total length of the feature may be longer than the specified value. Because the end
portion of this feature is smaller than the tolerance, FEMAP will remove the entire loop.
Mesh, Mesh Control, Feature Suppression... 5-15
Face Area Less Than
This option removes any faces in the model that have an area less than the tolerance value you specify. This option
is useful for removing small sliver faces, but you must be careful that the area you specify is not so large that signif-
icant faces are removed from your model, which can harm the integrity of the solid model. This option does not
check for any loops in the model.
Edges Shorter Than
This option removes any edges in the model that are shorter than the tolerance value that you specify. Be careful
that the length you specify does not cause removal of important edges, which can harm the integrity of your model.
This command does not check for any loops in the model.
Manual
By switching to Manual operation, you can specify individual features in your model to remove. This command
has both Remove and Restore options. You can remove/restore edges, loops, and faces. Removal of key areas may
result in loss of integrity of the solid.
Edges
Edges lets you remove specific edges from the model. This option is most useful when you have many small edges,
but only want to remove a few of them.
Loops
Loops lets you remove features from your model. Select a curve on the loop, and the entire loop will be removed.
This can be very useful for removing small holes that run through the model.
Examples
Faces
Faces lets you to remove specific faces from the model. This option is most useful when you have many small
faces, but only want to remove a few of them.
Surface with several interior holes
Choose one curve on each
interior hole and all of the
curves making up the loop
will be found and Suppressed
from the surface for meshing
All internal holes have been
suppressed from the surface
for meshing purposes only
Original Solid Part with stepped hole
Curve chosen for loop to Suppress
Resulting Solid Mesh
5-16 Meshing
Set Color To
This section of the dialog box lets you define colors for your suppressed and restored curves and surfaces. The
default colors to restore will be the current colors of curves and surfaces. The default for removal is typically a dark
color, which makes it easy to distinguish these curves and surfaces from the rest of the model. You should always
use a distinguishing color to remind yourself which features have been suppressed.
Restore All Features...
This button provides an easy method to restore all features in the model.
5.1.2 Mesh, Geometry
The Geometry menu provides the tools for automatically meshing geometry. The menu is partitioned into five sec-
tions based upon the type of entities to mesh. You can create meshes on points, curves, and surfaces. The last two
sections deal with solids and volumes. The first allows you to hex mesh solids and the last performs tet meshing in
volumes and solids. Each of the commands are described below.
Before using these commands, you will often want to use the Mesh, Mesh Control commands to define the mesh
sizes for the geometry you wish to mesh. If you are meshing a solid model, FEMAP will give you an additional
opportunity to define the mesh size before proceeding. Most other commands will simply use the mesh size which
you have already defined (or the default mesh size if you have not defined a mesh size).
5.1.2.1 Mesh, Geometry, Point...
... is the most basic of automatic meshing commands. It will simply generate nodes (or elements and nodes) at the
selected points. When you choose this command, you must select the points through the standard Entity Selection
dialog box. You will then see the Geometry Mesh Options dialog box, where you choose to generate either just
nodes or nodes and elements. One of the point element types (mass) must be selected if you are going to generate
elements.
5.1.2.2 Mesh, Geometry, Curve...
.... creates a mesh of
nodes and 1-D elements
along a curve. When you
select this option, you
will be asked to select the
curves through the stan-
dard entity selection dia-
log box. Once you select
the curves, you will see
the Geometry Mesh
Options dialog box. It
includes the following:
Node and Element Options
These options allow you to specify the beginning node and element IDs, the coordinate system (to set the definition
coordinate system of the nodes, and the property. You must choose a line element property for this command. You
may also use the New Prop button to define a new line element property if you have not already defined one, as
well as change the node and element parameters.
Using Meshing Attributes
If the curves that you are meshing have mesh attributes defined, you will see an additional property (0..Use Mesh-
ing Attributes) in the list. If you choose that property, FEMAP will use the attributes to define the property, orienta-
tion, offsets and releases for the elements that will be created. To ignore the attributes, simply pick or create a
different property.
Generate
This option controls whether you generate nodes or nodes and elements.
Mesh, Geometry, Surface... 5-17
Element Shape
This section of the dialog box will be grayed, since lines elements do not have a shape. This section is available
for some of the non-geometry-based meshing commands (for example, Mesh Between).
If you are meshing with elements that require an orien-
tation (bars, beams, etc.), the standard vector definition
dialog box will be used to define an orientation vector.
You cannot orient using a third node, but you can mod-
ify the orientation later. The single vector that you
define is used for all elements that are generated, so it
must be specified carefully.
5.1.2.3 Mesh, Geometry, Surface...
... creates nodes and planar elements on a selected set of surfaces. Before choosing this command, you must define
the mesh sizes using the various Mesh, Mesh Control commands.
Controlling the Mesh
If you simply specify sizes and then mesh surfaces, FEMAP will decide which type of mesh to create based upon
what it can do automatically. Normally this will result in a free/boundary mesh; however, mapped meshes will be
created whenever possible. If you want to control this process, for example to force a mapped mesh onto surfaces
with more than four boundary curves, use the Mesh, Mesh Control, Approach on Surface command to define the
meshing approach for your surfaces.
When you select the Mesh,
Geometry, Surface com-
mand, you must select the
surfaces to mesh. After
they are selected, the
Automesh Surfaces dialog
box appears.
After choosing the appro-
priate property, you can
usually press OK to accept
all default options. The
Mesh Control and Mesh
Smoothing areas do, how-
ever, give you significant
control over the resulting
mesh.
Note: In many cases, you will only want to mesh a geometric surface one time with 2-D elements. Suppose
you have already meshed a few surfaces in a model and now want to mesh the rest of the surfaces.
Instead of having to choose all the non-meshed surfaces individually to avoid creating overlapping ele-
ments, FEMAP allows you to select all the surfaces in the model, then choose whether you would like
to create overlapping elements on the already meshed surfaces or skip over these surfaces during the
meshing process.
FEMAP will bring up a dialog box asking OK to Mesh Already Meshed Surfaces? Meshing these sur-
faces again will result in coincident meshes. Pressing Yes will create an overlapping mesh on the
already meshed surfaces. Pressing No will mesh only the surfaces which are not currently meshed, skip-
ping all of the previously meshed surfaces. Pressing Cancel ends the command entirely.
Curves
Beam Elements generated
along curves with cross section
shown.
Shift+F11
5-18 Meshing
These options control parameters that are assigned to the nodes and elements that you will create. The CSys option
does not control the mesh in any way. It is just assigned as the definition coordinate system of each node. The prop-
erty is most important. You must choose a property which corresponds to a planar element.
Using Meshing Attributes
If the surfaces that you are meshing have mesh attributes defined, you will see an additional property (0..Use Mesh-
ing Attributes) in the list. If you choose that property, FEMAP will use the attributes to define the property and type
of the elements that will be created. If you wish to ignore the attributes, simply pick or create a different property.
Mesh Control
These options control the size and shape of the mesh inside the boundary. The elements along the boundary edges
are defined by the mesh sizes that you choose and are unaffected by these settings. Those mesh sizes also have sub-
stantial impact on the interior of the mesh, but these options give you additional control.
Min Elements Between Boundaries
As a boundary is being meshed, groups of elements are often generated between two opposite edges of a boundary.
Sometimes, the mesh sizes that you have defined are large enough that a single element will span the distance
between surfaces. Since this may not be enough refinement for the model that you are creating, you can control this
behavior by setting a minimum number of elements that must be created between any boundary edges.
Setting this parameter does not guarantee that you will get that number of elements between every edge. But wher-
ever possible (based on compatibility with your surface mesh sizes) that number of elements or greater will be cre-
ated.
It is usually best to leave this parameter set to 1 initially, then if the results are undesirable, undo the mesh and try it
again with the number increased. Setting this number greater than 1 can greatly increase the number of elements
that are generated.
You will usually only have to set this option if you are meshing a
surface that is long and thin relative to the mesh size, or one that has
long, thin appendages, as this example demonstrates.
Max Element Aspect Ratio
Like the Min Elements setting described above, this option controls
the elements inside the mesh. In this case however, control over the
number of elements is only a secondary effect of this option. Prima-
rily, this number is used as a guideline for how long elements can
be relative to their width. You must always specify a value that is greater than or equal to 1.0. Smaller numbers
usually create slightly more uniform meshes with elements that are better shaped. Large numbers can lead to
severely distorted elements. If you make a mesh that contains long, thin or distorted elements, try again with a
smaller aspect ratio.
Quick-Cut
Meshing large non-uniform surfaces can often take some time. Turning this option on shortens the time required
while usually having minimal impact on the overall mesh quality. If you want the best possible mesh, and are will-
ing to wait, turn this option off. You can also control the threshold by setting the number of nodes to a smaller or
larger number. Do not reduce the number of nodes too much, or mesh quality will substantially decrease.
Element Shape
These options control the creation of triangular elements in your mesh.
If you want to create all triangles, you have the choice of All Triangles with or without the Fast Tri Mesh
option. The Fast Tri Mesh option uses a different method to create triangles that generally produces fewer trian-
gles with better aspect ratios. This technique works particularly well if you have a long thin surface with holes.
There is no all quads setting, but the Quads option will generate quadrilateral elements whenever possible.
(Note: You must always get at least one triangle if you specify an odd number of nodes on the surface.) Trian-
gles are created wherever quadrilaterals cannot meet the specified boundary mesh sizes, and wherever a quadri-
lateral would be severely distorted. You can override the default 60 degree allowable distortion with any value
that you want. Lower distortion values will result in more triangles.
Min Elements = 3 (or 2)
Min Elements = 1
Mesh Smoothing
These options are the same as those described in the Mesh, Smooth command. After an initial mesh is generated, it
is automatically smoothed to reduce element distortions. You will usually just want to accept the default values for
these options. For more information, see Section 5.3.4, "Mesh, Smooth...".
Examples
The following pictures show sample boundary meshes created using this command.
These suggestions can help you use the free meshing commands more effectively:
Specify mesh sizes that transition gradually along the edges. Do not have large changes in size from one curve
to the next.
Use default generation settings first, then undo and try again with modified settings if you do not like the
results. If that does not work, consider changing some mesh sizes.
Map a boundary to a surface (Modify, Update Other, Boundary on Surface) whenever it is nonplanar.
If most of a mesh looks good, but there are a few distorted areas, use the remesh option in the Mesh, Refine
command to clean-up the distorted elements.
The nodal locations along all edges can vary due to the shape of the surface and biasing. Biasing along edges can be
varied independently. It will not be ignored along the third and fourth edges, even in the mapped meshing case.
This command can generate either a mapped or a free/boundary mesh. If you have the same number of divisions
along opposite edges of the surfaces, a mapped mesh can be automatically generated. If not, FEMAP will create a
You could use the Min Elements option
to increase the number of elements in this area
Simultaneous generation in two boundaries
Outer boundary
with circular hole
Inner, circular
boundary
Boundary mapped to cylindrical surface
Boundary curves
are not on the
Surface and
shrunken elements
surface
Edge 1 - 5 elements, no bias
Edge 2 - 6 elements,
5 elements created, bias=2.0
bias=2.0
Edge 4-
3 elements set,
6 elements created
bias=0.5
5-20 Meshing
boundary mesh. You can further control this process by specifying a mesh approach using the Mesh, Mesh Control,
Approach on Surface command. (See Section 5.1.1.15, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Approach On Surface"
Boundary Mesh Mapped Mesh
Surface
Surface
Elements
Requires 4-corner mapped approach on surface
Surface Elements
Controlling the Interior of a Mesh
In many cases, the surface boundaries alone are not sufficient to generate the precise mesh that you may need to
properly locate connection points in your mesh. For this, you need to control key features inside the surfaces.
FEMAP provides two approaches to this problem.
Specifying Precise Mesh Locations
There are some cases where you need to have a node located at some precise location. For example, you may need
nodes at bolt locations where some other component attaches to your model. These cases can be handled using
mesh points, as described in Section 5.1.1.9, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Mesh Points on Surface...". You simply create
points or nodes at the locations you need, select them as mesh points, and they will be incorporated into the mesh.
Matching Interior Curves
Sometimes just matching individual locations is still not sufficient and you need to make sure that an entire curve is
reproduced in the mesh. This is often a case where you need to match edges of other surfaces that happen to inter-
sect the interior of a surface. To handle these situations, you need to imprint the curves that you need into the sur-
face. You can do this using the commands on the Geometry, Curve-From Surface menu. Make sure you turn on
Update Surfaces, and then use one or more of the other commands to imprint the curves you need onto the sur-
faces. Once the curves have been imprinted, they are part of the surface - you do not need to do any further associ-
ation using the Mesh Control commands - they will be automatically considered when the mesh sizing is defined.
When the mesh is created, elements will not cross these imprinted curves, therefore the mesh will properly repre-
sent the curves along element edges. FEMAP supports many different configurations of imprinted curves. You can
have individual curves floating in the interior of the surface, curves connected to the outer boundary or curves con-
nected to or joining interior holes. In addition floating curves can intersect each other, however in this case you
must break the curves at their intersection location(s).
Multi-Surface Meshing
When you mesh surfaces, the shape of the mesh is strongly controlled by the shape of the underlying surfaces. All
of the surface boundaries become boundaries in the mesh. In many cases however, surfaces may be split at places
5-22 Meshing
that you really do not need, or even want, to split the mesh. Multi-surface boundaries address this problem. You can
use the Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Surfaces on Solid command to create boundary surfaces that span mul-
tiple underlying surfaces. In this case, the mesh will only conform to the outer boundary of the surfaces that you
combine, inner surface boundaries and features will be lost. For more information on creating multi-surface bound-
aries, see Section 3.3.2.2, "Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Surfaces on Solid...".
If you create a multi-surface boundary, you can still use the other features, such as mesh approaches, and mesh
points on surface to customize the mesh on the boundary. If you want to create mesh points on a multi-surface
boundary, they must be on the surface. Other surfaces will work with the projected mesh location, however for
multi-surface boundaries, the mesh locations must be on the surface.
5.1.2.4 Mesh, Geometry, HexMesh Solids...
... creates a hexahedral mesh in a selected set of solids. Before choosing this command, you must define the mesh
sizes using the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Solid command and choose the Hex Meshing option.
To create a hex mesh in solids, you must follow a fairly strict procedure.
1. Subdivide your model into hex meshable solids.
2. Set the mesh sizes using Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Solid, with the hex meshing option.
3. Verify that all solids are hex meshable, and are properly linked to adjacent solids. If not, return to step 1, and
continue dividing your solids.
4. Hex mesh using the Mesh, Geometry, Hex Mesh Solids command.
Each of these steps is extremely important if you are going to succeed in creating a complete, correct hex mesh.
Multi-Surface Boundary with
mapped mesh. Note how
boundaries of interior
surfaces are ignored
Individually Meshed Surfaces
Geometry
Geometry (dark outlines show edges of multi-surface boundaries
interior hatching shows boundaries of individual surfaces)
Mesh - follows boundary outlines, but not surfaces
Mesh, Geometry, HexMesh Solids... 5-23
Hex Meshable Solids
The first, most important, and often most difficult step in the hex meshing process involves dividing your part
(which we assume is one arbitrarily shaped solid) into simpler hex meshable solids. FEMAP can only hex mesh
extrudable solids, therefore if you have a part that is more complex, you must break/slice it into multiple, simpler
solids that can be meshed. While we use the word extrudable here, the actual solids that FEMAP can mesh are
much more complex than simple, straight extrusions. To give you some ideas of the types of solids that FEMAP
can and can not mesh, look at the following pictures:
The pictures represent some general solids that can be meshed. FEMAP can mesh solids where it can identify a
base and top surface that are connected by all four-sided, mapped meshable surfaces. The base and top surface
can be any shape, including surfaces with holes, and do not even have to be geometrically similar (although the
mesh quality may suffer depending upon how different they are). The base and top surfaces do have to have similar
connectivity, that is, the same number of edges.
During the process of hex meshing sizing, FEMAP identifies the base and top surfaces and automatically matches
(slaves) the mesh on the two surfaces. This is required for successful hex meshing. The base and top surfaces must
produce the same surface mesh, not necessarily the same shape, but the same number of nodes and elements with
the same connectivity.
The lateral or side surfaces (everything but base and top) control the mesh along the length of the extrusion. In
the simplest case, all are four sided surfaces with one edge on the base and the opposite edge on the top surface.
Often more complicated connections exist but many can still be meshed. In general, the requirement is that all lat-
eral surfaces must be four-sided. There must also be a single path through the lateral surfaces from each edge of
the base surface, to a corresponding edge on the top surface. If you combine all paths, they must cross the lateral
surfaces once and only once, and there cannot be any surfaces that are missed. Some examples of solids that do not
meet these requirements follow
Examples of Solids that can be automatically Hex Meshed
5-24 Meshing
The corner of this solid creates three five-sided faces. You can split this
solid into three six-sided solids.
You cannot mesh solids with holes in faces other than the base and top.
The split on the top faces, combined with the five-sided face, prevents
identifying a top and a bottom surface. To mesh this part, simply split it into
two solids along the line.
You cannot mesh solids that have partial depth holes.
You cannot mesh revolvable, but not extrudable, solids. In this case, the
holes force the left and right sides to be the base and top, but they are con-
nected with 3-sided, not 4-sided, surfaces. To mesh, split the solid near the
point inside the hole.
The other main problem that leads to non-meshable solids is sliver surfaces. These are small surfaces that are
usually generated by inaccuracies in the solid modeling process. If you have sliver surfaces, you will have to
Mesh, Geometry, HexMesh Solids... 5-25
remove them before proceeding. The Geometry, Solid, Cleanup, or Explode and Stitch commands can often be used
to remove these surfaces.
Commands for Subdividing Solids
Most real solids will have to be subdivided before they can be hex meshed. The various Geometry, Solid, Slice and
Embed commands are the primary tools that you have for cutting your solid. For more information, see Section
3.4.2.18, "Geometry, Solid, Slice..." and Section 3.4.2.16, "Geometry, Solid, Embed...".
In addition, another approach that is often helpful, especially with complicated solids, is to use the Geometry, Solid,
Explode command to explode the solid into a set of disconnected surfaces. You can then use the surface modeling
tools to add internal surfaces to divide the region, and use Geometry, Solid, Stitch to reassemble the pieces. This
technique can also be used to remove undesirable portions of your part.
Hex Mesh Sizing
The Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Solid command (with the Hex Meshing option selected) is the primary mecha-
nism to setup the necessary mesh sizing for successful hex meshing. In addition to properly subdivided solids, con-
sistent mesh sizing is mandatory for hex meshing. Since many surfaces on your solids must be mapped meshed,
curves on opposite sides of those surfaces must have the same number of element divisions. Similarly, this consis-
tent sizing must propagate through the model, across the multiple solids that you have created.
Once you have properly subdivided your part, the Size on Solid command handles all sizing automatically. Simply
specify a nominal size. If you need further mesh grading or want to modify the sizes that Size on Solid has created -
you must use great care. If you manually change the mesh size along a curve, you must also manually change the
mesh sizes (to the same settings) on all of the other curves in your solids that must match the first curve to maintain
mapped meshable surfaces. If you do not, FEMAP will not be able to hex mesh your solids. While you are doing
this process, you must make sure that you pick ALL of the curves. In particular, at the common boundaries where
you have sliced solids, there will be duplicate curves - one on each solid. All of these curves must get the same
mesh size.
Hex Meshing
When you choose this command, you will first be asked to define a material for the mesh (if you have not defined
meshing attributes on your solids). This will use the standard material creation dialog boxes (see Section 4.2.3,
"Model, Material"). You will then see the Hex Mesh Solids dialog box.
Most node and element options were explained in Section 5.1.2.2, "Mesh, Geometry, Curve...". For this meshing
procedure, select a solid property, or create a solid property with the New Prop... button. If you do not have any
properties defined in your model, FEMAP automatically creates a solid property that references the active material.
The Options button controls more advanced meshing options. The Options dialog box is identical to those
described in Section 5.1.2.7, "Mesh, Geometry, Solids...". Most of the options are unimportant for hex meshing,
other than the Midside Nodes options, which are important if you are meshing with elements that have midside
nodes.
Mesh Generation
The options in this section of the dialog box control the actual meshing procedure. If you choose Surface Mesh
Only, only surface elements will be created, not solid elements on the interior. Choose Midside Nodes if you want
to create solids that have midside nodes.
If you choose Merge Nodes on Slaved Surfaces, all nodes on the surfaces that lie between sliced solids will be
merged. This should result in a single fully connected mesh. You should always use the free face and free edge dis-
play, and examine them carefully for any disconnections. In some cases, if surfaces are too far apart, nodes will fall
5-26 Meshing
outside of the automatic merge tolerances and you could have gaps in your model. If this happens, use the Tools
commands to merge your nodes with a larger tolerance.
If you are not meshing all of your solids at once, you will have to manually merge the nodes. FEMAP only merges
nodes on the solids you are meshing. You can choose to turn off Merge Nodes on Slaved Surfaces if you want to
connect surfaces using other means (like the Mesh Connection command), or to simulate contact conditions.
In most cases FEMAP automatically chooses a mesh smoothing method that produces a good mesh. If the solid that
you are meshing has a high degree of curvature (especially with a small number of elements) and you want a more
evenly spaced mesh, or if you are getting messages that FEMAP can not produce a valid hex mesh, you might want
to try turning on Alternate Smoothing. This method also requires the meshes on the base and top surfaces be
mapped meshes - so you might have to divide your solid further before trying it. Finally, be aware that the alternate
smoothing method is significantly slower than the normal smoothing approach - but it can solve problems that are
otherwise not possible.
The figure shows a solid with three slices and the resulting hex mesh.
5.1.2.5 Mesh, Geometry, HexMesh from Elements...
HexMesh From Elements provides two ways to create a hex mesh out of mapped surface quads. A hexahedral mesh
can be created from a fully enclosed outer bound of mapped surface quads or between a bottom and top mapped
region that is connected with straight lines.
Top and Bottom:
To mesh hexahedral elements between two mapped surfaces, you will be asked to select the elements on the base of
the mesh and then the elements that form the top of the mesh. After the bottom and top of the mesh have been
defined, FEMAP will ask you if you would like to automatically match the top and bottom meshes. In most cases
FEMAP will be able to automatically match the top and bottom mesh. By saying No you will be able to choose a
node on the bottom set of elements and a matching node on the top set of elements. This will ensure the extrusion
matches the top region of elements. The last question defines how many layers of elements should be created
between the top and bottom regions.
Hint: Take advantage of any symmetry in your geometry when you are slicing. First divide your solid along
the lines of symmetry. Then you only need to further subdivide one of the symmetric pieces. When you
are done subdividing, you can either reflect the solids to recreate the entire part, or reflect the resulting
mesh.
Mesh, Geometry, Volume... 5-27
Elements Enclosing the Volume to Hex Mesh:
For hex mesh regions that do not have straight lines that connect the top and bottom regions, you will have map
mesh all of the surfaces that enclose the volume to hex mesh.
In this case you will first select the elements that form the mapped base region. Then you will be prompted to select
all of the elements that form the remainder of the enclosing volume.
5.1.2.6 Mesh, Geometry, Volume...
... creates nodes and solid elements in a selected set of volumes. Before choosing this command, you must define
the mesh sizes using the various Mesh, Mesh Control commands.
Since this command uses a mapped meshing technique, the number of nodes/elements along opposite faces of a
volume must always be equal. Biasing can vary independently along each edge of the volume.
Hint: It is helpful to place the solids that must be manually hex meshed into their own group in order to sim-
plify the selection of surface elements. Use Group, Operations, Generate Solids.
Bottom Region
Top Region
Base Region
5-28 Meshing
The volumes are selected using the standard entity selection dialog box. Additional meshing options are then spec-
ified using the Geometry Mesh Options dialog box.
For details, see Section 5.1.2.2, "Mesh, Geometry, Curve...".
The only options not described in this section are the Element Shape options. You can specify bricks, wedges, and
tetra elements, and the type of bias for wedges and tetras. The Bias options are explained in more detail in Section
5.2.1, "Mesh, Between...".
Examples
5.1.2.7 Mesh, Geometry, Solids...
... produces a 3-D solid tetrahedral mesh in a solid part. The solid must either have been imported from an ACIS
(*.SAT) file, a Parasolid (*.x_t), or built directly inside of FEMAP. When you select this command, if you have
only one solid in your model, FEMAP will automatically select it. If you have multiple solids, you will be
prompted to select the solids to mesh.
Hint: Volume meshing is typically only used if you have a very regular part and require a mapped mesh of
bricks and wedges. For all other solid parts, it is best to use Mesh, Geometry, Solids, or Mesh, Geome-
try, Solids from Surfaces, or Mesh, Geometry, Solids from Elements. The solid tetra mesher provides
much more flexibility and robustness than the volume mesher.
Volume Elements
Mesh, Geometry, Solids... 5-29
If you have already defined mesh sizes for all of the curves and sur-
faces in your model, FEMAP will ask you to update them. If you say
Yes, or if you have surfaces/curves which do not have defined mesh
sizes, the Automatic Mesh Sizing dialog box will appear. For details on
this dialog box, see Section 5.1.1.5, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On
Solid...".
FEMAP will compute a default mesh size for your part based upon
characteristic lengths in your part. Many times this will be a very good
initial guess. If you mesh the part and are unhappy with the sizing,
delete the original mesh, and then use a different element size.
Once you select OK on the Automatic Mesh Sizing dialog box, you
will either be prompted to input a material for the solid (if no materials
are defined in your model), or you will go straight to the Automesh Solids dialog box shown.
Most of the node and element options were explained in Section 5.1.2.2, "Mesh, Geometry, Curve...". For this
meshing procedure, you must select a solid property, or create a solid property with the New Prop... button. If you
do not have any properties defined in your model, FEMAP will automatically create a solid property which refer-
ences the active material. The Options button provides more advanced meshing options (see "Options").
Update Mesh Sizing...
Allows you to change the mesh on solids which have already been sized for tetrahedral meshing. It will bring up
the same Automatic Mesh Sizing dialog box, the same dialog as the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size on Solid command.
For more information about the Automatic Mesh Sizing dialog box, see Section 5.1.1.5, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Size
On Solid...".
Mesh Generation
These options control different aspects of the mesh. Each of these options are described below.
Surface Mesh Only:
The Surface Mesh Only option provides an easy method to mesh all of the surfaces related to a solid, but not mesh
the solid itself. You can then use these surfaces for analysis if you actually have a thin part modeled as a solid, or
you can review the surface mesh before going to a full solid mesh. Simply review and modify the surface mesh as
appropriate, and then use the Mesh, Geometry, Solids from Elements command to create a solid mesh from this
modified surface mesh.
Midside Nodes:
The Midside Nodes option controls whether or not midside nodes are generated in the tetrahedral mesh. Turn this
option on to create midside nodes. You can further control their placement (at the exact midside, or on the surfaces
of your solid model) by choosing Options (see "Options").
Tet Growth Ratio:
The Tet Growth Ratio allows you to modify the size of the tetrahedral elements based upon the size of elements in
the surface mesh. If the tet growth factor is set to 1, the size of tetrahedral elements formed will be approximately
Hint: You should almost always leave this option on. Four-noded tetrahedral elements can give inaccurate
results. Therefore, unless your analysis program does not support 10-noded tetrahedral elements, this
option should always be checked.
5-30 Meshing
the same as the surface mesh elements. If this value is set below 1 (minimum of 0.5), the length of the tetrahedral
elements formed by the solid mesher will be smaller than the surface mesh elements. If this value is above 1 (max-
imum of 100), the tetrahedral elements will be larger than the surface elements. If you need to form larger or
smaller tetrahedral elements than this ratio will allow, simply remesh the surfaces of the solid with a finer or
coarser mesh.
Options
This button allows you to access some advanced meshing options for the solid mesher in the Solid Automeshing
Options dialog box. Details of the solid tetrahedral mesher are controlled here. In general, you should use the
default settings. They have been chosen based on experiences in developing the solid mesher.
These options are segregated into two major sections: Solid Meshing Options,
and Status Options. The functionality associated with each of these options is
described in the following sections.
Solid Meshing Options
These options control the actual meshing procedure.
Check Surface Elements:
This option checks the surface elements that are input to the solid mesher.
Several checks are performed including:
element normal directions face in the same direction, inward or outward
no free edges
that there are no interior walls/bulkheads in the model. It is not possible for
the volume mesher to fill a volume that is not completely closed.
Delete Surface Elements:
This option controls whether or not the surface elements that have been gener-
ated are deleted after completion of the solid mesh. If you leave this option
off, the surface mesh will be retained, and you will have both planar and solid
elements in your part.
Adjust Nodal Precision:
This option allows you to round-off nodal locations from the surface mesh prior to sending them to the solid
mesher. In general, THIS OPTION SHOULD NOT BE USED. When it is turned on, coordinates of nodes in the
surface mesh are truncated to 6 significant digits. In rare cases, this can help to eliminate small deviations between
nodes on surfaces, however the solid meshers are no longer very sensitive to these small variations.
Smooth Solid Elements/Smooth Tolerance:
These options will automatically smooth the tetrahedral elements generated in a solid mesh to the tolerance speci-
fied. (For details on smoothing, see "Mesh, Smooth...") Basically, smoothing will move the interior nodes of a solid
mesh to try to maximize the smoothness of the elements. This command does not have to be invoked here in the
automatic meshing process, but can be executed from FEMAP at any time after automatic meshing.
Hint: In general, the solid mesher produces nicely shaped tetrahedral elements so there is no need for smooth-
ing. This option should almost always be turned off. You can invoke this command later if required sim-
ply by using the Mesh, Smooth command.
Mesh, Geometry, Solids... 5-31
Midside Nodes on Surface/Limit Distortion/Max Angle:
This option controls whether or not the midside nodes of parabolic tetrahedral elements are moved onto the edges
and surfaces of your solid model, or simply created at the geometric center of the two adjacent corners of the ele-
ment. It is best demonstrated with a simple example.
In the case on the left, midside nodes were projected onto the surfaces and edge curves. Notice the accurate repre-
sentation of the cylindrical portion of this model since the midside nodes are actually on the radius of the cylinder.
Without midside node projection, the cylindrical portion is more faceted, as shown on the right.
You can also specify an angular limit to the midside node projection to limit distortion. If the limit distortion option
is on, you must specify an angular limit to the distortion. FEMAP will calculate the position of the midside node on
the surface, and then compare the resulting angles with the two corner nodes. If either of these angles is above the
specified limit, FEMAP will recompute a new position for the node on the line between the exact midside position
and the position on the surface, which creates an angle equal to the limit angle. The following diagram shows an
example of this.
Max Elem
This option controls the allocation of memory for the solid mesher. Larger meshes will require more memory. If
you set this value to 0 (the default), FEMAP will automatically estimate the amount of memory required. If the
estimate is not large enough, FEMAP will retry two more times, each time doubling the memory. The minimum
Note: Consult the documentation for your particular analysis program regarding the placement of midside
nodes on parabolic tetrahedral elements. Some codes have limits on the included angle between the two
node to node segments of each edge of the element. An angle that is too severe can cause significant
discrepancies in calculated stresses for that element. It is up to you to ensure that the limit angle is
within the tolerance imposed by your solver.
Projected Onto Surface
At Midside
Angle Exceeds
Angular Limit
Limit Angle
Position on Surface
Final Position
Exact Midside Position
Corner Node
Corner Node
5-32 Meshing
amount of memory allocated for any mesh is equivalent to 50,000 elements. Therefore, most meshes will proceed
without any difficulty.
If you specify a number of elements (minimum of 5000), FEMAP will use this number to allocate memory. If this
amount of memory is insufficient, FEMAP will ask you to increase the number or cancel. You can continue in this
loop until you obtain a mesh.
FEMAP will also check the available physical memory to prevent large allocations of unavailable memory. If the
memory allocation exceeds the amount available, FEMAP will ask you if you want to reduce memory allocation
(which will reduce the number of elements you can create), or go with the current value (which will require swap-
ping to disk and may significantly slow the process).
Status Options
Both of the options in this section control the output of messages and files that can be used in the rare event that
there is a problem generating a particular automatic mesh.
Detailed Status Messages:
Controls output of additional status messages from the tetrahedral meshing engine to the FEMAP Messages win-
dow. These messages can help pinpoint exactly where in the automatic meshing process that a problem has arisen.
Completing the Mesh
Once you have set the desired options, simply press OK and the solid mesher will produce a tetrahedral mesh of
your part. FEMAP will produce status messages while the tetrahedral meshing is occurring and provide feedback
on element numbers and quality. The following is a sample list of a typical status message list.
Mesh Geometry Solids
Material 1 Created.
Merging...
Loading Elements...
Loading Tetrahedral Mesher...
Meshing Volume...
-- LOADING SURFACE MESH
NUMBER OF SURFACE NODES 2402
NUMBER OF SURFACE TRIANGLES 4800
-- SURFACE MESH QUALITY
WORST ELEMENT QUALITY 1.393847
BEST ELEMENT QUALITY 1.193572
WORST ELEMENT 2608 2243 2244
ELEMENT QUALITY TABLE
1 < Q < 2 100% 4800 ELEMENTS
-- PHASE 1 : SPECIFIED POINTS
-- PHASE 2 : BOUNDARY REGENERATION
-- PHASE 3 : FIELD POINTS
-- PHASE 4 : OPTIMIZATION
-- TETRAHEDRAL MESH QUALITY
WORST ELEMENT QUALITY 4.749431
BEST ELEMENT QUALITY 1.000000
ELEMENT QUALITY TABLE
1 < Q < 2 93% 21552 ELEMENTS
2 < Q < 3 6% 1429 ELEMENTS
3 < Q < 4 0% 4 ELEMENTS
4 < Q < 5 0% 2 ELEMENTS
-- STORING MESH
TOTAL NUMBER OF NODES 5085
NUMBER OF TETRAHEDRA 22987
Finishing Mesh...
Note: The FEMAP default calculations will work for almost all meshes. When overriding the defaults, you
should be careful to specify a large enough number of elements to finish the mesh. If you want to limit
the mesh to a specific number of elements but FEMAP cannot finish the mesh simply change the Tet
Growth Ratio, or remesh the surfaces with a coarser mesh.
Mesh, Geometry, Solids from Surfaces... 5-33
Adding Midside Nodes...
Loading Elements...
-- PERFORMANCE
OVERALL : 99654 ELEMENTS/MIN.
MESHING ONLY : 310635 ELEMENTS/MIN.
If you have an assembly of parts, or one part with different materials, you can mesh the different sections as differ-
ent solids, and then merge the meshes to obtain one mesh. The solid tetrahedral mesher maintains the original
meshes on the surface. Therefore, if you use the same surface meshes to generate solid meshes on different sides of
a surface, the two meshes will be coincident at that location. You may also use this feature if you have difficulty
obtaining a mesh on one large solid. You can slice this solid into two or more sections, mesh the sections separately,
and then merge the meshes when you have completed the solid mesh.
5.1.2.8 Mesh, Geometry, Solids from Surfaces...
... operates identically to the Mesh, Geometry, Solids command, except the initial input is the surfaces which
enclose a volume instead of a solid. This is a useful tool if you need to mesh a volume enclosed by surfaces, but
which do not form faces of a solid. For information on the solid meshing procedure, see "Mesh, Geometry, Sol-
ids...".
5.1.2.9 Mesh, Geometry, Solids from Elements...
... also operates identically to the Mesh, Geometry, Solids command, except the initial input is FEMAP planar ele-
ments enclosing a volume instead of a solid. This is a useful tool if you created finite elements without geometry to
enclose a volume, and need to create a solid mesh. For information on the solid meshing procedure, see "Mesh,
Geometry, Solids...".
5-34 Meshing
5.2 Non-Geometry Meshing
This section of the Mesh menu contains tools for meshing without geometry. Most often you will automatically cre-
ate meshes using geometry and the command on the Mesh, Geometry menu. However, FEMAP does have specific
tools for non-geometry based meshing which can be very useful in certain circumstances.
You can generate an automatic mesh between locations (Mesh, Between), create a ruled region of nodes and ele-
ments (Mesh, Region), automatically create line elements, rigid elements, or constraint equations between two sec-
tions of your model (Mesh, Connection commands), and generate a free mesh between existing nodes. Each of
these options is discussed in more detail below.
5.2.1 Mesh, Between...
... creates a mapped mesh of nodes and elements between corner locations that you specify. This is one of the sim-
plest ways to create a mesh. There are no requirements to start this command. You do not need existing geometry,
nodes or elements - everything can be done directly with this command.
All options for this command are specified through the following dialog box:
These options establish the basic parameters that will be assigned to each node or element as it is created.
Node ID and Elem ID
These are the IDs of the next node and element that will be created. Usually you can ignore these numbers, but if
you want to start with specific IDs, you can define them here.
CSys and Gen Clockwise
The CSys option chooses the coordinate system in which the generation will take place. The most important aspect
of this parameter is whether you choose a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate system. Generating
between corners in nonrectangular systems is different (but sometimes very useful!), than generating in rectangular
systems. For example, in cylindrical coordinates, you can generate between four corners to create a cylinder instead
of a rectangle.
The Gen Clockwise option is only used when you are working in a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system. It
controls whether generation will be done in a clockwise (negative theta) or counter-clockwise (positive theta)
direction. Examples of using these options are given later in this section.
Property and New Prop
The property that you choose is extremely important when you use this command. First, it is the property that will
be assigned to any elements you create. More importantly, however, the type of property that you select controls the
type of elements that will be generated. If you choose a plate property, plate elements will be generated. Choosing
a solid property will generate solid elements. Furthermore, if you chose a parabolic element/property type when
Ctrl+B or F11
Choose or create
property first. It controls the
setup for the dialog box
Mesh, Between... 5-35
you created the property, this command will generate parabolic elements with midside nodes. If you did not, linear
elements will be created. If you do not have any properties, or if you do not have the correct property, just press the
New Prop button to create a new property.
Node and Elem Param
These buttons allow you to set additional parameters for the nodes and elements that you will create. They access
the same dialog boxes as the Parameter buttons found in the Model, Node and Model, Element commands. For
more information, see Section 4.2.1, "Model, Node..." and Section 4.2.2, "Model, Element...").
Generate Options
For any generation, you can choose one of the three available options - nodes, elements, or both. When you choose
Nodes or Both, you will specify the corner locations that you want to generate. When you choose Elem, you do not
choose corner locations. Instead, you will choose a starting Node ID, and the Node Increments. Elements will sim-
ply be created based on the ID numbers of the existing nodes. This approach can be used if you had previously cre-
ated nodes with this command, or if you have other nodes that follow the same ID pattern. It is usually easiest to
use the default option, Both.
Corners
Use this option to choose the type of generation pattern that you want. The available options will be based on the
type of property that you have selected. The following table shows the available patterns:
The shapes above are all typical for rectangular coordi-
nates. In spherical coordinates, the shapes are
warped or mapped to follow the principal coordi-
nate directions. For example, a quadrilateral can
become a cylindrical surface if you work in cylindrical
coordinates.
Hint: If the default property shown is not the one you want, you should always change (or create) the property
first. It controls the activation of many of the other options in this dialog box.
Patterns for Generate Between Corners
Property
Type
Available
Corners
Shape and Corners
Line 2 line
Planar 3 triangle,
4 quadrilateral
Solid 4T tetra,
5 pyramid,
6 wedge,
8 brick
1
2
1
2 3
1 2
3 4
1
2 3
1
2 3
5
4
6
1 2
3 4
8 7
5 6
1 2
3 4
5 4
Rectangular
Coordinates
Cylindrical
Coordinates
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Y
X
Z
5-36 Meshing
Mesh Size
The Mesh Size parameters determine the number of nodes and elements that will be generated between your cor-
ners, and their spacing.
# Nodes
The # Nodes options define the number of nodes that will be created in each direction between the corners. If you
are generating between two corners, only the first box (Dir 1) will be active. For three or four corners, the first two
(Dir 1 and Dir 2) will be active. The solid generation patterns require all three numbers. Remember, this is the num-
ber of nodes, not the number of elements. The numbers must include the nodes at the corners. For linear elements,
the number of elements in each direction will be one less than the number of nodes that you choose. If you are
going to create parabolic elements, you must always specify an odd number of nodes. The number of parabolic ele-
ments will be half the number of linear elements.
Here are some examples:
Bias
If you want your nodes and elements to be equally spaced between the corners, just leave the Bias options blank, or
specify a bias of 1.0. To control the spacing such that elements at one end of a pattern are smaller than at the other
end, use these options. If you specify a bias of 0.5, the last element along that direction will be one half the size of
the first element. Use a bias of 2 if you want the last element to be twice the size of the first element. In the figure
above, the effect of biasing on a four cornered, quad mesh is shown. If you want to use an alternate logarithmic
bias, check the geometric bias option (provides a smoother transition).
Node Increment
These options are only available when generating planar or solid elements on existing nodes, by choosing the
Elems button. In this case, the generation logic will looks for existing nodes that start with an ID that you specify.
The ID increment in the first direction is equal to the nodal creation increment. This value is normally one, but you
can change it by pressing the Node Param button. If you do not specify additional increments, the direction incre-
ment is used to calculate required node IDs in other directions. If your node numbering does not follow the required
pattern, simply specify a different increment in each direction.
For example, if you wanted to generate plate elements on this pat-
tern, you would have to specify that you had a pattern of 5 nodes
by 5 nodes, the starting node was 1, the regular node increment
was 1, and the Node Increment in the second direction was 10. This
last entry accounts for the vertical numbering pattern in the picture
(1,11,21,31,41 - an increment of 10).
Element Shape
This group of options controls the shape of the elements that you
will create. Only those shapes that correspond to the type of ele-
ments that you are creating will be available. For more information on the available shapes for each element type,
see Section 4.2.2, "Model, Element...".
If you choose to generate quad or brick elements, you will still create some triangles, wedges or tetras unless you
are generating between four corners for the quads or between eight corners for the bricks. These other elements are
required to fill the tips of the triangular generation patterns.
2
3 4
1 2
3
1
Dir 1 (5 nodes, 0.5 bias)
Dir 2
(7 nodes)
Dir 1 (6 nodes)
Dir 2
(4 nodes)
Triangular elements
are created at the
tip of a 3 cornered
mesh.
3 Corners 4 Corners
(3.0 bias)
1 2 3 4 5
11 12 13 14 15
21 22 23 24 25
31 32 33 34 35
41 42 43 44 45
Mesh, Between... 5-37
If you choose the Tri, Tetra or Wedge options, you have further con-
trol over the pattern of elements that will be generated. The figure
shows how the Right, Left, and Alternate options control these ele-
ments.
Control for the solid elements is similar; however, you cannot alter-
nate tetra elements.
Corner Nodes
The corner nodes will be used as the location of the corners of the
mesh that you are going to generate. You will see as many text
fields here as you are selecting corners. You have two choices. You
can either choose existing nodes here for the corners, or you can
leave these corners blank. For each corner that is still blank when
you press OK, FEMAP will display the standard coordinate definition dialog box. This allows you to specify any
coordinate location as the corner - including selecting an existing node.
Whether you use the corner node fields, or the coordinate dialog boxes, you must specify the corners in the order
shown for each generation pattern (see "Corners"). If you use other patterns, FEMAP will attempt to untwist and
fix up the corners that you choose, but the results can be unpredictable. It is always best to follow the default pat-
terns.
If you make a mistake, or change your mind, when you are using the coordinate dialogs to define corner locations,
you can backup to the previous corner by pressing Cancel when the next dialog box is displayed. You cannot
backup after you press OK for the last corner. The mesh will already be generated.
First Corner Node
When you are generating elements on existing nodes, the lower portion of the dialog box will change to allow you
to specify the starting node ID in the pattern, rather than the corner nodes. You can either enter the ID, or select it
graphically, but you cannot leave it blank - the coordinate dialog boxes cannot be used for this method.
All-Quad Meshing Option
Normally when you choose the 3, 4T (tetra), 5 or 6 cornered
options and a quadrilateral or brick element shape, mapped
meshing requires that you add some triangular (or wedge/tetra)
elements to finish the pattern.
That is the case with this command also, unless you meet the
following conditions:
You must have an odd number of nodes along each paramet-
ric direction. All #Nodes entries must be odd numbers. The
only exception to this is along the third direction of a mesh
between 6 corners. In that direction, you can have either an
odd or even number of nodes.
Biasing is not allowed. All entries must be blank or 1.0.
Generation must be done in a rectangular coordinate system.
You must generate nodes and elements simultaneously. You cannot use this approach unless you select the Both
option.
If you follow these guidelines, a final question will be displayed (after you have pressed OK for the final corner)
that asks if you want to use mesh with all quadrilateral elements. If you answer no, the normal mixed quad/tri, or
brick/wedge/tetra mesh will be created. If you answer yes, however, you will get a mesh that contains only quadri-
lateral or only brick elements. For planar elements, the mesh will resemble the picture shown above. The mesh for
solid elements is similar, it just extends into three dimensions.
Hint: Since the Between Corners dialog box is rather large, it is often best to leave the corner nodes blank,
even if you are going to select an existing node. The coordinate definition dialog boxes will not occupy
as much of the screen and it may be easier to select the nodes graphically using that approach.
Right, Not Alternating Left, Not Alternating
Right, Alternating Left, Alternating
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3
9 by 9 mesh between
3 corners using
All-Quad meshing
5-38 Meshing
Some Examples
The following pictures show some examples of meshes created with this command.
In Rectangular Coordinates
In Cylindrical Coordinates
Generating between corners in cylindrical
coordinates works just like rectangular except
the primary coordinate directions are not X, Y
and Z, but R, theta and Z. The typical reason
for generating in cylindrical coordinates is to
create a cylindrical mesh. As shown in the this
example, this usually involves specifying cor-
ners that vary in the angular (theta) direction. It
is often helpful to visualize these cylindrical
sections as an unwrapped or flat-pattern.
In Spherical Coordinates
Working in spherical coordinates is the same as cylindrical, you just have to remember the orientation of the coor-
dinate directions. Probably the only time that you will want to use spherical coordinates is to mesh a spherical
dome.
Generating Line Elements
When you generate line elements, like bars and beams, in addition to the connectivity, you must define the orienta-
tion of the cross section. Because of this, if you generate between two corners, you will see the standard vector def-
inition dialog box for these and other element types. You cannot generate these elements referencing a third node,
but you can always change the orientation with the Modify, Update Elements, Orientation command.
Mixed Solid Elements
between 4 corners
Brick Elements
between 6 corners
using All-Quad meshing
1
2
3
4
5
1 2
4
3
8 Corners
(1,0,0), (1,180,0),
(0.6,180,0), (0.6,0,0),
(1,0,2), (1,180,2),
(0.6,180,2), (0.6,0,2)
8 Corners
same as other
side, just set
Gen Clockwise
3 Corners
(1,90,0), (1,90,360), (1,0,0)
First and Second corners
are coincident, automatically
implies full 360 degree rotation
Corner 3 at the pole
4 Corners
(1,120,0), (1,120,60),
(1,60,60), (1,60,0)
Mesh, Region... 5-39
5.2.2 Mesh, Region...
... creates a ruled region of nodes and/or elements between patterns of existing nodes. These patterns can take any
shape, but must be compatible with the type of elements you are attempting to generate between the patterns.
The standard entity selection dialog box is displayed twice to select the nodes in each pattern. Although these are
the standard dialog boxes, you must use them in a slightly different manner. In addition to selecting the nodes, you
must follow these guidelines:
Both patterns must contain the same number of nodes, therefore you must select the same number of nodes for
each dialog box.
Nodes must be selected in order. This command simply generates nodes and elements from nodes in the first
pattern to nodes in the second. Node IDs do not matter, but selection order does. The first node is connected to
the first, the last to the last. This restriction makes it practically impossible to use area graphical selections,
unless both patterns are in the same ID order. Individual graphical selections, however can easily be used.
After you select the node patterns, you will see the dialog box shown here The top of this dialog box is identical to
the generation options used for the Mesh, Between command (see Section 5.2.1, "Mesh, Between...") Just remem-
ber that the property should always be chosen first as it sets up many of the other options in the dialog box. Also,
the GenClockwise option controls the direction of the generation between the two end patterns selected.
Generate
These options allow you to choose whether to generate nodes or both nodes and elements between the selected
node patterns. Usually you will want to generate both nodes and elements, but if you choose nodes, the node IDs
that are generated are compatible with the requirements of the Mesh, Between command for generating just ele-
ments on existing nodes. You can use that command to add elements to the nodes at a later time.
This command always generates a coincident set of nodes on top of the original nodes in your patterns so node
numbering will be consistent with the Mesh, Between command.
Between Ends
The #Nodes option specifies how many nodes will be generated in the direction between the selected node patterns.
This number includes the nodes already in the selected patterns, not just the nodes between the patterns. For exam-
ple, if you specify #Nodes as 3, this means the two nodes in the patterns and one additional node between the pat-
terns. Bias controls the spacing of the generated nodes between the patterns. As in Mesh Between, a 1.0 (or 0.0)
bias chooses equal spacing. Values less than one mean that the last element (closest to the second pattern) will be
smaller than the first. Values greater than one reverse that spacing.
Element Shape
These options are just like those for the Mesh, Between command (see Section 5.2.1, "Mesh, Between..."). You will
note, however, that you cannot choose a line shape since line elements cannot be generated with this command.
End Nodes
By default, this command is setup to generate planar elements. By choosing a solid element property, you can also
use this command to create solid elements, if the original nodes formed four-cornered patterns. In this case how-
ever, you must specify additional information about the patterns of selected nodes. The Dir 2 and Dir 3 options
define the layout of those patterns. Specify the number of nodes along the first edge of the pattern as, and number
5-40 Meshing
of nodes along the other pattern direction as Dir 3. Dir 2 times Dir 3 must equal the total number of nodes in the
pattern.
Other Example
When generating planar elements using this command, follow the conventions shown here.
Note that the patterns can be any shape, but are chosen in order along an edge. If you choose them in random order,
this command will not work.
5.2.3 Mesh, Connection
These menu commands enable you to automatically create connections in your model, typically either rigid ele-
ments, line elements, or constraint equations between sets of nodes. These commands are very useful for simulat-
ing rigid links as well as providing a simple method of loads transfer from one section of the model to the next. The
major difference in each command is how the sets of nodes are created, and what type of entities can be created.
The specifics for each command will be provided under the individual descriptions below, but first we will examine
the commonalities among these commands.
All four commands use the identical dialog box shown here, although the Connection Type may change based upon
the command. The Node and Element Options contain the standard information for any meshing procedure.
If you select Constraint Equations or Rigid Elements, you must select the DOFs to connect. One constraint equa-
tion will be created for each DOF checked with a coefficient values of 1 and -1 for the primary and secondary node,
respectively. For Rigid Elements, only one rigid element will be created for each node pair since this one element
Start Pattern
End Pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
11
10
Numbers show
selection order,
not node IDs
Choose Solid property
Set #Nodes = 5,
Dir 2 = 3 and Dir 3 = 4
Start Pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
End Pattern
4 nodes along
generation direction
Numbers show
selection order,
not node IDs
Mesh, Connection, Closest Link... 5-41
can reference any combination of DOFs. The effect of either of these options is the same; therefore, you should
check your analysis program to see if rigid elements and/or constraint equations are supported to select the type. If
creating a Rigid Element connection then the Reverse Direction option will be available to you. This option creates
a Rigid element with the master and slave nodes reversed. This is often necessary since some solvers do not support
multiple master nodes connected to the slave nodes.
The Line Element selection does not require DOFs to be chosen (in fact they will be grayed), but you must select a
Line Element under Property. If you do not have a line property in your model, simply press New Prop... to create
one. When exiting this command via OK, FEMAP will create line elements between the nodes by using the prop-
erty that you select. The type of element created is based upon the line property.
As mentioned above, the major difference between the commands on the Mesh, Connection menu is the method to
obtain the nodes to generate the connections. Each of these four commands, Closest Link, Multiple, Unzip, and
Coincident are explained below.
5.2.3.1 Mesh, Connection, Closest Link...
... enables you to choose two sets of nodes, and FEMAP will automatically generate line elements, constraint equa-
tions, or rigid elements between each node in the first set of nodes (the Generate From selection) to the nearest
node in the second set of nodes (the Generate To selection). This is a useful method to automatically generate a
series of connections between two patterns of nodes or between a pattern of nodes and a single node.
5.2.3.2 Mesh, Connection, Multiple...
...is identical to Mesh, Connection, Closet Link
except instead of inputting two lists of nodes, you
simply pick each pair of nodes individually with
the Connection Nodes dialog box. This is conve-
nient when the distances between nodes are such that the Closest Link command would create improper connec-
tions. The Connection Nodes dialog box will continue to repeat, enabling you to create multiple connections, until
you press Cancel.
5.2.3.3 Mesh, Connection, Unzip...
... works differently than the previous connection commands in that it actually disconnects a mesh by creating new
nodes, and then either connects the nodes with constraint equations, rigid elements, DOF spring elements, gap ele-
ments, or leaves the mesh unzipped. This command is very useful when a mesh has been merged but you need to
simulate an interface resistance or force between two sections of the mesh.
The inputs to this command are the elements on the primary side of the mesh and the nodes to unzip. FEMAP cre-
ates new nodes that are coincident with the selected nodes, and then modifies all elements connected to the selected
node to use the new node except for those that are on the primary side of the interface as chosen above. This has the
effect of unzipping the mesh at these locations.
Hint: To create a Rigid Spider element, first select the nodes which will be dependent (multiple nodes) and
click OK. Then select the independent node (single node) in the next dialog box.
From Nodes
To Nodes
5-42 Meshing
The type of connections available for this
command are slightly different than the
previous commands. You can choose None,
at which point the mesh will remain com-
pletely unconnected. You can choose con-
straint equations or rigid elements (with
their DOFs) just like the Closest Link and
Multiple commands. If you select Rigid
Elements, the Master Node will be the orig-
inal node selected and the Slave Node will
be the new node that was created.
You will notice, however, that if you are
limited in the type of line element to spec-
ify for the connection. Since the nodes are
coincident, you must select an element that
can be zero length, such as a DOF spring or gap element. If you choose either of these options, you must also pick
a corresponding property. If you select Gap Elements, you will also need to define an orientation vector.
5.2.3.4 Mesh, Connection, Coincident Link...
... is very similar to the Mesh, Connection, Unzip command described above, except it is used on meshes that have
not been merged, or have been previously unzipped. You simply selects a group of nodes and a Coincident Toler-
ance value below which nodes are considered coincident. FEMAP will create the requested entities at any coinci-
dent nodes.
The choices for the type of connection are identical to the Unzip command above (except for the None option)
since this command again forms connections that are zero length.
5.2.4 Mesh, Transition...
... is an alternate way to generate a free mesh without having geometry. Instead of using geometry, this command
meshes between existing nodes or coordinates - hence the name transition.
Since you are not selecting any surfaces or other geometry, this command is limited to creating the types of meshes
that would be created on a boundary that maps to the boundary curves (typically planar). Mapping to a surface is
not available.
When you begin this command, you will see the Transition Boundary dialog box.
It is used to define a pseudo-boundary, by selecting the nodes that you want the transition mesh to join. The sim-
plest way to use this dialog is to follow these steps:
1. Choose the first two nodes you want on the boundary.
2. Set Number equal to 1 and press More.
3. Pick the next node on the boundary as the To node. You will notice that the last node you selected has moved to
the From position and cannot change. Press More to repeat this step and add nodes to the boundary. After you
specify the last node, leave To blank and press Close Boundary to join the boundary back to the starting node -
do not select the starting node twice.
If all of the nodes along the boundary do not exist, you have several other options. If you leave the To (or From)
node blank, when you press More, the standard coordinate definition dialog box will be displayed. You can then
create a node using any of the available methods. This new node will be automatically added to the boundary.
Alternately, if the missing nodes lie along a straight line between other nodes, you can use the Elements Along
Edge options to generate one or more additional nodes between the From and To nodes. This is most helpful if you
Ctrl+F11
Modifying a Mesh 5-43
are using this command to generate a separate mesh that does not connect to existing nodes. You can then just
choose the corner nodes and create additional nodes along the edges without specifying each one individually.
These options work just like the Mesh, Mesh Control commands. You can either specify a number of elements
between the corners or an element size. The size will not be used unless the number is zero or blank. The distance
between the corners is used with the size to compute the required number of elements. Biasing works just like all
other generation commands. A bias of 1.0 implies uniform spacing. A bias less than one puts the smallest elements
at the To node. A bias greater than one puts the smallest elements at the From node. If you specify both a bias and a
size, the size will be adjusted slightly to keep the correct number of elements with the desired bias.
Generation Options
After you choose Close Boundary, you will see the same options dialog used for the Mesh, Geometry, Surface com-
mand (see Section 5.1.2.3, "Mesh, Geometry, Surface..."). As before, you probably will just want to use the default
options and press OK.
Examples
These figures show some typical uses of this command. While you could conceivably use this command to gener-
ate very complex areas, it is intended to handle these simpler tasks. If you need very complicated boundaries, it is
usually simpler to define geometry.
5.3 Modifying a Mesh
Previous commands on the Mesh menu contained commands for creating a mesh. This section of the menu contains
command for modifying a mesh, whether it be to refine, unrefine, smooth, or remesh particular elements. These
tools can be very useful to smooth or remesh small areas of meshes, especially if the original mesh was produced
over a large area. In general, smoother meshes will be obtained, and remeshing will produce excellent results when
small areas of the mesh are connected.
5.3.1 Mesh, Editing Menu
The Mesh, Editing menu contains two commands for modifying quadrilateral or triangular elements: Interactive
and Splitting. Both commands let you break these elements into smaller elements.
Hint: If you are selecting nodes for the boundary graphically, just point and double-click them (instead of sin-
gle-clicking). This will select the node and automatically press More so you can go on and select addi-
tional nodes.
Nodes along boundary
Transition elements
Nodes along boundary
Multiple elements generated
along edges by setting
Number=3 when
picking top and bottom
nodes
5-44 Meshing
5.3.1.1 Mesh, Editing, Interactive...
...lets you split a single linear or parabolic quad element into smaller quads or triangles. You can also split a single
triangular element into four triangles.
As you select an element, you can control the orientation of
the element split pattern.
The new elements will have the same material angles and
geometry associativity as the original elements. Surface
loads will be updated to reflect the new mesh, but nodal
loads will not.
To use the command:
1. On the Mesh Editing dialog box, pick the pattern for the element splitting.
2. Move your cursor over the model. As the cursor passes over an element, the command will preview the split.
Move the cursor inside the element to change the orientation of the split, as shown in the figure.
3. Click on the element to immediately split it with the displayed orientation.
Options on the Mesh Editing dialog box include:
Undo: Unlike other FEMAP commands, the Interactive command applies the changes to the element before
you exit the dialog box. Use the Undo button to remove unwanted splitting.
Merge: Pick this option to automatically merge all coincident nodes in the model after you pick Done.
5.3.1.2 Mesh, Editing, Split...
...lets you split multiple linear or parabolic quad elements
into smaller quads or triangles. You can also split triangu-
lar elements into smaller triangles.
The new elements will have the same material angles and
geometry associativity as the original elements. Surface
loads will be updated to reflect the new mesh, but nodal
loads will not.
To use the command:
1. On the Mesh Editing dialog box, pick the pattern for
the element splitting.
2. Press Pick Elements. Use the standard entity selec-
tion box to select the elements for splitting.
3. Press Done.
Options on the Mesh Editing dialog box include:
Warping: Pick this option to automatically split ele-
ments with a warping factor higher than the value that
you enter. Elements with a lower warping factor will not be split.
Merge Nodes: Pick this option to automatically merge all coincident nodes in the model after you pick Done.
5.3.2 Mesh, Remesh Menu
This menu contains commands to take existing nodes and produce a new mesh with the same boundaries. The
menu is partitioned into three segments:
V1 V1
V1 V1
Mesh, Remesh: Refine... , Update..., Unrefine... 5-45
The first section contains three commands which are very similar for either refining, updating, or unrefining
your mesh.
The second section contains commands for removing small edges and slivers from your model.
The final section contains tools for large scale remeshing which are most often used to remesh large surface
meshes in preparation for solid meshing.
5.3.2.1 Mesh, Remesh: Refine... , Update..., Unrefine...
... all operate in a very similar manner. These commands take existing nodes and planar elements and produces a
new mesh with the same boundaries. You can either remesh with the same boundary nodes, include additional
boundary nodes to refine the existing mesh, or unrefine the existing mesh.
These commands can be used very effectively to clean-up meshes that were generated with other surface and
transition meshing commands. When working with large complex areas, those commands will sometimes generate
elements in a certain area that are distorted. You can use these command to select that area and remesh it. In many
cases the result will be significantly improved compared to the original.
When you choose this command, you will see the standard entity selection dialog box asking for the elements to
remesh or refine. You can choose any group of elements, but they must meet the following requirements:
All selected elements must be planar type elements.
The elements should all lie in one plane. Unlike surface meshing, the redefined mesh cannot be mapped onto a
surface. If you pick a nonplanar group of elements, the remeshed elements may not follow the same surface
contours as the original elements.
After picking the elements to refine, you will see the dialog box shown here.The command originally chosen will
be the default, but you could change your mind at this point and select one of the other options.
Refining a Mesh
If you choose the Refine elements option, additional nodes are added between nodes you choose later. The Refine-
ment Ratio determines how many nodes are added. The default of 2 means one new node is created between each
node you select for refinement. This doubles the number of elements. Choosing 3 will add two nodes, and switch
from 1 to 3 elements.
Hint: You can still use this command on elements that are nonplanar, especially over small areas. After you
have remeshed, the new locations will most likely not be on the surface. Simply use Modify, Project,
Node Onto Surface to move these nodes back to the surface. If you have remeshed a small region, the
mesh should contain little or no distortion from this projection.
Original Refined
Refine 4 elements
Choose these nodes
Original nodes and
elements were deleted
for 2 to 1 refinement
5-46 Meshing
After you choose OK, you will see the standard entity selection dialog box so you can choose the nodes on the
edges to refine. Additional nodes will only be added between selected nodes. Typically, you will want to choose
nodes on a free boundary since the refined mesh will not join with any adjacent mesh.
Update/Remesh
The remeshing option is used in the same way as the refine option, except that you do not specify any nodes for
refinement. All nodes on the original boundary will be matched 1 to 1 by the nodes in the updated mesh. The
only time that you will want to use this option is when attempting to clean-up an existing mesh.
Unrefining a Mesh
The Unrefine option allows you to automatically coarsen an existing mesh. For this option, you must specify both
the Refinement Ratio and the Break Angle. For example, a refinement ratio of 2, means that the mesh will be halved
(i.e. times 2) in refinement. A refinement ratio of 3 will remove every third node. During the unrefinement process,
FEMAP will remove every other node around the periphery of the elements selected. To insure that no important
features, like corners, are removed in this process the Break Angle must be set.
FEMAP will automatically retain any nodes on the boundary where the angle between the edges of the adjacent
element edges exceeds the Break Angle. As a simple example, a square would exhibit an edge angle of 90 degrees
at the corners, and zero everywhere along the sides. If you set the break angle less than 90 degrees FEMAP would
automatically find and keep all of the corner nodes during the remeshing.
Finally, you will be asked to select the nodes where
unrefinement will take place. This gives you the option
of biasing the remeshing, that is unrefining along one
or more edges while keeping other parts of the selected
area at the same mesh density. If global coarsening is
desired, simply selecting all nodes will apply the
coarsening to the entire selected mesh.
Unrefine provides an automatic way to unrefine a
mesh. If you want to manually control which nodes are
removed from the mesh, first choose the Remesh
option - not Unrefine. You must then press the Exclude
Nodes from Boundary button, where you will be asked
to choose the nodes to remove using the standard selection dialog box. You can select any nodes in the model dur-
ing this process, but only nodes that lie on the outer boundary of the selected mesh will actually impact the remesh-
ing/coarsening process.
You can combine the manual and automatic methods by proceeding as if you were using the automatic method
(select Unrefine) and then in addition, pressing Exclude Nodes from Boundary to manually remove any additional
nodes that you do not want in the final mesh.
Other Options
If Delete Original Nodes... is set, the nodes and elements that you selected for refinement will be automatically
deleted after the new mesh is created. You will usually want to leave this option on. If you do not, the new mesh
will be coincident with the old one and you must manually delete some of the elements.
The Exclude Nodes from Boundary button allows you to adjust the boundary that is defined by the elements that
you select. You will use this option only rarely (if ever). When you push the button, you will see the standard entity
selection dialog box. Here you can choose nodes that you want to remove from the boundary. By default, all nodes
that are on the free edges of the element you chose are considered to be on the boundary. The nodes you select here
are then removed. Great care must be used in selecting these nodes or you could cause a portion of the existing
mesh to be skipped when you are remeshing.
Note: When you refine an edge, the new nodes are placed along a straight line between the original edge
nodes. If you are trying to refine a curved edge, you must use the Modify, Project, Node commands to
adjust the position of the new nodes after they are created.
Initial Mesh
Coarse Mesh
after 3:1Unrefine
Mesh, Remesh, Convert Facets... 5-47
Generation Options
After you choose the refinement options and nodes you will see the same options dialog that is used for the Mesh,
Geometry, Surface command (see Section 5.1.2.3, "Mesh, Geometry, Surface..."). All options are exactly the same
for this command. As before, you probably will just want to use the default options and press OK.
For this command, you may want to adjust these options to reduce the allowable aspect ratio and turn off Quick-
Cut. Even when you are remeshing, you can change these options. Remeshing just maintains the same mesh den-
sity along the boundaries, not necessarily between the boundaries.
5.3.2.2 Mesh, Remesh, Convert Facets...
...lets you convert triangular facets for displaying graphics
into triangular elements. This command should only be
used as a last resort when all other meshing techniques fail.
Once you have generated the elements, you can then use
commands on the Mesh, Remesh menu to refine your mesh.
For example, the part in the figure was meshed with the
following steps:
1. Pick Mesh, Remesh, Convert Facets to generate ele-
ments from the parts facets. (To preview the facets, use
View, Select and pick the Quick Hidden Line display.)
2. Use Mesh, Remesh, Build Meshing Regions to take the
faces of the initial mesh and group them into regions for
remeshing.
3. Use Mesh, Remesh, Mesh Remeshing Regions to gener-
ate the mesh.
5.3.2.3 Mesh, Remesh, Cleanup Slivers...
... provides the capability to remove small features from
the mesh. This can be very useful when you have meshed a
solid/surface model with very small features. This com-
mand will remove them based upon the tolerances you
choose.
When you select this command, FEMAP will display the
standard entity selection box. You must choose the ele-
ments to check. The Sliver Removal dialog box will then
appear. This dialog box contains statistical information for
both angles and lengths of the selected elements.
You can choose to cleanup based upon angle and/or edge length. Simply specify the tolerances for Min Angles and/
or Min Edge Length, and FEMAP will remove these edges from the model. When a short or flat edge has been
identified, the cleanup routine will keep the most significant node of this edge and delete the less significant one.
This will help maintain the most accurate representation of the shape of the part.
X
Y Z
V1
X
Y Z
V1
X
Y Z
V1
1
2
3
5-48 Meshing
5.3.2.4 Mesh, Remesh, Edge Removal...
... is used to manually delete edges in the surface
mesh. Edge Removal lets you quickly remove fea-
tures that are too small compared to the rest of the
mesh (or in the case of stereolithography files,
future surface and solid meshes that will be gener-
ated). Consider the sample Stereolithography file
above.
You will notice several facets of the STL mesh that
contain extremely short edges. Unless you intend to mesh the overall part to this level of refinement, they must be
removed. The Mesh, Remesh Edge, Removal command can be used to remove the short edge at the tip of our sam-
ple model.
The AutoRemesh Delete Edges dialog box
prompts you for two nodes. Select the node
that you want to keep first (as the From
Node), and then select the node to be
deleted (as the To Node). FEMAP will
delete the second node, the two elements that were attached to that edge, and close the gap, updating all affected
elements to reference the first node.
The results of removing the edge at the tip of this model is:
By deleting more of the short edges the model can quickly be transformed to:
While this process is not difficult, it can still be very time consuming in a model with many short edges. This pro-
cess, however, is automated by the Mesh, Remesh, Cleanup Slivers command where you simply specify an edge
length and angle value and all edges below those values are automatically deleted.
5.3.2.5 Mesh, Remesh, Build Remeshing Regions...
... automatically takes the face of your initial mesh and groups them into regions for remeshing. The only input
required is the angle tolerance for grouping of adjacent faces. All flat or nearly flat areas of your model are always
grouped together by Build Remeshing Regions. The remaining faces are grouped based on the angle tolerance that
you select.
The most important factor when selecting an angle tolerance is that the angle should closely match the faceting
angle of your original mesh. If you are working on an STL mesh, most CAD systems make it possible to control the
faceting of your original solid model, and some even let you directly specify the angle tolerance used in creating
the STL facets. If the angle tolerance you specify is too high, the curved areas of your model will lose geometric
accuracy during remeshing. Again consider our example problem. By specifying a high angle tolerance for region
construction, facets in the curved area of the model are grouped together too coarsely:
Short
Edge
Mesh, Remesh, Edit Remeshing Regions... 5-49
In the region identified in the figure at the top left above, a high angle tolerance has grouped together four facets of
the original mesh in the region of interest. Subsequent remeshing of these regions results in elements that deviate
significantly from the original surfaces. By using a smaller angle tolerance, this region will be split in the middle,
and the resulting surface mesh will more closely approximate the original faceted surface definition (as shown to
the right).
The Build Regions command will automatically place elements of each region in their own layer. Once Build
Regions has been completed, FEMAP will also change the display to a full hidden line plot with element fill turned
on, and with the elements colored by their respective layer. This brightly colored, segmented representation of your
model may not be pretty, but it does enable you to quickly identify how the individual regions are being grouped.
You can further explore the grouping by turning on layer numbers (View Options, Element Number by Layer ID) or
by selectively displaying only certain layers using the layer management capabilities.
5.3.2.6 Mesh, Remesh, Edit Remeshing Regions...
... allows you to adjust the regions that were created automatically in the Build Remeshing Regions command
described above. This command is used to adjust the regions to ensure a better surface mesh. The Build Remeshing
Regions command attempts to build the best possible regions for remeshing, but occasionally you might want to
adjust these regions manually.
The best example for wanting to use Edit Remeshing Regions is when a region contains only a single triangular
face from the original mesh. In this case, during remeshing, the FEMAP boundary mesher will be presented with a
triangular area to remesh. Triangular regions with a fairly steep aspect ratio will remesh with poorly shaped ele-
ments. Another example (although less frequently encountered), is when a relatively large, rectangular region has a
single sliver face protruding from, or into one of its edges. In this case, it is usually helpful to move the sliver into
the adjacent region.
When you choose this command, you will see the AutoRemesh Edit Regions dialog box. First, you should choose
the element that you want to move to a new region (Move Elem), then select any element that is in the region that
Resulting Surface Meshes
High Angle Tolerance Smaller Angle Tolerance
Better Representation of Curved Area
Region of Interest
5-50 Meshing
you want to move into (To Region with Elem). You can only select regions that are already adjacent to the element
that you are trying to update. This prevents accidentally creating regions that are not connected.
1. Labels, Entities, Colors category: Select the Label Parameters Option, and change the Color Mode to option 2,
Entity, Erase Background.
2. Again from the Labels, Entities, Color category: Select the Element option, and change the Label Mode to
Option 1, ID. Press OK in the View Options dialog box to return to STL Remesh.
All elements will now be drawn with their ID readily visible. When picking elements in the Edit Regions com-
mand, aim for the element number. Just like all FEMAP picking commands, the centroid is the deciding factor in
selection, and the label is drawn at the centroid of the element.
5.3.2.7 Mesh, Remesh, Mesh Remeshing Regions...
...takes the regions identified in the previous steps and uses the FEMAP boundary mesher to remesh them with
better shaped triangular elements. You will be required to specify a mesh density that will be used to split any long
edges of regions. The top face of our example STL file serves as an excellent demonstration of this command.
Both Build Remeshing Regions and Mesh Remeshing Regions will create and keep elements associated with each
region on their own unique level in FEMAP. This makes it possible to use the View, Layers command to isolate dis-
crete regions of your model if you wish to manipulate the face mesh manually before moving on the meshing the
interior with solid elements.
5.3.3 Mesh, Edge Members...
... creates line elements along the free edges of selected planar elements, or planar elements on the free faces of
solid elements. This command provides a convenient way for framing plate or beam structures with beam or other
line elements, and for paving the surface of solid structures with plates or membranes.
You must select the elements that you want to frame using the standard entity selection dialog box. You do not have
to specify one contiguous group of elements. FEMAP uses the same logic that it uses for a free edge/face plot to
determine the locations where elements will be created. In fact, you can use this method to make a preliminary
check. Just select the elements to be framed into a group, select the group for display and choose a free edge or
face plot. The edges/faces you see will create elements.
Hint: The discrete regions of your original mesh will be displayed in different colors, but it is often difficult to
pick the exact elements you wish to modify with the Edit Remeshing Regions command. To make this
easier, use View Options, and change the following options to make element picking and visualization
easier:
Before Remeshing After Remeshing
Mesh, Edge Members... 5-51
If you select planar elements, FEMAP will automatically attempt to create line elements as edge members.
If you select solid elements, planar edge members will be created. You should not select both planar and solid ele-
ments in the same command.
After you select elements to be framed, FEMAP displays a list of existing properties for you to select one. This
property is assigned to all elements that will be created, and also defines the type of elements to be created. Before
you invoke this command, you must have an existing property in your model that defines the type of elements that
you want to create. There is no option for changing type, or automatic property creation in this command. If you do
not have the correct property already in your model, use the Property Icon Button in the Select Property for Edge
Members dialog box to create one.
If you chose to create elements that require an orientation, FEMAP will display the standard Vector Locate dialog
box so you can define an orientation vector. It is usually best to orient the vector normal to the plane of the elements
that you are framing. Using this approach will eliminate the possibility of placing orientation vectors along the
length of the elements.
If you want to specify a nodal orientation, offsets, releases, or other element options, use the appropriate Modify,
Update Element commands after you create the line elements. Finally, you will see the standard entity selection box
again. This time, however, you must select the nodes where you want the edge members to be generated.
If you want edge members around all of the elements that you selected, select all nodes and press OK. If instead
you just want edge members in one area, just select the nodes in that area. This is especially important if you are
generating planar elements on free faces of solids. You should select all of the nodes on the surface where you want
to generate the planar elements. Box picking is often very convenient for doing these selections.
Note: In order to create an line edge member element on the edge of a planar element, BOTH nodes
of the prospective edge member element must be included. This is a change from FEMAP
version 9.2 to version 9.3 and above.
Original Plate
Elements
Beam Edge Members
Offsets have been
added for clarity in
this picture
Plate Edge Members
along the top surface of
solid elements. Element
Shrink used for clarity.
5-52 Meshing
5.3.4 Mesh, Smooth...
... is used to adjust the locations of element corners (nodes) to reduce distortions in those elements. This procedure
is performed automatically by all free-meshing commands described above, but you can use it to smooth any pla-
nar or solid element mesh.
After you select the elements to be smoothed using the
standard entity selection dialog box, the Mesh Smooth-
ing dialog box is used to define the smoothing parame-
ters.
Choosing a Smoothing Method
There are two different smoothing algorithms from which to choose. Laplacian smoothing pulls a node toward the
center of surrounding nodes directly connected to that node along an element edge. Centroidal smoothing pulls a
node toward the element-area-weighted centroid of the surrounding elements.
Typically, the Laplacian method will produce the mesh with the least element distortion. It is also the faster
method. Centroidal smoothing usually produces a mesh that has more uniform element sizes. Both methods pro-
duce good results with free meshes.
Smoothing Iterations
Both of the smoothing methods use an iterative procedure to converge toward a smoothed mesh. All nodes are
smoothed according to one of the techniques shown above. Then the smoothing is reevaluated with the updated
nodal locations. This process continues until the maximum number of iterations has been exceeded, or no node is
moved by a greater distance than the specified tolerance.
Using the default values, you will often see a message stating that the smoothing did not converge in the allowed
number of iterations. This does not mean that anything was wrong. It simply means that in the last iteration, at least
one node was moved farther than the tolerance. The maximum distance that a node was moved is given in the mes-
sage. You can decide whether this distance is acceptable. If you decide to do additional smoothing, you can start
with the already partially smoothed mesh. You do not have to revert to the original.
Fixing Nodes
If you are smoothing a mesh that contains some interior nodes that must stay in the present location, press Fix
Nodes. You can then add those nodes to the list of nodes on the boundary, using the standard entity selection dialog
box. You can also remove boundary nodes from the list to allow them to move from their current position.
If you fix the positions of some nodes in this manner, the mesh will not be fully smoothed. The elements around
those nodes may still have substantial distortions.
Note: If you only want to create 2-D plates on one side of a set of solids, select interior nodes (i.e. no
corners on the free edges). If you select these nodes, FEMAP will create faces on the correspond-
ing free faces along that boundary. In the example above, only the 9 interior face nodes where
selected, not all 25 nodes.
Laplacian Centroidal
Node moves toward center of
surrounding nodes
Node moves toward center of
area weighted element centroids
Copying a Mesh 5-53
5.4 Copying a Mesh
This section of the Mesh menu allows you to produce duplicate copies of a mesh (nodes and/or elements). These
commands are very useful when you have portions of your model which are symmetrical. It is often easier to mesh
a small portion of your model, and then reflect or rotate the mesh to produce other areas of your model, as opposed
to generating one large mesh. Separating your model into smaller areas will give you more control over the mesh
without having to use many of the Mesh Control capabilities. For more information, see Section 5.1.1, "Mesh,
Mesh Control".
This can be extremely valuable for symmetric parts which may require full modeling due to non-symmetric load-
ing. Simply mesh 1/2 or 1/4 of the part (if 1/2 or 1/4 symmetry exists) using the meshing commands above, and
then use these commands to produce the rest of the mesh
There are five basic commands based upon the type of copy you need to make:
Copy
Radial Copy
Scale
Rotate
Reflect
These commands are very similar to the commands contained on the Geometry menu, except they work with nodes
and elements instead of geometry (points, curves, etc.). The functionality of each of these commands is described
below.
5.4.1 Mesh, Copy Menu
You can use the copy commands to duplicate existing nodes or elements. These commands are similar to the Mesh,
Rotate and Mesh, Reflect commands. Here, the entities are copied along a vector that you specify.
5.4.1.1 Mesh, Copy, Node...
... makes one or more copies of a selected set of nodes. To copy nodes, you must complete three dialog boxes. First,
you select the nodes that you want to copy using the standard entity selection dialog box. Then, the Generation
Options dialog box is displayed.
When you are copying nodes, only the Parameters, Match Loads, Constraints..., Update Every Repetition, and
Repetitions controls are active. The other controls are used by the Generate Copy Elements command. Finally, after
you set the options, and press OK, you will see the standard vector definition dialog box. This vector defines both
the direction and distance from the selected nodes to the first copy. If you specify multiple repetitions, each addi-
tional copy will be located along the same vector, at the same distance from the previous copy. Optionally, you can
specify a new vector for each repetition by selecting the Update Every Repetition option.
Specifying Generation Options
The generation options control how many copies FEMAP will make, and choose parameters for the resulting
nodes. You have the following choices:
Parameters:
These two choices select the parameters that will be assigned to the nodes that are generated. These include the def-
inition coordinate system, output coordinate system, permanent constraints, color and layer. If you select Use Cur-
rent Settings, the node parameters will match the active node parameters. This is the same as if you had created new
nodes using the Model, Node command. If instead, you choose Match Original Entities, each new node will exactly
match the parameters of the node that was copied to create it. www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
5-54 Meshing
Repetitions:
By default this option is one. One repetition will create one copy of each selected node. If you want multiple cop-
ies, just set this option to the number you want.
Match Loads, Constraints:
If you turn on this option, any loads or constraints that are attached to the selected nodes will also be copied and
attached to the newly created nodes. If it is off, only the nodes will be copied.
When this option is off, FEMAP will only ask you for one vector that will be used to position the copies. In this
mode, FEMAP will always offset the position of the current repetition from the position of the previous repetition,
based on the direction and length of the vector that you define. If you select the Update Every Repetition option
however, FEMAP will ask you for a new vector before every repetition. This new vector will be used to offset from
the original nodes that you selected, not from the previous repetition. You will want to check this option whenever
you want to create multiple copies that do not lie along a single vector.
Copying in NonRectangular Coordinates
FEMAP always creates copies along the vector that you specify, that is along a straight line. You can specify the
vector in any convenient coordinate system. You cannot however, use it to create a copy in a rotated location by
choosing the angular direction in a cylindrical coordinate system. You must use the rotation commands to create
rotated copies.
5.4.1.2 Mesh, Copy, Element...
... is very similar to the Mesh, Copy, Node command. Here however, FEMAP will make one or more copies of
existing elements.
The first dialog box displayed by this command is used to select the elements to copy. When you have chosen the
elements that you wish to duplicate, FEMAP will display the Generation Options dialog box. This is the same dia-
log box displayed by Mesh, Copy, Node (and shown above), but now several additional options are available. The
options are:
Element Options:
This category of options allows you to use Mesh, Copy, Element in two completely different ways. If you check the
Use Existing Nodes box, FEMAP will simply copy the selected elements to other already existing nodes. In this
case you also must specify the Node Increment and Node Offset values, and all of the required nodes must already
exist.
The Node Increment is added to ID of each node before each repetition. For example, if an element is connected to
node 50, and you specify an increment of 100, the first copy will be connected to node 150, the second copy to
node 250, and so on. If the nodes that you want to copy to have IDs that are not an equal increment from the current
node numbering on the elements, you can also specify a Node Offset. This offset, is only applied to the first copy.
For example, if an element is connected to node 50, and you want to make copies connected to nodes 1050, 1150,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Original Nodes
Make 3 copies
along this vector
Mesh, Copy, Element... 5-55
1250, and so on, you would specify an increment of 100 (the difference between each repetition) and an offset of
1000 (the difference from the current numbering to the first repetition).
If you do not check Use Existing Nodes, FEMAP will copy the elements that you selected, along with all nodes that
they reference. FEMAP will display the standard vector definition dialog box, just like in Mesh, Copy, Node to let
you define the direction and distance that you want to offset each copy. You do not have to create any nodes before
using this option. Further, unlike copying to existing nodes, it is independent of node or element numbering.
You probably will want to use this technique most of the time. When you do copy elements using this technique
however, each repetition gets its own set of nodes. This can result in duplicate, but coincident nodes, and a model
that is disconnected. You can connect the elements and eliminate the duplicate nodes with the Tools, Check, Coin-
cident Nodes command.
Parameters:
These options work just as they do in the Mesh, Copy, Node command. If you choose Use Current Settings, the
nodes and elements that are created will match the currently active parameters. For elements, this includes the
property ID, element type, color and layer. The one exception to this is if the active element type or active property
is incompatible with the elements that you are copying. In this case, the element type or property will still match
the original elements.
For example, if the active element type is a beam, and you are copying plates, FEMAP cannot make the plates into
beams and therefore makes the copies as plates - even though you specified Use Current Settings. If you choose
Match Original Entities, the copied element parameters will match the elements that were used to create them.
Repetitions:
By default this option is one. One repetition will create one copy of each selected element. If you want multiple
copies, just set this option to the number you want.
Match Loads, Constraints:
If you turn on this option, any loads or constraints that are attached to the selected elements (or associated nodes)
will also be copied and attached to the newly created mesh. If it is off, only the mesh will be copied.
For more information, see Section 5.4.1.1, "Mesh, Copy, Node...". This option is not available when you check Use
Existing Nodes.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Original Elements
Make 2 copies
onto existing nodes
with the Node Increment
set to 5.
13
14
15
16
Original Elements
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
17
18
19
20
Make 2 copies
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
along vector
5-56 Meshing
5.4.2 Mesh, Radial Copy Menu
The commands on this menu provide an alternative to the Mesh, Copy commands. Instead of copying all entities
along a constant vector, as those commands do, the Radial Copy commands use a different radial vector for each
entity to be copied.
When you choose one of these commands, you will be asked to select the entities to be copied, and to define the
generation options. This portion of the process is identical to the normal copy commands. Instead of defining a vec-
tor however, you will next choose a location which defines the center of the radial pattern. Finally, you must spec-
ify the radial offset length, the radial distance between each original and the associated copy.
FEMAP will compute a direction vector for each entity which runs from the
center that you chose, to the entity, as shown here.
In a three dimensional case, these commands are actually a spherical copy,
since the copy vector is computed from the center of the sphere
When you choose the Mesh, Radial Copy, Elements command, the radial vec-
tors are computed to each of the defining nodes. The copied nodes are then
simply reconnected to create the copied entities.
For more information regarding the specifics of using the various generation
options, see Section 5.4.1, "Mesh, Copy Menu".
5.4.3 Mesh, Scale Menu
The Mesh, Scale commands are very similar to the Mesh, Radial Copy commands. They create one or more copies
of selected entities, offset from a center location. In this case however, instead of specifying a constant offset from
the original, the new copy is formed by scaling the distance from the center to the original.
These commands start by selecting the entities to be copied, and defining the generation options. This portion of
the process is identical to the normal copy commands. Just as in the Mesh, Radial Copy commands, you next
choose a location which defines the center of the pattern. Finally, you must specify the scale factors.
Scaling can be done in one or more directions. By specifying the same scale factor in all three directions, a spheri-
cal copy can be made. A cylindrical copy can be accomplished by specifying the same factor in two directions, and
a unit (1.0) scale factor in the third direction - along the axis of the cylinder. For this type of operation, a coordinate
system can also be chosen if the axes of the desired cylinder do not coincide with the global axes.
FEMAP will compute a direction vector for each entity which runs from the center that you chose, to the entity, as
shown here.
In these commands, both the direction and magnitude of these vectors are
used. The direction is used to determine the original copy vector com-
ponents. These components are multiplied by the scale factors to calcu-
late the final offsets from the center location of the copy. If you use
different scale factors in different component directions, the copy will
not lie along the vector from the center to the original.
When you choose the Scale Elements, the associated nodes are scaled.
The scaled nodes are then simply reconnected to create the copied enti-
ties. For more information regarding the specifics of using the various
generation options, see Section 5.4.1, "Mesh, Copy Menu". For more
information on specifying scaling factor, see Section 5.4.3, "Mesh, Scale
Menu".
Note: If you use a scale factor of 1.0, the resulting copy will be located at the same location as the original in
that coordinate direction. Scale factors of (1.0, 1.0, 1.0) will result in a completely coincident copy of
the originals.
Copy
Original
Center
Offset Radial Vectors
Copy
Original
Scale=2.0
Center
Scale=2.0
Mesh, Rotate Menu 5-57
5.4.4 Mesh, Rotate Menu
Like the Mesh, Copy commands, these commands create duplicate copies of model entities. Instead of copying
along a vector, these commands rotate the duplicate copies around a vector.
5.4.4.1 Mesh, Rotate, Node...
... is similar to Mesh, Copy, Node in its operation. FEMAP displays the standard entity selection dialog box to allow
you to select the nodes to copy, followed by the same Generation Options dialog box. All of the options in this box
are used just as in the Move command.
Following the Generation Options dialog box, you will see the standard vector definition dialog box. This vector is
used to specify the axis that you want to rotate around to generate the copies. Unlike the Copy command, you do
not have to specify a length for this axis. Instead, after you choose the vector, FEMAP displays one additional dia-
log box that asks for the Change per Repetition. Following the Generation Options dialog box, you will see the
standard vector definition dialog box. This vector is used to specify the axis that you want to rotate around to gen-
erate the copies. Unlike the copy command, you do not have to specify a length for this axis. Instead, after you
choose the vector, FEMAP displays one additional dialog box that asks for the Change per Repetition.
You can specify both a Rotation Angle and a Translation Distance. Each copy is rotated around the axis of rotation
vector by the specified angle (following right-hand rule conventions), and is translated along the axis vector by
specified distance. If you specify a nonzero translation distance, you will be creating a spiral.
5.4.4.2 Mesh, Rotate, Element...
... is similar to Mesh Copy Element. In fact, if you choose the
Use Existing Nodes option there is no difference at all. If instead
you want to create rotated copies of nodes and elements, this
command follows the conventions of the Mesh, Rotate, Node
command.
It asks for a rotation axis, an angle and a translation distance, and
makes copies in rotated locations.
5.4.4.3 Mesh, Reflect Menu
The commands on this menu allow you to generate a portion of your model by reflecting or flipping existing nodes
or elements across a plane.
Axis of Revolution
Spiral created by rotating
with a nonzero translation
distance.
One original node.
Circle created by rotating
with translation distance
set to zero.
3 copies rotated
90 degrees each
around the normal
to this view
Original Elements
5-58 Meshing
5.4.4.4 Mesh, Reflect, Node...
... creates one copy of selected nodes by reflecting
them across a plane. You will use the standard entity
selection dialog box to choose the nodes to be
reflected. FEMAP will then display the Generation
Options dialog box (shown in the Mesh, Copy, Node
command). All options work identical to Mesh, Copy,
Node and Mesh, Rotate, Node commands, except you
cannot choose multiple repetitions.
In addition, you can specify a Trap Width. FEMAP
will not make a copy of any selected node if it is
closer to the reflection plane than the trap width that
you specify. If you set the trap width to zero, all of the
nodes that you select will be reflected. This option is used most often when reflecting elements (to join nodes on
the reflection plane), and will usually be zero when you reflect nodes.
Next, FEMAP will display the standard plane selection dialog box, so you can define the reflection plane. You can
choose any plane that you want. It does not matter how your selected nodes are oriented with respect to the plane.
They can be on one side, or they can be on both sides of the plane. Just remember that the reflected node will be
located on the opposite side of the plane from the original.
5.4.4.5 Mesh, Reflect, Element...
... is similar to the Mesh, Reflect, Nodes command described above. Here however, you will select elements to be
reflected across a plane. You must select the elements to be reflected, the reflection options, and the reflection
plane.
You can reflect onto existing nodes rather than across a plane by choosing the Use Existing Nodes option. This
option is somewhat misnamed however, since the generated copy is really not a reflection since its position is based
purely on the position of the nodes that you reflect onto - not on any position of the original elements. The only
difference between using this command and Mesh, Copy, Elements with existing nodes is that elements will have
their normals reversed just as if you had reflected the elements and nodes.
If you choose to reflect elements and nodes (by not turning on Use Existing Nodes), you can set the Trap Width to a
nonzero value to automatically join the new elements to the old. This will only work if some nodes from the origi-
nal elements lie within the Trap Width from the reflection plane.
5.5 Meshing by Extruding, Revolving, and Sweeping
The commands on the Extrude, Revolve, and Sweep menus allow you to convert a 2-D model (curves, elements or
element faces) into a 3-D model of planar or solid elements. They are very useful for 3-D solid parts which have a
consistent third dimension (whether it be an axis of rotation or a length). Details on these commands are explained
below.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10
11 12 13
14 15 16
17 18 19
20
Reflection Plane
Original Nodes Reflected Nodes
Reflection Plane
Original Elements Reflected Elements
Trap Width
Mesh, Extrude Menu 5-59
5.5.1 Mesh, Extrude Menu
The Mesh, Extrude menu allows you to select curves, elements or element faces, and then move (extrude) along a
specified vector to form the new elements. Extruding curves will form FEMAP planar (2-D) elements, while
extruding elements or element faces will form either planar elements (if 1-D elements or faces are extruded) or
solid element (if planar elements or faces are extruded).
5.5.1.1 Mesh, Extrude, Curve...
... creates planar elements by moving curves along a vector or curve. Before you choose this command, you must
define the mesh size, using the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size Along Curve command for the curves you select. The
mesh size will determine the number of elements created by each curve.
To begin, select the curves to extrude using the standard entity selection dialog box. Any type of curve can be
selected, and the curves do not have to form a closed or ordered boundary, however, the generated elements will
only be connected to each other at locations where the original curves were connected. Therefore, if you are trying
to generate a connected group of elements (with no coincident nodes) it is always best to select a connected bound-
ary in an ordered sequence around the boundary.
After you select the curves, you will see the Generation Options dialog box.This dialog box provides two methods
of creating your elements: (1) Standard, which simply uses this dialog box, and (2) Advanced, which is accessed by
pressing the Advanced>> button. Each of these methods are discussed below.
Standard Extrusion
Standard extrusions are used to simply extrude the curves a constant distance along a vector. You must choose the
property to be used for the planar elements and the total number of Elements along Length as shown in the above
dialog box. The type of elements that are created is based on the type of property that you select. For example,
choose a plate property to create plate elements, a laminate property to create laminate elements, and so on. If you
do not have any planar element properties, choose New Property to create one. Specify the number of elements that
you want along the extrusion vector in the Elements along Length box before you press OK.
Once you press OK, FEMAP will prompt you to specify the extrusion vector using the standard vector dialog
boxes. The vector can be located anywhere but must have the direction and magnitude that you want for the extru-
sion. The length of this vector will be the total length of the extruded elements. Also remember, the same vector
will be used for all selected curves so in general it should be relatively normal to the plane of the curves
(although the curves do not have to be planar).
The figure shows one example of extruding a connected set of curves.
Extrusion Vector
Mesh Size
along curves
Original Curves Extruded Elements
5-60 Meshing
Advanced Extrusion
The Advanced>> button provides access to the Generation Options dialog box for advanced extrusions. This dia-
log box controls the different methods of extrusion. Each area of the dialog box will be explained more fully below,
but first a quick explanation of the overall procedure is necessary.
Operation
The Advanced option can be used to extrude along one or more vectors or curves. You can specify mesh biasing for
the extrusion, as well as offsets from the original curves. The Offset and Along areas next to OK and Cancel pro-
vide status information on their current settings. If no method (Along or Follow Curve) has been specified, the OK
option will be grayed and Along will show Must Specify, as seen above.
The sample below shows a rectangle which was extruded into plate elements by extruding along a spline. You will
notice that the mesh both follows the spline, as well as gets finer in the area of curvature due to the specified mesh
sizing on the spline.
You can even do multi-level extrusions with different properties. The dialog box will continue to repeat each time
you press OK. Once the first extrusion is created, FEMAP will automatically update the offset so that it corre-
sponds to the location of the end of the previous extrusion. If you need to make several levels of extrusions with
different properties, simply input the appropriate parameters for each extrusion and pick a different property.
Property
For each extrusion, you must choose a planar property. If you do not have a planar property in your model, you can
press New Property to select one. You can create a multi-level extrusion of different properties simply by picking a
different property for each extrusion pass.
Extrusion Vectors
The four options in this section of the dialog box allow you to specify the vector for extrusion. There are two modes
of extrusion: Along a vector and Follow Curve. If you choose Along a vector, you must specify the vector through
the standard Vector Definition dialog box. The Follow Curve option requires selection of a curve.
The vector option provides access to the Extrusion Distance and Elements section of the dialog box to define the
length and mesh sizing. When you extrude along a curve, however, these options are grayed. The distance and
mesh sizing for the extrusion is obtained from the curve you selected to follow and its mesh spacing. Therefore, it
Note: FEMAP does not automatically merge coincident nodes of multi-level extrusions. There are times when
you may want to keep coincident nodes to simulate contact or other interface conditions. If you do want
to merge all coincident nodes, simply use the Tools, Check Coincident Nodes command after the extru-
sion is complete to merge the extrusions together.
Curve for Extrusion Path
Mesh Size Along Curves
Original Curves to Extrude
Extruded Plate Elements
Mesh, Extrude, Element... 5-61
is very important to define the mesh size on the selected curve before performing the extrusion to guarantee that
you get the desired mesh.
The Offset option allows you to specify an offset via the standard Vector Definition dialog box. This offset defines
the vector from the original curves to the start of the extrusion. Normally you will not specify offsets manually,
unless your curves are not located where you want to start the extrusion. If you are creating a multi-level extrusion,
the offsets will be automatically updated at the end of each individual extrusion, so that the next one starts where
the last one ended. If you want to create a discontinuous mesh, you can update the offsets manually before extrud-
ing again. If you want to remove any offset, simply press Reset Offset.
Extrusion Distance and Elements
If the extrusion is to take place along a vector, the Extrusion Distance and Elements area of the dialog box must be
specified. This section determines the overall length and mesh sizing of the extrusion. The mesh sizing is defined
similar to any mesh sizing on a curve. Simply specify the total number of elements and a bias factor. There are
three options available to define the total length of the extrusion:
1. Use Vector Length - uses the length of the vector that you defined for the total extrusion length.
2. Locate - The extrusion length is calculated from start of the extrusion to a defined location. If you choose this
method, you will be asked to define the location (with the standard coordinate dialog) when you press OK to cre-
ate the extrusion. If the location that you specify is not along the extrusion vector, it is projected onto that vector,
before the length is computed. This method is a good one to use if you are trying to match another existing mesh,
or geometry. You can simply pick nodes or points for the location to extrude to, without worrying about the
actual dimensions.
3. Distance - this method requires direct specification of the extrusion length. The vector length is ignored, in favor
of the distance you specify here. This method is a good one if you have a series of extrusions, along the same
vector, and you know the distances or stations where you want the extrusions to end. You never need to rede-
fine the vector, just keep specifying new distances.
5.5.1.2 Mesh, Extrude, Element...
... creates elements by extruding existing elements of a different type. Any line element or planar element can be
extruded. Line elements will extrude into quadrilateral plane elements. Triangular and quadrilateral plane elements
extrude into wedge and brick solids respectively. If you choose parabolic planar elements, they will create para-
bolic solids. Each element that you select will create one element at each step along the extrusion length.
The required input and procedure are similar to the Mesh, Extrude, Curve command. There are two modes of oper-
ation: (1) Standard, which simply uses the Generation Options dialog box shown here, and (2) Advanced, which is
accessed through the Advanced >> button. In either case, you must first select the elements to extrude, then specify
the extrusion parameters. Each of these methods is explained below.
Standard Extrusion
You may only select one type (line or planar) of elements for this command. The property that you select or create
must be of the correct type for the elements that you will create. Remember, if you selected line elements you will
Note: This command always creates linear elements, you cannot create parabolic elements simply by select-
ing a parabolic property. You can however convert the linear elements to parabolic elements after they
are created by using the Modify, Update Elements, Order command.
5-62 Meshing
need a property for planar elements. If you selected planar elements you will need a property for solid elements.
The Elements along Length parameter sets the number of elements that each original element will produce.
The new elements will use the color and layer of the original elements that you are extruding if you choose Match
Original Entities. If you choose Use Current Settings they will use the active color and layer. You also will want to
check the Delete Original Elements option if you want to automatically delete the original elements that are being
extruded. Finally, press OK and then define the extrusion vector using the standard Vector Definition dialog box.
The selected elements will be extruded along this vector direction. The magnitude of the vector will be the extru-
sion length.These pictures show two extrusions, one of line elements, the other of planar elements. Both used the
same extrusion vector. All elements are shown with element shrink turned on, so that you can see both the origi-
nal and generated elements.
Alternate Extrusion Methods
When you are extruding planar elements, you will have two additional methods available: extruding along the ele-
ment normal directions, and extruding along the element normal directions with thickness corrections. Both of
these methods use the normal vectors at each node to determine the extrusion direction. As shown here, this can be
used to quickly take a surface model and turn it into a solid element model.
The element normal method simply extrudes along the element normals by the extrusion length that you specify.
This method will result in the distance between all inner and outer nodes being equal to the extrusion length. In
areas where the planar elements are not coplanar however, the resulting element thicknesses will not be constant,
and in general will be less than the extrusion length. For this reason, it is usually best to choose the final method
that includes thickness corrections.
Extrusion vector
Extrude as Solids
Original Plate Elements
Extrude as Plates
5 elements
along length
4 elements
along length
Original Planar Elements
Extruded with
Thickness Correction
Mesh, Extrude, Element... 5-63
By choosing the Normals with Thickness Correction method, FEMAP attempts to adjust the extrusion length at
each node to make the resulting element thicknesses at that node equal to the extrusion length. This will typically
result in the distance between the inner and outer nodes being greater than the distance you specified.
If your plates are at the midplane of where you want the solids, you will have to use this command twice. One time,
you will specify a positive extrusion length (along the positive element normal). Then use a negative extrusion
length (along the negative element normal).
Advanced Extrusion
The Advanced>> option provides access to the Generation Options dialog box for advanced extrusions which con-
trols the different methods of extrusion. Each area of the dialog box is explained more fully below, but the overall
procedure is explained first.
Operation
The Advanced option can be used to extrude along a vector or curve. You can also specify mesh biasing for the
extrusion, as well as offsets from the original curves. The Offset and Along areas next to OK and Cancel provide
status information on their current settings. If no method (Along or Follow Curve) has been specified, the OK
option will be grayed and Along will show Must Specify, as seen above.
Note: It is up to you to prepare your plate elements with all of their normals pointing in a consistent direction
prior to using this command. FEMAP assumes you want to use the normal direction that you defined.
You can use Modify, Update Elements, Reverse or Tools, Check, Normals to adjust element normals.
The View Options command can be used to display normal vectors.
with thickness
without thickness correction
correction
Extrude
5-64 Meshing
The sample shows a rectangular plate mesh which was extruded into solid elements by extruding along a spline.
You will notice that the mesh both follows the spline, as well as gets finer in the area of curvature due to the speci-
fied mesh sizing on the spline.
You can even do multi-level extrusions with different properties. The dialog box will continue to repeat each time
you press OK. Once the first extrusion is created, FEMAP will automatically update the offset so that it corre-
sponds to the location at the end of the previous extrusion. If you need to make several levels of extrusions with dif-
ferent properties, simply input the appropriate parameters for each extrusion and pick the selected property.
Parameters
You can select whether the new entities will use current settings or match the values for the original entities. For
each extrusion, you must also choose a property. This must be either a planar property if extruding line elements, or
a solid property if extruding plate elements. If you do not have an appropriate property in your model, you can
press New Property to select one. You can create a multi-level extrusion of different properties simply by picking a
different property for each extrusion pass.
Extrusion Vectors
The four options in this section of the dialog box allow you to specify the vector for extrusion. There are two modes
of extrusion: along a vector and Follow Curve. If you choose Along a vector, you must specify the vector through
the standard Vector Definition dialog box. The Follow Curve option requires selection of a curve.
The vector option provides access to the Extrusion Distance and Elements section of the dialog box to define the
length and mesh sizing. When you extrude along a curve, however, these options are grayed. The distance and
mesh sizing for the extrusion is obtained from the curve you selected to follow and its mesh spacing. Therefore, it
is very important to define the mesh size on the selected curve before performing the extrusion to guarantee that
you get the desired mesh.
The Offset option allows you to specify an offset via the standard Vec-
tor Definition dialog box. This offset defines the vector from the origi-
nal curves to the start of the extrusion. Normally you will not specify
offsets manually, unless your curves are not located where you want to
start the extrusion. If you are creating a multi-level extrusion, the offsets will be automatically updated at the end of
each individual extrusion, so that the next one starts where the last one ended. If you want to create a discontinuous
mesh, you can update the offsets manually before extruding again. If you want to remove any offset, simply press
Reset Offset.
Note: FEMAP does not automatically merge coincident nodes of multilevel extrusions since there are times
when you want to keep coincident nodes to simulate contact or other interface conditions. If you do
want to merge all coincident nodes, simply use the Tools, Check, Coincident Nodes command after the
extrusion is complete to sew the extrusions together.
Hint: You can tell the current offset value and extrusion method by examining values of Offset and Along.
These values are dynamically updated every time you or FEMAP changes the information. The Offset
will either be No Offset, or the offset vector (x, y, z Global). The Along option will be Must Specify, the
extrusion vector (x, y, z Global), or the Curve ID. If Must Specify is the Along option, the OK button
will be grayed until you choose Along or Follow Curve to specify the extrusion method.
Solid Extruded Elements
Planar Elements
Curve for Extrusion Path
Mesh Size on Curve
Mesh, Extrude, Element Face... 5-65
Extrusion Distance and Elements
If the extrusion is to take place along a vector, the Extrusion Distance and Elements area of the dialog box must be
specified. This section determines the overall length and mesh sizing of the extrusion. The mesh sizing is defined
similar to any mesh sizing on a curve. Simply specify the total number of elements and a bias factor. There are
three options available to define the total length of the extrusion:
1. Use Vector Length - uses the length of the vector that you defined for the total extrusion length.
2. Locate - The extrusion length is calculated from start of the extrusion to a defined location. If you choose this
method, you will be asked to define the location (with the standard coordinate dialog) when you press OK to cre-
ate the extrusion. If the location that you specify is not along the extrusion vector, it is projected onto that vector,
before the length is computed. This method is a good one to use if you are trying to match another existing mesh,
or geometry. You can simply pick nodes or points for the location to extrude to, without worrying about the
actual dimensions.
3. Distance - this method requires direct specification of the extrusion length. The vector length is ignored, in favor
of the distance you specify here. This method is a good one if you have a series of extrusions, along the same
vector, and you know the distances or stations where you want the extrusions to end. You never need to rede-
fine the vector, just keep specifying new distances.
5.5.1.3 Mesh, Extrude, Element Face...
... creates elements by extruding faces of existing elements. Operation of this command is essentially the same as
Mesh, Extrude, Element described in the previous section. You pick the element faces, then edge faces are extruded
into planar elements, and planar faces are extruded into solid elements.
The primary difference between this command and simply extruding elements is the selection of the element faces.
You will see a dialog box similar to the following:
This dialog box allows you to select the faces that you want to extrude. You can simply graphically pick faces one
at a time and they will be added to the list, or you can press Multiple and choose multiple faces in the same ways
that you can when applying loads to element faces (refer to the Model, Load Elemental command for more info).
Delete and Reset allow you to remove faces from the list. Before pressing Delete, select the face you want to
remove. You may not select more than one face type - you can not select both planar faces and edges in the same
command.
Once faces have been selected, other options are the same as for extruding elements.
5.5.2 Mesh, Revolve Menu
The Mesh, Revolve commands are very similar to the Mesh, Extrude commands - they take existing curves, ele-
ments or element faces and create additional planar or solid elements. In this case however, the original elements
are rotated (revolved) around an axis vector, rather than being translated along the vector as in the Extrude com-
mands. The other major difference is that there are no Advanced options available for the Mesh, Revolve com-
mands.
5.5.2.1 Mesh, Revolve, Curve...
... creates planar elements by revolving curves around a vector. Before you choose this command, define the mesh
size along the curves that you will select. The mesh size will determine the number of elements created by each
curve. Use the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size Along Curve command to define these sizes.
5-66 Meshing
To begin, you select the curves to revolve using the standard entity selection dialog box. Any type of curve can be
selected, and the curves do not have to form a closed or ordered boundary. However, the generated elements will
only be connected to each other at locations where the original curves were connected. Therefore, if you are trying
to generate a connected group of elements (with no coincident nodes) it is always best to select a connected bound-
ary in an ordered sequence around the boundary.
You should not select any curves that cross the vector that you plan to revolve around. If you do, those curves will
generate twisted elements since each end of the curve would revolve in a different direction. This command makes
no allowance for generating triangular elements in the middle of a curve to eliminate this restriction. You can, on
the other hand, choose curves that have endpoints on the axis of revolution. These curves will automatically create
triangular elements (instead of quadrilaterals) at those endpoints.
After you have selected the curves to revolve, you must specify the generation options. This is identical to the
Mesh, Extrude, Curves command (see Section 5.5.1.1, "Mesh, Extrude, Curve..."). Next, the standard vector dialog
box is used to define the axis of revolution. Unlike the extrude commands, the magnitude of this vector is not
important, but its location and direction are important. The relationship between the location of the vector and the
curves you selected determines how the elements will be created.
Finally, you must specify the angle of rotation and the distance to translate along the axis of revolution. These val-
ues are just like those specified for the Mesh, Rotate commands, except you specify the total angle and total dis-
tance, not the values per iteration. The picture shows the result of revolving a series of curves (no translation
distance was specified).
5.5.2.2 Mesh, Revolve, Element...
... creates planar or solid elements by revolving existing elements around a vector - the axis of revolution. Line and
planar elements can be revolved, but you can only choose one type in a single command. Line elements will create
planar elements and planar elements will create solids as they are revolved.
Using this command is essentially the same as the Mesh, Revolve, Curve command. First, choose the elements to
revolve. Second, set the generation options using the dialog box shown in the Mesh, Extrude, Elements command.
Next, define the axis of revolution using the vector definition dialog boxes. Remember, only the location and direc-
tion of this vector are important for this command.
It is important to specify an axis that is properly positioned relative to the elements you selected. In general, it
should be defined so elements will be revolved normal to their current positions. If you choose other locations or
directions, it can result in badly shaped elements. In extreme cases like revolving plates in their own plane, this
command will fail and will not create new elements.
Quadrilateral Elements
Mesh Size controls
elements along curves
Axis of Revolution
Triangular
Elements
Original curves
9 elements along length
of revolution
Mesh, Revolve, Element Face... 5-67
Finally, set the total rotation angle, and the translation distance (along the axis of revolution). Both of these quanti-
ties are input as the total values for the entire revolution.
5.5.2.3 Mesh, Revolve, Element Face...
... creates elements by revolving faces of existing elements. Operation of this command is essentially the same as
Mesh, Revolve, Element described in the previous section. You pick the element faces, then edge faces are
extruded into planar elements, and planar faces are extruded into solid elements.
Refer to the Mesh, Extrude, Element Face command for more information on picking the faces to be revolved.
5.5.3 Mesh, Sweep
The Mesh, Sweep menu allows you to select curves, elements or element faces, and then sweep them along one or
more curves to form the new elements. Sweeping curves will form FEMAP planar (2-D) elements, while sweeping
elements or faces will form either planar elements (if 1-D elements are swept) or solid elements (if planar elements
are swept).
Like the Advanced, Follow Curve option for the Mesh, Extrude commands, the curves or elements are swept along
a curve. The Mesh, Sweep commands, however, keep the edge of the new elements tangent to the curve. The edges
of elements generated with the Mesh, Extrude commands remain parallel to the edge of the curve but are not tan-
gent to it.
The menu includes three commands:
Mesh, Sweep, Curve: Any type of curve can be selected, and the curves do not have to form a closed or ordered
boundary. The generated elements, however, will only be connected to each other at locations where the origi-
nal curves were connected. Therefore, if you are trying to generate a connected group of elements (with no
coincident nodes) it is always best to select a connected boundary in an ordered sequence around the boundary.
Revolve into Plates Line Elements
Revolve into Solids Plate Elements
Axis of
Revolution
Axis of
Revolution
Quads revolve
into Bricks
Triangles revolve
into Wedges
Quads on axis revolve
into Wedges
Quads with one
corner on axis
are split into
two triangles
and revolve
into 4 tetras
X
Y
Z
X
Y
Z
5-68 Meshing
Mesh, Sweep, Element: Any line element or planar element can be selected. Line elements will be swept into
quadrilateral plane elements. Triangular and quadrilateral plane elements sweep into wedge and brick solids,
respectively. If you choose parabolic planar elements, they will create parabolic solids. Each element that you
select will create one element at each step along the length of the curve.
Mesh, Sweep, Element Face: This command is very similar to Mesh, Sweep, Element but instead of selecting
entire elements, only element faces are selected. Refer to the Mesh, Extrude Element Face command for infor-
mation on face selection.
Sweeping Curves and Elements
Use the following procedure to sweep curves and elements:
1. Before you pick the Sweep command, define the mesh size using the Mesh, Mesh Control, Size Along Curve
command for the curves (both the curves to sweep and the curve to sweep along). The mesh size will determine
the number of elements created for each curve.
2. Pick the Mesh, Sweep, Curve or Mesh, Sweep, Element command.
3. Select the curves or elements to sweep using the standard entity selection dialog box.
4. Select the curve(s) to sweep along.
5. You will next see the the Generation Options
dialog box. To use the active element color and
layer for the new elements, pick Use Current Set-
ting. To use the color and layer of the original ele-
ments that you are sweeping, pick Match Original
Entities.
6. Pick the Property for the elements that will be
created. For curves and line elements to sweep,
pick a plane element property. For plane elements
to sweep, pick a solid element property.
7. If the curve to sweep along is planar, you do not
need to pick any additional options. If the curve to
sweep along is not planar, you can pick an Align-
ment Curve. Once you pick OK, you will be
prompted for the curve. If you dont choose an alignment curve, you will prompted to pick a reference point. The
elements will be oriented toward either the point or curve(s) that you select. For examples, see "Sweeping Along
a Non-Planar Curve".
Sweeping Along a Non-Planar Curve
If you are sweeping along a non-planar curve, you must use either a reference point or alignment curve to orient the
elements along the curve.
X
Y
Z
V1
X
Y
Z
V1
Mesh, Sweep 5-69
The figure shows how two curves are swept along an out of plane curve. Note how the orientation of the elements
stays relative to the alignment curve.
Sometimes you may prefer to use a reference point. However, poor placement of either an reference point or align-
ment curve can cause problems with the element orientation. In the example below, note how the element orienta-
tions are twisted.
X
Y
Z
V1
X
Y
Z
V1
Curves to Sweep
Alignment Curve
X
Y
Z
V1
X
Y
Z
V1
Twisted Elements Reference Point
Curves to Sweep
5-70 Meshing
6. Viewing Your Model
In addition to the numerous pre-and post-processing options provided by FEMAP, FEMAP also provides a wide
array of viewing options that play a key role in increasing your FEA productivity. The options and methods for
controlling how your model is displayed on screen can be divided into two broad categories:
View and Window menu commands
groups and layers
Each of these areas and their associated commands are discussed more fully below.
The commands on this menu control the display of your model on your computer monitor, on printed/plotted out-
put, and in graphical data which is saved or transferred to other applications. Additionally, these commands help
you to create and manage the graphical windows on your screen.
FEMAP uses the term view to refer to the combination of the graphics window and all of the options that define
what, how, and where your model will be displayed. FEMAP Views are stored with your model database. They can
be either active or inactive. Active views are associated with an on-screen window. Inactive views are not currently
displayed on your screen, but can be activated at any time you choose. Only non-iconic active views can be modi-
fied.
The View menu is separated into five partitions. The first partition contains commands pertaining to creating and
activating vies and multiple view manipulation. The second partition is view selection and options. Each of these
areas is described more fully below. See Section 6.1, "View Activation, Management, and Options"
The third through fifth sections all involve modifying the view, whether it be through magnification, rotation, etc.
These topics are discussed further in Section 6.2, "Modifying the View".
6.1 View Activation, Management, and Options
These commands allow you to:
set which view is the Active View in FEMAP and wether only the Active View or All Views will be
effected by changes.
set the Background colors and options
manage Layers in your FEMAP model
instruct FEMAP what type of plot to show (XY Plot, Deformation, Contour, Free Edge Plot, Model Only, etc.)
control viewing options for individual entity types (Labels, Colors, Show/do not show, etc.), tools and view
styles (Filled Edges, Transparency, View Axes and Legend, etc.), and Postprocessing (Deformed Style, Con-
tour/Criteria Levels and Legend, Beam Diagrams, XY Plot options, etc.)
use advanced post-processing options (Control Animations, Dynamic Cutting Plane, Dynamic IsoSurface, etc.)
6.1.1 View, Set...
... allows you to change the name of the current view or create a new view which will become the active view when
created. The active view will change every time a view is picked from the View, Set list. In order to view any or all
of the views in the View, Set list, use the Window, New Window command, select Load Views option, then select the
view(s) you would like be visible (To select multiple views, hold down the Ctrl key while picking from the list).
Once these views are visible, you can toggle between the views using the clicking on the appropriate tab at the top
of the window. You can also use the Window, Tile Horizontal; Window, Tile Vertical; and Window, Cascade com-
mands to position multiple views on the screen at once.
Please refer to Section 6.3.1.1, "Window, New Window...", Section 6.3.1.3, "Window, Tile Horizontal", Section
6.3.1.4, "Window, Tile Vertical", and Section 6.3.1.5, "Window, Cascade" for more information on these com-
mands.
6-2 Viewing Your Model
6.1.2 View, All Views...
... alternately turns the All Views switch on and off. When the All Views switch is on, a check mark will appear in
the menu beside this command. No input is required for this command.
When All Views is off, only one window, the active one, will be redrawn or modified. The active window is always
the one that you last selected. If you do nothing else, the last window that you activated will still be active. Simply
clicking with the left mouse button in a graphics window will select it as the active graphics window. You can also
tell the active window by the arrow pointers that are place around its title (assuming you have title bars turned
on).
When All Views is on, FEMAP will redraw all of the on-screen windows. Similarly, the other view-related com-
mands will update all of the on-screen windows which are not minimized (turned into icons). You can therefore
limit updates to a selected set of windows simply by minimizing the others and then turning All Views on, prior to
making the modification. After you make the changes you want, you can restore the iconic windows to their origi-
nal size and position.
Instead of using this command, the same All Views switch can also be controlled from the various dialog boxes
which are displayed by the other View commands. You will see a check box named All Views in the upper right cor-
ner of each dialog box. If the box is checked, All Views is on - all of the on-screen, non-iconic views will be
updated.
6.1.3 View, Background...
... controls the background color of the on-screen window.
Using the View, Background command
you can set the background color for your
graphics windows. If you choose Trans-
parent, FEMAP will simply not draw the
background. If you use overlapping win-
dows, you can see graphics in one win-
dow, even though they are behind
another window with a transparent back-
ground. This option should only be chosen
for final images and special effects. If you
move or resize a window that has a trans-
parent background, the resulting image
can be very strange since FEMAP does not
properly erase the background. This
option does not work for Render Mode
graphics.
You can select a solid background color. In this case, the color that you select fills the entire window background
prior to drawing your model. You should normally pick a color for your background which is a solid (non-dithered)
color. You can pick any color, but dithered colors can make it difficult to see your model. New models created with
FEMAP models and Neutral files from previous versions (version 8.3 and below) will be brought in with their exit-
ing background colors.
The default setting for new models is the shaded background (option 0..Vertical). There are 9 different options for a
shaded back ground in FEMAP:
Vertical - The background color is shaded smoothly from the selected Top Color to the selected Bottom Color.
Horizontal - The background color is shaded smoothly from left to right using the selected Top Color (left) to the
selected Bottom Color (right).
Diagonal Up - The background color is shaded smoothly from lower left corner to upper right corner using the
selected Top Color (lower left corner) to the selected Bottom Color (upper right corner).
Diagonal Down - The background color is shaded smoothly from upper left corner to lower right corner using the
selected Top Color (upper left corner) to the selected Bottom Color (lower right corner).
Alt+F7
View, Background... 6-3
Square Spot - The background color is shaded smoothly from a square spot at the center of the screen (Top Color)
to the 4 corners of the window using an X shape that stretches to each corner.
Circular Spot - The background color is shaded smoothly from a circular spot at the center of the screen (Top
Color) to the outer edges of the graphics window.
Horizon - The background color is shaded smoothly from the top of the screen (Top Color) to the bottom of the
screen (Bottom Color) with the middle of the screen being the Middle Color. The position of the middle color is
determined by the horizon % (The horizon percentage goes from 0-100% with 0% at the top of the screen and
100% being the bottom of the screen).
Bitmap - The background color is solid (Top Color) and the Bitmap image selected in the Background field of the
Background Bitmaps section of the View and Graphics Preferences dialog box. The bitmap is centered and shown
in the resolution selected in the Background Bitmaps section of the View and Graphics Preferences dialog box. For
more information, see Section 2.6.2.2, "Views".
Stretched Bitmap - The Bitmap image selected in the Background field of the Background Bitmaps section of the
View and Graphics Preferences dialog box is stretched to fit the entire graphics window. For more information, see
Section 2.6.2.2, "Views"
Hidden line displays will use the average color for the fill color. This option is only available in Render Mode
graphics. If you print the screen using swap black and white and printer/plotter resolution, the background will not
be shaded in the printed version.
Logo
This section allows you to show a bitmap logo anywhere in the graphics window.
Show Bitmap - When on, shows the Bitmap image specified in Logo field of the Background Bitmaps section of
the View and Graphics Preferences dialog box in the chosen position in the main graphics window. For more infor-
mation, see Section 2.6.2.2, "Views".
Logo Location - Allows you to position the logo anywhere in the graphics window, by selecting a position for the
center of the bitmap. The entire logo will always be shown, so positioning the logo in the corner of the graphics
window is accomplished by clicking at any point close to the desired corner.
Note: FEMAP will try to make the background of the logo bitmap transparent. In order to do this, FEMAP
takes the color of the pixel located in lower left corner of the logo and makes that color transparent for
the entire logo. If you would like the background of your logo to appear (as in the picture above),
change the pixel in the lower left corner to a color that is not in the logo.
Location of Pixel
which determines
color of logo
transparency
View, Layers... 6-5
6.1.4 View, Layers...
... allows you to control which layers will be active for display.
The default settings are to Show All Layers. If you want to only show selected layers, change to Show Visible Lay-
ers Only, and then move the layers that you want to the Visible Layers list. The Show, Show All, Hide and Hide All
buttons simply move the layers between the Hidden and Visible lists. To move a single layer, select it in the appro-
priate box, then press Show or Hide. Alternatively, just double-click the layer and it will move to the other list.
If you turn on Show Changes (and
Show Visible Layers Only) while
you are moving layers between
Hidden and Visible, you will imme-
diately see the graphical effect on
the screen. Your view will be auto-
matically updated to reflect the
new set of Visible layers.
In addition to controlling your dis-
play, visible layers also control
entity selection. Only entities on
visible layers and which are not on
the NoPick Layer can be selected
graphically. With the Active Layer
option, you can also select the layer
that will be used for entity creation.
You may also use the View Layer option to create a new layer. The View Layers command can also be accessed
from the toolbar.
6.1.5 View, Select and View, Options
This section of the menu contains two of the most often used commands in FEMAP: View, Select and View,
Options. View, Select controls the top level display options. With View, Select, you can control whether your model
is displayed in hidden line or plain wireframe mode, turn on and off stress contours, animations, and deformed
plots, etc.
View, Options provides detailed control over how entities are displayed, i.e. what color elements are drawn with,
whether or not labels for nodes are displayed, whether or not perspective is turned on, etc. View, Options also pro-
vides extensive control over post-processing display options that are more fully described in the post-processing
section of this manual.
Note: When post-processing with a logo in a corner, the contour legend can be positioned and shrunk using
the View, Options command so the logo and the contour legend do not overlap. For more information,
see Section 8.3.11, "Contour/Criteria Legend..."
Note: Entities used for solid geometry construction (such as a boundary surface for an extrusion) are automat-
ically moved onto the Construction Layer, which is the default for the NoPick Layer. FEMAP moves
construction geometry onto this layer to prevent it from being selected for load or constraint applica-
tion. If you need to access this geometry, change the NoPick Layer and you will be able to graphically
select these entities. Be careful when doing this however, since this geometry may occupy the identical
space as a solid face or edge.
6.1.5.1 View, Select...
... chooses what will be displayed in a view. You can select both the type of display, and the model or postprocess-
ing data which will be displayed.
The View Select dialog box is divided into several sections:
The XY Style and Model Style buttons comprise the first section. These options choose the method for display.
You can choose any one option from these two groups of styles. If you choose a model style, your model will be
displayed in the view, using all of the other options you choose. If instead you choose an XY style, the view will
contain a 2D, XY plot of the selected output data or function. XY styles are only available when you have out-
put data available for post-processing (or functions).
For information on model style, see Section 6.1.5.2, "Choosing a Model Style". For information on XY style,
see Section 8.2.3, "Choosing an XY Style".
The second section of the dialog box consists of the Deformed Style and Contour Style option buttons. Here you
can choose one option from each category to define the type of post-processing display that you want to have.
The default settings (None-Model Only) are used to create a normal model display which does not use any out-
put data for post-processing. The settings of these options are ignored if you choose an XY style. For more
information, see Section 8.2.2, "Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles".
The final section of the dialog box, located under the previous sections, consists of the XY Data, Model Data,
and Deformed and Contour Data buttons. Each of these buttons displays an additional dialog box that allows
you to select the model or output data that will be used in the view. You can select data using any of these but-
tons, but it will not be used until you also select the appropriate styles, as described above.
For more information, see Section 8.2.3, "Choosing an XY Style", Section 6.1.5.2, "Choosing a Model Style",
or Section 8.2.2, "Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles".
6.1.5.2 Choosing a Model Style
FEMAP provides numerous styles in which you can display your model. Each style provides certain benefits.
Choice of the best style depends upon what you need to accomplish. The following table describes all of the styles,
their advantages and disadvantages:
Ctrl+S or F5
Choosing a Model Style 6-7
The pictures, below, show examples of the various model styles.
Although the hidden line removal options do require substantial calculations, and are therefore somewhat slower,
they can often be the best approach to understanding a complex model. This is especially true for 3D models. After
you make the first hidden line display, FEMAP retains a display list of the sorted information. This dramatically
speeds up redrawing hidden line views.
For more information, see Section 6.3.2.1, "Window, Redraw..." and Section 6.3.2.2, "Window, Regenerate...".
Style Description Advantages Disadvantages
Draw
Model
Simply displays all enti-
ties.
Fast. Everything visible. Usually
best working mode. Good for
screen selection.
Complex 3D models can be hard to
visualize. Entities drawn on top of
each other may make it difficult to
locate a particular detail.
Features Draws all entities. Lines of
the same color, which
overlap, alternately draw
and erase themselves.
Fast. Results in a plot which only
shows color boundaries. With
proper color assignments can
show property or material bound-
aries.
Not usually appropriate for screen
selection. Resulting display
depends on your color choices.
Quick
Hidden
Line
Sorts all elements, then
displays from the back of
view. Only shows entities
which are visible - hidden
lines are removed.
Good for final display and visual-
ization of complex 3D models.
Can be helpful for screen selec-
tion in complicated models.
Fairly Slow. Not usually best for
picking - many entities are not visi-
ble. Does not properly remove hid-
den lines for some elements (see
Full Hidden Line).
Full
Hidden
Line
Same as Quick Hidden
Line, but does additional
checking to properly
remove all hidden lines.
Same as Quick Hidden Line. Slow.
Free
Edge
Finds and displays all ele-
ment edges which do not
join to another element.
Can quickly point out holes or
disconnections in your model.
Not appropriate as a working mode.
Really just intended for checking
your model.
Free
Face
Finds and displays all ele-
ment faces which do not
join to another element.
Can quickly point out disconnec-
tions between solid elements.
Reduces complexity of solid
model plots. Can help to find
duplicate plate elements.
Usually not used for a working
mode. Intended for checking
model.
Hidden Line Draw Model
Free Face Free Edge
For solid element models, you can also use the Free Face option to simulate a hidden line
view. In fact, you can even use this mode to show hidden lines in a different line style (like
dashed), instead of removing them. To remove backfaces, use the Fill, Backfaces and Hid-
den option, in the View, Options command, and chose one of the Skip methods. Choose the
Show All Faces method to show hidden lines as a different color/style, then go to the Free
Edge and Face options and set the Free Edge Color to Use View Color. Finally, choose the
color and line style you want to use.
Selecting Data for a Model Style
You can control what portions of your model
are displayed by any of the model styles by
pressing the Model Data button. The Select
Model Data for View dialog box will then be
displayed.
Here you can choose the load set, constraint
set, and group that will be displayed in the
view. By default, whatever load and con-
straint set you activate will be displayed. You
can however eliminate loads and/or con-
straints by choosing the None options, or you
can select a particular set for display whether
or not it is active. If you choose the Select
option, you must specify an existing set in the
appropriate drop-down list.
By default, your entire model will always be
displayed. Since the Group option is set to
None, activating a group will not change the display. This enables you to activate a group and then graphically
select entities, from your entire model, into the group. If you want to display only a portion of your model, switch
this option to either Active or Select. Then only the entities which are in the appropriate group will be displayed.
The final section of this dialog box, Function, is used to select the function that will be displayed when you choose
the XY of Function display style. Even though this is obviously an XY plot, you must choose the function to be dis-
played from this dialog because it is a display of model information, not post-processing information like other XY
plotting styles.
Quickly Choosing Model Data
In addition to using the View, Select command, you can also access the Model Data dialog box directly from the
Quick Access menu. Just press the right mouse button while you are pointing inside any graphics window, and
choose Model Data. You can also get to this dialog box by pressing Ctrl+F5.
Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles
When you want to graphically post-process model output, you must choose one of the deformed or contour styles,
in addition to a model style. Choosing None for either of these options disables that type of postprocessing. You
will use None any time you just want to display your model. If you want to display a combined post-processing
view, for example, a Deformed Contour, just choose both a deformed and a contour style. For more information on
the options available and overall general post-processing capability, see Section 8, "Post-Processing".
6.1.5.3 View, Options...
...controls how your model (or XY plot) is displayed in a view. You can control whether entities are displayed,
labelling, colors, and hundreds of other options. You can also control the display of non-model entities, such as the
view origin, workplane, and snap grid. Finally, this command controls all of the graphical post-processing options.
Ctrl+O or F6
View, Options... 6-9
All of these different options are controlled from the View Options dialog box. There are three basic parts to this
dialog box. The Category option buttons choose the type of view options that you want to update. When you
choose a category, the Options list is automatically updated. This list displays all View options that you can update
for each category. You may have to scroll through the list, using the scroll bar, to see all of available options.
To modify an option, simply select it from the list. You can do this either by pointing at it with the cursor and click-
ing the left mouse button, or by pressing the direction keys. As you select an option, the right side of the dialog box
is updated. It displays various controls which allow you to set the option. The current option settings are loaded as
the defaults.
The Standard View Option Settings
There are eight standard controls which appear in the right side of the View Options dialog box. If the option you
select does not need a particular control, that control will not be visible. In fact, none of the options use all eight
controls, and most only use a few.
The titles of the controls change depending on the option being updated. Each control however, has a similar func-
tion for all view options. We will therefore describe them in terms of overall titles. You can refer to the table at the
end of this section for more detailed information on the settings that can be chosen for each option. That table also
shows the titles for any controls that do not control the standard functions that are described here.
In order, from top to bottom, down the right side of the dialog box, the controls are:
Draw Check Box:
If this control is checked, the related entities will be drawn, otherwise they will be skipped. Some view options use
this control to turn something else on or off. Examples include label prefixes, line elements in a free edge check,
element shrinking, and filling.
Double -licking the associated item in the Options list will toggle this control on and off.
Label List:
This list box is usually used to choose the labelling mode for entities. You can choose to turn all labels off, to label
by ID, and many other settings. For certain view options, this list is used for other label-related options. Examples
include font selections, label or legend positioning, and symbol sizing.
Color Mode List:
This list box controls how an entity color will be chosen. If you pick Entity Colors, the colors that you assigned to
each entity will be displayed. If you pick Use View Color, the single color that you specify in the View Color con-
Choose category
to change between
option lists
Choose option
to display or
change settings
Scroll down for
more options
trol will be used. Choosing Use Layer Color will result in each entity being displayed with the color of the layer
that it references. Depending on the view option you are updating, other settings are also available. Still other view
options use this list to control settings like the legend style, XY curve style, or light source position for shading.
View Color and Palette:
Typically, this text box defines a single color for the selected entity option. To use this color, you must also choose
the Use View Color setting from the Color Mode list. You can either type a color ID in the text box, or press Palette
to select the color graphically.
Additional Text Boxes:
Below the View Color controls, there are two additional controls which are used to specify other numeric settings.
Examples of this include scale factors, animation frames, shrink and lighting percentages, minimum and maximum
criteria limits, and the view aspect ratio. Most options do not use these text boxes.
Command Button:
A few view options display an additional command button (located directly above Apply). Pushing this button will
display other dialog boxes. The options that use these buttons are described later in this section.
Setting Multiple View Options
Updating a view option is simple. You choose the category and option that you want to modify, and then change the
available settings in the other controls. To modify other view options, just repeat the process. Pick a new Category,
if necessary, and a new Option. Then change those settings. You can repeat this as many times as you want.
Previewing and Cancelling Your Selections
If you would like to see the effect of your changes, press Apply. This will redraw the current view, using the new
settings. If you decide that you did not like the changes, just press Cancel to leave the dialog box. This will auto-
matically restore all view options to their prior settings. To save your changes, you must press OK.
Using Quick Options
There are times that you will want to quickly update many different options. If you press Quick Options, you will
see the View Quick Options dialog box.
You can choose any of the
command buttons on this
dialog box to instantly set all
of the related view options,
or you can individually con-
trol which entities will be
drawn using the check boxes
on the left. When you are fin-
ished, press Done. FEMAP
will return to the View
Options dialog box, where
you can make further updates
or review your selections.
Other than Reset, the quick
option buttons only update
the options from the Labels,
Entities, and Color category.
.
.
.
.
The table describes the functions performed by each of the quick options command buttons:
Quick Access to Quick Options- Ctrl+Q or Shift+F6
You can also access the Quick Options dialog box without using the View Options command by pressing Ctrl+Q or
Shift+F6. Changes made in this manner, however, cannot be cancelled.
View Options Categories
As described above, FEMAP splits the view options into three categories. Each category contains related options.
Quick Option Button Function
All Entities on Turns Draw Entity check box on for all options.
All Entities off Turns Draw Entity check box off for all options.
Geometry on Turns Draw Entity check box on for points, curves...
Geometry off Turns Draw Entity check box off for points, curves...
Analysis Entities on Turns Draw Entity check box on for nodes, elements...
Analysis Entities off Turns Draw Entity check box off for nodes, elements...
Labels on Changes Label mode to ID for all options.
Labels off Changes Label mode to No Labels for all options.
Entity Colors Changes Color mode to Entity Colors for all options.
View Colors Changes Color mode to View Colors for all options.
Note: The following buttons change the entire view (selections, alignment, magnifica-
tion, etc.), not just the view options.
Reset View Resets the entire view to FEMAP defaults.
Load View Updates the current view by restoring from the View library.
Save View Store the current view in the View library
The Labels, Entities, and Color category contains all of the options that control the display of model entities. With
these options, you choose whether entities will be drawn, if and how they will be labeled, and what colors will be
used. Entity label sizes and styles are further controlled by the Label Parameter option that is also in this category.
Other entity-related view options can also be found here. For example, you can control the display of element
direction arrows, offsets, and orientation vectors, among others.
The Tools and View Style category contains the options that control whether tools, like the workplane and snap grid,
will be displayed. This category also contains options that control the style of the view. For example, you can
choose, free edge settings, element filling, shading, perspective, and stereo options. Each of these will change the
overall style of the view. Finally, you will find options in this category to control view-related items, such as the
legend, origin, and view axes.
The final category, PostProcessing, controls all of the graphical postprocessing options. These include all of the
options for deformed, animated, vector, contour, criteria, and XY plots. None, of these options, has any impact,
unless you have selected one of the post-processing options through the View, Select command.
Additional Comments on View Options
Options that are not self-explanatory are described in the following paragraphs. Post-processing related items will
be further explained in Section 8, "Post-Processing".
Labels, Entities and Color Options
Label Parameters
This option controls the format of all labels in your view. If you turn the prefix on, entity labels will be preceded by
a single letter prefix which will identify the entity type. For example, Node 1 will be labeled N1, Element 23 will
be labelled E23. With the prefix turned off only the number will be used. You can choose any of the listed fonts.
Larger fonts can be easier to read for simple models, but often obliterate each other on complex models. The font
must be available to Windows before you can use it.
The first two color mode options, Entity Colors and Use View Color, just draw the label. Label colors either match
the entities that they are labelling, or else all labels are drawn using the single view color. The final two options,
Entity, Erase Back and View, Erase Back, choose the label color, in the same way as the first two options. If you
pick one of these options however, FEMAP will erase the area where the label will be drawn, prior to drawing the
label. If you are labelling filled areas, it is often good to choose one of these final options - they are easier to read.
In fact if you do not, you will not be able to see any labels that use the same color as the filled area.
Render Offset enables you to control how much labels are pulled forward in Render mode. As OpenGL uses depth
buffering, labels can be covered or partially covered by other drawn entities. The Render Offset is a multiple of the
font height. A value of 1 will correctly label elements that have a slope of up to 45 degrees to the screen. If ele-
ments have a steeper slope to the screen, a higher value may be required.
Coordinate System...
. . . controls the display of user defined coordinate systems only. This is not used for the global (or view) axes. Use
the View Axes display option to update those axes.
There are several options for displaying user-defined coordinate systems using the Label and Color modes. Labels
can be shown for the axes, coordinate system ID, both (default), or no labels at all. The axes can be shown as lines
without arrows (default), with arrows, or as Solid arrows. There are four color options for each arrow option,
Entity Color (default), View Color, Layer Color, or RGB (Red, Green, Blue). Here are some examples.
Note: If the labels appear fine on the screen but are not printed properly, it is probably because your Windows
printer driver does not support that font. Simply change the font and reprint.
Point, Curve, Surface, Boundary, Volume,...
... controls the display of these entities. You can choose a color mode, label mode (typically ID), and whether to
draw the entity.
Points can be labelled with their defined mesh size. In this case, any point that has a size defined will be labelled
with the size value. Points which have no size defined will not be labelled. Points can be drawn as + symbols or
dots - refer to the Symbols options.
You can also label all of these entities with their mesh attributes instead of an ID.
Curve - Mesh Size...
... controls the display of mesh symbols and labels along curves. The default setting, Symbols Only, will only dis-
play symbols on curves which have a mesh size defined along the curve. If a mesh size is implied from point or
default mesh sizes, it will not be shown.
The second labelling option, Size and Bias, works similarly. In this case however, numeric values for the number of
elements along the curve and the bias are shown. The bias value is not displayed when it is 1.0 (a uniform mesh).
The third labelling option, Symbols (all curves), will display symbols on every curve. If no mesh size is defined
along the curve, the size will be determined from point and default sizes. The final labeling option, Symbols and
Count will show symbols as well as a numeric value for the number of elements for all curves that have a mesh size
set.
Text...
. . . controls the display of text. You can eliminate certain types of text from the view by choosing one of the visibil-
ity settings.
Node...
. . . controls display of nodes. Nodes can be drawn as either an X symbol or as dots - refer to the Symbols options.
Nodes can be labeled using ID, Definition Coordinate System, Output Coordinate System, or Superelement ID.
Node - Perm Constraint...
If you have permanent constraints applied to one or more of your nodes, these settings will determine whether or
not they are displayed. If the Constraint view option is also on, permanent constraints will be combined with the
nodal constraints at any node where both exist. You will be unable to distinguish graphically which degrees of free-
dom are permanent constraints, and which are nodal. To make that determination, you must turn one of the options
off.
ID and Axes Labels, Entity Color Line
ID Labels only, View Color Arrow
No Labels, Layer Color Arrow Axes Labels only, RGB Solid
Element...
... controls the display of elements. There are several different options for labeling (ID, Property, Material, Type,
ID/Property/Material, and Layer), and color (Entity, View, Layer, Property, and Material) modes. Refer to the next
several options for additional information on elements.
Element - Directions
If this option is turned on, FEMAP will display an arrowhead on one element side, or a vector normal to the ele-
ment (planar elements only). If you choose the Right-Hand Rule Normal Style, the arrowhead indicates the direc-
tion of the element connectivity. For line elements, the arrowhead points at the second node. For planar elements,
the arrow is always located on the last edge, and points at the first node. For solid elements, the arrow is located on
the last edge of the first face, again, pointing at the first node.
Face normals can be determined by using the right-hand
rule in conjunction with the direction arrows. The normal
points in the positive, right-hand rule direction. You may
want to turn on Shrink Elements to see the relationships
between arrowheads and elements.
If instead, you choose the Normal Vector style, vectors
will be drawn at the center of planar elements to indicate
the positive normal direction.
.
Element - Offsets/Releases...
... controls whether element offsets will be displayed. If this option is on, FEMAP will draw lines from the nodes to
the offset locations, and then draw the element connecting the offset locations. FEMAP always draws offsets to
their actual lengths. If you have very small offsets, you might not see them, even though they are displayed.
You can use the Release Labels option to display the degrees of freedom that are released. When this option is set,
FEMAP will label each released degree of freedom at the appropriate end of the beam. FEMAP uses the numbers
one to six to represent the six elemental degrees of freedom.
Element - Orientation/Shape
If this option is on, FEMAP will draw a vector in the direction of the element orientation. For beams and other line
elements, this vector will either point toward the third node, or in the direction of the vector orientation that you
specified. For plane elements, that have rotated material axes, FEMAP will draw the vector in the direction of the
material axes. Element - Beam Y-Axis is very similar to this option.
The second list box, Element Shape, allows you to change how line and plane elements will be displayed. In the
default setting, Line/Plane Only, these elements will simply be drawn connecting the nodes. Line elements will just
be a single line, plane elements will be a triangle or quadrilateral. Switching to either of the other options lets you
see more information for these elements.
456 Offsets
Released Degrees
of Freedom
Centerline of Beam
Orientation On
Offset Beams with
Orientation Vectors
Plates with Material
Orientation Vectors
Line elements can be shown with a rectangular
cross section, the actual input cross section, or a
box denoting the stress recovery location. These
options only affect line elements. There is no dif-
ference for solid or plate elements between Show
Fiber Thickness, Show Inertia Ratio, Show Cross
Section or Show Stress Recovery Locations. The
Show Fiber Thickness and Show Inertia Ratio set-
tings display the cross section as a rectangle. For
bar and beam elements, if you choose Show Fiber
Thickness, the size of the rectangle is based on the
stress recovery locations. If you choose Show Inertia Ratios, the rectangular cross section is based on the area and
cross-sectional inertias (I1 and I2). Since the cross section may not really be a rectangle, the height and width of the
rectangle shown may not be correct, but it will be representative of a rectangular cross section with the same inertia
ratio (I1/I2). The area, I1 and I2 values must all be nonzero or no cross section will be shown.
Show Cross Section draws the cross-section of the
beams based upon the input to the FEMAP cross sec-
tion property generator. This can be an arbitrary sur-
face shape or a standard shape. This sample shows the
difference between drawing the beam cross section
and just line representations. The beam cross section
picture provides a much better physical representation
of the actual model.
Show Stress Recovery Locations will be identical to
Show Cross Section, except it will draw a rectangular
cross section based upon the stress recovery locations
for all beams that do not have a defined cross section.
As stated above, for all other element types, these four
options produce identical results. For tubes and rods,
the cross-section is based on the radius. Other line ele-
ments can not display a cross section. Planar elements
will be expanded to show their thicknesses. If you have specified top and bottom fiber distances, these will be used.
If you have not, or the element type does not support fiber distances, the element thickness will be used and will be
centered about the nodal plane.
There are many benefits to using this option. It allows you to graphically see your property data, find errors, and it
provides a more realistic display. For beam/bar elements, it also helps you to determine if you have properly speci-
fied the beam orientations. Since the rectangular cross section rotates with the orientation vector, you can see how
your beam is oriented. By choosing these different options, you can graphically check beam cross sections.
Element - Beam Y-Axis...
... is similar to Element - Orientation. Instead of drawing the vector toward the third node, or vector orientation that
you specify, this option will draw a vector in the true element Y-Axis. FEMAP will calculate cross products, using
the element X axis and the element orientation to determine the Y-Axis. If the orientation that you specified is per-
pendicular to the element X-Axis, it will always be equivalent to the Y-axis. This option is only used for line ele-
ments.
Element - Weld...
... allows you to turn the diameter on and off for all of the weld elements in your model. The diameter for each weld
is determined by the Weld property used by each element.
Note: Although possible, you should not display element thicknesses when you are doing contour plots.
FEMAP does not adjust the contour data to the surfaces of the thickened elements and the resulting
picture can be confusing.
Element Shape On
Offset Beams
Plates
Element - Rigid...
... has a toggle which allows you to turn on symbols indicating the independent and dependent nodes for all of the
Rigid Elements in your model. Independent nodes are displayed as filled-in Square symbols at the nodal loca-
tions, while dependent nodes are displayed as outline only square symbols.
You can also turn on the degrees of freedom for the independent nodes (all rigid element types) and dependent
nodes (RBE3 interpolation and RSPLINE elements only) using the Label Mode.
Load Vectors...
...controls the length of the displayed vectors on the screen. You can choose a Uniform style or Scale by Magnitude,
which scales the vector length based upon the magnitude. You may also specify the magnitude which controls the
length of the largest load. All other loads are scaled accordingly. Each load type is scaled separately. To prevent
visual loss of small loads in a large model, you may also specify a Minimum Scale. All loads which would fall
below this minimum are then scaled to the minimum.
Load - Force, Moment, Thermal, Distributed Loads, Pressure, Acceleration, Velocity, Enforced
Displacement, Nonlinear Force, Heat Generation, Heat Flux, Convection, Radiation, Bolt Preload,
Fluid Tracking, Unknown Condition, Slip Wall Condition, Fan Curve, Periodic Condition...
... independently control the display of each load type. For forces, moments, accelerations, velocities, and enforced
displacements, you can choose to display either the resultant load vectors or the load components. If you choose
either Color/Component Mode option 0 or 1, FEMAP will display one vector for each load in the direction of the
resultant load. If you choose option 2 or 3, FEMAP will display the components of the load. This will draw up to
three vectors which are aligned with the global rectangular directions. It does not matter what coordinate system
you used to define the load, the components are always drawn in global rectangular. In either case, the vectors will
be colored based on the entity or view color, as is typical for all of the other view options.
Bolt Preloads are for NX Nastran only (FEMAP version 9.3).
The Fluid Tracking, Unknown Condition, Slip Wall Condition, Fan Curve, and Periodic Condition load types are
for use with the FEMAP Flow product only.
RBE2 - No Symbols
RBE3 - Symbols
and DOF Labels
and No DOF Labels
RBE2 - Symbols
and No DOF Labels
RBE2 - Symbols
and DOF Labels
RSPLINE - Symbols
and DOF Labels
When displayed, the various nodal forces are drawn as shown as in the diagram.
Elemental loads are drawn very much like nodal loads, but are located at the center (or along) the element face
where they are applied. Directional elemental loads (like direction heat flux and distributed loads) also represent
the direction in which the load will be applied.
Function dependent loads can be labelled with both the load value and the function ID that has been selected. The
function ID is shown in parenthesis.
Bolt Preloads appear as a nut and bolt symbol on a bolt region.
Note: Be careful in determining whether a Bolt Region actually has a bolt preload applied as the symbol for
the Bolt Region is a Bolt without a nut
L1
Force Moment
Acceleration Temperature
Velocity Rotational
Velocity
Enforced
Displacement
Enforced
Rotation
Rotational
Acceleration
Heat
Flux
Heat
Generation
Heat
Generation
Pressure
Radiation
Temperature
Convection
Heat
Flux
Distributed Load
2.
2.(1)
Constant Load
Load Dependent on
Function 1
Constraint and Constraint Equation...
... control the display of nodal constraints and constraint equations. If you also have permanent constraints in your
model, see "Node - Perm Constraint...". Also note that you can label both the degree of freedom, and the coeffi-
cients for constraint equations.
You can draw constraints as either default (single triangle), pins (with circular tips), arrows (head of arrows is fac-
ing away from node) that are oriented in the direction of the degree of freedom, or triangles (points on triangle are
pointed towards the node). This can give a better indication of constraints if local or non Cartesian displacement
coordinate systems are used. You use the Label Mode to select this option. Also, when using pins, arrows, or trian-
gles, the color mode can be switched to RGB mode in which constrained X Degrees of Freedom (DOF) will be
shown in Red, constrained Y DOF in Green, and constrained Z DOF in Blue.
Connector...
...controls whether connectors are visible, the color mode, and whether the label ID is plotted.
Region...
...controls whether regions are visible, the color mode, and whether the label ID is plotted.
Tools and View Style Options
Free Edge and Face...
. . . is only used for free edge and free face displays. If All Elements is selected, line elements will be considered in
the search for free edges, and plane elements will be considered in the search for free faces. Otherwise, only plane
and volume elements are used in free edge calculations, and only volume elements are used in free face calcula-
tions. With All Elements active, a plate made of planar elements and framed with beams would have no free edges.
If All Elements were off, the beams would not be considered. The same framed plate would have all of its outer
edges free.
The Parabolic Edges options are similar. If you skip midnodes, FEMAP only checks the corner nodes of parabolic
elements. In this case, edges of linear elements that connect to parabolic elements will not be considered free edges.
Similarly, only the corners of element faces are used in the free face calculations. If you use midnodes, FEMAP
requires that all nodes on an edge or face must match. Otherwise, the edge or face is free. In general, you should
always use the midnodes. This insures that you do not miss a true disconnection at the midnodes between two par-
abolic elements.
The Free Edge/Backface Color options are primarily for free edge displays. However, if you choose Use View
Color, backfaces in free face displays will use the Free Edge View Color. By adjusting this color, you can often get
Nodal Constraints
with DOF labels
Nodal Constraints
Pins, DOF labels
Nodal Constraints - Arrows
with No labels Nodal Constraints
Triangles, DOF labels
a better understanding of the front and back portions of your model. You can even create a pseudo hidden line plot
with dashed lines by changing the View Color to a dashed line style.
If you would like to display the free edges along with the remainder of your model, so that it is easier to locate
them, choose the View, Draw Model option. The default Free Edge View color has been chosen so that they will still
be visible with most element displays.
Shrink Elements
If this option is on, all elements will be reduced in size, by the percentage that you specify. A size of 100% means
that the elements will not be reduced. A size of 0% reduces the elements to a point at their centroid.
Fill, Backfaces and Hidden
If Fill is on, elements in your model will be filled with color.
Whenever it is off, just the boundaries of the entities will be
drawn. For more information, see "Filled Edges".
Fill can be used to fill elements with color for line contour and
line criteria displays. If you choose filled contours or filled cri-
teria, that will override this switch, since each element can only
be filled once.
The Backfaces option allows you to automatically remove some
element faces from the display. FEMAP calculates the normal (based on the right hand rule around the face) of
each element face. If it faces forward, out of the screen, that face is not drawn when backfaces are being skipped.
Since this removes information, and takes some additional computations, this option is normally off, i.e. Show All
Faces.
When you define solid elements, they are automatically constructed so that the faces on the back of each ele-
ment, will be properly defined backfaces. Therefore, you can safely turn on the first level, Skip Solid Backfaces,
and be reasonably sure that you will not lose any meaningful information. On the other hand, the final two options
must be used very carefully. Since you determine the orientation of normal to planar elements by the way you con-
nect them, the backface option may discard faces of planar elements which lie on the front of your model. It all
depends on how you define their normals. If you do want to use these options, you must build your model so that
all planar elements are defined with their normals pointing either inward or outward from the center of the
model. Then choose the appropriate option to remove the elements that you want.
The Hidden Line Option selections control how hidden line calculations will be done for solid elements. By
default, FEMAP will calculate the free faces of all solids, and just display them in a hidden line view, along with
faces from all planar and line elements. If you just want to see the solid elements, choose Free Faces Only, or if you
want to see all faces being drawn - including interior ones - choose Draw All Faces. Be aware, however, that Draw
All Faces is substantially slower, and will result in the same final picture unless you have element shrink turned on.
You can combine the Free Face plot style and Skip Solid Backfaces to do a fairly quick, and accurate hidden line
plot of complex solid element models.
Filled Edges
When elements, or other entities are filled, the normal entity color fills the interior. If this option is on, the bound-
aries will also be drawn. The color of those boundaries is determined by the color mode set for this option. If you
choose entity colors, you may not be able to see the border, since it will probably match the filled area. Contrasting
Shrink On
Reveals Line Elements
that were hidden with
Shrink Off
Shrink Off
Element Fill On
colors are also based on the entity color, but FEMAP automatically chooses a color which does not match that
color. If you want to draw just the filled areas, with no edges, turn this option off.
The Filled Edges on/off switch is used any time you turn on the Fill Element option, or for contour and criteria dis-
plays. The only exception is line criteria displays where the switch is ignored since turning off the edges would
eliminate the criteria information.
The Filled Edges color is only used when you set Fill Element on. It is not automatically used for contour and cri-
teria displays. Instead, the colors currently chosen by the element option are used.
The Section Cut Edges options determine whether element edges will be draw on section cutting planes. If dis-
played, these edges are drawn with the Filled Edge view color.
Render Options...
...controls the viewing of surfaces and curves on solid models, as well as midside nodes for parabolic elements.
These options have no effect unless you are in Render mode (see Section 6.1.5.1, "View, Select...").
The Curve Transparency controls whether curves are viewed even when hidden in hidden line mode. This
option is typically off. Turning it on will enable you to view all curves even in hidden line mode. This can be
helpful when you are previewing mesh settings.
You may use the Hatch Surfaces option to show parametric (or hatch) lines on the surface. This option is avail-
able for Draw Model and Hidden Line modes when in Render mode. The default is to show surfaces only (no
hatching).
The Parabolic Edge/Face allows you to view or skip midside nodes while in Render mode. If you use midside
nodes for viewing purposes, it can increase drawing times while in Render mode. If drawing time is signifi-
cantly increased, you may want to skip midnodes when viewing and orienting your model, and use midnodes
only when examining deformed plots. The skipping of midside node information on deformed plots may lead to
misinterpretation of results.
Offset Factor and Offset Units control how element edges and surface edges are displayed in a solid model. If
the values are both 0 (not the default), the element edges will have a stitched appearance, since they drawn in
the same location as filled triangles. The Offset Factor is a percentage (0-200%) that defines how much the ele-
ment edges will be pulled forward in the display. The Offset Units value is also a percentage that controls the
appearance of the element edges on filled triangles when the model is displayed at an angle. (This value applies
to Render mode only.)
Generally, you should use the default values. You can adjust these values to improve the display for your graph-
ics card. The recommended range of values is 25 - 150.
The Graphics Engine button allows you to switch the graphics engine FEMAP is using. By default, FEMAP is
using Render Mode which takes advantage of OpenGL for faster and better looking graphics. FEMAP can also
be used in a Windows GDI graphics mode. Windows GDI does not use OpenGL and should only be used if vec-
tor-based graphics are needed for copying to other applications or printing. Windows GDI will result in slower
drawing and hidden line displays of solids will often be incorrect.
Transparency
Allows you to set the level of Auto Transparency in the model. This number must be set between 0 and 100, 0
being fully opaque and 100 being completely transparent. The default value is 75%.
This option is used to set the transparency level for use with the Transparency option on the View Style menu. This
setting is also used when using the Transparent Highlight option found in the Window, Show Entities command, as
well as, the menu of the Show When Selected icon found in the Model Info Tree and the Data Table dockable panes.
Shading
When this option is on, FEMAP incorporates lighting effects into the display based on its models orientation to the
light source and the location and type of the light source. You can perform shading in all graphics modes. However,
some lighting effects are only available in certain graphics modes.
You can use the Shading Mode options to shade either filled areas, lines or both.
FEMAP can incorporate up to three lighting effects dependent on graphics mode: ambient, diffuse and specular.
Ambient light is considered to be directionless. All surfaces are equally lit. On a very cloudy day, there is very little
directional light from the sun and there are no shadows. There is still plenty of light. The light falling on and being
reflected by an object is independent of its orientation and the location of the viewer. The level of ambient light is
controlled by %Ambient. A value of 0% means that any entity not lit by diffuse or specular light will be completely
dark. A value of 100% means that the ambient light will saturate the whole model and no diffuse or specular light-
ing will be visible.
Diffuse lighting is directional. It comes from one direction but is reflected equally in all directions. The illumina-
tion of a surface is only dependent on the orientation of the light to the object. The location of the viewer does not
alter the lighting. Diffuse lighting is common with matt surfaces.
Specular lighting is directional. It is important for shiny objects. The level of illumination is dependent on both the
orientation of the light and the viewer. Specular lighting is only available in Render Mode.
The Light Location/Type option controls the light location and type. There are six options and their behaviour
depends on the graphics mode selected:
Basically, Render mode graphics supports all lighting locations and types. Windows GDI Mode graphics does not
support specular lighting, but does support viewer, model and screen locations. Viewer location means that the light
Note: If you are going to be switching the graphics engine back and forth between Render/OpenGL mode and
Windows GDI mode, you may want to add this command to a toolbar. To do this, open the Customize
dialog box by right mouse clicking the triangle on the right side of any visible toolbar and choosing
Customize from the drop-down menu. Once the Customize dialog box is open, select the Commands
tab. In the list of Categories, choose Additional Commands, then click the View Render command
and drag and drop it onto any toolbar. Now every time you click that icon, FEMAP will toggle between
Render/OpenGL and Windows GDI mode.
Light
Location/Type
Render Mode
Windows GDI
Mode
Viewer Diffuse light at
viewer location
Diffuse light at
viewer location
Screen Diffuse light at
screen location
Diffuse light at
screen location
Viewer Spot Specular light at
viewer location
Diffuse light at
viewer location
Screen Spot Specular light at
screen location
Diffuse light at
screen location
Model Diffuse light at
model location
Diffuse light at
model location
Model Spot Specular light at
model location
Diffuse light at
model location
is located with the viewer. Model location means that the light is located at a point relative to the model origin and
therefore moves with the model as the model is rotated. Screen location means that the light is positioned relative to
the screen center (x to the left, y up and z towards the viewer). A screen location light does not move as the model
is rotated. Screen and model locations are entered by pressing the Light command button.
For plane elements, FEMAP does not consider the direction of the face normal when calculating the angle to the
light source. Co-planar elements which have face normals pointing toward and away from the light source will be
shaded identically. This will result in bright areas on the back-side of a plate model. It is necessary however,
since FEMAP does not restrict the direction of plate normals. For solid elements in Windows GDI mode, where
FEMAP controls the face normals, backfaces will receive only ambient light. Render mode will highlight back-
faces, but hidden line mode will hide them.
Perspective
When this option is on, FEMAP will display a perspective projection of your model, otherwise axonometric (paral-
lel) projections are drawn. You can control the distortion in the perspective projection by modifying the distance.
Smaller values result in more distortion.
Perspective drawings can result in more realistic images, but take longer to draw. Additionally, because of the non-
parallel transformations involved, FEMAP must fully rebuild the display lists whenever you zoom, pan, center, or
magnify a perspective view. This is not required for non-perspective views.
Finally, although it may work, perspective views are not usually the best to use for graphical selection. Graphical
selection is inherently two-dimensional. Since perspective projections distort any two dimensional object which is
not perpendicular to the projection, you may be surprised at what is selected. If you do make graphical selections
from perspective views, you should review what was really selected before you proceed.
The Left Stereo Color is not a part of perspective. For more information, see "Stereo".
Stereo
When this option is on, FEMAP will display a stereo image of your model. The stereo image is actually two
images, slightly rotated from each other, each displayed in a different color. If you view the stereo image through
3D or stereo glasses, it will appear three dimensional.
When you first look at a stereo image, it can take some time to properly focus your eyes to see the 3D image. Keep
trying! You may find it helpful to vary the Eye Separation. This setting changes the separation between the left and
right image. Most 3D stereo glasses have one red and one blue lens. You can adjust the Left Stereo Color (in the
Perspective option) and the Right Stereo Color if they do not properly match your glasses.
Note: Because Windows cannot dither lines, many graphics boards will be unable to properly shade the lines
in your view. You should therefore turn on the appropriate fill options along with shading. FEMAP and
Windows will properly shade the resulting filled areas. If your graphics board supports a large number
(>256) of colors, you will still be able to shade lines. If you try to shade lines on graphics boards with
less colors, Windows will map the shaded color to one of its available colors. This can look strange on
the screen. If you make a hardcopy on a color printer that can print a large number of colors, the lines
will be properly shaded, even though they might look strange on your screen.
Perspective Off Perspective On
You should always turn perspective on for stereo views, and turn fill off. Similarly, you must just draw your model
- do not choose a hidden line view. The method that FEMAP uses to produce hidden line views is not compatible
with stereo.
Axisymmetric Axis
The Axisymmetric Axis shows the axisymmetric axis of revolution and the radial direction. This provides you with
a visual cue for the plane and orientation of your axisymmetric model. You should use the direction that matches
your solver (See 6.3.1 in the User Guide). The axismmetric axis is also used to compute the orientation of loads on
axisymmetric shell elements.
There are several options for displaying the Axisymmetric Axes using the Color/Draw mode. The axes can be
shown as lines without arrows (default), with arrows, or as Solid arrows. There are two color options for each
arrow option, View Color (default), or RGB (Red, Green, Blue). See the View Options section on Coordinate
System for examples of the different options.
View Legend
The view legend identifies the load (prefixed by L) and constraint (C) sets, the group (G), and the view (V) that are
displayed in a window. You can choose to display either the IDs or titles of these items. You can also move the leg-
end to any of the eight positions.
View Axes
The view axes represent the orientation of the global axes. They are normally displayed in the lower left corner of
the view, but you can specify a new position by pressing Position. Here you can simply enter the location in per-
centages of the graphics window (from top left) where you want the axes to appear. You can also select the position
graphically by pointing with the mouse and clicking the left button.
There are several options for displaying the View Axes using Show As and Color/Draw modes. Labels can be
shown for the axes or no labels at all. The axes can be shown as lines without arrows (default), with arrows, or as
Solid arrows. There are two color options for each arrow option, View Color, or RGB (Red, Green, Blue). See
the View Options section on Coordinate System for examples of the different options.
Origin
The origin of global coordinates is indicated by a circular symbol. This option can be used to turn this symbol on or
off.
Workplane and Rulers
When this option is on, the workplane will be visible. The workplane is always present and active - even if it is not
visible.
X
Y
Z
V: Default XY View
L: 100 psi Pressure Loading
C: Fixed Edges and Symmetry
G: Plate Elements View Legend
View Axes
with
Titles
X
Y
Z
X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Y
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Workplane
Rulers
Workplane Grid
For rulers to be drawn, the Show Rulers option must be on, and the appropriate ruler options must be set in the
Tools Snap To command. The color of both the workplane and the rulers is chosen by the view color. If the Fill
Plane option for Plane Fill is selected, the workplane is drawn filled in. If a color is selected that is almost transpar-
ent, the workplane triangle is drawn transparent and the edges and rulers are drawn ignoring the transparency. This
gives a good visual cue for the workplane location in complex models. This only works in Render Mode graphics.
Workplane Grid
If this option is on, the snap grid will be drawn, in the workplane. The style of the grid is controlled by the Tools
Snap To command. If you define an Invisible grid in that command, you will not be able to see it, even though you
turn this option on. You do not have to be snapping to the grid for it to be visible.
Clipping Planes
If you turn this option on, and you are displaying a group which uses one or more clipping planes, the clipping
planes will be drawn.
Symbols...
. . . controls the size and color of symbols. This includes the symbols drawn for points, nodes, constraints, loads and
many more. Choosing a larger size makes the symbols larger. The Preview Color is used for the symbols (dots, vec-
tors, planes. . .) which are drawn when you press the Preview command buttons that can be found on many dialog
boxes.
You can control whether symbol elements are drawn. Symbol elements are gap, mass, mass matrix, link and DOF
spring elements. If your model has a large number of these elements, graphics performance can be impacted and
the screen can be cluttered. Preventing the drawing of these elements can improve performance and image clarity.
An alternative way to handle this issue is to use layers.
You can also choose whether nodes, points, and curve mesh size will be drawn as their normal symbols, or as single
dots. If you choose the dot option, a single pixel is drawn - if you go to a printer or Metafile they will still be a sin-
gle dot in the device resolution.
The Load Len and Other Vec options allow you to customize the length of vectors that are displayed. If you want to
display shorter vectors, reduce the numbers below the 100% default value. Larger numbers result in longer vectors.
Load Len is used for all loads. Other Vec is used for everything else.
View Aspect Ratio...
... controls how FEMAP will distort your model as it is drawn on the screen. With AutoAspect on, FEMAP will
gather information about your display from Windows and will calculate an internal aspect ratio. This automatic cal-
culation will attempt to correct for differences between graphics boards. It adjusts the aspect ratio, so that the true
shape of your model is shown. For example, circles are drawn as circles, not ellipses.
If you turn AutoAspect off, you can specify an Aspect Ratio that you can use to eliminate any remaining distortions,
or to intentionally distort a view of your model. Aspect ratios that are larger than 1.0 will make your model appear
taller than normal. Aspect ratios less than 1.0 will make it appear wider. You should never specify very large aspect
ratios - the severe distortion introduces other display problems for coordinate system triads and other symbols. The
default Aspect Ratio can be set using the File, Preferences command.
Curve and Surface Accuracy
This option allows you to set the accuracy with which curves (arcs, circles...) and surfaces are drawn. FEMAP
draws all curves as a series of line segments. A more precise (lower value) curve accuracy requires more line seg-
Note: You may use the File, Preferences..., Render Graphics... dialog to prevent symbol elements being
drawn during dynamic rotation in render mode
Note: You may also use the View, Options, Labels, Entities and Colors, Load Vectors option to scale the load
lengths as well as use a Uniform or scaled distribution
Note: FEMAP and Windows adjust the aspect ratio based on the normal aspect ratio of pixels for your graph-
ics board. There is no way to determine the effect of the horizontal and vertical size settings on your
monitor. For this reason, AutoAspect may not result in a true correction. You can either adjust your
monitor sizes, or specify an aspect ratio manually.
View, Advanced Post 6-25
ments and drawing will be slower. Similarly, a higher value results in a faster draw but a less accurate picture (cir-
cles look like polygons).
For circles and arcs, the error percentage that you specify is the ratio of the maximum distance from the chord
formed by the line segments to the actual arc boundary, relative to the arc radius. This means that if you specify
1%, no pixel on the lines drawn will be more than 1% of the radius distance away from the true arc.
Turning the Curved Beam switch on causes curved beam elements to be drawn as arcs, with their appropriate bend
radii. When the switch is off, they are drawn as straight lines connecting nodes, just like other straight beam ele-
ments. Curved beam elements with no bend radius, or a radius that is too small for the nodal spacing are always
drawn as straight lines.
The Surface Divisions adjustments allow you to control the number of lines drawn for each surface. Every surface
has a number of divisions assigned for each parametric direction. When Entity Divisions is active, each surface will
display the number of divisions for that entity. If you choose View Divisions, all surfaces will be drawn with the
number of divisions set below in the Divisions control. This same number is used in both parametric directions.
The final choice, Show Mesh Size, should be used sparingly since it is the slowest. It provides a way to see the ele-
ments that would be created by the Mesh, Geometry, Surface command, without having to generate the elements.
With this option, the surface divisions are based on the current mesh sizes, including any biasing. One line is drawn
at each mesh point, so the resulting pattern looks just like quadrilateral elements that will be created on the surface.
This can be very helpful as you adjust the mesh sizes.
The Parametric Directions enable you to view the directions of curves and surfaces. An arrow is placed at the end
of each curve, and arrows are produced on the surface divisions to designate the s direction of the surface. The
direction is particularly important when defining a mesh size on the s and t directions of a surface.
PostProcessing Options
See Section 8, "Post-Processing".
6.1.6 View, Advanced Post
These commands provide special animation capability. The View, Animation command provides controls for your
animating plot, while the other three commands provide special move through viewing using OpenGL for post-
processing. For more information, see Section 8, "Post-Processing".
5.0% Error 0.5% Error
6.2 Modifying the View
The last three sections of commands on the View menu all involve modifying the active view. These commands
provide capability to rotate, pan, zoom, and align your model. They can be very helpful to orient your model in dif-
ferent positions for both checking and entity selection purposes. Many times, however, it is easier to use the
Dynamic Rotate, Pan, and Zoom capability to quickly manipulate the view. In Render mode you can access this
capability simply by holding down the left mouse button, while the View Toolbar button provides this capability in
Windows GDI (Render Options under View, Options) mode. This is especially convenient since this command is
available while in another menu command, except other View commands. An explanation of these menu commands
are provided below.
6.2.1 View, Rotate Menu
The commands on this menu provide two basic capabilities to rotate the view of your model. Rotate Model pro-
vides precise control of rotation angles and quick access to predefined views. Dynamic provides flexible interactive
manipulation of the view.
6.2.1.1 View, Rotate, Model...
... rotates the current view. Unlike most of the other view commands, this command ignores the All Views option. It
will only update one view at a time.
This command displays the View Rotate dialog box, which is very interactive. The current view orientation will be
loaded as the default orientation. As soon as you make a change though, FEMAP will begin redrawing your current
view. This gives you instantaneous feedback on whether you have made the correct choice. If the new orientation is
not what you want, you can immediately make a new selection. Since FEMAP lets you abort any redraw by simply
pressing a key, or the left mouse button, that selection will abort the previous redraw, update the orientation, and
begin redrawing again. You decide how much of the redraw you want or need to see before you make your next
selection.
If you turn off the Redraw check box, FEMAP will only redraw the global axes (instead of the entire model), when
you press the scroll bars, or type rotation angles. FEMAP always draws the entire model when you choose one of
the standard orientation push buttons. FEMAP also draws the entire model if the global axes are not visible in the
active view. Turn off Redraw for the fastest possible rotations.
Using the Scroll Bars
The three scroll bars, located near the left side of the dialog box, are used to rotate your view from its present posi-
tion.
As you click the scroll bar arrows, the view will rotate by the number of degrees currently defined in the Delta text
box. The axis of rotation is based on the scroll bar you selected, and the selected rotation axes. If Model Axes are
selected, the rotation will be around the global coordinate directions. When Screen Axes are selected, rotations will
be around the screen axes. The screen X axis is always horizontal to the right, Y is always upward and Z is always
out of the screen.
Clicking the left scroll arrow rotates around the negative axis direction. The right scroll arrow rotates around the
positive axis direction.
Clicking in the gray scroll bar area is very similar to clicking the scroll arrow. The axis and direction of rotation are
identical. When you click here however, FEMAP will ignore the Delta angle, and always rotate by 45 degrees. This
is a good coarse adjustment for the orientation. Then, after you get close to the orientation you want, use the arrows
for smaller rotations.
You can accomplish the same rotations using the keyboard. First, you must select the desired scroll bar. Press the
Tab key until the scroll bar is highlighted. Then press the left arrow to rotate by Delta around the negative axis
direction, or right arrow to rotate around the positive direction. PageUp and PageDown rotate by 45 degrees.
Ctrl+R or F8
View, Rotate, Dynamic... 6-27
When using the scroll bars, remember:
If you want the rotation to go faster, specify a larger Delta.
The standard orientation buttons that are described later in this section automatically update Delta. The first six
buttons change it to 10 degrees, the last three change it to 90 degrees. These automatic changes allow you to
quickly select a starting point using these buttons, and then use the scroll bars to update that orientation.
If you want to quickly rotate your model around one axis multiple times, you must repeatedly press and release
the left mouse button. FEMAP does not abort redraws if you just hold the button down. Unless your model is
small, the redraw time will significantly slow down your rotations.
For small models, you can dynamically rotate the model on screen by pointing at one of the scroll arrows,
pressing the left mouse button, and holding it down. FEMAP will completely redraw your model, rotate the
view, and draw again. Let go of the button whenever you want to stop.
Don't worry about the position of the scroll bar thumb buttons. When you rotate your view, they tend to jump
around. Because of the way FEMAP defines the rotation angles, rotation about one model or screen axis can
actually result in changes to all three rotation angles. For the same reason, it is very difficult to orient your view
by dragging the thumb buttons.
Typing Rotation Angles
Occasionally, you may know the rotation angles that produce the orientation that you want. If you do, you can type
the angles into the three text boxes located just to the right of the scroll bars. Remember, these angles are rotations
about X axis, then the rotated Y axis, then the doubly rotated Z axis. They are not direction cosine angles. For more
information on rotation angles, see Section 4.1.1, "Model, Coord Sys...".
Selecting Standard Orientations
Near the center of the dialog box you will see nine command buttons. These buttons will instantly switch your ori-
entation to the appropriate predefined orientation. The first six buttons, XY Top, Bottom, YZ Right, Left, ZX Front,
and Back, always align the view with one of the principal planes of the global coordinate system. You can use these
to quickly look at your model from six orthogonal directions.
The last three buttons, Isometric, Dimetric, and Trimetric, define three additional orientations. We have chosen ori-
entations for these three buttons that are frequently used and correspond to their names. If you would like to use
other orientations, you can use the File, Preferences, Views command to redefine the names and orientations of all
three buttons.
Mag, Zoom, and Pan
These command buttons are shortcuts to the View Magnify, Zoom, and Pan commands. If you are updating a view,
it is often more convenient to use these buttons than to press OK and then choose the command from the menu.
Pressing any of these buttons automatically accepts any changes you have made - just as if you had pressed OK.
6.2.1.2 View, Rotate, Dynamic...
...allows you to dynamically rotate, pan and zoom your model curves and elements. When you choose this com-
mand, you will see the following dialog box:
If you are not in Render mode (under View, Options) your model will automatically switch to a wireframe, single
color display of the curves and elements. All other entities will temporarily disappear. If you are in Render mode,
the model will look the same. Whether you are in Render mode or not, the operations for the View, Align By,
Dynamic operate the same.
All operations (rotate, pan or zoom) are done by pressing and holding the left mouse button in the active graphics
window, and then dragging the mouse either horizontally or vertically. For example, to rotate around the screen Y
axis:
The following mouse actions are recognized, with the left button down:
For the Rotate Axis mode, moving the mouse to the right rotates counter-clockwise about the axis (right-hand rule),
and moving left rotates clockwise.
The dynamic mode can be chosen in several ways. The most obvious is to select one of the available buttons. Alter-
natively however, you can simply hold down the Alt key as you press the left button down to rotate around the Z
axis. Press Ctrl to pan, or press Shift to zoom. Press Alt and Ctrl to rotate around the predefined axis. You do not
have to hold the key as you drag the mouse, just make sure it is down before you press the mouse button.
When you let go of the left mouse button, your model will begin to redraw in whatever mode that you have
selected. That is with all entities and post-processing options. If you are not satisfied with the view, or need to do
more transformations, simply press the button down again and drag it further.
If you have a three button mouse, you can use the middle mouse button instead of the left mouse button to dynami-
cally rotate the model if a dialog box is open. This is only available in Render mode.
FEMAP supports Spaceball for dynamic rotation in Render mode. The FEMAP Spaceball code is self calibrating.
To obtain optimal control, you should move the Spaceball to its extreme positions in all degrees of freedom..
Hint: These dynamic rotation commands can also be accessed at any time in Render mode simply by holding
the left mouse button in the graphics window. You will then be able to rotate around XY. If you hold the
Alt, Ctrl, or Shift keys down when first pressing the left mouse button, you can rotate about Z, pan, or
zoom, respectively. Holding down Alt+Ctrl and pressing the left mouse button allows you to rotate
around another axis that you define. No dialog box will appear. Also, if you have previously selected
one of the buttons for Rotate Z, Rotate Axis, Pan, or Zoom, FEMAP will automatically default to this
mode when you next access dynamic rotation.
X
Y
Z
X
Y
Z
Press Left Button
Drag Mouse
Release Button
Rotate Around +Y Rotate Around -Y
Rotate Around -X
Rotate Around +X
Rotate Around -Z
Rotate Around +Z
Rotate XY Mode Rotate Z Mode
Pan Right Pan Left
Pan Up
Pan Down
Zoom Out (smaller)
Zoom In (larger)
Pan Mode Zoom Mode
View, Rotate, Dynamic... 6-29
Options...
If you choose the Options button, you will see a menu that provides further control over the
dynamic alignment command.
Single Axis
Controls how model XY rotations will be done. If you refer back to the previous diagram,
dragging horizontally rotates around Y, dragging vertically rotates around Z. Normally, it is
easiest to accomplish compound rotations by dragging along one axis for a while, then
dragging along the other. Since it is very difficult to drag the mouse along a precisely hori-
zontal or vertical axis however, the Single Axis option limits rotations to the single direc-
tion in which you are moving the greatest distance. Small deviations from horizontal or vertical will be ignored. If
you turn this option off however, moving the mouse diagonally will perform a rotation about a diagonal vector.
Model Axes
Controls whether rotations will be around the default screen axes or around the model axes. If you are rotating
around model axes, mouse movements are the same, they just apply to the corresponding model axes instead of the
screen axes.
AutoCenter
In a three dimensional model, you will occasionally find that your model is rotating off of the screen as you move it
with this command. You can either choose pan to bring it back, or press AutoCenter. AutoCenter is just like the
View, Autoscale... commands, in that it calculates a new model center, but it does not change the scale at which the
model is displayed.
Use Rotation Center
This menu item is simply a toggle that turns on and off every time you choose it. When it is checked, all rotations
will be about the center of rotation that you specify with the Rotation Center command. If it is off, rotations will be
around the View Center.
Rotation Center...
Allows you to specify a center of rotation to be used for future rotations. This does not change the location of the
model on the screen like View Center does; it simply allows rotation around another location. When you choose
this command, Use Rotation Center is automatically turned on.
Rotation Axis...
Allows you to specify a vector that will be used as the rotation axis, if you are in the Rotate Axis mode (Alt+Ctrl
keys). When you specify a rotation vector, the base of the vector is automatically used to update the rotation center,
so all rotations will be about that point. When you choose this command, Use Rotation Center is automatically
turned on.
Limitations
While the dynamic display capability will work with any graphics adapter (you do not need any special accelera-
tion or 3D hardware), Render mode can provide significantly increased dynamic rotation speed and drawing with
an OpenGL accelerator board. Following are some limitations of dynamic display:
Render mode on or off:
The model is drawn in various styles depending on the View Style that is active and the type of elements in your
model. For example, if you rotate a free-edge view, the free edges will be rotated.
Render mode off:
The display is limited to a single color - either black or white depending on the color you choose for the win-
dow background.
Note: This command does not account for any perspective that you have specified. It is usually best therefore
to turn off Perspective before using this command.
Note: All rotations are performed around the view center (or the rotation center, if you have turned on this
option). If you only move the mouse slightly and a large rotation occurs, it is because that portion of the
model you are rotating is well away from the center of rotation - possibly in the direction that is perpen-
dicular to the screen. To avoid this, position the view center (or rotation center) on the geometry/mesh
you are trying to rotate.
There are limitations on the total number of nodes, and faces that can be displayed. Depending upon your
model, and available memory you should be able to display models of around 3000-4000 faces. If your model is
larger, you will still be able to use this function, but only the first 3000-4000 faces will be displayed - still prob-
ably more than enough to orient your model. If you are working with very large models, consider either activat-
ing a group to reduce the number, and choose the elements that will be displayed. Alternatively you can switch
to a free edge display.
Hidden line removal can not be done during dynamic display.
Improving Performance of Dynamic Display
FEMAP provides three different methods to redisplay your model during this command. Again, these methods are
only applicable when you are not in Render mode. Depending on your computer, graphics adapter and graphics
drivers, any one of these three methods may result in best performance. You should always experiment with these
methods to find the one that works best on your system. The methods are selected using the Dynamic option of the
File, Preferences command.
Experiment with both small and large models to see which works best for you. In some cases the performance dif-
ferences will be dramatic, depending upon the capabilities of your graphics adapter. When you have found the
method that you like, remember to choose the Permanent button in File, Preferences to save your selection for
future models.
6.2.1.3 View, Rotate, Single Axis
This menu item is simply a toggle that turns on and off every time you choose it. For a further explanation of Single
Axis, please refer to the Single Axis heading under View, Rotate, Dynamic... in Section 6.2.1.2, "View, Rotate,
Dynamic...". This command can also be accessed from the Options menu on the Dynamic Rotations dialog box.
6.2.1.4 View, Rotate, Model Axis
This menu item is simply a toggle that turns on and off every time you choose it. For a further explanation of Model
Axis, please refer to the Model Axis heading under View, Rotate, Dynamic... in Section 6.2.1.2, "View, Rotate,
Dynamic...". This command can also be accessed from the Options menu on the Dynamic Rotations dialog box.
6.2.1.5 View, Rotate, Rotate Around View Center
This is the default Rotate Around mode in FEMAP. This menu item simply highlights when chosen and instructs
FEMAP to rotate around the current View Center location in the Active View. The View Center is set using
the View, Center command (See Section 6.2.7, "View, Center..."). The View Center is also reset to the center of
the graphics window anytime a View, Autoscale... command is used (See Section 6.2.3.1, "View, Autoscale, All",
Section 6.2.3.2, "View, Autoscale, Regenerate All", and Section 6.2.3.3, "View, Autoscale, Visible").
The Rotate Around View Center mode can be also be accessed using View, Rotate, Dynamic... (Section 6.2.1.2,
"View, Rotate, Dynamic..."). In order for this mode to be set, the Use Rotation Center option must NOT be
checked in the Options menu in the Dynamic Rotations dialog box.
6.2.1.6 View, Rotate, Rotate Around Rotation Center
This menu item simply highlights when the Rotate Around Rotation Center mode is chosen. When it is checked,
all dynamic rotations will be about the center of rotation that you specify with the Rotation Center... command (See
Section 6.2.1.8, "View, Rotate, Rotation Center..."). It will be no longer be highlighted when the Rotate Around
mode in FEMAP is changed to Rotate Around View Center or Rotate Around Rotation Axis.
Method Description
Fast Redraw Usually fastest for small models, but not good for large models unless your
graphics adapter can draw vectors very rapidly. Some screen flicker.
Reduced Bitmap Fast on most systems. Little or no flicker.
Full Bitmap Basically the same as Reduced Bitmap. Will usually be slower - but not
always.
View, Rotate, Rotate Around Rotation Axis 6-31
The Rotate Around Rotation Center mode can be also be accessed using View, Rotate, Dynamic... (Section
6.2.1.2, "View, Rotate, Dynamic..."). In order for this mode to be set, the Use Rotation Center option must be
checked in the Options menu in the Dynamic Rotations dialog box.
6.2.1.7 View, Rotate, Rotate Around Rotation Axis
This menu item simply highlights when the Rotate Around Rotation Axis mode is chosen. When it is checked, all
dynamic rotations will be about the rotation axis that you specify with the Rotation Axis... command (See Section
6.2.1.9, "View, Rotate, Rotation Axis..."). It will be no longer be highlighted when the Rotate Around mode in
FEMAP is changed to Rotate Around View Center or Rotate Around Rotation Center.
The Rotate Around Rotation Axis mode can be also be accessed using View, Rotate, Dynamic... (Section 6.2.1.2,
"View, Rotate, Dynamic..."). In order for this mode to be set, click the Rotate Axis radio button in the Dynamic
Rotations dialog box.
6.2.1.8 View, Rotate, Rotation Center...
...allows you to specify a center of rotation to be used for future dynamic rotations. This does not change the loca-
tion of the model on the screen like View Center does; it simply allows rotation around another location. When you
choose this command, the Rotate Around Rotation Center mode is automatically set (See Section 6.2.1.6, "View,
Rotate, Rotate Around Rotation Center")
This rotation center can also be specified using View, Rotate, Dynamic... (Section 6.2.1.2, "View, Rotate,
Dynamic...") by choosing Rotation Center... from the Options menu on the Dynamic Rotations dialog box.
6.2.1.9 View, Rotate, Rotation Axis...
...allows you to specify a vector that will be used as the rotation axis for dynamic rotation. When you specify a rota-
tion vector, the base of the vector is automatically used to update the rotation center, so all rotations will be about
that point. When you choose this command, the Rotate Around Rotation Axis is automatically set.
The rotation axis can also be specified using View, Rotate, Dynamic... (Section 6.2.1.2, "View, Rotate,
Dynamic...") by choosing Rotation Axis... from the Options menu on the Dynamic Rotations dialog box.
6.2.1.10 View, Rotate, Standard Views (Top, Bottom, Right, Left, Front, Back, Isometric, Dimetric,
and Trimetric)
...these allow you to quickly access the standard views in FEMAP. They are also available on the View Orient
Toolbar.
Quick View Icons - Appear on the View Orient toolbar
...XY view ...XY view (reverse)
...YZ view ...YZ view (reverse)
...ZX view ...ZX view (reverse)
...Isometric view
...Dimetric view
...Trimetric view
6.2.2 View, Align By Menu
The commands on this menu are alternatives to the View, Rotate command. They are also used to orient your model
within a view. These commands are usually used when you want to orient the view relative to some geometry or
other entities in your model. You can also use these commands to define an initial orientation, and then use View,
Rotate to update the view relative to that starting point.
6.2.2.1 View, Align By, Coord Sys...
... automatically aligns the view to the XY axes of a coordinate system. This command displays a standard dialog
box so you can select a coordinate system. The view will be rotated so that the coordinate system axes are aligned
with the screen axes. That is, X horizontally to the right, Y up, and Z out of the screen.
6.2.2.2 View, Align By, Along Vector. . .
. . . aligns the view to a specified vector. The standard vector definition dialog box defines the alignment vector.
When you specify the vector, the view will be aligned so the vector you selected will be pointing into the screen. In
the resulting view, your model will be oriented so that you are looking from the base of the vector, toward the tip.
Since a vector really only defines one of the orientation axes, the rotation of your model about the orientation vec-
tor is undefined. This is the rotation about the screen Z axis (out of the screen). In general, FEMAP will align one
of the global coordinate axes with the screen X (horizontal) axis. If you want to update this orientation, just switch
to the View, Rotate command, and rotate the view about the Z screen axis. This will retain the vector orientation,
but will rotate about that vector.
6.2.2.3 View, Align By, Workplane...
... immediately aligns the view to the current workplane. No additional input is required. The workplane axes are
aligned with the screen axes. The X axis is horizontal (to the right), Y is up, and Z is out of the screen.
6.2.3 View, Autoscale
This menu provides several ways to automatically scale and move your model so that it is visible in your window.
6.2.3.1 View, Autoscale, All
...automatically centers and magnifies your model in the view. No additional input is required. To determine the
automatic scale and center, FEMAP finds the maximum dimensions of your model in all three global directions.
This essentially puts your model inside a box. FEMAP sets the center of the view to the center of that box. The
scale is adjusted, so that you can rotate your model to any orientation without parts of it going out of the window. It
is based on the longest, diagonal of the box, and the smallest window dimension.
Depending on the real shape of your model, the shape of the window, and the orientation you have currently cho-
sen, you may feel that the autoscaled magnification is too small. This can be especially true for long, thin models in
non-square windows. If you need to enlarge the model use either the View, Zoom or View, Magnify command.
Since no dialog box is displayed, you cannot choose between autoscaling one, or multiple views, during this com-
mand. Before you choose View, Autoscale, you must use the All Views command to select the views that you want
to modify.
6.2.3.2 View, Autoscale, Regenerate All
If AutoScale All does not work, then...
FEMAP maintains overall size information about your model in your database. This information is used to properly
autoscale your model into the active window. If you have created some entities which were positioned at a large
Hint: You can choose any of the available vector definition methods. This will enable you to easily orient
your view relative to different entities in your model. You can also use the various snap modes to select
the vector.
Hint: If you want to align your view normal to a plane in your model, you can use
View, Align By, Along Vector, or this command. To use this command, you
must first use the Tools, Workplane command to align the workplane to the
desired orientation. This approach allows you to use all of the standard plane
definition methods for selecting the orientation plane.
Ctrl+F8
Shift+F7
Shift+F7
Ctrl+Shift+A
View, Autoscale, Visible 6-33
distance from your model, and then deleted or moved those entities, the autoscale calculations may still be based on
the larger overall model size. This will result in scaling which is too small, and typically not centered, relative to
your window. If you see this behavior, you can force FEMAP to recalculate all of the autoscaling information by
choosing this command, or pressing Shift+Ctrl+A (instead of just Ctrl+A). This combination should restore your
scaling to the proper size and centering.
6.2.3.3 View, Autoscale, Visible
...works just like the View, Autoscale, All command, except that it only uses considers the portions of the model that
are displayed when doing the centering and scaling computations. This means that if you are only displaying geom-
etry, then the nodes and elements in your mesh will not be used for the scaling (and therefore may be outside of the
window). Likewise, the current group and layer settings are also considered. If you are displaying a group that only
contains one corner of your model, then that corner will be scaled to fill the window and moved to the center.
Using Autoscale for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View, Autoscale will set both the XY X Range/Grid and XY Y Range/
Grid options to Automatic. These selections display the entire XY-plot. The axis extents are determined from the
data you have selected.
6.2.4 View, Magnify...
... adjusts the scale of your model in the active view.
This command displays the View, Magnify dialog box. The current view scale is shown in the Magnification Factor
edit control. If you know the scale factor you want, you can type it in this control and press OK. This method is also
useful when you want to set All Views to the same scale factor.
Magnification factors are relative to the size determined by the View, Autoscale command. A magnification factor
of 1.0 is always used for an autoscaled view. This does not mean that one inch in your model equals one inch on the
screen. Larger magnification factors make your model appear larger in the view.
The buttons near the center of the dialog box provide another method of adjusting the magnification. They adjust
the magnification relative to the current setting. Up 10% and Up 50% make your model appear larger. Down 10%
and Down 50% make your model appear smaller. When you press any of these buttons, or type a new factor,
FEMAP will magnify around the center of the view.
The Fill View button is similar to the View, Autoscale command. It too bases its calculations on the overall model
dimensions. However, this button only considers the current orientation of your model. It projects the overall
dimensions into the current view and then adjusts the magnification factor to attempt to fill the screen. This will
always result in a larger image than View, Autoscale. If your model geometry is non-rectangular, or has cutouts, this
Ctrl+A
Ctrl+M or Ctrl+F7
Original Down 50% Up 50%
option still might not fill the view. Unlike the other View, Magnify options, but just like the View, Autoscale com-
mand, the Fill View button will automatically adjust the centering of your model.
Rotate, Zoom, and Pan
These command buttons are shortcuts to the View, Rotate, Zoom, and Pan commands. If you are updating a view, it
is often more convenient to use these buttons, than to press OK and then choose the command from the menu.
Using Magnify for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View, Magnify will set both the XY X Range/Grid and XY Y Range/
Grid options to Max Min. The minimum and maximum axes values are also adjusted to magnify the curves. For
XY-plot styles, pressing Fill View results in the same image as the View, Autoscale command. You cannot type a
magnification factor for XY-plot styles.
6.2.5 View, Zoom...
... simultaneously updates the scale and centering of your model in the active view. The update is based on a rectan-
gular area that you define relative to the window.
This command displays the View Zoom dialog box. You must choose between two zooming directions: Zoom In
and Zoom Out. When you zoom in, FEMAP will enlarge the rectangular area that you define to fill the entire win-
dow. Zoom Out does just the opposite. The magnification is reduced, so that the portion of your model that had
filled the entire window now only fills the rectangular zoom area.
The four text boxes near the center of the dialog box are used to define two diagonal corners of the zoom rectangle.
It does not matter whether you choose the upper-left and lower-right corners, or the upper-right and lower-left cor-
ners. It also does not matter which corner you specify first. The corner locations are specified in percentages of the
window. The upper-left corner of the window is (0%,0%). The lower-right corner is (100%,100%). Upper-right is
(100%,0%).
The easiest way to specify the zoom rectangle is to use your mouse. First, make sure one of the Corner 1 text boxes
is active. Then move the mouse, in the graphics window, to point at the first corner of the rectangle. Press the left
mouse button. Then move the mouse to point at the diagonally opposite corner. As you do this, you will see the
F7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
7
10
11
14
15
Zoom Area
View, UnZoom... 6-35
rectangular zoom area in your graphics window. Position it wherever you want and press the left mouse button
again. Double-click the button instead, if you want to automatically select OK.
If you have any of the cursor snap modes enabled, (Snap To Grid, Snap To Node,...) they may change the location
you pick with the mouse. You can use this feature to your advantage if you want to use a node or point as the corner
of the zoom rectangle. For more information on graphical selection, see Section 4, "User Interface" in the FEMAP
User Guide.
You can also just type the locations of the corners using the keyboard. If you choose this method however, you do
not have the advantage of using the dynamic zoom box to position the zoom area.
Previewing the Zoomed View
After you define the zoom area, you can press Apply to zoom, and redraw the view. This is just like pressing OK,
except that the View Zoom dialog box is still present. You can still press Cancel to revert to the original view, or you
can define additional zoom areas to further update the view.
Rotate, Mag, and Pan
These command buttons are shortcuts to the View Rotate, Magnify, and Pan commands. If you are updating a view,
it is often more convenient to use these buttons, than to press OK and then choose the command from the menu.
Using Zoom for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View Zoom will set both the XY X Range/Grid and XY Y Range/Grid
options to Max Min. The minimum and maximum axes values are adjusted based on the zoom area that you spec-
ify. This is probably the easiest way to choose particular sections of a complex XY plot. The zoom area that you
choose should be inside the graph area - although it does not have to be.
6.2.6 View, UnZoom...
... returns you to the previous magnification and centering, after you have changed them with a zoom, magnify,
pan, or center command. Choosing this command a second time will return to the original view. This provides a
quick way to alternate between full-model, and detailed views. It also allows you to change your view to see other
parts of your model, and quickly return to the original settings.
6.2.7 View, Center...
... chooses the model coordinates that will be located at the center of the view. This command does not change the
magnification or orientation of the model. It just moves the specified coordinates to the center of the view.
The standard coordinate definition dialog
boxes are used to define the center coor-
dinates. The center is entered in three
dimensions because FEMAP will use this
location as the center of rotation for the
View, Rotate command. By precisely
specifying the location you want, you can
later rotate a view about any location in
your model. Alternatively, if you just
want to quickly center the current view,
and you do not care about later rotations,
the coordinate perpendicular to the screen
can be given any value (or just skipped).
It is unimportant.
Note: Only one level of previous zoom is saved. That means, for example, if you press the Pan buttons on the
toolbar more than once, or you center, then magnify, you will only be able to back up one step - not
return to the original position before you changed the view.
Shift+F8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
10
11
13
14
15
Center on this point
You can use the mouse to choose the center of the view. It will work just like any other graphical coordinate selec-
tion. If you just want to move something to the center of the screen, this may be the easiest way to accomplish it.
Just point at the location with the mouse, and press the left mouse button. This will move the location you chose to
the center of the view. Remember however, that the depth, into the screen, will be chosen in the workplane. As
described in the previous paragraph, this might not be the point you want to rotate around.
If you want to center about an existing node or point, you can enable the appropriate snap mode prior to your
graphical selection. In this case, the center coordinates will be equal to the coordinates of the entity you snapped
to.
If you really want to specify a three-dimensional center, you may want to use the keyboard. You can choose any of
the standard coordinate definition methods, and enter the coordinates manually. You can also graphically select
coordinates, and then update one or more of them prior to pressing OK.
Using Center for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View, Center will set both the XY X Range/Grid and XY Y Range/
Grid options to Max Min. The minimum and maximum axes values are adjusted based on the location that you
specify. The magnification is unchanged. The location that you choose is just moved to the center of the graph.
Instead of the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes, XY-plots display the View Position dialog box. These
coordinates are specified as a percentage of the window. The location (0%,0%) is in the upper-left corner of the
window. The lower-right corner is (100%,100%). It is usually best to use the mouse to graphically select the new
center. This is especially true since the required coordinates are relative to the window and not the graph area.
6.2.8 View, Pan...
... is similar to the View, Center command. It adjusts the position of your model within a view, without changing the
magnification or orientation.
This command provides two different methods to position your model. You can just press the Left, Right, Up, or
Down buttons to move your model in the indicated direction. This method moves the amount specified by Percent,
which indicates a percent of the window. The other positioning method requires two locations. Within the view, the
model is moved from the first location to the second.
You will probably find that the easiest method of panning with the second method is to choose the two locations
graphically. Point to the location that you want to move from, and press the left mouse button. Then point to the
location you want to move to. As you move, you will see an arrow moving with the cursor. The arrow indicates the
direction and distance of the pan.
You can also pan the view by typing coordinates. The two pan locations are specified in percentages of the window.
The location (0%,0%) indicates the upper-left window corner. The lower-right corner is (100%,100%), and the
upper-right corner is (100%,0%).
Previewing the Panned View
After you define the pan locations, you can press Apply to pan, and redraw the view. This is just like pressing OK,
except that the View Pan dialog box is still present. You can still press Cancel to revert to the original view, or you
can define additional pan locations to further update the view. If you use the Left, Right, Up, or Down buttons, they
will automatically redraw the view.
Rotate, Mag, and Zoom
These command buttons are shortcuts to the View Rotate, Magnify, and Zoom commands. If you are updating a
view, it is often more convenient to use these buttons, than to press OK and then choose the command from the
menu. Pressing any of these buttons automatically accepts any changes you have made - just as if you had pressed
OK.
Ctrl+P or Alt+F8
Deleting Views (Delete, View command) 6-37
Using Pan for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View Pan will set both the XY X Range/Grid and XY Y Range/Grid
options to Max Min. The minimum and maximum axes values are adjusted based on the pan locations that you
specify. If you have magnified an XY-plot, this is an easy way to move it around to see different portions of the
curves. The pan locations that you choose should be inside the graph area - although it does not have to be.
It is usually best to use the mouse to graphically select the pan locations. This is especially true since the required
coordinates are relative to the window and not the graph area.
6.2.9 Deleting Views (Delete, View command)
Views, just like other FEMAP entities, can be deleted from the model. Simply use the Delete View command, and
select the number of the views you wish to delete. You may also simply click on a view if it is currently visible to
select it. FEMAP will ask if it is OK to delete this view. If you say yes, the view(s) will be deleted. If you say no,
the command will be canceled.
Views have no entities which are dependent upon them, so they are therefore always deletable. Although it is often
times just as easy to de-activate a view than delete it, there are specific instances when deleting a view is recom-
mended. Specifically, if you have trouble working with a view, certain items do not appear, or you get Abort mes-
sages, it may be due to a corrupted view (especially if this model had experienced an abnormal termination
previously). If you suspect a view is corrupt, simply delete the view and create a new one with the View, New com-
mand. You should also then perform a File, Rebuild to restructure the database. This should remove the corruption
from the model.
6.3 Window Menu Commands
The commands on this menu control the display of your the different FEMAP windows on your computer monitor,
these commands help you to create and manage the graphical windows on your screen. The commands on the Win-
dow menu work in conjunction with many of the commands on the View menu, and vice versa, therefore we will
often refer to the graphical windows as view windows.
FEMAP uses the Window menu to place commands to the create, modify, and position FEMAP graphics windows.
FEMAP Windows are stored with your model database. They can be either active or inactive. Active view win-
dows are associated with an on-screen window. Inactive view windows are not currently displayed on your screen,
but can be activated at any time you choose.
The Window menu is separated into five partitions. The first partition involves creating new view windows, making
copies of existing view windows, loading currently closed view windows, and closing view windows. The second
is contains multiple view window positioning commands, while the third contains a flag to toggle on and off the
view window tabs. The fourth contains commands to redraw and regenerate the entire view window, as well as
highlight specific entities in the active view window. The final portion of the menu holds a list of the views that are
currently loaded (up to the ninth view). Each of these areas is described more fully below.
6.3.1 Manipulating Multiple View Windows
This section involves creating, sizing, and activating multiple view windows. Each active view window in FEMAP
corresponds to a given graphics window which can be sized or changed similar to any standard graphics window.
In addition, FEMAP supplies automatic tools for activating, creating, and sizing single or multiple graphics win-
dows (view windows).
6.3.1.1 Window, New Window...
... creates new tabbed view windows in your model, and automatically activates them by opening new graphics
windows.
This command uses the New Window dialog box. Your most basic choice is to select the number of new views and
the window layout that you want to create. The dialog box shows you six possible alternatives to create between
one and six new views. The pictures show the window layout that will be created. Each rectangle represents a win-
dow that will be created. The black (or darkest) rectangle indicates the graphics window which will initially be
active. www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
If the Default View option is chosen, when new views are created, the view options and selections will be set to
match those of the default view. This is the view that is created automatically when you start FEMAP with an
unnamed model. If Copy View is chosen, the new views are created to match the view that you select from the list.
Whenever you create multiple views, the orientation of the views is automatically defined to provide multiple
planes (XY, YZ, and ZX) and isometric views. The view represented by the black rectangle is always set to an XY
view if you use the Default View option, or to the orientation of the view that you are copying if Default View is off.
The following table shows the orientations of the views which are created for each layout.
Use Open View(s) to open existing views that have been closed using the Window, Close command, Close on the
drop-down menu from the view tab, or the X in the upper right hand corner of the graphics window area. Choose
a view from the list of existing views, then click OK to open a view. If you would like to open multiple views at one
time, there are two separate methods:
1. You can hold the Ctrl key down to select each view from the list individually
OR
2. You can hold the Shift button down and select a range of views to open by selecting a first view and the last
view of the range, which will highlight all the views you want to open at once.
The ID and Title are used to set the ID and view title for the window represented by the black rectangle. View titles
are displayed in the title bar of the window. Titles are automatically assigned to the other views in any multi-view
layout that you create. These automatic titles describe the view orientation.
When the Close Existing Windows check box is checked, it will close all existing graphics windows and deactivate
the associated views once the OK button is pressed. You need to check this box before you press OK, if you want
the new views to be the only ones which are active.
Layout View Rotations Layout View Rotations
1 Default (XY or copy) 4 XZ,
XY,
YZ,
Default (XY or copy)
2V, 2H XY,
6 Isometric (-23,34,0 rotation),
XZ,
XY,
YZ,
Isometric (60,0,60 rotation),
3 XZ,
XY,
Window, Close 6-39
6.3.1.2 Window, Close
... This command closes the active view. If you try to close the last remaining open view of a model (or if there is
only one view currently open), FEMAP will ask if you want to save your model at that time.
6.3.1.3 Window, Tile Horizontal
... resizes and arranges all of the active graphics windows to fit horizontally in the FEMAP workspace. The win-
dows are arranged so that the contents of each window are visible, and so that no windows overlap.
The current size and position of the FEMAP main window, and the FEMAP Messages window combine to deter-
mine the overall area that Window, Tile Horizontal can use. Tile uses the largest available rectangular area which is
inside the main window and which is not obscured by the Messages window, other Dockable Panes (Entity Editor,
Model Tree, and Data Table), or the toolbars. If you do not change any of these, and only have one graphics win-
dow, Window, Tile Horizontal will restore it to the size and position of the default graphics window.
If you reposition or resize/reshape the Messages window, you can use Window, Tile Horizontal to automatically
make your graphics windows as large as possible without having any overlapping windows. In general, overlap-
ping windows are not desirable since they can cause additional redrawing to reveal obscured information. To make
a view the active view, you can either click inside the window or click the corresponding tab at the top of the graph-
ics window (if Window, Toggle Tabs flag is turned on)
6.3.1.4 Window, Tile Vertical
resizes and arranges all of the active graphics windows to fit horizontally in the FEMAP workspace. The windows
are arranged so that the contents of each window are visible, and so that no windows overlap.
The current size and position of the FEMAP main window, and the FEMAP Messages window combine to deter-
mine the overall area that Window, Tile Vertical can use. Tile uses the largest available rectangular area which is
inside the main window and which is not obscured by the Messages window, other Dockable Panes (Entity Editor,
Model Tree, and Data Table), or the toolbars. If you do not change any of these, and only have one graphics win-
dow, Window, Tile Vertical will restore it to the size and position of the default graphics window.
If you reposition or resize/reshape the Messages window, you can use Window, Tile Vertical to automatically make
your graphics windows as large as possible without having any overlapping windows. In general, overlapping win-
dows are not desirable since they can cause additional redrawing to reveal obscured information. To make a view
the active view, you can either click inside the window or click the corresponding tab at the top of the graphics win-
dow (if Window, Toggle Tabs flag is turned on)
6.3.1.5 Window, Cascade
... resizes and arranges all of the active graphics windows to fit in the FEMAP workspace. The windows are
arranged starting in the upper left corner of the main window workspace. Each window's title remains visible, so
that you can identify the active windows, but only one graphics window will be fully visible.
Like the Tile commands Window, Cascade chooses the available area as the largest rectangular area within the main
window that is not obscured by the Messages window, other Dockable Panes (Entity Editor, Model Tree, and Data
Table), or the toolbars. Window, Cascade is only available when you have multiple active graphics windows.
Cascading windows are not generally recommended since they can result in additional redrawing of the graphics
windows.
6.3.1.6 Window, Toggle Tabs
... toggles the view window tabs on and off. You can move from view window to view window by clicking the
tabs. You can also position the curser over any view window tab and click the right mouse button to select from a
helpful context sensitive menu which allows you to access the View, Set; Window, New; and Window, Close com-
mands, as well as, change the color of the tab and toggle the tabs on and off.
When the view window tabs are visible, the tabs show the current view window name. If multiple models are open
they show the model name and then the view name in the following convention:
Model Name : View Name
6.3.1.7 Window, Toggle Title Bars
... only available when multiple views are open in FEMAP. Toggles the Title Bars in ALL views on and off. This
can be very helpful when trying to show multiple views at once because it saves space on screen in each view.
6.3.2 Redrawing Windows
This section includes commands for redrawing of your model. There are two different commands for redrawing:
Window, Redraw and Window, Regenerate. In addition, you can show particular entities in a view, as well as apply
all changes to all views of the active model using View, All Views.
Window, Redraw... 6-41
6.3.2.1 Window, Redraw...
... forces FEMAP to redraw or redisplay the active graphics window. You can redraw your graphics at any time.
Graphics windows are redrawn automatically whenever required by Windows. Additionally, if you select the
Autoplot option under the File, Preferences, Views command, all entities that are created or modified will be drawn
automatically. This option is on by default. Unlike Window, Redraw, the Autoplot option only draws entities you
created or modified, not the full view.
For more information, see 6.1.1.2 Section Window, Regenerate
Redrawing Multiple Windows
If you have multiple graphics windows on your screen, and All Views is set, they will all be redrawn. In addition, no
matter how All Views is set, you can redraw all active windows by pressing Ctrl+Shift+D.
For more information, see Section 6.1.2, "View, All Views...".
Aborting a Redraw
Drawing your model can take a significant amount of time, depending on the size of your model and the options
you choose. In some cases, you may not want to wait for the view to be completely redrawn before you choose
your next command. In these cases, you can abort the display simply by choosing your next command.
When FEMAP is redrawing your display, the graphics cursor will change to an hourglass behind a pointer. This
shape indicates that FEMAP is busy with your current command, but the current command will be aborted auto-
matically if you make a new selection. Actually, FEMAP just watches the keyboard and mouse. The command is
aborted whenever you press any key, or mouse button. These are the actions that you have to do to choose the next
command anyway. When FEMAP is done with the current command, the hourglass will disappear and the cursor
will return to its normal pointer or crosshair shape.
Since FEMAP automatically aborts whenever you press a key or the left mouse button, you can never press either
of them before a redraw is complete, unless you want to abort. If you abort a redraw, you should still be able to
graphically select any of the entities which have been displayed. You may not be able to select entities which have
not been displayed. Extensive graphical selections should always be done in a view which has been completely
redrawn.
6.3.2.2 Window, Regenerate...
... is just like the Window, Redraw command. It forces FEMAP to redraw either the active graphics window, or all
graphics windows (if All Views is set).
When FEMAP draws your model for the first time, certain view dependent data is retained in your model. Saving
this data speeds up future redraws. For all types of displays, FEMAP will save a display list of transformed coordi-
nates. This eliminates the need to continually transform from your three-dimensional model, to the orientation you
choose on the two-dimensional screen. For hidden line displays, FEMAP also saves a sorted list of the entities
which you displayed. Once this list has been calculated, it can be redisplayed without additional hidden line calcu-
lations. Similarly, for free edge and free face displays, lists of the free edges and faces are retained. If you are using
the Quick Display capability, even more information is saved.
If you choose the Window, Redraw command, these saved lists will be used, whenever they are available. Window,
Regenerate will throw away all of the lists and then call Window, Redraw. This forces FEMAP to regenerate all of
the information from your model. If the display lists were never created, Window, Redraw and Window, Regenerate
are identical.
FEMAP will automatically discard the display lists whenever you change alignment or close/deactivate a view.
FEMAP will also update the transformed coordinates whenever you move a node or point. FEMAP will not update
or destroy the hidden line or free edge display lists, since rebuilding them involves significant computations. It is
up to you to choose the Window, Regenerate command whenever you want FEMAP to calculate a new hidden line
or free edge display. Conversely, for many modifications (zoom, pan, color, layer, small position changes...) you
can still choose Window, Redraw and save a large portion of the time required for these displays.
Ctrl+D or F12
Ctrl+Shift+D
Ctrl+G or Ctrl+F12
Regenerating Multiple Windows
If you have multiple graphics windows on your screen, and All Views is set, they will all be regenerated. In addi-
tion, no matter how All Views is set, you can regenerate all active windows by pressing Ctrl+Shift+G.
6.3.2.3 Window, Show Entities...
... provides a way to graphically query your model. Although there are many possible uses for this command, there
are two primary reasons you might want to choose it:
What is the ID of this element (or node...)?
The first potential use occurs if you have a model displayed on the screen with no labels (because the picture is too
complicated with them). You can choose Window, Show Entities and graphically pick one or more entities. With the
labelling option turned on, FEMAP will display the IDs of the entities that you choose.
Where is element (or node...) number 10?
The second use involves finding certain entities in a complicated model. If you need to find a certain entity, you can
just type its ID, rather than selecting it graphically. FEMAP will highlight the entities that you have chosen and
optionally add labels. If you autoscale your model before using this command, the entity will be visible on your
screen.
Selecting Options
The Window, Show Entities command requires input of the type of entity to show. You can only select one type of
entity each time you use this command.
Style
If you select Erase Background First, the window will be erased before the selected entities are shown, otherwise
the entities will just be added to the current picture.
Transparent Highlight will highlight the selected entities, but will make all non-selected entities temporarily trans-
parent as well.
The Label with ID option controls whether IDs will be added to the selected entities. If entity labels are already on,
they will be drawn even if this option is off. If they are normally off however, turning this option on insures that the
entities that you show will be labelled with their ID.
Turning Show Normals on will show the element normals for the selected elements.
By default, Show Color is selected. This will cause all selected entities to be drawn in the color listed to the right.
You can change this color by typing a different ID, or by pressing Palette to choose a color from the palette dialog.
The default show color has been chosen to highlight the entities that you choose. If you just want to add IDs to the
selected entities, you may want to switch to entity colors. This will display the entities in their normal colors.
Selecting the Entities to Show
After you choose the desired options, and press OK, you will see the standard entity selection dialog box. The type
of entities that are selected by this box depends on the entity type option that you chose. Just like other commands,
you can use any combination of keyboard and graphical input to select the entities that you want to show. Press OK
to show the entities that you have selected.
Hint: If you are redrawing your model and something does not look correct, always try to do a regenerate
before looking for other problems.
Note: The level of transparency used in the Transparent Highlight option can be adjusted using a global value
for all entities using View, Options; Category: Tools and View Style; Transparency option.
Hint: The Window, Show Entities command is also very useful to show connections between FEA entities and
geometry. For example, to see what nodes are attached to a surface, select Node as the option. When the
standard entity selection dialog box appears, change the method to On Surface, and select the desired
surface. FEMAP will then highlight all nodes that are attached to that surface.
Ctrl+Shift+G
Shift+F12
Window, Open Views - 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 6-43
6.3.2.4 Window, Open Views - 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
The nine most recently opened views are listed on the bottom of the Window menu. If there are multiple models
open in the same FEMAP session, they are listed using a number model name : view name convention. For
example: 1 Wing.MOD : Stringers.
6.4 Groups and Layers
The previous section concentrated on the View menu command to manipulate the view. The other major area to
modify what you see in a view involves groups and layers. By using groups and layers, you can segment your
model into smaller, more manageable, discrete pieces. These pieces can then be used to minimize the amount of
information presented in the view window, or in printed reports by specifying which group will be seen or used to
create a report. Groups and layers also make it easier to manipulate, update, and apply loads to your model.
This section will describe the differences between groups and layers, commands pertaining to layering, which are
scattered throughout the FEMAP menu, and the Group menu.
6.4.1 Differences Between Groups and Layers
Groups and layers provide a convenient method of segmenting a model, however, there are some key differences
between groups and layers. Some main points about groups and layers are summarized in the table below.
By creating multiple groups, and using multiple layers, you can create an infinite number of visual combinations
for your model. This greater flexibility also provides the disadvantage of more methods to hide things in your
model. If you do not see an entity which you created, it is a good bet that either it is not in the group you are cur-
rently displaying, or it is not on a visible layer.
Groups are designed to mimic how FEA models were numbered and arranged when they were built by hand. For
example, in the aircraft industry, a model of a complete aircraft would be carefully numbered. All the nodes and
elements at a frame at a particular location along the fuselage would be numbered in such a manner as to clearly
identify them as belonging to that frame. FEMAP grouping makes it very easy to isolate portions of a finite element
model that are numbered in such a manner. You may also easily group elements using a particular property or mate-
rial.
Layers, on the other hand, are designed similar to layering in most CAD systems. The name layer comes from the
clear sheet of paper analogy for CAD layering, where all the entities associated with a given layer would be drawn
on a clear sheet of paper, and only the active clear sheets being overlaid would produce a visual image.
6.4.2 Layer Commands
There are several commands associated with layers which are scattered through the FEMAP menu. They can be
separated into two major areas: creating a layer and viewing layers, which are discussed below. Other commands
involve deleting layers, modifying layer reference on entities, and the Group, Layers command. Brief explanations
are also provided for these entities.
Groups Layers
Reference
Entity in multiple groups Each entity on only one layer
Display
Only one group at a time
Active or specific group
Any combination of layers
Active
Only one active group Only one active layer
6.4.2.1 Creating a Layer (Tools, Layers command)
The Tools, Layers command is used to define layers in your model. By themselves, layers cannot be displayed.
Rather, all entities in FEMAP are placed on the layers that you create with this command. The following dialog box
is displayed:
This dialog box works just like the other set creation dialog boxes. To make a new layer, enter an ID that does not
exist in the list of available layers. Then enter a title, choose a color and press OK. You may also use this command
to activate a layer by selecting the layer and pressing OK (you may also use the View, Layers command to activate
a layer). Unlike other sets, you must always have some layer active.
Once layers have been created and entities assigned to them, they can be used to control display and entity selection
(View, Layers command), or to control groups (Group Layers command).
6.4.2.2 Viewing Layers (View, Layers... command)
The View, Layers command allows you to control which layers are active for the display. You may Show All Layers
(default setting) or Show Visible Layers Only. You may select any combination of layers to Show or Hide. For more
information, see Section 6.1.4, "View, Layers...".
6.4.2.3 Related Layer Commands
Other commands related to layers include the Modify, Layer menu, Delete, Tools, Layers, and Group, Layers. Each
of these commands are described in more detail in their appropriate sections. A brief description, however, is pro-
vided below.
Modify, Layer
The Modify, Layer commands actually make no changes to the layers themselves. Instead, you can use these com-
mands to move entities from one layer to another. This is a much easier method of changing the layer of a large
number of entities in comparison to Modify, Edit, which requires input for each entity you selected.
Delete, Tool, Layer
This command enables you to delete a layer. You will typically only want to use this command when you have an
empty layer. This command does not delete entities that are on the layer. In fact, these entities may still have the
same layer reference, but the layer itself will be removed. The entities on the deleted layers will then not be visible
unless you have Show All Layers active. There are also no checks made to see if entities exist on a layer when you
are about to delete it. Therefore, be careful when using this command.
Group, Layers
This command provides an easy method to limit a group to a specific number of layer(s). This does not automati-
cally create a group with all the entities in that layer. It simply limits the selected entities to a specific layer. For
more information, see Section 6.4.3.4, "Group, Layers...".
6.4.3 Group Menu Commands
The commands on this menu allow you to create, edit, and manipulate groups within your model. These commands
are separated into three major sections:
Hint: If you do delete a layer which has information contained on it, you may simply use Tools, Layers to cre-
ate a new layer with that same number. The entities which were on the deleted layer will automatically
be placed on the new layer.
Group, Set... 6-45
the Group, Set command
group manipulations
commands to add certain identities to the group
How Groups are Used
FEMAP groups identify portions of your model. With the View, Select command (press the Model Data command
button), you can select a group that will be used to limit your display to the portion of the model which is in the
group. In addition to simplifying your display, this group also has an impact on postprocessing. Contour/criteria
limits can automatically be adjusted to the peak values which occur on those entities in the group (see Section
6.1.5.3, "View, Options..."). Similarly, nodal output data is converted to elemental output data, and vice versa based
on the selected group (see Section 8.5.5.5, "Converting Nodal and Elemental Data").
For more information on methodology and how to use groups, see Section 5.9, "Groups, Layers and Viewing Your
Model" in the FEMAP User Guide. This section will concentrate on the individual commands contained on the
Group menu.
6.4.3.1 Group, Set...
... creates a new group, or activates an existing group. It is similar to the Model, Load Set and Model, Constraint Set
commands.
To create a new group, enter an ID that does not appear in the list of available sets (groups). Then enter a descrip-
tive title, and press OK. To activate a group that already exists, simply choose it from the list, or enter the ID, and
press OK. To deactivate all groups, press Reset.
All group definition commands work with the active group. You will not be able to define or edit a group if it has
not been activated using this command.
6.4.3.2 Group, Operations Menu
The commands on this menu are used to manipulate a group. They do not add any new definitions to the current
group.
Group, Operations, Evaluate...
... evaluates any number of selected groups. When you invoke this command, FEMAP brings up a dialog box
which allows you to select any number of groups by highlighting them using windows standard methods for multi-
selection (holding CTRL down for selecting multiple entities one at a time or hold SHIFT to select a Range of enti-
ties). Once the desired groups are highlighted, click OK and no more user input is required. Your groups will now
contain all entities which satisfy the rules of the group.
You should use this command any time that you create or modify entities that should be selected in the current
group. This command will use the group clipping planes, layer options, and rules to find the entities that are
included.
Group, Operations, Evaluate Always...
... sets a group to be evaluated every time it is used. When this option is set for the active group, you will see a
check mark beside the command in the menu.
If you choose to always evaluate, every time you use the group, FEMAP will reevaluate all clipping, layers, and
rules. You do not have to use the Group, Operations, Evaluate command. This can significantly decrease system
performance, but will automatically add new or modified entities to the group every time you use it.
You can turn this option off by reselecting the command, and choosing No - don't automatically evaluate.
You do not need to turn on Evaluate Always for a group that you select for Automatic Add. In fact, it will be much
faster if you do not.
Note: If you are displaying a group where you have turned on Evaluate Always, you will not be able to graph-
ically select nodes or other entities in that view. In addition, any attempt to reference that view will be
significantly slower than if Evaluate Always was off, because the group must be reevaluated.
Alt+F2
Group, Operations, Automatic Add...
...automatically adds all newly created entities to the selected group. With this option there is no need to reevaluate
the selected group to have the entities appear - they are added without the need for reevaluation.
Group, Operations, Renumber...
...provides the capability to maintain the same entities in the group even when you renumber the entities. When you
select this command, FEMAP will ask you whether it is OK to renumber the active group when you renumber enti-
ties. The default is Yes for this command. This means that if you have included Node 1 in the group, and you then
renumber it to 50, it will still remain in the group (i.e. FEMAP will change the Group Node ID entry from 1 to 50).
If you select No for the renumbering option, Node 1 will remain as the entry, and you will lose the new Node 50
(renumbered 1) from the group. Any entity you make in the future with Node ID 1 will automatically be included in
the group. You will typically want to have this option on Yes to prevent changes in your groups from renumbering.
Group, Operations, Copy...
... makes a new group which is a copy of the active group. When you invoke this command, you must input the ID
and title of the group that will be created. If you check the Evaluate option, you will force the group to be reevalu-
ated prior to being copied. If the active group has not been evaluated since it was created or last modified, FEMAP
will always evaluate it before the group is copied. This evaluation must happen, and will occur no matter how you
set the Evaluate option.
Group, Operations, Condense...
... is similar to Group, Operations, Copy, in that it creates a new group which selects the same entities as the active
group. In this case, however, the new group is not a copy of the active group. Instead, all of the entities which are
selected in the active group are used to define ID rules in the new group. The new ID rules (coordinate system IDs,
point IDs, node IDs, etc.) will select all of the entities that were previously selected. It does not matter if the origi-
nal group selected the entities by clipping or other types of rules; the selections will be converted to ID rules. None
of the original rules, clipping, or layer information will be included in the new group.
When to Use Condense
Condense is usually used when you have defined a group using clipping or other fairly general rules (like Nodes 1
to 10000), and you want to make sure that no entities, other than those which are currently selected, will be inad-
vertently included during future group evaluations. In addition, a condensed group will typically reevaluate faster
than the group defined by clipping.
Condense will reduce these general selections to specific rules which will only include the currently selected enti-
ties.
Group, Operations, Booleans...
... creates a new group from a selected set of existing groups based on a chosen boolean operation. When this
command is chosen, the Group Booleans dialog box will appear:
Note: You will be able to choose from the Active group, Select a group or None. The default is None, which
means that new entities will not be added into any group. If you choose the Active option, newly created
entities will be added to whatever group is active at that time. You can change the active group using
the Group, Set command. If no group is active, it is the same as choosing the None option. If you
choose Select, then you must also choose an existing group from the combo box. All entities will be
added to that group. In this mode, if you want to switch to a different group, you must use this com-
mand to make a new selection.
Note: In File, Preferences, the Views, Autoplot Created/Modified Geometry preference must be on, or Auto-
matic Add will be disabled.
Group, Operations Menu 6-47
The Group to Create portion of the dialog box allows you to choose the ID for the new group and give it a Title. If
you do not specify a Title, FEMAP will create one based on the IDs of the Groups AND the Operation used to cre-
ate the new group. For example, if you are using the Add/Combine operation and have selected groups 1, 3, and 5,
the default Title would be Add 1, 3, 5.
Multiple groups can be chosen from the Select One or More Groups from the List to Process list in the Groups to
Process portion of the dialog box using windows standard selection methods. Holding down the Ctrl key and click-
ing in the list allows you to choose multiple groups one at a time. Holding down the Shift key while clicking in
the list allows you to choose a range of groups.
There are six choices in the Operation section of the dialog box. Here is a brief description of each operation:
Add/Combine Creates a new group by adding multiple groups together.
For example::
Subtract Creates a new group by subtracting any number of groups from a Single selected group.
Note: The Base Model for all of the Examples in this section is a simple 9 element high by 7 element
wide rectangle. Only elements are in the groups being processed with the various boolean operations.
Note: When the Subtract operation is chosen, the Subtract From drop-down list in the Groups to Process por-
tion of the dialog box will become available. The group chosen in the Subtract From drop-down list is
the base group and all of the groups chosen in the list will be subtracted from the base group.
+ =
For Example:
In All Creates a new group that contains entities which are in ALL of the selected groups (i.e., if element 1 is in
group A AND Group B, element 1 WILL BE in group C). Another way to think of it is that only entities which are
common to ALL the selected groups will be in the new group.
For Example:
Only in One Creates a new group that contains entities which are ONLY in one of the selected groups (i.e., if ele-
ment 1 is in both group A AND Group B, element 1 will NOT be in group C). Another way to think of it is that
only unique entities will be placed into the new group.
For Example:
Not in Any Creates a new group that contains entities which are NOT in ANY of the selected groups, but are in
the rest of the model (i.e., If elements 1-10 are NOT in Group A and NOT in Group B, they WILL BE IN Group C).
Note: When using the Not in Any operation, only entity types that are in at least one of the Base Groups
will be in the new group that is created from entities NOT in the Base Groups.
For example, start with a model containing 100 nodes, 81 elements:
If Group A contains n elements and zero nodes, then Group B will only contain the 81-n ele-
ments that are NOT in Group A.
If Group A contains n elements and n nodes, then Group B will contain the 81-n elements and
the 100-n nodes that are NOT in Group A.
- =
=
Elements Common to
Both Groups in New Group
IN ALL
=
Elements Unique to
Each Group in New Group
Only in One
For Example:
Not in All - Creates a new group that contains entities which are NOT in ALL of the selected groups (i.e., If ele-
ments 1-10 are in Group A, but not in Group B and Group C, they WILL BE IN Group D). This command is only
useful when three or more groups are being processed. Only entities Common to ALL selected groups will NOT
be in the new group. If you use this command with only two groups, it will create the same group as Only in One.
Group, Operations, Add Related Entities...
... when this command is used, ALL other entities that are somehow related to the entities currently in a selected
Group will then be added to that Group.
For instance, if a group contains only elements, using this command would add all nodes, properties, and materials
used by those elements to the group. In addition, any loads or constraints associated with the elements or their
nodes would also be placed in the group. In this case, nodal loads, elemental loads, nodal constraints, and constraint
equations would be added to the group. Also, if the elements in the group happen to be laminates, then any layup
used by the laminates would also be added to the group.
Group, Operations, Generate...
... will automatically create groups by segmenting your model based on geometric, property and material features
and discontinuities. The capabilities of this command are also used by the Model, Output, Extrapolate command to
segment your model prior to extrapolation. In that case however no groups are created.
When you choose this command, you will be asked for the elements that you want to consider. This command only
works with planar or solid elements. Line and other types of elements will simply be ignored. Typically, you should
only choose one type (planar or solid) at a time. You will then see the following dialog box:
The correct element type should be selected automatically based
on the elements that you selected - unless you chose multiple
types. You must then decide how you want to segment your
model.
Add Layers
If you turn this option on, not only will elements be placed into
segmented groups, their layers will also be updated so that each
segment is on a separate layer. This can be useful if you want to
display multiple segments simultaneously, since any combina-
tion of layers can be displayed.
Attribute Breaks
Breaking your model into segments based on attributes allows
you to find areas of differing thickness or material. When used
for output extrapolation, these options recognize that stresses or
other output are not continuous across different materials or
other part/thickness boundaries.
If you want to put elements with different properties into different groups, choose Property ID. Since each property
references a material, this will automatically put each material into one or more groups. If you just want to break
=
Elements NOT in either
Group in New Group
Not in Any
based on changing materials, choose Material ID. Choose None to skip this type of checking when the model is
being segmented.
In addition to these basic attribute options, you can also choose to formulate different groups based on changes in
the layer or color that each element references. These options really provide you a way to customize the way that
FEMAP will segment your model. For example, if you really want to break some portion of your model into multi-
ple parts, but all elements have the same property, you can always set their color or layer prior to using this com-
mand, then choose the appropriate option, and FEMAP will segment based on those attributes.
Geometric Breaks
Unlike the attribute breaks, which can be used with either planar or solid elements, geometric breaks apply only to
planar elements. Geometric breaks are very important for segmenting complex plate structures. For example, if you
have a box structure, geometric breaks will automatically detect and segment each face of the box - even if all ele-
ments have identical attributes.
When you choose to do geometric breaking, FEMAP calculates the normal to the planar face for each element. If
the normals of two adjoining elements are within the angle that you specify of being parallel, they will be consid-
ered to be in the same segment (neglecting any attribute differences). If they are not within that angle, a new seg-
ment will be formed. If the Matching Normals Only option is off, then the direction of the normal vector is not
considered when doing this comparison - two coplanar elements with reversed normals will not generate a break. If
the option is on, then the normal direction is considered and reversed normals will usually cause breaks.
To ignore geometric breaks, choose None.
Group, Operations, Generate Solids...
...will automatically create groups based on solid geometry. You simply select the solids you wish to group and
FEMAP will create one or more groups containing the selected solids and their associated curves, lines and points.
If you select Create Multiple Groups, then one group will be created for each solid that you selected. If not, then
one group will be created containing all of the solids.
If you select Include Mesh, Loads and Constraints, then these entities which are associated with the solids will
also be included in the groups along with the geometry.
Note: This command can create quite a few groups given a large model - especially if you use geometric
breaks with a small angle. It can also take quite a while to evaluate the entire model.
Note: Since FEMAP has no way of knowing what the various segments of your model represent, it simply
assigns default titles to the groups that are generated. After they are created, it is usually best to display
each group, one at a time, and change the title (use Group, Set) to something that will be more meaning-
ful to you.
Complete Model
Generated Groups
The default for this command is Create New Groups,
which will create new groups based on the selected
Generation Options. In addition, Move to New Layers
will move the entities for each new group to a new
layer. Finally, you can have FEMAP only create new
layers and move entities for the selected solids onto
them instead of creating new groups and new layers, by
turning OFF the Create New Groups option and turning
on Move to New Layers.
Operations, Generate Property...
... will automatically create groups by segmenting your model based on properties. You simply select the properties
you wish to consider and FEMAP will create separate groups containing elements that reference each property.
This works very similar to Group, Operations, Generate, except you pick the particular properties for the groups,
and no discontinuities will be considered. All elements in the model referencing a particular property will be placed
in the same group, regardless of their locations.
Group, Operations, Generate Material...
... is similar to the Group, Operations, Generate Property command, except the groups are generated based upon
the materials of the elements (on their property cards), not the properties themselves.
Group, Operations, Generate Elem Type...
...is similar to the Group, Operations, Generate Property command, except the groups are based upon the element
type, not the properties themselves.
Group, Operations, Generate With Output...
...automatically creates a group by selecting nodes or elements that reference analysis output that meet one or more
specified criteria. When you choose this command, you will be asked to select the Output Sets that contain the
results that you want to consider. Only results in these sets will be considered when deciding whether a specific
node or element meets the selection criteria. When you press OK, you will see another dialog box, that allows you
to specify the selection criteria.
The options on the left side of this dialog let you specify the criteria that will be used to evaluate the results you
choose. Only criteria that you add to the Specified Selection Criteria list (using the Add Criteria button) will actu-
ally be used.
Output Sets
These options let you choose the Output Sets to consider for this criteria. As you remember, you selected a list of
Output Sets in the previous dialog box. If you choose Any Set, then results from each of those sets will be evaluated
for each node/element, and if any of the results meets the criteria, then that node/element will be selected. If you
choose All Sets, then results in every selected set must meet the criteria for the node/element to be selected. Again,
both of these options only refer to all of the sets that you selected, not necessarily all of the output in your model. If
you choose Set, you must select the single Output Set that you want to consider from the list. In this case, and only
this case, the set you choose does not have to be one of the originally selected sets.
Output Vectors
From the From list, you must select the output that you want to use to select your nodes/elements. The vectors that
are available in this list change depending on the setting of the Entity Selection options. Normally, you will want to
simply select a From vector, and leave Thru set to None. This will result in one criteria being added to the list,
using the vector you select. If however, you want to use the exact same criteria for an entire range of vectors you
can choose a Thru vector. When you Add this criteria, you will actually see one criteria for each vector in this
range.
Include Components / Corners
When you select an output vector, you may want to consider associated results as well. If this option is off, only the
single output value in the vector you choose will be used. If it is on, however, associated component or corner out-
put will also be compared. If any of these associated values, or the value of the vector you chose, meets the criteria,
then the node/element will be selected.
Some examples of this include:
Include All Layers
This option is for use with results on plate or laminate elements. If it is off, then only the vector you select will be
evaluated. If it is on however, then similar results from all layers of that element will be evaluated, and if any meet
the criteria, then that element will be selected. For plate elements, this means no matter which output you select,
results from the Top, Middle, and Bottom locations (if available) will be evaluated. For laminate elements, no mat-
ter which ply you select, all plys will be checked.
Selection Criteria
These options provide the basis on which output values are evaluated. You can compare the values to see if they are
Above a Minimum, Below a Maximum, or Between or Outside the Minimum and Maximum. In the last two options,
the minimum must always be less than the maximum.
Entity Selection
You can choose to select either Nodes or Elements with these options. When you change these options, the avail-
able output vectors in the lists change to only show the results for the selected type. In addition, whichever option
Note: If the Specified Selection Criteria list is too small to see the entire criteria, you can drag the corner of
the dialog box, or press the icon at the right side of the toolbar to make the box, and the list bigger.
Note: You can currently define up to 125 simultaneous criteria. This does not include the output vectors that
are checked with the Include Components/Corners or Include All Layers options.
You select... If Include Components is on...
...Total Translation or other
Total nodal output
...the Total vector, and the X, Y and Z Component vectors will all
be evaluated
...output at the centroid of a plate
or solid element
...the centroidal vector will be evaluated, as well as, the output at all
of the element corners.
...output at one end of a beam ...similar output at both ends of the beam will be evaluated (Note:
picking output at one stress recovery location will not automatically
evaluate the other stress recovery locations on a beam - those must
be specified as individual criteria - possibly using the Thru option)
you choose also represents the entities that will be selected into the Group you are defining. These options are only
available when you are defining a Group. If you get to this dialog box from the Pick method in the Entity Selection
dialog box, then either Nodes or Elements will automatically be selected, depending on the entity type that you are
selecting.
Select If
These options allow you to build very powerful combinations of multiple criteria, however they can be somewhat
confusing. Lets look at the simple case of two criteria. If you choose All Criteria Met (And), then when the two cri-
teria are evaluated, both criteria must be met for the node/element to be selected. The And refers to the following
syntax - if criteria 1 AND criteria 2 are met, then the entity will be selected. On the other hand, if you choose This
Criteria Met (Or), then if either criteria is met, the node/element will be selected. Again from a syntax standpoint -
if criteria 1 OR criteria 2 is met, then the entity will be selected.
Normally, you will want to choose one of these methods when you start to define criteria and leave it set - this will
result in either requiring all criteria to be met (And), or any one of the specified criteria being met (Or) for the
nodes/elements to be selected. By changing these settings as you define criteria however you can build more com-
plicated relationships. To do this successfully however, you need to understand that FEMAP evaluates criteria, and
these options in a sequential fashion, starting at the beginning of your list. Shown with parentheses to help to indi-
cate the order of operations, this could be described as:
(((((1 And/Or 2) And/Or 3) And/Or 4) And/Or 5) And/Or...)
where the numbers represent the various criteria you specify, and And/Or can be either one of the Select If
options. As you can see, if you are varying these options, the overall process is order dependent, so you will want to
think about this before defining your criteria.
Title
When you are defining a Group, this allows you to specify a meaningful title for the Group that will be created.
Add Criteria
Press this to add the options you have defined on the left to the Specified Selection Criteria list.
Update
When you click on an item in the Specified Selection Criteria list, the values corresponding to that entry will be
loaded into the left of the dialog box. You can then change the values and update that entry by pressing this button.
The Thru option will be ignored when you use this button since it really generates multiple criteria, not the single
one that you are updating.
Delete and Reset
To remove a criteria that you have added to the Specified Selection Criteria list, click on the item in the list, and
press Delete. To remove all of your defined criteria, press Reset.
Group, Operations, Generate Superelements...
...is similar to the Group, Operations, Generate Property command, except the groups are based upon the Superele-
ment ID of each node.
Because only nodes have any type of Superelement Identification, you will notice that only elements with ALL
nodes being of a particular Superelement ID will be in the group generated for that Superelement ID.
If an element has nodes from two different Superelement IDs, and one of the Superelement IDs is 0 (Residual
Structure), that Element will be placed in the Residual Structure group. On the other hand, if an element has
nodes from two different Superelement IDs, and one of the Superelement IDs is NOT 0, that element will not
appear in any of the generated groups.
Group, Operations, Generate Entities on Layers...
...is used to generate an individual group for each layer in the model which has been selected. Each generated group
will contain ALL entities on a specific layer. You will be asked if you would like to Condense the new groups or
not. See Group, Operations, Condense for more information.
Group, Operations, Move to Layer...
... is used to move all entities in a selected group or groups to a single selected layer. If an entity is in multiple
groups, the entity will be moved to the layer which has most recently had a group containing the entity moved onto
it with this command.
For example, element 5 resides in both Group 1 and Group 2. If the entities in Group 1 are moved to Layer
2 with this command, element 5 will be moved to Layer 2. If this command is used again to move the entities in
Group 2 to Layer 3, then element 5 would also be moved to Layer 3, because it was in the group that was
most recently moved to a layer.
Group, Operations, Peel...
... is used with solid elements to remove one or more layers from the outside of a model. Initially, you choose the
elements that you want to peel. Typically you will want to select the entire model. Remember however, that only
solid elements are considered for this command.
You specify the number of layers of elements to peel off of the outside. Elements are peeled if they have one or
more faces on the outer surface of the selected elements. Similarly if you choose to peel multiple layers, each layer
is removed, and the next layer is peeled from the remaining elements.
You have two choices as you group elements using this command. You can create groups from the outer layers - the
ones that are peeled. This will result in one group for each layer that you choose. You can also choose to create a
group from the elements that remain after all peeling has been completed - i.e. the core elements.
While it is somewhat difficult to visualize the result of this command the following picture attempts to show it:
Group, Operations, Select Model...
... is a shortcut to create rules that will select your entire model. Rather than manually going to each entity type and
adding a rule that includes all IDs (1 to 99999999), you can use this command to automatically create all of those
rules in the current group. When you are asked whether to create the rules, you must press Yes or the command will
end.
After creating these rules, you can then go add additional rules to remove or exclude portions of your model.
Note: This command is a great way to be able to list all of the entities on a specific layer. Simply run this com-
mand, choose a layer or layers, then use List, Group command and check the List All Entities in Group
option.
Complete Model
First Layer (no center elements)
Second Layer (no center element)
Remaining Core
Group Clipping Menu 6-55
Group, Operations, Select Mesh...
...selects all the entities related to a mesh and places them into a group.
After you pick the command, you select the elements for the group. FEMAP then adds the related entities which
may include nodes, properties, materials, loads, and constraints.
Group, Operations, Select Region...
... enables you to put Connection Regions, Fluid Regions, Bolt Regions, and Rotor Regions into the current group
AND also places the components used to define these regions into the group (i.e., if a selected Connection Region
is Defined By the faces of 20 solid elements, those 20 elements will be added to the group as well as the Connec-
tion Region).
When this command is used, the standard entity selection dialog box will appear and you can simply select the
Regions to include in the group.
Group, Operations, Reset Rules...
... deletes all rules in the active group. You can selectively delete rules by choosing the appropriate Group menu
commands and deleting entries in the standard entity selection dialog boxes. If you want to delete all of your rules,
of all types, this command is much faster.
As for all delete commands, you will be asked to confirm your desire to delete the rules before this command pro-
ceeds.
6.4.3.3 Group Clipping Menu
The commands on this submenu are used to define the coordinate and plane clipping options for the active group.
You can independently specify both coordinate clipping and up to six clipping planes.
How Clipping is Evaluated
When you specify either plane or coordinate clipping, FEMAP bases the selection of entities on coordinate loca-
tions. Points, nodes, and coordinate systems are all clipped based on their location in your model. Text that is posi-
tioned relative to your model is clipped in the same way. View positioned text can not be selected via clipping.
Other entities are clipped based on the points or nodes that they reference. For example, elements are included if
any of the nodes that they reference are included by clipping. It is not necessary that all of the nodes referenced by
an element are included - just one. Nodal loads are included if the nodes where they are applied have been selected
by clipping. Elemental loads are included only if the elements where they are applied have been selected by clip-
ping. This implies that at least one of the nodes referenced by those elements has been included also. If you are try-
ing to establish clipping planes to select elements, you only need to include one of the nodes to include the
elements.
Group, Clipping, Coordinate...
... allows you to quickly select portions of your model based on their coordinate values relative to a selected coor-
dinate system.
Note: The Group Clipping Screen, Plane, and Volume commands all control the same six clipping planes.
They are not independent - choosing one will override previous plane selections. FEMAP will therefore
ask you to confirm that you want to turn off the previous clipping options, if they were defined using a
different command. If you answer No for screen and volume clipping, the command will continue, but
the defaults will be relatively meaningless. When you choose No for plane clipping, the clipping planes
that were previously active will remain active. You can use this technique to edit one or more planes
that you defined using screen or volume.
The Group Selection by Coordinate Clipping dialog box selects the clipping options. You can choose to clip Above,
Below, Between, or Outside of the selected minimum and/or maximum coordinates. The Coordinate Value section
allows you to select the coordinate direction that will control clipping. If you choose None, coordinate clipping will
be turned off.
Finally, you can select any existing coordinate system. To evaluate the clipping, FEMAP will transform the entity
coordinates into the system you select and compare them against the Minimum and/or Maximum values that you
specify.
When you choose Above, anything which is above the Maximum will be clipped, or removed. Anything less than
the Maximum will be included. Below is the opposite. Anything less than the Minimum will be clipped. Between
will clip or remove anything between the Minimum and Maximum. Outside is the opposite.
Clipping Non-Planar Regions
If you choose a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the clipping region can be non-planar. For example, if
you wanted to select a cylindrical volume, you could choose a cylindrical system and then clip above an X (actually
a radius for a cylindrical system) value. Everything that has a radius which is smaller than the Maximum value that
you specify will be included.
Group, Clipping, Screen...
... allows you to quickly orient up to four (of the possible six) clipping planes. With this command you pick a series
of locations. The clipping planes will be oriented to pass through those positions and be normal to the active view -
hence the title Screen Clipping. Although the orientation of the active view orients the clipping planes, the planes
are still defined relative to your model. That means that if you rotate the view after you define the clipping planes,
the planes will not rotate. They are still defined relative to model coordinates - which cannot change. This approach
insures that the same entities are always selected for the group, no matter how you orient the view.
When you invoke the command, the Group Selection by Screen Clipping dialog box will be displayed. You can
choose between four possible methods to orient the clipping planes. Rectangle allows you to specify two opposite
corners of a rectangular region. The sides of the rectangle are aligned with the sides of the window. The 2 Point
method defines a single clipping plane which passes through the two locations and which is perpendicular to the
active view. Both the 3 Point and the 4 Point methods define clipping polygons, just like the Rectangle method.
With these options however, you can specify an arbitrary polygon.
Although you can specify a convex polygon with the 4 Point method, it will not clip your model properly. Since all
clipping is really done with planes, they can only properly be combined to form non-convex regions. The figure
shows how, and why, a convex region will be improperly clipped.
Group Clipping Menu 6-57
After choosing a method, you should define the locations that you want to use to position the clipping plane or
planes. While you can always type X, Y and Z coordinates, the easiest way to define these positions is to use the
graphics cursor to choose screen locations. Simply move the cursor to the location you want and press the left
mouse button. Then, move to the next location and press again. As you move the cursor around in your graphics
window, you will see lines which outline the region that you are defining. These lines can assist you in properly
positioning the clipping planes. If you are typing coordinates, or you just want to verify your final positions before
pressing OK, you can press Preview to draw an outline around the clipping region.
If you type coordinates, they must always be relative to the active coordinate system. You cannot choose an active
system in this command. Before invoking this command, you can choose an active coordinate system using the
Tools, Parameters command, or many others.
To complete the screen clipping specification, you must choose whether to clip inside or outside the clipping
region. For the methods that define polygonal regions, this choice should be obvious. For the 2 Point method, Out-
side chooses the side of the plane indicated by the right-hand rule going from the first to the second point and then
into the screen.
Choosing Outside will clip or remove all entities which lie outside of the clipping region, and will select all entities
which are inside the region. Choosing Inside does just the opposite.
Group, Clipping, Plane...
... enables you to independently position the six clipping planes. For this command, the standard plane definition
dialog boxes are used to position the planes. Only one plane can be positioned each time you use this command.
When you choose Group, Clipping, Plane, you will see the Group Selection by Plane Clipping dialog box. You can
choose which plane to define or update by selecting one of the option buttons from 1 to 6. If a plane is already
active you will see the word On beside the option button. You must also choose whether to clip the positive side or
negative side of the plane. The positive side is the side toward the plane normal direction. Clipping the positive side
will ignore all entities on the side toward the positive plane normal and include entities on the other side.
When you press OK, the standard plane definition dialog box will be displayed. You can choose any of the defini-
tion methods to orient the plane.
If you want to turn a particular plane off, select the appropriate option button, and press Reset. If you want to turn
all planes off, it is quicker to use the Group, Clipping, Reset command.
Working with Multiple Clipping Planes
By correctly choosing between the Positive Side and Negative Side options, you can clip entities on either side of a
plane. When you are trying to combine multiple planes to clip a more complex region, you must be certain that
these orientations are properly aligned. If they are not, you will not select the correct portion of your model. In gen-
eral, if you want to select some region of your model using multiple planes, you should use the Positive Side
option. Then, position the clipping planes around the periphery of the region you want to keep, with all plane nor-
mals pointing outward. As stated previously, you can not create convex clipping regions.
Clipping Polygon
This edge clips
the shaded area
This area is inside
the polygon, but
is still clipped by
the other edge
Group, Clipping, Volume...
... automatically positions all six clipping planes to form a cubic (hexahedral) volume. There are two methods for
defining the desired volume, which you can select from the Group Selection by Volume Clipping dialog box, a 2-
point method or an 8-point method.
The 2 Point method defines a cubic volume, aligned with the global rectangular coordinate system. For this
method, when you press OK, the standard coordinate definition dialog box will be displayed twice, once for each
corner. The two coordinates that you specify will define the diagonal of the clipping cube.
With the 8 Point method, you can define a general hexahedron. The standard coordinate definition dialog box is
displayed eight times. Each coordinate defines a corner of the hexahedron. You must specify the corners in the
same order as you would for an 8-noded solid element - around the bottom face and then around the top face.
Before you press OK, you must also choose whether to clip outside or inside the volume. If you clip outside, all
entities which are outside of the volume you define will be skipped. The entities which are inside will be selected
into the group. Clipping inside does just the opposite.
Group, Clipping, Reset Clip...
... turns off both coordinate clipping and plane clipping. This command will ask two questions. The first asks
whether you wish to turn off all plane clipping. The second asks whether to turn off coordinate clipping. If you
answer Yes to either of these questions, the associated clipping options will be turned off.
6.4.3.4 Group, Layers...
... defines the layers which can be referenced by entities
which are included in the group. You can not automatically
select entities using this command, but you will remove
them from the group if they are not on one of the active lay-
ers.
The Limit Group to Selected Layers dialog box specifies the
allowable layers. Initially, All layers are acceptable. If you
choose one of the other options, you must specify the Mini-
mum and/or Maximum allowable layer. The Between option
will enable inclusion of entities which reference the Mini-
mum or Maximum layers (or anything in between). Outside
will allow you to select entities that reference layers num-
bers which are less than (but not equal to) the minimum, or that reference layers which are greater than (but not
equal to) the maximum.
6.4.3.5 Grouping Individual Entities
The remaining commands involve adding individual entities to the group. They are separated into different sections
based upon the type of entity to group. Each entity will also have several methods available for including them in
the group. Common methods to all entities include Group by ID, Color, and Layer. Additional options will be avail-
able based upon the entity (i.e. you can select curves by methods Using Point, On Surface, or On Solid, while you
can select materials by methods on Property, on Element, or Type).
For more information, see Section 5.9, "Groups, Layers and Viewing Your Model" in the FEMAP User Guide.
Group, Text Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be used to select text. You
can select text into your group using the common methods only (ID, Color, or Layer).
Group, Text, ID
Group, Point Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be used to select points.
You can select points into your group based upon ID, Color, Layer, Definition Coordinate System, Curves that ref-
erence them, or any combination of these methods.
Grouping Individual Entities 6-59
Group, Point, ID
Group, Curve Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be used to select curves.
You can select curves into your group based on ID, Color, Layer, Points that they reference, Surfaces that reference
them, Solids that reference them, or any combination of these methods.
Group, Curve, ID
Group, Surface Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be used to select surfaces.
You can select surfaces into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Curves that they reference, Volumes that
reference them, Solids that reference them, or any combination of these methods.
Group, Surface, ID
Group, Volume Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules that will be used to select volumes.
You can select volumes into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Surfaces that they reference, or any combi-
nation of these methods.
Group, Solid Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules that will be used to select solids. You
can select solids into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Curves that they reference, Surfaces they refer-
ence, or any combination of these methods.
Group, Solid, ID
Group, Connection Property Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules that will be used to select Connec-
tion Properties. You can select Connection Properties into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, On Connec-
tor (being used by a selected Connector), or any combination of these methods.
Group, Connection Property, ID
Group, Region Menu
tion Regions, Bolt Regions, Fluid Regions, and/or Rotor Regions. There are some basic rules to select Regions into
your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, or On Connector (being used by a selected Connector).
There are rules for Region referencing Node (region is defined using Node(s) OR the region will include Node(s)
when expanded for export to a solver) and referencing Element (region is defined using Element(s) and/or Faces
of Element(s) OR the region will include Element(s) and/or Faces of Element(s) when expanded for export to a
solver).
Note: When a region is expanded for export, the type of region defines what entity type it will be
expanded to. In the case of Fluid Regions, surfaces may be used to define the region, which then
expand to Element Faces. For Bolt Regions, curves may be used to define the region, which always
expand to Elements, while Rotor Regions can only be defined using nodes, so when expanded, they
are expanded to Nodes.
Additional rules for Regions include using Curve (region is defined using selected Curve(s)), using Surface (region
is defined using selected Surface(s)), using Property (region is defined using selected Property(s)) or any combina-
tion of these methods.
Group, Region, ID
Group, Connector Menu
tors. You can select Connectors into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Property (Connector using a spe-
cific Connection Property), using Region (Connector using a specific Connection Region), or any combination of
these methods.
Group, Connector, ID
Group, Coord Sys Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules that will be used to select coordinate
systems. You can select coordinate systems into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Definition Coordinate
System, Type, defined at a Point or Node, or any combination of these methods.
Group, Coord Sys, ID
The predefined global coordinate systems cannot be selected into a group.
Group, Node Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules that will be used to select nodes. You
can select nodes into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Definition Coordinate Systems, Output Coordi-
nate Systems, Elements that reference them, Element Orientation (selects nodes used for orientation by beam ele-
ments), Superelement ID (selects nodes with the same Superelement ID as the selected node), geometric references
(Points, Curves, Surfaces, and Volume/Solids from which they were created), or any combination of these methods.
The ID option has additional options under the Method area that you can use to limit the IDs to those nodes on a
Free Edge, on a Free Face, Constrained or Loaded. These limitations only apply to graphical selection from the
view. If you enter the ID values, or do a Select All, FEMAP will include these entities into the group.
Group, Node, ID
To use the Free Edge or Free Face options, you must have performed a free edge or free face plot since your last
View, Regenerate. If you have not, no free edge or face lists will be present, and no nodes will be selected.
When you select ID - Constrained or ID - Constraint Equation, the
Select Nodes with Constraint dialog box will appear. This dialog
box enables you to limit the selected nodes to those that are con-
strained in any constraint set or a specific set as well specific
DOFs. You must graphically select the nodes for FEMAP to prop-
erly limit the node selection.
.
.
.
Note: Connection Regions have the most flexibility when defining the region and also have multiple options
for what entity type is requested for output. Therefore, a region may be defined by elements, but the
output will be in nodes in which case one region could be referenced by both elements (defined by)
and nodes (output). This is uncommon.
Grouping Individual Entities 6-61
When you select ID- Loaded, the Select Entities with
Load dialog box will appear. You must select the type
of load on the node for it to be selected in the group.
In addition, you can limit it to a specific load set and
magnitude range. Again, you must graphical select
the nodes for FEMAP to properly limit the node
selection.
.
.
.
.
Other Group, Node... Icons
Group, Node, Definition CSys; Group, Node, on Element; Group, Node, on Point;
Group, Node, on Curve; Group, Node, on Surface; Group, Node, in Solid/Volume
Group, Element Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules that will be used to select elements.
You can select elements into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Properties, Materials or Nodes that they
reference, the Element Type, the Element Shape, geometric references (Points, Curves, Surfaces, and Volume/Solids
from which they were created), or any combination of these methods. The All Nodes command will only select ele-
ments if ALL nodes of that element have been selected.
Group, Element, ID
Similar to the Group Node by ID, you can limit the ID selections to those elements that have a free edge, free face,
or a load applied.
Other Group, Element... Icons
Group, Element, Material; Group, Element, Property; Group, Element, Layup;
Group, Element, Shape; Group, Element, using Node; Group, Element, All Nodes;
Group, Element, on Point; Group, Element, on Curve; Group, Element, on Surface; e
Group, Element, in Solid/Volume
Group, Material Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules that will be used to select materials.
You can select materials into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Properties or Elements that reference
them, the Material Type, or any combination of these methods.
Hint: If you want to select all nodes that are loaded, or constrained (or on free edges or free faces), simply do a
View, Autoscale, change the method for the grouping to the appropriate ID method, and then do a box
pick of the entire screen. This will select all nodes that meet the criteria.
Group, Material, ID
Group, Property Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be used to select proper-
ties. You can select properties into your group based on their ID, Color, Layer, Elements that reference them, Mate-
rials that they reference, the Property Type, or any combination of these methods.
Group, Property, ID
Group, Layup Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be used to select layups.
You can select layups into your group based on their ID, Material, on Property (selects Layup used by the selected
Property) or any combination of these methods.
Group, Layup, ID
Group, Load Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules that will be used to select loads.
Since loads are defined in multiple sets, the commands on this menu really do not select the loads, but instead
select the nodes, elements, and regions where the loads are applied. This allows you to choose a certain portion of
your model, and include loads which are applied to that portion of your model, in all sets. When the group is used
for display or selecting entities, as always, only the loads from the active load set are selected.
Group, Load... Icons
Group, Load, Nodal; Group, Load, Elemental; Group, Load, on Region;
Group, Load, on Point; Group, Load, on Curve; Group, Load, on Surface
Group, Constraint Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be used to select con-
straints. Since constraints are defined in multiple sets, the commands on this menu really do not select the con-
straints, but instead select the nodes where the constraints are applied. This allows you to choose a certain portion
of your model and include constraints which are applied to that portion of your model in all sets. When the group is
used for display or selecting entities, as always, only the constraints from the active constraint set are selected.
Group, Load... Icons
Group, Constraint, Nodal; Group, Constraint, Equation; Group, Constraint, on Point;
Group, Constraint, on Curve; Group, Constraint, on Surface;
6.4.4 Deleting Groups (Delete, Group command)
Just like any other FEMAP entity, you can delete groups. Select the Delete, Group command, then choose the
group or groups to delete. You then verify that you want to delete the group(s). There are no entities that depend on
groups; therefore, groups should never be nondeletable.
Renumbering Groups 6-63
6.4.5 Renumbering Groups
To renumber groups, pick the Modify, Renumber Groups
command. Enter the groups to renumber. You will then
see the Renumber To dialog box.
The only orders available for groups are Original ID and
Selection Order. You can also choose Ascending or
Descending order, as well as Verify Renumbering. The
final option, Constant Offset, allows you to renumber by
simply adding a constant value to each ID.
7. Modeling Tools
FEMAP has an extensive array of tools for checking and manipulating your model. These tools range from sum-
ming forces to performing free edge and free face plots to visualize any gaps in the model. These tools can be sep-
arated into three major areas based upon their functions and their placement in the menu: Tools, List, and View. The
commands under the Tools and List menus will be explained more fully below, while View tools will be briefly dis-
cussed. For further explanation on the general operation of the viewing commands, see Section 6.1, "View Activa-
tion, Management, and Options".
Tools Menu
The commands on the Tools menu provide a wide variety of tools for checking and operating on your model. The
Tools menu also contains commands that are not specifically designed for checking your model, but are considered
general tools for your use when operating FEMAP. These commands will also be explained in this section.
The FEMAP Tools menu is separated into seven categories, based upon the type of function to perform:
command undo and redo (Section 7.1.1, "Undo and Redo")
changing the workplane (Section 7.1.2, "Tools, Workplane...")
tools for operating on your model and toolbars for easy access to commonly used commands (Section 7.2,
"Dockable Panes" and Section 7.3, "Tools, Toolbars...")
settings for overall model parameters and units conversion (Section 7.4.1, "Tools, Parameters..." and Section
7.4.2, "Tools, Convert Units...")
FEMAP finite element entities used for viewing, reporting, and entering data (Section 7.4.3, "Entity Tools")
measuring and checking commands (Section 7.4.4, "Measuring Tools" and Section 7.4.5, "Checking Tools")
a Stress Wizard for simple single-part stress analysis (Section 7.4.6, "Tools, Stress Wizard")
Each of the above sections, with their associated commands, will be explained more fully below.
7.1 Undo and Workplane
7.1.1 Undo and Redo
These commands provide a simple method of reverting backward, or moving forward through the commands you
just performed. This is a very easy method to eliminate commands that have had unexpected results.
7.1.1.1 Tools, Undo...
... removes the effect of the previous command. This allows you to back up one command if you made a mistake,
or if you want to review the effect of the changes. The Tools, Redo command will undo the undo, or go forward
one command. You can repeatedly use Undo to backup multiple commands. You can set the total number of com-
mands that you can undo in the File, Preferences, Database command.
When you undo a command, you will see a message in the Messages window that tells you the command that you
are undoing. The graphics windows will also be updated to show the effect of undoing the command. Immediately
following an Undo, you may need to use View, Redraw, prior to being able to graphically select an entity from the
screen - even though the entity is displayed. If you attempt to select something, and a different entity is picked, or
nothing is selected, then use View, Redraw.
You cannot undo: commands on the File menu, the View, New, Activate and Window commands. They all write
files, or make changes that are non-reversible. You cannot undo back through the initialization of the Parasolid
advanced geometry engine since their initialization also causes non-reversible changes to the database. If you exe-
Ctrl+Z
7-2 Modeling Tools
cute any of these commands, you will be unable to back-up past that point. Other changes which you make to resize
or move a window will also not be undone, but do not cause any loss of previous undo information.
If you are using the autorepeat feature of the creation commands to create multiple entities, Undo will erase all of
those entities as a single command. You must choose the command from the menu to be able to backup a single cre-
ation per undo.
7.1.1.2 Tools, Redo...
... goes forward one command following an Undo. This command is only available following one or more Undo
commands. It works identically to Undo, just in reverse. You can use Redo repeatedly up to the point where you are
back to your last real (not Undo) command. If you have undone one or more commands, and then choose another
real command, you can no longer use Redo to retrieve the undone commands.
7.1.2 Tools, Workplane...
... specifies the location, size and orientation of the workplane that is used for cursor selections or defining two-
dimensional geometry. When you select this command, the following dialog box will appear:
These commands all involve different methods of locating the workplane. There are three major types of options:
Define Plane, Move Plane, and Origin and Axes. In addition, you can change snap options or turn the drawing of
the workplane on or off.
7.1.2.1 Define Plane
These commands locate the workplane in space.
Select Plane/Global Plane
Both the Select Plane and Global Plane options use the standard plane definition dialog box to define the model
workplane. The only difference is the Global Plane method sets the default on the plane definition dialog box to
that method. You can still select a different method. For more information, see Section 4.3.1, "Entity Selection" in
the FEMAP User Guide.
On Surface
The On Surface method allows you to align the workplane to a particular surface. When you select this method,
you will see the Define Model Workplane dialog box.
Hint: You can also access this command from any dialog box (in a text box or drop-down list) by using the
Ctrl+W shortcut keys, or from the workplane option on many of the command toolbars (those related to
creating geometry).
Ctrl+Shift+Z
Ctrl+W or F2
Move Plane 7-3
Enter (or graphically select) the Surface ID, the point for the origin of the workplane grid (At Point), and optionally
a point along the X axis (Axis Point). FEMAP will automatically align the plane to the surface by orienting the Y
axis to the surface, and then use the right-hand rule convention to align the Z axis to complete the triad.
In addition, you can decide to force the surface to be in the first quadrant of the workplane (First Quadrant),
reverse the direction of the normals (Reverse Direction), or provide an offset distance from the surface. The First
Quadrant option may also reverse the normal direction. If you plan to perform solid boolean operations such as
Extrude, it is best to leave this option off so the default directions for Add or Remove material will be properly
aligned.
Previous
The Previous method requires no input. It simply places the workplane at its last previous location. You can only
backup one position with this command. If you perform previous twice, the workplane will be placed back at its
original position.
7.1.2.2 Move Plane
The Move Plane methods allow you to define the location of the workplane by translating or rotating the current
workplane with a location input respect to its current location. There are three available methods for this type of
procedure: Offset Distance, Move to Point, and Rotate. Offset Distance involves both translation and rotation,
while Move to Point is pure translation, and Rotate is pure rotation.
Offset Distance
This method allows you to both translate and rotate the workplane with respect to its normal (Z direction). When
you select this method, you must enter both a Z offset (in units of length), and a rotation value (in degrees). The
workplane will be translated along its normal by the translation amount, and then rotated about its normal by the
rotation amount. If you want to translate or rotate in the negative direction, simply input a negative value.
Move to Point
The Move to Point method simply translates the workplane origin to a specified location. The only input required is
the coordinate location (via the standard coordinate definition dialog box). The workplane will maintain the same
rotational orientation. It will simply be moved to that coordinate.
Rotate
This method allows you to rotate the workplane around an arbitrary vector. The only inputs required are the vector
to serve as the axis of rotation (defined by using the standard vector definition dialog box), and the rotation angle.
As always, rotation is performed using a right-hand rule convention.
7.1.2.3 Origin and Axes
These commands do not change the plane associated with the workplane, but simply move the origin or the axes
of the workplane within that plane. The first two commands move the origin (Offset Origin and Move Origin), and
the last two commands orient the X and Y axes (Align X Axis and Align Y Axis, respectively).
Offset Origin, Move Origin
These two commands move the origin of the workplane. The offset origin method offsets the origin of the work-
plane from its current location. Only two inputs are required, X Offset and Y Offset. These offsets are in the work-
plane X and Y directions.
Move Origin requires input of the location of the origin via the Standard Coordinate Definition Dialog box. You
should typically select a location that is on the current workplane. If you do not, FEMAP will project this point
onto the workplane, and the resulting origin may not be where you expected.
Align X Axis, Align Y Axis
These methods allow you to align the X axis or Y axis to a vector which you define through the standard coordinate
definition dialog box. You should typically select a vector that is in the current workplane. If you do not, FEMAP
will project this vector onto the workplane, and the resulting axis may not be where you expected.
7-4 Modeling Tools
7.1.2.4 Snap Options...
... defines the graphics cursor snap mode, the size and orientation of the snap grid and the grid display style. The
Snap To dialog box sets these options.
The Snap To dialog box is separated into four major sections: Grid and Ruler Spacing, Grid Style, Workplane Size,
and Snap To. Each of these areas are explained more fully below.
Grid and Ruler Spacing
These options specify the spacing between snap grid locations. You can allow FEMAP to determine the spacing
(Automatic), set a Uniform spacing, or a Nonuniform spacing. Automatic requires input only of the divisions. The
Divisions option specifies how many minor tic marks will be drawn between every major tic. FEMAP will calcu-
late a grid spacing based upon the model size and then use the Divisions value to further partition the grid.
Uniform and Nonuniform spacing also require input of the Divisions, but you must also specify a Grid Size. For
Uniform, enter a value for the X Grid Size, and FEMAP will also use this for Y. In addition, FEMAP uses this value
for the ruler labels, which controls the frequency of labels on the workplane. Nonuniform requires the additional
input of the Y Grid Size, and the Ruler Labels. The Ruler Labels value will be used for both grids. You cannot
define nonuniform labeling.
Grid Style
The Snap Grid can be displayed either as dots or lines, or it can be invisible. The style of display has no effect on
whether or not the cursor snaps to a particular location. You can make the grid invisible and still snap to it. Con-
versely it can be displayed as dots or lines and the snap mode can be set to snap to a point, node or screen location.
The display of the snap grid for an individual window can be turned on or off using the View, Options command.
If the snap grid spacing is too small relative to the image displayed in a window, the dots or lines could completely
fill the window. In this case, the grid will not be drawn, and you will receive a message which tells you that the grid
is too dense for display.
Workplane Size
This area controls the total size of the workplane grid, as well as the drawing of the X and Y rulers. The X From/To
and Y From/To allow to manually scale the workplane. This can be very handy in instances when you are working
on small sections of your model to define the workplane size.
It is often much easier, however, to select the Adjust to Model Size and Adjust to Planar Surface options. These
options will allow FEMAP to automatically scale FEMAP based upon the model size, and even attach the work-
plane directly to planar surfaces when the workplane coincides with a planar surface. These options are much more
convenient when building a model than the manually scaling approach.
The snap grid is drawn as a rectangular pattern. The size of that pattern is based on your model size and current
view scale factors when using the automatic scaling. If your workplane and grid is rotated relative to your graphics
Hint: You can access this command from any dialog box (in a text box or drop-down list) by using the Ctrl+T
shortcut keys, through the Quick Access command menu, or through the Workplane icon.
Snap Options... 7-5
window, the grid may not completely cover the window display area. Also, you may manually define a workplane
that does not fill the screen. Even in these areas where the dots or lines are not drawn, the cursor will still snap to
the grid location (assuming you have the snap mode set).
The Draw X and Y Ruler controls define whether the rulers are drawn. You will also have to turn on the option to
Show Rulers under View, Options, Tools and View Style, Workplane and Rulers to see the rulers.
Snap To
These options choose whether the graphics cursor will select locations which correspond to a screen location (off),
or will snap to the nearest snap grid location, nearest point, or nearest node. For more information on the snap to
methods, see Section 4.4.3, "Snap To" in the FEMAP User Guide.
Coord Only
This option controls whether FEMAP will use the snap mode only during coordinate definition, or every time you
select an entity from the graphics window. When this is on, FEMAP will only snap if you are trying to define a
model coordinate location. All other picks will work as if snap was off. If you turn it off however, the active snap
mode will always be used - even when you are picking entities, zooming, or any other time you click in the graph-
ics window.
Full Precision
This option controls how FEMAP will write graphically selected coordinates into your dialog boxes. It only applies
when you are snapping to nodes or points. If Full Precision is on, FEMAP will use the equation functions XND( ),
YND( ), ZND( ), XPT( ), YPT( ) and ZPT( ) instead of the coordinate values. In this case, when you press OK,
FEMAP will use the full double-precision database coordinates of the selected node or point. When Full Precision
is off, the coordinate values are written to the dialog box. In this case, the location is only as accurate as the number
of digits that are in the dialog box.
Hint: You can also set these modes from any dialog box by using the Ctrl+S (Off), Ctrl+G (Snap Grid),
Ctrl+P (Point) or Ctrl+N (Node) shortcut keys, the Quick Access menu, or from the View toolbar.
7-6 Modeling Tools
7.2 Dockable Panes
FEMAP contains several Dockable Panes that offer different tools used to create and modify models, evaluate
and sort data, create reports, and view info of specific entities. There are others which allow you to create custom-
ized features by recording macros or creating advanced programming routines by directly accessing the FEMAP
database using the FEMAP API (Applications Programming Interface).
Each dockable pane can be either visible or hidden by using the Tools... menu command corresponding to the spe-
cific dockable pane. For more information about general use of the dockable panes, see section Section 4.1.2.2,
"FEMAP Dockable Panes" in the FEMAP User Guide
The Dockable Panes are:
Model Info: Allows you to view and navigate around a graphical inventory of many top-level entities in
your model. See Section 7.2.1, "Tools, Model Info"
Entity Editor: Allows you to view, modify, choose, and create attributes, colors, connections, numerical val-
ues, settings, etc. of a single finite element, geometric, or other entity in FEMAP. See Section 7.2.2, "Tools,
Entity Editor"
Data Surface Editor: Allows you to create 1-D, 2-D, and 3-D data surfaces used to apply varying loading
conditions to your model. Data Surfaces can also be used to map output data from one model to create load-
ing conditions in another model with a different mesh. See Section 7.2.3, "Tools, Data Surface Editor"
Entity Info: When the Select Toolbar has an active entity type, this pane will display information about the
each entity of that type as it is highlighted in the main graphics window. Post-processing data will also be dis-
played for node and element entity types when the model has a deformed style and/or contour style selected.
See Section 7.2.4, "Tools, Entity Info".
Data Table: Allows you send data to an interactive, dynamically changing table using various methods to fill
the table. Output data can also be added to the table and then listed and sorted. See Section 7.2.5, "Tools, Data
Table".
API Programming: The API Programming dockable pane is a Visual Basic-compatible scripting editor and
debugging control which allows you to create customized basic scripts inside the FEMAP interface using the
FEMAP Application Programming Interface (API). The FEMAP API lets you customize FEMAP to meet your
specific needs. The FEMAP API is an OLE/COM-based programming interface to FEMAP. It contains hun-
dreds of functions that can be called from Visual Basic, VBA (Excel, Word, Access, ... ), C, or C++. See Section
7.2.6, "Tools, Programming, API Programming"
Program File: Allows you to record any number of FEMAP menu, toolbar, and keyboard commands in
sequence to create macros which can then be saved and replayed later in FEMAP models. Once recording has
been completed, there are other options available in the dockable pane to alter what the macro does or aid in
debugging. When the Program File window is in Record Mode, all of the other dockable panes, except for the
Messages and Entity Info panes, will be temporarily hidden and cannot be used. See Section 7.2.7, "Tools, Pro-
gramming, Program File"
Messages: Provides feedback to you from FEMAP. Information such as Error and Warning information and a
chronological listing of commands which have been used during the modeling process will be sent to the win-
dow. Pictures and text can also be added and manipulated inside the window to help create reports. See Section
7.2.8, "Tools, Other Windows, Messages"
Status Bar: Provides quick access to set the active Property, Load Set, Constraint Set, Group, or Output Set in
your active model. Also gives the user feedback on the model and help when the cursor is positioned over a
command or icon. Although it cant be moved like the Dockable Panes, it can be toggled on and off by choosing
it on the Tools, Other Windows... Menu. See Section 7.2.9, "Tools, Other Windows, Status Bar"
In many cases, the different dockable panes are designed to be used together to perform a wide variety of tasks.
There are many commands allowing you to send information and data from one pane to another and help you get
the most out of these powerful tools.
Tools, Model Info 7-7
7.2.1 Tools, Model Info
The Model Info tree dockable pane allows you to view and
navigate around a graphical inventory of many top-level
entities in your model. Top-level refers to an entity which can
be used by a number of other entities.
For instance, many points, curves, and surfaces make up a
Solid; many entities can reference a single Coordinate System;
many elements a single Property or Material; many loads can
be found in a Load Set; many constraints in a Constraint Set;
or many surfaces, element faces, nodes, and/or element proper-
ties can make up a Region (Connection, Fluid, Bolt, or Rotor).
Appearing on the tree along with the top-level entities are
data set lists used by the entire model for Analysis and viewing
Results, as well as lists of existing Views, Groups, and Layers.
Connections are also in the tree to facilitate turning Connectors
on and off and viewing Master and Slave Connection Regions.
Finally, the current Selection List being stored by the Select
Toolbar can be found at the bottom of the tree.
For convenience, individual Loads and Constraints appear in
the Model Info tree in FEMAP version 9.3 and above.
In each Load set, the loads are separated into three categories,
Load Definitions, Body Loads, and Other Loads. The Other
Loads category is broken down further into On Geometry, On
Mesh, Bolt Preload, Nodal Temperatures, and Elemental Tem-
peratures.
In each Constraint set, the constraints are separated into two
categories Constraint Definitions and Other Constraints. The
Other Constraints category is broken down further into On
Geometry, On Mesh, and Equations.
Model Info Features
The tree is broken down into major categories and smaller
sub-categories which can be expanded and collapsed to create
the optimal listing for your specific modeling needs.
When an entity is active, it will appear in Blue Text. Only one
entity or set can be active in each category. You can make an
entity active by double-clicking it or right-mouse clicking it in
the list and choosing the Activate command on the context-sen-
sitive menu.
You can change the title of any entity by highlighting the entity
title, then clicking it again (NOT a double click), which will
enable editing of the entity title.
In some categories, it is possible to choose multiple entities at
the same time and perform operations on all of the entities at
once. In order to choose multiple entities, hold down the Ctrl
key and select individual entities with the mouse or hold down
the Shift key and select a first entity and a last entity and all of
the entities in between will also be selected. Some context sen-
sitive menu commands require that multiple entities be chosen
to activate a command.
Collapse/Expand All
Send To Data Table
Reload From Model Show When Selected Menu
7-8 Modeling Tools
The selection list shows the number of each type of entity in parenthesis after the entity type name. For instance,
Curve Loads (2) means there are two separate loads on curves in the selection list, not that the Curve Loads are
on Curve 2.
Model Info Icons
Collapse/Expand All - Collapses or expands ALL categories in the Model Info tree at once. Can be used to only
show what you need to view specific entities.
Reload From Model - Reloads the Model Info tree with all current information from the model. Always collapses
the whole tree completely.
Send To Data Table - Sends selected data to the Data Table pane for sorting, filtering, and evaluation. Data Table
MUST be Unlocked for this icon to be used.
Show When Selected Menu - Contains a number of options to show the entities currently highlighted in the Model
Info tree in the main graphics window. Entities associated with a Property, Material, Layup, Connection Property,
Region, Connector, Group, Layer, individual Coordinate System, or Geometric Solids can be shown. By default,
this command is set to off. The commands on this menu use different options of the Window, Show Entities com-
mand. Solids that have Mesh Attributes associated to a property, but no mesh yet, will be highlighted in the graph-
ics window when that property is chosen from the list in the Tree.
For Load Definitions, Constraint Definitions, and individual loads and constraints in the Other Loads and Other
Constraints categories, this command will show the entity (point, curve, surface, node, element, or bolt region)
where the load or constraint is being applied.
Setting the menu to Highlight will highlight the selected entities in the graphics window. Transparent Highlight
does the same thing as Highlight, but will make all non-selected entities temporarily transparent as well.
Setting the menu to Show Selected Only will actually make all entities NOT associated with the selected entities in
the Data Table disappear temporarily until the model is regenerated.
The Show Labels and Show Normals (shows element normals) options can be toggled on and off and the highlight
color can also be chosen from the FEMAP color palette using the Highlight Color... command.
Selection List
When the select toolbar has been used to create a selection set of multiple entities, the entity type and the number
of those entities in the selection set will appear in the Selection List located in the Model Info tree. The selection
list shows the number of each type of entity in parenthesis after the entity type name. For instance, Curve Loads (2)
means there are two separate loads on curves in the selection list, not that the Curve Loads are on Curve 2.
If you highlight an entity type in the Selection List, right clicking will bring up the same Context Sensitive Menu
which is available when a particular entity type is the Active Entity in the Select Toolbar. For more information
see Section 7.3.1.5, "Tools, Toolbars, Select".
Double Clicking an entity type in the Selection List will make that entity type the Active Entity in the Select Tool-
bar. You can now add more entities of that type to the Selection List by choosing them in the graphics window.
Also, this makes it easy to delete one entity type at a time from the Selection List using either the Clear Active
Entity command on the Select Toolbar or by simply pressing Ctrl+Delete while the entity type is highlighted in the
Selection List.
Loads and Constraints in the Model Info Tree
Load Definitions
In FEMAP version 9.3 and above, every time the Model, Load, On Geometry Entity (i.e., On Point, On Curve,
On Surface), Model, Load, FEA Entity (i.e., Nodal, Nodal on Face, Elemental), or Model, Load, Bolt Preload is
used, a Load Definition is also created in the Active Load Set.
Each Load Definition can be given a title (if none is given, a default title will be assigned) and all of the loads cre-
ated each time a Model, Load... command is used will be included in a new Load Definition. For instance, if you
selected 10 nodes to apply a load with Model, Load, Nodal, the loads created on those 10 nodes would all be in the
same Load Definition.
All of the loads in a Load Definition can be edited at once by using the Modify, Edit, Load - Definition command.
Similar commands can be used for listing and deleting of entire Load Definitions. These commands also appear on
the context-sensitive menu for Load Definitions in the Model Info Tree. Each Bolt Preload will also create a Load
Definition.
Load Definitions of the same type (i.e. Displacements on Nodes, Pressures on Elements, Forces on Surfaces, etc.),
can be combined simply be highlighting multiple Load Definitions, clicking the right mouse button, and choosing
Combine from the context-sensitive menu. The combined Load Definition will use the lowest ID of the com-
bined Load Definitions and maintain that definitions title as well.
You can highlight any number of Load Definitions, then click the right mouse button and choose Remove Defini-
tion from the context-sensitive menu. All of the highlighted Load Definitions will disappear from the Model Info
Tree and the individual loads from each of them will be placed in the appropriate Other Loads category.
Body Loads
Body Loads are loads which act on the entire model, not individual nodes or elements. In FEMAP the body loads
are Translational Acceleration (Gravity), Rotational Acceleration, Rotational Velocity, and Default Temperature.
These loads are created using the Model, Load, Body command. For more information on Body Loads, please see
Section 4.3.3.1, "Model, Load, Body".
Body loads can be edited, listed, or deleted using the Body Loads context-sensitive menu in the Model Info Tree.
Other Loads
All new loading conditions created on geometry, FEA entities, or Bolt Preloads in FEMAP will be placed into Load
Definitions. This is not the case when an analysis model (such as a NX Nastran input file) or a Pre-version 9.3
FEMAP Neutral File is imported into FEMAP, because no Load Definitions exist in these files. Therefore, all of
these loads end up in Other Loads.
In general, any loads that are NOT in a Load Definition will automatically be placed in the Other Loads section
under the appropriate category. For instance, all loads on nodes or elements (except temperatures) will appear in the
On Mesh category, while any geometry-based loading can be found in the On Geometry category.
You can highlight any number of loads of the same type (i.e. Displacements on Nodes, Pressures on Elements,
Forces on Surfaces, etc.), then click the right mouse button and choose Create Definition from the context-sensitive
menu. If there are currently no load definitions, FEMAP will create a new one. If Load Definitions already exist,
FEMAP will ask if you want to add the highlighted loads to an existing Load Definition or create a new one.
Note: Loads created by the Model, Load, Nonlinear Force command will NOT be placed into a load defini-
tion. This is a special load type which will appear in the appropriate category in the Other Loads.
Note: Load Definitions of the different types cannot be combined, so if you try to combine Forces on Nodes
with Pressures on Elements nothing will happen. On the other hand, if you highlight 5 Load Defini-
tions (3 of load type A and 2 of load type B), the result will be 2 total Load Definitions (One a com-
bination of the 3 load type A definitions and the other a combination of the 2 load type B
definitions). This can be helpful for consolidating your Load Definitions, but if a combined Load
Definition is edited, ALL of the individual loads in that definition will reflect the edited values.
Note: Only loads of the same type (i.e. Displacements on Nodes, Pressures on Elements, Forces on Surfaces,
etc.) can be placed into an existing Load Definition. The values of the actual loads do not need to be the
same, although if the new Load Definition is edited, all the loads will reflect the new values.
Note: If you have chosen loads of multiple types AND a Load Definition currently exists for every different
highlighted load type, you will have the option to add the loads from each type to an existing Load Def-
inition one type at a time.
If you have chosen loads of multiple types, BUT a Load Definition currently does not exist for every
highlighted type, FEMAP will simply create a new Load Definition for each load type. Load Defini-
tions of the same type can always be combined in the Load Definitions section.
7-10 Modeling Tools
Constraint Definitions
In FEMAP version 9.3 and above, every time the Model, Constraint, On Geometry Entity (i.e., On Point, On
Curve, On Surface) or Model, Load, FEA Entity (i.e., Nodal, Nodal on Face, Equation) a Constraint Defini-
tion is also created in the Active Constraint Set.
Constraint Definitions are very similar to Load Definitions and can be applied, edited, listed, deleted, and com-
bined in a similar manner. Constraint Definitions can also be removed and the individual constraints from each
Constraint Definition will be placed in the appropriate Other Constraints category.
Other Constraints
All new boundary conditions created on geometry or FEA entities in FEMAP will be placed into Constraint Defini-
tions. This is not the case when an analysis model (such as a NX Nastran input file) or a Pre-version 9.3 FEMAP
Neutral File is imported into FEMAP, because no Constraint Definitions exist in these files. Therefore, all of these
boundary conditions end up in Other Constraints.
In general, any constraints that are NOT in a Constraint Definition will automatically be placed in the Other Con-
straints section under the appropriate category. For instance, all constraints on nodes will appear in the On Mesh
category, while any geometry-based constraints can be found in the On Geometry category. Constraint Equations
have their own category in Other Constraints.
Model Info Tree Context Sensitive Menus
When an individual entity or category name in the tree is selected, you can right mouse click on the selected entity
or category name and a context sensitive menu will appear corresponding to that particular entity type. These con-
text sensitive menus provide a quicker path to many frequently used commands for the specific entity type.
When a category name is selected, the command chosen on the context sensitive menu will be applied to all of the
entities in that category. For example, highlighting Properties and then choosing List will list all of the properties in
the model.
For entity types in the Selection List, right mouse clicking will display the same context sensitive menus which are
available for each specific entity type when active in the Select Toolbar (For the list of Context Sensitive Menus
from the Select Toolbar, see Section 7.3.1.5, "Tools, Toolbars, Select").
Here is a list of what appears on each entity types context sensitive menu in the Model Info tree:
Coordinate Systems
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new coordinate system
Activate Makes the selected coordinate system the active coordinate system in the model.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected coordinate system(s) one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected coordinate system(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected coordinate system(s) from the model. The three basic coordinate
systems, Basic Rectangular, Basic Cylindrical, and Basic Spherical cannot be deleted.
Move Allows you to move a coordinate system(s) from one place to another using the Mod-
ify, Move By, Coord Sys... command
Rotate Allows you to rotate a coordinate system(s) from one place to another using the Mod-
ify, Rotate By, Coord Sys... command
Geometry (Solids Only)
Connections - Properties
Connections - Regions
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new solid
Activate Makes the selected solid the active solid in the model
List Lists information about the selected solid(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected solid(s) from the model
Automatic
Connection
Allows you to automatically create connections between multiple solids using the Con-
nect, Automatic... command. You must have multiple solids selected for this command
to be available.
Mesh Size Allows you to set the mesh size on the selected solid(s) using the Mesh, Mesh Control,
Size On Solid... command
Attributes Allows you to set up meshing attributes on a selected solid using the Mesh, Mesh Con-
trol, Attributes On Solid... command
Tet Mesh Meshes the selected solid(s) with tetrahedral elements (Tets) using the Mesh, Geome-
try, Solids... command
Hex mesh Meshes the selected solid(s) with hexahedral elements (Bricks) using the Mesh, Geom-
etry, HexMesh Solids... command
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new Connection Property
Activate Makes the selected property the active Connection Property in the model.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected Connection Property(s) one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected Connection Property(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected Connection Property(s) from the model
Command Description
New Connection
Region
Prompts you to create a new Connection Region
New Fluid
Region
Prompts you to create a new Fluid Region
New Bolt Region Prompts you to create a new Bolt Region
New Rotor
Region
Prompts you to create a new Rotor Region for Rotor Dynamics.
Show Expanded Highlights the individual elements or nodes and those associated to a geometric entity
or property which will be exported to the solver. Helpful when a Region has been
Defined By using the Curve, Surface, or Part/Property options.
Enable
Region
Designates the Region (Fluid, Bolt, and Rotor only) is Enabled, meaning the Region
will be written out when the analysis model is exported. By default, all Regions are
Enabled.
Disable
Region
Designates the Region (Fluid, Bolt, and Rotor only) is Disabled, meaning the Region
will NOT be written out when the analysis model is exported. Having the ability to
enable and disable regions can be very useful when trying different numbers of
MFLUIDs, Bolt Preloads, and Rotors.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected Region(s) one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected Region(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected Region(s) from the model
7-12 Modeling Tools
Connections - Connectors
Model - Materials
Model - Properties
Model - Layups
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new Connector
Show Master Highlights the Connection Region designated as the Master in the selected Connector
in the graphics window.
Show Slave Highlights the Connection Region designated as the Slave in the selected Connector in
the graphics window.
Reverse Reverses the Slave and Master Connection Regions in the selected Connector. In other
words, it makes the region designated the Master the Slave and the Slave the Master.
Enable
Connector
Designates the Connector is Enabled, meaning the connection will be written out when
the analysis model is exported. By default, all Connectors are Enabled.
Disable
Connector
Designates the Connector is Disabled, meaning the Connector will NOT be written out
when the analysis model is exported.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected Connector(s) one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected Connector(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected Connector(s) from the model
Edit Property Allows you to edit the Connection Property(s) designated in the selected Connector(s).
Select Property Allows you to select a Connection Property from a list of existing Connection Proper-
ties to be used in the selected Connector(s).
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new material
Activate Makes the selected property the active material in the model.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected material(s) one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected material(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected material(s) from the model
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new property
Activate Makes the selected property the active property in the model
Edit Allows you to edit the selected property or properties one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected property or properties to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected property or properties from the model
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new layup
Edit Allows you to edit the selected layup(s) one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected layup(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected layup(s) from the model
Model - Loads and Individual Load Sets
Model - Loads - Load Definitions
Model - Loads - Body Loads
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new load set
Activate Makes the selected load set the active load set in the model.
Copy Creates a copy for each of the selected load set(s)
List Lists information about the selected load set(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected load set(s) from the model
Show Loaded
Entities
Highlights in the graphics window, the nodes, elements, regions, and geometric entities
that are loaded in the model. Uses the Window, Show Entities... command to highlight the
entities. Multiple load sets can be chosen for this command.
Body Brings up the dialog box from the Model, Load, Body... command to create body loads
Nonlinear
Analysis
Brings up the dialog box from the Model, Load, Nonlinear Analysis... command to set
options for nonlinear analysis.
Dynamic
Analysis
Brings up the dialog box from the Model, Load, Dynamic Analysis... command to set
options for dynamic analysis.
Heat Transfer Brings up the dialog box from the Model, Load, Heat Transfer... command to set options
for Heat Transfer analysis.
Command Description
Nodal Prompts you to create a new Load Definition using the Model, Load, Nodal command.
Nodal on
Face
Prompts you to create a new Load Definition using the Model, Load, Nodal on Face com-
mand
Elemental Prompts you to create a new Load Definition using the Model, Load, Elemental command
On Point Prompts you to create a new Load Definition using the Model, Load, On Point command
On Curve Prompts you to create a new Load Definition using the Model, Load, On Curve command
On Surface Prompts you to create a new Load Definition using the Model, Load, On Surface command
Bolt
Preload
Prompts you to create a new Load Definition using the Model, Load, Bolt Preload command
Edit Allows you to edit the selected load definition(s) one at a time
List Lists information about the selected load definition(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected load definition(s) from the model (all individual loads in the selected
definition(s) will be completely deleted from the model)
Combine Combines selected load definitions of the same load type together and uses the lowest ID of
the selected load definitions as the ID for the combined load definition. Only available
when multiple load definitions are highlighted (hold CTRL key while clicking individual
load definitions or SHIFT key to select a first load definition and a last load definition and
all load definitions in between).
Remove
Definition
Allows you to remove the individual loads from the highlighted load definitions. The load
definition(s) will disappear from the model completely and the individual loads from each of
them will then be placed in the appropriate Other Loads category
Command Description
Edit Prompts you to edit the Body Loads for that particular load set.
List Lists the Body Loads for that particular load set to the Messages pane.
Delete Deletes the Body Loads for that particular load set.
7-14 Modeling Tools
Model - Loads - Other Loads (available for all of the different categories)
Model - Constraints and Individual Constraint Sets
Model - Constraints - Constraint Definitions
Command Description
Edit Prompts you to edit the individual load(s) one at a time.
List Lists the selected individual load(s) to the Messages pane.
Delete Deletes the selected individual load(s) from the model.
Create Definition Allows you to highlight any number of loads of the same type (i.e. Displacements on
Nodes, Pressures on Elements, Forces on Surfaces, etc.) and create a Load Defini-
tion. If there are currently no load definitions, FEMAP will create a new one. If Load
Definitions already exist, FEMAP will ask if you want to add the highlighted loads to
an existing Load Definition or create a new one
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new constraint set
Activate Makes the selected constraint set the active constraint set in the model.
Copy Creates a copy for each of the selected constraint set(s)
List Lists information about the selected constraint set(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected constraint set(s) from the model
Command Description
Nodal Prompts you to create a new Constraint Definition using the Model, Constraint, Nodal
command.
Nodal on
Face
Prompts you to create a new Constraint Definition using the Model, Constraint, Nodal on
Face command
Equation Prompts you to create a new Constraint Definition using the Model, Constraint, Equation
command
On Point Prompts you to create a new Constraint Definition using the Model, Constraint, On Point
command
On Curve Prompts you to create a new Constraint Definition using the Model, Constraint, On
Curve command
On Surface Prompts you to create a new Constraint Definition using the Model, Constraint, On Sur-
face command
Edit Allows you to edit the selected constraint definition(s) one at a time
List Lists information about the selected constraint definition(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected constraint definition(s) from the model (all individual constraints in
the selected definition(s) will be completely deleted from the model)
Combine Combines selected constraint definitions of the same load type together and uses the low-
est ID of the selected constraint definitions as the ID for the combined constraint defi-
nition. Only available when multiple constraint definitions are highlighted (hold CTRL
key while clicking individual constraint definitions or SHIFT key to select a first con-
straint definition and a last constraint definition and all constraint definitions in between).
Remove
Definition
Allows you to remove the individual constraints from the highlighted constraint defini-
tions. The constraint definition(s) will disappear from the model completely and the indi-
vidual constraints from each of them will then be placed in the appropriate Other
Constraints category
Model - Constraints - Other Constraints (available for all of the different categories)
Model - Functions
Analyses
Command Description
Edit Prompts you to edit the individual constraint(s) one at a time.
List Lists the selected individual constraint(s) to the Messages pane.
Delete Deletes the selected individual constraint(s) from the model.
Create Definition Allows you to highlight any number of constrain of the same type and create a Con-
strain Definition. If there are currently no constraint definitions, FEMAP will create
a new one. If Constraint Definitions already exist, FEMAP will ask if you want to
add the highlighted constraints to an existing Constraint Definition or create a new
one
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new function
Edit Allows you to edit the selected function(s) one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected function(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected function(s) from the model
Show Brings up a new window called XY Show and plots the selected function in an XY plot. If
multiple functions are selected and then shown, they will all appear on the same plot in the
XY Show window. Up to 9 functions can be shown at once. The XY Show window is a cre-
ated view and will remain with the model until it is deleted.
Copy Copies a selected function to the clipboard. Once copied onto the clipboard, you can then
click another function and use the Paste command on the context sensitive menu and be
prompted to replace the function or add the functions together. Once copied, you can also
use the New command on the context sensitive menu and then click the Get button to paste
the values into the new function. Because the function is copied onto the clipboard, it can
also be pasted into a spreadsheet program, such as Excel.
Paste Pastes function data from the clipboard into a selected function. When using the Paste com-
mand after copying a function, a Yes or No dialog box will appear asking OK to Clear
Existing Function Entries (No=Combine)?. Clicking Yes will replace all the function data,
while clicking No will combine the values of the two functions together. You can also use
the Paste command to paste in tabular data that was copied to the clipboard from a spread-
sheet, such as Excel.
Command Description
Manage Brings up the FEMAP Analysis Set Manager (Model, Analysis... command). Once in the
analysis set manager, you can create new analysis sets, edit existing sets, preview input
files for Nastran, export input files to different solvers, and invoke analysis programs for
solving.
Activate Makes the selected analysis set the active analysis set in the model.
List Lists information about the selected analysis set(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected analysis set(s) from the model
Preview Brings up the Preview Analysis Input File dialog box which you can use to look at the
input file FEMAP will create before exporting the input file. By clicking the Edit Preview
check box, you can make changes to the input file and then click the Export or Analyze
button. Preview only works for Nastran input decks at this time.
Export Brings up dialog box to export an input deck for the selected analysis program.
Analyze Exports an input file and starts the selected analysis program (NX Nastran, MSC Nastran,
ANSYS, ABAQUS, NE/Nastran, etc.) or the brings up the VisQ program to launch an
analysis program
7-16 Modeling Tools
Results
Views
Command Description
Activate Makes the selected results set the active results set in the model.
List Lists information about the selected results set(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected results set(s) from the model
Send Output
Vectors to Data
Table
Sends ALL the output vectors from the selected results set to the Data Table dockable
pane to be sorted, filtered, and evaluated. Data Table MUST be unlocked for this com-
mand to be available.
No Deforma-
tion
Shows no deformation for the selected results set(s) in the current view. Equivalent to
using the View, Select... command and choosing None - Model Only in the Deformed
Style section. Brings up dialog box to export an input deck for the selected analysis pro-
gram.
Deform Shows a deformed plot for the selected results set in the current view. Equivalent to
using the View, Select... command and choosing Deform in the Deformed Style section
Animate Shows a animated plot of deformation for the selected results set in the current view.
Equivalent to using the View, Select... command and choosing Animate in the
Deformed Style section.
MultiSet Ani-
mate
Shows an animated plot of deformation created from the deformation data of multiple
results sets in the current view. Only available when multiple results sets are highlighted
(hold CTRL key while clicking individual results sets or SHIFT key to select a first set
and a last set and all sets in between). Equivalent to using the View, Select... command
and choosing Animate-MultiSet in the Deformed Style section.
Vector Shows a vector plot of deformation for the selected results set in the current view. Equiv-
alent to using the View, Select... command and choosing Vector in the Deformed Style
section
No Contour Shows no contour plot for the selected results set(s) in the current view. Equivalent to
using the View, Select... command and choosing None - Model Only in the Contour
Style section.
Contour Shows a contour plot for the selected results set in the current view. Equivalent to using
the View, Select... command and choosing Contour in the Contour Style section.
Criteria Shows a criteria plot for the selected results set in the current view. Equivalent to using
the View, Select... command and choosing Criteria in the Contour Style section.
Post Data Brings up the Select PostProcessing Data dialog box. Equivalent to using the View,
Select... command and clicking the Deformed and Contour Data button or performing
a right mouse click on the graphics window and choosing Post Data
Command Description
Update Active
Window
Makes the selected window the active window and brings it to the top for viewing and
other operations.
Open New
Window
If an existing view is currently not visible, this command will open a new window for this
view.
New Brings up a copy of the current view in a new window
List Lists information about the selected view(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected view(s) from the model
Groups
Layers
Command Description
New Creates a new group.
Combine Combines selected groups together and creates a new group. Only available when mul-
tiple groups are highlighted (hold CTRL key while clicking individual groups or SHIFT
key to select a first group and a last group and all groups in between).
Add Related
Entities
Adds ALL other entities that are somehow related to the entities currently in a selected
Group to that Group. See Group, Operations, Add Related Entities entry in Section
6.4.3.2, "Group, Operations Menu".
View Active Toggles between viewing the active group only (checked in menu) or the whole model
(unchecked in menu) in the graphics window. This option can also be toggled on and off
using the Group portion of the Status Bar.
Activate Makes the selected group the active group in the model.
List Lists information about the selected group(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected group(s) from the model
Add to Selection Allows you to add entities in a selected group or number of groups to the Selection List.
Export Neutral Exports a FEMAP neutral file of the selected group. In order for you to get a neutral file
that will read into a new FEMAP database, you must remember to include all the nodes
on any selected elements, all points on selected curves, curves on selected surfaces, sur-
faces making up selected solids, and materials and properties used by elements. Without
all of these entities, FEMAP may give you error messages and may not be able to read
in the neutral file correctly. A good way to make sure this is all taken care of is to run
the Group, Operations, Add Related command before
Command Description
Show All Layers When this mode is active (check mark next to name in the menu), ALL layers in the
model will be displayed. Visible and Hidden designations have no effect in this mode.
Show Visible
Layers Only
When this mode is active (check mark in the menu), only layers designated Visible will
be displayed in the model.
Make Visible Designates the layer as Visible, meaning it will be displayed when the Show Visible Lay-
ers Only mode is active. Works with multiple layers at the same time.
Make Hidden Designates a layer as Hidden, meaning it will NOT be displayed when the Show Visible
Layers Only mode is active. Works with multiple layers at the same time.
New Creates a new layer.
Activate Makes the selected layer the active layer in the model.
Manage Brings up the Layer Management dialog box. Once in the Layer Management dialog
box, you can choose the Active Layer, the No Pick layer, and the layer visibility
mode. You can also designate layers as Visible or Hidden, or create a New Layer.
For more information see Section 6.4.2.2, "Viewing Layers (View, Layers... command)"
List Lists information about the selected layer(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected layer(s) from the model
7-18 Modeling Tools
7.2.2 Tools, Entity Editor
The Entity Editor dockable pane allows you to view, modify, choose, and create attributes, colors, connections,
numerical values, settings, etc. of a single finite element, geometric, or other entity in FEMAP.
Finite Element entities include: Coordinate Systems,
Nodes, Elements, Materials, Properties, Loads (on
Nodes, Elements, or Geometric entities), Constraints
(on Nodes, Constraint Equations, or Geometric enti-
ties), Contact Segments, and Results Sets.
Geometric Entities include: points, curves of all types,
surfaces, boundary surfaces, and solids.
Other entities include: Text, Views, and Groups.
Entity Entry Methods
An entity must be selected for it to appear in the Entity
Editor before it can be modified. There are three sepa-
rate methods to have a particular entity appear in the
Entity Editor:
Select Toolbar - When activated, the last chosen entity
will appear in the Entity Editor pane.
Data Table pane - Once the Data Table has entity data
in it, every time a row containing entity data in the
table is highlighted, it will appear in the Entity Editor.
Model Info tree - When an entity in the tree is high-
lighted, it will appear in the Entity Editor (Analyses
and entities in the Selection List from the tree will not
populate the Entity Editor when highlighted)
Field Types
There are several different types of fields that can be
modified in the Entity Editor. The field should be high-
lighted to determine the field type. The types of fields
include:
Numeric Value - Enables you to enter a numeric value
for a specific field
Text - Text can be typed directly into these fields. Usu-
ally in a Title, Text, or Notes field
Drop-down menu button - Button has arrow facing
down. Lists options for that can be selected for a par-
ticular field.
Options button - Button has three dots. Brings up the
color palette or a dialog box that is used to change the
information in that specific field.
Note: Some entities can only be entered into the
Entity Editor using a certain method. For
instance, View or Group information can
only appear in the Entity Editor by clicking
it in the Model Info tree. Points, Curves,
and Surfaces can only appear when using
the Select Toolbar or from the Data Table.
Lock/Unlock Toggle Listing Method Icons
Copy to Clipboard
Reload
Update
Model
Expand/
Contract
Toggles
from
Model
(Categorized, Alphabetic,
and Collapse/Expand)
Entity Editor Field Help
Tools, Entity Editor 7-19
Read Only - Cannot be changed. Shown in grayed-out text.
Entity Editor Icons
Lock/Unlock Toggle - When unlocked, the Entity Editor will always display the entity that was last selected using
an entity entry method. When locked, the data in the Entity Editor will remain there until the pane is unlocked.
Copy to Clipboard - Copies the current data in the Entity Editor to the clipboard so it can be pasted into the Mes-
sages window or an outside program
Clear All - Completely clears all information currently in the Entity Editor.
Categorized - Default listing method of the Entity Editor. For each entity, groups similar parameters, options, and
settings together for more efficient use.
Alphabetic - Displays all the fields in alphabetical order (no categories)
Collapse/Expand All - Collapses or expands ALL categories in the Entity Editor at once. Can be used to only
show what you need to modify specific entities.
Reload From Model - Reloads the Entity Editor fields with the values that are currently in the model for the cho-
sen entity. If you ever delete or change any fields by mistake and have already clicked off of the specific field, use
this to recover the original values for all the fields.
Update Model - Applies any changes made in the Entity Editor to the chosen entity and saves the changes to the
model database.
Other Entity Editor Features
Expand/Collapse toggles - Allow you to collapse and expand individual categories and sub-categories inside the
Entity Editor. When the toggle shows a + it means the category can be expanded, when it shows a - it means
the category can be collapsed.
Note: Drop down menu fields that allow you to choose a material, property, layer, or function also have
an option to create a new entity at the bottom of the drop-down menu.
Note: The Tab, Enter, and Arrow keys can be used to move from one field to another while making
changes. This can be helpful as you do not have to click into each field individually.
Note: Because of the Rich Text Format copied from the Data Table and Entity Editor dockable panes,
you may need to do some resizing of columns in order to create a correctly formatted table when it
is copied into the Messages pane. When copying tables from the Data Table and Entity Editor
panes, there should be no issues when pasting into outside programs which support Rich Text For-
mat, such as Microsoft Word.
Note: Ctrl+C can be used as a general copy command in FEMAP. FEMAP takes into account which
window or dockable pane is currently active. When the Entity Editor pane is active, Ctrl+C will
perform the copy command and on the highlighted text, or if no text is highlighted, the entire table
will be copied.
Note: The Update Model icon MUST be clicked in order to apply any changes to your model. If it
is not clicked before another entity is chosen, all the changes made to the entity will be lost.
Note: The Entity Editor will remember which categories have been expanded/collapsed when differ-
ent entities of the same type are being selected and placed into the editor. Once the entity type
has been changed, the Entity Editor will show all the fields expanded for the new entity type.
For example, you have the Select Toolbar set to Elements in order to examine the Element
Quality of a number of elements. Since you only need to have the Element Quality category
expanded, you collapse the rest of the categories for easier viewing. As you click different ele-
ments, the categories will remain collapsed or expanded until they are changed. If you were to
then choose nodes as the active entity in the Select Toolbar, the first node chosen would be dis-
played fully expanded in the Entity Editor and remain in that configuration until changed.
7-20 Modeling Tools
Entity Editor Help - Shows a title and short description of what each field of every entity represents. Also docu-
ments the Nastran Bulk Data entry (if applicable) the field will produce when a Nastran Input File (*.DAT or
*.NAS file usually) is exported.
Context Sensitive Menus - Different menus appear when the right mouse button is clicked depending on what
type of field is currently highlighted. For instance, when a Text or Numerical Value field is highlighted, a menu will
pop-up which will allow you to Undo (reverts to last saved value while field is still highlighted), Cut, Copy, Paste,
Delete, or Select All. If the right mouse is clicked on the Title bar, it will bring up a menu allowing you to Move,
Size, or Hide the entire dockable pane.
Calculator Functions in Fields - You can use calculator functions (addition, subtraction, multiplication, and divi-
sion), as well as exponentials (i.e. 1.234E4 for 12,340 OR 5.67E-3 for 0.00567) in any real number field. You can
also use any of the predefined FEMAP Functions for equations (see Section C, "Function Reference" for more
information) in many of the real number fields and some fields requiring integers as well.
When the Entity Editor pane is floating, it can be repositioned and resized, just as any other floating dockable
panes. The Entity Editor can be closed by clicking the X on the right side of the Title bar. To reopen the Entity
Editor, use the Tools, Entity Editor menu.
Setting Coordinate System for Nodal Output - Available only when a node is in the Entity Editor and there is
nodal output available to graphically select (i.e. the model is deformed). Allows you to choose which Coordinate
System nodal output will be displayed for the node currently in the Entity Editor. When another node is selected,
the coordinate system will reset to that nodes current Output Coordinate System.
7.2.3 Tools, Data Surface Editor
The Data Surface Editor allows you to create Data Surfaces in FEMAP. These Data Surfaces allow you to
apply variable loading conditions using a number of predefined methods. Each method has a unique dialog box
with all of the required inputs. FEMAP uses the information from a specific dialog box and creates a table of values
which is saved with the model and can then be applied to any number of loading conditions.
Once the data surface has been created using one of the methods, the corresponding table of values will appear in
the Data Surface Editor dockable pane. Now the values can be modified in the table itself. You can also copy and
paste individual cells or use the Fill Down command to change a number of values in the same column at once.
Each Data Surface has an ID and a Title which can be entered (up to 79 characters). If no title is specified, FEMAP
will automatically create a title based on the definition method used to create the Data Surface.
Note: The Tools, Undo command does not work in the Entity Editor pane. Instead, you may use the
undo command on the context sensitive menu and this will only be available while the changed
field remains highlighted.
Create/Load
Save Data
Data Surface Menu
Edit Data
Surface Options
Clear Data
Surface
Operate on
Data Surface Menu
Surface Menu
Paste Data Surface
(Entire Data Surface)
Copy Data Surface
(Entire Data Surface)
Tools, Data Surface Editor 7-21
Data Surface Editor Icons
Create/Load Data Surface menu- The menu on this icon contains the various definition methods for creating
data surfaces, as well as the Edit Data Surface and Delete Data Surface commands.
The methods are:
Along Coordinates Data Surface - allows you to choose coordinates in space and apply a Scalar value (single
value) or Vector values (X, Y, and Z values) at each coordinate. The variation will follow the path of the coor-
dinates in the order they are entered.
Between Coordinates Data Surface - allows you to choose the number of corners to use (2, 4, or 8), whether
the variation is in linear or parametric space, and enter a Scalar value (single value) or Vector values (X, Y, and
Z values) at each corner. The values will be interpolated between the specified corners.
Output Map Data Surface - allows you to map output
from one mesh to create load values for another mesh. Out-
put which can be mapped includes:
Nodal (Forces, Moments, Displacements, Velocities, Rota-
tional Velocities, Accelerations, Rotational Accelerations,
Temperatures, and Heat Flux)
Elemental (Pressures, Temperatures, Heat Flux, Heat Gen-
eration, Convection, and Radiation)
Mesh Data Surface - allows you to choose node or ele-
ment IDs and enter a Scalar value (or expression) or Vec-
tor (X, Y, and Z) values (or 3 expressions). This type of
data surface is much more useful when using an expres-
sion, which uses a particular coordinate of a node or ele-
ment centroid. (such as XND(!i), bases value on X
coordinate of a node)
Tabular Data Surface - allows you to create a data surface by defining the size of the table and then entering
the values one at a time or pasting them in from another program, such as Excel. This is the most general type
of data surface.
Arbitrary 3-D Data Surface - allows you to create a data surface using points in space and then distributes the
values using an Inverse Weighted Interpolation method. This is a great way to enter test data at a number of
points in space and then the values are extrapolated from those points to the nodes or elements in your model.
Equation Data Surface - allows you to simply enter a FEMAP equation and stores the equation for use in any
loading condition.
Each method is described in greater detail in Section 7.2.3.1, "Data Surface Definition Methods"
Edit Data Surface - a single-select dialog box appears which allows you to choose which data surfaces to edit.
You can also use this command to open an existing data surface for viewing, even if you do not plan to edit the
surface.
Delete Data Surface - a multi-select dialog box appears which allows you to choose which data surfaces to
delete.
Note: To create an expression referencing the Node, Element, or Element Face Coordinates use
XND(), YND(), ZND(), XEL(), YEL(), ZEL(), XEF(;), YEF(;), or ZEF(;). These are explained in
greater detail in Appendix C of the FEMAP User Guide (see Section C, "Function Reference")
Note: In order for the equation to work properly in FEMAP, the proper syntax must be used, which is
explained in greater detail in Appendix C of the FEMAP User Guide (see Section C, "Function
Reference").)
Note: When this command is used, FEMAP will ask you if it is OK to Clear Grid? if there is a data
surface currently in the Data Surface Editor. By saying Yes, the grid will be cleared and any
unsaved changes will be lost.
7-22 Modeling Tools
Save Data Surface menu - The menu on this icon contains the various options for saving a data surface.
Save - simply saves the data surface with the current name to the FEMAP model
Save As - allows you to change the name of the current data surface when saving using the Create or Update
dialog box.
To File - allows you to save the current data surface values to a comma-separated file (*.CSV file).
Edit Data Surface Options - Opens the definition method dialog box corresponding to the type of data surface
currently in the Data Surface Editor. This allows you to modify options such as the coordinate system or other vari-
ation data. For instance, if an Along Coordinates data surface is currently in the Data Surface Editor, FEMAP
will bring up the Define Variation Along Coordinates Data Surface dialog box.
Clear Data Surface Editor - Completely clears any table and values currently in the Data Surface Editor.
Operate on Data Surface menu - The menu on this icon contains commands specifically for use with the Output
Map Data Surface (Align Output Map and Plot Output Map) and the Tabular Data Surface (Interpolate).
Align Output Map - Used to align an Output Map Data Surface to the
target model where the output is to be mapped.
Plot Output Map - Used to toggle a plot of the source mesh and out-
put that will be mapped on and off when the Output Map Data Surface is
applied in the target model. Very useful when aligning the source model
to the target model for visual verification.
Interpolate - This command will perform the initial interpolation on a
Tabular Data Surface which is currently active in the Data Surface Editor. This allows you to enter only cer-
tain portions of data into the Data Surface, then have FEMAP interpolate between those points for you. This
also allows you to see the populated values which FEMAP has calculated in the table of values.
Copy - Copies the data surface to the clipboard using the FEMAP neutral file format. This makes it easy to copy a
data surface from one model to another.
Paste - Pastes the copied data surface into the active model. The Next available data surface ID will be used for the
pasted data surface.
Context Sensitive Menu (All Data Surfaces)
There is a context sensitive menu which will appear when cell(s) are high-
lighted in the Data Surface Editor pane and the right mouse button is clicked.
This menu allows you to:
Copy and Paste individual cells (either a single cell or multiple cells)
Fill Down is only available when multiple cells have been highlighted. It will
copy the value at the top of the highlighted group of cells and fill all of
the highlighted cells in the same column with that value. If multiple columns
are highlighted, the value at the top of the cells in each column will be the
value that is used.
Clear All completely clears any table and values currently in the Data Sur-
face Editor, while Clear Selected will only clear the highlighted cells.
Note: This interpolation is identical to the first step which is performed when a tabular data surface is
evaluated to find variation locations.
Note: The Copy and Paste icons are designed for copying a data surface from one model to another.
To copy individual cells to the clipboard (for pasting into other cells in the Data Surface Editor or
a program such as Excel), highlight the cells you wish to copy, then click the right mouse button
and choose the Copy command from the menu.
A similar procedure can be used to paste cells into the Data Surface Editor using the Paste com-
mand on the context sensitive menu.
Data Surface Definition Methods 7-23
Update Entity ID allows you to graphically choose an appropriate new Entity ID in the screen (i.e., Nodes or Ele-
ments) for the highlighted row. Update Coordinates allows you to graphically choose a new coordinate for the
selected row using the Locate dialog box and any snap mode. Update Vector Values allows you to graphically spec-
ify new vector values for a row using the Vector Locate dialog box and any snap mode(s).
7.2.3.1 Data Surface Definition Methods
There are seven different Data Surface definition methods in FEMAP. Each method has a unique dialog box with
entries and options pertaining only to that particular type of data surface. For setting up certain loading conditions,
one method may be easier than another to achieve the desired result. Please examine all of the methods to deter-
mine which will be the easiest for your particular loading condition.
Along Coordinates Data Surface
This type of Data Surface allows you to choose coordinates in space and apply a Scalar value (single value) or Vec-
tor values (X, Y, and Z values) at each coordinate. The variation will follow the path of the coordinates (points)
in the order they are entered. This type of Data Surface can have as few as 3 points and as many as 110 points.
Variation Options
Define Multiple - allows you to use the Variation Locations section of this Dialog Box. By clicking the Paste
button, values on the clipboard will be entered into the Variation Locations list in the appropriate format.
Number of Points - allows you to enter a number to represent the number of rows which will be created in the
Table of the Data Surface Editor. The table can then be filled manually one cell at a time, using the Update
Coordinates or Update Vector Values commands (available on the Context-Sensitive menu for this type of Data
Surface), or Pasting (also on context sensitive menu) cells from a spreadsheet or comma-separated values.
Data Options
Scalar - allows you to enter one value for each coordinate
Vector - allows you to enter 3 component values (X, Y, and Z) for each coordinate.
Options button - One option is available for this data surface definition method. Project Curve onto Surface
allows you to pick a surface to project the spline onto before it is interpolated.
Variation Locations
The X, Y, and Z Location fields represent the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the points of the spline. These coordi-
nates can be entered manually or picked graphically from the screen (use of snap options can aid in precise selec-
tion of coordinates).
7-24 Modeling Tools
Once the Location fields are entered, a single value (Data Options set to Scalar) or XYZ values (Data Options
set to Vector) can be entered into the appropriate Value fields.
To add a coordinate and value(s) to the list of Points, click the Add button.
Values for any of the fields in a single row can be updated by clicking a row in the list (the values will be filled in
for Location and Value), altering the desired values, and then clicking the Update button.
Delete will delete only the highlighted row, while Reset will completely clear the list of Points.
Example
The value of a pressure load on the top of the wing needs to vary based on the coordinate values of each node at one
edge of the upper wing skin. Scalar was set in Data Options so only one value needs to be entered for each
location
Once the Data Surface has been created, you will use Model, Load, Elemental to create the pressure loading. The
elements on the top of the wing are selected and the Method in the Create Loads on Element dialog box has been
changed to Data Surface. Pressure has been chosen from the list of loads and the Along Coordinates Data Sur-
face has been selected from the Data Surface drop-down list. A value of 1.0 has been enter in the Pressure field
in order to use the entered values in the Data Surface directly. Finally element faces are chosen (using the adjacent
faces method) on which to apply the variable Pressure load.
Note: When a row is selected in the Variation Locations list, it will be highlighted on the screen using
the current settings for the Window, Show Entities command.
Nodes on this edge used to specify
coordinates (snap mode set to Snap
to Node)
Pressure Loads Vectors
shown on top of wing.
Pressure Loads converted
to output and shown as
Criteria Plot for clarity.
Between Coordinates Data Surface
This type of Data Surface allows you to choose the number of corners to use (2, 4, or 8), whether the variation is in
linear or parametric space, and enter a Scalar value (single value) or Vector values (X, Y, and Z values) at each
corner. The values will be interpolated between the specified corners.
Variation Type
2 Point Linear - Define two corner
locations and two associated values.
FEMAP will linearly interpolate
between the entered values at the two
locations.
2 Point Parametric- Define two
corner locations, two associated val-
ues, and optionally a Curve (Chosen
using the Options button). The Data
Surface values are then linearly inter-
polated between the two locations in
parametric space using the chosen
curve.
4 Point Bilinear - Define four cor-
ner locations representing a rectan-
gular section and associated values
at each corner. FEMAP will linearly
interpolate in two directions to obtain
the values inside the rectangular sec-
tion.
4 Point Parametric - Define four
corner locations representing a rect-
angular section, associated values at each corner, and optionally a Surface (Chosen using the Options button).
FEMAP will project the 4 corner locations to the surface, then linearly interpolate in two directions in the para-
metric space of the chosen surface to obtain the values inside the rectangular section.
8 Point Trilinear - Define eight corner locations representing a prismatic volume and associated values at
each corner. FEMAP will linearly interpolate in three directions to obtain the values inside the prismatic vol-
ume.
Data Options
Scalar - allows you to enter one value for each corner.
Vector - allows you to enter 3 component values (X, Y, and Z) for each corner.
Options button - three options are available for this data surface definition method overall, but some options
are only available when certain Variation Type have been selected.
CSys is available for all Variation Types and defines the coordinate system in which the Data Surface will be
evaluated.
Parametric Curve ID is only available when the 2 Point Parametric Variation Type have been selected. This
allows you to choose a curve ID. The linear interpolation will then occur in the curves parametric space.
Parametric Surface ID is only available when the 4 Point Parametric Variation Type have been selected. This
allows you to choose a surface ID on which the corner locations will be projected. The linear interpolation will then
occur in the surfaces parametric space.
Note: When a Parametric Variation Type (2 Point or 4 Point) is used for a mesh-based loading con-
dition, a geometry ID MUST be chosen to supply the parametric space.
When a Parametric Variation Type is used for a geometry-based loading condition, the
optional chosen geometry ID will override the geometry selected for the load.
7-26 Modeling Tools
Variation Locations
The X, Y, and Z Corner Location fields represent the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the Corner Points for each Vari-
ation Type. These coordinates can be entered manually or picked graphically from the screen (use of snap options
can aid in precise selection of coordinates).
Once the Corner Location fields for a row are entered, a single value (Data Options set to Scalar) or XYZ val-
ues (Data Options set to Vector) can be entered into the appropriate Value fields.
Common Uses
This type of data surface is commonly used to define variations in 1, 2, or 3 dimensions, when corner values are
known.
Example
The value of a pressure load on the top of the wing needs to vary based on the four known corner values of
then upper wing skin. Scalar was set in Data Options so only one value needs to be entered for each location
Once the Data Surface has been created, you will use Model, Load, Elemental to create the pressure loading. The
elements on the top of the wing are selected and the Method in the Create Loads on Element dialog box has been
changed to Data Surface. Pressure has been chosen from the list of loads and the Between Coordinates Data
Surface has been selected from the Data Surface drop-down list. A value of 1.0 has been enter in the Pressure
field in order to use the entered values in the Data Surface directly. Finally element faces are chosen (using the
adjacent faces method) on which to apply the variable Pressure load.
Note: The required number of Corner Locations and Values rows will become active depending on the
chosen Variation Type. All active rows must have values in order for this type of Data Surface to
work properly. (i.e., you can NOT enter only three points for a 4 Point Linear data surface)
Known Values at 4 corner
locations
shown on top of wing.
Contour Plot for clarity.
Output Map Data Surface
This type of Data Surface allows you to map output from one mesh to create load values for another mesh. The
Other Mesh can be a refined mesh in the same model or a completely different mesh in another model. Transfer-
ring an Output Map Data Surface to another model requires use of the Copy and Paste icons in the Data Surface
Editor.
Output which can be mapped includes:
Nodal - Forces, Moments, Displacements, Velocities, Rotational Velocities, Accelerations, Rotational Acceler-
ations, Temperatures, and Heat Flux)
Elemental - Pressures, Temperatures, Heat Flux, Heat Generation, Convection, and Radiation
The Output Map Data Surface works very similar to the Model, Load, Map Output From Model command,
although it can map more types of output to loads and can be used with only one model open in FEMAP. For more
information, see Section 4.3.6.4, "Model, Load, Map Output From Model..."
Map Output Data
Output Set - Allows you to choose an Ouput Set currently in
your model.
Output Vector - Allows you to choose a specific Output Vec-
tor in the selected Output Set.
Output By Group check box - When Checked, allows you to
choose a predefined FEMAP Group. This Group is used to limit
the amount of output sent to the Data Surface as only output
values from entities in the group will be used.
Data Options button
Two options are available for this data surface definition
method. Both can be used with any data surface of this type.
CSys - defines the coordinate system in which the Data Sur-
face will be evaluated.
This drop-down menu in the Output Map Options section allows you to choose a mapping option for entities
which do not have a one-to-one mapping from the Source to the Target. When a node is not mapped it is
because a Target nodes normal projection does not fall within any Source Element. The options for nodes that
are not mapped:
0..Set to Zero - Sets all entities without a direct map to the value of zero (0.0)
1..Set to Value - Sets all entities without a direct map to a specified value. The value can be specified as a
constant or in X, Y, and Z components.
2..Extend Closest - Extends the value to the closest Target Entity.
3..Interpolate - Does a linear interpolation using the source values. (Default)
4..No Output - Applies no output values to any entities which do not have a direct map. FEMAP will also
automatically create a group of Target nodes which have not been mapped.
Using Align Output Map and Plot Output Map commands
Both the Align Output Map and Plot Output Map commands in the Data Surface Editor are exclusively used on
conjunction with the Map Output Data Surface. These commands are available to aid application of the Data Sur-
face from a source mesh to a different target mesh.
Note: FEMAP does not restrict the type of data which can be mapped in any way from one mesh to
another.
For instance, you could create an Output Map Data Surface using nodal temperatures from the
source mesh, then map those temperatures to the target mesh as an elemental pressure load.
In this case, that may not make sense, but is simply to represent the unrestricted nature of the com-
mand.
7-28 Modeling Tools
After the Data Surface has been created (or copied into a different model), Align Output Map can be used to prop-
erly align the Data Surface to the target mesh. The source mesh is saved with each Output Map Data Surface
and can then be plotted in relation to the target mesh using Plot Output Map.
The recommended workflow of these commands is to first toggle on the plot of the source mesh, align it to
the target mesh, then toggle off the plot once everything is properly aligned.
Example
After a steady-state fluid flow analysis of fluid through a pipe, the Total Pressure at each element in the fluid is
calculated. The Total Pressure output can be displayed in FEMAP using a contour plot. Now we want to transfer
the pressure values on the outside of the fluid (solid elements in Model A) to the inside of the pipe walls
(plate elements in Model B). Since nodes and element locations are completely different (element shapes as
well), we will map the Total pressure output to create a pressure load for structural analysis.
Once the Data Surface has been created, you will need to copy the Data Surface to the clipboard from Model A
using the Copy command in the Data Surface Editor. Now Model B needs to be opened (or created) and once it
is ready for loading, the Data Surface on the clipboard will be pasted in using the Paste command in the Data
Surface Editor.
Now, you will use Model, Load, Elemental to create the pressure loading. The elements on the inside of the pipe
are selected and the Method in the Create Loads on Element dialog box has been changed to Data Surface. Pres-
sure has been chosen from the list of loads and the Output Map Data Surface has been selected from the Data
Surface drop-down list. A value of 1.0 has been enter in the Pressure field in order to use the entered values in
the Data Surface directly. Finally element faces are chosen (Face 1) on which to apply the variable Pressure load
Total Pressure at Nodes
from a fluid-flow analysis
shown on inside of pipe
shell model.
Mesh Data Surface
This type of Data Surface allows you to choose node or element IDs and enter a Scalar value (or expression) or
Vector (X, Y, and Z) values (or 3 expressions). This type of data surface is much more useful when using an
expression, which uses a particular coordinate of a node, element centroid, or centroid of an element face to vary
the value (such as XND(!i), bases value on X coordinate of a node). The values shown in the Data Surface Editor
are evaluated values for each selected entity.
Variation Type
You must choose the entity type used to vary the data
surface
Node ID - When Select Entities button is clicked,
FEMAP will prompt you to choose Node IDs for the
Data Surface
Element ID - When Select Entities button is clicked,
FEMAP will prompt you to choose Element IDs for the
Data Surface
Data Options
Scalar - allows you to enter one value or expression
Vector - allows you to enter 3 component values (X, Y,
and Z) or 3 individual expressions.
Options button - One option is available for this data
surface definition method. CSys is available for all
Variation Types and defines the coordinate system in
which the Data Surface will be evaluated.
Define/Fill Data Surface Data
Depending on the Data Option selected, you will be asked for 1 or 3 Value/Equation(s) (Expressions). After the
required Value/Equation(s) have been entered, click the Select Entities button to choose the appropriate entities
with the standard Entity Selection dialog box.
Common Uses
This type of data surface is commonly used to define load variations where the variation is known relative to the
element or node ID.
Example
The temperature of the exterior walls of a tank varies with height (Y direc-
tion in global coordinate system) from a point at the origin. The tank has a
mapped mesh which will allow accurate distribution of either nodal or ele-
mental temperatures. The Scalar Data Option will be used and an expres-
sion (YEL(!i)) will be used to vary the X value (In this case, simply
magnitude) based on the height of the element centroid.
Once the expression has been entered, click the Select Entities button and
choose all of the elements in the model. When OK is clicked, the evaluated
values will be sent to the table in the Data Surface Editor.
Now, you will use Model, Load, Elemental to create the temperature loading.
All of the elements are selected and Temperature has been chosen from the
list of loads. The Method in the Create Loads on Element dialog box has been
changed to Data Surface and the Mesh Data Surface has been selected from the Data Surface drop-down list.
A value of 100 has been enter in the Temperature field in order to use the entered values in the Data Surface mul-
tiplied by 100.
Note: To create an expression referencing the Node, Element, or Element Face Coordinates use
XND(), YND(), ZND(), XEL(), YEL(), ZEL(), XEF(;), YEF(;), or ZEF(;). These are explained in
greater detail in Appendix C of the FEMAP User Guide (see Section C, "Function Reference")
7-30 Modeling Tools
Repeating the same procedure but using nodal Y-coordinates (YND(!i) expression) of all nodes instead of ele-
ments for the Mesh Data Surface, then applying nodal temperature loads yields these loads:
Tabular Data Surface
This type of Data Surface allows you to create a data surface by defining the size of the table in the Data Surface
Editor and then manually entering the values one at a time or pasting them in from another program, such as Excel.
This is the most general type of data surface and in some ways, the most powerful. That said, it also requires the
most interaction with the user, so keep that in mind.
Elemental Temperature Loads
shown on Tank
Elemental Temperature Loads
converted to output and shown
with Criteria plot for clarity
Nodal Temperature Loads
shown on Tank
Nodal Temperature Loads
converted to output and shown
with Contour plot for clarity
Variation Type
You must choose the type of table to create, then specify the size of the selected table using the Define Data button.
This will create an empty table which you will then fill with values to vary the loading condition.
Parametric Table - This type of table is designed to be based on the Parametric Space associated with a geo-
metric surface chosen during the creation of the Data Surface or created as a generic Data Surface which can
only be applied with a Surface-based load.
When Define Data button is clicked, the Define Table Size dialog box with
appears with fields for U Divisions, V Divisions, and Surface ID.
u Divisions - refers to how many intermediate points will be between 0
and 1 in the U direction of the surfaces Parametric Space.
v Divisions - refers to how many intermediate points will be between 0
and 1 in the V direction of the surfaces Parametric Space.
Surface ID - allows you to choose a 4-sided surface ID on which each
corner value in the table, will be correspond to a corner on the surface.
The linear interpolation will then occur in the surfaces parametric space.
For example, Corner 1 would be at (U=0, V=0) in Parametric space, Cor-
ner 2 (U=1, V=0), Corner 3 (U=1, V=1), and Corner 4 (U=0, V=1).
Example
The table will look like this for a Parametric Table with 5 U Divisions, 5 V Divisions, and a chosen Surface:
Values can now be entered at the four corners of the table:
Note: When a Parametric Table is used for a mesh-based loading condition, a surface ID (not a
boundary surface) MUST be chosen to supply the parametric space.
When a Parametric Table is used for a surface-based loading condition, the chosen surface ID
will override the geometry selected for the load.
7-32 Modeling Tools
When the Data Surface is saved, FEMAP will save the corner values and when the Data Surface is used, FEMAP
will interpolate the saved points to create the load distribution.
Instead of just the corner values, values for all of the cells can be filled in manually to create a very specific distri-
bution of values in the table. You can also fill the empty cells of the table automatically with interpolated values
using the Interpolate command in the Data Surface Editor.
Here is the Data Surface Editor showing the Interpolated values:
Once the Data Surface has been created, you could use Model, Load, Elemental to create a distributed pressure
load. The elements on a surface are selected and the Method in the Create Loads on Element dialog box has been
changed to Data Surface. Pressure has been chosen from the list of loads and the Parametric Table Data Sur-
face has been selected from the Data Surface drop-down list. A value of 1.0 has been enter in the Pressure field
in order to use the entered values in the Data Surface directly. Finally element faces are chosen (using the adjacent
faces method) on which to apply the variable Pressure load.
Note: It is VERY important to remember to save this type of Data Surface before trying to use it to cre-
ate a loading condition. Unlike most of the other Data Surface types, most or all of the data must
be entered into the table. FEMAP does not know this data has been entered or modified until you
use the Save or Save As command.
shown on mesh
Pressure Loads shown
as output in contour plot
Underlying Surface used
for parametric space
for clarity
XYZ Table - This type of table is the most general type of Data Surface.
When Define Data button is clicked, the CSys type selected for the Data Surface using the Options button will
determine which Define Table Size dialog box is shown.
The number of Divisions boxes checked dictates the size of the corresponding table.
For instance, if a cylindrical coordinate system is chosen, only R Divisions is checked, and a value of 5 is
entered, the following table will appear
This type of data surface could be used to vary a loading condition using
the radial distance from a user-defined cylindrical coordinate system.
For example, you have an annular plate which has an inner radius of 5
and an outer radius of 10. You need to vary the temperature evenly from
the inner radius to the outer radius with specific temperature values being
at precise radial distances from the center. This method, would allow you
to do this rather easily.
To model this in FEMAP, you could define a cylindrical coordinate system
at the center of the inner radius and then create a data surface which had
the desired number of R values with corresponding temperatures.
Now, you could create an elemental or nodal temperature loading condi-
tion referencing this XYZ Table Data Surface.
Here is what elemental temperature distributions would look like on one half of the annular plate:
If the plate elements of the annular plate were extruded in the positive Z-direction 5 units to create solid elements,
a tabular Data Surface could be used to vary a temperature load in both the Radial Direction and the Z-direction in
the same load.
Again, a cylindrical coordinate system is chosen, but this time R Divisions and Z Divisions are checked, and a
value of 5 is entered for R Divisions and 3 for Z Divisions.
Rectangular Coordinate System Cylindrical Coordinate System Spherical Coordinate System
Varying Elemental Temperatures
on finer meshed model shown
as output in Criteria plot for clarity
shown on half plate model
7-34 Modeling Tools
The table below represents this data surface, with some values manually entered to create the variation criteria.
Notice that the row of R values varies from 5 to 10 and the column of Z values varies from 0 to 5.
Now, you could create an elemental or nodal temperature loading condition referencing this XYZ Table Data Sur-
face.
Here is what this elemental temperature distribution would look like on one half of the solid mesh created from the
original annular plate:
Finally, if we want to vary the temperature using the radius, Z-distance, and theta angle, we could use this type of
Data Surface.
Again, a cylindrical coordinate system is chosen, but this time R Divisions, T Divisions, and Z Divisions are
all checked, and a value of 5 is entered for R Divisions, 7 for T Divisions and 3 for Z Divisions.
You can see that the table now has three tabbed sheets. Each sheet contains a table to define the Radial and Theta
values for one particular Z value. By default, all of the Z values are 0.
on solid meshed model shown
as output in contour plot for clarity
Elements of fine-meshed annular
plate model extruded into solid
elements in positive Z-direction
To change the Z value for a particular tabbed sheet, click on the tab, then click the right mouse button and
choose Properties from the context sensitive menu. This dialog box will open:
Notice you may enter a Title and assign a Value for Z for each sheet. Click OK to return to the table in the Data
Surface Editor.
The table below represents this data surface, with some values manually entered to create the variation criteria.
Notice that the row of R values varies from 5 to 10, the column of Theta values vary from 0 degrees to
180 degrees, and the Z values on the tabs, vary from 0 to 5.
Here is what this elemental temperature distribution would look like on one half of the solid mesh using 3-D XYZ
Tabular Data Surface:
Note: If you have do not have enough sheets to define a particular Data Surface, you can add them one
at a time by clicking on the tab, then clicking the right mouse button and choosing Insert Page
from the context sensitive menu. On the other hand, you can delete excess sheets one at a time
using the Delete Page from the context sensitive menu.
on solid mesh model shown as
output in contour plot for clarity
7-36 Modeling Tools
Data Options
Scalar - allows you to enter one value for each X value or XY Data Pair
Vector - allows you to enter 3 component values (X, Y, and Z) for each X value or XY Data Pair.
Options button - two options are available for this data surface definition method.
CSys - defines the coordinate system in which the Data Surface will be evaluated. The selected Coordinate Sys-
tem will bring up the appropriate Define Table Size dialog box.
Tabular Options - instructs FEMAP what to do with undefined cells in the Data Surface Editor. The default
is to use Interpolate from Closest, which will interpolate to the appropriate entity type from the closest defined
value. The other option is to use Value, which will simply place the entered value into any undefined cells.
Data Variation Data
When Define Data button is clicked and Parametric Table is selected, the Define Table Size dialog box with
appears with fields for u Divisions, v Divisions, and Surface ID.
When Define Data button is clicked and XYZ Table is selected, the CSys type selected for the Data Surface using
the Options button will determine which Define Table Size dialog box is shown. For instance, if a rectangular coor-
dinate system is selected, the Define Table Size dialog box allows you to enter values for X Divisions, Y Divi-
sions, and Z Divisions.
Arbitrary 3-D Data Surface
The dialog box for this type of Data Surface is very similar to the Along Coordinates Data Surface. The difference
is that this Data Surface does not use the order in which the variation locations and values were entered into the
table for anything. Instead, it uses the entered variation locations to perform an interpolation of values using a
Modified Inverse Weighted Interpolation method. Any number of independent 3D locations may be entered.
Variation Options
Define Multiple - allows you to use the Variation Locations section of this Dialog Box. By clicking the Paste
button, values on the clipboard will be entered into the Variation Locations list in the appropriate format.
Note: One powerful way to use this type of Data Surface is to take data from physical/environmental
testing which was retrieved at arbitrary locations and then apply them to a meshed model. This
way, you do not have to create hard points in your model to apply specific loading conditions.
Number of Points - allows you to enter a number to represent the number of rows which will be created in the
Table of the Data Surface Editor. The table can then be filled manually one cell at a time, using the Update
Coordinates or Update Vector Values commands (available on the Context-Sensitive menu for this type of Data
Surface), or Pasting (also on context sensitive menu) cells from a spreadsheet or comma-separated values.
Data Options
Scalar - allows you to enter one value for each arbitrary 3-D location.
Vector - allows you to enter 3 component values (X, Y, and Z) for each arbitrary 3-D location.
Options button - two options are available for this data surface definition method.
CSys - defines the coordinate system in which the Data Surface will be evaluated.
Arbitrary 3-D Interpolation Options - when this option is set to % Locations to Include, the value can vary
from 0 to 100. If it is set to 100, FEMAP will use the weighted contribution from all of the Data Surface 3-
D Variation Locations, while if it is set to 0 FEMAP will use the number set in Min Locations to Include.
The value for Min Locations to Include must be higher than one and simply tells FEMAP the minimum number of
variation locations that will be used at each interpolation point.
Variation Locations
The X, Y, and Z Location fields represent the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the arbitrary points in 3-D space. These
coordinates can be entered manually or picked graphically from the screen (use of snap options can aid in precise
selection of coordinates).
Once the Location fields are entered, a single value (Data Options set to Scalar) or XYZ values (Data Options
set to Vector) can be entered into the appropriate Value fields.
To add a coordinate and value(s) to the list of points in 3-D space, click the Add button.
Values for any of the fields in a single row can be updated by clicking a row in the list (the values will be filled in
for Location and Value), altering the desired values, and then clicking the Update button.
Delete will delete only the highlighted row, while Reset will completely clear the list of Points.
Example
A triangular surface has a variable pressure assigned to it. A single value for
pressure is know for a position near each corner.
When these three arbitrary locations and corresponding values are entered
into the Define Arbitrary 3-D Coordinate Data Surface dialog box, the table
in the Data Surface Editor will appear like this:
.
.
.
Now that the Data Surface has been created, it can now be used to create a pressure loading condition.
Note: When a row is selected in the Variation Locations list, it will be highlighted on the screen using
the current settings for the Window, Show Entities command.
7-38 Modeling Tools
You will use Model, Load, Elemental to create the pressure loading. All of the elements on the triangular surface
are selected and the Method in the Create Loads on Element dialog box has been changed to Data Surface. Pres-
sure has been chosen from the list of loads and the Arbitrary 3-D location Data Surface has been selected from
the Data Surface drop-down list. A value of 1.0 has been enter in the Pressure field in order to use the entered
values in the Data Surface directly. Finally element faces are chosen (using the adjacent faces method) on which to
apply the variable Pressure load.
Another example would be to paste a number of location/value pairs in from a spread sheet (or comma-separated
list of values) and apply them as a Pressure load on top surface of a wing to create a distributed load.
Equation Data Surface
The simplest type of Data Surface is the Equation Data Surface. The only inputs are which Coordinate System the
equation should be evaluated (CSys in Data Surface) and the Equation itself. The Calculator button can be clicked
to bring up the FEMAP Equation Editor dialog box. This allows you to see all of the options FEMAP has for creat-
ing equations and also shows the proper syntax which must be used to be recognized by FEMAP. This is a great
way to store a FEMAP equation for use in multiple loading conditions.
These functions which can be used FEAMP equation are explained in greater detail in Appendix C of the FEMAP
User Guide (see Section C, "Function Reference").
shown on triangular surface.
Tools, Entity Info 7-39
Example
An equation can be used to create a bearing load on the inside of hole. We will use half an annular plate for this
example, with the center of the hole at the origin (this enables us to use the Global Cylindrical Coordinate System).
In this case, our equation is calculating the Sine
(SIN) of the Theta Value in the Global Cylindrical
Coordinate System of each selected node (YND(!i))
and multiplying that value by 10.
Here is what a nodal load in the X-direction (radial
for our chosen coordinate system) referencing this
Equation Data Surface would look like:
7.2.4 Tools, Entity Info
Essentially, the Entity Info pane works much like the Show Tooltips command on the Selector Actions menu of the
Select Toolbar, but the information goes to a pane that can remain open instead of a Yellow Tooltip balloon. For
more information, see Section 7.3.1.5, "Tools, Toolbars, Select".
When the Select Toolbar has an active entity type or any selection dialog box is open, the Entity Info dockable pane
will dynamically display information about each entity of that type as it is highlighted in the main graphics window
For example, when the Select Toolbar is active and entity selection is set to
Element, the information displayed in the Entity Info pane will be Element
number, Element Type, Property ID, Material ID, and the nodes on the Ele-
ment. Element post-processing information will be displayed when any Con-
tour Style is selected except Vector.
When entity selection is set to Node, the Entity Info pane will contain Node
number, Coordinates, Definition Coordinate System, and Output Coordinate
System. Post-processing data will be displayed for nodes when any
Deformed Style is selected, except Animate and Animate - MultiSet.
In order to keep a particular entity in the Entity Info pane, you can click the entity on the screen with the left mouse
button and then keep holding the mouse button down until you are in the Entity Info pane. This will allow you to
perform actions such as Cut, Copy, or change the Font Size or Style of the text using the context sensitive menu.
In some form, all entity types which can be activated in the Select Toolbar or selected using a dialog box can be dis-
played in the Entity Info pane.
A few exceptions:
Laminate elements will not be highlighted when Material is the active entity type, because laminate elements
usually reference multiple materials. Also, when Property is the active entity, no details about laminate proper-
ties will be shown in the Entity Info pane. All ply information can be found in the Entity Editor for laminates.
Loads and constraints on a particular entity type will only show info regarding the entity type to which they are
applied (i.e., when Loads, Nodal is the active entity type, only information about the highlighted node will
appear in the Entity Info pane, nothing about the value of the Nodal Load). All load and constraint information
can be found in the Entity Editor by selected a particular entity, which can then be edited.
7-40 Modeling Tools
The actual text strings of a Text entity will not appear in the Entity Info pane, but other useful information such
as Justification, Position, Visibility, and Style options will be displayed. Actual text strings can be found in the
Entity Editor and can be edited.
Context Sensitive Menu
There is a context sensitive menu which will appear when the right mouse button is
clicked inside the Entity Info pane. This menu allows you to search the text for a spe-
cific portion of text using the Find... command. You can Undo and Redo typing in the
Entity Info pane. There is the ability to Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear any highlighted
text. The Font command will allow you to change the Font, Size, Color, and Style of
any highlighted text, or set those items for all new text in one dialog box. The Font
style can be changed using the Bold, Italic, and Underline commands (when a Font
Style is active, the icon will be surrounded by an orange square). Default Format
allows you to set a format, you can choose between Text, Rich Text, Object, or Auto.
Scale allows you to scale the size of a non-text object (i.e., pictures) using a percentage
of the objects current size. The Zoom command allows you to make everything in the
Entity Info pane larger or smaller. Select All will select everything in the Entity Info
Pane, then operations can be performed
When the Entity Info pane is floating, it can be repositioned and resized, just as any other floating dockable pane.
7.2.5 Tools, Data Table
The Data Table dockable pane allows you send data to an interactive, dynamically changing table using various
methods to fill the table. Each item appears as a single row separated into a number of columns when it enters the
Data Table. Once in the Data Table, information of the entities of the same type can be sorted, filtered, and evalu-
ated to help you understand what is occurring in your model before and after analysis. In many ways, the Data
Table is a complement to the other dockable panes and can also simply be an alternate method to list and view
entity data.
Note: If you have a wheel mouse you can hold the CTRL key down and
spin the wheel to dynamically zoom in and out in the Entity Info
pane
Note: Ctrl+C can be used as a general copy command in FEMAP. When
the Entity Info pane is active, Ctrl+C will perform the copy com-
mand on the highlighted text.
Lock/Unlock toggle
Copy to Clipboard
Hide/Show Columns
Add Output Columns
Clear All
Show/Hide Group Header
Collapse/Expand All Groups
Filter Rows
Clear Filter
Update Selection to Visible Rows
Show Visible Rows
Show When Selected Menu
Tools, Data Table 7-41
Some common uses for the Data Table. You can:
Create a list of entities of a certain type for comparison and sorting of data. As each entity row is highlighted, it
will be sent to the Entity Editor, where the item can be modified.
Add output columns and element checks to lists of nodes and elements.
Add mass properties and mesh associativity information for lists of geometric entities.
Compare output data from different ouput sets and/or different models.
Group entities by using a particular column header or set of headers, which you can choose, to help view the
data in logical subsets.
Create a large listing of entities using the Select toolbar, filter the entities using specific fields, and then return
the filtered list to the selector to perform desired operations.
Print out tables directly from the Data Table or copy the information (all or selected rows and columns) to the
clipboard and paste it into a word processor, such as Microsoft Word, to aid in the creation of reports.
Create an output summary in the data table which can be quickly scanned to determine max/min values. There
are many options for creating a customized output summary using the List, Output, Summary To Data Table
command. For more information see Section 8.6.3, "List, Output, Summary to Data Table...".
For instance, you can create a list of surfaces and see which ones have a meshing approach assigned or find out
which of your surfaces has the smallest area and may be responsible for creating distorted elements. You can com-
pare element stresses from multiple output sets from different models, sort your elements by distortion values, filter
entities by using certain criteria, or simply list entities in your model for visual verification.
Selection Methods
The Select toolbar is one method used to choose entities to be placed in the Data Table. You can also select entities
in the Model Info tree and send them to the Data Table by clicking an icon or send all the output vectors from an
entire output set over using a Context Sensitive menu.
Data Table Rows and Columns
All data from an entity is sent to the Data Table in a single row which is partitioned into columns for accurate view-
ing, sorting, and filtering purposes. When a column header is clicked, an arrow pointing either up or down will
appear in the header. When the arrow is pointing up, the data in that column will be sorted from lowest to highest
numerical value or alphabetical, from A-Z then a-z again (All UPPER CASE letters come before any lower case
letters) depending on the type of data in the column. When the arrow is pointing down, the column will be sorted
from highest to lowest numerical value or alphabetical, from z-a then Z-A again. Clicking on a column header will
change the direction of the arrow and the reverse the listing.
Column headers can be dragged and dropped into new positions to modify the look of your table. Any column
header can be dragged until a X appears over the header, making that column no longer visible. Column width
can also be adjusted by placing the cursor on the line between the column header (this will bring up a two headed
arrow), then clicking and dragging the column to the desired width.
Columns can be turned on and off one at a time using the Show/Hide Columns icon menu. Also, Multiple changes
to the columns can be made at once using the Update Multiple Columns command on the Show/Hide Columns icon
menu.
Data Table Icons
Lock/Unlock Toggle - When unlocked, the Data Table will accept data from each entity that is picked using the
Select toolbar or send from the Model Info tree using an icon or Context Sensitive menu. When locked, no more
data will be added to the list and the information in the Data Table will remain there until the pane is unlocked or
cleared.
Copy to Clipboard - Copies the current data in the Data Table to the clipboard so it can be pasted into the Mes-
sages window or an outside program
Note: Only data from one particular entity type can be in the Data Table at once. Therefore, once you
change the type of entity you are sending to the Data Table, it will reset and begin a new listing.
7-42 Modeling Tools
Hide/Show Columns Menu - Clicking this icon brings up a menu with commands and a listing of all the columns
available for the current entity type (visible columns are marked with a check mark in an orange box). By high-
lighting a column and clicking the mouse, you can toggle the column from hidden to visible and vice versa. This
allows you to hide or show one column at a time.
The commands on this menu are:
Update Multiple Columns - Brings up the Columns to Show dialog box which allows you to check and uncheck
multiple column headers at one time. You can also highlight a heading and click the Toggle Selection button, to
hide and show different columns. After you are done selecting the columns you want, click OK to view your
modified Data Table
Add Element Checks - Available only when elements are in the Data Table, this command will add Element
Distortion Check columns to the visible elements. There are six element checks that will be displayed: Aspect
Ratio, Taper, Alt Taper, Internal Angles, Warping, Tet Collapse, and Jacobian. These distortion checks are
described in greater detail in Section 7.4.5.6, "Tools, Check, Distortion...".
Add Mass Properties - Available when curves, surfaces, solids, elements, materials, or properties are in the
Data Table. When used with Curves it displays the Length of the curves. When used with Surfaces, it displays
the Area of the surfaces. When used with Solids, it displays Volume, Surface Area, Center of Gravity in the X,
Y, and Z (CGx, CGy, and CGz), and moments of inertia (Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Iyz, and Izz) of the listed solids.
When used with Elements, it displays length (1-D elements), area (2-D elements), volume (3-D elements),
Structural Mass, NonStructural Mass, Total Mass, and center of gravity coordinates for X, Y, and Z. See Section
7.4.4.3, "Tools, Mass Properties Menu..." for more information. When used with Materials and Properties the
Structural Mass represents the mass of ALL the elements in the model that reference a particular material or
property.
Add Mesh Associativity - Available only when points, curves, surfaces, or solids are in the Data Table. Shows a
column for the number of Nodes, number of Elements, and number of Element Faces that are associated to that
particular geometric entity.
Set CSys for Nodal Output - Available only when nodes are in the Data Table and there is nodal output avail-
able to graphically select (i.e. the model is deformed). Allows you to choose which Coordinate System nodal
output will be displayed in the Data Table. Once the coordinate system has been chosen, all nodes added to the
Note: Because of the Rich Text Format copied from the Data Table and Entity Editor dockable
panes, you may need to do some resizing of columns in order to create a correctly formatted
table when it is copied into the Messages pane. When copying tables from the Data Table
and Entity Editor panes, there should be no issues when pasting into outside programs which
support Rich Text Format, such as Microsoft Word.
Note: Ctrl+C can be used as a general copy command in FEMAP. FEMAP takes into account
which window or dockable pane is currently active. When the Data Table pane is active,
Ctrl+C will perform the copy command on the highlighted rows, or if no rows are high-
lighted, the entire table will be copied.
Data Table will have nodal output displayed in the selected coordinate system. When you change the coordinate
system, all nodes added after the change will be in the newly selected coordinate system, while all the nodal
output currently in the table will remain displayed in the previous coordinate system(s). Clicking the Clear All
button will reset the Data Table to the use each individual nodes Output Coordinate System.
Add Output Columns - You must have nodes or elements in the Data Table AND output data in the model for this
icon to be available. When available, it will bring up the Results to Add to Data Table dialog box which allows you
to choose Output Sets and Output Vectors to be shown as columns in the Data Table. When multiple models are
open, the name of the active model will appear at the top of the Results to Add to Data Table dialog box.
Along with checking and unchecking the boxes, you can also highlight the selected Output Set or Output Vector
and click the Toggle Set Selection or Toggle Vector Selection buttons, respectively.
You can toggle the Include Components/Corner Results check box to show components or corner data for a given
Output Vector (if available). There is also a toggle to Make Columns Visible as well, which is on by default. If you
check Select Similar Layer/Ply/Corner Vectors, you can select all similar data without worrying about manually
checking all of the output vectors. This option is especially helpful for laminates with a large number of plys.
Match Sets in Multiple Models allows you to manually choose the additional output sets using the Results for Addi-
tional Model dialog box to compare results data and add this data to the Data Table.
For example, if you had two very similar models, you may want to compare results from several output sets which
are in both models. Depending on your analysis process, the data you are looking for may be in Sets 1 and 4 of the
first model and Sets 5 and 7 of the second model. By using Match Sets in Multiple Models, FEMAP allows you to
choose Sets 1 and 4 and the desired output vectors in the first model, Click OK, then brings up the Results for Addi-
tional Model dialog box to choose Sets 5 and 7 from the second model.
Once finished, click OK and view the modified Data Table
Clear All - Deletes all information in the Data Table.
Note: You may compare data from any number of open models in the current FEMAP interface
you are using. FEMAP will label the Results for Additional Model dialog boxes with the
appropriate model names to aid in data selection and prevent confusion.
7-44 Modeling Tools
Show/Hide Group Header - When on (icon highlighted by orange background), the Data Table allows you to drag
column headers up into a specified area. Once there the Data Table will partition the rows of entity data using a
specific group header or set of group headers. This allows you to group entities in the table with similar charac-
teristics (such as the same material, property, element type, element topology, etc.) together for a specific purpose.
The grouping is multi-level, therefore the entities are broken down by the first group header, then the second, and
so on until the final group header. You can always drag a column header from the Grouping Area back to the
Column Header Row and the remaining group levels will keep their positions in the hierarchy.
Expand/Collapse All Groups - Collapses or expands Top level group categories in the at once in the Data
Table. Can be used to show only what you need to view specific entities.
Filter Rows - Brings up the Data Table Filter dialog box. Allows you to choose columns to check for specific val-
ues, text, or if an entity row has a specific column at all. When filtering with a Value, you can choose to limit the
filter to using values that are above a maximum value, below a minimum value, between the range of two values, or
outside the range of two values. When filtering with Text, the filter will remove rows having text in the selected
columns containing any or all (you get to choose) of the entered letters.
Note: The expand/collapse toggles allow you to collapse and expand individual categories and sub-
categories in the groups. When the toggle shows a + it means the group category can be
expanded, when it shows a - it means the group category can be collapsed.
Note: When Output has been added to the Data Table, a special column header exists called Total/
Centroidal ID which can be used to group output vectors based on the top level vector that
they are to which they are related. In this column, the number of the top level vector will
be listed. For Instance, individual Top Von Mises corner stresses (Output Vectors: 100233,
150233, 200233, and 250233) would all be grouped under 7033..Top Von Mises Stress.
Another example of where this can be useful is viewing output from multiple plys when
dealing with laminate elements.
Grouping Area
Column Header Row
Along with checking and unchecking the boxes, you can also highlight the Columns to Check one at a time and
click the Toggle Selection button. Once all are selected, click OK and view the modified Data Table.
You can also use the Remove Filtered Rows check box to completely remove filtered rows from the Data Table.
Clear Filter - Clears all filter settings and all entities previously shown in the Data Table before filtering will be
visible again. If you used the Remove Filtered Rows check box, these entities are no longer in the Data Table, there-
fore they will not reappear when the Clear Filter icon is clicked.
Update Selection to Visible Rows - This icon will update the selection list created by the Select toolbar with only
the visible rows in the Data Table. This command can be used when the filter is on or off, as well as, when there are
groups in the Data Table. This command will completely purge the selection list of all other entity types except
those in the Data Table, so be careful about using it if you have created a large selection list with multiple entity
types.
Show Visible Rows - Highlights (Window, Show Entities command) all entities that are currently visible as rows in
the Data Table.
Show When Selected Menu - Contains a number of options to show the entities currently highlighted in the Data
Table in the main graphics window. Entities such as Elements, Nodes, or Geometric Entities (Solids, Surfaces,
Curves, Points) can be shown. Also, entities associated with a Property, Material, Connection Property, Connec-
tion Region, Connector, Group, Layer, or individual Coordinate Systems can be shown. By default, this com-
mand is set to off. The commands on this menu use different options of the Window, Show Entities command.
Setting the menu to Highlight will highlight the selected entities in the graphics window. Transparent Highlight
does the same thing as Highlight, but will make all non-selected entities temporarily transparent as well.
Setting the menu to Show Selected Only will actually make all entities NOT associated with the selected entities in
the Data Table disappear temporarily until the model is regenerated.
The Show Labels and Show Normals (shows element normals) options can be toggled on and off and the highlight
color can also be chosen from the FEMAP color palette using the Highlight Color... command.
7-46 Modeling Tools
Other Data Table Features
Expand/Collapse toggles - Only appear when using Groups in the Data Table. Allow you to collapse and
expand individual group categories and sub-categories inside the Data Table. When the toggle shows a + it
means the group category can be expanded, when it shows a - it means the group category can be collapsed.
Context Sensitive Menu (Rows) - When an entity row or rows are highlighted, right mouse clicking will bring up
a context sensitive menu. This menu allows you to show (highlight in the graphics window) the row or rows cur-
rently highlighted in the Data Table. There is a running total of the selected entity rows in parenthesis after the
Show Rows command. This menu contains commands to Update Selection (updates the Selection List in the Model
Data tree with highlighted rows only), individually Filter highlighted rows, as well as Delete them. Copy Rows will
copy only the highlighted rows to the clipboard
Context Sensitive Menu (Column Header) - When the cursor is positioned over a column header, right mouse
clicking will bring up a context sensitive menu. This menu allows you to sort (ascending or descending) using the
column header, create a Data Table group with the column heading, hide the column, or align the data in the col-
umns (Align Left, Align Right, Align Center). Show Print Columns toggle on/off a highlight of the right side of the
last Column Header which will be included before FEMAP starts printing columns on a different line.
Copy Columns... will bring up the following dialog box. Check the desired columns to copy to the clipboard and by
default those columns will be copied in their entirety. There are also options to Copy Column Headers, which is on
by default, which will include the title of the column, and Copy Only Selected Rows which will send only the
checked columns of the highlighted rows to the clipboard.
When the Data Table pane is floating, it can be repositioned and resized, just as any other floating dockable panes.
The Data Table can be closed by clicking the X on the right side of the Title bar. To reopen the Data Table, use
the Tools, Data Table menu.
Note: It is possible to choose multiple entity rows at the same time and perform operations on all of
the rows at once. In order to choose multiple entity rows, hold down the CTRL key and
select individual entities with the mouse or hold down the SHIFT key and select a first row
and a last row and all of the rows in between will also be selected.
Note: The combination of copying columns with the Copy Only Selected Rows option turned on is
a convenient method to transfer only the necessary data to your exterior spreadsheet pro-
gram.
Tools, Programming, API Programming 7-47
7.2.6 Tools, Programming, API Programming
The API Programming dockable pane is a Visual Basic-compatible scripting editor and debugging control which
allows you to create customized Basic scripts inside the FEMAP interface using the FEMAP Application Program-
ming Interface (API).
The FEMAP API lets you customize
FEMAP to meet your specific needs. The
FEMAP API is an OLE/COM-based pro-
gramming interface to FEMAP. It con-
tains hundreds of functions that can be
called from Visual Basic, VBA (Excel,
Word, Access, ...), C, or C++.
You can have multiple files open in the
API Programming window. The files will
be numbered 1 to n and you can move
from one to another by choosing the
number in the grey area in the top left
corner of the dialog box under the icons.
Program File Icons
Open - Opens an existing API Basic File
(*.bas file,*.cls file, or *.obm file). See
Macro, Code, Object, and Class Modules
below.
Save - Saves an API Basic File. You can
choose to save an API Basic Files as a
*.bas file, *.cls file, or *.obm file.
Actions Menu - Contains actions such
as creating new Macros, Code Modules,
Object Modules, or Class Modules. It has
options to Close a single Macro or Mod-
ule or Close All the open ones, Save an
open Macro or Module or Save All the
open ones. Finally, it can be used to
Open Uses which opens all files that
have been referenced with Uses state-
ments in the current API script.
Here is a brief description of the different
types of Macros and Modules, as well as
Uses:
Macro - Is basically an application written to perform a specific task using the FEMAP API to have FEMAP
complete tasks and operations. For simple tasks to automate FEMAP, this is the only type of module that you
will need to use. Saved in a *.bas file.
Code Module - A Code module implements a code library. It has a set of Public procedures accessible from
other macros and modules. The public symbols are accessed directly. Code Modules provide a way to split up
larger applications into multiple files. Saved in a *.bas file.
Object Module - An object module implements an ActiveX Automation object. It has a set of Public procedures
accessible from other macros and modules. These public symbols are accessed via the name of the object mod-
ule or an object variable. Public Constants, Types, arrays, fixed length strings are not allowed. An object mod-
ule is similar to a class module except that one instance is automatically created. That instance has the same
name as the object module's name. Saved in a *.obm file.
Save
Actions Menu
Object
Play
User Dialog
Stop
Toggle
Breakpoint
Clear All
Step Into
Step Over Open
Browser
Breakpoints
Step Out
Step to
Cursor
Pause
7-48 Modeling Tools
Class Module - A class module implements an ActiveX Automation object. It has a set of Public procedures
accessible from other macros and modules. These public symbols are accessed via an object variable. Public
Constants, Types, arrays, fixed length strings are not allowed. A class module is similar to a object module
except that no instance is automatically created. Saved in a *.cls file.
Uses - The Uses comment indicates that the current macro/module uses public and friend symbols from the
module.
Object Browser - The Object Browser shows information about all the special data types that are available for the
FEMAP API.
You can choose from the list of loaded libraries, then choose a Data Type, then select a Method/Property. Any
available parameters associated with the Method/Property will be also be listed in the Parameters section. On the
top line, all of the arguments will be listed for the particular Method/Property.
For help on a particular Data Type or Method/Property click on the ? button and you will be taken directly to that
entry in the FEMAP API manual.
User Dialog - This tool can be used to create
customized dialog boxes which can then be used
to drive API applications. Dialog box options,
which can be added via the icons on the left,
include Radio Buttons, Push Buttons (OK, Can-
cel, or Custom), List Boxes, Check Boxes, Text
Entry Boxes, Combination Boxes, Multi List
Box, and others.
The top icons include (from left to right) Edit
Item Properties, Delete, Cut, Copy, Paste, Move
in Front, Move Behind, Select in Front, Select
Behind, Select Group, and Save and Exit.
Once an item has been selected from the left
options icons, it must be placed and sized in the
main area of the dialog box. Items can be
dragged around the box and repositioned. If you
want to change of the name or other options on
any of these items, simply double click the item,
make the changes and click Close.
Play - Plays the API BASIC file currently open in the API Programming Pane from the beginning or a break-
point. Once play is pressed, the script will play until it has completed, reached a set breakpoint or the Stop but-
ton in the API Programming Pane has been pressed.
Tools, Programming, API Programming 7-49
Step Into - Executes the current line in the API BASIC File currently open in the API Programming Pane. If the
current line is a subroutine or function call, stops on the first line of that subroutine or function. As each line is
stepped through the result of that line will be completed in FEMAP or any other referenced application.
Step Over - Executes to the next line in the API BASIC File currently open in the API Programming Pane. If the
current line is a subroutine or function call, executes the subroutine or function completely.
Step Out - Steps out of the current subroutine or function that is currently being used in the API Programming
Pane.
Step to Cursor - Executes all the lines of the API BASIC File currently open in the API Programming Pane until a
specific line designated by the cursor.
Pause - Pauses an API BASIC File while it is running, whether the API Script is playing or being stepped
through one line by line. Clicking the Pause icon again or play will continue going through the script from the
point where is it was paused.
Stop - Stops an API BASIC file while it is running, whether the API Script is playing or being stepped through
line by line. The API script will start over from the beginning when played after the Stop button has been used.
Toggle Breakpoint - This command can be used to set a breakpoint in an API BASIC file. A breakpoint can be
used to run a API BASIC file to a particular point in the file. You must place the cursor on the line in the API
BASIC File text where you want the file to temporarily stop running, then click the Toggle Breakpoint button.
Breakpoints will be marked in the API Programming Pane with a Red Circle and must be designated before the
playing of the API BASIC file begins. To remove a breakpoint, simply place the cursor on the line where a break-
point exists and press the Toggle Breakpoint button. You can set as many breakpoints as you like.
Alternatively to toggle a breakpoint on a particular line, you can simply click in the dark gray vertical bar near the
left of the API Programming pane (where the breakpoint symbols are located). Simply clicking on the bar next to a
line will toggle a breakpoint for that line.
Clear All Breakpoints - Clears all breakpoints from the API Programming Pane.
Tabbed Window
The API Programming Pane has an addi-
tional window which will open when any
type of playback (Play, Step Into, Step
Over, Step Out, or Step to Cursor) of an
API script is occurring.
This window will appear above the writ-
ten text of the API script and below the
icons and will have three tabs which
can be used to change what type of infor-
mation the window will show.
The three tabs are Immediate, Watch, and
Stack and each one has specific uses.
Immediate - This window is used to
evaluate an expression, assign a variable
or call a subroutine:
Type "?expr" <Enter> to show the value of "expr".
Type "var = expr" <Enter> to change the value of "var".
Type "Set var = expr" <Enter> to change the reference of "var".
Type "subname args" <Enter> to call a subroutine or built-in instruction.
Type "Trace" <Enter> to toggle trace mode. Trace mode prints each statement in the immediate window when a
macro/module is running.
Watch - This window list the variables, functions and expressions that are calculated and displayed.
7-50 Modeling Tools
Each time execution pauses the value of each line in the window and is updated.
The expression to the left of "->" may be edited.
Pressing Enter updates all the values immediately.
Pressing Ctrl-Y deletes the line.
Stack - This window lists the lines which called the current statement.
The first line is the current statement. The second line is the one that called the first. And so on.
Clicking on a line brings that macro/module into a sheet and highlights the line in the main window.
Help and Tooltips
In order to make the API Programming pane easier to use, there are a few different methods to get help when you
need it. Most the help is context sensitive, again to make it easier to get to the correct places in the documentation.
For Help on FEMAP API commands themselves, simple place the cursor somewhere inside the text of that object,
method, or property (but do NOT highlight any text) or finish typing the line and press the F1 key. This will take
you to the appropriate entry in the FEMAP API manual.
For Help using Basic commands (such as Dim, While, etc.), place the cursor anywhere inside the text of one of
these commands or highlight the text, press the F1 key and you will be taken to the appropriate place in the Basic
Language Reference included in FEMAP. If you have any text highlighted in the API Programming pane, FEMAP
will access the Basic Language Reference via the Index, so be careful.
If the cursor is active in the API Programming window, and you hold down Shift and press F1, you will be taken to
the top-level of the Basic language Reference. You can use the links here to search for what you need.
For any Method, a tooltip will appear after the ( symbol containing the number and type of arguments which
must be entered for the Method to work properly. For a Property, a tooltip will appear after the = letting you
know the type of argument needed, and if the property of argument has a list, a drop-down list will also appear.
There is a context sensitive menu which will appear when the
right mouse button is clicked inside the API Programming pane.
The Use API Shortcuts toggle activates/deactivates a set of short-
cut keys (accelerators) that allow you to use predefined shortcut
keys to operate the API Programming dockable pane using keys
instead of icons. This allows you to use the API Programming
pane much like you would use a programming tool to help run and
debug an API script. Once the API Programming pane is closed,
the normal shortcut keys will be restored as well. Many of the
keys are the same as shortcut keys for Visual Basic.
This menu allows you to search the text for a specific portion of
text using the Find... command, or do a find and replace with
the Replace... command. The Again command will repeat the
most recently used Find... or Replace... command For example, if
you used the Replace... command to find the first instance in the
API script where the text string nd was, and changed it to
node, pressing Again would find the next instance and change
that instance and continue to repeat this command as many times
as the Again command is used.
You can Undo and Redo typing in the API Programming pane.
There is the ability to Cut, Copy, and Paste any highlighted text.
Note: Ctrl+C can be used as a general copy command in
FEMAP. When the API Programming pane is active,
Ctrl+C will perform the copy command on the high-
lighted text.
Tools, Programming, Program File 7-51
The Object/Proc Lists will bring up drop-down list of Objects and Procedures. The Object list shows all the
objects for the current module. The "(general)" object groups all of the procedures which are not part of any spe-
cific object. The Proc list shows all the procedures for the current object. Selecting a procedure that is not bold
inserts the proper procedure definition for that procedure.
Complete Word will bring up a drop down list and allow you to pick from a list of commonly used words while cre-
ating an API script and Parameter Info... will bring up a yellow tooltip which will contain information about the
highlighted parameter.
The Set Next Statement command allows you to set the next statement to be executed. Only statements in the cur-
rent subroutine/function can be selected. The Show Next Statement command simply shows the next statement to be
executed.
Quick Watch shows the value of the highlighted expression in the Immediate window at a given time. Add Watch
will show the current value of the highlighted expression in the Watch window and this value can change as the API
script goes through any type of repetitive action (i.e., a loop).
The References command
will display the References
dialog box which shows the
current macro/module's refer-
ences. References to type
libraries may be added
(checked) or removed
(unchecked) and the relative
priority can be changed. The
FEMAP Type Library is
always automatically refer-
enced. Checked references
are available to the current
macro/module. Each checked
reference is searched in order
from top to bottom. A
checked library's name can be
changed using the "Name"
text box.
The Properties command allows you to edit the Modules properties.
When the API Programming pane is floating, it can be repositioned and resized, just as any other floating dockable
pane.
7.2.7 Tools, Programming, Program File
The Program File Dockable Pane allows you to dynamically record any number of FEMAP menu, toolbar, and
keyboard commands in sequence to create macros. Once a program file has been recorded, it can be played
back as a macro inside FEMAP to perform a customized series of commands to perform a specific action or
achieve a particular goal.
Note: Depending on the number of Type Libraries and objects that you have registered on your system, the
References command can take quite some to display.
7-52 Modeling Tools
Program File Icons
Open - Opens an existing Program File (either a *.prg
file or a *.pro file which saves the text in Rich Text
Format).
Save - Saves a Program File. You can choose to save a
Program File as a *.prg file (text only) or a *.pro file
(Rich Text Format).
Clear All - Clears all text from the Program File Pane.
Record - When the Record button is toggled on it
records all FEMAP commands and dialog box activity
as text in the Program File Pane. Click the toggle
again to stop recording. Record can only be used when
the Program File Pane is not playing a Program File.
Play - Plays the Program File currently open in the
Program File Pane from the beginning or a break-
point. Once play is pressed, the program file will play
until it has completed, reached a set breakpoint or
the Stop button in the Program File Pane has been
pressed.
Step to Next Line - Steps through the Program File
currently open in the Program File Pane one line at a
time. As each line is stepped through it will be
played in FEMAP. The Stop button must be pressed to
allow recording after this command has been used.
Stop - Stops a Program File while it is running,
whether while playing a Program File or stepping
through one line by line.
Toggle Breakpoint - This command can be used to set
a breakpoint in a Program File. A breakpoint can be used to run a Program File to a particular point in the file.
You must place the cursor on the line in the Program File text where you want the Program File to temporarily stop
running, then click the Toggle Breakpoint button. Breakpoints will be marked in the Program File Pane with a Red
Square and must be designated before the playback of the Program File begins. To remove a breakpoint, simply
place the cursor on the line where a breakpoint exists and press the Toggle Breakpoint button. You can set as many
breakpoints as you like.
Clear All Breakpoints - Clears all breakpoints from the Program File Pane.
Record Comments - While this toggle is on comments are recorded with every command and certain dialog box
activity that is recorded in the Program File Pane. By default, this toggle is usually set to on. Comments appear
in the text of the Program File Pane and always have a $ as the first character on the line. The comments make
Program Files easier to understand and always come directly before the actual text that FEMAP is using in the Pro-
gram File, whether it be command numbers or dialog box actions. At any time during the recording process,
recording comments can be toggled on and off.
Open
Save
Clear All
Record
Play
Step to Next Line
Stop
Toggle
Breakpoint
Clear All Breakpoints
Record
Comments
Breakpoint
Comments
There is a context sensitive menu which will appear when the right mouse
button is clicked inside the Program File pane. This menu allows you to
search the text for a specific portion of text using the Find... command. You
can Undo and Redo typing in the Program File pane. There is the ability to
Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear any highlighted text. The Font command will
allow you to change the Font, Size, Color, and Style of any highlighted
text, or set those items for all new text in one dialog box. The Font style
can be changed using the Bold, Italic, and Underline commands (when a
Font Style is active, the icon will be surrounded by an orange square).
Default Format allows you to set a format, you can choose between Text,
Rich Text, Object, or Auto. Scale allows you to scale the size of a non-text
object (i.e., pictures) using a percentage of the objects current size. The
Zoom command allows you to make everything in the Program File pane
larger or smaller. Select All will select everything in the Program File
pane, then operations can be performed
The Use Program Shortcuts toggle activates/deactivates a set of shortcut
keys (accelerators) that allow you to use predefined shortcut keys to oper-
ate the Program File dockable pane using keys instead of icons. This
allows you to use the Program File pane much like you would use a pro-
gramming tool to help record, run, and debug a program file. Once the Pro-
gram File pane is closed, the normal shortcut keys will be restored as well.
When the Program File pane is floating, it can be repositioned and resized, just as any other floating dockable
pane.
Program Files
When the Record button in the Program File Dockable Pane is on, the commands will be recorded in the main text
window of the Program File Pane in the order they are chosen in FEMAP user interface. Once completed, the
record button is toggled to off and the text in the window can be saved as a Program File (either a *.prg file or a
*.pro file which saves the text in Rich Text Format).
In their simplest form, FEMAP Program Files are essentially ASCII text files which instruct FEMAP to perform
certain commands based on the syntax of the ASCII file. This FEMAP specific syntax includes unique numbered
identifiers representing every FEMAP command, normal keystrokes (for typing values and text), and special key-
strokes used to perform different tasks in specific dialog boxes (such as pushing buttons, choosing selection meth-
ods, and designating specific fields to activate). They are much more powerful than that, however. You can add
logic commands, define and manipulate variables, stop and prompt a user for input, or send messages to the Mes-
sages Pane.
Before you make use of program files however, you should understand:
In general, Program Files are not compatible between different versions of FEMAP (This is especially the case
with older program files created in FEMAP versions 8.3 and earlier). Most capability usually stays the same
and will work, however any changes to the menus or commands in FEMAP will stop existing program files
from working.
Note: Ctrl+C can be used as a general copy command in FEMAP.
When the Program File pane is active, Ctrl+C will perform
the copy command on the highlighted text.
Note: If you have a wheel mouse you can hold the CTRL key down and spin the wheel to dynamically
zoom in and out in the Program File pane
Note: When the Program File Pane is in Record Mode, all of the other dockable panes, except
for the Messages and Entity Info panes, will be temporarily hidden and cannot be used.
7-54 Modeling Tools
The ability to record Program Files does not exist in FEMAP versions 9.0 and 9.0.1, but Program Files from
versions 8.3 and earlier can be opened in the Program File Pane and run in FEMAP version 9.1 and above, but
their effectiveness will be limited by the number of menu and toolbar commands used in the program file that
are still the same.
Program File Format
There are three basic types of data that will be placed in program files created with the Program File Pane. The first
type are unique numbered identifiers representing every FEMAP command. These identifiers tell FEMAP which
menu, toolbar, or keyboard shortcut commands to use while the program file is running. The second is keystroke
information that mimics what you would type from the keyboard if you were performing the operation manually
(this is how FEMAP knows which buttons to push, methods to select, and fields to activate). When you run a pro-
gram file, this text essentially "pushes the keys" in dialog boxes for you to run FEMAP commands. You may also
want to add other program file commands. These commands do not execute FEMAP commands, rather, they are
commands themselves which control the flow of the program file, work with variables, print messages, or ask for
input.
Program File Keystrokes
You can use a program file to mimic most of the keystrokes on your keyboard and mouse clicks in dialog boxes and
the main graphics window. This allows you to execute FEMAP commands and fill in dialog boxes automatically,
just as if you had typed the input. The program file syntax provides several alternatives to reproduce various key-
strokes, button pushes, method selections, and activation of fields.
Normal Keystrokes
For keystrokes such as letters (A..Z, a..z), numbers (0..9), and other symbols (!@$,.:...) you can type the characters
directly into the program file. As FEMAP reads the file, those keystrokes will be executed. Some characters need
special treatment if you want to include them in a text string. These include, #, < and {. FEMAP normally uses
these characters as delimiters in a program file. To enter them simply as text, you must precede them with a back-
slash (\). For example, you should enter "50\# Pressure", not "50# Pressure". Similarly, if you want to include a
backslash (like in a file path name), you must precede it with a backslash also. For example,
"c:\\FEMAP3\\myfile.mod".
Special Keystrokes
For other keystrokes like function keys and multiple key combinations (like Alt+A), program files use a slightly
different approach. The syntax is as follows:
<[A-][C-][S-]key_name>
where:
A-, C-, and S- are obviously optional. Do not include them if you do not want a combination keystroke. Here are
some examples:
A- means to simultaneously press the Alt key.
C- means to simultaneously press the Ctrl key.
S- means to simultaneously press the Shift key.
key_name is either a single character that was one of the normal key-
strokes described above, or the name of a special key.
<A-C> press Alt+C
<C-B> press Ctrl+B
<F7> press F7 key
<LEFT> press left arrow key
<C-LEFT> press Ctrl+left arrow key
The special keynames are defined in the following table, along with their keys.
There are also other special keynames which do not really match a key, but which you will find very useful when
you are writing program files. They are:
Numbered Command Identifiers
The Program File Pane records shortcut syntax for accessing commands through menus, toolbars, and keyboard
shortcuts. Each command has a unique numbered identifier which calls that particular command in FEMAP. This
is the method FEMAP uses to record because in addition to being simpler, it does additional checking to be certain
your program is not in another command while you are trying to access a command. In addition, it will be easier to
distinguish them from dialog box data when you look at your program file. The use of the Numbered Command
Identifiers in recorded Program Files was first used in FEMAP 9.1.
Using the Numbered Identifier, any command can be accessed by simply using the format {~numbered_identifier}.
The ~ must be present as the first character inside the bracket.
For Example, when the Model, Node command is recorded, you would see the following:
Program File Key Program File Key
<F1>
...
<F12>
F1
...
F12
<Ins> Insert
<Left> Left Arrow <Del> Delete
<Right> Right Arrow <Home> Home
<Up> Up Arrow <End> End
<Down> Down Arrow <Esc> Escape
<TAB> Tab <CR> Carriage Return
<BkSp> Backspace <Enter>
<Prt> Print Screen <Return>
<PgUp> Page Up <Space> Space Bar
<PgDn> Page Down <Sp>
Other Special Program File Keystrokes
Program File Key
<PUSH> Space Bar, but makes sure that you are "pushing" a button.
<ON> Turns current button on, error if not on a button.
<OFF> Turns current button off, error if not on a button.
<OK> Pushes the dialog box OK button, actually just presses Alt-O
<USER> Pauses the program file so a user can manually complete the next dialog box.
If the user cancels the dialog box, the program file will be aborted also. If the
user completes the dialog box, and presses OK, the program file will resume.
Special Keystrokes in Recorded Program Files
<@...> Jump directly to a specified control/field. The ... is actually replaced by a
number representing the control ID to jump into. While you could use this
technique yourself, there is no easy way to find the control ID. It is typically
easier to use <TAB> or <A-letter> combinations.
<~...> Selects an item from a listbox or combobox. The ... is replaced by a number
representing the index of the item to be selected in the list. To select the first
item in a list use <~0>. Use <~1> for the second, and so on.
Note: Since FEMAP is doing all of the work for you when recording a Program File, you will
notice that the <@...> and <~...> commands will be used a great deal. This allows FEMAP to
record more efficient program files based on mouse clicks inside a dialog box instead of
numerous Tabs to get to a specific field. These can cause some confusion when looking at
the text of a program file, but in general are the most specific way to designate a particular
field or option.
7-56 Modeling Tools
{~1220}
accesses the Model, Node command. In the normal keystroke syntax, the following would require:
<A-M>N
Menu Keystrokes
In addition to the more efficient Numbered Command Identifiers, program files provide an additional shortcut syn-
tax for accessing the FEMAP menus. Like the Numbered Command Identifiers, it does additional checking to be
certain your program is not in a command while you are trying to access the menu. This is the method FEMAP
used to record menu commands in Program Files in FEMAP 8.3 and earlier versions.
To use this shortcut, you simply enclose the FEMAP menu command in braces. For example:
{MN}
would access the Model, Node command. In the normal keystroke syntax, this would require:
<A-M>N
You can enter as many characters as necessary between the braces to execute the command. Currently this is two or
three, depending on the command.
Program File Commands
Program file commands provide additional capabilities. They do not mimic keystrokes, but rather perform some
function. All program file commands have a similar syntax:
#command( arguments... )
The following paragraphs define each of the commands. The commands are presented in alphabetical order.
#ASK( )
Syntax:
#ASK( variable_name, "question_title" )
where:
variable_name
is any valid FEMAP variable name. The variable does not have to exist already. Do not specify the ! or @ delim-
iters for this command; just specify the variable name.
"question_title"
is the title that will be displayed in the dialog box when the user is asked to define the variable. The title should
tell the user what is being defined. The length is really limited by the size of the dialog box. You must always
enclose this title in quotes.
This command is used to prompt a user for numeric input. It temporarily pauses the program file and displays a dia-
log box. You must specify the name of the variable that will be defined, and the title that will be used to tell the user
what to do.
If you specify the name of an existing variable, the dialog box will contain its current value when it is displayed. If
the user presses OK, the variable will be defined and the program will proceed. If the user presses Cancel, the pro-
gram file will stop.
#BEEP( )
Syntax:
#BEEP( )
This command simply sounds a beep and continues. There are no arguments.
#CMDMODE( )
Syntax:
#CMDMODE( expression )
where:
expression
is a numeric value that should be either 0 or 1. If set to 0, all commands that are chosen by the command file
using the {XXX} syntax will be directly called without sending keystrokes to the menu. If set to 1 (or any other
nonzero value), the XXX keystrokes will be sent to the menu to choose the command. Default is 0.
This allows you to control the method by which commands are selected from the menu. If you use a nonzero value,
keystrokes will be used and menus will pop up as the commands are selected. Specifying 0 is faster, and does not
display menus as commands are selected.
#DEF( )
Syntax:
#DEF( variable_name, expression )
where:
variable_name
iters for this parameter; just specify the variable name.
expression
is a numeric value, other variable, or FEMAP equation that can contain the FEMAP functions. Any variables
must contain the ! or @ delimiters since this parameter is an equation, just like any other that you write for
FEMAP. See the User Manual, Section C, for a list of functions.
This command defines variables under program file control. You can use it to write equations simply by setting
variable_name to the name of the variable that you want to receive the result of the equation. Then define expres-
sion as the equation.
For example,
#DEF(radius,!radius+0.5)
will add 0.5 to the current value of the variable "radius". Or
#DEF(diameter,!radius*2)
will define "diameter" as twice the value of "radius"
As an alternative to using #DEF( ), you can use the FEMAP Tools, Variables command. That approach however,
will make your program files larger and they will run more slowly.
#DELAY( )
Syntax:
#DELAY( number )
where:
number
is the number of milliseconds between simulated keystrokes or commands as the program is running. Smaller
numbers make the program run faster, larger numbers make it run slower. The default value if you do not use the
#DELAY( ) command is 25.
#DELAY( ) is used to control the speed of a program file as it replays. If you are debugging a program file, add a
#DELAY( ) with a large value, so that the program runs slower. Multiple #DELAY( ) commands, with different
values can be used to make some sections run quickly and others run slowly.
#ECHO( ), #ECHOE( ) and #ECHOH( )
Syntax:
#ECHO( "string" )
#ECHOE( "string" )
#ECHOH( "string" )
where:
"string"
7-58 Modeling Tools
is the text to echo to the Messages window. You must always enclose it in quotes.
Each of these commands simply writes the quoted argument to a new line in the Messages window. The only differ-
ence between them is the color of the string. #ECHO( ) writes the string as normal text, usually black. #ECHOE( )
writes the string as error text, usually red. #ECHOH( ) writes the string as highlighted text, usually blue. The actual
colors depend on the user's File, Preferences settings.
#ECHOV( ), #ECHOVE( ) and #ECHOVH( )
Syntax:
#ECHOV( variable_name, "string" )
#ECHOVE( variable_name, "string" )
#ECHOVH( variable_name, "string" )
where:
variable_name
iters for this command; just specify the variable name.
"string"
is the text to echo to the Messages window. You must always enclose it in quotes. It is actually a C- language for-
mat string. It should contain a format identifier for the variable. Since all variables are double precision real
numbers, the format must be included appropriately.
These commands are similar to the #ECHO( ), #ECHOE( ) and #ECHOH( ) commands, except that they use the
string argument as a format to write a variable. It is up to you to properly specify the format string. If you do not, it
can cause problems for Windows and FEMAP.
The following examples illustrate some proper commands:
#ECHOV( radius, "The radius is %g." )
#ECHOV( a, "A = %12.5f" )
#ECHOV( nodecount, "We have %g Nodes." )
You must always have one (and only one) format code in the string. It must be a valid C-language format code,
with the following syntax:
%[width].[precision]prefix
where
width
is the number of characters to be written
precision
is the number of significant digits
prefix
is either "f" (floating point), "e" (exponential), or "g" (like e or f)
#EXEC( )
Syntax:
#EXEC( "string" )
where:
"string"
is the text that will be used as the command line to execute another program. It must always be enclosed in
quotes. "string" must be less than 160 characters.
#EXEC( ) is used to launch another program from FEMAP. The string argument must contain the complete com-
mand line that is required to launch the program, including any disk name, path name or command line arguments.
FEMAP does not modify the string, it simply removes the quotes and passes it to the WinExec function.
#EXIT( )
Syntax:
#EXIT( )
Immediately terminates the program file. There are no arguments or questions.
#GOTO( ) and #(label)
Syntax:
#GOTO( label_expression )
.
.
#( label_expression )
where
label_expression
is a numeric value, variable, or FEMAP equation which can contain the FEMAP functions described in the User
Manual, Section C. If you use a variable or equation, FEMAP will round the value to the nearest integer.
In the simplest form, you can define the label_expression as a constant. In this case, when FEMAP gets to
#GOTO(1), program file execution will immediately jump to the location of the #(1) command. This can be for-
ward or backward in the program file, relative to the location of the #GOTO( ) statement. You must always define a
label that corresponds the GOTO expression, or the program file will abort.
In a more complex example, you could use #GOTO(!i) to jump to a different position depending on the value of the
variable !i. If !i was 1, the program file would jump to #(1), if !i was 99, it would jump to #(99). An error will
occur, and the program file will stop if the label cannot be found.
In an even more complex fashion, you can define both the #GOTO( ) and the #( ) label_expressions as variables or
equations. In all but the simplest cases, this should be done with care since it is very easy to be searching for a label
that will not exist.
#IF( ) and #ENDIF( )
Syntax:
#IF( expression1 operator expression2 )
.
#ENDIF( )
where
expression1 and expression2
are numeric values, variables, or FEMAP equations which can contain the FEMAP functions described in the
User Manual, Section C.
operator
is one of the six available operators:
FEMAP evaluates the two expressions and then compares the results using the specified operator. If the resulting
comparison is true, the program file continues from the position immediately after the #IF( ) statement. If it is false,
FEMAP skips to the position after the #ENDIF( ) statement. You must always have a matching #ENDIF( ) for each
#IF( ) command. You can nest #IF( ) statements inside each other.
= = equal to,
!= not equal to
< less than,
<= less than or equal to,
> greater than, or
>= greater than or equal to
7-60 Modeling Tools
#METHOD( )
Syntax:
#method ( type, value )
where:
type
represents which type of dialog box to set to a specific definition method, material type, or property type. The
type must be chosen before the method.
type can be:
0 = Coordinate Locate (i.e. positioning points or nodes)
1 = Vector Locate
2 = Plane Locate
3 = Define Property Type
4 = Define Material Type
value
represents which dialog box method, material type, or property type to set for the type of dialog box specified in
the type field. For each type, there are values corresponding to particular dialog box methods.
for type = 0 (Coordinate Locate methods)
0 = Locate, 1 = Locate in Workplane, 2 = On Point, 3 = On Node, 4 = Offset, 5 = At Distance, 6 = Center, 7 =
Along Curve, 8 = Mesh Location, 9 = Between, 10 = Intersect - Curves, 11 = Midpoint, 12 = Onto Curve, 13 =
Onto Surface, 14 = In Surface, 15 = Intersect - Curve/Surface, 16 = CG of Surface, 17 = Length Along
for type = 1 (Vector Locate methods)
0 = Locate, 1 = Locate/Length, 2 = Points, 3 = Nodes, 4 = Components, 5 = Direction, 6 = Tangent, 7 = Normal to
Surface, 8 = Bisect, 9 = Normal, 10 = Axis, 11 = Global Axis, 12 = Normal to View
for type = 2 (Plane Locate methods)
0 = Locate, 1 = Points, 2 = Nodes, 3 = Components, 4 = Bisect, 5 = Normal, 6 = CSys Plane, 7 = Global Plane, 8 =
Align to View, 9 = Align to Curve, 10 = Surface Normal
for type = 3 (Define Property Types, L signifies linear element, P signifies parabolic element)
1 = L Rod, 2 = L Bar, 3 = L Tube, 4 = L Link, 5 = L Beam, 6 = L Spring, 7 = L DOF Spring, 8 = L Curved Beam,
9 = L Gap, 10 = L Plot, 11 = L Shear, 12 = P Shear, 13 = L Membrane, 14 = P Membrane, 15 = L Bending, 16 = P
Bending, 17 = L Plate, 18 = P Plate, 19 = L Plane Strain, 20 = P Plane Strain, 21 = L Laminate Plate, 22 = P Lami-
nate Plate, 23 = L Axisymmetric, 24 = P Axisymmetric, 25 = L Solid, 26 = P Solid, 27 = L Mass, 28 = L Mass
Matrix, 29 = L Rigid, 30 = L Stiff Matrix, 31 = L Curved Tube, 32 = L Plot Planer, 33 = L Slide Line, 34 = L Con-
tact, 35 = L Axisymmetric Shell, 36 = P Axisymmetric Shell, 37 = P Beam, 38 = L Weld
for type = 4 (Define Material Types)
0 = Isotropic, 1 = Orthotropic (2D), 2 = Orthotropic (3D), 3 = Anisotropic (2D), 4 = Anisotropic (3D), 5 = Hyper-
elastic, 6 = Other Types, 7 = Fluid
For example,
#METHOD(2,3)
Note: After the #IF statement, program files now wait for a timer which allows events to occur to
set a particular condition, such as the setting of a variable.
will set the Plane dialog box to Plane Components
#METHOD(3,25)
will set the Define Property dialog box to Define Property - SOLID Element Type
This command is very useful for setting up a baseline for all of the definition dialog boxes, material types, and
property types at the beginning of a program file. It is also great for changing the method of a dialog box back to a
specific method if you are piecing together a large program file from several smaller ones and want to introduce
particular methods, property types, or material types at specific times throughout the program file.
#MSG( )
Syntax:
#MSG( "string" )
where:
"string"
is the text that will be displayed in the message box. It must always be enclosed in quotes. "string" must be less
than 160 characters.
#MSG( ) is used to display message text in a dialog box, and pause the program file. The dialog box contains an
OK button that you must press before the program file will continue.
#OPT( )
Syntax:
#OPT( keystroke )
where:
keystroke
is the keystroke to simulate. It can be a single letter, or any of the special keystrokes which are normally
enclosed in angle brackets ( i.e. < > ). If you use a special keystroke with this command, do not include the angle
brackets. For example, use #OPT(Esc), not #OPT(<Esc>).
#OPT( ) is used to optionally add a keystroke. If a FEMAP error or question dialog box is displayed, #OPT( ) will
push the button in that dialog box which corresponds to the keystroke you specify. In any other situation (i.e., at the
FEMAP menu level, or in any other normal dialog box), #OPT( ) does nothing. The keystroke is simply skipped.
You can identify FEMAP error or question dialogs by the fact that they always have between one and three buttons,
centered at the bottom of the dialog box, and no other options (except for the question or message text).
A typical place where you will want to use the #OPT( ) command is following the standard file access dialog box.
If you specify an already existing file, and FEMAP wants to write to that file, a question will be displayed to over-
7-62 Modeling Tools
write or append to the file. Since the message is only displayed when an existing file is chosen, you cannot just
code a Yes/No response; you must code #OPT(Y) for Yes, or #OPT(N) for No. The Y or N keystroke will only be
issued if the message is displayed.
#OPTGO( )
Syntax:
#OPTGO( label_expression )
where:
label_expression
#OPTGO( ) is really just an alternative to the #GOTO( ) command. In this case, however, the jump to the label is
only taken if a message or question dialog box is currently displayed - just like the #OPT( ) command. You can use
this command to insert special error handling code into your program file.
#OPTGO( ) just jumps to the specified label; it does not complete the message/question dialog box. You must add
those keystrokes immediately after the label - potentially using the #OPT( ) command.
#SILENT( )
Syntax:
#SILENT( expression )
where:
expression
#SILENT( ) allows your program file to run without displaying all of the FEMAP dialog boxes. If the value of
expression is 0, all dialog boxes will be displayed. Any other value causes the program file to run without dis-
playing the dialog boxes. By using multiple #SILENT( ) commands, you can turn the dialog boxes on and off
whenever you want in a program file.
#TIME( )
Syntax:
#TIME( string )
where:
string
is text string that will be printed along with the time in the Messages window.
#TIME allows you to send comments to the message window along with the time at which they were executed.
This can be used as a method to indicate how long certain program file operations are taking.
Other Program File Notes
Spaces and carriage returns (new lines) are typically ignored in program files. You have to use the special key-
strokes ( like <SPACE> or <CR> ) to enter these characters. The only exception to this rule is when you are enter-
ing text into a dialog box. In this case, for convenience, spaces are read and written to the dialog box.
All program file commands must be completed on a single line.
The special characters that delimit keystrokes and commands, #, <, and {, must be used with care in a program file.
If you need to use them as part of a text string, you must precede them with a \character. The \ will not show up as
text. If you need to enter a \ (like in a directory name, enter \\. This will echo as one \.
When executing FEMAP commands, you should always use the shortcut syntax, {~Numbered identifier}.
Upper, and lower, case does not matter except for text that is typed into a control. In that case the only difference is
if you are entering a title. The title will contain the upper and lower case letters that you enter. FEMAP simply
ignores case for all commands.
Tools, Other Windows, Messages 7-63
7.2.8 Tools, Other Windows, Messages
The Messages Dockable Pane is open by default and is in a docked position below the graphics window. Every
time you perform a command in FEMAP, the Messages window will give you feedback to let you know the com-
mand has been executed. Any warning and error messages that FEMAP produces will also appear in the Messages
pane in a different color to alert you of something that might be responsible for issues in your model.
All of the listing commands will send the specific list to the Messages pane by default. At any time you can enter
any of your own text to the Messages pane.
Format Toolbar
Once text is in the Messages pane, the font, size, and color can be modified using the Format toolbar. The Font
Style can be made Bold, Italic, or Underlined. The alignment can be set to left, center, or right. Bullets can be
added for listing purposes. Pictures can be pasted into the Messages pane to create reports.
There is a context sensitive menu which will appear when the right mouse button is
clicked inside the Messages pane. This menu allows you to search the text for a spe-
cific portion of text using the Find... command. You can Undo and Redo typing in
the Messages window. There is the ability to Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear any high-
lighted text. The Font command will allow you to change the Font, Size, Color, and
Style of any highlighted text, or set those items for all new text in one dialog box.
The Font style can be changed using the Bold, Italic, and Underline commands
(when a Font Style is active, the icon will be surrounded by an orange square).
Default Format allows you to set a format, you can choose between Text, Rich Text,
Object, or Auto. Scale allows you to scale the size of a non-text object (i.e., pictures)
using a percentage of the objects current size. The Zoom command allows you to
make everything in the Messages pane larger or smaller. Select All will select every-
thing in the Messages pane, then operations can be performed
To copy anything out of the Messages pane, you need to highlight want you want to
copy, then use the File, Messages, Copy command or press Ctrl+Alt+Insert. Any
entity in the window can also be saved to a Formatted Listing (*.RTF file), Unfor-
matted Listing (*.LST file), or a Formatted Text Only file (no pictures) using the
File, Messages, Save command.
When the Messages pane is floating, it can be repositioned and resized, just as any
other floating dockable panes.
Note: If you have a wheel mouse you can hold the CTRL key down and
spin the wheel to dynamically zoom in and out in the Messages pane
or dockable pane is currently active. When the Messages pane is active and text is highlighted, Ctrl+C
will also perform the File, Messages, Copy command.
Note: The Tools, Undo command does not work in the Messages pane. Therefore, please be careful
about what is changed and deleted, as once it is changed, there is no way to revert changed text
back to the original text.
7-64 Modeling Tools
Tables from the Data Table and Entity Editor panes can be copied to the clipboard and then pasted into the Mes-
sages Pane.
Note: Because of the Rich Text Format copied from the Data Table and Entity Editor dockable panes,
you may need to do some resizing of columns in order to create a correctly formatted table when
it is copied into the Messages pane. When copying tables from the Data Table and Entity Editor
panes, there should be no issues when pasting into outside programs which support Rich Text
Format, such as Microsoft Word.
Tools, Other Windows, Status Bar 7-65
7.2.9 Tools, Other Windows, Status Bar
The Status Bar is always positioned on the bottom interface and is ON by default. It has two main sections. It can
be toggled on and off by choosing it on the Tools... Menu
On the left hand side, there is dynamically changing Status text that is constantly giving you feedback about what
is going on in your model. In an empty model or a model with geometry only, a message stating Ready will be
the default. Once you mesh the model, it also gives a running total of nodes and elements. When an icon or menu
command is highlighted, it gives a brief description of what the command does and in some cases describes how to
use certain hard-coded shortcut keys pertaining to the command.
On the Right hand side of the Status Bar, there are five partitions representing active entities in the model. The five
entity types represented here are Property, Load Set, Constraint Set, Group, and Output Set. The number after the
entity type name designates which entity of each type is currently active. When each section is clicked, a menu will
appear with a list of current entities which can be made active. Along with the list of entities are some commands to
either create a new entity or set a specific entity to be active. In the case or Load Set, Constraint Set, Group, and
Output Set the Set... command allows you to create a new entity and make it active at the same time. The Group
menu also offers the ability to see the active group in the graphics window using the View Active toggle.
7.3 Tools, Toolbars...
FEMAP has many useful toolbars that help you perform a variety of different functions with FEMAP. The toolbars
contain icons representing certain commands and are grouped together by functionality. Each toolbar can be made
visible or hidden using the Tools, Toolbars... command, then choosing a particular toolbar from the list. When the
toolbar is visible, it will have a check mark next to the toolbar name on the menu. By default, each toolbar will be
placed (docked) at the top of the FEMAP interface and below the main menu as a starting position.
See Section 4.2.2, "FEMAP Toolbars" of the FEMAP User Guide for general information about using the toolbars.
7.3.1 Standard toolbars
There are 20 standard toolbars that can be made visible from the Tools, Toolbars... command. Each standard tool-
bar is described in greater detail below. All toolbars appear in floating configuration.
7.3.1.1 Tools, Toolbars, Model
...Contains commands used to create a new model, open an existing model, and save model files. Also includes
analyze model, import geometry, import model, export model, and import results commands, as well as, copy pic-
ture and print commands.
For more information see Section 2.1.1, "File, New...", Section 2.1.2, "File, Open...", Section 2.2.1, "File, Save...",
Section 2.3.3, "File, Analyze..." Section 2.3.1.1, "File, Import, Geometry...", Section 2.3.1.2, "File, Import, Analy-
sis Model...", Section 2.3.2.2, "File, Export, Analysis Model...", Section 2.3.1.3, "File, Import, Analysis Results...",
Section 2.5.4.1, "File, Picture, Copy...", and Section 2.5.2, "File, Print...".
File,New File,Open File,Save File,Analyze
File,Import,Geometry File,Import,Analysis Model File,Export,Analysis Model
File,Picture,Copy
File,Import,Analysis Results
File,Print
7-66 Modeling Tools
7.3.1.2 Tools, Toolbars, View
...Contains commands used to manipulate the view of the active window.
The toolbar is broken down into five segments:
The first segment contains the dynamic rotate command (See Section 6.2.1, "View, Rotate Menu")
The second segment contains the pan (left, right, up, down) commands (See Section 6.2.8, "View, Pan...")
The third segment contains rotate about (X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis) commands and a direction toggle (positive/
negative). (See Section 6.2.1, "View, Rotate Menu")
The fourth segment has magnify commands (Section 6.2.4, "View, Magnify..."), Box Zoom (Section 6.2.5, "View,
Zoom..."), UnZoom (Section 6.2.6, "View, UnZoom..."), and View Center commands (Section 6.2.1.5, "View,
Rotate, Rotate Around View Center", Section 6.2.1.6, "View, Rotate, Rotate Around Rotation Center", Section
6.2.1.7, "View, Rotate, Rotate Around Rotation Axis", Section 6.2.7, "View, Center...", Section 6.2.1.8, "View,
Rotate, Rotation Center...", and Section 6.2.1.9, "View, Rotate, Rotation Axis...").
The fifth segment has the View Select command (See Section 6.1.5.1, "View, Select..."), the Quick Options (Sec-
tion 6.1.5.3, "View, Options..."), View Style commands (Section 6.1.5.3, "View, Options..."), and Layer Manage-
ment (Section 6.4.2.2, "Viewing Layers (View, Layers... command)")
Overview of View Style menu:
View,Rotate,Dynamic Pan,Left Pan,Right Pan,Up Pan,Down
Rotation direction toggle (positve/negative) Rotate,About X-axis Rotate,About Y-axis Rotate,About Z-axis
Magnify,Up Magnify,Down View,Zoom View,UnZoom View,Center
Tools, Toolbars, View 7-67
View Styles - Wireframe, Hidden (hidden line), and Solid (turns both Fill and Shading on)
Fill, Shading, and Transparency Options - Fill (fills in edged entities with color), Filled Edges (enables filled
elements to appear on the screen and be contoured without showing the element edges, or surfaces which make up
solids to appear without solid curves around the surfaces), Shading, and Transparency can all be toggled on and
off.
Mesh Size - Toggles Mesh Sizing on Curves on and off
Element View Options - Shrink (shows elements at a specified percentage smaller for visualization purposes), Off-
sets (toggles element offsets on and off), Orientation (toggles element orientations on and off), and Thickness/
Cross Section (toggles shell element thickness and/or beam/bar element cross-sections on and off) can be set.
The Color With menu allows you to choose the Element Color Mode (options are to color the elements with Ele-
ment Colors, Property Colors, or Material Colors)
Workplane - toggles Workplane visibility on and off (Section 7.1.2, "Tools, Workplane...")
Options - brings up the View Options dialog box (Section 6.1.5.3, "View, Options...")
Note: The level of Transparency that can be toggled on and off from this menu can be adjusted using a global
value for all entities using View, Options; Category - Tools and View Style; Transparency option.
Note: Many of the icons on the View Toolbar have additional functionality when the Shift, Ctrl, or Alt key is
held down when the icon is clicked. Because the Alt key can also be used for repositioning icons on
toolbars, you must DOUBLE mouse click these View icons while holding down the Alt key to access the
additional functionality. When holding down Shift or Ctrl, a single click on the icon is adequate.
Quick Options
View Style (See additional menu)
Layer Management
View Select
7-68 Modeling Tools
7.3.1.3 Tools, Toolbars, View Orient
... Contains commands used to orient the view into predefined views: XY (Top), YZ (Right), ZX (Front), Bottom,
Left, Back, Isometric, Dimetric, and Trimetric.
7.3.1.4 Tools, Toolbars, Entity Display
... Contains toggles to control entity display, much like the View, Options, Quick Options (See Section 6.1.5.3,
"View, Options...")
The first section of the toolbar contains two icons which are overall on/off toggles for Geometry (turns ALL geo-
metric entity types on or off) and Analysis Model (turns ALL entity types associated with the finite element model
on or off).
The second section contains a toggle to turn ALL Labels on and off.
In the third section of the toolbar, the icons allow you to turn individual entity types on and off. When the icon is
highlighted Orange, that entity type is on. Entity types include Points, Curves, Surfaces, Text (not labels), Connec-
tion Regions, Connectors, Coordinate Systems, Nodes, Elements, Constraints, and Loads. The Constraints and
Loads icons will toggle ALL loads or constraints on and off. If you want to turn off individual types of loads and
constrains, please use Quick Options.
Many times you will use these icons to turn ALL entities of a certain kind (i.e., Geometry or Analysis Model) on or
off, then turn individual items on or off. For Example, a common process you would be to toggle off All Geometry
and All Analysis Model entities, then click the Element icon to display only the elements for post-processing.
7.3.1.5 Tools, Toolbars, Select
... This toolbar allows you to select entities one at a time or create a list of selected entities that will remain active
until you toggle off or clear the selection list. This functionality allows you to choose entities of different types first
and then perform multiple commands from the menus or the toolbars on the selected entities.
The Select toolbar is essential to the use of the dockable panes, especially the Entity Editor and Data Table because
the selector is often the best way to place an entity into either of these panes.
Selector Entity Menu
This menu allows you to choose which type of entity you would like to select. The current entity type available to
be selected will be marked with a check mark in an orange square. Also, the Selector Entity icon visible on the tool-
Geometry
Analysis Model
Labels
Points
Curves
Surfaces
Text
Connection
Coordinate
Systems
Nodes
Elements
All Constraints
All Loads
Regions
Connectors
Selector Entity Menu
Selector Modes Menu
Selector Actions Menu
Selector Clear Menu
Snap Modes
Tools, Toolbars, Select 7-69
bar will change to the icon of the current entity type being selected. You can toggle this icon back and forth
between no selection and the current entity by clicking the icon.
The entity types are separated into geometric entities, connections, finite ele-
ment entities, and text.
The geometric entities which can be selected are Point, Curve, Surface, and
Solid.
The connection entities which can be selected are Connection Property, Con-
nection Region, and Connector.
The finite element entities which can be directly selected are Coordinate Sys-
tem (CSys), Node, Element, Material, and Property.
Loads and Constraints are selected by choosing the entity associated with a spe-
cific load or constraint instead of the actual load or constraint.
The different types of loads which can be selected are Nodal..., Elemental..., On
Point..., On Curve..., and On Surface.
The different types of constraints are Nodal..., Equation..., On Point..., On
Curve..., and On Surface...
For instance, if you would like to select a geometry based load on a curve, you
would choose Loads, on Curve from the menu and the select the curve on which
this load is located. If you would like to select a nodal constraint, you would
choose Constraints, Nodal from the menu and then select the node on which
this constraint is located.
Finally, Text entities can also be selected using the selector, but will not dynam-
ically highlight. To select a text entity, place the cursor over it and click the left
mouse button. A small selection circle should appear on the edge of the text to
let you know it has been selected.
Selector Modes Menu
The Selector has different modes to help you select the correct entities, create a selection list, and modify a selec-
tion list. This menu also allows you to toggle on and off Tooltips, which contain useful entity information. The icon
will change depending on the selection mode currently being used. Some of the modes can be used at any time,
while others are specifically there to be used when creating a selection list. Along with the Selector Actions menu,
many different options are available for selecting entities. Below is a brief description of each command on the
Selector Modes menu.
Add To Selection - Adds entities to the current selection list when Select Multiple is active or simply chooses enti-
ties when Select Single Item is active. This is the default.
Remove From Selection - Removes entities from the current selection list when Select Multiple is active. Only
allows selection of entities currently in the selection list. Does not highlight anything when Select Single Item is
active
Normal - This mode highlights entities which are able to be selected when the cursor is placed over a specific
entity. This mode does not take into account where an entity lies in relation to other entities. This is the default
selection mode.
Note: Activating the selector while the model is animating will automatically change the Deformed Style of
the model from Animate to None - Model Only and stop the animation.
Hint: You can toggle between Add To Selection and Remove From Selection while in Select Multiple by simply
clicking on the Selector Modes icon on the Select Toolbar
7-70 Modeling Tools
Query - This mode allows you to choose a position on the screen near the
entity you wish to select, then drills down into the graphics window and
selects all the entities that would be touched by an imaginary line perpendic-
ular to the screen. After the entities have been identified, it opens a dialog
box and places them in a list for you to choose the correct entity. As you
highlight entities in the list, they will be highlighted in the graphics window
as well. Once you have found the correct entity, click the OK button. Very
helpful when trying to select solid elements.
Front - This mode always selects the entity closest to the front of the
screen. It uses the same premise as Query to drill down into the screen
with the imaginary line and then simply selects the top-most entity in the
current view. If the top-most entity is already chosen, it selects the next
one along the line, moving into the screen.
Select Any Inside - This is a box pick mode which signifies that any
entity touched by the outline of a selection box (used to select multiple
entities) will be included in the selection. Box picking includes circle,
polygon, and freehand picking and is only available when Select Multiple is
active.
Select All Inside - This is the other box pick mode which signifies that only entities completely inside the box
will be included in the selection. Box picking includes circle, polygon, and freehand picking and is only available
when Select Multiple is active.
Select Related - When this Mode is toggled on, it selects ALL other entities that are related to the selected entities
and places them in the selection list. To toggle it off, simply select it again. By Default this mode is OFF.
For instance, if elements are selected with this option on, all nodes, properties, and materials used by those ele-
ments will be added to the selection list. In addition, any loads or constraints associated with the elements or their
nodes would also be placed in the list using the appropriate entity type. In the case of elements, nodal loads, ele-
mental loads, nodal constraints, and constraint equations would be included in the selection list.
Select Single Item - Restricts selection to only one item at a given time. As each entity is selected it will update the
Entity Editor dockable pane. This is the Default.
Select Multiple - Allows you to create a Selection List. A Selection List can contain multiple entities of one type or
multiple entity types. As each entity is selected it will update the Entity Editor dockable pane, as well as add the
entity to the running totals of the Selection List in the Model Info tree.
Show Tooltips - When this mode is activated, a Tooltip note will pop up with useful information about the entity
which is currently highlighted. To toggle this option off, select it from the menu again. It can also be turned on and
off using the right mouse menu in the graphics window, when the entity selector is set to none.
For example, when Show Tooltips is active and entity selection is set to Element, a yellow box will appear with the
Element number, Element Type, Property ID, Material ID, and the nodes on the Element.
When entity selection is set to Node, the Tooltip will contain Node number, Coordi-
nates, Definition Coordinate System, and Output Coordinate System. When post-
processing, the contour output vector will appear in the Tooltip for elements and the
deformation output vector will be appear in the Tooltip for nodes.
While a Tooltip pop-up window is displaying information, if you click the left
mouse button, the information will be sent to the Entity Editor and/or Data Table
dockable panes, as long as the panes are visible in the FEMAP interface AND
unlocked.
Note: Choosing Select Related will automatically change the Selector Mode to Select Multiple in order to
properly populate the Selection List.
Note: You can set how long your tooltips will take to appear and how long they will remain displayed on
your screen using File, Preferences, clicking the User Interface Tab, then assigning values for Tooltip
Delay and Tooltip Duration. Both values should be entered in tenths of a second.
If you click the right mouse button inside the current Tooltip, a short menu will appear:
List - sends the information in the Tooltip to the Messages window. Using this capability, you can quickly walk
around the model and recover important information at specific nodes and elements. You can now copy this infor-
mation from the Messages window or use List, Destination, to send the data to Rich Text Format file outside of
FEMAP. Either method can help you can easily create a report in another program.
Convert To Text - creates a text entity identical to the Show Tooltips box at that location to help annotate your
model. You MUST have Text visible to see the yellow text entities. Text can be made visible using either View,
Options or Quick Options
Selector Actions Menu
This menu contains Actions the Selector can use for specific types of selections. There are various Box pick
options, grow and shrink commands to build up or cut down a selection, use of the typical FEMAP entity selection
dialog box, group commands, copy and paste, and the ability to send a selection over to the Data Table.
Here are the commands of the Selector Actions menu explained in greater detail:
Box - Creates a rectangular selection box to pick multiple entities at once.
Circle - Creates a circular selection box to pick multiple entities at once.
Polygon - Allows you to create a selection area by creating a multi-sided shape
using a click of the mouse to end one side of the polygon and begin the next
side. The polygon can have as many sides as you would like and is very helpful
in selecting individual nodes in uniquely shaped geometry.
Freehand - Allows you to create a selection area by holding down the left mouse
button and drawing a freehand sketch. Works very similar to the Polygon
mode, but the shape is not limited to the use of only straight lines.
Coordinate - allows you to select entities using a combination of X,Y, and/or Z
values referencing a selected coordinate system along with various limiting crite-
ria (Above or Below a single value; Between or Outside two values; or At Loca-
tion, within a specified Tolerance).
Around Point - allows you to select entities using each entitys position in 3-D
space in relation to a specified Specified Point in 3-D space along with various
limiting criteria (Farther Than or Closer Than a single value; Between or Outside
two values; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance).
Around Vector - allows you to select entities using each entitys position in 3-D
space in relation to a specified Specified Vector along with various limiting cri-
teria (Farther Than or Closer Than a single value; Between or Outside two val-
ues; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance).
Around Plane allows you to select entities using each entitys position in 3-D space in relation to a Specified Plane
along with various limiting criteria (Positive Side or Negative Side of Plane with offset value; Between or Outside
two offset values; or At Location, within a specified Tolerance).
Hint: Pressing Alt + clicking the right mouse button in the graphics window will bring up the Quick Access
Menu instead of the context sensitive menu when there is an active entity in the Select Toolbar. Using
this method, you can toggle the Show Tooltips command on and off without having to use the Select
Toolbars Selector Modes Menu.
Note: All of these methods can be used in conjunction with the Select
Any Inside and Select All Inside commands on the Selector
Modes menu.
Hint: For a more detailed explanation of Coordinate, Around Point, Around Vector, and Around Plane pick-
ing, see Section 4.3.1, "Entity Selection"
7-72 Modeling Tools
Grow - Adds the elements surrounding the currently selected elements to the selection list. In general, it will start
with the selected element and expand out one element in all directions to non-selected elements. The selection will
move out an additional element layer every time the Grow command is used.
Here is an example of the Grow command.
Shrink - Removes the outer-most layer of selected elements from the selection list. The selection will move in an
additional element layer every time the Shrink command is used. Basically, it is the works in the reverse direction
as the Grow command.
Dialog - Brings up the specific FEMAP Entity Selection dialog box for the entity currently active in the selector.
This allows you to use all of the entity specific selection methods available on menu when the Method button is
clicked inside the dialog box.
Create Group - Brings up the Save Selection as Group
dialog box. Allows you to create a new group or to add,
remove, or exclude the entities in the Selection List from
the active group.
Load Group - Allows you to add the entities of any exist-
ing group to the current Selection List.
Export Neutral - Allows you to export a FEMAP neutral
file containing all of the entities currently in the Selection
List.
Copy - Allows you to copy all of the entities in the Selec-
tion List and Paste then into a different model. When the
Selection List is copied, the entity data is sent to a modi-
fied version of a FEMAP neutral file and is placed on the clipboard. Once on the clipboard, it can be pasted into
a different model using the Paste command on the Selector Actions menu (CTRL+V will not work in this case)
You MUST be sure that all entities related to a specific entity are included in the Selection List before using the
copy command. This will assure an accurate transfer between models occurs. One way to assure a Selection List
will be complete for copying purposes is to use the Select Related mode of the Select toolbar.
Note: There is no guarantee that a selection will shrink in the same way it grew if more than one element was
selected before the Grow command was used, the Grow command reached the free edge of a model, or
multiple Grow regions overlapped. It simply removes the outer-most layer of elements.
How Grow works with Elements
Initial Element Selected
First Grow Iteration Second Grow Iteration
For example, if you want to copy a number of elements and paste them into another model, you need to make sure
and include all of the nodes connected to the element, as well as, the property and material used by the elements.
Again, using the Select Related mode would be helpful in insuring a complete and accurate transfer.
Paste - This command allows you to paste a copied Selection List
into a different model. The Paste command recognizes that a modified
FEMAP neutral file is on the clipboard and reads that neutral file into
FEMAP. When the Paste command is used it will bring up the Neutral
File Read Options dialog box to allow you enter an ID offset and select
other options to aid in the prevention of overwriting entities in the cur-
rent model.
Add to Data Table - Takes all of the entities in the Selection List that
are the entity type currently active in the Selector and sends their data to
the Data Table. The Data Table MUST be unlocked in order for this command to be available.
Selector Clear All, Clear Active Entity, and Snap Modes
The Selector Clear All button purges the whole current Selection List and enables FEMAP to start creating a new
Selection List. Clear Active Entity will only clear the entity type currently active in the Selection List. For exam-
ple, if you have Nodes, Elements, and Materials in your Selection List, you can remove only the Nodes by make
Nodes the active entity in the Selector and using the Clear Active Entity button.
If you have cleared the list by accident, Tools, Undo will recover the list for you. If at all possible, try to Undo as
soon as possible to assure the whole Selection List or a portion can be recovered.
The Snap Modes are:
Snap to Screen - Selects the location on the screen exactly where the cursor is positioned in the graphics window.
Snap to Grid - Picking snaps to the nearest grid location in relation to where the cursor is positioned. The grid can
be made visible using the Tools, Workplane command, clicking the Snap Options button, and then choosing Dots or
Lines in the Grid Style portion of the dialog box.
Snap to Point - Picking snaps to the nearest geometric point in relation to where the cursor is positioned in the
graphics window.
Snap to Node - Picking snaps to the nearest node in relation to where the cursor is positioned in the graphics win-
dow.
Context Sensitive Menus
While a certain entity type is active in the selector, only that entity type will be available for picking in the graphics
window. Since FEMAP is only highlighting one specific entity type at a time, there are context sensitive menus for
each entity type (except Text). These menus can be accessed by highlighting an entity and then clicking the right
mouse button. These Context Sensitive menus contain frequently used commands for each entity type and are
described in greater detail below.
Note: The modified FEMAP neutral file created by the Copy
command will only remain on the clipboard until some-
thing else is copied onto the clipboard from ANY other
program (such as a picture or message). Once something
else is copied, you will need to go back to the original
model and use the Copy command again in order to be
able to Paste it into another model.
Note: Any time there is an active entity in the Select Toolbar, pressing Alt + clicking the right mouse button in
the graphics window will bring up the Quick Access Menu instead of the context sensitive menu related
to the active entity. This can very helpful for picking mode purposes and to toggle Show Tooltips.
7-74 Modeling Tools
Point
Curve
Command Description
List Lists information about the selected points to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected points from the model
Mesh Size Allows you to set the mesh size on the selected points using the Mesh, Mesh Control,
Size At Point... command
Attributes Allows you to set up meshing attributes on selected points using the Mesh, Mesh Con-
trol, Attributes At Point... command
Mesh Meshes the selected points with one-noded elements (point mass, mass matrix, etc.)
using the Mesh, Geometry, Point... command
Load Brings up the Create Loads on Points dialog box to enable you to create geometry
based loads on points.
Constraint Brings up the Create Constraints on Geometry dialog box to enable you to create
geometry based constraints on points.
Color Allows you to change the color of selected points by bringing up the Color Palette dia-
log box
Layer Allows you to place the selected points onto a different layer by bringing up the Select
Layer dialog box
Copy Copies the selected points using the Geometry, Copy, Point... command
Rotate Rotates the selected points about an axis using the Geometry, Rotate, Point... command
Reflect Reflects the selected points referencing a plane using the Geometry, Reflect, Point...
command
Command Description
List Lists information about the selected curves to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected curves from the model
Mesh Size Allows you to set the mesh size on the selected curves using the Mesh, Mesh Control,
Size Along Curve... command
Custom Size Allows you to set a custom mesh sizing on selected curves using the Mesh, Mesh Con-
trol, Custom Size Along Curve... command
Mesh Meshes the selected curves with elements (rods, bars, beams, etc.) using the Mesh,
Geometry, Curve... command
Attributes Allows you to set up meshing attributes on selected curves using the Mesh, Mesh Con-
trol, Attributes Along Curve... command
Load Brings up the Create Loads on Curves dialog box to enable you to create geometry
based loads on curves
geometry based constraints on curves.
Color Allows you to change the color of selected curves by bringing up the Color Palette dia-
log box
Layer Allows you to place the selected curves onto a different layer by bringing up the Select
Layer dialog box
Copy Copies the selected curves using the Geometry, Copy, Curve... command
Rotate Rotates the selected curves about an axis using the Geometry, Rotate, Curve... com-
mand
Reflect Reflects the selected curves referencing a plane using the Geometry, Reflect, Curve...
command
Surface
Solid
Connection Property
Command Description
List Lists information about the selected surfaces to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected surfaces from the model
Mesh Size Allows you to set the mesh size on the selected surfaces using the Mesh, Mesh Control,
Size On Surface... command
Mesh Points Allows you to create new points or use existing points to use as hard meshing points
on a surface using Mesh, Mesh Control, Mesh Points on Surface... command
Attributes Allows you to set up meshing attributes on selected surfaces using the Mesh, Mesh
Control, Attributes On Surface... command
Approach Allows you to set up a meshing approach on selected surfaces using the Mesh, Mesh
Control, Approach on Surface... command
Mesh Meshes the selected surfaces with elements (plates, shear panels, laminates, etc.) using
the Mesh, Geometry, Surface... command
Load Brings up the Create Loads on Surfaces dialog box to enable you to create geometry
based loads on surfaces.
geometry based constraints on surfaces.
Color Allows you to change the color of selected surfaces by bringing up the Color Palette
dialog box
Layer Allows you to place the selected surfaces onto a different layer by bringing up the
Select Layer dialog box
Copy Copies the selected surfaces using the Geometry, Copy, Surface... command
Rotate Rotates the selected surfaces about an axis using the Geometry, Rotate, Surface... com-
mand
Reflect Reflects the selected surfaces referencing a plane using the Geometry, Reflect, Sur-
face... command
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new solid
Activate Makes the selected solid the active solid in the model
List Lists information about the selected solid to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected solid from the model
Automatic
Connection
Allows you to automatically create connections between multiple solids using the Con-
nect, Automatic... command. You must have multiple solids selected for this command
to be available.
Mesh Size Allows you to set the mesh size on the selected surfaces using the Mesh, Mesh Control,
Size On Solid... command
Attributes Allows you to set up meshing attributes on selected surfaces using the Mesh, Mesh
Control, Attributes On Solid... command
Tet Mesh Meshes the selected solid with tetrahedral elements (Tets) using the Mesh, Geometry,
Solids... command
Hex mesh Meshes the selected solid with hexahedral elements (Bricks) using the Mesh, Geome-
try, HexMesh Solids... command
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new Connection Property
Activate Makes the selected property the active Connection Property in the model.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected Connection Property(s)
List Lists information about the selected Connection Property(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected Connection Property(s) from the model www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
7-76 Modeling Tools
Region
Connector
CSys (Coordinate Systems)
Command Description
New Connection
Region
Prompts you to create a new Connection Region
New Fluid Region Prompts you to create a new Fluid Region
New Bolt Region Prompts you to create a new Bolt Region
New Rotor Region Prompts you to create a new Rotor Region for Rotor Dynamics.
Show Expanded Highlights the individual elements or nodes and those associated to a geometric entity
or property which will be exported to the solver. Helpful when a Region has been
Defined By using the Curve, Surface, or Part/Property options.
Enable
Region
Designates the Region (Fluid, Bolt, and Rotor only) is Enabled, meaning the Region
will be written out when the analysis model is exported. By default, all Regions are
Enabled.
Disable
Region
Designates the Region (Fluid, Bolt, and Rotor only) is Disabled, meaning the Region
will NOT be written out when the analysis model is exported. Having the ability to
enable and disable regions can be very useful when trying different numbers of
MFLUIDs, Bolt Preloads, and Rotors.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected Region(s) one at a time.
List Lists information about the selected Region(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected Region(s) from the model
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new Connector
Show Master Highlights the Connection Region designated as the Master in the selected Connector
in the graphics window.
Show Slave Highlights the Connection Region designated as the Slave in the selected Connector in
the graphics window.
Reverse Reverses the Slave and Master Connection Regions in the selected Connector. In other
words, it makes the region designated the Master the Slave and the Slave the Master.
Enable
Connector
Designates the Connector is Enabled, meaning the connection will be written out when
the analysis model is exported. By default, all Connectors are Enabled.
Disable
Connector
Designates the Connector is Disabled, meaning the Connector will NOT be written out
when the analysis model is exported.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected Connector(s).
List Lists information about the selected Connector(s) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected Connector(s) from the model
Edit Property Allows you to edit the Connection Property(s) designated in the selected Connector(s).
Select Property Allows you to select a Connection Property from a list of existing Connection Proper-
ties to be used in the selected Connector(s).
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new coordinate system
Activate Makes the selected coordinate system the active coordinate system in the model.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected coordinate system
List Lists information about the selected coordinate system to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected coordinate system from the model
Move Allows you to move a coordinate system from one place to another using the Modify,
Move By, Coord Sys... command
Rotate Allows you to rotate a coordinate system from one place to another using the Modify,
Rotate By, Coord Sys... command
Node
Element
Command Description
Edit Allows you to edit the selected nodes
List Lists information about the selected nodes to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected nodes from the model
Load Brings up the Create Loads on Nodes dialog box to enable you to create loads on
nodes.
Constraint Brings up the Create Nodal Constraints/DOF dialog box to enable you to create con-
straints on nodes.
Color Allows you to change the color of selected nodes by bringing up the Color Palette dia-
log box
Layer Allows you to place the selected nodes onto a different layer by bringing up the Select
Layer dialog box
Copy Copies the selected nodes using the Mesh, Copy, Node... command
Rotate Rotates the selected nodes about an axis using the Mesh, Rotate, Node... command
Reflect Reflects the selected nodes referencing a plane using the Mesh, Reflect, Node... com-
mand
Project Onto
Curve
Projects the selected nodes onto a chosen curve using the Modify, Project, Node Onto
Curve... command
Project Onto
Surface
Projects the selected nodes onto a chosen surface using the Modify, Project, Node Onto
Surface... command
Move To Moves selected nodes to chosen coordinates of a point in space using the Modify, Move
To, Node... command.
Move By Moves selected nodes to a new location using the Modify, Move By, Node... command.
Command Description
Edit Allows you to edit the selected elements
List Lists information about the selected elements to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected elements from the model
Load Brings up the Create Loads on Elements dialog box to enable you to create loads on
elements.
Color Allows you to change the color of selected elements by bringing up the Color Palette
dialog box
Layer Allows you to place the selected elements onto a different layer by bringing up the
Select Layer dialog box
Copy Copies the selected elements using the Mesh, Copy, Elements... command
Rotate Rotates the selected elements about an axis using the Mesh, Rotate, Element... com-
mand
Reflect Reflects the selected elements referencing a plane using the Mesh, Reflect, Element...
command
Move By Moves selected elements to a new location using the Modify, Move By, Element... com-
mand.
Rotate By Rotates selected elements about an axis using a rotation angle and/or a translation dis-
tance. Uses the Modify, Rotate By, Element... command
Align Aligns selected elements using the Modify, Align, Element... command. See Section
4.7.1.5, "Modify, Align Menu" for more information.
7-78 Modeling Tools
Material
Property
Layup
Loads (All)
Constraints (All)
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new material
Activate Makes the selected property the active material in the model.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected material
List Lists information about the selected material to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected material from the model
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new property
Activate Makes the selected property the active property in the model.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected property
List Lists information about the selected property to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected property from the model
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new layup
Edit Allows you to edit the selected layup
List Lists information about the selected layup to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected layup from the model
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new nodal, elemental, or geometry-based load (depending on what
kind of load the selector is currently set to pick)
Edit Allows you to edit the selected nodal, elemental, or geometry-based loads (depending on
what kind of load the selector is currently set to pick)
List Lists information about the selected nodal, elemental, or geometry-based loads (depending
on what kind of load the selector is currently set to pick) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected nodal, elemental, or geometry-based loads (depending on what kind of
load the selector is currently set to pick) from the model
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new nodal constraint, constraint equation, or geometry-based con-
straint (depending on what kind of constraint the selector is currently set to pick)
Edit Allows you to edit the selected nodal constraints, constraint equations, or geometry-based
constraints (depending on what kind of constraints the selector is currently set to pick)
List Lists information about the selected nodal constraints, constraint equations, or geometry-
based constraints (depending on what kind of constraints the selector is currently set to
pick) to the Messages pane
Delete Deletes the selected nodal constraints, constraint equations, or geometry-based constraints
(depending on what kind of constraints the selector is currently set to pick) from the model
Tools, Toolbars, Cursor Position 7-79
Text
7.3.1.6 Tools, Toolbars, Cursor Position
These coordinates are reported in the active coordinate system. If you are snapping to the screen (no snapping) or to
the snap grid, the coordinates will reflect the true location. If you are snapping to the closest point or node, the
screen location that will be used to determine the closest entity will be shown. For more information on the cursor
position tool, see Section 4.4.2, "The Cursor Position Toolbar" in the FEMAP User Guide.
Whenever the Cursor Position toolbar is displayed you can toggle the different components on and off, by clicking
on the X=, Y=, or Z= button images. When off, the position of the cursor in that directional component, will not
be shown.
7.3.1.7 Tools, Toolbars, Panes
This Toolbar gives you quick access to toggle the various Dockable Panes on and off in the User Interface. When a
Pane is open in the User Interface, the icon will turn orange. When a Pane is toggled on it will appear in the same
location it was in before being toggled off with this toolbar or any other method for closing the Pane. For more
information about the Dockable Panes see Section 7.2, "Dockable Panes".
It is separated into three sections:
The first section contains icons for the Model Info Tree, Entity Editor, Data Surface Editor, Entity Info, and Data
Table dockable panes.
The second section contains icons for the Programming and customization dockable panes in FEMAP, the API
Programming and Program File panes.
The third section contains an icon for the Messages Dockable Pane.
Command Description
New Prompts you to create a new text entity.
Edit Allows you to edit the selected text entity, which includes the position of the text entity.
List Lists information about the selected text entity
Delete Deletes the selected text entity.
7-80 Modeling Tools
7.3.1.8 Tools, Toolbars, Format
This toolbar allows you to modify the text in the Messages Dockable Pane. Here is a breakdown of the toolbar:
Font Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to make mul-
tiple changes at once and set the Font,
Font Style, Size, Effects, Color, and
Script of any new or existing text in the
Messages window.
All of the changes that can be made with
the Font dialog box can also be made one
at a time with the Font Type and Size
drop-down menus and the Bold, Italic,
and Underline icons on the Format tool-
bar.
Align Icons
Enable you to align text on the right or
left side of the Messages window, or cen-
ter the text.
Message Bullets
Allows you to create a bulleted listing of
data or other information. Click once to
insert bullets and again to remove bullets.
Font Color and Highlight Color
Both of these icons bring up a color palette which allow you to choose from a selection of 40 colors. If you do not
see a particular color, click More Colors...and the Color dialog box will appear. You now have a choice of 127 col-
ors and 17 additional grayscale colors on the Standard tab or you can choose a custom color from the Colors: field
Font Dialog (brings up Font Dialog box)
Font Type Font Size
Font Style
Bold Italic Underline
Alignment
Right Center Left
Message Bullets
Font Color
Highlight Color
Color Palette (Font Color & Highlight Color)
More Colors
Dialog Box
Tools, Toolbars, Solids 7-81
on the Custom tab. To return the Font Color to the default, click Text - Automatic, on the Font Color palette. To
return the Highlight Color to the default, click Highlight - Automatic, on the Font Color palette.
7.3.1.9 Tools, Toolbars, Solids
The solids toolbar is divided into three separate segments. Workplane Tools, Solid Sketch, and Geometry, Solid...
commands.
Workplane Tools
The first segment pertains to manipulating the workplane, with the Tools, Workplane and the Workplane on Surface
icons. The Tools, Workplane icon brings up the Workplane dialog box, while Workplane on Surface is actually the
On Surface button in the Workplane dialog box.
(See Section 7.1.2, "Tools, Workplane..." for more details)
Solid Sketch
The second segment contains the Solid Sketch command. This command is only available
as a toolbar command. Before using this command, you must first create a planar, wire-
frame outline of a shape to be used as a profile. Once the profile is created, click the Solid
Sketch icon and press either the Extrude or Revolve button. FEMAP will create a bound-
ary surface out of the profile you have created and then extrude or revolve the profile into
a solid as instructed.
Geometry, Solid... commands
The third portion of the toolbar contains many commands from the Geometry, Solid... menu. This Toolbar gives
you the ability to create Solid Primitives, Add solids together, Remove one solid from another, create a Fillet or a
Chamfer on an existing solid, Slice a solid into multiple pieces, Stitch surfaces (sheet solids) into a single solid, and
hollow out a solid using the Shell icon.
(For more information, see Section 3.4.2.3, "Geometry, Solid, Extrude...", Section 3.4.2.4, "Geometry, Solid,
Revolve...", Section 3.4.2.5, "Geometry, Solid, Primitives...", Section 3.4.2.8, "Geometry, Solid, Fillet...", Section
3.4.2.9, "Geometry, Solid, Chamfer...", Section 3.4.2.13, "Geometry, Solid, Add...", Section 3.4.2.14, "Geometry,
Solid, Remove...", Section 3.4.2.18, "Geometry, Solid, Slice...", Section 3.4.2.6, "Geometry, Solid, Stitch...", and
Section 3.4.2.10, "Geometry, Solid, Shell...")
Note: The Default colors can be set for the Messages window using the File, Preferences command and click-
ing the Messages button. For more information see Section 2.6.2.1, "Messages".
Note: This command only works for one enclosed boundary at a time. If any other curves exist that are not
part of the enclosed boundary, FEMAP will not be able to determine which curves to use to create a
boundary surface.
Tools,Workplane
Workplane on Surface
Solid Sketch
Geometry,Solid,Extrude
Geometry,Solid,Revolve
Geometry,Solid,Primatives
Geometry,Solid,Fillet
Geometry,Solid,Chamfer
Geometry,Solid,Add
Geometry,Solid,Remove
Geometry,Solid,Slice
Geometry,Solid,Stitch
Geometry,Solid,Shell
7-82 Modeling Tools
7.3.1.10 Tools, Toolbars, Surfaces
This Toolbar is divided into two sections. The first section contains commands from the Geometry, Surface... menu
and the second section contains commands from Geometry, Boundary Surface... menu
Geometry, Surface... commands
These commands allow you to create surfaces by entering corners, picking edge curves, lofting through multiple
aligned curves, specifying two curves for a ruled surface, extruding or revolving a curve into a surface, and creating
cylindrical and spherical surfaces by entering specific parameters.
Geometry, Boundary Surface... commands
These commands allow you to create boundary surfaces by selecting any number of curves that outline an enclosed
area or to create a larger boundary surface from multiple existing surfaces to be used for multi-surface meshing.
(For more information, see Section 3.3.3.1, "Geometry, Surface, Corners...", Section 3.3.3.2, "Geometry, Surface,
Edge Curves...", Section 3.3.3.3, "Geometry, Surface, Aligned Curves...", Section 3.3.3.4, "Geometry, Surface,
Ruled...", Section 3.3.3.5, "Geometry, Surface, Extrude...", Section 3.3.3.6, "Geometry, Surface, Revolve...", Sec-
tion 3.3.3.9, "Geometry, Surface, Cylinder...", Section 3.3.3.10, "Geometry, Surface, Sphere...", Section 3.3.2.1,
"Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Curves...", and Section 3.3.2.2, "Geometry, Boundary Surface, From Surfaces
on Solid...")
7.3.1.11 Tools, Toolbars, Lines
This Toolbar contains commands found in the Geometry, Curve - Line... menu.
Geometry, Curve - Line... commands
These commands allow you to create lines in a number of different ways. Icons with the yellow axis mean the lines
can be created in 3-D space (Continuous, Coordinates, Offset, and Vectored).
Geometry,Surface,Corners
Geometry,Surface,Edge Curves
Geometry,Surface,Aligned
Geometry,Surface,Ruled
Curves
Geometry,Surface,Extrude
Geometry,Surface,Revolve
Geometry,Surface,Cylinder
Geometry,Surface,Sphere
Geometry,Boundary Surface,From Curves
Geometry,Boundary Surface,
From Surfaces on Solids
Geometry,Curve-Line,Continuous
Geometry,Curve-Line,Coordinates
Geometry,Curve-Line,Offset
Geometry,Curve-Line,Vectored
Geometry,Curve-Line,Rectangle
Geometry,Curve-Line,Midline
Geometry,Curve-Line,Point
Geometry,Curve-Line,Tangent
Geometry,Curve-Line,Parallel
and Tangent
Angle Geometry,Curve-Line,at
Geometry,Curve-Line,Project
to Curve Geometry,Curve-Line,Angle
Points
Geometry,Curve-Line,Vertical
Geometry,Curve-Line,Horizontal
Geometry,Curve-Line,
Perpendicular
Tools, Toolbars, Circles 7-83
Those without the axis are created on the 2-D workplane (Rectangle, Point and Tangent, Tangent, Parallel, Angle to
Curve, at Angle, Project Points, Vertical, Horizontal, and Perpendicular)
(For more information, see Section 3.2.1.12, "Geometry, Curve-Line, Continuous...", Section 3.2.1.14, "Geometry,
Curve-Line, Coordinates...", Section 3.2.1.15, "Geometry, Curve-Line, Offset...", Section 3.2.1.16, "Geometry,
Curve-Line, Vectored...", Section 3.2.1.11, "Geometry, Curve-Line, Rectangle...",Section 3.2.1.6, "Geometry,
Curve-Line, Midline...", Section 3.2.1.9, "Geometry, Curve-Line, Point and Tangent...", Section 3.2.1.10, "Geome-
try, Curve-Line, Tangent...", Section 3.2.1.5, "Geometry, Curve-Line, Parallel...", Section 3.2.1.8, "Geometry,
Curve-Line, Angle to Curve...", Section 3.2.1.7, "Geometry, Curve-Line, At Angle...", Section 3.2.1.1, "Geometry,
Curve-Line, Project Points...", Section 3.2.1.3, "Geometry, Curve-Line, Vertical...", Section 3.2.1.2, "Geometry,
Curve-Line, Horizontal...", and Section 3.2.1.4, "Geometry, Curve-Line, Perpendicular...")
7.3.1.12 Tools, Toolbars, Circles
This Toolbar contains commands found in the Geometry, Curve - Arc... and Geometry, Curve - Circle... menus.
Geometry, Curve - Arc... commands
These icons allow you to create arcs in the 2-D workplane using various methods (Center-Start-End, Radius-Start-
End, Angle-Start-End, and Angle-Center-End) and in 3-D space using Points.
Geometry, Curve - Circle... commands
These commands allow you to create circles in the 2-D workplane using various methods (Radius, Diameter, Cen-
ter, Point-Tangent, Tangent to Curves).
(For more information, see Section 3.2.3.1, "Geometry, Curve-Circle, Radius...", Section 3.2.3.2, "Geometry,
Curve-Circle, Diameter...", Section 3.2.3.3, "Geometry, Curve-Circle, Center...", Section 3.2.3.5, "Geometry,
Curve-Circle, Point-Tangent...", Section 3.2.3.6, "Geometry, Curve-Circle, Tangent to Curves...", Section 3.2.2.1,
"Geometry, Curve-Arc, Center-Start-End...", Section 3.2.2.2, "Geometry, Curve-Arc, Radius-Start-End...", Section
3.2.2.3, "Geometry, Curve-Arc, Angle-Start-End...", Section 3.2.2.4, "Geometry, Curve-Arc, Angle-Center-
Start...", and Section 3.2.2.6, "Geometry, Curve-Arc, Points...")
Geometry,Curve-Circle,Radius
Geometry,Curve-Circle,Diameter
Geometry,Curve-Circle,Center
Geometry,Curve-Circle,Point-Tangent
Geometry,Curve-Circle,Tangent
Geometry,Curve-Arc,Points
Geometry,Curve-Arc,Center-Start-End
Geometry,Curve-Arc,Radius-Start-End
Geometry,Curve-Arc,Angle-Start-End
to Curves
Geometry,Curve-Arc,Angle-Center-Start
7-84 Modeling Tools
7.3.1.13 Tools, Toolbars, Splines
This Toolbar contains commands
found in the Geometry, Curve -
Spline... menu.
Geometry, Curve - Spline...
commands
These commands allow you to
create splines in a number of dif-
ferent ways. Icons with the yellow
axis signifies splines can be cre-
ated in 3-D space (Control Points,
Points, Tangents, Blend, and Off-
set).
Those without the axis are created
on the 2-D workplane (Project
Control Points and Project Points)
(For more information, see Sec-
tion 3.2.4.6, "Geometry, Curve-Spline, Control Points...", Section 3.2.4.7, "Geometry, Curve-Spline, Points...",
Section 3.2.4.9, "Geometry, Curve-Spline, Tangents...", Section 3.2.4.10, "Geometry, Curve-Spline, Blend...", Sec-
tion 3.2.4.12, "Geometry, Curve-Spline, Offset...",Section 3.2.4.1, "Geometry, Curve-Spline, Project Control
Points...", and Section 3.2.4.2, "Geometry, Curve-Spline, Project Points...")
7.3.1.14 Tools, Toolbars, Curves On Surfaces
This Toolbar contains commands
found in the Geometry, Curve -
From Surface... menu.
Geometry, Curve - From Sur-
face... commands
These commands allow you to turn
on the Update Surfaces flag as well
as perform multiple commands used
to split surfaces using curves (Inter-
sect, Project, Project Along Vector,
Parametric Curve, and Slice).
When the Update Surfaces flag is
on, the background of the icon will
turn orange to indicate that it is cur-
rently active.
(For more information, see Section 3.2.5.1, "Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Update Surfaces...", Section 3.2.5.2,
"Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Intersect...", Section 3.2.5.3, "Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Project...",
Section 3.2.5.4, "Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Project Along Vector...", Section 3.2.5.5, "Geometry, Curves -
from Surface, Parametric Curve...", Section 3.2.5.6, "Geometry, Curves - from Surface, Slice...")
Geometry,Curve-Spline,Control
Geometry,Curve-Spline,Points
Geometry,Curve-Spline,Tangents
Geometry,Curve-Spline,Blend
Geometry,Curve-Spline,Offset
Geometry,Curve-Spline,Project
Geometry,Curve-Line,Project
Points
Control Points
Points
Geometry,Curve-From Surface,Update Surfaces
Geometry,Curve-From Surface,Intersect
Geometry,Curve-From Surface,Project
Geometry,Curve-From Surface,Project Along Vector
Geometry,Curve-From Surface,Parametric Curve
Geometry,Curve-From Surface,Slice
Tools, Toolbars, Curve Edit 7-85
7.3.1.15 Tools, Toolbars, Curve Edit
This Toolbar contains commands found in the Modify...
menu.
Modify... commands
These commands allow you to modify existing curves to
create wireframe geometry. You can trim curves, break
curves at specific points, extend curves, join two curves,
or create a fillet or chamfer between two curves.
(For more information, see Section 3.6.1.1, "Modify,
Trim...", Section 3.6.1.3, "Modify, Break...", Section
3.6.1.2, "Modify, Extend...", Section 3.6.1.4, "Modify,
Join...", Section 3.6.1.5, "Modify, Fillet...", Section
3.6.1.6, "Modify, Chamfer...")
7.3.1.16 Tools, Toolbars, Mesh
This Toolbar contains commands found on the Mesh,Mesh Control..., Mesh, Geometry..., and Mesh... menus.
The first three icons let you set mesh sizing on different types of geometry. The next three icons allow you to mesh
certain types of geometry. The Mesh, Between icon allows you to create a mesh by specifying number of elements,
biasing, type of elements, and 4 corner locations. The Mesh, Region icon allows you to create a mesh from one set
of nodes to another set of nodes, while specifying the sizing of the mesh between the sets. The next three icons
allow you to Copy, Rotate, and Reflect an existing mesh. Finally, the last two icons allow you to Extrude or
Revolve planar elements into solid elements.
(For more information, see Section 5.1.1.3, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Size Along Curve...", Section 5.1.1.4, "Mesh,
Mesh Control, Size On Surface...", Section 5.1.1.5, "Mesh, Mesh Control, Size On Solid...", Section 5.1.2.2,
"Mesh, Geometry, Curve...", Section 5.1.2.3, "Mesh, Geometry, Surface...", Section 5.1.2.7, "Mesh, Geometry, Sol-
ids...", Section 5.2.1, "Mesh, Between...", Section 5.2.2, "Mesh, Region...", Section 5.4.1.2, "Mesh, Copy, Ele-
ment...", Section 5.4.4.2, "Mesh, Rotate, Element...", Section 5.4.4.5, "Mesh, Reflect, Element...", Section 5.5.1.2,
"Mesh, Extrude, Element...", and Section 5.5.2.2, "Mesh, Revolve, Element...")
Modify,Trim
Modify,Break
Modify,Extend
Modify,Join
Modify,Fillet
Modify,Chamfer
Mesh,Mesh Control,Size
Mesh,Geometry,Curve
Along
Curve
Mesh,Mesh Control,Size Solid On
Mesh,Mesh Control,Size Surface On
Mesh,Geometry,Solid
Mesh,Geometry,Surface
Mesh,Between
Mesh,Region
Mesh,Copy,Element
Mesh,Rotate,Element
Mesh,Reflect,Element
Mesh,Revolve,Element
Mesh,Extrude,Element
7-86 Modeling Tools
7.3.1.17 Tools, Toolbars, Loads
This Toolbar contains com-
mands found in the Model,
Load... menu.
Model, Load... commands
These commands allow you to
create loads on your model.
There icons allow you to create
nodal and elemental loads,
expand geometry based loads to
become nodal or elemental
loads, and create geometry
based loads on points, curves,
and surfaces.
(For more information, see Section 4.3.3.2, "Model, Load, Nodal", Section 4.3.3.4, "Model, Load, Elemental...",
Section 4.3.4.4, "Model, Load, Expand...", Section 4.3.4.1, "Model, Load, On Point...", Section 4.3.4.2, "Model,
Load, On Curve...", Section 4.3.4.3, "Model, Load, On Surface...", Section 4.3.4.5, "Model, Load, Bolt Preload...")
7.3.1.18 Tools, Toolbars, Constraints
This Toolbar contains commands found in
the Model, Constraint... menu.
Model, Constraint... commands
These commands allow you to create con-
straints on your model. There icons allow
you to create nodal constraints, and create
Quick Constraints on nodes for Pinned,
No Rotation, and Fixed boundary condi-
tions. Also, you can expand geometry
based constraints to become nodal con-
straints, and create geometry based con-
straints on points, curves, and surfaces.
(For more information, see Section 4.3.9.1, "Model, Constraint, Nodal...", Section 4.3.10.4, "Model, Constraint,
Expand...", Section 4.3.10.1, "Model, Constraint, On Point...", Section 4.3.10.2, "Model, Constraint, On Curve...",
Section 4.3.10.3, "Model, Constraint, On Surface...")
7.3.1.19 Tools, Toolbars, Post
The Post Toolbar gives you one-click access to many post-processing commands that are located several layers
down in the menu structure or through multiple levels of dialog boxes. This toolbar has traditionally been one of
the most useful and frequently utilized toolbars in FEMAP. Many of the icons on the Post toolbar represent options
that can be found in the View, Select and the View, Options commands.
View, Select commands
These icons represent functionality that can be accessed in the View Select dialog box or by clicking the Deformed
and Contour Data button in the View Select dialog box.
No Deformation: None - Model Only option in Deformed Style portion of View Select dialog box.
Deformed: Deform option in Deformed Style portion of View Select dialog box.
Animate: Animate option in Deformed Style portion of View Select dialog box.
No Contour: None - Model Only option in Contour Style portion of View Select dialog box.
Contour: Contour option in Contour Style portion of View Select dialog box.
Criteria: Criteria option in Contour Style portion of View Select dialog box.
Post Data: Brings up the Select PostProcessing Data dialog box, same as clicking the Deformed and Contour
Data button in the View Select dialog box.
Model,Load,Nodal
Modal,Load,Expand
Model,Load,On
Model,Load,On Curve
Model,Load,Elemental Model,Load,On Surface
Point
Model,Load,Bolt Preload
Model,Constraint,Nodal
No Rotation (QC)
Fixed (QC)
Model,Constraint,Expand
Pinned (QC)
Model,Constraint,On Point
Model,Constraint,On
Curve
Model,Constraint,On Surface
Tools, Toolbars, Post 7-87
Next Output Set: Changes output set to the next available output set in the list (from top to bottom) located in
the Output Set section of Select PostProcessing Data dialog box.
Previous Output Set: Changes output set to the previous available output set in the list (from bottom to top)
located in the Output Set section of Select PostProcessing Data dialog box.
Next Output Vector: Changes output vector to the next available output vector in the Contour list (from top to
bottom) located in the Output Vectors section of Select PostProcessing Data dialog box.
Previous Output Vector: Changes output vector to the previous available output vector in the Contour list
(from bottom to top) located in the Output Vectors section of Select PostProcessing Data dialog box
(See Section 6.1.5.1, "View, Select...", Section 6.1.5.2, "Choosing a Model Style", Section 8.2, "Types of Views -
View Select...", and Section 8.2.2.2, "Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style" for more information on
these options).
Post Options
This menu represents functionality that can be accessed in the View Options dialog box, the Contour Options dialog
box, and the Freebody Display dialog box.
Undeformed: In the View Options dialog box, PostProcessing category, Undeformed Model option, toggles the
Draw Entity check box on and off.
Scale Deformation: In the View Options dialog box, PostProcessing category, Deformed Style option, enters
specified value into Scale Act field.
Actual Deformation: In the View Options dialog box, PostProcessing category, Deformed Style option, toggles
the % of Model (Actual) check box on and off. When checked, actual deformation is being shown. When
unchecked, scaled deformation is being shown.
Animation Frames: In the View Options dialog box, PostProcessing category, Animated Style option, enters
specified value into Frames field.
Animation - Positive Only and Animation - Load and Unload: In the View Options dialog box, PostProcess-
ing category, Animated Style option, highlights the appropriate selection from the Shape list. When Animation -
Positive Only is off and Animation - Load and Unload is on, FEMAP chooses 0..Linear - Full. When Anima-
No Deformation
No Contour
Animate
Deformed
Criteria
Contour
Post Data
Next Ouput Set
Previous Output Set
Next Output Vector
Previous Output Vector
Post Options
7-88 Modeling Tools
tion - Positive Only and Animation - Load and Unload are both on, FEMAP chooses 1..Linear - Full Abs. When
both are off FEMAP chooses 2..Linear - Half, and when Animation - Positive Only is on and Animation - Load
and Unload is off, FEMAP chooses 3..Linear - Half Abs.
Animate Contours: In the View Options dialog box, PostProcessing category, Contour/Criteria Levels option,
toggles the Animate check box on and off. Has no effect on Multi-set animations.
Filled Contours: In the View Options dialog box, PostProcessing category, Contour/Criteria Style option, tog-
gles the Filled (or Line) check box on and off.
Contour Options: Brings up the Contour Options dialog box. This dialog box can also be reached by clicking
the Contour Options button in the Select PostProcessing Data dialog box, or in the View Options dialog box,
PostProcessing category, Contour Type option, by clicking the Contour Options button.
Freebody: Brings up the View FreeBody Options dialog box. This dialog box can also be reached by clicking
the Freebody Display button in the Select PostProcessing Data dialog box.
More Options: Opens the View Options dialog box.
(See Section 6.1.5.3, "View, Options..." and Section 8.3, "View Options - PostProcessing", Section 8.3.6, "Unde-
formed Model...", Section 8.3.2, "Deformed Style", Section 8.3.4, "Animated Style",Section 8.3.10, "Contour/Cri-
teria Levels...", Section 8.3.9, "Contour/Criteria Style...", Section 8.3.8, "Contour Type..." and Section 8.2.2.2,
"Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style" for more information on these options) Model Parameters and
Convert Units
7.3.1.20 Tools, Toolbars, Custom Tools
The Custom Tools Toolbar makes accessing custom commands and tools (i.e., API programs, Macros created using
the Program File dockable pane, outside executables, etc.) very easy by allowing the user to choose a Tools Direc-
tory on the computer to store all of these tools.
The Tools Directory can be set a number of ways. Through this toolbar,
choosing the Tools Directory... command will bring up a dialog box which
will allow you to choose a directory. This directory you choose can be on
your computer or out on a network.
Once the Tools Directory... is set, FEMAP will automatically create a menu
item for each file it recognizes as a tool. FEMAP recognizes the follow-
ing file types as potential tools:
*.exe; *.com; *.pif; *.bat; *.cmd; *.pro; *.prg; *.bas
If the Tools Directory... contains sub-folders, each sub-folder will become a
menu item and the tools inside each of those sub-folders will appear a
level lower in the Custom Tools Toolbar menu hierarchy.
The Add Tools... command allows you to choose a custom tool (file must
be one of the expected file types above) and copies that tool file to the
specified Tools Directory.... The next time you use the Custom Tools Menu,
that tool will be on the menu available for you to use.
.
Note: By default, the Tools Directory... path points to the API
folder in the FEMAP directory.
You can also set the Tools Directory... using File, Prefer-
ences, then choosing the Library/Startup tab, and then
entering a directory path in the Custom Tools Path.
Note: If an API or other executable has any support files, such as a header file or something else, you
can prevent these from appearing in the Custom Tools menu by placing a *.skip file in the same direc-
tory as the support file. For example, if you had something called header.bas, you could create a
file called header.skip in the same directory and then header would not show up in the menu.
Other FEMAP Tools 7-89
7.4 Other FEMAP Tools
Along with the Workplane, Dockable Panes, and Toolbars, FEMAP has additional tools. There are tools for:
Defining Overall System Parameters (See Section 7.4.1, "Tools, Parameters...") and Converting Units (See Sec-
tion 7.4.2, "Tools, Convert Units...")
Creating specific Entities - Variables, Layers, and Text (See Section 7.4.3, "Entity Tools")
A number of Quantitative tools (See Section 7.4.4, "Measuring Tools") and Qualitative tools (See Section 7.4.5,
"Checking Tools")
A Stress Wizard for users who would like to be guided through a simple stress analysis of a single part in a
four step process (See Section 7.4.6, "Tools, Stress Wizard")
7.4.1 Tools, Parameters...
...allows you to set numerous model parameters simultaneously. All of the individual FEMAP model parameters
can be set during creation or activation of an entity. If you want to review all of the parameters, or set more than
one or two, this command simplifies that task.
For all of the entities which are drawn in the graphics window, you can set the Color, Next ID and creation incre-
ment. Whenever you create an entity, Next ID is used as the default ID, and it is automatically incremented by the
creation Increment for the next creation.
For the entity sets, you can choose an active set, or specify the Next ID and creation increment. Active sets are used
to hold all entities which are created. For example, loads and constraints are always created in the active load or
constraint set. Active entities (coordinate systems, materials and properties) are referenced by new entities. For
example, coordinates are always specified in the active coordinate system. You may also change the active layer, as
well as choose an option for Merge Tolerance, which is used when meshing geometry. Simply change the Merge
Tolerance option to Specified and enter a value. This value will be saved with your model. All nodes within this
tolerance will be automatically merged, thereby eliminating many of the coincident nodes you would typically get
in a multi-surface mesh.
Note: FEMAP determines the default node merge tolerance based on overall model size. The number is
1/10000 of the model box diagonal (think of the model box being an invisible box that com-
pletely encapsulates every entity in the model).
7-90 Modeling Tools
7.4.2 Tools, Convert Units...
...can be used to convert the entities (geometry, positions, properties,...) in your current model to a different system
of units. You also can globally scale and/or add a constant value to certain types of units with this command.
The conversion process uses a consistent methodology for converting all types of units. The conversion formula is:
This approach gives you great flexibility in your conversion. Typically however, for unit conversions, you will set
the add factors to zero. The only exception is for conversion of temperatures.
The base factors are not directly used during a conversion, but provide a simple way of specifying the twenty-four
actual conversion factors. Whenever you select Calculate, (or as an option when you choose OK), the current val-
ues of the base factors are used to update the conversion factors. If necessary, you can then make further modifica-
tions to the conversion factors. Reset will quickly set everything back to the default - all multiplication factors
equal to 1.0 and all add factors equal to 0.0. Invert will take all of the current conversion factors. and invert them.
For example, if the factors were loaded to convert from SI to USCS, this will invert them to become factors to do
the opposite conversion.
The following table shows the method that Calculate uses to determine the conversion factors from the base fac-
tors.
Calc By uses the Base Factors
L=Length, F=Force, t=Time, M=Mass, E=Energy, T=Temp
ID Factor Calc By ID Factor Calc By
0 Length L 12 DampingRot F*t
1 Area L
2
13 Mass M
2 Inertia L
4
14 Mass-Length M*L
3 Force F 15 Mass/Length M/L
4 Moment F*L 16 Mass/Area M/L
2
5 Spring F/L 17 Density M/L
3
6 Spring Rot F 18 Mass Inertia M*L
2
Unit
new
Unit
old
Factor
mult ipl y
( ) Factor
add
+ =
Tools, Convert Units... 7-91
Only the multiplication base factors are used in these calculations (other than for directly setting the temperature
conversion factor). The base add factors are not used.
Since this command is intended to convert units from one system of measurement to another, the conversion is
applied to your entire model. This ensures that a consistent set of units is maintained. Note, however, that FEMAP
does not determine whether your original model used a consistent set of units, or even what system of units it was
using.
Using Conversion Factor Files
While you can enter all of the base and/or conversion factors every time you want to use this command, it is much
easier to use conversion factor files. There are several conversion factor files that are delivered with FEMAP. To
use one of these files, or any conversion factor files which you create, choose Load. This option will display the
standard file access dialog box to allow you to choose the conversion factor file you want to use. The default file
name extension is *.CF. When you choose a file, the conversion factors will be loaded from that file. You can then
review and change them to suit your needs. The Save button has just the opposite results. It takes the conversion
factors that are currently in the dialog box and writes them to a new conversion factor file.
Conversion Factor File Formats
Using combinations of Load and Save is the easiest way to create and edit your own conversion factor files. These
files are normal text files however, and you can edit and modify them with any text editor.
The format of these files is as follows:
The file is actually written and read in free-format and you must have one or more spaces between each number,
but no specific columns or number of digits is required. The first six lines contain the base factors and must always
be specified. You can also specify one or more additional lines which directly update the conversion factors, but
these are not required. You must specify the ID of the conversion factor to be updated along with the factors. The
conversion factor IDs are shown in the table above.
The following rules must be followed for all conversion factor files:
No blank lines are allowed in conversion factor files, including at the end of the file.
You can place comments at the end of each line in the file. Just put one or more spaces after the add factor and
before any other text.
All factors must be separated by one or more spaces.
7 Pressure F/L
2
19 Temperature T (mult &
add)
8 Acceleration L/t
2
20 Thermal
Expansion
1/T
9 Acceleration
Rotation
1/t
2
21 Thermal
Conductivity
E/t*L*T
10 VelocityRot 1/t 22 Specific Heat E/M*T
11 Damping F*t/L 23 Heat Gen
Rate
E/t*L
3
24 Energy/Mass E/M
Record Contents of Record in File
1 Length
MultBase
Length
AddBase
2 Force
MultBase
Force
AddBase
3 Time
MultBase
Time
AddBase
4 Mass
MultBase
Mass
AddBase
5 Temperature
MultBase
Temperature
AddBase
6 Energy
MultBase
Energy
AddBase
7..N ID ConversionFactor
Mult
ConversionFactor
Add
Calc By uses the Base Factors
L=Length, F=Force, t=Time, M=Mass, E=Energy, T=Temp
ID Factor Calc By ID Factor Calc By
7-92 Modeling Tools
No factors may be skipped - even if they are zero.
7.4.3 Entity Tools
The fourth section of the Tools menu is comprised of commands which create FEMAP entities. These entities
themselves are not used in FEA analysis, but are provided as easy methods of inputting variable values, viewing
your model, and placing text in your model. The three commands in this section are explained in more detail below.
7.4.3.1 Tools, Variables
Variables are used in FEMAP to store a numerical value or an equation with your model. Throughout FEMAP, at
any time a numerical value is required, you can specify a variable, or an equation which contains variables, instead
of a number. Before you can use variables however, they must first be created. For more details on specifying
numerical input using variables, see Section 4.4.8, "Equation Editor - Ctrl+E" in the FEMAP User Guide.
Variable Names
FEMAP variable names can be up to 20 characters in length, but they must be unique within the first 5 characters.
This means that A1234, A12345, and A1234_EXTRA all reference the same variable. Variables must start with a
letter (A through Z), but can also contain numbers (0 through 9), and underscore characters (_). Spaces are not
allowed. Differences between upper and lower case and underscores are ignored. This means that Var_1, var_1,
VAR_1 and var1, all reference the same variable.
Defining and Updating Variables
The Define Variables dialog box defines new variables, and updates existing variables. You simply enter the vari-
able name. If a variable with that name (or an equivalent name based on the rules specified above) already exists,
you will modify it. If it does not exist, it will be created.
The drop-down list is provided to show you a list of all variables which are currently defined. After specifying a
name, switch to the Value or Equation text box and define the data to be stored with the variable. If you are updat-
ing an existing variable, you will notice that the text box was updated to reflect the current contents of the variable.
As the title implies, you can enter either a numerical value, or an equation to be saved in the variable. If you are
entering an equation, and you want to see its current value, press Show Result. The value will be shown under the
text box. Press OK when you are satisfied with the variable definition.
If you want additional assistance when you are defining the equation, you can either press Equation Editor, or just
type Ctrl+E. In either case, FEMAP will display the FEMAP equation editor. For more information on the equation
editor, see Section 4.4.8, "Equation Editor - Ctrl+E" in the FEMAP User Guide.
7.4.3.2 Tools, Layers...
... is used to define layers in your model. By themselves layers cannot be displayed, rather, other entities are placed
on the layers that you create with this command. Layers have an ID, title and color. The title is limited to 25 charac-
ters. You can either enter the number of the color for the layer, or choose it by pressing the Palette button.
This dialog box works just like the other set creation dialog boxes. To make a new layer, enter an ID that does not
exist in the list of available layers. Then enter a title, choose a color and press OK. To activate a layer, simply
choose it from the list, or enter its ID and press OK. Unlike other sets, you must always have some layer active.
Ctrl+L
Tools, Text... 7-93
Once layers have been created and entities assigned to them, they can be used to control groups (Group, Layers
command), or to control display and entity selection (View, Layers command). For more information on showing
layers, Section 6.4.2, "Layer Commands".
7.4.3.3 Tools, Text...
... lets you define text to annotate your model which will be displayed in one or more views. Text can contain any
number of lines, but only up to 256 characters per text entity.
As displayed, text looks like the following:
After you choose all of the text options and enter the text, you will see either the standard coordinate definition dia-
log box (model-positioned text) or the View Position dialog box (view-positioned text), which will allow you to
locate the text. A second dialog box will be displayed if you have chosen to define a text pointer. This locates the
tip of the pointer.
You can optionally add a rectangular border/box around the text and a pointer which goes from the text to another
location that you specify. Font selection is limited to the entries shown in the drop-down list. The Color options set
the color of the text, while the Border/Pointer color options set the color of the lines drawn for the border and
pointer. The Background Color fills the background of the text inside the border (only if the border is drawn).
Note: You must always remember to use Ctrl+Enter to advance to the next line of text. Pressing Enter alone
will choose OK - the default command button.
This is MultiLine
text to be created
Pointer
Border
Background
Text
7-94 Modeling Tools
Justification
The justification options have two purposes. First, the lines of text are justified based on the settings of these
options when they are drawn. Secondly however, justification specifies how the text will be located, relative to the
location you specify. If the text is left, top justified, the location you specify will be the left, top corner of the text.
If the text is H Center (horizontal centering) and V Center (vertical centering) justified, the location you specify
will be in the middle of the text both horizontally and vertically.
Position
There are two ways to position text entities - relative to the view or relative to the model. View positioned text will
always appear at the same location in every view (based on a percentage of window size from the upper left cor-
ner). This location is completely independent of the model orientation or scaling within the view. You should nor-
mally use this type of text for picture titles that you want to remain in the same spot.
Model positioned text is located relative to model coordinates. It is therefore displayed wherever those model coor-
dinates are located in the view. This type of text is useful for labelling a model feature since it will move with the
coordinates where it is defined. View positioned text should rarely have a pointer, since it would not point to the
same location as the model was scaled or rotated.
Visibility
Text can either be visible in all views, or in a single view. If you choose the Single View option, you must identify
an existing view for the display. Text display can also be turned on or off in each view using the View, Options com-
mand.
Style
These options control whether or not the text pointer and border will be drawn for this entity. If you want a pointer,
you will need to specify a set of coordinates to locate the tip of the pointer in addition to the coordinates you speci-
fied to position the text.
Using Text to Create a Pointer
Normally, you must enter one or more characters of text. If you turn on the pointer however, FEMAP will allow
you to create a text entity which has no text. This type of entity will simply display as a pointer or vector. It will be
drawn from the text position, to the tip position, that you specify. This approach can be used to add multiple point-
ers from a single annotation, or just to add vectors with arrowheads to your model.
7.4.3.4 Deleting Variables, Layers, and Text (Delete, Tools... commands)
Variables, Layers, and Text entities must be deleted using the Delete, Tools... menu. Choose the type of entity you
would like to delete and then the specific entities using a selection dialog box.
7.4.4 Measuring Tools
The next few commands all involve measurements. You can measure distances between two locations, angles
between a center and two locations, length of curves, mass properties, and section properties. Results of these com-
mands are sent to the List Destination specified with the List Destination command. Typically this will be the Mes-
sages window, but you could also specify a file and/or printer as well.
7.4.4.1 Tools, Distance...
... measures the linear distance between two locations. The locations do not have to exist as points or nodes. This
command uses the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes to determine the two locations to measure between.
If you do want to measure the distance between points or nodes, you can either snap the coordinates to one of those
entities, or choose either the On Node or On Point coordinate definition method.
This command will automatically repeat until you press Cancel. In addition, assuming you are measuring between
XYZ locations (as opposed to nodes or points) the default from location for the second measurement will be the
to location from the first measurement. This enables you to simply press OK and measure between a series of
locations.
Tools, Angles... 7-95
The distance and the global components of the vector between the two locations is reported in a message.
7.4.4.2 Tools, Angles...
... measures the angular distance between three locations. This com-
mand works just like Tools, Distance. The standard coordinate defi-
nition dialog boxes are used to define the three locations, and the
angular measurement is reported in a message.
The first location specified is the origin or center of the angle. Then,
two additional endpoint locations must be chosen. The angle is
measured between the vectors formed by these endpoint locations
and the origin of the angle.
7.4.4.3 Tools, Mass Properties Menu...
...provides access to commands which will provide length and mass property information for both geometric enti-
ties, as well as your finite element mesh. Each of the commands available under this menu is explained below.
Tools, Mass Properties, Measure Curves...
...determines the length of selected curves. You select the curves that FEMAP will measure using the standard
entity selection dialog box. You can choose any curves in your model. They do not have to be connected to one
another.
This command produces a listing in the following format:
In the listing:
Tools, Mass Properties, Surface Area...
... calculates the surface area of the selected surfaces. The only input required for this command are the surfaces.
Surfaces are selected via the standard entity selection dialog box. FEMAP will automatically compute the area of
each surface, as well as the total area of all chosen. This command is only available for Parasolid surfaces. It cannot
be used to obtain the surface area of boundary surfaces or standard geometry engine surfaces.
Hint: This command is also available wherever an input of a length is required, such as defining vectors.
Press Ctrl+D in the field where you need to input the distance, and FEMAP will execute this command.
Instead of reporting the value, FEMAP enters the result in the current field.
Hint: This command is also available wherever an input of a angle is required, such as rotation commands.
Press Ctrl+A in the field where you need to input the angle, and FEMAP will execute this command.
Instead of reporting the value, FEMAP enters the result in the current field.
ID is the ID of the curve being measured.
Line, Arc,
Circle...
show the type of curve being measured.
Length The total length along the curve between its endpoints. For lines,
this is the distance between the endpoints. For arcs and circles, it
is the arc length. For splines, it is the length along the spline.
Total
Length
is the sum of all the individual curve lengths.
origin
first endpoint
second endpoint
angle
7-96 Modeling Tools
Tools, Mass Properties, Solid Properties...
... calculates and outputs the volume, surface area, center of gravity, and moment of inertia for the solid selected.
You can only select one solid at a time with this command.
Tools, Mass Properties, Mesh...
... determines the mass, center of gravity, and inertia of selected elements from your model.
When you select this command, you must select the elements to be checked using the standard entity selection dia-
log box. After you press OK, you will be able to set further options which control the command. You can choose a
coordinate system that will be used for the calculations. You can also choose whether to have the mass properties
for individual elements reported. Overall mass properties are always reported, both in global rectangular coordi-
nates, and the coordinate system you choose.
The following table shows the formulas used to calculate the mass and CG for each element type:
Element Type Structural Mass NonStructural Mass
Rod Length*Area*Density Length*NSM
Bar Length*Area*Density Length*NSM
Tube Length*Area*Density
where
Area=PI*(D
o
2
-D
i
2
)/4
Length*NSM
Link None None
Beam Length*Area*Density Length*NSM
Curved Beam ArcLen*Area*Density
where ArcLen is measured
from the offset CG, on the
line between the nodes
ArcLen*NSM
Spring, DOF
Spring, Gap,
Plot Only
None None
Shear Panel,
Membrane,
Bending Only,
Plane Strain
Area*Thickness*Density Area*NSM
Plate Area*AverageThickness*
Density
Area*NSM
Laminate Area*(sum of Layer Thick-
ness*Layer Density))
Area*NSM
Axisymmetric Area*PI*R
avg
2
*Density None
Solid Volume*Density None
Mass Mass None
Mass Matrix Mass(Matrix[1,1] only) None
Rigid None None
Stiffness
Matrix
None None
Slide Line None None
Tools, Section Properties Menu... 7-97
The mass properties report follows this sample format:
The type of data listed in the Length/Area/Volume column depends on the element type:
For line elements, the list contains the element length, followed by the letter L.
For plane elements, the list contains the area for one side of the element surface, followed by the letter A. To
correct for warping in quadrilateral elements, the software divides the element into two triangles along one
diagonal, and computes the area. Then, it divides the element along the other diagonal, and computes the area
again. The area listed is the average of these two possible areas.
For volume elements, the list contains the element volume, followed by the letter V.
The inertia calculations are done based only on a lumped/point mass formulation. Other than mass and mass matrix
elements, no elemental inertia is added. The inertia is calculated due to the offset of masses from the center of grav-
ity and the center of the selected coordinate system. This approximation is not very accurate for models with very
few elements, or with a few large, high-mass elements. For most finite element models however, with large num-
bers of small elements, it is relatively accurate.
The mass and inertia report is written to the active List Destination.
7.4.4.4 Tools, Section Properties Menu...
... provides access to commands which will calculate the section-properties for either a surface or a mesh.
Tools, Section Properties, Surface Properties...
... measure the cross-section properties of a selected surface. Inputs required for this command are the surface ID
and the Y-Axis vector. The first point selected in the Y-Axis (or orientation vector) will also define the origin.
FEMAP will then internally mesh the surface and use the Y-Axis vector and the Beam Cross-Section Generator to
calculate the section properties. The result is output to the List Destination. A typical result is shown here:
7-98 Modeling Tools
The result includes reference to the chosen orientation as well as the section properties. FEMAP calculates the stan-
dard section properties such as area, moments of inertia, torsional constant, and shear area. In addition, principal
moments of inertia, radius of gyration, angle to principal axes, and warping constant are output.
This command uses the same Beam Cross-Section Generator available under Model, Property (type Beam) Shape.
Tools, Section Properties, Mesh Properties...
... is identical to Tools, Section Properties, Surface Properties, except you choose elements instead of a surface.
FEMAP then calculates the cross-section properties of the mesh directly from the elements instead of creating an
internal mesh as in the case of Tools, Section Properties, Surface Properties. You must still define the Y-Axis vec-
tor.
7.4.5 Checking Tools
The Tools, Check menu contains a series of commands which are very useful for checking your finite element
model. These tools provide quick and valuable commands to verify portions of your model. These commands, like
the measuring commands, will send information to the List Destination. This destination is typically the Messages
window, but you can use the List Destination command to change it to a printer and/or file.
7.4.5.1 Tools, Check, Coincident Points...
... finds points in your model which are close to or at the same location. Using this command, you can also merge
these points. This command is identical to the Tools, Check, Coincident Nodes command except that it works with
points. For more information, see Section 7.4.5.3, "Tools, Check, Coincident Nodes...".
7.4.5.2 Tools, Check, Coincident Curves...
... finds curves in your model which are close to or at the same location. Using this command, you can also merge
these curves. A curve is considered to be coincident only if all of the points that define a curve are coincident to the
points that define another curve of the same type. A curve will still be considered coincident if its points are coinci-
dent but reversed. For example, a line that goes from point A to point B is coincident with a line that goes from
point B to point A.
Use of this command is similar to the Tools, Check, Coincident Nodes command. Unlike that command, however,
you can only select one set of curves. Those curves are then checked for coincidence against each other. The same
merge options dialog is used for this command. Points must be coincident within the Maximum distance to Merge
Tools, Check, Coincident Nodes... 7-99
for curves to be coincident. You must choose Merge Coincident Entities to actually remove any coincident curves
from your model - otherwise the coincident curves are listed, but not removed.
7.4.5.3 Tools, Check, Coincident Nodes...
... finds nodes in your model which are at the same location. Using this command, you can also merge these nodes.
This command compares one or two sets or lists of nodes to determine their coincidence. When you invoke the
command, you will see the standard entity selection dialog box. This lets you select the nodes to be checked.
After you have selected all of the nodes to be checked and/or merged, you will see the Check/Merge Coincident
dialog box.
Here you can specify a Maximum Distance to Merge. Nodes whose difference in locations are less than this dis-
tance are considered to be coincident. You should always set this to a small number relative to your model size. If
you really want to eliminate the coincident nodes which are found, you must enable Merge Coincident Nodes. If
you do not, the coincident nodes are listed (if requested, by checking List Coincident Entities) but not merged.
By default, FEMAP will not merge nodes which are associated with surfaces which have a Connection between
them. This is to make sure you dont mistakenly merge nodes across Connections which could alter the definition
of Connection Regions, thereby create problems with some solvers. The Merge Across Connections option will
allow FEMAP to merge nodes on surfaces which have Connections between them. FEMAP will let you know
when nodes cannot be merged because of a Connection by listing Not Merged, Connection # in the Messages
pane
When Preview Coincident is checked, FEMAP will bring up a dialog box which gives you three options for high-
lighting any nodes that have been found to be coincident. The three options are Show Kept, Show Merged, and
Note: FEMAP determines the default node merge tolerance based on overall model size. The number is
1/10000 of the model box diagonal (think of the model box being an invisible box that com-
pletely encapsulates every entity in the model).
You can override the default node merge tolerance by specifying a value in Tools, Parameters.
Simply change the Merge Tolerance option to Specified and enter a value. This value will be
saved with your model.
7-100 Modeling Tools
Show Both. If you have Merge Coincident Entities checked, clicking Done will merge the entities. If not, clicking
Done will simply end the command after fulfilling the other selected options, such as listing the entities.
There are four options for how the nodes will be merged:
Automatic - merges nodes based on how the algorithm locates the coincident nodes and gives the user NO con-
trol of which nodes will be merged and kept.
Select Nodes to be Merged - allows you to specify a second list of nodes to check/merge against the list you
originally specified. Normally you will not use this option, and each of the nodes you chose will simply be
merged against all of the other nodes in that you selected. If you do turn this option on however, after you press
OK in this dialog box, you will be asked for a second set of nodes. In this case, the nodes from your first set,
will not be checked against themselves - they will be checked against the second set. This option gives you a bit
more control over the merging process if you want specific nodes merged against other nodes
Keep Lower ID - for each set of coincident nodes, FEMAP will keep the node with the lowest ID numerically
and merge any nodes coincident to the lowest ID node.
Keep Higher ID - for each set of coincident nodes, FEMAP will keep the node with the highest ID numerically
and merge any nodes coincident to the highest ID node.
In addition to listing, you can also place the coincident nodes into groups by checking the Make Group to Keep and
Make Group to Merge options. Creating groups, without merging, is another good way to review the entities that
will be merged. You can display the groups, or use them in other FEMAP commands, to insure you will merge the
correct entities.
If you specify a distance which is too large, nodes that should not be coincident could be merged. If it is large
enough, nodes which are used to define different corners of the same element could be found as coincident and
merged. Since this would create an invalid element, FEMAP will never merge nodes that are used to define the
same element. This precaution will prevent nodes from being merged no matter how close together they are. These
nodes will still be reported as coincident, and added to the groups. Care should still be taken when specifying large
merge tolerances. Even though FEMAP will prevent corruption by merging two nodes on the same element, with
very large tolerances, you can still corrupt your model by merging nodes that are completely across an intermediate
element.
Similarly, FEMAP will not allow you to merge nodes with different output coordinate systems since their nodal
degrees of freedom may not be aligned. These too will still be identified, and added to the groups.
When nodes are merged, all references to the node being eliminated are updated to the other node. In addition,
nodal and permanent constraints on the two nodes are merged or combined. A report, which identifies the nodes
that have been, or would be, merged is written to the active List Destination.
7.4.5.4 Tools, Check, Planar...
... determines whether nodes are located on a selected plane. Optionally, you can also move nodes onto the plane.
Note: Like many other preview and highlighting options in FEMAP, the highlighting in this command is con-
trolled by the settings of the Window, Show Entities command. You can change these by going to the
Window, Show Entities command or changing option(s) using the Show When Selected icon in the
Model Info tree or Data Table.
Tools, Check, Coincident Elem... 7-101
When you invoke this command, you must choose the nodes that you want to check for planarity. The standard
entity selection dialog box is used for this purpose. After you make your selections, you will see the Check Planar-
ity of Nodes dialog box.
You can specify a Max Allowable Distance from the Plane. If the perpendicular distance from a node to the plane is
larger than this distance, the node is considered to be out of the plane. Otherwise, it is in the plane.
By default, nodes which are out of plane are simply
listed to the active List Destination. If you select Move
Nodes Closer..., they will be projected, in a direction
which is normal to the plane, onto the plane. Also by
default, the plane will be determined from the three
nodes with the minimum IDs that are also not colinear.
If you want to control this plane more precisely,
choose Specify Plane Manually. If this option is set,
after you press OK, the standard plane definition dia-
log box will be displayed so you can define the plane
to be used. If you do choose to specify your own plane,
the default plane will be the one that was automatically
determined.
When out of plane nodes are found, they are listed, along with the perpendicular distance to the plane.
Other Uses for Check Planar
While this command was intended to be used to check for the planarity of nodes, it has several other interesting
applications.
Distance from a Plane to a Node:
If you need to find the perpendicular distance from a plane to one or more nodes in your model use this command.
Select the nodes that you want, then specify a very small (or zero) Max Allowable Distance... and choose Specify
Plane Manually. Do not select Move Nodes Closer.... Define the desired plane. The perpendicular distances will be
listed.
Projecting onto a Plane:
If you need to project some portion of your model onto a plane, you can also use this command. Select the nodes to
be projected, specify a large Max Allowable Distance... so all nodes chosen will be within this distance from the
plane, and choose Specify Plane Manually. In this case, also select Move Nodes Closer... and define the plane that
you want. The selected nodes will be projected onto the plane.
7.4.5.5 Tools, Check, Coincident Elem...
... identifies elements which are defined by the same nodes and are therefore coincident. After you choose the ele-
ments to check, using the standard entity selection dialog box, you will see the Check Coincident Element dialog
box
Here you are given three options which control the checking procedure. If Check Elements with Different Types is
selected, elements are considered coincident even though they may have different element types. For example, a
beam would be considered coincident with a bar if it had the same endpoints. If this option is not selected, only ele-
ments of the same type are considered to be coincident. The beam would never coincide with the bar.
Hint: When you are going to move nodes onto the plane, you will almost always want to specify the plane
manually. FEMAP looks at all of the nodes that you select to determine the best fit plane. If you have
nodes that are out of plane, they will, in fact, cause the plane to be rotated, and you will project onto a
skewed plane. When you specify the plane manually, FEMAP still chooses a plane, and uses it as the
default for the plane definition dialogs. You will then have a chance to review and change the definition.
If Check Elements with Different Shapes is selected, a triangular ele-
ment will be considered to be coincident with a quadrilateral element
as long as all three nodes are also referenced by the quadrilateral. This
same comparison technique applies to all other shapes as well.
In addition to just checking and listing coincident elements, the coinci-
dent pairs can also be placed into groups. You can then review these
groups to update or delete the coincident elements. If more than two
elements are coincident with each other, some care must be taken,
because there will still only be two groups.
Normally, mass elements are ignored by this command. If you choose
Check Mass Elements, they will be included. If Check Elements with
Different Shapes is also selected, every mass element that references a
node which is also used by other elements will be identified. You can
identify mass elements which are coincident with each other by turn-
ing off either the ...Different Types or ...Different Shapes options.
Coincident elements are identified in a report that is written to the active List Destination.
7.4.5.6 Tools, Check, Distortion...
... checks the shape of selected elements. In fact, seven separate
checks are included: Aspect Ratio, Taper, Alternate Taper, Internal
Angles, Warping, Tet Collapse, and Jacobian.
You must first select the elements to be checked, using the standard
entity selection dialog box. Then using the Check Element Distor-
tions dialog box, you can control how the checking will proceed.
Each of the seven checking options can be independently enabled
or disabled. You must also specify limit values for each of the
enabled options. Any element which exceeds one of these limits for
an enabled checking option will be listed to the active List Destina-
tion(s), which can be set using the List, Destination command.
Only plane and volume elements are checked by this command.
Line and Other element types are simply ignored.
If you select the Make Group with Distorted Elements option, a
new group will be created that contains all of the elements that fail
the check. This group can then be displayed or used for modifica-
tions to your model.
When Check/Fixup Invalid elements is checked, selected elements
will be checked for validity. Checks include, number of nodes, zero
element length, element and property type agreement, twisted elements, and orientation.
Aspect Ratio Checking...
... is based on the ratio of the length of the longest element side, to the length of the shortest side. This check looks
at all element edges to find the maximum and minimum lengths. For solid elements, edges along all faces are con-
sidered. Only element corners are used. Midside nodes of parabolic elements are simply ignored.
This check will help you to identify elements which have both very long and very short sides, no matter where they
are located in the element.
Aspect Ratio = 1 Aspect Ratio = 3
X
X
X
3X
Tools, Check, Distortion... 7-103
Taper Checking...
... is similar to aspect ratio checking. It formulates a ratio of the length of a longest edge to a shortest edge. Whereas
aspect ratio checking looks at all edge combinations, Taper checking only considers ratios of edges which are
opposite to each other on a face. For solid elements, all faces are considered. Midside nodes are ignored.
Taper checking is only done on quadrilateral faces. It will identify elements which have trapezoidal faces.
Alternate Taper Checking...
... calculates the ratios of the sizes of triangles formed by quadrilateral element diagonals. It is the same as the taper
check used in Nastran.
Alternate taper checking is only done on quadrilateral faces. It will identify elements which have trapezoidal faces.
Internal Angles Checking...
... evaluates whether the included angles at the corners of an element face deviate from an optimal condition. For
quadrilateral faces, the deviation is based on a 90 degree angle. For triangular faces, the deviation is based on a 60
degree angle.
This check will identify elements which are skewed from a square or equilateral triangle. Although similar, Taper
Checking will identify trapezoidal faces, but will ignore a face which is a rhombus. The Internal Angles check will
find both variations.
Warping Checking...
... evaluates the planarity of element faces. All of the other checks evaluate parameters within the plane of the ele-
ment faces, but this check evaluates out of plane parameters. This check only looks at quadrilateral faces. Inter-
nally, this check divides the quadrilateral face into triangles. If the face is planar, then all triangles should be
coplanar. That is, their normals will all point in the same direction. If the face is warped however, the normals will
not be in the same direction. This check evaluates the maximum angle between the normals, and identifies any ele-
ments where the angle exceeds the limit you specify.
Taper = 1 Taper = 2
X
X
X 2X
A2
A4
A1
A3
J i = Ai / 2
J a = (J1 + J2 + J3 + J4) / 4
Taper = max(Ji-Ja)/Ja
Angle deviation from
Angle deviation from
60 degrees
90 degrees
No Warping 50% Warping
Warping calculated from
this angle
Tet Collapse...
...evaluates the tetrahedral elements in your model. A collapsed (flat) tetrahedral element will either prevent the
solver code from running, or will give inaccurate results. This check computes the distance from the plane of each
face of the tetrahedral element to the fourth node for that face. FEMAP then takes the ratio of the longest to shortest
value as the value to check for the collapse of the tetrahedral element. The default value is 10.
Jacobian...
...compares the shape of an element to an ideally shaped element of the same topology. A Jacobian comparison
exists in FEMAP for Shell elements (3-noded Triangles, 4 or 8-noded Quadrilaterals) and some Solid elements (4
or 10-noded Tetrahedrals and 8 or 20-noded Hexahedral Solids). If an parabolic, quad shell element has missing
mid-side nodes (i.e., 6 total nodes instead of the normal 8 nodes), that element will be checked as a 4-noded quad
shell. As for Solid elements, the shape used for the comparison is specified by the corner nodes only, mid-side
nodes are always ignored for both Tets and Hexes.
Valid elements produce Jacobian Distortion values between 0.0 and 1.0, where 0.0 represents the ideally shaped
element. Severely distorted elements whose Jacobian determinants are locally discontinuous or undefined are
assigned a distortion value of 2. If any of you elements have a Jacobian Value of 2, the element is not valid (i.e.,
the element is inside out, twisted, etc.) and should be fixed before analysis.
For Triangular Shell Elements:
Jacobian Distortion Check performs a modified scale-invariant check based solely on geometric parameters. This is
necessary because the true Jacobian is constant at corner points of a triangular element. The modified Jacobian
measure returns ranges from 0.0 for ideally shaped equilateral triangles and approaches 1.0 as a triangle is 'flat-
tened' and interior angle approaches 180. Midside nodes are ignored for this distortion check.
Value returned = 1 - calculated Jacobian Condition Number/Ideal Tria Condition Number. Ideal Tria Condition
Number 0.4330091
For Quadrilateral Shell Elements:
Shortest Height
Longest Edge

1.38
0.69
1.20
1.38
1
2
3
1: 0.0, 0.0
2: 1.38, 0.0
3: 0.69, 1.20
R
e
f
.
JDist =0.00

2.50
1.88
0.20
1.89
0.66
1
2
3
1: 0.0, 0.0
2: 2.50, 0.0
3: 1.88, 0.20
JDist = 0.727
Tools, Check, Distortion... 7-105
Jacobian Distortion Check for Quad elements is a true Jacobian check that returns 1 - minimum/maximum Jaco-
bian determinants as calculated for each node. The ratio guarantees a return value ranging from 0.0 for ideally
shaped quads to 1.0 as a element is distorted. Midside nodes are used only if all are present in the element defini-
tion. Otherwise the basic, minimum element definition is used.
If the Jacobian determinant changes sign or equals 0.00, element's shape function is discontinuous and will not con-
verge to a solution. In this case, the element is considered FAILED and the Jacobian Distortion will be reported as
2.
For Tetrahedral Solid Elements:
Jacobian Distortion Check for Tetrahedral elements is based on the Jacobian condition number (ref: "What is a
Good Linear Element? Interpolation, Conditioning and Quality Measures" Shewchuk, Jonathan Richard).
Value returned = 1 - Condition Number/Ideal Tetrahedron Condition Number. Ideal Condition number
0.41360216.
Return values vary from 0.0 to 1.0 for valid elements and 2 for failed Jacobian. Midside nodes are not considered.
1
.
2
4
0
1.130
JDi st = 0. 0
R
e
f
.

1. 135
1
.
0
5
1
0. 998
1
.
0
5
4
JDi st = 0. 076

0
. 7
2
5
1
.
0
6
1
0
.
4
5
2
0
.
93
6
JDi st = 0. 458

1. 00
1
.
1
3
4
0
.
8
1
0
.
7
2
JDi st = 0. 881

1. 135
1
.
0
5
1
0. 982
1
.
0
5
5
JDi st = 2. 0
0
.
8
8
7
0. 569
0
.
5
7
9
0. 475

1
.
1
8
4
1
.
0
0
JDi st = 2. 0
0
.
7
9
6
0
.
6
9
8

For Hexahedral Solid Elements:
Jacobian Distortion Check for Hex elements is a true Jacobian check that returns 1 - minimum/maximum Jacobian
determinants as calculated at each corner node. Return values vary from 0.0 to 1.0 and 2 (sign changes or any deter-
minant = 0). Midside nodes are not considered.
J Di s t = 0. 0
X
Y
Z
R
e
f
.

Unit Tetrahedron

1
3
4
2
J Di s t = 0. 539
X
Y
Z

Distorted Tetrahedron
-0.5
-0.5
0.0
-0.1835
X
0.288667
0.866
0.0
0.408248
Y
0.81649
0.0
0.0
0.408248
Z
4
3
2
1
ID

Uni t Cube
JDi st = 0. 00
R
e
f
.

2x1x1
Br i ck
JDi st = 0. 00

Uni t Cube w/ 1
cor ner di st or t ed
JDi st = 0. 90

Uni t Cube w/ 1
cor ner coi nci dent
JDi st = 2. 0

Tools, Check, Normals... 7-107
7.4.5.7 Tools, Check, Normals...
... examines a selected set of plane elements to see if their normals all point in the same direction. The command
ignores other element types.
You first select the elements to be checked, then you specify the checking options. By default, FEMAP determines
the desired element normal from the selected element with the minimum ID. To specify a particular normal, choose
the Specify Normal Vector option. Then after you press OK, the standard vector definition dialog box will be dis-
played so you can define the direction of the normal you want.
All selected elements which have normals that point opposite the specified vector will be listed to the active List
Destination. If you choose the Update/Reverse Element Normals option, those elements will be reversed. Element
normals are reversed in the same manner as the Modify, Update Elements, Reverse command.
Since you are specifying a single direction, elements from a complex model which lie in multiple planes and in dif-
ferent orientations cannot always be checked at the same time. The checking is based on the sign of the dot (or sca-
lar) product of the desired direction with the current element normal. This approach can handle elements which are
not perpendicular to the direction you specify, but you should still select elements which are somewhat coplanar.
It can be particularly difficult to align the normals of cylindrical or spherical geometries. In this case the normals
do, and should, point in different directions. You can still use this command for those geometries by selecting a
coordinate system for the comparison. To check a cylindrical geometry, you should first define a cylindrical coordi-
nate system with its Z axis pointing along the cylindrical axis. Then if you select that coordinate system, and define
a radial vector, the element normals will all be checked against the radial direction. You can then set to point either
inward or outward based on the direction of the vector you specify. The same technique applies to spherical coordi-
nate systems.
7.4.5.8 Tools, Check, Constraints...
... produces a report (to the active List Destination) which can be used to evaluate whether a model is fully con-
strained. The report will resemble the following:
When you pick this command, you will be asked whether to include nodal permanent constraints in the calcula-
tions. If you press Yes, all permanent constraints will be combined with the nodal constraints from the active con-
straint set. If you press No, only the nodal constraints from the active constraint set will be used.
To calculate the constraint factors, FEMAP adds 1.0 to the appropriate factor for each node that has a particular
degree of freedom constrained. If the output coordinate system of the node rotates the nodal degrees of freedom,
the direction cosines of the constrained degrees of freedom are added, instead of 1.0.
Only nodes which are used to define elements are included in this calculation. This approach ignores constraints
which are properly assigned to reference or orientation nodes, but which do not really constrain your model.
Since this command uses the active constraint set, you will have to invoke it multiple times if you have multiple
constraint sets.
How to Use this Report
If you review the translation factors, and find that one or more of them are zero or significantly less than one, your
model is probably not constrained in that direction. Similarly, the rotation factors report the rotational constraints.
In this case however, a zero factor does not necessarily mean that the model is unconstrained in a rotational direc-
tion. In fact, multiple translational constraints which are separated by some distance can usually better constrain a
model than rotational constraints.
To determine if your model meets the necessary criteria, you must examine the Max Separation data. If X con-
straints are separated in the Y direction, you will constrain Z rotations. Similarly, if X constraints are separated in
the Z direction, you will constrain Y rotations. Larger separation distances will be better able to resist motion, and
more fully constrain the appropriate degree of freedom.
This report only includes nodal and permanent constraints. It does not include the effect of enforced displacements
or any other entities which might provide additional constraints.
7.4.5.9 Tools, Check, Coincident Loads...
...reviews loads in your model to determine if there are any coincident loads. The only initial input required for this
command is the load set(s) you want to check. FEMAP will review the load sets and determine if there are any
coincident loads. If you have coincident loads, FEMAP will report the load type and node/element to the List Des-
tination. You will then be asked if you want to combine the loads. FEMAP will ask this question for each load type,
so you may actually combine nodal forces while not combining elemental pressures.
7.4.5.10 Tools, Check, Sum Forces...
... checks the total forces about a selected location. All nodal forces,
nodal moments, and elemental pressures from the active load set are
all used in this calculation. When you pick this command, you are
asked to choose a location. The Sum Forces dialog box will then
appear. You can select the coordinate system for the calculation,
whether to automatically expand any geometric loads, and whether
the whole load set or only a partial model will be used for the sum-
mation.
If Expand and Include Geometric Loads is turned off, no geometric
loads will be included. The Partial Model option allows selection of
specific elements and nodes to include in the summation. With this
option Off, the entire load set is used.
When computing total effective moment, the location you specify will be used to find the force couples caused by
the applied forces and pressures. When you press OK, a report in the following format will be produced. It will be
written to the active List Destination.
In the first section of this report, all loads are simply added in global rectangular coordinates. The pressure force is
determined by multiplying the elemental pressures you defined by the element face area. This force is then applied
in the direction opposite the face normal, at the centroid of the face.
The Totals section of the report shows the location you selected. The total forces will include both the nodal force
and the pressure force. The total Moments will include nodal moments, and the force couples produced by the
nodal forces and pressure forces around the location you selected.
Hint: This command is very useful when combining geometric and finite element loads in the same model.
You can use the Model, Load, Expand command to permanently expand geometric loads to nodal/ele-
mental loads, and then use this command to combine these loads with nodal/elemental loads already
created in your model.
Tools, Stress Wizard 7-109
7.4.6 Tools, Stress Wizard
The Stress Wizard (SW) provides you with quick insight
into the mechanical behavior of engineering parts.
Through a simple four-step process, the SW makes it
possible to connect to a single solid, specify how the
solid is held, how it is loaded, and recover the resulting
deformed shape and stress distribution. In reality, the SW
provides access to several different areas of FEMAP
functionality from within a single dockable pane. The
Stress Wizard does not add any functionality over what is
offered within other FEMAP commands; it simply con-
solidates the commands required for the pre- and post-
processing and analysis of single solid parts.
Overview
The SW is designed to analyze a single solid component,
which is more than likely connected to a large assembly.
You must understand and be able to specify exactly how
the part is constrained and loaded, or specify a close
enough approximation in order to recover useful results.
The SW relies on the finite element method to determine
the deformed shape of your part based on the constraint
condition and loading condition specified. The finite ele-
ment method has certain limitations and capabilities that
need to be understood in order to effectively use the
results obtained with the SW.
Process
With traditional FEA tools, the FEA process is:
1. Create or import CAD Geometry
2. Specify material properties
3. Set mesh sizes (controls sizing of mesh)
4. Mesh Geometry
5. Apply Boundary Conditions - Constraints
6. Apply Boundary Conditions - Loads
7. Set up analysis model
8. Run
9. Recover results
10. Post-process results
The SW has streamlined this process into four steps:
Step 1.
Step 1 in the SW incorporates steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 7 outlined above. Geometry is
imported via Parasolid, either manually from the SW GUI or from a connection to
Solid Edge. Once loaded, the SW will ask you to select a material from the mate-
rial library, default mesh sizing will be applied to the model and it will be meshed.
In addition, the analysis run setup that would traditionally be the job setup portion of an FEA input file happens
automatically during the SW's Step 1.
Step 2 and 3.
Step 2 and Step 3 exactly match steps 5 and 6 of the traditional process. Steps 2 and 3 in the SW are streamlined in
that only those loads and constraints appropriate to the analysis of single solids are made available.
Note: The SW can not automatically mesh every part. In some cases, the geometry that you are trying to
import may have irregularities that the automatic processes can not handle. If, after importing geometry,
you do not see some number of nodes and elements listed at the bottom of the FEMAP window, the part
could not be automatically meshed. In this case you must exit the SW, and use the other FEMAP capa-
bilities to cleanup and mesh the geometry (after the part has been meshed, you can return to SW to com-
plete your analysis.
Tools, Stress Wizard 7-111
Step 4.
Step 4 includes all the run and post-processing options associated with the traditional FEA process. A single button
launches the solver, runs the analysis and recovers the results. The remaining options in Step 4 allow for the review
of the deformed shape of your part, the stress distribution, and the ability to animate the results of the analysis.
Units
Just like the rest of FEMAP, the most important message about units in the Stress Wizard or in any FEA product is
consistency. The force and length units implied by the value input for the part's modulus of elasticity must match
those of the part and of the forces applied to the part. There are a couple of simple bookkeeping details that must be
considered before you begin using the stress wizard. These details are extremely important if you want to obtain
useful results from the stress wizard.
The "Scale Factor"
The SW uses the Parasolid geometry engine to interact with your CAD solid model. In order for Parasolid to guar-
antee the precision of solids all entities must be within a "size box" that is 1000 x 1000 x 1000 centered at the ori-
gin. In order for parts to be modeled that would fall outside this box, most CAD systems utilize a scale factor. The
model that you see on-screen is often stored internally at a different size and all reference to that model scaled up or
down accordingly to make the part appear larger or smaller. As recommended by Parasolid, most parts are stored
internally in meters. Users expecting to work in a US customary unit system of inches and pounds will find that the
Parasolid solid itself is 39.37 times smaller inside Parasolid.
Before using the Stress Wizard for the first time, it is strongly recommended that you import a CAD part where you
are certain of its dimensions and verify the size of it. You may then have to go the File - Preferences command to
adjust the scale factor to import and size the part properly.
To change the internal scale factor used by the Stress Wizard, go to File, Preferences, Geometry. For more on the
internal scale factor see Section 2.6.2.6, "Geometry/Model"
Material Library and Units
The Stress Wizard and FEA in general is unitless. In combination with the scale factor above, the material values
that you pick or enter decide overall what units you are using for your analysis. In the case of a simple orthotropic
material, once you enter a value for Young's Modulus, you have effectively defined the force and length unit sys-
tem for your model. Within the scope of the linear static analysis capabilities, the unit system used for Young's
modulus has defined all aspects of units definition since time is not an issue.
Installed with FEMAP are a number of material libraries that can be accessed by the SW. When prompted to define
a material simply press the Load button and either choose a list of available materials or load another library. Some
of the material libraries you will find include aluminum.esp, copper.esp, nickel.esp, steel.esp, mil5.esp, and
mdla.esp. For more on creating materials refer to the Model, Material command.
7.5 List Menu Commands
The commands on the List menu are used to produce reports of the entities and data in your model. Coupled with
the many graphical options, these reports provide the information you need to fully understand and check your
model, as well as reporting and interpreting results.
The List menu is separated into three major areas. The top area contains menus similar to the main menu com-
mands for FEMAP entities (tools, geometry, model, output). Each of these commands are in fact a menu of com-
mands for the different entities in each category. The second area contains listing commands for particular display
(group and view) or overall model information (Model Info). The last section simply contains the List, Destination
command. The List, Destination command controls where reports and other listings will be written.
Aborting a Listing
Sometimes when listing information from your model you will decide that you have either requested too much out-
put, or that the needed information has already been listed. Rather than waiting for the listing to complete (which
could take awhile, and could scroll the desired information out of the buffer), you can abort the listing.
When FEMAP is listing information, the graphics cursor will change to an hourglass behind a pointer. This shape
indicates that FEMAP is busy with your current command, but the current command will be aborted automatically
if you make a new selection. Actually, FEMAP just watches the keyboard and mouse. The command is aborted
whenever you press any key, or mouse button. These are the actions that you have to do to choose the next com-
mand anyway.
When FEMAP has completed the current command, the hourglass will disappear and the cursor will return to its
normal pointer or crosshair shape. If you are just listing information to a file, and you have screen messages turned
off, the changing cursor shape will let you know that the listing has completed.
Since FEMAP automatically aborts whenever you press a key or the left mouse button, you can never press either
of them before a listing is complete - unless you want to abort.
7.5.1 List, Tools Menu
This menu contains the commands for listing information on the entity tools, which are discussed in Section 7.4.3,
"Entity Tools". Each command is discussed further below.
7.5.1.1 List, Tools, Variable...
... produces a report which describes all variables defined in your model. There are no options to specify and no
way to limit the report. All variables are simply listed in the following format:
For each variable, there are two items reported - the value of the variable when it was stored, and the defining equa-
tion. When used in equations, the value can be accessed by using !variable_name, and the equation can be
accessed by using @variable_name.
List, Tools, Layers... 7-113
7.5.1.2 List, Tools, Layers...
... produces a report which describes all layers defined in your model. There are no options to specify and no way to
limit the report. All layers are simply listed in the following format:
For each layer, there are two items reported - the title and layer color.
7.5.1.3 List, Text...
... produces a report of selected text in your model.
Text reports cannot be sorted. You simply select the text entities that you want to list (using the standard entity
selection dialog box), and a listing resembling the following sample will be produced.
This listing format simply reports the options which you defined in the Tools, Text command. Note the differences
between screen positioned text (ID 1) and model positioned text (ID 2). Screen positioned text lists X and Y posi-
tions in percentages of the view from the upper left corner. Model positioned text lists X, Y and Z coordinates. The
text itself will be listed on as many lines as you defined in the text entity.
7.5.2 List, Geometry Menu
This menu contains command to list the different types of geometric entities. One command is provided for each
geometric entity type contained in FEMAP. Each of these commands are very similar. They use a common dialog
box which has some variations depending upon the type of entity being listed.
7.5.2.1 Common Listing Options
A common dialog box is used for the geometric listing com-
mands. Some of the options may not be available for all enti-
ties, but the procedure is identical for all geometric entities.
The dialog box contains a Sort By section, which determines
the method of sorting, and a Sort Order section, where you
simply choose if you want the list Ascending or Descending.
You can also choose a Listing Coordinate System for points.
Sort By:
These options control the order of the listing. By default, and
the fastest method, is to list the entities in order of Ascending
IDs (lowest ID to highest ID). Choosing Selection Order will
order the listing in the order that you selected the entities.
This option allows you to list the entities in any order, simply
by selecting them in that order. Other common sorting methods include Color, Layer, position (X, Y, or Z), and
Absolute Value of position.
7.5.2.2 List, Point...
... produces a report of selected points in your model.
After selecting the points you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you select the Sort by
method, Sort Order (Ascending or Descending), and the Listing Coordinate System. Sorting methods available
include the common methods (see Section 7.5.2.1, "Common Listing Options") and by definition coordinate sys-
tem. The point listing looks like the following:
In the listing,
The width of the sample listing shown above has been reduced to fit within the manual margins. You will notice
that on many video adapters, you will have to scroll right in the Messages window to see the end of this listing.
7.5.2.3 List, Curve...
... produces a report of selected curves in your model.
After selecting the curves you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you select the Sort by
method and Sort Order (Ascending or Descending). Sorting methods available include the common methods (see
Section 7.5.2.1, "Common Listing Options"), by type, or by minimum point ID (points reference by the curve).
The X, Y, and Z sort listing options use the location of the first point referenced by the curve. For circles and arcs,
this is the location of the center of curvature. For other types of curves, it is the first endpoint.
Advanced
You will also see an Advanced option for curves. The Advanced option is only applicable for B-splines, and will
include the type of B-spline (Rational or NURB), the order, the number of points, and the knot values in the output
listing.
ID is the ID of the point.
Def CS is the ID of the Definition Coordinate System.
X1, X2, X3 are the coordinates of the point, relative to either the
definition coordinate system, or the listing coordinate
system.
Color is the point color.
MeshSize is the mesh size which is assigned to this point for
boundary surface meshing. This will be blank if no size
was assigned.
Layer is the point layer.
#Curve indicates how many Curves reference this point.
List, Surface... 7-115
The curve listing looks like the following:
In the listing,
7.5.3 List, Surface...
... produces a report of selected surfaces in your model.
After selecting the surfaces you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you select the Sort by
Section 7.5.2.1, "Common Listing Options"), by Type, or by Minimum Curve ID (curves referenced by the surface).
ID is the ID of the curve.
Type is the type of the curve.
Color is the curve color.
Layer is the curve layer.
Bias is the mesh biasing factor size which is assigned to this
curve for boundary meshing. This will be 0.0 if no size
has been assigned.
MeshElem is the mesh size which is assigned to this curve for
boundary meshing. This will be zero if no size has been
assigned.
Points are the IDs of the points which are referenced by this
curve. For lines, these are the endpoints. For arcs and
circles they are the center, start, middle and endpoints.
For splines, they are the control points.
#Surface the number of surfaces which reference the curve.
Length the length of the curve. This is the arc length/perimeter
for arcs and circles.
Radius the curve radius - only listed for arcs and circles.
Angle the included angle - only listed for arcs and circles.
If you choose Minimum Curve ID, the listing will be sorted on the IDs of the curves that define the surfaces. X, Y,
and Z allow you to sort the listing based on the location of the parametric center of the surface.
The surface listing looks like the following:
In the listing,
In addition, if the surface forms the face of a solid, the number of segments, the geometric engine (Parasolid or
ACIS), and the address of the face in the geometric engine database will be listed.
7.5.3.1 List, Volume...
... produces a report of selected volumes in your model.
After selecting the curves you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you select the Sort by
Section 7.5.2.1, "Common Listing Options"), by Type, or by Minimum Surface ID (surfaces reference by the vol-
ume). If you choose Minimum Surface ID, the listing will be sorted on the IDs of the surfaces that define the vol-
umes. X, Y, and Z allow you to sort the listing based on the location of the parametric center of the volume.
The volume listing looks like the following:
ID is the ID of the surface.
Type is the type of the surface.
Color is the surface color.
Divisions are the number of surface divisions assigned for display
purposes.
Curves are the IDs of the curves that define the surface. If an
R follows the number, the parametric direction of the
curve is reversed compared to the curves alignment in
the surface definition.
Layer is the surface layer.
#Volume the number of volumes which reference the surface.
ID Type Color <-- Surfaces ( R = Reversed Direction ) --> Layer
________________________________________________________________________
1 Wedge 24580 8 --- 9 --- 7 --- 1
10 R-R 10 R-R ---
2 Brick 24580 13 --- 14 --- 11 --- 1
15 --R 12 --- 15 --R
3 Tetra 24580 16 --- 17 --- 18 --- 1
19 R-- --- ---
List, Solid... 7-117
In the listing,
7.5.3.2 List, Solid...
...simply requires input of the solids you want to list. List information for the solid includes the name, engine (Para-
solid or ACIS) and address.
ID is the ID of the volume.
Type is the type/shape of the volume.
Color is the volume color.
Surfaces are the IDs of the surfaces that define the volume. Three
characters (R or -) follow each ID. These corre-
spond to the s, t and normal surface parametric direc-
tions. An R indicates the parametric direction of the
surface is reversed compared the surfaces alignment in
the volume definition.
Layer is the volume layer.
7.5.4 List, Connection Menu
This menu contains commands which will allow you to list information about your Connection entities. This menu
is partitioned very much like the Connection menu, and contains commands identical to those on the Connection
menu, except these commands simply list entities. They do not create new entities. For more information, see Sec-
tion 4.4, "Creating Connections and Regions".
7.5.4.1 List, Connection, Property...
... produces a report of selected Connection Properties in the model. A sample list is shown below. The first line of
the list will give the number and title of the Connection Property. The second line contains the color, layer, and
number of Connectors using this Connection Property (#Conn). The remaining lines simply contain a list of all
options available for all solvers available, separated by the solver name.
7.5.4.2 List, Connection, Region...
... produces a report of selected Connection Regions in the model. A sample list is shown below. The first line of
the list will give the number and title of the Connection Region. The second line contains the color, layer, reference
node, output (node, element, or property), and whether the region is rigid. The remaining lines simply contain a list
of all entities in the Connection Region.
List, Connection, Connector... 7-119
7.5.4.3 List, Connection, Connector...
... produces a report of selected Connectors in the model. A sample list is shown below. The first line of the list will
give the number and title of the Connector. The second line contains the Connection Property number used in the
Connector, color, layer, and whether the Connector is currently Enabled or Disabled. The remaining lines simply
contain a list of the Connection Regions connected with the selected Connector (Master, then Slave)
7.5.5 List, Model Menu
This menu contains commands which will allow you to list information about your FEA entities. This menu is par-
titioned very much like the Model menu, and contains commands identical to those on the Model menu, except
these commands simply list entities. They do not create new entities. For more information, see Section 4, "Finite
Element Modeling".
7.5.5.1 Common List Options
Much like the geometry listing commands, a common dia-
log box is used for the List, Model commands. Some of the
options may not be available for all entities, but the proce-
dure is identical. The dialog box contains a Sort By sec-
tion, which determines the method of sorting, and a Sort
Order section, where you choose Ascending or Descend-
ing. You can also choose a Listing Coordinate System for
points.
Sort By:
These options control the order of the listing. By default,
and the fastest method, is to list the entities in order of
ascending IDs (lowest ID to highest ID). Choosing Selec-
tion Order will order the listing in the order that you
selected the points. This option allows you to list the enti-
ties in any order, simply by selecting them in that order.
Other common sorting methods include Color, Layer, posi-
tion (X, Y, or Z), and Absolute Value of position.
7.5.5.2 List, Model, Coord Sys...
... produces a report of selected user-defined coordinate systems in your model. You cannot list the predefined glo-
bal coordinate systems (0, 1 or 2).
After selecting the coordinate systems you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you will see
a dialog box which provides options to customize your listing.
Listing Coordinate System:
If you select a listing coordinate system, all selected coordinate systems will be transformed and listed relative to
this selected system. If you leave the coordinate system blank (not 0, but blank), each coordinate system will be
listed relative to its own definition coordinate system.
Sort By:
In addition to the common options, you can also list by the Definition Coordinate System. The position sort meth-
ods (X, Y, and Z) use the coordinate system origin. For more information on common options, see Section 7.5.2.1,
"Common Listing Options".
The coordinate system listing looks like the following:
In the listing,
7.5.5.3 List, Model, Node...
... produces a report of selected nodes in your model.
After selecting the nodes you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you will see a dialog box
which provides options to customize your listing. These options are identical to those defined in the List, Coordi-
nate Systems command (see Section 7.5.5.2, "List, Model, Coord Sys...").
Type is the coordinate system type Rectangular, Cylindrical
or Spherical.
Def CS is the ID of the Definition Coordinate System.
Origin is the coordinates of the origin, relative to either the def-
inition coordinate system, or the listing coordinate sys-
tem.
Rotation is the rotation angles (in degrees) about the definition or
listing coordinate system which orient the axes.
Color is the coordinate system color.
Layer is the coordinate system layer.
Referenced
By
indicates how many other coordinate systems (CS),
points (PT), nodes (NO), materials (MT), properties
(PR), constraints (CN) and loads (LD) reference this
coordinate system.
List, Model, Element... 7-121
The node listing looks like the following:
In the listing,
7.5.5.4 List, Model, Element...
. . . produces a report of selected elements in your model.
After selecting the elements you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you must choose the
method of sorting. In addition to the common options available (please see Section 7.5.5.1, "Common List
Options"), you can also list by Element Type, Property ID, or Minimum Node ID. The location of the center of the
element will be used for the position sort (X, Y, and Z). Element listings resemble the following:
Many other formats are also used for the other element types, but they all follow the conventions shown above. The
element type is listed on the first line, along with the ID. The next line lists the property, color, and layer which are
referenced by the element. Additional element data (like orientation, releases, and offsets) are then given. Finally,
all of the nodes are listed.
ID is the ID of the node.
Def CS is the ID of the definition coordinate system.
Out CS is the ID of the nodal output coordinate System.
X1, X2, X3 are the coordinates of the node, relative to either the def-
inition coordinate system, or the listing coordinate sys-
tem.
Color is the node color.
PermBC are the six nodal permanent degrees of freedom. -
indicates that the degree of freedom is unconstrained.
The numbers 1-6 are used to indicate constraints.
Layer is the node layer.
#Elem,
#Load, #BC
indicates how many elements, loads and constraints ref-
erence this node.
7.5.5.5 List, Model, Material...
. . . produces a report of selected materials in your model.
After selecting the materials you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you must choose the
method of sorting. In addition to the common options available (see Section 7.5.5.1, "Common List Options"), you
can also list by Material Type, and the position sort (X, Y, and Z) will not be available.
Material listings resemble the following:
Similar formats are used for the other material types, and they follow the conventions shown above. The material
ID and title are listed first, followed by the type, color, and layer. #Prop is the number of properties that reference
this material. Finally, the material values are listed in three major categories - STIFFNESS, STRENGTH and
THERMAL. These categories directly correspond to the grouping of the data in the Create Material dialog boxes.
Function Dependent Materials
If you have defined materials which reference functions in your model, you will see additional lines of data mixed
between those shown above. Following each of the lines of properties, and aligned under each of the corresponding
values will be a second line listing the function references. Because of space constraints, the full function title will
not be listed, but the ID and the beginning of the title will be shown.
7.5.5.6 List, Model, Property...
. . . produces a report of selected properties in your model.
After selecting the properties you want to list (using the standard entity selection dialog box), you must choose the
method of sorting. In addition to the common options available (see Section 7.5.5.1, "Common List Options"), you
can also list by property type or material ID, and the position sort (X, Y, and Z) will not be available. If you sort by
material ID, properties that do not reference materials, and laminate plates that reference multiple materials, will all
sort as if their material ID was zero.
List, Model, Layup... 7-123
Property listings resemble the following:
Similar formats are used for the other property types, and they follow the conventions shown above. The property
ID and title are listed first, followed by the type, color, and layer. The material or coordinate system that the prop-
erty references is listed next. #Elem is the number of elements that reference this property. Finally, the property val-
ues are listed. These property values directly correspond to the data in the Model Property dialog boxes.
7.5.5.7 List, Model, Layup...
. . . produces a report of selected layups in your model.
Simply select the layups you want to list using the standard entity selection dialog box.
You will get a listing of each ply with the Ply Number (Ply), the Global Ply Number (Global Ply), the Material ID
for that Ply (Material), the thickness of the Ply (Thickness), and the Orientation Angle of that Ply (Angle).
7.5.5.8 List, Model, Load - Definition...
. . . produces a report of selected load definition(s) in your model. The listing will include the Load Set Title and
ID, the Title and ID of the selected Load Definition(s), the type of load in each Load Definition, and a listing of the
individual loads in the Load Definition following the format of the List, Model, Load - Individual command.
7.5.5.9 List, Model, Load - Individual...
. . . produces a report of selected loads in your model. Listing loads is slightly different than listing most other enti-
ties in that you must first select the sets to list. You will see a dialog box which allows you to select the type of
loads that you want to list.
By default, all load types will be selected.
You can turn off certain types by deselect-
ing those options.
You may also decide to list all loads of a
certain type (the Select All option) or you
will be asked to select the entities where
loads should be listed. This requires entity
selection dialog boxes for each of the types
you requested Under Defined On (two for
node/elem). If you only want a specific
load type, turn off all other types. If you
turn off all of a certain type, the entity
selection dialog box for this type will not
be displayed.
There are no sort options available for load
listings. All selected loads for each selected
set are grouped together in the report. Load
sets are listed in order of their IDs - lowest
to highest. If you select a load type, but no loads of that type exist in a set, a header identifying the load type is
printed, but no loads are listed.
Load listings resemble the following:
List, Model, Constraint - Definition... 7-125
Any body loads which are not activated for a specific load set are not listed. In the sample above, all body loads are
enabled, even though some are zero. The X, Y, and Z components listed for nodal loads are given in the load defi-
nition coordinate system (Def CS).
7.5.5.10 List, Model, Constraint - Definition...
. . . produces a report of selected constraint definition(s) in your model. The listing will include the Constraint Set
Title and ID, the Title and ID of the Constraint Definition(s), the type of constraint in each Constraint Definition,
and a listing of the individual constraints in Constraint Definition following the format of the List, Model, Con-
straint - Individual command.
7.5.5.11 List, Model, Constraint...
. . . produces a report of selected constraints in your model.
Listing constraints is similar to listing loads. Since there can be multiple con-
straint sets in your model, you must first select the sets that you wish to list using
the standard entity selection dialog box. You will then see a dialog box which
allows you to choose Model Based (Nodal Constraints and/or Constraint Equa-
tions) and/or Geometry Based constraints. By default, all types will be selected.
If you select Nodal, On Point, On Curve, or On Surface Constraints, and you
have not chosen Select All, you will be asked to select the entities where con-
straints should be listed. All constraint equations will be listed - you cannot limit
the report.
There are no sort options available for constraint listings. All selected constraints
for each selected set are grouped together in the report. Constraint sets are listed
in order of their IDs - lowest to highest. If you select a constraint type, but no con-
straints of that type exist in a set, you will see a header which identifies the type,
but no data will be listed.
Constraint listings resemble the following:
The DOF numbers (1 to 6) correspond to the TX, TY, TZ, RX, RY and RZ degrees of freedom. In the listing, a
number indicates that the degree of freedom is constrained. Unconstrained degrees of freedom are indicated by a
dash (-). The CSys is the output coordinate system of the associated node. Since geometry (points, curves, surfaces)
does not contain output coordinate systems, this information is not written for these types of constraints.
7.5.5.12 List, Model, Analysis...
. . . produces a report of selected Analysis Sets in your model.
List, Model, Function... 7-127
7.5.5.13 List, Model, Function...
... produces a report which shows all functions defined in your model. There are no options to specify, other than to
select the functions that you want to list using the standard entity selection dialog box. All functions are listed in the
following format.
For each function, the type is reported along with the number of material and load references to the function. Also
listed are the XY data points.
7.5.6 List, Output Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to create reports of output data which is defined in your model. The dif-
ferent commands allow you to control the format of those reports. The List, Output, Query command lets you inter-
actively retrieve output for selected nodes and elements. In addition to the other reporting commands, the List,
Output, Format command creates a report which lists the output report formats which have been defined in your
model. The List, Output, Summary to Data Table command provides a method to send output data to the Data
Table and then quickly scan results for max/min values. For more information on these commands, see Section 8.6,
"Listing Output (List, Output Menu)".
7.5.7 List, Group...
. . . produces a report of selected groups.
After selecting the groups that you want to list using the standard entity selection dialog box, you will see the
Group List Options dialog box.
Here, you can enable or disable certain portions of the report. The
Clipping and Rules options are normally selected. These list the things
that you have specified to define the group. List All Entities in Group
as the name implies, lists all entities that are selected into the group.
The selection of these entities is based on all of the rules, clipping and
layer options.
Group listings resemble the following:
In the Clipping section of the report, up to six planes can be listed, depending upon how many are enabled. In the
Rules section, there may be many subsections. There is one subsection for each type of rule that you define. Simi-
larly, there may be many additional selected entities subsections, depending upon your model and the group defini-
tion. For large models, this section can become very, very long. It should usually be disabled.
7.5.8 List, View...
. . . produces a report of selected views from your model. The views do not have to be active to be listed.
To list views, you just select the ones that you want using the standard entity selection dialog box. Due to the many
view options, listings can be quite long. Therefore, FEMAP asks if you want to list detailed view options. You can
List, View... 7-129
choose No to get a quick list of what views you have defined. If you choose Yes, how the views are defined will also
be listed:
The options listed, all match the values that you chose in the various View commands.
7.5.9 List, Model Info
... reports the model file, size, and numerous other model parameters. There is no additional input required for this
command. It simply produces a report in the following format:
The sample listing was produced from an empty model. The Min, Max, Number and Active fields will be filled in as
entities are created. The Active Views section of the report lists the IDs of the views which are active.
7.5.10 List, Destination...
Unlike the other commands on this menu, this com-
mand does not produce any reports. Rather, it controls
where the reports will be written. By default, reports
are written to the Messages window.
Using the dialog box which this command displays,
you can direct reports to your printer, and/or a file by
choosing the appropriate options. You will notice that
you can choose any one, two or three simultaneous des-
tinations. You must select at least one. If you select a
file destination, you must use the Select File command
button to choose a file name.
If you choose Continuous, listing headers/titles will only be listed at the beginning of the report. One exception is if
you select a Printer destination, headers will be written at the top of each page. The number of lines per page is
automatically determined from the printer settings you defined in Windows.
If you choose Lines, you must set the number of lines per page that you want. Headers/titles will be written at the
beginning of every report and again after the specified number of lines to indicate the top of a page. Again, if you
send reports to your printer, and set the number of lines larger than the number that will fit on a page, the number
will be reduced to fit on the page.
Your destination choices remain in effect until you reset them, leave FEMAP, or start a new model.
In addition to the listing/report commands on this menu, the destination is also used for many of the commands on
the Tools, Check menu that also produce lengthy reports. The model checking commands that do not produce
Model Style (View, Select command) 7-131
reports, but just report a single dimension or angle, do not use the destination. They simply write their output to the
screen.
7.6 Model Style (View, Select command)
You can change the model style (View, Select command) to rapidly check your model. This topic includes a brief
explanation of the model style options. For detailed information, see Section 6.1.5.1, "View, Select..." and Section
8.1.2, "Selecting Views".
The Model Style section on the View Select dialog box has six major types of drawing options: Draw Model, Fea-
tures, Quick Hidden Line, Full Hidden Line, Free Edge, and Free Face. The Draw Model option provides a good
working mode, but is not necessarily the best checking mode. Therefore, it will not be discussed in this section.
Furthermore, Quick Hidden Line and Full Hidden Line provide similar functions and will be explained together
below.
7.6.1 Features
This style draws all entities and therefore is a relatively fast drawing method. Lines of the same color, which over-
lap, alternately draw and erase themselves. The result of this style is a plot which only shows color boundaries. If
you have assigned different colors to different properties or materials, this option will provide a quick method of
visualizing boundaries between properties/materials.
7.6.2 Hidden Line Modes
The hidden line modes sort all elements, and then display them from the back of the view. Only entities which are
visible (hidden lines removed) can be seen. This provides a good visualization tool for complex 3-D models to
determine the relative position of sections of your model.
The hidden line removal options do require substantial calculations, and can be somewhat slower than the other
drawing methods. Also, surfaces which share the same space as elements may not be completely hidden. Render
mode will significantly increase your drawing speed and allow you to dynamically rotate a model.
7.6.3 Free Edge
The free edge style finds and displays all element edges which do not join to another element. This style can
quickly point-out holes or disconnections in your model. It is especially important to use this style when you have
formed a complex model from several surface meshes. If nodes were not properly merged from meshes at the inter-
section of these meshes, gaps will be contained in your model. This style will show you those gaps.
This command is often followed by a Tools, Check, Coincident Nodes command to close these gaps. When per-
forming any type of 2-D or 3-D complex meshing, it is best to show the model in free edge mode before running
the analysis. This will remove the possibility of having unwanted gaps in your model.
7.6.4 Free Face
This style operates similarly to the Free Edge command, except it finds and displays all element faces which do not
join to another element. It can quickly point-out disconnections between solid elements. It can also reduce the com-
plexity of solid model plots, and can help find duplicate plate elements.
For solid element models, you can also use the free face option to simulate a hidden line view. In fact, you can even
use this mode to show hidden lines in a different line style (like dashed), instead of removing them. To remove
backfaces, use the Fill, Backfaces, and Hidden option, in the View Options command, and choose one of the Skip
methods. Choose the Show All Faces method to show hidden lines as a different color/style, then go to the Free
Edge and Face option and set the Free Edge Color to Use View Color. Finally, choose the color and line style that
you want to use.
Hint: If you need to print messages or listings that are already in the Messages window, you can simply use
the File, Print command, and select the Messages option.
8. Post-Processing
This topic provides information related to FEMAP post-processing. Post-Processing does not have its own menu
on the FEMAP main menu, but there are specific commands related directly to post-processing. These commands
can be separated into five major areas based upon their functionality and menu area. They are:
Types of Views (Section 8.2, "Types of Views - View Select...")
View Options (Section 8.3, "View Options - PostProcessing")
Specialized post-processing (Section 8.4, "Specialized Post-processing")
Output manipulation (Section 8.5, "Output Manipulation")
Output reporting (Section 8.6, "Listing Output (List, Output Menu)")
The first section under this topic will be a brief explanation of the overall post-processing procedure. The remain-
ing sections will discuss the post-processing topics above.
8.1 Procedure
The post-processing procedure in FEMAP is relatively straightforward. It simply involves obtaining the results
from the analysis program, selecting appropriate views, modifying options on these views, and manipulating and/or
reporting output.
8.1.1 Reading Results
FEMAP can now automatically launch many FEA solver programs, as well as automatically recover results. If
your current configuration or solver program does not allow this automatic recovery, you can simply import analy-
sis results into FEMAP.
To read results into FEMAP, select the File, Import, Analysis Results command. You will see a dialog box contain-
ing the different solver programs from which FEMAP can read results. Select the appropriate format, and press
OK. You will then be prompted for the name of the file. You should be careful to choose the correct file that corre-
sponds to your FEMAP current model. You should always read a results file into the same FEMAP file from which
it was generated. If you choose an incorrect file, you will most likely get a series of error messages.
Once you select the file to read, FEMAP will ask for confirmation to begin reading. FEMAP will read the file, and
give you status messages about the information it is reading (i.e. displacements, stresses, etc.). You will also notice
that it will list the number of output sets created. An output set is created for each analysis or each step of analysis
contained in the results file.
Once FEMAP is finished reading the file, you can now begin to perform post-processing tasks.
8.1.2 Selecting Views
After reading your results you will want to examine results visualizing. FEMAP has a wide array of tools for this
capability. The type of view is controlled under the View Select command. When you choose this command, you
will see a dialog box containing the type of view available (to see this dialog box, go to Section 8.2, "Types of
Views - View Select...").
The dialog box controls the type of view. For a typical static stress analysis, your first selection will be to select
Deform under Deformed Style and Contour under Contour Style. You can then press the Deformed and Contour
Data button to define the specific vectors to show. Under Select PostProcessing Data, you will want to select the
Output Set, the Deformation Output Vector (you always want to select the total translation vector when showing a
8-2 Post-Processing
deform plot) and an appropriate stress vector for the Contour Output Vector. After you press OK twice, FEMAP
will redraw the current view as a deformed and contour plot.
You can continue to go back into View Select and change the Deformed and Contour Data to show different con-
tours, or to change styles. You may even use the Model Data button to show only a specific group of elements or
even change to an XY plot. These features will be explained in Section 8.2, "Types of Views - View Select...".
Besides changing view types, you may want to change the colors or levels of contours, or other details about the
view itself. This is accomplished with the View Options command.
8.1.3 Changing Options (View Options)
The View Options command enables you to control the many different aspects of your views. The View Select com-
mand controls the overall type of view and data to be visualized, but the View Options command controls the par-
ticular details of each post-processing view.
When you select this command, you will have three categories from which to choose. Select PostProcessing, and
then select the appropriate Option you want to change. You can change the Contour/Criteria Levels, the Deformed
Style, as well as many other aspects of the view. For more information, see Section 8.3, "View Options - PostPro-
cessing".
8.1.4 Manipulating/Listing Output
You may also want to create new output from the results you currently have (such as a safety margin calculation),
or just list output above a certain value. The List, Model menu contains functions to list your output in various for-
mats (you can even create your own), while the Model, Output menu contains functions for manipulating and creat-
ing new output. For more information on these specific commands, see Section 8.5, "Output Manipulation".
8.2 Types of Views - View Select...
... chooses what will be displayed in a view. You can select both the type of display, and the model or post-process-
ing data which will be displayed. This dialog box appears below.
The View Select dialog box is divided into several sections.
The Model Style and XY Style options comprise the first two sections. These options choose the method for dis-
play. You can choose any one option from these two groups of styles. If you choose a model style, your model
will be displayed in the view, using all of the other options you choose. If instead you choose an XY style, the
view will contain a 2D, XY plot of the selected output data or function. XY styles are only available when you
have output data available for post-processing (or functions).
Hint: At this point, if you have a solid model, you may want to go back into View Select and change the
Model Style to a Quick Hidden Line or Full Hidden Line style. It will be much easier to view your
results than when drawing the entire model.
Ctrl+S or F5
Selecting Data for a Model Style 8-3
This description will concentrate on the application of this command to post-processing. All of the Model Style
types (Draw Model, Quick Hidden Line, etc.) also apply to post-processing, but they will not be discussed here.
For more information on these styles, see Section 6.1.5.2, "Choosing a Model Style". For information on XY
style, see Section 8.2.3, "Choosing an XY Style".
The second section of the dialog box consists of the Deformed Style and Contour Style option buttons. Here you
choose one option from each category to define the type of post-processing display that you want to have. The
default settings (None-Model Only) are used to create a normal model display which does not use any output
data for post-processing. The settings of these options are ignored if you choose an XY style. For more infor-
mation, see Section 8.2.2, "Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles".
The final section of the dialog box, located under the previous sections, consists of the XY Data, Model Data,
and Deformed and Contour Data command buttons. Each of these buttons displays an additional dialog box
that allows you to select the model or output data which will be used in the view. By pushing the Model Data
button and selecting a group, you can limit your post-processing view to a single group. This is especially valu-
able in large models.
For more information, see Section 8.2.3, "Choosing an XY Style", Section 8.2.1, "Selecting Data for a Model
Style", or Section 8.2.2, "Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles".
8.2.1 Selecting Data for a Model Style
You can control what portions of your model are displayed by pressing the Model Data command button. The
Select Model Data for View dialog box will then be displayed. You can limit the display of your view to a single
group (Select or Active).
If you have a large complex model, it can be very useful to examine the results in smaller groups. Also, interpolated
results of nodal contours across material boundaries may not be accurate when combined into one view. By sepa-
rating these materials into different groups, you can examine results for each material separately. You can quickly
access this option through the Quick Access menu on the right mouse button (Model Data), and you can change the
active group by using the tray in the Status Bar at the right corner of the FEMAP Graphics window for groups.
8.2.2 Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles
When you want to graphically post-process model output, you must choose one of the deformed or contour styles,
in addition to a model style. Choosing None for either of these options disables that type of post-processing. You
will use None any time you just want to display your model. If you want to display a combined post-processing
view, for example, a deformed contour, just choose both a deformed and a contour style.
Even more than the model styles, the appropriate choice of these styles depends on the type of output data you want
to post-process and the results you need. The following tables describe the deformed and contour styles. They are
described separately, but the same information applies to combined displays.
Deformed
Style
Will Display
Output
Data
Type
Typical Uses
None Model Only None Modelling.
Deform Model, deformed by output
data.
Nodal Static display of displacements or
eigenvectors
Animate Same as Deform, but animat-
ing. Animation positions based
on output data.
Nodal Animated display of displace-
ments or eigenvectors
Animate -
MultiSet
Same as Animate. Animation
positions based on output data
from multiple output sets.
Nodal Animated display of transient
analysis results, deployments or
other motion with relative posi-
tions stored in multiple sets.
8-4 Post-Processing
Vector Model with vectors represent-
ing direction and magnitude of
output data.
Nodal Visualization of direction and
magnitude of displacements,
eigenvectors or forces
Trace Similar to Animate-MultiSet
except will display trace lines
connecting historical positions
of nodes.
Nodal Visualization of deformation his-
tory from a transient analysis.
Streamline Streamline through solid ele-
ments.
Nodal Visualization of fluid flow.
Contour
Style
Will Display
Output Data
Type
Typical Uses
None Model only None Modelling.
Contour Model, elements will display
contour areas or lines - These are
areas or lines of constant output
value.
Nodal Contour of elemental loads, ele-
mental stresses, nodal displace-
ments, nodal stresses...
Criteria Like Contour, except each ele-
ment is colored based on a single
output value for the element.
Elemental Same as Contour. Criteria allows
you to limit the display to por-
tions of your model which have
output values that meet a specific
criterion.
Beam
Diagram
Model, with contoured diagrams
on line elements, much like 3D
shear and bending moment dia-
grams.
Ends of line
elements
Understanding variation of out-
put values along the length of
line elements.
Deformed
Style
Will Display
Output
Data
Type
Typical Uses
Output Set: NASTRAN Case 1
Deformed(4.251E-3): Total Translation
Arrow(4.251E-3): Total Translation
Deformed Style
Vector/Trace Style
Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles 8-5
IsoSurface
(and
IsoLine)
IsoSurface is for models with
solid elements - interior surfaces
of constant output value.
IsoLine is for models with solid
or plate elements - exterior lines
of constant output value.
Nodal IsoSurface is good for under-
standing output distributions
inside your model. Contours
show variations on the outer sur-
face - Isosurfaces show inside.
IsoLine is good for understand-
ing output distributions on the
surface of your model.
Section
Cut
For models with solid elements -
enhanced contouring method.
Shows contours on any planar
cut through your model.
Nodal Understanding output distribu-
tion on one or more arbitrary
planes inside your model.
Vector Model with vectors in contour
colors at the elemental centroid
or nodal position.
Nodal or Ele-
mental
Visualization of magnitude and
direction of stresses/strains.
Contour
Style
Will Display
Output Data
Type
Typical Uses
8705.
8307.
7909.
7511.
7113.
6714.
6316.
5918.
5520.
5122.
4724.
4325.
3927.
3529.
3131.
2733.
2335.
Contour: Plate Top VonMises Stress
Contour Style
7672.1
5903.
2599.
8705.3
5903.
5288.6
3925.4
7225.7
2599.
3925.4
4473.9
4804.
8705.3
7225.7
4804.
2334.5
8705.
8307.
7909.
7511.
7113.
6714.
6316.
5918.
5520.
5122.
4724.
4325.
3927.
3529.
3131.
2733.
2335.
Criteria: Plate Top VonMises Stress
Criteria Style
8-6 Post-Processing
The tables above list typical uses for the various post-processing styles. In fact, FEMAP does not really limit you in
any way. The only restrictions are the obvious ones - you can only do beam diagrams if you have line elements, and
you can only do isosurfaces/section cuts if you have solid elements. You can choose any type of output data for any
123456
5. 1.125
12.2
-5.374E-15
-0.703
-1.406
-2.109
-2.813
-3.516
-4.219
-4.922
-5.625
-6.328
-7.031
-7.734
-8.438
-9.141
-9.844
-10.55
-11.25
Output Set: LOADING
Contour: Beam End A Moment2
Beam Diagram
IsoSurfaces
Section Cut
Multiple Section Planes
shown with a
Free Edge Style
Skip Deformation Option 8-7
style. The same applies to the listed output data types. The table lists the type of data required for the style, but if
you choose data of the opposite type (nodal vs. elemental), FEMAP will automatically convert it prior to complet-
ing the display. For more information on this process, see Section 8.5.5, "Model, Output, Process".
8.2.2.1 Skip Deformation Option
When you select either Animate, Animate MultiSet, or Trace style along with one of the Contour styles, you have
the option of choosing the Skip Deformation option. This is useful for Animate and Animate MultiSet if you really
just want to see animated contours on your undeformed model. For Trace plots, it enables you to see the histori-
cal locations without interference from the deforming model. With this option selected you do not need to choose
any data for deformation, you simply choose the contour data.
8.2.2.2 Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style
When you choose any of the deformed or contour styles, you must also select output data to be used for that style.
Unlike the model styles, which use default model data, these post-processing styles do not select any default output
data. If you forget to choose the appropriate output data, you will receive a warning when you attempt to press OK.
This prevents you from completing the selection until all data is properly specified.
To select output data for both the deformed and contour styles, press the Deformed and Contour Data command
button. The Select PostProcessing Data dialog box will be displayed. Although this dialog box looks somewhat
complex, there are only three or four basic selections required.
First, choose the Output Set that contains the data that you want to post-process. Then, choose the Output Vectors to
be used for the deformation or contour styles. The vectors you choose from these drop-down lists will be used until
you select a different vector. Even if you change the deformation style (from Deform to Animate, for example), the
same output vector will automatically be used, unless you choose a different one. For combined deformation and
contour displays, both output vectors must always be chosen from the same output set.
If you are using the Animate-MultiSet deformation style, you should also select a Final Output Set and the Output
Set Increment. This additional set is required since this style of animation uses data from multiple sets. The first
animation frame uses data from the original output set that you specified, then one animation frame will be gener-
ated for each additional output set, up to, and including the final output set that you select. If you select an output
set increment other than 1, FEMAP will skip output sets based upon this increment. Frames will only be generated
for the sets where the selected output vector exists. If you do not specify a final output set (or if you specify a non-
existent set), FEMAP will generate one frame for every set with an ID greater than the original output set that you
select.
8-8 Post-Processing
Making it Easier to Select Output Data
When you are trying to select output vectors for deformations and contours, you can sometimes become over-
whelmed by the amount of output data FEMAP lets you post-process. By default, the drop-down lists contain all of
the output vectors from the output set that you selected. This can result in hundreds of vectors. If you know that you
want to select a specific type of output, you can choose a category other than Any Output. When you select a differ-
ent category, like Stress, the drop-down lists will only show output data of that type. Similarly, if Data at Corners is
checked, the lists will show element corner output, otherwise they will not. Since element corner data is normally
not directly selected for deformations or contours, it is usually best to leave this option unchecked.
If you create output data in FEMAP, you have the opportunity to specify your own categories (up to 255). You can
choose Other, and specify the category number to list this type of data.
Working with Complex Output
If you are post-processing complex output, you can choose the type that you want to select from the Type option.
By default, magnitude data will be shown, but you can review all other types by simply changing this option.
Reviewing Your Output
As you select output sets or vectors from the drop-down lists, you will notice that the right side of the dialog box is
continually updated. The values shown here tell you where the output was generated, and the maximum and mini-
mum values in the vector. By scrolling through the list of available vectors, you can use this feature to quickly
review your output data. The maximum and minimum values may also give you a good idea of what to expect
before you actually see the data graphically.
Quickly Choosing Output Data
In addition to using the View Select command, you can also access the Select PostProcessing Data dialog box
directly from the Quick Access menu. Just press the right mouse button while you are pointing inside any graphics
window and choose Post Data. You can also get to this dialog box by pressing the Shift +F5 keys.
Contour Options
The Contour Options button on the View
Select dialog box lets you select the a
contour group, the type of contour, and
data conversion to perform.
The Select Contour Options dialog box is
separated into five major sections: Con-
tour Type, Data Conversion, Rendered
Contours, Element Contour Discontinui-
ties, and Other Options. Each of these
areas are discussed more fully below. All
of these options can also be accessed
through the View Options command
(Category - PostProcessing, Option -
Contour Type).
Contour Group
In FEMAP versions 9.3 and above, you
can choose to contour a group while
showing the rest of the model with no
contours. By default, this option is set to None, which simply shows a contour on the entire model. You can contour
the Active group or choose a group from the drop-down list next to Select.
Contour Type
For contour type, you can pick either nodal or elemental contouring. Nodal contouring simply averages all values
at the nodes and cannot account for any discontinuities in material or geometry. When you select Nodal, a relatively
smooth contour will appear. Nodal contouring, however, should not be used across material boundaries or changes
Note: When using a Contour Group, the Contour Type will automatically be set to Elemental and can not be
changed as long as a Contour Group is being used.
Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style 8-9
in properties such as plate thickness, since averaging stresses across these areas results in inaccurate results at the
interface.
If you choose Elemental contouring, you can specify which discontinuities in the model to use in the contouring to
obtain an accurate representation of the results. This type of contouring is very useful for multiple material models
as well as models with plates with that intersect at large angles or have varying thickness. Stresses will not be aver-
aged across these values. The resulting graphics may not be as smooth as nodal contouring, especially at material
breaks, but it provides a more accurate representation of the results when discontinuities exist in the model. In addi-
tion, element contouring allows you to view both top and bottom stresses of plates on one plot, as well as an addi-
tional output vector (see "Other Options" below).
Data Conversion
These options control how FEMAP converts the results from data at element centroids, corners, and nodes to the
continuous graphical representation. There are three data conversion options for calculating the data value at a
node:
The Average option uses the average value of data at surrounding locations.
The Max Value option uses the maximum value of data at surrounding locations.
The Min Value option uses the minimum value of data at surrounding locations. You should only use this option
to generate contours for vectors where the minimum values are actually the worst case, such as safety factor or
large compressive stresses.
In addition:
The Use Corner Data option lets you use elemental corner data instead of centroidal data. If your solver does
not produce elemental corner data or you did not request this data, the results will be based on centroidal data.
The data conversion procedure is used at all nodal locations to get the basis of the plot. Next, FEMAP linearly
interpolates the data to produce the corresponding colors between locations. Thus, data conversion can signifi-
cantly affect the results if there is a large gradient across adjacent elements. If elemental contours are on, FEMAP
only averages results at the specific node if there are no discontinuities according to the Elemental Contour Discon-
tinuities settings. FEMAP produces results at each node and element centroid, and then uses this information to
generate the display.
The following example illustrates how the data conversion process works. If an
interior node N of a continuous mesh (no geometric or material breaks) is
attached to four elements, it will have four values associated with it for a given
stress vector: .
corner data (w, x, y, and z in the figure), or
if Use Corner Data is off, elemental centroidal data (A,B, C, and D)
The table shows how, in the example, the stress at node N is calculated for each
option.
Note: Element contouring has the added feature that if you select No Averaging under Element Contour Dis-
continuities, the pure data at the element centroid and corners is plotted without any manipulation. This
provides a graphical representation of the pure data. See "Elemental Contour Discontinuities" below.
Data Conversion
Option
Result with Corner
Data
Result with Element
Centroids (no corner
data)
Average (w + x + y + z)/4 (A + B + C + D)/4
Max Value max (w, x, y, z) max (A, B, C, D)
Min Value min (w, x, y, z) min (A, B, C, D)
Hint: You can use the difference in Max Value and Average results to make a quick estimate of the fidelity of
the model. If there is a large difference between these two contours, especially at locations that do not
have sharp corners or breaks in the model, your FEA model may require a finer mesh.
A B
C D
w x
y z
node N
8-10 Post-Processing
Rendered Contours
This section allows you to choose between Continuous Colors and Level Colors for contours.
Elemental Contour Discontinuities
This section controls averaging for elemental contouring. It is only avail-
able when Contour Type is Elemental. If No Averaging is selected, con-
tours for each element will be created without consideration to any
connected elements. This can lead to a very discontinuous plot but is use-
ful for certain models such as variable thickness plate models to speed
the data conversion process. It is also useful to obtain a graphical repre-
sentation of the pure data, both centroidal and corner data, since only this
data is plotted. If this option is not checked, you can create averaged ele-
mental contours, and must therefore choose the type of discontinuities
across which you do not want to average.
Valid discontinuities include property, material, layer, color, or angle. If Angle is selected, you must input a toler-
ance. This can be very important with plate models that have intersecting edges. For example, you do not want to
average stresses of plates that intersect at right angles.
If Property is selected, the material option will be grayed since Property is a more discrete choice than Material (a
material can be on multiple properties but typically a property can only reference one material). Again, you do not
typically want to average across material or property boundaries. If Property is off, you can select to use materials
as the break.
In addition, layers and colors are also available since many users separate their model into specific key areas based
upon layer or color, even if they contain the same property.
Other Options
This section is also only available for elemental contours. If you select a standard top or bottom plate vector for
contouring, such as Plate Top Von Mises Stress, FEMAP can automatically contour both top and bottom stresses on
the same plot. Simply select the Double-Sided Planar Contours option. When you rotate the model from top to bot-
tom, you will see the stresses change from top to bottom stresses. These are only available for the standard plate
output vectors.
You may also select an Additional Output Vector to contour. This is very useful if you have a combined plate and
solid Model. You could select Plate Top Von Mises Stress for the original contour vector, select double-sided to
also view the Bottom Von Mises Stress, and then select Solid Von Mises Stress for the additional output vector to
see these values contoured on the solids.
Displaying Section Cuts
In addition to selecting the output vector for contour-
ing, when you want to display section cuts, you must
also specify the options at the top of the Select Post-
Processing Data dialog box.
There are three types of section cut plots available: Cut
Model, Parallel Sections and Multiple Sections.
Cut Model, makes a planar cut through your model,
removing all elements on the side of the plane toward the positive plane normal. In addition, all elements that cross
the plane are cut. Normal contours are displayed over the entire model, including on the cutting plane. To set up
this type of section cut, just choose Cut Model, then press the Define Section button to define the cutting plane.
Parallel Sections, allows you to pass one or more parallel cutting planes through your model. Rather than showing
contours on the rest of your model, this method makes all model elements transparent. Contours are drawn on the
cutting planes only. In this mode, cutting planes do not actually cut, or remove any elements, they simply locate the
contours.
To setup this type of plot, first choose the Parallel Sections option, press the Section button to define the first cut-
ting plane, and finally define the Number and Spacing for the sections. Spacing is only used if Number is greater
than one. It is the perpendicular distance between the planes. If you specify a positive number, the additional planes
are located along the positive normal to the first plane that you defined. Choose a negative number if you want
them along the negative normal.
Multiple Sections allows you to pass up to three inde-
pendently oriented cutting planes through your model.
To set up this type of plot, first choose the Multiple
Sections option, select which sections (1, 2 and/or 3)
are to be drawn, and define the orientation of the
selected sections by pressing Section 1, Section 2 and/
or Section 3 buttons.
For other effects, try these options:
If you just want to see contours on the cutting plane, use View Options and turn off the display of elements.
Only the cutting planes will be displayed.
If you want to see the element edges on the cutting plane, use View Options, choose the Tools and View Style
category, and the Filled Edges option. Then set Section Cut Edges to Show Cut Edge. All cut edges will be dis-
played in the filled edge view color.
Choose Free Edge Style to show just the outlines of your model along with the section cuts.
If you want to remove the front facing element faces, use View Options, choose the Tools and View Style cate-
gory, choose the Fill, Backfaces and Hidden option, and switch Fill on.
Displaying IsoSurfaces
Unlike section cuts, isosurfaces do not require any additional options to be chosen. The display mode of isosurfaces
is much the same as the display of contour section planes - all elements are shown in a transparent mode so that you
can see the isosurfaces inside. Front faces are transparent, and backfaces are filled.
Before using View Select to choose an IsoSurface display, you should use View Options to reduce the number of
contours. While 16 or more contour levels are usually appropriate for contour and section cut plots, isosurface plots
are rarely meaningful with that many surfaces, and they take a long time to compute. As a general guideline,
choose 6 or less levels before computing isosurfaces (use View Options, PostProcessing, Contour/Criteria Levels,
and set # of Levels).
It is often best to turn on Shading with IsoSurfaces - it helps to visualize the curvature of the surfaces. Alterna-
tively, if you choose line contours (turn off the Filled Contour/Criteria style), FEMAP will display the edges of the
polygons that define the surface with no filling. This allows you to see through multiple surfaces, and can some-
times give a better understanding of the shape of the isosurface.
You can also choose the Free Edge style to see just the element outlines with the isosurfaces.
Displaying IsoLine
Like isosurfaces, isolines do not require any additional options to be chosen. Unlike the display mode of isosur-
faces - elements are not shown in a transparent mode. Element faces are drawn filled with lines of constant value
colored according to the isosurface options. Isolines are displayed by selecting the isosurface display mode and
using View Options, PostProcessing, IsoLine to select Draw IsoLine.
If you use View Options, PostProcessing, IsoLine, you can control the width of the isolines and the color of the rest
of the model. Background color is often used to form a hidden line style image. Using the greater than and less than
Color Mode options enables you to show just the areas of the model above or below the IsoLine value respectively.
The greater than and less than modes are ignored if the IsoSurface is not set to Single Isosurface.
Note: Section 1 is the same as the Cut Model and Parallel Sections defining section. If you have used View-
Options menu to switch the Graphics Engine to Windows GDI, cutting plane will not be available.
Trace Locations...
... will enable you to select the nodes to use for the deformed style
Trace plots. When you push this button, you will see the Trace Loca-
tions dialog box. You can choose to select all the nodes, a group of
nodes, or a single node to use for the trace. All nodes are chosen by
default.
Contour Vectors...
... is used to define the output vector(s) to use for the contour vector plots. You can define the output in any of four
different methods - Standard Vectors, Single Value, 2-D Components, or 3-D Components. You can display up to
three contour vectors on the same plot.
Typically you will want to select a standard vector since these output vectors contain data that was already calcu-
lated based upon their components. Examples of these type of vectors include Total Translation or Rotation for
nodal data, Plate Top Major Stress for 2-D plate elements, and Solid Major Principal Stress for 3-D solid elements.
When Standard Vectors is selected, you only need to select one output for each value. The direction and magnitude
of these vectors are automatically calculated by FEMAP to generate the vector contour plot. You can generate up to
three vectors for each plot. Thus, for solid principal stresses you could pick Solid Major for Vector 1, Solid Inter-
mediate for Vector 2, and Solid Minor for Vector 3 to see vectors for all three Principal stresses on one plot.
If you want to display vectors other than standard, you can simply select the number of components of the vector
(single, 2D, or 3D). You will need to select output for that number of components for each vector displayed. If you
wish to see three 3D vectors, you will need to select nine output vectors. If you decide to display a single vector,
you must also define the vector direction under the Display Direction button. The standard FEMAP Vector Defini-
tion dialog box is displayed to enable you to define the direction of this 1D plot.
If you select 2D components, and the two associated vectors for the X and Y components for Vector 1 (and Vector
2 and 3 if multiple vectors are required), the data will be displayed in the coordinate directions defined by the Out-
put Relative To portion of the dialog box (discussed below). 3D components works just like 2D, except that you
must now choose three vectors for Vector 1 (and Vectors 2 and 3 if required). In either of these cases, the compo-
nents must be chosen in a top-down fashion. That is, the first vector represents the X component, the second is the
Y component, and the third (if necessary) is the Z component. By allowing you to select a standard vector, or any
combination of 1D, 2D, or 3D vectors, FEMAP can produce elemental centroidal plots for a wide variety of condi-
tions and vectors.
Element Edge / Solid CSys or Nodal Output Csys
This method is used for output from planar elements if the X output direction is defined relative to the first element
edge (the line connecting the first two nodes). It is used for solid elements if output is defined in the solid property
coordinate system. Use it for nodal output, if the results are in the nodal output coordinate system. Be aware, how-
ever, that for most standard three dimensional nodal output vectors (displacements, constraint forces, applied loads,
velocities and accelerations) FEMAP transforms output into global coordinates and this option is not appropriate.
Element Midside Locations
This option is used for output from planar elements when the X output direction is defined as the vector that joins
the midsides of the second and final (4th for a quad, 3rd for a triangle) edge.
Element Diagonal Bisector
This option is used for output from planar elements when the X output direction is defined as the vector that bisects
the angle formed by the two element diagonals, in the quadrant that generally points along the first edge.
Element Material Direction
This option is used for elemental output that is defined in the material direction; for example, along the rotated plies
of a laminate.
Csys
This final method is available if your output is defined in some known coordinate system. You must also choose the
appropriate coordinate system along with this option.
Freebody Display...
...enables you to plot freebody information for an entire body or a specific group of elements. The freebody display
can be performed at any time, whether you are showing a deformed and contour plot, or a simple undeformed plot.
Note: FEMAP does not know nor keep track of the coordinate system where your output is defined. Therefore
it is up to you to provide this information prior to making a vector plot. You can choose any one of five
different methods, depending on how your results were defined by your analysis program.
This is extremely important! If you choose the wrong or inappropriate method, the display will be
wrong. You must know how the data was defined by your analysis program before proceeding.
Note: Output values for Contour Vectors can be turned on using the View, Options command, choosing the
PostProcessing category, then selecting the Vector Style option. Change Label Mode to 1..Ouput
Values or 2..Top Percent to see labels on the Contour Vectors.
When you select the Freebody Display option, the View FreeBody Options dialog box appears. This dialog box is
separated into four major sections: Freebody Style, Group, Options, and Total Load. Each of these areas are dis-
cussed more fully below.
Freebody Style
This section controls whether the freebody display is shown and the loads to use for the freebody display. Show
Freebody Display must be checked on to plot the freebody diagram, as well as to activate other options on this dia-
log box. When you first enter this dialog box, this will be off, and all other options will be grayed.
The remaining portion of the Style section allows you to select the loads to consider in the freebody display. A typ-
ical freebody diagram will include applied loads, reaction loads, multipoint reaction loads, and external element
loads. This option is the default, and can also be obtained by simply pushing the Freebody button. This diagram
above shows a freebody display where the elements to the right of the display have been included in the group (see
"Freebody Group" below) to create the freebody display. The Shrink option under View Options has been used for
clarity.
The Internal Element Loads option will also include the internal element
loads, which should be equal and opposite to the external element loads. By
turning this option on with external elemental loads on, you should see loads
at the interface of the freebody that are equal and opposite on each side of the
interface as shown in this example. This is simply a greatly magnified display
of the above freebody, except that Internal Elemental Loads has been turned
on.
The Total Summed Load option will take all forces and sum them. Since the
summation of all loads in a finite element static model must be zero to satisfy
equilibrium conditions, this option can be used to locate any leaking of
forces in the model and provide warnings of possible problems. This option automatically grays all other load
selections in this area since it automatically creates a total sum.
Freebody Group
This option allows you to select between the entire model (None), the Active group, or to a select a group for which
to perform the freebody display. In general, unless you are simply checking reaction forces or multipoint reaction
loads, you will want to limit this to a specific group at critical interfaces or areas of concern.
Note: The external and internal element loads will only be available if you have recovered grid point force
balance from Nastran. Grid Point Force output data can be found in the .op2 or .XDB output files from
Nastran. Grid Point Force Data is NOT found in the .f06 output file from Nastran, therefore when
requesting output for Freebody display, be sure to use option 2..PostProcess Only or 6..XDB from
the Results Destination drop-down menu found in the Nastran Output Requests dialog box. For more
information, see Section 8.7.1.8, "Output Requests".
If you are not using Nastran, or have not recovered the grid point force balance, you will only have
access to the applied and reaction loads (including multipoint), thereby limiting the overall usefulness
of freebody displays.
Freebody Options
These options control the details of the freebody display. You can choose to show forces, moments, or both. The
vectors can be shown in entity colors (reaction loads in the color of the constraints, applied loads in the color of the
loads, etc.). If Entity Colors is turned off, all loads will be displayed in the color selected under the Vector Style
option in View Options PostProcessing. Internal and external element loads are always drawn in the vector style
color.
The Show Load Summation option controls whether you see one total sum vector of all loads at the node (on) or all
vectors for the different load types (off). This option also enables the Freebody Total Load section (see below).
The Show Freebody on All Internal Nodes option
provides results at every node of the elements in
the group or entire model. This option can create a
rather cluttered display if there are a large number
of nodes and should typically be left off.
The remaining options in the section are more typ-
ical View Options. You can scale vectors based
upon their magnitude, including setting maximum
and minimum values for the scaling, as well as set
a tolerance below which the loads are not dis-
played. This previous option will remove loads
that are not zero just due to numerical round-off.
The final options under Display Vector Compo-
nents simply allow you to display the vectors in
component form in any coordinate system, in one,
two, or all three directions.
Freebody Total Load
If the Show Load Summation under Freebody Options is checked, you will have access to the Freebody Total Load
section of this dialog box. This section allows you to display the resulting forces and moments due to the total load
of the group or model at a specific location. This can be very useful in obtaining the effect of loads on a specific
portion of your model to some other location, either in the model, or somewhere off the model, possibly another
part of an assembly.
Simply select the Show Load on Interface option and define the color and location for the total load. The Location
button enables you to input the specific coordinates via the standard Coordinate Definition dialog box. Once you
input these values and redraw, FEMAP will display the total forces and moments at the specified location, taking
into account the distance between the location and the freebody loads to calculate the moments. If you are using a
freebody group, and you select nodes into that group, the load summation will only be computed based on the loads
at those nodes.
Streamline Options...
... will enable you to select the start location for the streamline and control the calculation of the streamlines.
You can define the start location of the streamline by: an XYZ location, a single point ID or by selecting a group
that contains points. The latter option will generate multiple streamlines.
Note: When Freebody Total Load is turned on, large green dots will also be shown representing all the nodes
being used in the Freebody Total Load calculation. These can not be turned on and off when the Free-
body Total Load option is on.
The parameters control the calculation of the streamlines. The stream-
lines are evaluated using the Runge-Kutta numerical method. The
order parameter determines which Runge-Kutta order is used. This
value can be 1, 2, 3 or 4. The tolerance value is used to determine
when a streamline is entering or leaving an element. The tolerance has
no units and is based on each elements size.
In general, the higher the Runge-Kutta order and the lower the toler-
ance, the more accurate the streamlines will be. However, the calcula-
tion time will be greater. The default values have been found to work
well and you should not need to change these values.
The calculation of a streamline is terminated if the streamline exits the
elements in the model (or in the group if a group is displayed). Stream-
line calculation will also be terminated if the streamline is too long or
the velocity is too low and this is controlled by the Max Length Factor
and Minimum Speed. The Max Length Factor is a multiplier times the
model bounding box diagonal. The minimum speed is defined as a
percent of the maximum velocity in the output vector selected. If
either of these limits are exceeded, an error is reported and you can alter these values if necessary.
8.2.3 Choosing an XY Style
Unlike the model styles that choose between different ways to display your model, the XY styles choose between
different ways to display a two-dimensional XY plot. Whenever you select one of these styles, the XY plot will be
displayed in the view, instead of your model.
The XY plot styles, other than XY of function, are all post-processing options. They will only be available when
you have output data in your model. The following table describes the various XY styles:
Unlike the post-processing XY styles, XY of function is actually displaying a part of your model. You must there-
fore select the function to display from the Model Data dialog box, not the XY Data dialog. In the Select Model
Data from View dialog box you will be able to select up to 9 curves to plot using the Multiple button. The XY of
Note: The view color can be used to control the streamline thickness by selecting line thickness on the Palette
dialog. You can get to this specific Palette dialog box by choosing the Streamline Option in the Post-
Processing section of the View-Options dialog box
XY Style Will Display
Output
Data
Type
Typical Uses
XY vs. ID Output data values from selected
output vector vs. node or ele-
ment ID.
Node,
Elem
Review output data vector to find
peaks.
XY vs. Set Output data from selected output
vector for one node or element
vs. all output sets.
Node,
Elem
Review transient results, or dif-
ferences in output from multiple
sets.
XY vs. Set
Value
Same as XY vs. Set, except X
axis displays output set values,
not the set IDs.
Node,
Elem
Only for transient, modal or other
output that sets the output set val-
ues. Not for static analysis.
XY vs.
Position
Output data values from selected
output vector vs. X, Y, or Z posi-
tion in a selected coordinate sys-
tem.
Node,
Elem
Review output near a specified
location. Visual interpolation and
extrapolation of output data.
XY of
Function
A function curve. N/A Reviewing the XY relationships
that you defined for a function.
Selecting Data for an XY Style 8-17
Function display style is, however, still controlled by the XY PostProcessing View Options, and in particular the
options for Curve 1.
8.2.3.1 Selecting Data for an XY Style
Selecting data for the XY styles is very similar to selecting data for the deformed or contour styles. When you press
the XY Data command button, FEMAP displays the Select XY Curve Data dialog box. This dialog box resembles
the Select PostProcessing Data dialog box that is displayed by the Deformed and Contour Data command button
.
This dialog box has several differences. For XY-plots, you can select up to nine sets of data. FEMAP refers to these
as curves. The Curve Number option buttons (1 to 9) select the curve to define. Before selecting any other options,
1: NASTRAN Case 1, Plate Top X Normal Stress
2: NASTRAN Case 1, Plate Top Y Normal Stress
-7662.
-5741.
-3819.
-1898.
22.94
1944.
3865.
5787.
7708.
9629.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
Element ID
XY vs. ID Style
-7662.
-5741.
-3819.
-1898.
22.94
1944.
3865.
5787.
7708.
9629.
0.375 0.6964 1.018 1.339 1.661 1.982 2.304 2.625
X Coordinate System 0
XY vs. Position Style
you should always choose the curve number. Next, choose the Category, Type, Output Set, and Output Vector con-
trols to select the output data that you want to display. For more information on using these controls, see Section
8.2.2, "Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles". The only difference for XY styles is that you can choose a differ-
ent output set for each curve.
To define multiple curves, select the first curve number, choose an output set and output vector for that curve, then
repeat the process. Choose a different curve number, and the output set and output vector for that curve. Press OK
only when you are done with all of the curves.
To delete the selected curve number, press the Delete Curve command button. Only the selected curve will be
deleted. All other curves will remain unchanged.
You can limit the XY plot to a certain portion of your model by choosing a group. Selecting None will display data
for your entire model. Active will display data for the nodes or elements in the active group, or for the entire model
if no group is active. If you choose Select, you must also choose a group from the drop-down list. As stated in the
dialog box, the group selections you make apply to all curves.
For the XY vs. Set and XY vs. Set Value styles, you must select an output location. This is the ID of a single node
or element. The entity type matches the type of output in the output vector you select. Since this style displays out-
put from all output sets, the set you choose is not really used. It is only specified so that you can have a list of out-
put vectors from which to choose.
The only difference between XY vs. Set and XY vs. Set Value is the values used for the X axis. XY vs. Set displays
the output set IDs on the X axis, and XY vs. Set Value displays the value (time, frequency, or other value) that is
associated with each output set. If you want to limit output to only certain sets rather than all sets, you can also
specify a range of output sets to use in Show Output Sets. Data will only be selected from sets in the range you
specify. Leave these options blank to get all sets.
For the XY vs. Position style, you must select a position or direction. You can choose either an X, Y, or Z coordi-
nate direction, in any coordinate system. When the data is displayed, the horizontal axis of the XY plot will be
these coordinate values. If you are displaying nodal output, the location of the node will be transformed into the
selected coordinate system. The output value will be plotted on the vertical axis, versus the selected coordinate on
the horizontal axis. For elemental output data, the location of the element centroid is used.
You can use this method to display variations in data across portions of your model. First, define a group which
contains the nodes or elements in that area. Second, define a coordinate system which is aligned with the direction
you want to view. Finally, if desired, select a group and coordinate system and choose the output vector. FEMAP
will display an XY vs. Position plot that shows how your output varies.
8.2.3.2 Quickly Choosing XY Data
In addition to using the View Select command, you can also access the XY Data dialog box directly from the Quick
Access menu. Just press the right mouse button while you are pointing inside any graphics window, and choose XY
Data. You can also get to this dialog box by pressing the Alt+F5 keys.
8.3 View Options - PostProcessing
The View Options command controls how your model (or XY plot) is displayed in a view. This command has three
separate categories based upon the type of controls. Labels, Entities and Colors, as well as Tools and View Style
(for more information, see Section 6, "Viewing Your Model"). This section will concentrate on graphical post-pro-
cessing options (Category 3 - PostProcessing).
All of these different options are controlled from the View Options dialog box. There are three basic parts to this
dialog box. The Category option buttons choose the type of view options that you want to update. When you
choose a category, the Options list is automatically updated. This list displays all of the view options that you can
update for each Category. You may have to scroll through the list, using the scroll bar, to see all of the available
options.
Note: The XY data group selections and the model data group selections both refer to the same option. Chang-
ing one automatically changes the other. If you are displaying a portion of your model, and then switch
to an XY style, the same group will automatically be used. This feature allows you to simply switch
styles and see a model and XY representation of the same data.
Ctrl+O or F6
Post Titles... 8-19
To modify an option, simply select it from the list. You can do this either by pointing at it with the cursor and click-
ing the left mouse button, or by pressing the direction keys. As you select an option, the right side of the dialog box
will be updated. It will display various controls which allow you to set the option. The current option settings will
always be loaded as the defaults. Each PostProcessing option is explained briefly below.
8.3.1 Post Titles...
... controls whether an additional legend is displayed for deformed or contour views. This legend contains informa-
tion about the output set and output vectors which are displayed. You can position the legend in any of the eight
locations. Make sure that it does not overlap the view legend or the contour/criteria legend.
8.3.2 Deformed Style
For all deformed styles, FEMAP uses these settings to determine the on-screen scale of the deformations. If the %
of Model option is checked, FEMAP will scale all deformations so that the largest one is equivalent to the percent-
age of model size you specify as Scale %. If % of Model is not checked, FEMAP will deform your model by the
amount of the actual deformations. Since deformations are usually relatively small, you probably want to specify a
fairly large scale factor. A factor of 100 will display deformations that are 100 times larger than the actual deforma-
tions. A factor of 1 will display the actual deformations.
The default Deformed Scale is automatically set based on the output for all nodes in your model. If you are plotting
just a portion of your model using a group, you may want to scale based on just the deformations on the nodes in
that group. In this case, you can choose Auto-Group. If you are displaying actual deformations (as opposed to % of
Choose category
to change between
option lists
Choose option
to display or
change settings
Scroll down for
more options
6028.
-7662.
6028.
5173.
4317.
3461.
2606.
1750.
894.5
38.85
-816.8
-1672.
-2528.
-3384.
-4239.
-5095.
-5951.
-6806.
-7662.
Deformed(4.251E-3): Total Translation
Contour: Plate Top Mean Stress
Post Titles
Model), Auto-Group will not change the size of the deformations on the screen. In any case however, the maximum
deformation value that is shown in the legend will be based on the maximum value in the group.
8.3.2.1 Auto Group Option
This option automatically considers output for all nodes referenced by the elements in your group in addition to the
nodes that you explicitly include into the group. Therefore, if you have included all model nodes in the group, this
option will have no effect. Unless you are looking for some special effect, you should not include any nodes other
than those connected to elements in the group.
8.3.2.2 The Default Direction
This option orients deformations if the output vector you choose is directionless. For example, assume you choose
to deform the model by Von Mises stress (for whatever reason). Since this type of output is directionless, FEMAP
will use the direction that you select. The deformation magnitude will still be based on the magnitude of the Von
Mises stress.
8.3.3 Vector Style
For vector style displays, this option controls color, labelling options, and whether arrowheads will be displayed.
The selected color is used for both deformed style vector plots and freebody displays. Since the deformed vector
plots can be quite complex, you can choose to label just some Top Percent of the arrows. Only arrows that represent
output which is closer to the maximum output value than the selected percentage will be labelled.
You can also show either the Total Vector or the components of the vector with either wireframe or solid represen-
tations.
Choosing 1..Output Labels or 2..Top Percent in Label Mode will also label ALL the current Contour Vectors
currently being displayed.
For more options concerning Contour Vectors see Section 8.3.18, "Contour Vector Style..."
8.3.4 Animated Style
Many aspects of animation are controlled by the settings for this option. If you choose Single Step, the view will
calculate all of the animation frames and then wait. The animation will not begin until you choose the View,
Advanced Post, Animation command and press Start.
Shape controls the deformations in the frames that are calculated. Full cycle shapes smoothly return to their starting
position while half cycle shapes jump back.
The choice of color or monochrome animation impacts the speed at which the image will animate. Monochrome is
much faster. If on the other hand, you are combining animation with a contour or criteria display, you should prob-
ably select color.
By selecting the number of frames in the animation, you control both the animation quality and speed. More frames
take longer to calculate, and produce a slower, but smoother animation. Fewer frames are desirable if you want a
quick look, or fast animation. If you are using the Animate setting, for the Contour/Criteria Levels option, best
results are obtained with a larger number of frames.
Note: When performing large displacement (hyperelastic) contact and/or explicit analyses, it is often best to
change the Deformed Style to Actual, and keep the value as 1. These types of analyses typically have
large displacements which are visible, and scaling causes distortion.
Animated Style 8-21
The Delay factor specifies the initial speed of the animation. This can be varied using the View, Advanced Post,
Animation command. Larger numbers result in slower animations.
Here are a few suggestions that can help when you are doing animations:
FEMAP retains all of the frames that you calculate in memory. You can specify a very large number of frames
but you must have enough to hold those images.
You can simultaneously animate multiple windows, even at different speeds, but your computer and graphics
adapter need to be fairly fast. It takes the combination of a fast computer and a good graphics adapter to ade-
quately handle multiple animations.
If animations are not as fast as you would like, check the following:
Make sure the Delay factor is small or zero.
Try using monochrome animation.
Make sure you are not running other applications in the background on your computer.
Reduce the number of frames.
Reduce the size of your graphics window. This may be the biggest savings - although at a price. It can dramati-
cally reduce the amount of data needed for an animation, and hence increase the speed.
Once an animation has been created, you can control it with the View, Advanced Post, Animation command.
+1
-1
+1
-1
Sine - Full
Linear - Full
+1
0
+1
0
Sine - Full Absolute Linear - Full Absolute
+1
-1
+1
-1
Sine - Half
Linear - Half
+1
0
+1
0
Sine - Half Absolute
Linear - Half Absolute
Number of Frames
8.3.5 Deformed Model...
... controls the colors that will be used for a deformed style display.
Deform Relative To: If the option is set to Fixed Node, FEMAP will create a deformed display based on the rel-
ative displacement between the node defined in Node ID and each node of the model.
8.3.6 Undeformed Model...
... allows you to display your undeformed model, along with a deformed or animating style model. This option
should not be turned on for filled or hidden line view styles. If you do, the deformed and undeformed models may
obscure each other.
8.3.7 Trace Style...
... enables you to control the labeling and display of trace plots. You may display or label each location along the
trace lines, and display full length trace lines or animate them with the model. When used in combination with the
Skip Deformation option in View Select, you can independently control whether the model and/or the trace lines are
animated.
8.3.8 Contour Type...
... controls the type of contour to perform (nodal or elemental), or the Rendered Contours option (Continuous or
Levels) and additional options for elemental contouring under Contour Options. For more information, see Section
8.2.2.2, "Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style".
8.3.9 Contour/Criteria Style...
... allows you to choose whether solid/filled contours will be drawn or just the contour lines. The same setting also
applies to filled or unfilled elements for criteria displays.
For more ways to customize the appearance of contour and criteria plots, see Section 6.1.5.3, "View, Options...".
If you select the Max Min labelling option, the two locations with the maximum and minimum output values will
be labelled. Normally this will be the maximum and minimum values in the entire model. If you also set the Auto-
Group under Contour/Criteria Levels, Level Mode, FEMAP will display the maximum and minimum values based
just on the output at nodes in your plotted group.
ID labelling is not used for filled contours. For line contours, the lines are labelled with letters that correspond to
those in the Contour Legend. Label Freq controls how many of the lines are labelled. If Label Freq is 5, every fifth
Deformed Model
Undeformed Model
6028.
-7662.
Filled Contours
Line Contours
Max Min Labels
Contour/Criteria Levels... 8-23
contour line will be labelled. You may also specify the number of significant digits to be used in your contour/crite-
ria plot.
The data conversion options control how FEMAP will calculate the nodal data that is required for contours when
you select an elemental output vector. By default, all elemental data is averaged. If you would rather use the maxi-
mum (or minimum) values, choose Maximum Value (or Minimum Value). If you have recovered or calculated ele-
mental corner output but do not want it to be considered in the contour, choose one of the Skip Corner options. For
more information on Data Conversion options, see Section 8.2.2.2, "Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour
Style".
8.3.10 Contour/Criteria Levels...
... specifies the number of contour levels that will be displayed. FEMAP supports up to 255 levels. This option is
also used to select the output values where contours will be calculated, and the contour colors.
8.3.10.1 Palette
You can choose either the Standard or User-Defined contour palette. Instructions for defining a user-defined palette
can be found later in this section, but the palette must be activated here - even after it is defined. The #of Levels
option is only used with the standard palette, and specifies the number of contour levels to be drawn. The number
of levels for the user-defined palette always matches the number of colors in the palette.
8.3.10.2 Animate
If you want the contour display to vary with the deformations during an animation, you can check the Animate box.
This can represent the effects of loading and unloading a structure. When this is turned off, the deformations will
animate, but the contours will not change. Animate is only used for contour displays, not for criteria displays. When
you are animating contours, you will usually need to increase the number of animation frames to make the contour
animation look smoother.
8.3.10.3 Level Modes
If you choose the Automatic or Auto-Group level modes, FEMAP will determine the maximum and minimum con-
tour values (and the intermediate ones) from the maximum and minimum output values in the output vector you
select. Automatic considers data from the entire output vector. Auto-Group is identical, unless you have selected a
group, then, it will determine the maximum and minimum values from just the portion of your model that is in the
group.
If you choose Max Min, you must specify the maximum and minimum contour values. FEMAP will interpolate
between them to determine all intermediate values. User Defined is similar to Max Min. You must first specify the
maximum and minimum values, then press Set Levels. You will see the Contour/Criteria Levels dialog box. In the
text boxes on the left side, you can specify up to 10 additional intermediate contour levels.
For each contour level that you want to set, you must specify two values - the contour level number and the value.
The maximum value is level 1, the minimum value is equal to one more than the number of contour levels that you
selected. Therefore, the level numbers you specify should be between 2 and the number of contour levels. If you
specify more than one level, the associated output values must be in decreasing order. For example, if the maxi-
mum value is 1000.0, and you specify that level 5 is 500.0, then level 6 must be less than 500.0, and level 7 must be
less than whatever you specified for level 6.
Note: In the current release of FEMAP, you MUST be using the Windows GDI graphics engine in order to
view ID labels on line contours. Other than creating vector-based images for copying and printing, this
is the only known reason to use the Windows GDI graphics engine instead of the Render/Open GL
graphics engine. To switch graphics engines, use the View, Options command, select Tools and View
Style as the Category, and choose the Render Options option. Once there, click the Graphics Engine
button and select the graphics engine you need to use from the dialog box. Click OK and Apply or OK
again to make the switch.
Note: The Auto-Group option automatically considers output for all nodes referenced by the elements in your
group in addition to the nodes that you explicitly include into the group. Therefore, if you have included
all model nodes in the group, this option will have no effect. Unless you are looking for some special
effect, you should not include any nodes other than those connected to elements in the group.
Similarly, all of values must be greater than the minimum value. If you leave gaps between the levels you specify,
FEMAP will automatically interpolate to find the other levels. For example, if you set level 5 to 100.0, and level 10
to 50.0, then FEMAP will set level 6 to 90.0, level 7 to 80.0, level 8 to 70.0 and level 9 to 60.0 - automatically. If
you specify level numbers that are greater than the number of levels that you have selected, those entries will be
ignored.
Regardless of which level mode you choose, you can use the
Contour/Criteria Levels dialog box to change the colors asso-
ciated with your contour levels. FEMAP's default colors pro-
vide a full spectrum of color ranging from red for the
maximum value to violet for the minimum. To choose new
colors, enter the six color values that you want. If you choose
six contour levels, these six colors will be used. If you choose
more than six levels, FEMAP will interpolate between the six
colors that you choose to calculate one color for each level.
Interpolating in this fashion tends to provide a smoother spec-
trum of color for the contours. You may also want to choose
different line styles, since FEMAP will also interpolate the
line styles for line contours.
If you make changes and want to get back to the original
FEMAP default colors, press Reset Color. If you want to
change to monochrome contouring, press Reset Mono. You
may want to do this prior to choosing the File, Print command
if you are printing to a monochrome printer. Pressing Reverse
will simply swap the order of the six colors - whether they are
the defaults or colors that you have specified. Use this option
when you want violet for the maximum output value and red
for the minimum.
8.3.10.4 User-Defined Contour Palette
If you press the User Palette button, you will see the standard palette with options to add or delete colors to the user
palette.
As described above, you can control the standard contour palette by specifying up to six colors, and FEMAP will
interpolate between them to produce the entire contour spectrum. This method produces very smooth transitions
Contour/Criteria Legend... 8-25
between colors in the spectrum, but does not allow very precise color control, and often results in dithered (rather
than solid) colors being used. The User Palette option gives you precise control, with no interpolation of colors.
In addition to the normal palette options, the dialog box has additional boxes that show the defined contour palette.
To add to the palette, choose the color (and linestyle and pattern) from the top of the box, then press Add. The
selected color will be added to the palette. To remove a color from the contour palette, select it and press Delete.
Press Reset to delete all of the selected colors. Press Reverse to swap the order of the colors in the palette. Press
Save to save the selected contour palette in a file, which you can retrieve later with the Load button. In either option
the standard file access dialog box is used to access the contour palette files. The file extension.CNT is always used
for these files. The default user defined contour palette file is selected in the File, Preferences command, and is
loaded every time you start FEMAP.
To use the contour palette that you have defined, you must return to Contour/Criteria Levels in the View Options
dialog box, and switch the Contour Palette option to User Palette. When you select the user palette, all contour and
criteria plots will be done with the number of levels in the user palette, the # of Levels option is simply ignored. To
change the number of levels, you must change the user palette, or switch back to the standard palette.
8.3.11 Contour/Criteria Legend...
... controls the visibility, position, and labelling of the contour (or criteria) legend. This legend consists of a series
of colored lines or boxes. Numeric labels are located beside the colored area. These labels show you the output val-
ues associated with each contour color. You can control the number of digits of the output values on the contour
legend by entering a number in the digits area. You can choose to make these labels the same color as the contour
they represent (contour colors), or a single view color. The legend labels can also be forced to display the numbers
in exponential format. The legend border is always drawn using the view color.
If you specify 0 for the Label Freq, FEMAP will automatically determine the number of labels to place on the leg-
end so they will not overwrite each other based on the label size. If you want to label a specific number of contour
levels, just specify a non-zero Label Freq. For example, if you specify 4, FEMAP will label every fourth level. The
maximum level is always labelled. If you specify a Label Freq that is larger than the number of contour levels,
FEMAP will label just the maximum and minimum levels.
This legend, like all others, is drawn vertically, unless you position it at the top center or bottom center of the view.
In those positions, the legend is drawn horizontally.
The Legend Shrink... button allows you to shrink the legend based
on a percentage of the contour legends standard size. If the legend
is positioned in any of the corners (0..Top Left, 2..Top Right,
5..Bottom Left, or 7..Bottom Right), the contour legend will be
shrunk in relation to the selected position.
For example, if the contour legend is positioned in the 2..Top
Right position, when it is shrunk, the position of the top right cor-
ner of the legend will remain in the same place and the opposite end of the legend will be moved.
Note: This version of FEMAP includes several predefined contour palette files. These files have been defined
to access solid colors when used with most Windows 256-color drivers. You can use them as a starting
point for your own palettes by loading and modifying them.
6028. 4317. 2606. 894.5 -816.8 -2528. -4239. -5951. -7662.
Contour Legend
in Top Center
Position
Using Legend Shrink... along with a positioning option is helpful when trying to not have the contour legend over-
lap the view legend, the post titles, or any logo bitmaps.
8.3.12 Criteria Limits
Although criteria displays can be used simply as an alternative to contours, where each element is colored based on
its output value, their primary purpose is to limit the display based on a selected criteria. This option selects the cri-
teria. You select the type of criteria from the Limits Mode list. Then specify the appropriate values in Minimum and
Maximum.
The following table lists the available modes and their uses:
If you choose Abs Value, the absolute value of the output data is compared to your selected criteria. The Criteria -
Elements that Pass, and Criteria - Elements that Fail options control how elements that pass or fail the criteria will
be displayed.
Beam diagrams are also controlled through this option. The Default Direction option sets the elemental or global
plane where the beam diagram will be drawn. FEMAP always draws the diagram in the plane that you choose, even
if the output is actually based on forces/stresses in a different plane.
The FEMAP translators should automatically setup the proper information in your model to draw the correct beam
diagram as you read the output from one of the supported programs. If you create output through some other
means, or if sign conventions change in the analysis programs, the RevB default directions can be used. If you see
a beam diagram where End A and End B have reversed signs, when they should be of the same sign, choose one of
these options - otherwise use the regular options. The Beam Diagram Color sets the color that will be drawn around
the outer edges, and between elements along the diagram.
8.3.13 Criteria - Elements that Pass/Fail...
... are both used for criteria style displays. The settings for the first option are used for all elements that pass your
selected criteria, or for all elements when you do not specify any criteria. The second option settings are used only
for elements that fail the criteria. You can skip displaying either category of elements by turning off the appropriate
option. If you select Output Value labelling, the output values will be displayed as a label near the center of the ele-
ments. For criteria displays, element colors are also determined by this option. By default, elements that pass the
criteria will be colored using contour colors. For this setting, FEMAP compares the elemental output value to the
specified contour levels. The element color is then set to the color for the appropriate contour level. By default, ele-
Limits
Mode
Minimum Maximum Result
No Limits - - No Criteria. All elements pass.
Above
Maximum
- Yes Elements with output values greater than
Maximum pass.
Below
Minimum
Yes - Elements with output values less than
Minimum pass.
Between Yes Yes Elements with output values between
Minimum and Maximum pass.
Outside Yes Yes Elements with output values less than
Minimum or greater than Maximum pass.
6028.3
4823.1
2974.7
6028.3
4823.1
2974.7
1741.9
6028. 4317. 2606. 894.5 -816.8 -2528. -4239. -5951. -7662.
Elements that
passed criteria
Elements that
failed criteria
Beam Diagram... 8-27
ments that fail the criteria are not displayed. If you simply turn them on, the default view color will cause them to
be displayed as dashed/phantom lines.
Elements that fail the selected criteria will never be filled, no matter how you set the other filling or criteria options.
This distinguishes them from the elements that pass. When you choose the filled criteria options, the colors for
elements that pass control the filling color, but the colors for elements that fail control the edge colors - since
there is no filling color.
8.3.14 Beam Diagram...
...Beam diagrams are controlled through this option. The Label Mode allows to place output values at either the
nodes themselves (1..Labels at Nodes) or at the peaks of the actual beam diagram (2..Labels at Peaks).
There is also a third option in Label Mode, 3..Contour Only which is less of a labelling convention and more of a
display option. This option allows you to use beam results to create a contour on Beam elements. Essentially, it
creates a Beam Diagram with zero height, which ends up appearing on screen as a contour.
The Default Direction option sets the elemental or global plane where the beam diagram will be drawn. FEMAP
always draws the diagram in the plane that you choose, even if the output is actually based on forces/stresses in a
different plane.
The FEMAP translators should automatically setup the proper information in your model to draw the correct beam
diagram as you read the output from one of the supported programs. If you create output through some other
means, or if sign conventions change in the analysis programs, the RevB default directions can be used. If you see
a beam diagram where End A and End B have reversed signs, when they should be of the same sign, choose one of
these options - otherwise use the regular options.
The Beam Diagram Color sets the color that will be drawn around the outer edges, and between elements along the
diagram.
8.3.15 IsoSurface...
... controls the display of isosurfaces. You can control whether a single isosurface is displayed, or to use the contour
colors for the isosurfaces. You can also decide to deform the model, set the isosurface color for the Single IsoSur-
face option, and to set a level for the single isosurface. These options also effect isolines if they are currently
selected.
When using the View, Advanced Post, Dynamic IsoSurface command, this option will automatically be turned to a
single color if both the deformed and contour output vectors are the same. For more information, see Section 8.4.3,
"View, Advanced Post, Dynamic IsoSurface...".
8.3.16 IsoLine...
... controls the display of isolines. IsoLines are displayed when in IsoSurface mode and the Draw IsoLine option is
checked. You can control the width of the isolines and whether a line is drawn or everything above or below a value
is drawn.
When using the View, Advanced Post, Dynamic IsoSurface command, this option will automatically be turned to a
single isoline. For more information, see Section 8.4.3, "View, Advanced Post, Dynamic IsoSurface...".
8.3.17 Streamline...
... allows you to choose whether the streamline is a solid color or is contoured with the contour output vector. You
can also choose whether the streamline start points are displayed. Displaying the start points is useful to ensure the
start points are within the element mesh. The Maximum Length, Minimum Speed and XYZ Location can be
controlled from this dialog. These settings are the same as those on the Streamline Options... dialog. The view color
can be used to control the streamline thickness by selecting line thickness on the Palette dialog.
Note: If you use the 3..Contour Only option when showing the Beam Cross-Sections in FEMAP, the result-
ing contour is simply a linear interpolation of values on the beam and in NO WAY takes the place of
modeling the beam section with plate or solid elements to determine any localized stresses.
This option is here as a way to display your Beam results in a manner that does not include the some-
times intrusive heights of the Beam diagrams with regard to the rest of the model.
8.3.18 Contour Vector Style...
... allows you to choose whether the length and/or color of the vectors will be adjusted based on their magnitude.
You can also choose how the vectors are located and whether or not they have arrowheads. If you choose to center
the vectors, they will either be centered at the node or element centroid as appropriate. Otherwise, the start of the
vector will be placed at that location. If you choose a single arrow style, the direction of the vector (toward the
arrowhead) will imply whether the value is positive or negative. For dual arrow styles, outward pointing arrow-
heads are used for positive values, inward pointing arrowheads are used for negative values.
8.3.19 XY Titles...
... specifies a title and subtitle for an XY display, and the location of these titles. You can choose any of the standard
eight locations for the titles. In general, Center Left and Center Right are not good choices. Unless you use very
short titles, these positions will significantly reduce the size of the graph. The titles are always displayed in the
view color. The title view color is also used for all axis labels.
When you press Titles, FEMAP will display the XY Titles dialog box. You can specify a title and subtitle, each up to
25 characters in length.
8.3.20 XY Legend...
... controls the location, and format of the XY legend. This legend contains one line for each active curve. It defines
the output data which is selected for the curve. The format of the lines in the legend is:
Curve Number: Output Set, Output Vector (Curve Scale Factor)
Output Set and Output Vector are either the IDs or titles, depending on the labelling option you choose. Each line of
the legend is drawn in the same color as the curve that it defines.
You can position this legend in any of the eight standard locations. Make certain you do not locate it at the same
position as the XY titles or they will overwrite each other.
8.3.21 XY Axes Style...
... defines the colors of the X and Y axes, and the number of axis divisions (tics). This option controls the color of
the axis lines. If you want to change the colors of the axis labels, see Section 8.3.19, "XY Titles...".
You can also change the plot type between Rectilinear (the normal default), SemiLog (Y-Axis), Log-Log, and Semi-
Log (X-Axis) which are often used for dynamic analyses.
When you specify zero X tics or Y tics, FEMAP will automatically calculate the number of axis divisions. The
number will be chosen so the labels do not overwrite one another. If you want a specific number of divisions, spec-
Note: To show Output Values on Contour Vectors, use the Vector Style option located in the PostProcessing
category of the View, Options command. Change the Label Mode to either 1..Output Values or 2..Top
Percent to view Output Values on ALL Contour Vectors, depending on how you would like to label any
visible deformation vectors.
Also, to see the output values in the color of the particular Contour Vector(s) being displayed, use the
Label Parameters option located in the Labels, Entities, and Colors category of the View, Options
command. Change the Color/Background to 0..Entity Colors. This also works for Freebody display.
-7662.
-5741.
-3819.
-1898.
22.94
1944.
3865.
5787.
7708.
9629.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
Element ID
Legend
XY X Range/Grid... 8-29
ify that number plus one. You must add one because there is always one more tic than division, for the end of the
axis.
8.3.22 XY X Range/Grid...
... controls the minimum and maximum X axis values, and the display of the vertical grid lines.
If you choose Automatic, FEMAP will set the minimum and maximum axis values equal to the smallest and largest
X values from your entire model. The nature of these values depends on the type of XY plot (vs. ID, vs. Set...).
Auto-Group is similar, but only considers values which are in the group you chose in the View Select command. If
you pick Max Min, you must manually set the minimum and maximum axis values.
Your Axis Range choices can be automatically updated by the View Autoscale, Pan, Zoom, or Magnify commands.
You can use these commands for XY-plots just like they are used for model displays.
8.3.23 XY Y Range/Grid...
... is identical to XY X Range/Grid, except that it controls the Y axis and the horizontal grid lines.
8.3.24 XY Curve 1 through XY Curve 9...
... controls the visibility, style, color, and labelling of the data curves for an XY-plot. By default, any curve that you
select in the View Select command will be drawn. You can selectively skip curves, by turning off these options. ID
and output value labels will be drawn at every data point on the curve. Only two labels will be drawn for Max/Min
ID and Max/Min value labelling. These labels will be drawn at the data point with the minimum and maximum out-
put values. If the DataPair or Max/Min DataPair options are selected then FEMAP will create a label with both the
x and y data in the label. The Curve Style setting controls the type of curve or points that will be drawn.
The Scale factor multiplies the actual output values. You can use this factor to display several curves, that have
very different magnitudes, in the same Y range. When you specify a scale factor other than one, the position of the
curve will be updated appropriately. The output value labels however, will still show the actual, unscaled output
values. In addition, any scale factors, other than 1.0, will be shown in the XY legend.
8.4 Specialized Post-processing
There are three commands contained under the View, Advanced Post menu that allow you to control certain types of
post-processing: Animation, Dynamic Cutting Plane, Dynamic IsoSurface and Dynamic Streamline. Each of these
commands are explained more fully below.
8.4.1 View, Advanced Post, Animation...
... is only available when you have one or more views animating on your screen. It controls the speed and form of
the animation. It can also stop the animation and step through individual animation frames.
When you choose this command, the Animation Control dialog box is displayed. The buttons in this dialog are used
just like the controls for a VCR or tape player. Press Pause if you want to stop the current animation, then press
Play to resume it. Pressing either Prev or Next will also pause ongoing animations. Pressing these buttons will also
change the frame that is displayed. Next advances forward to the next animation frame. Prev goes backward to the
previous frame.
The buttons in the center of the dialog box change the speed of the animation, by changing the Delay value. You
can also change speed manually by typing a new Delay value. Larger numbers mean longer delays and slower ani-
mation. Pressing Faster reduces the delay value while Slower increases it. Press Fast to reset the Delay to 1.
You can also change the order in which the animation frames will be displayed by choosing Half or Full. Half ani-
mations go from the first frame to the last and then jump back to the first. Full animations go from the first to the
last, and then back to the first in reverse order. When you are animating deformations, half animations deform and
snap back. Full animations repeatedly deform and undeform. Full animations are smoother while half animations
are faster.
8.4.1.1 Controlling Animation in Multiple Windows
The View Animation command either updates one window or all windows depending on the All Views setting. By
adjusting the delay values in different windows, you can simultaneously show animation at different speeds. You
can also control this by using a different number of frames in each different windows.
8.4.1.2 Getting Faster Animations
FEMAP creates animations by drawing multiple frames, each with slightly different displacements or positions.
Each frame is retained in memory as a bitmap. Then, at intervals specified by the delay, each bitmap is redrawn to
the window. As you can imagine, this can take a lot of memory, and a lot of computing power. Multiple animating
windows just increases those requirements. To work successfully with these animations you need a fast computer,
and a graphics board that can transfer bitmaps to the screen very quickly.
If you are not satisfied with the speed of your animation, and you have specified a small delay, try using less
frames, a smaller graphics window, or monochrome animation. Each of these can make the animation significantly
faster. Also, make certain you do not have other applications running in the background while you are trying to ani-
mate.
Here are some important things to remember when working with animations:
If you move the graphics cursor over an animating window, the cursor may become invisible (or blink) because
animating windows constantly redraw the entire window and hide the cursor. If you lose the cursor, keep
moving the mouse in a single direction until it moves outside of the animating window. The cursor will be visi-
ble again.
Whenever you choose a command from the menu, either with the keyboard or mouse, FEMAP will pause any
ongoing animations. This gives you much better interactive response time during the command you choose. To
restart the animation, you must choose the View, Advanced Post, Animation, the Window, Redraw, or the Win-
dow, Regenerate command. The advantage of View, Advanced Post, Animation is that it does not require
FEMAP to recalculate the animation frames.
Running a program file also stops all animations.
You cannot make graphical selections in animating windows. Animations are just a series of bitmaps with no
direct connection to the entities in the FEMAP database.
The delay factor controls animation speed by pausing between frames. The appropriate delay factor depends on
the computer speed, graphics board, size of the window, whether you are doing color, or monochrome anima-
tion, and many more factors. If you are only animating one window, you may have to increase this number sub-
stantially to slow down an animation. With multiple windows, you may have to decrease it to speed up
animations. If you are trying to make multiple windows animate at different speeds, adjust the delay factors rel-
ative to each other. For example, if you have two windows, setting one delay equal to twice the delay in the
other window will animate at half the speed of the other window. The ratio of the smallest to largest delay in the
active animating windows should always be less than 20 or 25 for best performance (preferably less than 10). If
you exceed these recommendations, the slower animating window will appear choppy, and in some cases, may
not animate at all. If you are experiencing this problem, you must increase the delays in all windows (you can
keep the ratios the same), so that your computer can keep up with all of the animations.
8.4.2 View, Advanced Post, Dynamic Cutting Plane...
... allows you to dynamically view section cuts in the model. This is very convenient when displaying a contoured
solid. When you select this command, you will see the Dynamic Section Cut Control box. This dialog box allows
you to dynamically move a plane through your model, displaying the contour on this plane.
View, Advanced Post, Dynamic IsoSurface... 8-31
Section...
If you are displaying Multiple Sections, this allows you to select which of the planes is controlled by the Dynamic
Section Cut Control dialog box.
Plane...
...allows you to locate the cutting plane using the FEMAP standard plane definition dialog box. Once you select the
plane, you can use the Windows scrollbar to move this plane through the solid, and FEMAP will automatically
move the contoured plane through the model from lowest value (position) to highest value.
Value...
... options allow you to specify a specific location to view for the section cut. The value represent distances normal
to the section cut. You can therefore start at one end of the model and move through the entire model to the other
end. If you stop scrolling, FEMAP will automatically fill-in the position in the Value box. You can also specify a
specific value to move to an exact location.
Delta...
... defines the value when you click on the scrollbar to move it. By specifying a Delta, and then clicking in the Win-
dows scrollbar to move it, you can change the value, and thereby the position of the section cut by the Delta value.
This is a convenient method to move through the section cuts at specified increments.
8.4.3 View, Advanced Post, Dynamic IsoSurface...
... This command allows you to move dynamically through isosurfaces in the model. Just as with the dynamic cut-
ting plane, you can also define a specific value (the value of the isosurface) as well as a delta.
This command lets you move through only isosurfaces, or to move through isosurfaces while showing the contour
of another vector on the isosurface. These options are controlled by the vectors chosen under Deformed and Con-
tour Data (under View Select). If both the deformed and contour vectors are the same, FEMAP will just move
through the isosurfaces. However, if they are different, FEMAP will use the deformation vector you have chosen
for the isosurfaces, and will contour using the contour vector. Therefore, you can see one vector contoured on a
constant section of another vector.
The specific options related to these displays can be found under View Options (Category PostProcessing, Option
IsoSurfaces).
If you have Draw IsoLines selected in View Options (Category PostProcessing, Option IsoLines), this dialog
enables you to interactively change the isoline value.
Note: If you have changed the Graphics Engine to Windows GDI using the View-Options menu, this option
will not be available.
Hint: This is an extremely valuable tool when performing thermal stress analysis. You can define the temper-
ature vector as the deformation vector to use for the isosurfaces, and then select a stress value for the
contour vector. You can then visualize the stress values at a given temperature.
8.4.4 View, Advanced Post, Dynamic Streamline...
... allows you to dynamically move the streamline start location. When you select this command, you will see the
Dynamic Streamline Control box. This dialog box allows you to dynamically modify the X, Y or Z coordinate of
the streamline start location. If you have a streamline displayed using a start location defined by point ID or group
ID, the start location option will be changed to be defined by XYZ location and will revert to the original mode
when exiting this dialog.
Global Coordinate...
This allows you to select whether you are controlling the X, Y or Z coordinate of the streamline start location.
Value...
... options allow you to specify a specific X, Y or Z coordinate. If you stop scrolling, FEMAP will automatically
fill-in the position in the Value box. You can also specify a specific value to move to an exact location.
Delta...
... defines the value when you click on the scrollbar to move it. By specifying a Delta, and then clicking in the Win-
dows scrollbar to move it, you can change the value, and thereby the position of the streamline by the Delta value.
8.5 Output Manipulation
The Model, Output submenu allows you to manage output sets and loads, as well as create new output. The menu is
divided into four areas:
Output set/vector: On the first segment of the menu, the Set and Vector commands let you create and/or activate
the current output set and output vector.
Active vector commands: The Define and Fill commands let you create output for the current output vector.
Output set/vector commands: These commands let you manipulate entire output sets, as well as individual vec-
tors. Commands include Process, Calculate, From Load, Transform, and Extrapolate.
Complex output commands: The Convert Complex and Expand Complex commands are only applicable to
complex output results (such as results from a frequency response analysis). You must have either magnitude/
phase results, or real/imaginary pairs. You can convert between these types of complex output, or expand the
results using phase information into the real domain.
Each of these commands is described in the following sections.
Model, Output, Set... 8-33
8.5.1 Model, Output, Set...
...creates a new output set or activates an existing output set.
An output set is a collection of output vectors (results data).
When you run an analysis, the software generates an output
set for: each combination of loads and constraints that you
specify (cases); each frequency of a modal analysis; or each
time step of a transient or nonlinear analysis. If you define
multiple cases with the analysis set manager, you will have
multiple output sets.
To create a new output set, enter a new ID, then a descriptive
Title.
To activate an existing output set, select it from the list or
enter its ID. Some commands, such as Define and Fill, work
with the active output set.
Use Reset to deactivate all output sets.
The Set Value is defined by certain analysis types. For exam-
ple, for a modal analysis it is the modal frequency, and for a
transient analysis it is the the time value. To change this
value, make the set active, then enter the new value in the Set Value field. Since the set value can be used for X-
Y plotting, you can effectively change the scale of your X-Y plot by changing the set values for each output set.
Use the Notes feature to record detailed information about the output set. You can enter up to 256 characters, on
multiple lines. FEMAP also automatically reads some information from output files (date, time of run, file
name) and stores it in notes.
Notes are not plotted to the screen, but the List, Output, Unformatted command will list them with the other out-
put set information. By turning off all the vector information, you can obtain a listing of your sets and notes.
8.5.2 Model, Output, Vector...
... creates a new output vector or activates an existing
output vector.
An output vector is a collection of single data values for
each node or element. For example, the T1 Translation
output vector contains the X translation values for each
node. Each vector contains a single value per node or
element, but some vectors refer to other vectors for addi-
tional data. For example, Total Translation internally ref-
erences the T1, T2, and T3 translation vectors. Many of
the elemental output vectors such as stress or strain refer-
ence corner output vectors.
To create a new output vector, enter a new ID and a
descriptive Title.
To activate an existing vector, pick the vector from the
list.
The dialog box includes the following fields:
ID: Choose an ID between 300000 and 999999. For phase output, the ID must be between 1300000 and
1999999. For real complex output, choose between 2300000 and 2999999. For imaginary complex output,
choose between 3300000 and 3999999. FEMAP reserves vectors 1 to 299999 for use by the analysis program
output translators to ensure that the translators will not overwrite any of your output data.
Title: Make sure that you specify a descriptive title for new output vectors, since you will probably have many
vectors.
Data Selection: The Category and Type fields in this area limit the vectors that FEMAP lists when you are
selecting an output vector. You can choose one of the standard categories, or make your own by choosing Other.
If you choose Other, you must also enter a category number less than 255. If you don't want to limit the cate-
gory and type, choose Any Output.
Type: This area determines whether the data in the output vector will be On Node or On Element. FEMAP will
not use the vector correctly if you do not specify the proper type.
8.5.3 Model, Output, Define...
... creates or modifies output data for the active output set and vector.
To selectively update existing output data:
1. Pick the node or element to modify, or enter the node/element ID.
2. Enter a new output Data Value for this entity.
3. Press More to create this data entry and additional entries, or press Last One to create this data entry and return
to the FEMAP menu.
8.5.4 Model, Output, Fill...
... creates output data for the active output set and vector. You can specify an equation or a constant value that
defines the output for selected nodes or elements.
To use this command, first select the nodes or elements where you want to create output. Next, specify the equation
or value that you want to use for the selected entities.
The fields on the Calculate/Fill Output Data dialog box include:
ID
Enter a variable, or use the default ID Variable of i. Remember to use the variable in the equation.
Hint: If you select a specific output vector but the numeric values does not appear under ID, it is probably
because the output set is not active. To activate the output set, use Model, Output, Set, then use Model,
Output, Vector to pick the active vector.
Note: The Fill command will overwrite any existing values for a variable. If you defined the variable previ-
ously and want to preserve its value, you must choose a different variable, even if you do not use the
variable in your equation.
Model, Output, Process 8-35
Equation
Enter a constant value or equation.
To define a constant value for selected nodes or elements, enter the value in the Equation field, and press OK.
You can also use a real equation to define the output value.
Unlike other FEMAP equations, this equation has a special feature: the ID Variable is automatically defined as
equal to the ID of the entity (node or element) where the output will be created. You can use this variable in your
equation to vary the output value for each entity. For example, if you have selected a number of nodes and the ID
Variable is i, you could use the equation:
XND(!i)
to use the X coordinate of each node as the output value. Similarly, you could use:
SQRT(SQR(VEC(1;2;!i))+SQR(VEC(1;3;!i))+SQR(VEC(1;4;!i)))
to define output values in the current vector which are the vector magnitude of the data in Vectors 2, 3 and 4 from
Output Set 1.
For information on how to enter equations and functions, see Section C, "Function Reference" in the FEMAP User
Guide.
8.5.5 Model, Output, Process
Use the Process Output Data dialog box to manipulate output sets and individual vectors.
This dialog box lets you perform several types of operations on output sets and vectors:
copy (duplicate) output sets/vectors. For details, see Section 8.5.5.1, "Copying Output Sets and Vectors".
combine output sets/vectors. For details, see Section 8.5.5.2, "Combining Output Sets and Vectors".
combine output sets/vectors using linear combination. For details, see Section 8.5.5.3, "Creating Linear Combi-
nations".
combine output sets and vectors using the RSS (root sum square) technique. For details, see Section 8.5.5.4,
"Calculating RSS for Output Sets and Vectors".
convert nodal output to elemental output, and vice versa. For details, see Section 8.5.5.5, "Converting Nodal
and Elemental Data".
generate output sets/vectors using the envelope technique. For details, see Section 8.5.5.6, "Generating Output
Data Using an Envelope".
generate output set/vector error estimates. For details, see Section 8.5.5.7, "Generating Error Estimates for Out-
put Data".
Performing Operations on Output Sets and Vectors
The general process for performing an operation on output sets or vectors is as follows:
1. Under Options, pick the operation, such as Copy. For some operations, you may be able to select additional
options.
2. Under From, choose the input to the operation: Output Set or Output Vector. Use the pull-down menus to iden-
tify the specific output sets/vectors. For some operations, you may be able to select additional options such as
Scale Factor or Overwrite. (To perform an operation on multiple output sets, use the Multi-Set button.)
3. Under To, pick the output set that will be the result of the operation. Some operations will automatically create a
new output set for you. Some operations let you specify a group instead of an output set.
4. Pick Add Operation. The operation is now listed under Operations to Process.
5. You can continue to add operations of the same type to the list. When you are finished, pick OK to process the
operations and generate the new/modified output sets or vectors.
8.5.5.1 Copying Output Sets and Vectors
Use the Copy operation on the Process Output Data dialog box to duplicate output vectors or entire output sets. An
output set is always copied to a new output set. You can copy output vectors to an existing output set or to a new
output set.
Using this Option
To use this option, following the general steps in "Performing Operations on Output Sets and Vectors".
8.5.5.2 Combining Output Sets and Vectors
Use the Combine option on the Process Output Data dialog box to copy an output vector to another output set, or to
combine two entire output sets. For example, you could use this option to combine the Total Translation output
vectors from two different element types into the same output set.
When output sets/vectors are combined, duplicate output vectors and data values are skipped. The resulting out-
put set (the To set) contains one copy of the duplicate data. If Overwrite is on, the output vectors in the From set
will overwrite any existing output vectors or data values. If Overwrite is off, data in the From set will be
skipped if it already exists in the To set.
If output vectors in the From output set are different from those in the To output set, those vectors will be added
to the list of output vectors for the To output set.
Using this Option
To use this option, follow the general steps in "Performing Operations on Output Sets and Vectors".
8.5.5.3 Creating Linear Combinations
Use the Linear option on the Process Output Data dialog box to combine output vectors based on the following
formula:
where
V
out
is the vector that is created
V
i
are the vectors to combine, and
A
i
are the scale factors
V
out
{ } A
1
V
1
{ } A
2
V
2
{ } ... A
n
V
n
{ } + + + =
Calculating RSS for Output Sets and Vectors 8-37
You can create linear combinations of single output vectors or of entire output sets.
Some vectors cannot be linearly combined by this option. When FEMAP reads output from your analysis, certain
vectors are identified as being not linearly combinable. Examples of these are Principal Stresses, Von Mises
Stress, and Total Displacement. Instead of combining these vectors, FEMAP recalculates them based on their lin-
early combined components (if all necessary components exist). This recalculation is only possible when you com-
bine entire output sets.
Using this Option
8.5.5.4 Calculating RSS for Output Sets and Vectors
Use the RSS (root sum square) option on the Process Output Data dialog box to calculate output vectors based on
the following formula:
where
V
out
is the vector that was created
V
i
are the vectors to combine, and
A
i
are the scale factors
You can calculate the root sum square for output vectors or for entire output sets.
Some vectors cannot be combined by this option. When FEMAP reads output from your analysis, certain vectors
are identified as being not linearly combinable. Examples of these are Principal Stresses, Von Mises Stress, and
Total Displacement. Instead of combining these vectors, FEMAP recalculates them based on their linearly com-
bined components (if all necessary components exist). This recalculation is only possible when you combine entire
output sets.
Using this Option
8.5.5.5 Converting Nodal and Elemental Data
Use the Convert option on the Process Output Data dialog box to convert nodal output data to elemental data, and
vice-versa. Data is simply converted from the selected output vector into a new vector of the opposite type. The
title of the new vector will indicate that it is a converted vector, and will also show the ID of the original vector.
Some FEMAP post-processing options (contours, displacements, animations) use nodal data, while others (criteria
plots) use elemental data. No matter what post-processing option you choose, you can also choose any output vec-
tor - whether it contains nodal or elemental data. If the type of output you choose does not match the type required,
FEMAP automatically converts the data every time it needs to display your model.
When the display is updated, the converted data is discarded. Obviously, for large models, this can take some time.
In these cases, you can manually convert the vector, and then select the new, converted vector for post-processing.
In either case, the results will be displayed identically; however, the converted vector will plot much more rapidly.
Using this Option
For details on the Max/Avg options, see "How Convert Works".
For details on selecting a group for this option, see "When to Use a Group".
How Convert Works
Whenever you are using FEMAP to interpret output values, it is important to understand how your data is being
manipulated, especially when you look at contour plots. It is easy to draw incorrect conclusions if you do not prop-
erly understand what is being displayed.
For more information on contour plots, see Section 8.2.2.2, "Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style".
V
out
{ } A
1
V
1
{ }
2
A
2
V
2
{ }
2
... A
n
V
n
{ }
2
+ + + =
Converting Nodal Data to Elemental Data
The conversion process in this case is straightforward. Output values from all of the nodes referenced by an ele-
ment are simply averaged (or max value is used) to compute the elemental output value. If data does not exist at
one or more nodes, that node is skipped. It is not considered as a zero value; it is simply not considered in the aver-
age.
Converting Elemental Data to Nodal Data
This conversion process is somewhat more complex. In general, FEMAP calculates the nodal output value by aver-
aging the output values for all elements that reference that node. If you are converting an output vector that defines
data at element centroids, and there is no similar data available at the element corners, the centroidal data will be
used as the value at the node for that element. If you do have element corner data, however, the corner values at the
node will be used in place of the centroidal value. In either case, you can choose to average the values from all ele-
ments or take the maximum value.
When to Use a Group
If you do not specify a group, the conversion process will use data from every node or element in your model. This
is fine for many data types. For example, stresses in solid elements can often be converted this way.
In other cases, however, this type of conversion can lead to problems. For instance, suppose that you have a model
of a box-shaped structure that is made of plate elements. Also, suppose that you need to convert elemental stresses
to nodal stresses so that you can do a contour display. If you let FEMAP convert output from the entire model, dis-
crepancies will be introduced along the edges and at the corners of the box. At these locations, elements from dif-
ferent faces of the box join. If you convert the entire model, in-plane stresses from perpendicular faces will be
averaged together. These stresses are, in fact, located in different planes, and should never be averaged. Instead,
you should define a group that contains only the elements that make up a single side of the box. If you then select
that group, FEMAP will only use the stresses on the elements in that face. No errors will be introduced at the edges
or corners.
As in this example, you should always use a group when the conversion process would combine output from differ-
ent directions or planes. You may also want to use groups to isolate elements that reference particular properties or
materials. Depending on the type of data you are converting, combining data across cross-section or material
boundaries may or may not be accurate. It depends on whether the data you are converting must satisfy equilibrium
conditions across the boundary.
8.5.5.6 Generating Output Data Using an Envelope
Use the Envelope option on the Process Output Data dialog box to choose a method for combining data. For each
term (each vector or set that you want to envelope), you will select one of the three available methods: Min, Max, or
Max Abs. The resulting envelope is based on the following formula:
where
V
env
is the vector that is created
V
i
are the vectors to envelope, and
F
()
is the max, min, or absmax function
You can choose to envelope entire output sets or individual output vectors.
Using this Option
For details on the envelope options (Max, Min, or Max Abs), see "How Envelope Works".
For details on the Set Info option, see "Requesting Set Info".
For details on the Ply Summary option, see "Using Ply Summary".
V
env
{ } F V
n
{ } F V
n 1
{ } F ... V
1
{ } , ( ) , ( ) , ( ) =
Generating Error Estimates for Output Data 8-39
How Envelope Works
The first set or vector that you select is copied directly to the set or vector that will receive the enveloped data. If
you specify additional vectors, the data from those vectors is combined with the existing enveloped data. There are
three methods that you can use for the combination:
Max enveloping: This method compares the envelope and added vector, and uses the maximum value of the
node/element.
Min enveloping: This method compares the envelope and the added vector, and uses the minimum value of the
node/element.
Max Abs: This method compares the envelope and added vector, and uses the maximum absolute value of the
node/element. The enveloped data will still contain both positive and negative values. The absolute value of the
data is not saved; it is just used for the comparison.
For any method, if data does not exist for a node or element, in either the envelope or the additional vector, the
result will simply be the value of the data that did exist.
You can specify a single enveloping method, such as Max, and then select a series of vectors or sets using the
Multi-Set button. This will create a new output vector or set that contains the maximum (or minimum, or absolute
maximum) output values at all nodes or elements in the original data. You can also create much more complex
envelopes where you vary the enveloping method to find the maximum value of some output vectors, enveloped
with the minimum values of other output vectors. The possible combinations are limitless.
Requesting Set Info
The Set Info option creates an additional output set with the same vectors as the enveloped data. In this output set,
the output values will be the ID of the output set where the enveloped data value originated. This provides an easy
way to determine the worst case conditions for each output vector.
Using Ply Summary
If you are working with laminated plates with ply-by-ply results, or even with homogeneous plates with top, mid-
dle and bottom data, you can choose to compute ply summaries. If you turn on Ply Summary, you can choose any
layered plate output vector and compute a summary envelope for that output type. The ply summary will include
the same type of output for all layers/plies in your model. This is the same as picking each of the ply output vectors,
but is done automatically. Typically, you will want to set the output set (the To set) to match the From set: the
resulting envelope will then be placed in the same set as the original output.
8.5.5.7 Generating Error Estimates for Output Data
Use the Error Estimate option on the Process Output Data dialog box to estimate the accuracy of the data in a
selected output vector. This operation creates a new vector containing the estimate data. You can use any of the
post-processing methods to display and evaluate the error estimate vector.
All finite element models and finite element analyses are engineering approximations. Depending upon how many
elements you create, the shape of those elements, loading, boundary conditions, and many other factors, the accu-
racy of your model/approximation can be very good or very bad. One of the main problems in using finite element
results is that it is difficult to tell when the results truly represent reality. One historical method of verifying accu-
racy is to build a second model that is more refined (has more elements), and check to see if you get the same or
similar answers. If you do, the original approximation was reasonable. Unfortunately, this method takes a lot of
work, and a lot of computer resources to run the additional analyses.
The error estimation operation attempts to quantify the validity of your approximations, without doing any addi-
tional analysis or modeling. Even if the error estimations do not give you a definitive answer concerning the accu-
racy of your model, they will certainly point out the portions of your model which need the most careful
consideration. Typically, these will be areas where there are large gradients or localized changes in stress, displace-
ment or other output quantities. These areas are usually critical in your design, and unless you properly refine the
mesh, they can be poorly approximated.
The error estimates are based on these variations in output values. Ideally, within an element, or between elements
connected to a common node, the variations in output should be relatively small. To the degree that these quantities
vary, your model may not properly represent the true output state in that region. Error estimates show you how
much variation is present throughout your model.
Using this Option
Additional options for this operation include:
Error estimate method options. For details, see "How Error Estimate Works" and "Error Estimate Examples".
Skip if Below, which lets you specify a lower limit error value. At any node or element where the error estimate
is smaller than the value you specify, it will be set to zero. You can use this feature to highlight areas of your
model which have the most significant errors.
Use Output From, which lets you select the full model or a group. For details on selecting a group for this
option, see "When to Use a Group" under the Convert topic. While this topic does not specifically address error
estimates, it uses output vectors and groups in a similar manner.
How Error Estimate Works
Error estimates of nodal output data are calculated at the element centroids. Similarly, error estimates of elemental,
centroidal output data are calculated at the nodes. The error estimates need to look at the variations in output data.
An error estimate of nodal output data will be based on the gradients that data causes in each element. Hence the
estimate is actually calculated for the element. An error estimate of elemental, centroidal output data is based on
the differences that occur at the elemental boundaries. Specifically, FEMAP bases the calculations on the output
values from all elements connected to a specific node. That is why the error estimates are formulated at the nodes
for elemental data.
The calculation of error estimates for nodal output is fairly straightforward. The values at each node connected to
an element are simply compared. Error estimates for elemental data are more complicated. They follow the same
rules that FEMAP uses for the Convert option. Since this calculation is also done at nodes (element corners),
FEMAP needs to use the output value at the appropriate element corner for each node. If you recover elemental
corner output, FEMAP automatically uses these output values at each corner, even though you must select a cent-
roidal output vector. If you do not recover corner output, FEMAP simply uses the centroidal value from the output
vector that you selected.
You can choose any of six error estimation methods. All of them follow the procedures described above. The only
difference between them is the formula to calculate the estimate.
Max Difference Method
Difference from Average Method
% Max Difference Method
% Difference from Average Method
Value
Max
Value
Mi n
MAX Value
Max
Value
Avg
Value
Min
Value
Avg
( , )
Value
Max
Value
Min
Value
Avg
-------------------------------------------------------
100%
MAX Value
Max
Value
Avg
Value
Mi n
Value
Avg
( , )
Value
Avg
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100%
Generating Error Estimates for Output Data 8-41
Normalized % Max Difference Method
Normalized % Difference from Average Method
In each of these calculations, the Min, Max and Avg values refer to the minimum, maximum, and average output
values at the node or element where the error estimate is being calculated. The Vector Max values refer to the max-
imum value for all nodes or elements in the output vector. You will notice that all error estimates are either zero or
positive, since they all use the absolute value of the various factors.
The choice of an appropriate error estimation method largely depends on the conditions in your model. FEMAP
will allow you to calculate as many error estimates as you want. You just have to use the Error Estimate option
multiple times.
The following table lists the uses for each method..
Error Estimate Examples
A few brief examples with hypothetical data will help to illustrate the various error estimates:
Method Uses
Max Difference Identifies largest gradients in portions of the model with larg-
est output values.
Identifies steepest gradients in the most critical portions of
the model.
Difference from Average Identifies areas with largest output values. Areas where only
one or a few values are different are accentuated.
Identifies only steepest non-uniform gradients (those that
vary in a single direction).
% Max Difference Identifies same gradients as Max Difference, but does not distin-
guish between large and small output values. Use only if magni-
tude of the output is less important than the changes in output.
% Difference from Average Identifies same gradients as Difference from Average, but does
not distinguish between large and small output values. Use only
if magnitude of the output is less important than the changes in
output
Normalized % Max Differ-
ence
Best at quantifying overall errors in areas with peak output val-
ues.
Normalized % Difference
from Average
Best at quantifying overall errors in areas with peak output val-
ues.
Value
Max
Value
Min
Value
VectorMax
-------------------------------------------------------
100%
MAX Value
Max
Value
Avg
Value
Mi n
Value
Avg
( , )
Value
VectorMax
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100%
Suppose that you have output values surrounding some location (a node or element) that are 100, 100, 300, 300,
and at another location you have 100, 100, 100, 500, and at a third location you have 1, 1, 3, 3. The following error
estimates would be calculated:
You will notice that the two unnormalized percentage methods make no distinction between the first location with
100 and 300 output values and the last with 1 and 3. Also note how the Max Difference from Average method (and
the corresponding normalized percentage method) highlights the middle position where all values are constant
(100) except for the single 500 value. You will notice that the average values for the first and second output posi-
tions are identical (200), even though they represent very different conditions. If you just look at contour or overall
data, you will only see these averages.
8.5.6 Model, Output, Calculate...
... creates output based on an equation or constant value that you supply. (This command is similar to Model, Out-
put, Fill.)
For this command, you will follow these steps:
1. Select the output sets where the calculations will be done. FEMAP will automatically find a vector that does not
exist in any of the selected output sets, and use that vector. The active vector is not used.
2. Enter data on the Calculate/Fill Output
Data dialog box. The fields include:
Title: Enter the name for the new vectors
Nodal Data and Elemental Data: Select the
type of output data to be calculated.
ID Variable: This variable is automatically
defined and incremented with the ID of all of
the nodes or elements where the output will
be created. For details on this field, see Sec-
tion 8.5.4, "Model, Output, Fill...".
Set Variable: This variable is automatically
defined and incremented with the ID of all of the output sets where the output is created.
Equation: Enter a constant value or an equation. For details on this field, see Section 8.5.4, "Model, Output,
Fill...".
3. After you define the output calculations, select the nodes or elements where the output is to be calculated.
8.5.7 Model, Output, From Load...
... creates new output vectors based on loads in the active load set. You can use this command to convert your load
data to output data so that you can produce contour or other post-processing displays.
When you pick this command, FEMAP displays a dialog box that lets you to choose the type of load to convert.
Values Min Max Avg
Max
Diff
Max
Diff
from
Avg
%
Max
Diff
%
Diff
from
Avg
Nrm
%
Max
Diff
Nrm
%
Diff
from
Avg
100,100,
300,300
100 300 200 200 100 100% 50% 40% 20%
100,100,
100,500
100 500 200 400 300 200% 150% 80% 60%
1, 1, 3, 3 1 3 2 2 1 100% 50% 0.4% 0.2%
Model, Output, Transform... 8-43
After you make a selection and press OK,
you will see the standard entity selection
dialog box. You can limit the output that
will be created to some portion of your
model, or select your entire model. In
most cases, selecting the entire model is
most appropriate.
In general, output is only created on the
selected nodes/elements where loads of
the appropriate type have been defined in
the active load set. The only exceptions to
this are nodal and elemental temperatures.
In these cases, if you have defined a
default temperature with the Model, Load,
Body command, output data will be cre-
ated for all selected nodes or elements.
For those nodes or elements where tem-
peratures have been defined in the active
load set, those temperatures will be used directly. For any node or element that does not have a temperature
assigned, the default temperature for the load set will be used. If no default temperature has been defined, no output
data will be created for any node or element that does not have a temperature assigned.
When you convert temperature data, one new output vector will be created in the active output set. For pressures,
up to six vectors will be created, one for each element face where pressures are located. For plate elements, which
only have pressures on one face, there will only be one vector. When you convert the other load types, eight new
vectors will be created. Six of these will contain the six load components: three translation (X, Y and Z) and three
rotation (XR, YR and ZR). The final two vectors will contain the magnitudes of the translation and rotation compo-
nents.
8.5.8 Model, Output, Transform...
... allows you to transform output that references global X, Y, Z components (like Total Translation, Reaction
Forces, etc.) into any coordinate system that you choose. You may also convert element stresses, strains, and forces
into the material direction from the standard output direction.
When you choose this command, you will see the
Transform Output Data dialog box. There are two
transform options available:
Vector Output (displacements, forces, etc.)
Plate Forces, Stresses and Strains
Vector Output
Once you choose the Vector Output option:
1. Use the Into CSys field to choose the coordinate sys-
tem that you want to transform into.
2. Select the output set and output vector that you want
to transform. Typically you will want to pick the
Total vector, (like Total Translation), not a compo-
nent vector (like X Translation). If you want to trans-
form just the vector that you select, make certain that All Sets is not checked. If you want to transform that vector
in every output set, turn on All Sets.
What You Get - Vector Output
This command creates 12 new output vectors from the single vector that you select. These vectors are the three
transformed components of the original global data, and nine additional vectors that are the global X, Y, Z compo-
nents of the transformed components. FEMAP needs these additional nine vectors so that you can use the trans-
formed component vectors for deformed plots, arrow plots, or other post-processing options that really work with
global components.

Plate Forces, Stresses, and Strains
This option allows you to transform standard component plate forces, stresses, and strains from the output coordi-
nate system to the material angle coordinate system. If you want to see component stresses output in a specific
coordinate system, change the material angle for the elements by using the Modify, Update Elements, Material
Angle command. You can use this command to align the material angle of each element to a coordinate system.
FEMAP automatically uses the material angle for each output and the standard output vectors in the selected output
set (unless you select All Sets) to transform the components into the material angle coordinate system for each ele-
ment.
The only other input required is the definition of the original component data,
which must be selected in the Transform dialog box.
This dialog box will appear one time for each type of data to transform
(Stress, Strain, and Force), for each type of plane element in the model (Tria3,
Quad4, Tria6, and Quad8). Therefore, as many as 12 questions could be
asked, but a more typical number would be four to six. Consult your analysis
programs documentation concerning the original coordinate system defini-
tion. The new component forces, stresses, and strains will be placed in the
user defined output vector numbers (300000+).
8.5.9 Model, Output, Extrapolate...
... allows you to linearly extrapolate output from the center of planar or solid elements to the element corners. By
extrapolating output to the element corners, you can often get a better understanding of the output distributions near
the surface of your model.
Note: This technique cannot match or improve upon the corner stresses that are generated by your analysis
program. If possible, you should recover corner stresses directly from the analysis program, since they
are typically based on the underlying element formulations.
In some cases, however, analysis programs do not produce corner values, and this command can be
used to get a reasonable approximation. It simply uses a linear interpolation scheme based on the cent-
roidal output provided by your analysis program. It is not based on any element representations.
Total Translation
X Translation (CSys 0)
Y Translation (CSys 0)
Z Translation (CSys 0)
Radial Translation (CSys 1)
X Component of Radial Translation
Y Component of Radial Translation
Z Component of Radial Translation
Theta Translation (CSys 1)
X Component of Theta Translation
Y Component of Theta Translation
Z Component of Theta Translation
Z Translation (CSys 1)
X Component of Z Translation
Y Component of Z Translation
Z Component of Z Translation
Transform into CSys 1
Original Vector
You Get:
Model, Output, Extrapolate... 8-45
When you choose Model, Output, Extrapolate, you will
see the Calculate Output at Element Corners dialog
box.
To extrapolate a single vector to the element corners,
specify the Output Set and Output Vector that you want.
You can also use multiple vectors by selecting All Sets
or All Vectors. If you choose both, all output will be
extrapolated. If you choose just All Sets, the selected
vector will be extrapolated in all output sets. Choosing
All Vectors will extrapolate all output in the selected
set.
Choosing Calculation Options
Calculation Options provide control over how FEMAP
will extrapolate your output.
Segmenting Your Model
When doing the extrapolation, FEMAP can either con-
sider all elements in your model as one continuous group, or it can segment your model based on discontinuities in
geometry, properties or materials. While the Extrapolate across all Elements method is faster, it ignores the fact
that output values can be discontinuous at material or geometric boundaries. It is usually best, therefore, to allow
FEMAP to segment your model. If you already know that there are no discontinuities in your model, however, you
can choose the other method to save some time.
If you choose to segment your model, you will see an additional dialog box where you can specify segmentation
options. This technique is identical to that used in the Group, Operations, Generate command. For details, see
"Group, Operations, Generate..." under Section 6.4.3.2, "Group, Operations Menu".
Projection Method
By choosing a projection method, you can decide how FEMAP should
extrapolate your output. The methods are best described by examples.
FEMAP will always (no matter which projection method you choose)
compute the corner values at the interior nodes (7,8,9,12,13,14,17,18, and
19) as a geometric average of the centroidal values for the surrounding
elements.
Geometric average means that the distance from the centroid to the node
is used as a weighting factor in the average. Closer centroids get a higher
weighting factor than more distant ones. At these interior nodes, the cor-
responding corner values in all adjoining elements will be equal.
After computing values at the interior nodes, we are left with boundary
nodes(1-5, 6, 10, 11, 15, 16, 20, and 21-25). To determine values at these corners, we must extrapolate the existing
output distribution. You will examine what happens at element 2:
Consider the corner at node 3. If you choose the Project onto Edge method, the centroidal value is first projected
normal to the element edge (8-3), and then along the edge to node 3. In this case, the first projection did not fall at
the edge center, and the value at the corner will be weighted based on relative distances between the projected loca-
tion and nodes 3 and 8.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 22 23 24 25
1
2
3
5
6
2
3
7
8
Project onto Edge Use at Centroid
1
2
3
5
2
3
7
8
If you choose the Use at Centroid method, the centroidal value is simply considered to be the value at the midpoint
of every edge. Regardless of the element shape/skew, the midpoint is always set to the centroidal value. In this
example, the value at corner node 3 would just be the centroidal value plus the difference between the value at cor-
ner node 8 and the centroidal value. If you look at a corner node, like node 1, multiple extrapolations along the
edges are computed.
For perfectly rectangular elements, both methods give the same result. In general, however, the Use at Centroid
method seems to give the most reasonable overall results. If you have a highly skewed mesh, especially in an area
of a relatively steep gradient, the Projection method can often result in extremely large variations due to the projec-
tion. This occurs if the projected location falls very near to the node that you are projecting from. In that case, the
length ratios become very large and the accuracy of the projection becomes suspect. You should therefore only
choose this alternate method if you know that your mesh is not highly skewed.
If you also look at what happens in element 3, you would see a similar extrapolation toward node 3. However, in
general, the corner values at node 3 will be different in the two elements, just as they normally would from your
analysis program. If you later do a contour plot of this output, how this situation is handled depends upon the view
options that you choose. You can either choose to average the values, or to display the maximum.
This example showed a simple case where the entire model consisted of one plane of continuous elements. The
nodes on the boundary were simply the free edges of the model. In a real model, the same technique is used, but
you would normally choose the option to let FEMAP segment the model. FEMAP then considers each segment
independently. The free boundaries are the free edges of the segment, not of the entire model.
If you are working with solid elements, the process is identical, just a little harder to visualize. Interior corner val-
ues are computed from geometric averages of the surrounding centroidal values. Values at the corners on free
boundaries/faces are computed by projections along the element edges. It is again usually best to choose the Use at
Centroid method, since relatively skewed solid elements are fairly common.
8.5.10 Model, Output, Convert Complex...
... enables you to create real/imaginary pairs from
magnitude/phase data read from frequency response
results, and vice versa.
You can choose to convert a single output vector, an
Entire Set of output vectors, or convert All Sets. All
Sets can be performed with Entire Set to convert all
data in all sets, or without Entire Set, which converts
only the chosen output vector in all sets.
Newly converted real/imaginary pairs are located in
their respective output positions (Real: 2300000/
3000000; Imaginary: 3300000/4000000) in the out-
put set from which they were created. Newly converted magnitude/phase pairs go into the their respective output
positions (Magnitude: 300000/1000000 or Phase 1300000/2000000). For this command to complete successfully,
both of the vectors that form the complex components must exist, and neither of the converted vectors can exist (to
prevent converting and reconverting of the same output).
8.5.11 Model, Output, Expand Complex...
... creates new output at specified phase intervals based upon selected magnitude/phase data. This has the effect of
converting complex output into one or more sets of real output at specific phase values.
When you choose this command, you will create new output sets for each phase value where you expand the com-
plex output.
Model, Output, Expand Complex... 8-47
If you choose Single Phase, you will only get one set, at
that value.
With Phase Range, however, you can expand the com-
plex output through a range of phases. Typically you will
want to choose the entire phase range: 0 to 360. This will
generate output sets that you can use with MultiSet ani-
mation to visualize phase relationships in your results.
You can choose the number of sets/frames by setting the
Increment.
When you choose the Phase Range option, no output is
generated for the Last Phase value. This prevents dupli-
cation of the phase data at 0 and 360 degrees.
8.6 Listing Output (List, Output Menu)
The commands on this submenu allow you to create reports of output data contained in your model. The different
commands allow you to control the format of those reports. The List, Output, Query command lets you interac-
tively retrieve output for selected nodes and elements, while List, Output, Compare obtains differences between
outputs. In addition to the other reporting commands, the List, Output, Format command creates a report which
lists the output report formats which have been defined in your model.
8.6.1 List, Output, Query...
... interactively retrieves output for selected nodes or elements. When you need to quickly retrieve the output for
one or more nodes or elements, this is the command to use.
The Output Query dialog box lets you select the output set that contains the output data of interest. If you want to
recover data from all available output sets, instead of just one, choose the All Sets option.
The output that is reported is limited to the type of output you select. For example, if you only want stress output,
select the stress category. Select Any Output if you want to report all available output from the set or sets that you
select.
In addition to choosing the output set and data category you want, you must choose to recover data for either a
node, or an element and then specify its ID. As always, you can select the ID graphically, but you must first identify
whether you want a node or an element.
To produce the report, press either More or OK. If you press More, you will be able to recover additional data with-
out choosing the command again. If you choose OK, you will be returned to the FEMAP menu. Unlike most com-
mands, you will notice that More is the default command button for this dialog box. This enables you to easily
query multiple output entries just by pressing Enter. Also, after you choose More, the input cursor will jump back
to the ID field, so you can choose a new node or element.
Since More is the default command button, you can simply double-click a node or element to select it and automat-
ically press More. Using this technique, you can query the output for multiple entities simply by repeatedly double-
clicking on each one with the left mouse button.
The amount of output that is reported, depends on the types of output that are present in your model. The format of
the report looks like the following:
Hint: When selecting entities graphically, make certain the focus is in the ID box (i.e. the ID box must be
active) by clicking in the ID box. If you do not, and the focus of the window is not in the ID input area,
you will not be able to select items graphically.
List, Output, Compare... 8-49
The sample shown above lists only a few items. If you have elemental corner stresses, or stresses on top or bottom
faces of an element, they will all be listed. If you choose All Sets, all data types for each set are listed before the
next set begins. This report, just like all others, is written to all destinations which you specify in the List Destina-
tion command.
This command can be used very effectively when you are doing detailed analysis. With it, you can often replace
voluminous printouts or reports of model output, that have usually been required to look-up data for further cal-
culations. Instead, have FEMAP display the appropriate portion of your model. Then choose the List Output Query
command. Whenever you need output for a given node or element, pick the type of output you want, choose the
Node or Element option, and double click on the entity you want to query. FEMAP will immediately report the out-
put you need in the Messages window. You can even make the display a contour or criteria plot, to visually lead
you to critical areas where you can then query.
8.6.2 List, Output, Compare...
... can be used to compare output from individual vec-
tors or entire output sets. When you invoke this com-
mand, the Compare Output Data dialog box is
displayed.
With this dialog box, you can choose whether to com-
pare the entire set of output data, or just one pair of vec-
tors. If you choose List Details, the output at any
individual nodes or elements which differs will be
reported. Whether the output differs depends on the Max
Difference you choose. Any values which differ by a
smaller (or equal) percentage than you specify will be
considered as identical and will not be listed.
The final entries in this dialog box let you choose the
output sets and vectors that are to be compared. If you
are comparing entire sets, only the output sets can be
specified; otherwise both sets and vectors are required.
A report similar to the following is written to the active List Destination.
This sample report includes the detailed differences between the two vectors. For each node where data differs, the
data values from both vectors are listed along with the difference. The final line also shows the ID and value of the
Hint: If you want to query the model quickly for a specific stress and/or displacement at given nodes or ele-
ments, it is often easier to use the Dynamic Query option in FEMAP. Simply display the deformed and
contour plot of the desired results, change the dynamic query from Off (lower right hand corner of sta-
tus bar/tray) to either Node or Element, and then hold the cursor at a given node or element location.
FEMAP will then provide a box listing the displayed output information for that node or element. You
can then quickly move to other entities to obtain their results. When the box information is visible, you
can even left click in the area to send the information to the list destination, or right click to annotate the
model with this text at that location. For more information, see Section 5.10.3, "Reporting Results".
maximum difference (MxDiff), and the ID and value of the maximum percentage difference (MxPct). Finally, the
dot product (Dot) of the two vectors is given.
Other Uses for this Command
In addition to simply comparing data to find similarities, you can use this command to do a quick check on the
orthogonality of output vectors. This can be important when looking at eigenvectors from a modal analysis. All you
have to do is select the two vectors you want to check, turn off the detailed report, and look at the dot product. If the
vectors are orthogonal the dot product will be zero.
8.6.3 List, Output, Summary to Data Table...
provides an ability to quickly scan results for max/min values. It allows you to select the output sets and vectors
that you want to investigate, processes them to find max/min values in various formats, and sends it to the Data
Table dockable pane, where you can further group, sort and filter the data to find the critical values you need.
When you choose this command you will see the following dialog box:
Report Style
These options allow you to specify the type of
data you want in the summary. Choose "Vector
Summary" if you want one line in the report for
each selected output vector. This provides the
max/min values for the entire output vector. If
you choose "by Property ID" or "by Material
ID", you will be asked for the properties or mate-
rials that you want to summarize after you close
this dialog box. In these cases, you will get a
larger report - for each selected output vector,
you will get one line for each selected property
or material. These lines will contain the max/min
values only for elements that reference that prop-
erty or material. Nodal output is not available in
either of these methods. These options can be used to quickly find critical values to compare against property/mate-
rial allowables.
Report Contents
If you choose "Vector Data", then the report contains max/min data for each individual output vector, in each out-
put set, that you select. For "Envelope Data", you will see max/min values for each output vector, but the max min
is computed ("enveloped") across all selected output sets.
Output Selection
These options allow you to choose the specific output data that you want to include in the report. "Full Output Sets"
automatically chooses all output vectors in the sets that you choose with the standard entity selection dialog after
you close this box. If you choose "Specific Output Vectors", you can choose the sets that you want, but you can also
limit the output vectors in the report. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will see the following, if you choose
this option.
If Include Results at Element Corners is checked, then results at element corners will be included in the Results to
Add to Data Table dialog, and in the report.
Hint: If you compare data that is identical, you will not see the header information for each vector as it is
compared. If you want to see this information, redo the command, but set the maximum difference to
zero (make sure List Details is off). This will list all header information and the last line summary for
each vector.
List, Output, Summary to Data Table... 8-51
The Results to Add to Data Table dialog box allows you to choose Output Sets and Output Vectors to be shown as
columns in the Data Table. When multiple models are open, the name of the active model will appear at the top of
the Results to Add to Data Table dialog box.
Along with checking and unchecking the boxes, you can also highlight the selected Output Set or Output Vector
and click the Toggle Set Selection or Toggle Vector Selection buttons, respectively.
If you check Select Similar Layer/Ply/Corner Vectors, you can select all similar data without worrying about
checking all of the output vectors. For example, if you turn on this option, and select the vector "Plate Bot Von
Mises Stress" (the centroidal Von Mises Stress at the bottom fiber of a plate/shell element), you will automatically
also get the centroidal Von Mises Stress at the top fiber, and, if you have selected "Include Results at Element Cor-
ners", you will get the bottom and top Von Mises Stress at all of the element corners. Similarly, for laminate ele-
ments, this option allows you to select results for all plys without having to select them manually. When using this
option it does not matter which output vector location you choose, you will get the similar data for all locations.
Once finished, click OK and view the Summery in the Data Table
Additional Summary for Selected
In all cases, when you use this command, the report lines will contain max/min data for either the entire output vec-
tor or the property/material you select. In addition to that overall max/min data, if you want to compute max/min
data for specific nodes and/or elements within the vectors/properties/materials, these options allow you to select the
nodes and elements of interest. If you check one or both of these, you will see a standard entity selection dialog box
after you say OK in the Send Output Vectors to Data Table dialog box to select the entities you need. These options
do not change the basic max/min data, nor the lines that are added to the report in any way - they simply add more
columns to the report which contain max/min data for your selections.
Data in the Report
This command always adds the same columns to the Data Table. Depending on the options you select, some of
these columns may be automatically hidden, however you can make them visible by using the Hide/Show Columns
Menu in the Data Table. See Section 7.2.5, "Tools, Data Table" for more information.
The following data is available:
ModelID - the ID of the current model
SetID - the ID of the output set that contains the results being reported. This field is not visible, and not useful if
you choose to Envelope results, since the max/min data comes from multiple sets.
ID - the output vector ID
Property - the property being summarized. Only visible and useful for the "by Property ID" report style
Material - the material being summarized. Only visible and useful for the "by Material ID" report style
Total/Centroidal ID - The common output vector ID shared by all similar output. For example the Von Mises
stress at the top, middle, bottom, centroid and corners of a plate/shell element will all have a common value. The
specific numbers here are not important, but the fact that they are common allow you to use this column to quickly
sort or group similar data in the report.
Title - The output vector title
Output Type - the type of output in the vector (Displacement, Stress)
Location - the location of the output (Nodal, Element Centroid, Element Corner)
Min SetID, Min ID, Min Value, Max SetID, Max ID, Max Value, Max Abs Value - The max/min data for the
output vector, or the property/material in the output vector. Min SetID and Max SetID are only visible and useful if
you are enveloping, in which case they show the ID of the output set where the max/min was found. Min ID and
Max ID are the node or element ID where the min/max occurs, and Min Value and Max Value are the associated
values. Max Abs Value is always hidden initially, but contains the maximum absolute value of Min Value and Max
Value. Since this data is signed, Min Value can be a negative number with a larger magnitude than Max Value.
Min SetID Selected, Min ID Selected, Min Value Selected, Max SetID Selected, Max ID Selected, Max Value
Selected, Max Abs Value Selected - These columns are empty and hidden unless you select nodes and/or elements
for additional summaries. In that case, they contain similar data to the other max/min columns, but limited to
results taken from the selected nodes and elements.
List, Output, Results to Data Table... 8-53
8.6.4 List, Output, Results to Data Table...
provides the ability to quickly send chosen output vector values for specific nodes or elements (from any num-
ber of selected output sets) to the Data Table using a specified Report Style. Once in the Data Table, the values
can be sorted for a particular output category, compared to the values in different output sets, copied to the clip-
board, or the entities shown in the model using the Show When Selected icon.
When you choose this command you will see the following dialog box:
Report Style
These options allow you to specify how the three choices (Output Sets, Output Vectors, Nodes/Elements) will be
displayed in the Data Table. You must have at least one of the choices appear in rows and one in columns. The
other choice is up to you.
Output Selection
Specifies whether to send Nodal or Elemental output to the Data Table in the specified Report Style. The chosen
Output Selection option limits the Output Vectors available to choose in the Results to Add to Data Table dialog box
(i.e., when Nodal is chosen, only Nodal Output such as displacements and forces will be available to pick). When
Elemental output is chosen, if Include Results at Element Corners is checked, then results at element corners will
be available in the Results to Add to Data Table dialog box.
For more information on the Results to Add to Data Table dialog box, see Section 8.6.3, "List, Output, Summary to
Data Table...".
Here is a sample Data Table report using Output Sets and Output Vectors in Columns, Nodes/Elements in Rows,
and Nodal Output Selection:(1..Total Translation and 5..Total Rotation in Output Sets 1 and 2).
Hints: Use the grouping capability of the Data Table to quickly categorize your report. Depending on
what you are looking for, you might want to use the "Total/Centroidal ID" column, the "Property
ID" column, or even "Output Type" or combinations of these as grouping strategies.
Sorting by Max Value or Min Value can quickly find peaks in groups of similar output - whether
the peak occurs at the centroid, element corner, or top/bottom fibers.
Filters can be used to reduce the amount of data shown
Another sample using the same selected output, but this time Output Vectors in Columns, Output Sets and Nodes/
Elements in Rows, and Nodal Output Selection.
8.6.5 List, Output, Nodal Changes to Data Table...
provides an ability to quickly compare the dis-
tance and angle between a single node and set of
selected nodes in the undeformed model to the
distance and angle between those nodes in the
deformed model (sometimes known as Relative
Displacements). The change between those values
is also listed to the Data Table.
There is also the option to list the output value for
a single node compared to output values of a set of
selected nodes. The value for each node and the
difference between the output values are listed to
the Data Table.
You also have the option to choose which coordi-
nate system to Report the Data Table.
.
.
.
Hint: With this Report Style configuration, a good idea might be to turn on the Group Headers in the
Data Table (6th icon from left), and then drag the Set Title or Set ID column header into the
Header Area. Now you will see Report has been segmented into two sections and any sorting will
only use the values under each header to determine higher or lower values.
List, Output, Unformatted... 8-55
8.6.6 List, Output, Unformatted...
... produces an unformatted report of selected
output data. Actually, the report is not unfor-
matted; rather, it is just presented in a very sim-
ple one or three-column format without elaborate
headers or labels.
After selecting the output sets to list, using the
entity selection dialog box, you will see a dialog
box which allows you to customize this report. If
you choose All Data in the Data Format section,
the entity selection dialog box will not appear
and all the data from the entities corresponding
to the selected type of output will be listed.
The full report consists of five sections: output set data, output vector data, output vector statistics, detailed output
data, and summary data, at each node or element. Each of these sections can independently be enabled or disabled.
You can also choose to list data on all vectors in each of the selected sets, or simply select a single vector to be
listed from each set. If you are listing the detailed output data, you can choose either a three-column or one-column
format. The three column format produces a shorter listing; the one column format is often better for transferring
data to other applications.
If All Data is not selected, the maximum and minimum in the summery will only reflect the nodes and elements
which have been selected, not the global maximum and minimum of the entire vector.
Unformatted output reports in three-column format resemble this sample:
Obviously, many variations on this format are also available by choosing other options. The sample shows all four
sections enabled in the three column format. The output vector statistics are shown after the data columns. The
Calc flag indicates whether this vector can be linearly combined. The Component Dir flag indicates whether there
are additional vectors of data in your model which represent the XYZ components of this vector. This flag will also
be true for vectors which contain elemental centroidal data if elemental corner data is present in your model. When-
ever the Component Dir flag is true, several additional lines will be added to the report (as shown) to identify the
other component vectors.
The summary data, shown at the bottom of the listing, provides a quick way to find overall peak displacements,
forces, or stresses. Depending on the vectors you list, these values may compare dissimilar values, but they will
always list the peaks. For example, the stress summary considers all types of stress. No distinction is made between
normal, principal or calculated values (such as Von Mises).
8.6.7 List, Output, Standard...
... produces reports of your output data in formats which resemble those used by the various analysis programs, or
which you have added to the format library.
To produce a standard output report, you first select the output sets that you want to report. The report format and
other customization options are then specified on the List Formatted Output dialog box.
The Format ID list box will contain a list of all of the formats which are in the format library. You can choose a dif-
ferent format library using the File, Preferences, Libraries command. The format you choose from this list will be
used to create your report.
8.6.7.1 Customizing Your Output Report
The additional options on the List Formatted Output dialog box allow you to customize the content of your report.
You can select what data to report and the order that it will be reported.
Title:
The text that you type in this field will be added to the top of each page of your report. This provides a quick way
of adding a description to the report, without changing the report format. For example, you could add a description
of the entities that you selected to produce the report.
Sorting:
The Sort Field option in this section of the dialog box lets you select an output vector for sorting. If you select a
vector, it will be sorted in the order you choose. If you choose ascending order it will be sorted with the minimum
values first. Otherwise, it will be sorted with the maximum values first. If you choose Absolute Value, the sorting
will be based on the absolute value of the values in the Sort Field.
When you choose a Sort Field, the report is listed based on the sorted order of the data in the sort vector. The sort
vector does not actually have to be listed in the report. If you do not choose a sort vector, data is simply listed in
order of the node/element IDs. Even with no sort vector, the Ascending option still controls the order in which the
report will be listed.
Top N:
These options control whether the data from All nodes/elements will be reported. You can also limit the report to
output from only the top or bottom entities. If you choose one of the limiting options, you must also specify the
Finishing the Report 8-57
Number of Nodes/Elements you want listed. Top really lists the final entries in the report. These entries will be the
maximum entries if the report is sorted in ascending order. It will be the minimum entries however, if the report is
not in ascending order. Similarly, Bottom selects the first entries in the report.
Limits:
Like Top N, these options limit the data that will be reported. Unlike Top N, however, these options are based on the
values of the output in the sort field. If you do not choose a sort vector, these limits will have no effect.
To set limits, you must first choose a selection method. For example, Above Maximum will only report output
which is above the value that you select. Then specify the minimum and/or maximum limit values, whichever is
required. You can also choose Absolute Value to base the limit checking comparison on the absolute value of the
output data. The default option, None, disables limit checking.
Options:
There are two sections to every report - Details and Summaries. The Details section contains the actual report of
data for each selected node/element. It is listed in the format you choose. The Summaries section contains summary
information (maximum/minimum values) for each vector in your report. These summaries are listed at the end of
each output set, and at the end of the report. You cannot control the format of the summaries. The default option,
Full Report, enables both sections of the report. The other options enable only one section of the report.
Choosing Skip Empty will skip detailed data lines for nodes/elements which do not have any output data of the
types requested. If data exists for any of the output vectors selected in the report, this option has no effect. In any
report, fields which are undefined (no data exists) are listed as asterisks (*******).
Entity List:
If you turn on this option, a list of the IDs of all selected nodes or elements is added to the top of the report. This list
can be quite long if you have a large model, but it can be invaluable if you are limiting the actual output with the
Top N or Limits options. It can also be helpful when you use more complicated selection techniques like box pick-
ing or groups.
The following is a sample entity list:
8.6.7.2 Finishing the Report
After you select all report options and press OK, you must select the nodes or elements that you want to be included
in the report. You will use the standard entity selection dialog box for this selection.
8.6.8 List, Output, Use Format...
... allows you to produce custom reports in formats that you define.
To produce an output report, you first select the output sets that you want to report. The report format and other cus-
tomization options are then specified on the List Formatted Output dialog box which was described in List Output
Standard. In this case however, the Format ID list box will contain a list of all of the formats which have been
defined in your current model (not the format library). You can choose one of these (if there are any), or use the
New Format command button to define a new format. The format you choose from this list will be used to create
your report.
8.6.8.1 Defining New Formats
When you choose New Format, you will see the Define Output Format dialog box which gives you the option to
define Titles for the format, as well as the specific data to be reported.
Titles
There are three types of titles available: format title, page titles, and column title. The format title is not part of the
report, but it will be used later to select this format. You should always specify a descriptive title. You can also
specify two page title formats. These formats are listed at the top of every page of your report. If you choose to
have these titles horizontally centered, the final position depends on the width of the longest format line. You can
also insert a blank line after each title.
The column title format is actually a third title line which will be written at the top of the detailed data. It is usually
used to place a title over each column of data. The four data format lines are used to specify the data to be written
for each node/element in the report. Any of these format lines which are blank will be skipped when the report is
written.
Specifying Data Fields for Your Report
The various format lines which you specify can contain either text/labels or can identify data vectors to be listed.
Most data fields will be found in the data format lines, but some special cases can be used in any format line. A data
field is specified in the following manner:
< VectorID, Digits, EFormat, LeftJustify >
where:
< > characters define the width (and location) of the data field.
VectorID contains the ID of the output vector to be selected.
Digits specifies the number of significant digits which are to be written.
The EFormat controls exponential output of values (Y or N).
LeftJustify controls whether the numeric values are left or right justified or aligned within the field width (also Y
or N).
If the EFormat is Y, the field will always be written in exponential format. Otherwise, it will be in floating point
format or exponential format based on the value and field width. In either case, output values that are zero will sim-
ply be written as 0., not 0.0000E+00I. If this option is skipped the default value is Y.
The default value for LeftJustify is N if the option is skipped. If you skip this field a default will be assumed based
on the width of the field.
Copying Formats 8-59
Several special VectorID values can be used, such as:
The special values, -1 and -2 are often used in the page titles. If VectorID is 0 or -1, the Digits and EFormat options
are ignored since the selected values are integers.
Limitations
The following limitations must be met for all formats:
Formats can be up to 132 characters wide.
You can define up to 40 data fields per format. Each field can be up to 80 characters wide. The fields can be
placed all on one line (assuming the maximum format width is not exceeded) or spread across all lines.
The number of significant digits must always be less than the field width and should be a relatively small num-
ber. Choosing more than 7 or 8 significant digits is relatively meaningless. The output data that FEMAP reads
from your analysis program is probably not that accurate.
You must have at least one data field in a format. Blank formats, or formats with all text are not allowed.
In general, you can place any text anywhere between data fields in a format. You should never use the charac-
ters < or > however. These characters indicate data fields, not text.
The number of < and > must always be equal on every format line. Data fields can not extend across lines.
All data vectors which are referenced in a format must have the same type. Nodal output data cannot be mixed
with elemental output. Elemental centroidal and elemental corner data can be mixed.
8.6.8.2 Copying Formats
If you need to create a format that is similar to another in your model, you do not have to enter the format data man-
ually. Pressing the Copy button will display a list of all existing formats. When you choose an entry from the list,
the format data will be copied and displayed in the current dialog box. You can then modify this data in any way
you want, or even change your mind and copy a different format, before pressing OK.
8.6.8.3 Working with Format Libraries
Format libraries allow you to create formats that you can use over and over again in many different models. The
default or standard format library contains formats which mimic those from various analysis programs. When you
press Save, the current format is added to the format library file. Pressing Load will display a list of the formats in
the library and let you choose one to be loaded into the dialog box. Just like Copy, you can then modify the values
before pressing OK.
The name of the format library file is specified by the File, Preferences, Libraries command. You can work with
multiple libraries simply by choosing a new filename.
8.6.8.4 Modifying Existing Formats
Just as you can choose the New Format command button to define a new report format, you can also choose Modify
Format to update an existing format. Before choosing this button, you must first select the format to be updated
from the list box.
8.6.9 List, Output, Force Balance
...allows you to list all of the forces acting on a node. This data is only available if you have requested, and recov-
ered grid point force data from Nastran.
VectorID Interpretation
0 (or blank) Node/Element ID
-1 Output Set ID
-2 Output Set value (frequency...)
1 thru 99999999 Output Data value from selected VectorID
8.6.10 List, Output, XY Plot...
...simply lists the XY values for the active XY plot to the List Destination (typically the Messages window). No
other input is required. The active window must contain an XY plot for this command to be available. You can set
the List Destination option to a file to have this information exported directly to a file.
8.6.11 List, Output, Format...
... will list selected report formats. These are the formats which are defined and used with the List Output Use For-
mat command. Only formats which are defined in your model can be listed. Formats which are in the format library
cannot be listed unless they are first loaded into a model format.
There are no options with this command. You simply select the formats to be listed using the standard entity selec-
tion dialog box and the report is produced. The format resembles the following:
You will notice that the listing simply duplicates the fields described above for defining the format. This includes
blank lines for any titles/format lines which are blank.
8.7 Deleting Output (Delete, Output Menu)
The Delete, Output menu provides the capability to remove output from your model. This can be very useful for
removing results which are no longer applicable, and reduce the size of your FEMAP model. The Delete Output
menu is partitioned into two segments. The commands on the top portion delete actual output in your model. The
command on the second segment, Delete Output Format, does not delete any output. It simply removes a reporting
format from your model.
8.7.1 Delete, Output Set...
... removes entire output sets from your model. You simply select the output sets using the standard entity selection
dialog box. FEMAP will then ask if it is OK to delete the output set(s). This is the only input required for this com-
mand.
Output Format 3 - Loaded Displacements
Page Title 1 AutoCenter N DblSpace Y Page Title 2 AutoCenter N DblSpace N
STATIC ANALYSIS DISPLACEMENTS

Column Title Format
NODE X TRANS Y TRANS Z TRANS X ROT Y ROT Z ROT
Data Formats
< 0> < 2,4 > < 3,4 > < 4,4 > < 6,4 > < 7,4 > < 8,4 >

Output Format 4 - Loaded Solid Stresses
Page Title 1 AutoCenter N DblSpace Y Page Title 2 AutoCenter N DblSpace N
S T R E S S E S I N S O L I D E L E M E N T S (H E X A)
-CENTER AND CORNER POINT STRESSES- MEAN
Column Title Format
NORMAL SHEAR PRINCIPAL PRESSURE
Data Formats
< 0 >
CENTER X < 9025,6 > XY < 9028,6 > A < 9022,6 > < 9021,6 >
Y < 9026,6 > YZ < 9029,6 > B < 9023,6 >
Z < 9027,6 > ZX < 9030,6 > C < 9024,6 >
Note: One of the major reasons to delete output is to reduce the size of your model. Output can require a sig-
nificant amount of disk space, especially in comparison to the size of a FEMAP model which does not
contain output. When you delete output, however, you will not see a change in the model size until you
do a File, Rebuild (see Section 2.6.1, "File, Rebuild..."). FEMAP does not compact the database, and
therefore recover the additional space used by the output until you compact the database using File,
Rebuild.
Delete, Output Vector... 8-61
8.7.2 Delete, Output Vector...
...allows you to delete output vectors from an output set. When you select this command, you will see the Delete
Output Vectors dialog box.
You can select an individual output vector or an entire output category to delete. You can also delete a range of out-
put vectors by choosing the first output vector in the range from the From drop-down list and the last from the
To drop down list.
Stress and strain have the added capability to delete only the components (leaving the invariants such as Von Mises
stress) or all vectors in that category.
8.7.3 Delete, Output, Entry...
... enables you to remove output on specific nodes or elements in your model from selected Output Vectors in
selected Output Sets. When you choose this command, FEMAP will first ask you to select Output Sets to delete
from, then will ask you for the specific Output Vectors. Finally, FEMAP will ask you to select the nodes or ele-
ments from which to remove the output. If any of the selected Output Vectors contain nodal output, you will be
prompted for nodes. If the Output Vectors contain elemental output, it will also prompt you to select elements. This
command is a useful method of removing output from specific entities, without removing or changing the entire
output vector.
You can view the remaining output on elements while displaying the rest of the model uncontoured by choosing
Contour Options from the Post Options icon on the Post Toolbar. Once the Contour Options dialog box is open,
change the contour type from Nodal to Elemental to create the appropriate display.
8.7.4 Delete, Output, Format...
... removes a specific output format from the FEMAP model. Once again, you are simply prompted for the ID of
the output format to remove, and then asked to confirm that you wish to delete the chosen formats. No other input
is required for this command.
9. Help and Non-Menu
9.1 Help Menu Commands
The Help commands let you find out more about using FEMAP without referring to the printed documentation.
Context Sensitive Help
FEMAP can access the help information in a context-sensitive manner. The context-sensitive help system provides
several different levels of information.
As you move your mouse over the FEMAP menu, toolbars, or toolbox, you will see a one-line description of the
command that you are pointing at appear either in the status bar or the title bar of the FEMAP main window.
If you need more information, just press Shift+F1. The cursor will change to the pointer and question mark shape.
In this mode, if you select a command, FEMAP displays the help information for that command, rather than exe-
cuting the command. If you change your mind, press Esc, to cancel the help mode.
Context-sensitive help can also be accessed while you are in the middle of any command. At any time a dialog box
is displayed, simply press the F1 key to jump to the help information for the current command.
9.1.1 Help Topics
... opens a browser window containing the FEMAP online help. You can also access the online help through the
context-sensitive help (F1).
Note: You can get context sensitive help on any of the dockable panes (Messages window, Entity Editor, Data
Table, or Model Info tree) by clicking inside the pane to make it active and pressing the F1 key. Clicking
inside any graphics window will return the F1 key to bringing up the top-level Help Index, when not in
another command.
Note: In some cases, you must get to the second level of a command for the F1 key to take you to a designated
place in the FEMAP documentation. This often occurs when a single solid is being selected, a generic
windows dialog box is used (open, save as, etc), or a tree structure is involved (For instance: Model,
Analysis). Also commands which do not bring up any dialog box or use a Yes/No box require the use of
Shift+F1 to get to the correct context sensitive help.
9-2 Help and Non-Menu
The HTML-based FEMAP online help system is displayed in browser such as Netscape 4.x or later, or Internet
Explorer 5.x or later. If you dont have one of these browsers, you will need to install one.
The left pane of the browser window is the navigation pane. You can access the help in several different ways:
Contents: click on a plus (+) sign to expand the view of the table of contents. Click on a minus (-) sign to close
the item. Click on a topic to display it in the right pane.
Index: pick a topic, then pick Display.
Search: enter an item in the search field. You can search through one or more books. Pick Go to begin the
search.
If you enter more than one item in the search field, the search finds documents that contain every word entered.
Click the drop-down arrow next to the search field to see a history of the words youve searched for. You can
then select one of the words to perform the same search again.
Favorites lets you create a shortcut to a specific location in the online help. Once the topic is displayed in the
right pane, pick Add to save the location.
To save favorites information on your hard drive, the Java implementation in the online help requires you to grant
special permission. When the security dialog box is displayed, click Yes to permanently grant the permissions
needed to store favorites on your help system. If you click No, the applet fails to load, and the left frame of the help
system appears blank.
9.1.2 Help, Toolbars...
...opens an HTML window that describes the use of the Toolbars for this release of FEMAP. You can choose gen-
eral usage of all the Toolbars, customization information about the Toolbars, or information on each individual
Toolbar.
9.1.3 Help, Dockable Panes...
...opens an HTML window that describes the use of the Dockable Panes for this release of FEMAP. You can choose
general usage of all the Dockable Panes or information on each individual Dockable Pane.
9.1.4 Help, Analysis
...opens an HTML window that describes the use of NX Nastran for this release of FEMAP. There is also a general
information about different types of analysis which can be performed with FEMAP and NX Nastran together.
9.1.5 Help, Whats New
...opens an HTML window that describes the new features for this release of FEMAP.
9.1.6 Help, Examples
...opens the HTML-based FEMAP Examples. These examples teach new users the basics of working with FEMAP.
9.1.7 Help, Using Help...
... describes how to use the FEMAP Online Help.
9.1.8 Help, Programming
... opens an HTML window containing the FEMAP API (Applications Programming Interface) reference guide for
this release of FEMAP.
9.1.9 Help, Basic Language
... opens a Windows Help window containing a reference to the programming language used in the API Program-
ming dockable pane. This menu item will be grayed out unless the API Programming pane is open in FEMAP.
9.1.10 Help, Tip of the Day
... opens the Tip of the Day dialog box.
Help, FEMAP on the Web 9-3
9.1.11 Help, FEMAP on the Web
... opens an internet browser and takes you directly to the FEMAP website.
9.1.12 Help, Technical Support
... contains several options involved with technical support such as:
opens an internet browser and takes you directly to the UGS GTAC website.
opens an internet browser and allows you to request a webkey needed to attain technical support via the UGS
website.
opens an internet browser and takes you directly to an on-line library of answers to FAQs and other known
issues in the Solution Database.
opens an internet browser and takes you to the UGS News Server.
opens an internet browser and allows you to create and track and incident report (IR) via the UGS website.
opens an internet browser and allows you to upload a file for technical support via the UGS website. ().
opens an internet browser and allows you to download the latest version of FEMAP via the UGS website.
9.1.13 Help, About...
... tells you more information about your FEMAP software, and your current FEMAP session. You can use this
command to determine your FEMAP software revision level and serial number. About also provides general infor-
mation about your computer, and Windows environment. This includes: system and math coprocessor type, the
current Windows operating mode, and the amount of free/contiguous memory that is available.
For systems that require a security device, you can also access that device through the Security button in the About
dialog box. This capability allows us to upgrade your FEMAP license over the phone. It is especially important if
you have a timed, or limited-node license for FEMAP, or if you are leasing FEMAP. If you need to update your
license, give us a call for more information on using this capability.
For network systems, the Security option provides a method to define the path to the network license file. You also
will be able to see the number of licenses available for each module and which users have the licenses checked out.
You can also check the options that are currently enabled for your license by selecting the Options button.
9.2 Non-Menu Commands
This section describes commands that are not shown on the FEMAP menus. You can only execute these commands
using the assigned keystrokes.
9.2.1 Previous Command...
... is similar to Previous Menu. It uses the information that FEMAP remembers to automatically execute the last
command that you chose from the menu. You can use this command to bypass the FEMAP menu any time that you
want to repeat the previous command.
9.2.2 View, Quick Options...
... displays a dialog box so you can quickly control the display of various entities. This is the same as choosing the
View Options command and pressing the Quick Options button.
9.2.3 Dialog Function Keys
... pressing these function keys manipulates the model view when a dialog box is open. Also, F1 brings up context
sensitive help.
Here is a list of what each function key does when a dialog box is open.
Note: An IR will need to be opened and you must have corresponded with GTAC in order to use the upload
option or your file may not get to the correct person in the GTAC organization
Note: Your IP address must be valid and recognized by the Webkey system for this option to be used correctly
Alt+F10
Ctrl+Q or Shift+F6
9-4 Help and Non-Menu
F1 - Context sensitive help - recognizes which dialog box is open and takes you directly to the correct spot in the
documentation concerning that particular command.
F2 - Magnify Up - adjusts the scale of your model in the active view by increasing the size of the model to 110%
each time the button is pressed. When Shift+F2 is pressed, increases size in view to 150%, Ctrl+F2 increases size to
200%, and Alt+F2 autoscales the visible model.
F3 - Magnify Down - adjusts the scale of your model in the active view by decreasing the size of the model by
110% each time the button is pressed. When Shift+F3 is pressed, decreases size in view by 150%, Ctrl+F3
decreases size by 200%, and Alt+F2 autoscales the visible model.
F4 - Box Zoom - simultaneously updates the scale and centering of your model in the active view. The update is
based on a rectangular area that you define relative to the window.
F5 - Pan Left - adjusts the position of your model within a view by moving it to the left by 10% of the total model
size, without changing the magnification or orientation. When Shift+F5 is pressed, moves model to the left by
25%, Ctrl+F5 moves model to the left by 50%, and Alt+F5 moves the model to the left by 100%.
F6 - Pan Right - adjusts the position of your model within a view by moving it to the right by 10% of the total
model size, without changing the magnification or orientation. When Shift+F6 is pressed, moves model to the right
by 25%, Ctrl+F6 moves model to the right by 50%, and Alt+F6 moves the model to the right by 100%.
F7 - Pan Up - adjusts the position of your model within a view by moving it up by 10% of the total model size,
without changing the magnification or orientation. When Shift+F7 is pressed, moves model up by 25%, Ctrl+F7
moves model up by 50%, and Alt+F7 moves the model up by 100%.
F8 - Pan Down - adjusts the position of your model within a view by moving it down by 10% of the total model
size, without changing the magnification or orientation. When Shift+F8 is pressed, moves model down by 25%,
Ctrl+F8 moves model down by 50%, and Alt+F8 moves the model down by 100%.
F9 - Rotation Direction - toggles the direction of rotation from positive to negative every time the button is pressed.
F10 - Rotate about X - rotates the model 10 degrees about the X-axis of the view (positive or negative depending
on the Rotation Direction toggle) every time the button is pressed. When Shift+F10 is pressed, rotates model by 10
degrees about the X screen axis, Ctrl+F10 rotates model by 90 degrees about the model axis, and Alt+F10
rotates model by 90 degrees about the screen axis.
F11 - Rotate about Y - rotates the model 10 degrees about the Y-axis of the view (positive or negative depending on
the Rotation Direction toggle) every time the button is pressed. When Shift+F11 is pressed, rotates model by 10
degrees about the Y screen axis, Ctrl+F11 rotates model by 90 degrees about the Y model axis, and Alt+F11
rotates model by 90 degrees about the Y screen axis.
F12 - Rotate about Z - rotates the model 10 degrees about the Z-axis of the view (positive or negative depending on
the Rotation Direction toggle) every time the button is pressed. When Shift+F12 is pressed, rotates model by 10
degrees about the Z screen axis, Ctrl+F12 rotates model by 90 degrees about the Z model axis, and Alt+F12
rotates model by 90 degrees about the Z screen axis.
For more info on these commands, see Section 6.2.4, "View, Magnify...", Section 6.2.5, "View, Zoom...", Section
6.2.8, "View, Pan...", and Section 6.2.1, "View, Rotate Menu"
10Index
A
ABAQUS contact 4-79, 4-90, 4-91, 4-95
abort
listing 7-112
redraw 6-41
acceleration 4-47, 6-16
accuracy 6-24, 8-39
ACIS 2-3, 2-4, 2-6, 2-32, 3-42
active
constraint set 4-69
group 6-45
load set 4-42
output set 8-33
set 7-89
add to group 6-46
align 3-71, 4-114
align view
to coordinate system 6-32
to vector 6-32
to workplane 6-32
all views 6-1, 6-2, 6-41
analysis set 4-132
analysis set manager 4-129
analysis sets 4-71
angle 7-95
animation 6-6, 8-2, 8-3, 8-19, 8-20, 8-22, 8-29
anisotropic 4-12, 4-15
ANSYS contact 4-79, 4-95
anti-symmetry 4-70
arc 3-8
angle-center-start 3-10
angle-start-end 3-9
center-points 3-10
center-start-end 3-8
chord-center-start 3-10
points 3-10
radius-start-end 3-8
start-end-direction 3-11
area of element 7-97
arrow 8-20
ASK( ) 7-56
aspect ratio 6-24, 7-102
auto transparency 6-21
automatic 4-76
automatic meshing
hexahedral 5-5, 5-22
line elements 5-16, 5-50
planar elements 5-17
tetrahedral 5-28
autoscale 6-32
AVI 2-17
axes
view 6-23
XY plot 8-28
axisymmetric 4-36
B
backfaces 6-19
background color 6-2
bar 4-6, 4-24
beam 4-6, 4-25
offsets 4-7
orientation 4-7
section property generator 4-25
shapes 4-25
viewing shape 6-14
beam diagram 8-3, 8-26
beam releases 4-7
BEEP( ) 7-56
bending element 4-34
bias 5-36
blend 3-18
body load 4-44
bolt preload
region 4-101
border 6-2
boundary conditions
boundary mesh 5-17
boundary surface 3-24, 3-45
map to surface 3-74
multi-surface 3-26
break 3-62
C
cache 2-30
calculate output 8-34, 8-36, 8-37, 8-38
cascade 6-40
cases
CATIA 2-4
center of gravity 7-96
center view 6-32, 6-35, 6-36
centroidal smoothing 5-52
chamfer 3-47, 3-65
check
free edge 7-131
free face 7-131
chord 3-10
circle
center 3-12
center and points 3-14
concentric 3-14
diameter 3-12
points on arc 3-14
point-tangent 3-13
radius 3-12
tangent to curves 3-13
two points 3-12
cleanup 3-54
clipboard 2-16, 2-20
clipping 6-55, 6-57
coordinate 6-55
I-2
screen 6-56
clipping planes 6-24
coincident
curves 7-98
elements 7-101
load 7-108
nodes 7-99
points 7-98
color 2-20, 2-39, 3-73, 4-116, 7-89
background 6-2
contours 8-23
compare output 8-49
complex output 8-46
composite layup 4-37
compressing your model 2-20
concentric 3-14
condense group 6-46
cone 3-33, 3-42
connection 5-40
connector 7-119
property 7-118
region 7-118
connection property
group 6-59
list 7-118
connection region
group 6-59
connections 4-76, 4-78
list 7-118
connector
group 6-60
list 7-119
constraint
check 7-107
copy 4-74
curve 4-74
draw 6-8, 6-18, 8-3
equation 4-71
expand 4-74
geometry 4-72
group 6-62
list 7-125, 7-126
nodal 4-70
on face 4-71
permanent 4-126
point 4-74
set 4-69
surface 4-74
constraint definition
list 7-125
contact
segment/surface 4-79, 4-95
context sensitive help 9-1
context sensitive menus
select toolbar 7-73
continuous lines 3-6
contour 6-6, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-22, 8-23, 8-25
data 8-7
data conversion 8-9
levels 8-11
options 8-8
palette 8-24
vector plot 8-12, 8-27, 8-28
conversion factors 7-91
convert
element type 5-61, 5-65, 5-66, 5-67
geometry 2-4
loads to output 8-42
output 8-46
output to loads 8-37
units 7-90
coordinate system 4-125
align 3-72, 4-114
creating 4-1
draw 6-12
group 6-60
list 7-120
move 3-68, 3-69, 4-109, 4-110
rotate 3-70, 3-71, 4-112, 4-113
coordinates 3-7
copies 2-14
copy 3-59
constraint 4-74
element 5-54
geometry 3-57
group 6-46
loads 4-65
materials 4-12
node 5-53
picture 2-16
property 4-23
radial 3-58
report format 8-59
rotate 3-59
scale 3-58
copying messages 2-20
corners 8-44
creating a view 6-37
criteria 6-6, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-22, 8-23, 8-25, 8-26
curve
accuracy 6-24
align 3-72
boundary 3-25
break 3-62
chamfer 3-65
coincident 7-98
combine 3-19
creating 3-1
custom mesh size 5-8
draw 6-13
extend 3-62
fillet 3-64
from surface 3-20
group 6-59
join 3-63
length 7-95
list 7-114
mesh 5-16
mesh size 5-2
move 3-70
rotate 3-70, 3-71
trim 3-61
curve from surface
intersect 3-20
parametric 3-21
project 3-20
project along vector 3-21
curved beam 4-6, 4-31
curved tube 4-24
customizing FEMAP 2-12
cut 8-10
cutting plane 8-10 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
I-3
cylinder 3-33, 3-42
cylindrical coordinates 5-38
D
damping 4-62
DEF( ) 7-57, 7-60
default mesh size 5-1
defaults 2-20
define output 8-34
definition coordinate system 4-125
deformed 6-6, 8-2, 8-3, 8-22
scale 8-19
deformed data 8-7
DELAY( ) 7-57
delete 3-75
FEA entities 4-127
group 6-62
nondeletable entities 3-75, 4-127
output 8-60
views 6-37
design optimization 4-103
destination 2-13, 7-130
diameter 3-12
difference from average 8-40
dimetric 6-26
displacement 4-47, 6-16
display options 6-8, 8-18
distance 7-94
distance from plane 7-101
distortion 7-102
distributed load 4-47
divisions 3-74
dockable panes 7-6
api programming 7-47
data surface editor 7-20
data table 7-40
entity editor 7-18
entity info 7-39
messages 7-63
model info tree 7-7
program file 7-51
DOF 4-70
DOF sets
DOF spring 4-6, 4-33
draw 6-41, 6-42
DXF 2-4, 2-6
dynamic analysis 4-61
dynamic cutting plane 8-30, 8-32
dynamic isosurface 8-31
dynamic query 8-49
dynamic rotation 2-24, 6-27
E
ECHO( ) 7-57
ECHOV( ) 7-58
edge members 5-50
edges 6-19
edit 3-72, 4-115
element
adjust plate 4-124
align 4-114
beam warping 4-121
coincident 7-101
copy 5-54
creating 4-4
directions 6-14
distortion 7-102
draw 6-14
draw beam Y-axis 6-15
draw weld diameter 6-15, 6-16
formulation 4-5
group 6-61
line 4-6
list 7-121
material angle 4-4, 4-122
midside node 4-125
modify formulation 4-120
modify material 4-120
modify property 4-120
modify type 4-119
move 4-111
normals 7-107
offsets 4-7, 4-120, 6-14
order 4-125
orientation 4-7, 4-120, 6-14
orientation - bar 4-24
other 4-8
output 8-37
plane 4-7
reflect 5-58
releases 4-7, 4-121, 6-14
reverse line element direction 4-121
reverse normal 4-122
rigid thermal expansion coefficient 4-125
rotate 4-113, 4-114
scale 4-115
shrink 6-19
split quad 4-123
type 4-4
element fill 6-19
element type 4-119
elemental contours 8-8
elemental loads 4-47
ellipse 3-16
embed face 3-53
ENDIF( ) 7-59
enhanced render mode 2-24
envelope 8-38
error estimates 8-39
evaluate group 6-45
EXEC( ) 7-58
exit 2-40
EXIT( ) 7-59
expand output 8-46
explode 3-46
extend 3-62, 3-63
extrapolate output 6-49, 8-44
extrude 3-30, 3-41
curve 5-59
element 5-61
element face 5-65
F
facets 5-47
fail criteria 8-26
feature suppression 5-14
features 6-6, 6-49, 8-2
FEMAP neutral 2-6, 2-7
I-4
file
export 2-6
import 2-3
new 2-1
notes 2-8
open 2-1, 2-2, 2-3
page setup 2-10
print 2-12
save 2-2
save as 2-3
timed save 2-3
fill 6-19
fill output 8-34
filled edges 6-19
fillet 3-46, 3-64
finding entities 6-42
fluid 4-12
Fluid Region 4-98
fonts 6-12
footers 2-10, 2-12
force 4-47, 6-16
format 8-57, 8-60
free DOF 4-70
free edge 6-6, 6-18, 7-131, 8-2
free face 6-6, 6-18, 7-131, 8-2
freebody display 8-13
convert to load 4-68
frequency response 4-61, 8-46
function 4-104
list 7-127
G
gap 4-6, 4-33
generate
groups 6-49
geometric loading 4-53
expand 4-58
FEA attachment 4-54, 4-56, 4-119
midside node adjustment 2-32, 4-56, 4-58
non-constant 4-55, 4-57
on curve 4-53
on point 4-53
on surface 4-56
geometry
constraint 4-72
copy 3-57
curve 3-1
delete 3-75
import 2-3
line 3-1
list 7-113
meshing attributes 5-10
modify break 3-62
modify chamfer 3-65
modify extend 3-62
modify fillet 3-64
modify join 3-63
modify trim 3-61
move 3-66
point 3-1
project 3-66
radial copy 3-58
rotate to 3-70
global axes 6-23
global origin 6-23
GOTO( ) 7-59
graphics boards 2-20
grid 6-24
group 6-43
add 6-46
clipping 6-55
commands 6-44
condense 6-46
converting output 8-38
copy 6-46
delete 6-62
draw 6-8, 8-3
generate 6-49
layer 6-58
list 7-128
rules 6-55, 6-60
group operations
add related 6-49
booleans 6-46
element type 6-51
entities on layers 6-53
evaluate 6-45
generate 6-49
material 6-51
move to layer 6-54
output 6-51
peel 6-54
property 6-51
select mesh 6-55
select model 6-54
superelements 6-53
H
hardware problems 2-20
headers 2-10, 2-12
heat transfer 6-16
heat transfer analysis 4-64
help 9-1
hidden line 6-6, 6-19, 7-131, 8-2
horizontal lines 3-2
hyperbola 3-17
hyperelastic 4-12, 4-15
I
I-DEAS 2-4
IDI 2-4
IF( ) 7-59
IGES 2-3, 2-4
included angle 3-9, 3-10
increment 7-89
inertia 7-96
interfaces 2-32, 2-34
ACIS 2-6
analysis 2-5, 2-7
analysis results 2-5
DXF 2-6
FEMAP neutral 2-6, 2-7
notes 2-8
Parasolid 2-6
STEP 2-6
VRML 2-6
internal angles 7-102
isometric 6-26
isosurface 8-3, 8-11, 8-27
I-5
dynamic 8-31
isotropic 4-12, 4-13
J
join 3-63
JPEG 2-17
justification 7-94
K
keystrokes 7-54
L
labels 6-12
laminate 4-35
laplacian smoothing 5-52
layer 3-73, 4-116, 6-5, 6-43, 6-58
commands 6-43
create 7-92
list 7-113
layout 2-13
layup
list 7-123
leaving FEMAP 2-40
legend 6-23, 8-19
contour 8-25
contour/criteria plot 8-25
XY plot 8-28
length 7-94
levels 8-23
library 2-20, 2-37
layup 4-41
material 4-13
property 4-24
report 8-56, 8-59
view 2-22
light source 6-21
limits 8-26
line 3-1
angle to curve 3-4
at angle 3-4
continuous 3-6
coordinates 3-7
horizontal 3-2
midline 3-4
offset 3-7
parallel 3-3
perpendicular 3-3
point and tangent 3-5
points 3-7
project points 3-2
rectangle 3-6
tangent 3-5
vectored 3-8
vertical 3-2
line elements 4-6, 5-38
linear combinations 8-36, 8-37
linear elements 4-125
link 4-6
link element 4-31
list 7-112
connection property 7-118
connections 7-118
connector 7-119
constraint 7-125, 7-126
constraint definition 7-125
coordinate system 7-120
curve 7-114
destination 7-130
element 7-121
formats 8-60
formatted output 8-57
function 7-127
geometry 7-113
group 7-128
layer 7-113
layup 7-123
load 7-124
load definition 7-123
material 7-122
model info 7-130
nodal changes to data table 8-54
node 7-120
output 7-127, 8-48
point 7-114
property 7-122
query 8-48
region 7-118
results to data table 8-53
solid 7-117
standard output 8-56
summary to data table 8-50
surface 7-115
text 7-113
unformatted output 8-55
variable 7-112
view 7-128
volume 7-116
xy data 8-60
load 4-42, 4-126
analysis options 4-59
body 4-44
bolt preload 4-59
check 7-108
coincident 7-108
combine 4-65
copy 4-65
create output 8-42
distributed 4-47
draw 6-8, 6-16, 6-24, 8-3
dynamic 4-61
element 4-47
expand 4-58
from freebody 4-68
from output 4-65, 4-66
geometry 4-53
group 6-62
heat transfer 4-50
heat transfer analysis 4-64
list 7-124
nodal 4-45, 4-47
non-constant 4-46, 4-55, 4-57
nonlinear 4-59
nonlinear force 4-52
on curve 4-53
on face 4-47, 4-48
on point 4-53
on surface 4-56
phase 4-126
pressure 4-48 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
I-6
temperature 4-50
load definition
list 7-123
logarithmic plots 8-28
LS-DYNA3D contact 4-79, 4-95
M
magnify 6-32, 6-33, 6-34
Main window 2-1
MARC contact 4-79, 4-92, 4-94, 4-95
margins 2-11
mass element 4-8, 4-36
mass matrix 4-36
mass properties 7-96
master requests and conditions 4-132
material 4-12, 4-120
angle 4-122
anisotropic 4-15
copy 4-12
creep 4-21
fluid 4-16
function dependent 4-18
group 6-61
hyperelastic 4-15
isotropic 4-13
list 7-122
Nastran Solution 601 hyperelastic 4-16
nonlinear 4-19
orientation 4-4, 4-122
orthotropic 4-14
other types 2-37, 4-16
phase change 4-22
thermo-optical 4-22
max difference 8-40
measure 7-94, 7-95
angle 7-95
membrane 4-34
memory management 2-30
merge
curves 7-98
nodes 7-99
points 7-98
mesh
attributes 5-10
between 5-34
bias 5-36
boundary surface 3-24, 3-26
build remeshing regions 5-48
cleanup slivers 5-47
connection 5-40
control 5-1
convert facets 5-47
copy 5-53
corners 5-34
edge members 5-50
edge removal 5-48
edit remeshing regions 5-49
extrude 5-59
feature suppression 5-14
generation options 5-47
geometry 5-16
hard points 5-8, 5-10
hexahedral 5-5, 5-22
interactive editing 5-44
length spacing 5-3
matching 5-7
mesh remeshing regions 5-50
modify 5-44
multi-surface 3-26
nongeometry 5-34
project onto solid 4-108
radial copy 5-56
refine 5-45
reflect 5-58
region 5-39
revolve 5-65
rotate 5-57
scale 5-56
smoothing 5-52
splitting 5-44
surface 5-17
surface meshing performance 3-26
surface method 5-12
sweep 5-67
tetrahedral 5-28
transition 5-42
unrefine 5-45, 5-46
update 5-45
update/remesh 5-46
mesh size 5-1, 5-59, 5-65
curve 5-2
draw 6-13
on solid 5-5
on surface 5-3
point 5-2
surface matching 5-7
messages 2-13, 2-19, 2-20
metafiles 2-10
MFLUID 4-98
midline 3-4
midplane 3-36
midside nodes 4-125
midsurface 3-36
assign mesh attributes 3-38
automatic 3-37
cleanup 3-37
extend 3-37
generate 3-37
intersect 3-37
single 3-37
single in solid 3-36
trim to solid 3-37
trim with curve 3-37
model accuracy 8-39
model colors 2-39
model data 6-8, 8-3
model information 7-130
modify 3-72, 4-115
associativity 4-119
element type 4-119
renumber 3-73, 4-117
moment 4-47, 6-16
move 3-71, 4-114
move by 3-69, 4-110
move to 3-68, 4-109
MPC 4-71
MSG( ) 7-61
multiple windows 6-1, 6-2, 6-37, 6-39, 6-40, 6-41
I-7
N
NE/NASTRAN contact 4-79, 4-95
neutral file 2-7
new windows 6-37
next ID 7-89
nodal constraint 4-70
nodal contours 8-8
nodal load 4-45
nodal output 8-37
node
align 4-114
coincident 7-99
creating 4-3
definition coordinate system 4-126
draw 6-13
group 6-60
list 7-120
move 4-110, 4-111
output coordinate system 4-126
permanent constraints 4-126
project onto curve 4-107
project onto plane 4-108
project onto surface 4-108
project onto vector 4-108
rotate 4-113
scale 4-115
superelement ID 4-126
nondeletable 3-75, 4-127
nonisotropic material 4-122
nonlinear analysis 4-59
nonlinear force 6-16
normal 7-107
O
offset 3-35
offset curves 3-7, 3-19
offsets 4-7, 4-120
on-line help 9-1
OPT( ) 7-61
OPTGO( ) 7-62
optical 4-22
optimization 4-103
options 6-8, 6-10, 8-18
orientation 4-7, 4-120
orientation angle 4-122
origin 6-23
original render mode 2-24
orthotropic 4-12, 4-14
other 4-12
output 4-65, 4-66, 8-32
active vector commands 8-32
combine 8-36, 8-37
compare 8-49
complex 8-46
convert 8-46
define 8-34
error estimates 8-39
expand 8-46
extrapolate 6-49, 8-44
from loads 8-42
list 7-127, 8-48
process data 8-35
transform 8-43
worst-case 8-38
output format 8-57
output requests
output sets 8-33
output vector 8-33
P
page setup 2-10
palette for contour 8-24
pan 6-36
dynamic 6-27
parabola 3-16
parabolic elements 4-7, 4-125
parallel lines 3-3
parameters 3-23, 3-39, 7-89
node 4-3
Parasolid 2-3, 2-4, 2-6, 2-32, 3-42
pass criteria 8-26
permanent constraints 4-126, 6-13
perpendicular 3-3
perspective 6-22
phase 4-126
phase change 4-22
pictures 2-16, 2-17, 2-18
pinned 4-70
planarity 7-100
plane 3-33, 6-57
plane element 4-34
plane strain 4-34
plate 4-7, 4-34
plot 6-41
plot only element 4-6, 4-37
plot style 6-6, 8-2
point
align 3-72
coincident 7-98
creating 3-1
draw 6-13
group 6-58
list 7-114
mesh 5-16
mesh size 5-2
move 3-69, 3-70
project onto curve 3-66
project onto plane 3-67
project onto surface 3-67
project onto vector 3-67
rotate 3-70, 3-71
pointer 7-94
post overview 8-1
preferences 2-20
interfaces 2-34
user interface 2-27
pressure 4-48, 6-16
previous command 9-3
previous zoom 6-35
primitives
cylinder,cone,tube 3-33, 3-42
ellipse 3-16
hyperbola 3-17
parabola 3-16
plane 3-33
I-8
rectangle 3-6
solid 3-45
sphere 3-34, 3-42
print 2-10, 2-12
listings 2-13, 7-130
printer setup 2-15
Pro/E 2-4
process
output data 8-35
program files
commands 7-56
keystrokes 7-54
window (dockable pane) 7-51
project 3-66, 4-107
onto plane 7-101
property 4-23, 4-120
axisymmetric 4-36
bar 4-24
beam 4-25
bending 4-34
copy 4-23
curved beam 4-31
curved tube 4-24
DOF spring 4-33
gap 4-33
group 6-62
laminate 4-35
line 4-24
link 4-31
list 7-122
mass 4-36
mass element 4-36
membrane 4-34
other elements 4-36
plane 4-34
plane strain 4-34
plate 4-34
plot only 4-37
rigid 4-37
rod 4-24
shear 4-34
slide line 4-37
solid 4-36
spring 4-31
stiffness matrix 4-36
tube 4-24
volume 4-36
Q
quad 4-123
quad meshing 5-37
query 8-48
quick options 6-10, 9-3
R
radius 3-8, 3-12, 3-46
random analysis 4-61
rebuild 2-20
recovering data 2-20
rectangle 3-6
rectangular coordinates 5-38
redraw 6-41
refine mesh 5-44
reflect 3-59
element 5-58
geometry 3-59
node 5-58
regenerate 6-41
region 5-39
list 7-118
releases 4-7
remesh 5-44
render 2-24
render mode 6-6
renumber 3-73, 4-117, 6-63
replaying pictures 2-18
report format 8-60
report output 8-55
reports 2-20, 7-112
resolution 2-14
revolve 3-31, 3-41
curve 5-65
element 5-66
element face 5-67
rigid element 4-8, 4-37
rod 4-6, 4-24
rotate 3-71, 4-114
dynamic 2-23, 6-27
element 5-57
geometry 3-59
node 5-57
view 2-20, 2-23, 6-26
rotate by 3-70, 4-113
rotate to 3-70, 4-112
rotor region 4-102
ruled surfaces 3-30
ruler 7-5
rules 6-55
S
SAT 2-4
saving messages 2-20
saving pictures 2-17
saving your model 2-2, 2-3
scale 3-72, 4-114
deformed plot 8-19
geometry 3-58
load 4-126
view 6-32
scratch files 2-30, 2-31
section cut 6-19, 8-3, 8-10, 8-30, 8-32
section property generator 4-25, 7-97
security device 9-3
select 6-6, 8-2
selecting messages 2-19
set 4-42
setting 6-21
setup 2-20
printer 2-15
shading 6-21
shape 6-14
shear panel 4-34
shell 3-47, 3-50
show 6-42
shrink 6-19
SILENT( ) 7-62
size 3-72, 4-114
sketch 3-24
skip deformation 8-7
I-9
slice 3-52
slice along face 3-53
slice match 3-53
slide line 4-37
smoothing 5-52
snap to 7-4
solid
activate 3-42
align 3-72
booleans 3-50
chamfer 3-47
cleanup 3-54
draw 6-20
embed 3-51
embed face 3-53
explode 3-46
extrude 3-43
fillet 3-46
group 6-59
intersect 3-52
list 7-117
mass properties 7-96
mesh 5-22, 5-28
mesh size 5-5
move 3-70
pattern 3-44
primitives 3-44, 3-45
revolve 3-45
rotate 3-70, 3-71
shell 3-47, 3-50
slice 3-52
slice along face 3-53
slice match 3-53
stitch 3-46
surface 3-45
thicken 3-48
Solid Edge 2-4
solid elements 4-36, 6-54
solid modeling 3-42
sphere 3-34, 3-42
spherical coordinates 5-38
spline
blend 3-18
drawing 3-15
ellipse 3-16
equation 3-18
hyperbola 3-17
midway 3-19
multiple curves 3-19
offset 3-19
parabola 3-16
points 3-17
project 3-15
tangent 3-18
split curve 3-62
split quad 4-123
spring 4-6, 4-31
standard reports 8-56
STEP 2-3, 2-4, 2-6
stereo 6-22
Stereolithography 2-4
stiffness matrix 4-8, 4-36
stitch 3-46
stress transformations 8-43
style 6-6, 8-2
sum forces 7-108
surface 5-7
accuracy 6-24
align 3-72
aligned curves 3-29
background 3-23
boundary 3-24, 3-45
convert 3-35
corner 3-28
creating 3-23
cylinder 3-33
divisions 3-74
draw 6-13
edge curves 3-28
extend 3-37
extrude 3-30
fill 6-19
group 6-59
imprinting 3-20
list 7-115
measure area 7-95
mesh 5-17
mesh divisions 5-10
mesh hard points 5-10
mesh size 5-3
midsurface 3-36
move 3-70
offset 3-35
parameters 3-23
plane 3-33
revolve 3-31
rotate 3-70, 3-71
ruled 3-30
single 3-37
single in solid 3-36
sphere 3-34
sweep 3-31
trim to solid 3-37
trim with curve 3-37
surfaces 4-78
sweep 3-31
mesh 5-67
symbols 6-24
symmetry 4-70
T
tangent 3-5, 3-11, 3-13, 3-18
taper 7-102
temperature 4-50, 4-66, 6-16
text 7-93
draw 6-13
group 6-58
list 7-113
thermo-optical 4-22
thicken 3-48
thickness 6-14
tile 6-39
timed save 2-3
title
group 6-45
load set 4-42
output 8-33
postprocessing 8-19
window 6-2
XY plot 8-28
toolbars 7-65
I-10
circles 7-83
constraints 7-86
cursor position 7-79
curve edit 7-85
curves on surfaces 7-84
custom tools 7-88
entity display 7-68
format 7-80
lines 7-82
loads 7-86
mesh 7-85
model 7-65
panes 7-79
post 7-86
select 7-68
solid 7-81
splines 7-84
surfaces 7-82
view 7-66
view orient 7-68
tools 7-89
trace plots 8-12, 8-15, 8-22
transform output 8-43
transient analysis 4-61
transition meshing 5-42
translate 2-4
Transparency 4-116
trim 3-61, 3-63
trimetric 6-26
tube 3-33, 3-42, 4-6, 4-24
U
undeformed model 8-22
undo 2-31, 7-1
unformatted output 8-55
Unigraphics 2-4
unit conversion 7-90
unzoom 6-35
update 3-72, 4-115
user-defined contour palette 8-24
V
variable 7-92
list 7-112
VDA 2-4
vector 6-6, 8-2, 8-20
vectored lines 3-8
velocity 4-47
vertical lines 3-2
view 6-1, 6-37
align 6-32
autoscale 6-32
axes 6-23
center 6-35
close 6-39
default 2-22
delete 6-37
free edge 7-131
free face 7-131
hidden line 7-131
library 2-22
list 7-128
magnify 6-33
new 6-37
options 6-8, 8-18
pan 6-36
quick options 6-10, 9-3
rotate 6-26
style 8-2
zoom 6-34, 6-35
viewing layers 6-5
visible layers 6-5
volume
align 3-72
background 3-38
between 3-41
corners 3-39
cylinder 3-42
draw 6-13
extrude 3-41
group 6-59
list 7-116
mesh 5-27
move 3-70
parameters 3-39
revolve 3-41
rotate 3-70, 3-71
sphere 3-42
surfaces 3-40
volume clipping 6-58
volume elements 4-8
volume of element 7-97
VRML 2-6
W
warping 7-102
windows
tabs 6-40
title bar 6-40
workplane 6-23, 7-2
worst-case output 8-38
X
X_T 2-4
XDB results file 2-5
XY data 8-17
XY Plot 6-6
XY plot 8-2, 8-16, 8-28, 8-29
list data 8-60
log-log 8-28
semi-log 8-28
Z
zoom 6-34, 6-35
dynamic 6-27

Femap: Commands

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Femap: Commands

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

FEMAP

Windows 2000, Win-

is the torsional moment.

Anda mungkin juga menyukai